JP2020189191A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably setting operation of movable means.SOLUTION: Movable means includes a plurality of visual confirmation parts configured to visibly recognize a light emission mode from a back side from a front. A back side of the movable means includes light emission means including a light emission part allowing the visual confirmation parts to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode. A specific movable pattern is determined, at least by movable pattern determination means, as a movable pattern in which the movable means can be moved by movable control means. When the movable pattern determination means determines the specific movable pattern, the visual confirmation part allows the light emission part to emit light with positioning of the movable part in a light emission position as a position opposing the light emission part of the light emission means as an opportunity, and light emission control is performed at least by light emission control means with a specific light emission pattern emitted when the movable means is moved from the light emission position by a specific quantity. Thus, an effect, where operation of the light emission means and the movable means can be suitably set, is provided.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include variable means operated by a motor or the like in the configuration. Some of such game machines can perform a wide variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable means.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-012194

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, with the diversification of the variable means, there is a possibility that it becomes difficult to appropriately move each variable means in the variable means having a complicated configuration.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suitably setting the operation of the variable means.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is movable within a predetermined movable range, and has a movable means having a plurality of viewing portions configured so that the light emitting mode from the back side can be seen from the front side. A light emitting means provided on the back side of the movable means and having a light emitting unit capable of emitting light from the back side of the movable means in a predetermined light emitting mode, and a movable control means capable of movablely controlling the movable means. A movable pattern determining means capable of at least determining a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern to be moved by the movable control means, and when the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining means, the visual recognition unit of the light emitting means With a specific light emitting pattern, the light emitting part is made to emit light when the movable part is positioned at a light emitting position which is a position facing the light emitting part, and is turned off when the movable means is moved by a predetermined amount from the light emitting position. It is provided with at least a light emission control means capable of controlling light emission.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the movable means is composed of a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the movable pattern determining means has the specific movable pattern as the movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern. One movable pattern can be determined from a plurality of movable patterns including at least one, and when the predetermined movable pattern is determined, the light emitting means has a predetermined light emitting pattern different from the specific light emitting pattern. The light emission is controlled.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the movable means is moved within a predetermined movable range. The movable means is configured to have a plurality of visual recognition portions configured so that the light emitting mode from the back surface side can be visually recognized from the front surface. On the back side of the movable means, a light emitting means having a light emitting portion capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emitting mode is provided. The movable means is movably controlled by the movable control means, and at least a specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining means as the movable pattern to be moved by the movable control means. When the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining means, the light emitting portion is made to emit light when the movable portion is positioned at the light emitting position where the visual recognition portion opposes the light emitting portion of the light emitting means, and the movable means emits light. The light emission is controlled by at least the light emission control means in a specific light emission pattern that emits light when it is moved by a predetermined amount from the light emission position.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the light emitting unit from emitting light when the visual recognition unit and the light emitting unit are displaced from each other, so that the appearance quality of the movable means can be improved when the light emitting means emits light. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the light emitting means and the movable means can be preferably set.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, since the movable means is composed of a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis, the movable means rotates. During this period, the light emitting position and the arrangement other than the light emitting position are alternately repeated. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be operated with a good appearance each time at a light emitting position where it may be arranged a plurality of times.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has the following effects. That is, in the movable pattern determining means, one movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining means from a plurality of movable patterns including at least a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern. When the predetermined movable pattern is determined, the light emitting means is controlled to emit light by the light emitting control means in a predetermined light emitting pattern different from the specific light emitting pattern.

As a result, it is possible to control light emission with different light emission patterns according to the movable pattern, so that the appearance of the movable means can be further changed according to the light emission pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily determine from the appearance which movable pattern is being moved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view disassembled perspective view of a board surface and a board surface lower unit. It is a front view disassembled perspective view of a board lower part unit. (A) is a front view of the base member, the first out port, the second out port, the lower left plate member and the lower right plate member, and (b) is the base member in line XVb-XVb of FIG. 15 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of the lower left plate member. It is a front perspective view of the vertical movement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the vertical movement unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a vertical operation unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a vertical operation unit. It is a front view of the vertical movement unit. It is a front view of the vertical movement unit. It is a front perspective view of the compound operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the expansion / contraction effect device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the expansion / contraction effect device. (A) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (A) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (A) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. It is a front view of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (A) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (A) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (A) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (A) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. It is a graph which shows the distance from the reference horizon of a protrusion. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a tilting operation unit and a sliding operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a tilting operation unit and a sliding operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a slide operation unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a slide operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a tilting operation unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a tilting operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the effect member and the 2nd drive device. (A) and (b) are front views of a transmission member and a torsion spring. (A) and (b) are front views of a transmission member and a torsion spring. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the swing angle of the effect member with respect to the swing angle of a transmission member. It is a front view of the tilting operation unit and the sliding operation unit. It is a front view of the tilting operation unit and the sliding operation unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the transmission member and the torsion spring in the second embodiment. It is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. (A) and (b) are front views of the transmission member and the torsion spring in the third embodiment. (A) is a rear perspective view of the transmission member according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the moving contact member. (A) and (b) are rear perspective views of the transmission member, and (c) and (d) are top views of the transmission member. It is a front schematic diagram schematically showing the main body member of an effect member. It is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. It is a front view of the composite operation unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. (A) is a partial front view of the rotating arm member according to the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a partial top view of the rotating arm member in the direction of arrow LXIXb of FIG. 69 (a). ) Is a partial front view of the rotating arm member. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the switching device. (A) and (b) are front views of the composite operation unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the tilting operation unit according to the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the structure of the various counters, the special symbol holding ball storage area, the special symbol holding ball execution area, and the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first random number table set in the ROM of the main control unit in the first control example, and (b) is set in the ROM of the main control unit in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the 1st hit type selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed the 2nd hit random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram set in the fluctuation pattern selection table. It is the figure which showed the variation pattern table for a jackpot schematically, (c) is the figure which showed the variation pattern table for deviation (normal) typically, and (d) is the variation pattern for deviation (probability variation). It is a figure which showed the table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a figure which showed typically the contents of the ball entry effect selection table in the 1st control example. It is a block diagram which shows typically the electrical structure of the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the work RAM of the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the correction information table in the first control example. is there. It is a figure which showed the set coordinates of the display area in the 1st control example. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode when the power is turned on in the first control example. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A in the first control example, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface B. It is a figure which showed typically the display data table in the 1st control example. It is a figure which showed typically the transfer data table in the 1st control example. It is a figure which showed typically the drawing list in the 1st control example. This is an example of a timing chart of a variation display mode during a time-saving game in the first control example. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed on the third symbol display device during the time reduction in the first control example. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed on the third symbol display device during the time reduction in the first control example. It is a timing chart in which the time effect in the 1st control example is set. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the time setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern reception process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the synchronous effect management process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the extension effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the specific time effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ball entry effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the special effect correction process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the round number command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the ball entry effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the specific time production command processing to be performed. (A) is a flowchart showing the effect mode change command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop command processing executed by. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the effect information correction process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) to (b) are explanatory views about the control of the stepping motor in the 1st control example. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing whether or not detection by the slide position detection sensor is possible for each positional relationship between the slide position detection sensor and the light-shielding plate. It is a figure which showed the positional relationship between the tilting origin sensor, and the sensor shielding part when the effect member is in the origin position. (A) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the tilting origin sensor and the sensor shielding portion when the effect member swings to the left in the front view, and (b) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the effect member and the sensor shield portion. It is a figure which showed the positional relationship between the tilt origin sensor and the sensor shielding part at the time of swinging motion to the right side of view. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario table defined in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is the operation scenario table in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the included slide operation table, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the tilting operation table included in the operation scenario table in the second control example. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the initial operation table included in the operation scenario table in the second control example, and (b) is a ROM of the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the specified content of the specified swing area table schematically. It is a figure which showed the correspondence relationship between the number of operation steps of a slide operation in 2nd control example, and the swingable direction of an effect member. It is a figure which showed the correspondence relationship between the number of operation steps of a swing operation, and the number of operation steps of a slide operation in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the origin return processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the accessory operation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the execution command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the initial operation process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the initial operation process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the additional operation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the tilt direction setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the abnormality detection processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the slide operation process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 3rd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 3rd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the timing effect selection table defined in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the pressing period table defined in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table for the early stage difficulty level 3 included in the pressing period table in the third control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the sub display device during the timing effect, and (b) shows an example of the display contents when the player succeeds in pressing the frame button in the timing effect. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the player fails to press the frame button in the timing effect, and (b) is a case where a high-difficulty effect mode is selected as the timing effect. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the sub-display device in. (A) is a diagram showing the display contents of the sub display device when the player achieves the quota in the timing effect, and (b) is a sub when the player fails to achieve the quota in the timing effect. It is a figure which showed the display content of a display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the change of the mode of the variation effect which the timing effect was set in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the timing effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the mid-stage setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the final stage setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the notification mode setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary lighting unit in the fourth control example, and (b) is a side view of the rotary lighting unit in the fourth control example. FIGS. (A) to (C) are diagrams illustrating a lighting state in which the appearance quality deteriorates when the rotating member is in a low-speed rotating state in the fourth control example. (A) to (c) are diagrams illustrating a lighting state with good appearance when the rotating member is in a low-speed rotating state in the fourth control example. FIGS. (A) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of lighting control when the rotating member is in a high-speed rotating state in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the lighting control processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the low-speed processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the rotation speed identification process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the acceleration processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the high-speed processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine when the rotary lighting unit is in the retracted position in the 4th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine when the rotary lighting unit is in the overhang position in the 4th control example.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 57, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. It is configured by assembling a mouth 63, a first winning mouth 64, a second winning mouth 640, a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device 650, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is inside. It is attached to the back surface side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in a game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2. Further, the first variable winning device 65 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base member 310 of the board surface lower unit 300 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), jackpot B (16R time reduction jackpot), and jackpot C (2R probability variation time reduction no jackpot) are provided. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "16R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state (probability variation state) of a special symbol after a jackpot of 16 rounds and the time is shortened for a normal symbol. "Probability variation with time saving no jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state (probability variation state) of a special symbol after a jackpot of 2 rounds, but the time reduction state of a normal symbol is not given. In addition, the "16R time-saving jackpot" shifts to a low-probability state of a special symbol after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, and is in a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in this embodiment). It is a big hit.

In addition, the "high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol" indicates a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, a so-called probability fluctuation state (probability change state), in other words, a special gaming state. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. The high-probability state (probability variation state) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of a normal symbol (second symbol), which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state of the special symbol" refers to a time when the probability is not changed, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the probability change state. Further, the time saving state (time saving medium) of the normal symbol means a state of the game in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, the normal state of the pachinko machine 10 is a state in which neither the probabilistic state of the special symbol nor the time saving state of the normal symbol is increased (the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) are not increased. ).

During the time saving state of the normal symbol, not only the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is compared with the normal symbol. And a long opening time is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the time saving state, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The electric accessory 640a may be changed to increase the number of times it is opened more than usual. In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is not changed during the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the electric combination is performed once. At least one of the number of times the object 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the time saving state of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the normal symbol (No. 1) It may be changed so that only the hit probability of 2 symbols) is increased as compared with the normal medium.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while synchronizing the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays a normal symbol (second symbol) triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of the above is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 12-inch liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, three symbol sequences of upper, middle, and lower. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol). Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the time saving state of the normal symbol, the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal state. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the time saving state.

It should be noted that the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the time saving state by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit in the time saving state. When the state is easy, the time required for the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set shorter than in the normal state in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is kept constant regardless of the gaming state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. It is configured in. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition to the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37A, It may be performed using a part of 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, balls to the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" The symbol "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize. On the other hand, the electric accessory 640a is provided in the second winning opening 640, and it is difficult to open the electric accessory 640a in the normal time (when the time is not shortened), so that the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 640. Is in a difficult state.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory 640a The ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory 640a is opened by passing through the through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit by getting a lot of chances of a big hit lottery by winning a prize in the second winning opening 640 while making the state.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a first specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. Further, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the left side of the variable display device 80, and a second variable winning device 650 having a circular shape having a size similar to that of the other winning openings 63, 64, 640 is arranged in a substantially central portion thereof. A specific winning opening 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the special winning openings 65a and 650a, which are normally closed, are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning openings 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid 65b (for driving the opening / closing to the right with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis). (See FIG. 15, only the outer shape is shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid 65b is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate toward the front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 is driven to open and close to the left side with a front-view triangular-shaped opening / closing plate arranged on the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a and the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with a large opening solenoid (not shown). The second specific winning opening 650a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the small opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the left to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the second specific winning opening 650a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

In the present embodiment, since it is possible to make the second variable winning device 650 win a ball by hitting left, the trouble of switching between hitting left and hitting right each time the game state changes is eliminated. can do.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are set for a predetermined time. During the opening of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is set for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning openings 65a and 650a. A gaming state that is released a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state. Further, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are not limited to one, and one or more or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or on the lower right side. Not limited to the left side of the variable display device 80, for example, it may be below the first winning opening 64.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 314 and a second out port 315. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are discharged through the first out opening 314 or the second out opening 315 (not shown). You will be guided to the road. The first out opening 314 is arranged on the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, while the second out opening 315 is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64. That is, the second out port 315 is arranged on the opposite side of the first out port 314 with the first winning opening 64 in between.

Therefore, a ball that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side (right side in FIG. 2) of the first winning opening 64 in front view is the inner rail 61. Alternatively, it is flowed down along the inclination of the outer edge member 73 and guided to the ball discharge path through the second out port 315, while being guided to the lower end (inner rail 61) of the game area on the left side of the first winning opening 64 in the front view. The reached ball flows down along the inclination (curvature) of the inner rail 61, and is guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 314.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 102) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 101) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 100) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a vertical drive motor 431, an opening / closing drive motor 466, and other drive motors 531, 561, 631, 661, 751.

Here, various drive motors (up / down drive motor 431, opening / closing drive motor 466, and other drive motors 531, 561, 631, 661, 751) will be described. These various drive motors are composed of, for example, known stepping motors, and a plurality of these various drive motors are provided in association with each accessory in order to operate each accessory mounted on the pachinko machine 10. These various drive motors are driven by a corresponding motor control IC (motor driver). Specifically, a command including at least the number of rotation steps, the rotation direction (positive direction or negative direction), and the rotation speed from the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 to the motor control IC (motor driver). Is output. The control IC (motor driver) drives various corresponding drive motors based on the output command. The motor control IC (motor driver) may be a single IC whose operation can be set for a plurality of drive motors, or a plurality of motor control ICs (motor drivers) may be provided. It may be configured to operate drive motors corresponding to different accessories. When adopting a motor control IC (motor driver) whose operation can be set for multiple drive motors, the command for transmitting the number of rotation steps, etc. includes information for specifying the type of drive motor. You can output it.

Here, the operation of the drive motor will be described by taking the vertical drive motor 431 as an example. When the control IC (motor driver) operates the vertical drive motor 431 based on the set command, the operation is executed for the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 every time the operation of one step is executed. A signal (execution signal) for notifying that the signal has been made is output. From this execution signal, the MPU 221 can grasp the progress of the set operation. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a step counter (not shown). This step counter is provided for each accessory, and is a counter that counts how many steps each accessory has operated from the origin (evacuation) position. That is, the origin (evacuation) position is set as the position of 0 step, and the value is updated by 1 each time the execution signal from the control IC is received. More specifically, the value is added by 1 each time the accessory moves one step in the direction (positive direction) from the origin (evacuation) position to the end point (extension) position. In addition, the value is subtracted by 1 each time one step is performed in the direction (negative direction) from the end point (overhang) position to the origin (evacuation) position. Therefore, the operating position of each accessory can be easily grasped based on the value of the step counter.

Here, the origin position refers to a specific arrangement set for each accessory, and is a position where the origin shifts when the power is turned on. Specifically, each accessory is provided with an origin sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not it is at the origin position, and if the origin sensor is not turned on when the power is turned on, the origin sensor is turned on. The accessory is changed until it is detected (that is, various drive motors are driven). This origin position serves as a reference position for the operation of each accessory. The above-mentioned step counter is reset to 0 when the accessory reaches the origin position by returning to the origin (that is, when the origin sensor detects on). Then, as described above, the value of the step counter is updated by 1 based on the execution signal output from the motor control IC.

Next, an example of control of various drive motors (here, vertical drive motor 431) by a motor control IC (motor driver) will be described with reference to FIG. 135. In order to make the explanation easier to understand, a stepping motor that rotates 90 degrees in one step (that is, makes one revolution in four steps) will be described as an example, but the actual vertical drive motor 431 has one step. It is configured so that the rotation angle can be set more finely. Specifically, it is configured to rotate once in one step.

First, FIG. 135A is a diagram showing an outline of a vertical drive motor 431 composed of a stepping motor. The vertical drive motor 431 is configured to excite a portion corresponding to the excitation control data by sending excitation control data from the voice lamp control device 113 to the corresponding motor control IC. Specifically, the motor control IC is excited by the excitation control data composed of four-digit binary numbers corresponding to "A, B, C, D" shown in FIG. 135 (a). Specifically, if the excitation control data corresponding to each part (that is, any of A, B, C, and D) of the vertical drive motor 431 is "1", the excitation is performed, and the excitation control data is "0". If so, it will not be excited. For example, if the excitation control data is "1100", A and B are excited and C and D are not excited. This excitation control data is defined in an excitation table (see FIG. 135B) provided in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 includes an excitation counter used to select and set one excitation control data from a plurality of excitation control data defined in the excitation table (see FIG. 135 (b)). It is provided. This excitation counter can be updated one by one in the positive direction starting from "0", and when the value is updated after the value of the excitation counter becomes "3", the value returns to "0". It has become. Each time the excitation counter value is updated, the corresponding excitation control data is read and set. When the excitation control data is set, the excitation of each part based on the excitation control data is immediately performed (that is, the vertical drive motor 431 operates without a time lag from the setting of the excitation control data). In addition, the excitation counter can also be updated in the negative direction. That is, the value can be updated in the order of "0"-> "3"-> "2"-> "1"-> "0" starting from "0". When updating in the negative direction, the rotation direction of the vertical drive motor 431 is opposite to that in the case of updating in the positive direction. The direction in which the excitation counter is updated (whether it is in the positive direction or the negative direction) and the update frequency of the excitation counter are predetermined for each type of accessory for which the operation is set. The maximum value of this excitation counter changes according to the number of steps of the drive motor. Specifically, for example, in the case of a drive motor that rotates once in one step (that is, it takes 360 steps for the motor to rotate once), the excitation counter is updated in the range of "0" to "359". It becomes a loop counter.

Next, a specific example of excitation control data for exciting each part of the vertical drive motor 431 will be described with reference to FIG. 135 (b). FIG. 135 (b) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between an excitation table in which excitation control data is defined and a state of a vertical drive motor 431 excited based on the excitation control data defined in the excitation table. As shown in FIG. 135 (b), excitation control data is defined for each value of the excitation counter in the excitation table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), as sequence data corresponding to the vertical drive motor 431, excitation control of "1100, 0110, 0011, 1001" in the order of excitation counters "0" to "3". Each data is specified. Further, when "1100", which is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "0", is set, the positions A and B of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited. Further, when "0110", which is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "1", is set, the positions B and C of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited, so that the excitation counter value is "0". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state of. Further, when "0011", which is the sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "2", is set, the positions C and D of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited, and the excitation counter value is "1". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from. Further, when "1001", which is the sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "3", is set, the positions A and D of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited, so that the excitation counter value is "2". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state of. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 135, the vertical drive motor 431 rotates 90 degrees clockwise each time the value of the excitation counter is updated by one in the positive direction. As described above, when the value of the excitation counter is updated in the negative direction, the vertical drive motor 431 rotates counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

As described above, the control of the vertical drive motor 431 has been described with a simplified operation model, but in the vertical drive motor 431 actually used in the present embodiment, the excitation counter is set to 1 for each step (that is, the excitation counter is set to 1). It can be rotated once (each time it is updated). That is, when each accessory is changed, the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 as many times as the number of steps to be changed, and the excitation control data corresponding to the excitation counter is set each time the excitation counter is updated. Each accessory can be changed accurately.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by setting a command for the motor driver, various drive motors can be driven at the rotation speed, the rotation direction, and the number of rotation steps specified by the command. Therefore, it is possible to realize various production operations using the accessory.

In addition, each accessory has a unique operation pattern set according to the effect. This operation pattern defines a command to be set for the motor control IC (motor driver) described above for each elapsed time.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the operation of the various drive motors is completed based on the command set for the motor driver based on the number of steps in which the various drive motors are operated. That is, has the operation set for each drive motor completed based on the number of steps set by the command and the number of times the execution signal output from the motor driver is received each time the operation of one step is set by the motor driver? It is judged whether or not, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to measure the elapsed time from setting a command for operating various drive motors and determine whether or not the operation of various drive motors is completed based on the elapsed time. ..

Here, the control of the vertical drive motor 431 and the open / close drive motor 466, which are coordinatedly controlled in the present embodiment, will be described. Details will be described in the first control example described later, but in the present embodiment, the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 is used as an effect (falling accessory scenario) in which the vertical motion unit device (falling accessory) 400 is movable. The lens member 460 and the door member 470 are moved in the downward direction (falling direction) of the front view by the drive of the vertical drive motor 431. In the effect (falling accessory scenario), after the lens member 460 and the door member 470 are moved in the downward direction (falling direction) in front view, the door member 470 is opened by the opening / closing drive motor 466, and the door member 470 is opened. There is a production that is not done.

The voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment is used as an opening / closing drive motor 466 for opening / closing the door member 470 when the effect of opening the door member 470 is executed in the effect (falling accessory scenario). On the other hand, control is performed so that the excitation for all the positions A to D is turned off (energization stop control) (see S1706 in FIG. 108). When the excitation for all positions is off, the static torque (so-called detent torque) of the opening / closing drive motor 466, that is, the torque for keeping the door member 470 in the closed state is minimized. In this case, the vertical drive motor 431 is driven, the slide member 450 is moved in the falling direction, and when the movement is completed, an inertial force downward in front view is generated on the door member 470.

Here, in the present embodiment, the torque (static torque) for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is configured to be smaller than the inertial force generated on the door member 470. As a result, when the slide member 450 is moved in the downward direction (falling direction) in front view without driving the opening / closing drive motor 466 to open the door member 470, the inertial force acting on the door member 470 causes the door. The member 470 can be opened. That is, when the door member 470 finishes moving together with the slide member 450 in the front view downward direction (that is, when the arm member 440 and the lens member 460 are arranged in the overhanging position), the door member 470 is viewed from the front. The door member 470 is opened by the action of the inertial force in the direction (that is, the force that tries to continue the movement in the downward direction of the front view). Therefore, the power consumption for driving the opening / closing motor 466 can be reduced.

If the inertial force generated in the door member 470 due to the movement of the slide member 450 is not sufficient to open the door member 470, the opening / closing drive motor 466 may be driven to open the door member 470. In this case, by using the inertial force generated in the door member 470 as the slide member 450 moves, the drive torque of the opening / closing drive motor 466 can be reduced, the power consumption can be reduced, and the opening / closing drive motor can be reduced. The size of 466 can be reduced.

Further, depending on the effect pattern, the case where the opening / closing motor 466 is driven to open the door member 470 and the case where the opening / closing motor 466 is not driven to open the door member 470 may be switched. For example, when an effect pattern with a high degree of expectation is executed, an opening / closing motor 466 is driven to open the door member 470 in order to surely open the door member 470, while when an effect pattern with a low degree of expectation is executed, opening / closing is performed. The door member 470 may be opened without driving the motor 466. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the door member 470 is not opened in spite of the highly expected effect pattern.

Further, when the vertical drive motor 431 is driven and the slide member 450 is not moved in the falling direction, that is, when no inertial force acts on the door member 470, the torque (rest torque) for keeping the door member 470 in the closed state. ) Is configured to provide sufficient torque to keep the door member 470 closed. Therefore, it is not necessary to excite the opening / closing drive motor 466 to keep the door member 470 in the closed state even during the period when the falling accessory scenario is not executed, and the power consumption can be reduced. If the torque (static torque) for keeping the door member 470 in the closed state is insufficient to keep the door member 470 in the closed state, for example, a magnet is attached to the tip of the door member 470. By providing the door member 470, the torque required to maintain the door member 470 in the closed state may be reduced.

On the other hand, when the effect that the door member 470 is not opened is executed as the effect (falling accessory scenario), the opening / closing drive motor 466 for opening / closing the door member is excited and controlled so as not to rotate. Specifically, by continuing to excite the corresponding parts (A to D) of the above-mentioned excitation table (FIG. 135 (b) based on the current excitation counter) for a certain period of time, the opening / closing drive motor 466 stops. A torque to maintain the position (so-called holding torque) is generated, and the door member 470 is maintained in the closed state. As a result, the slide member 450 is produced even though the door member 470 is not opened. It is possible to reliably prevent (suppress) the door member 470 from being opened due to the momentum (inertial force) when the door member is moved in the falling direction.

If the opening / closing control of the door member 470 and the opening / closing state of the door member 470 controlled by the opening / closing control do not match, the effect executed thereafter may be changed.

Specifically, when the effect based on the falling accessory scenario in which the door member 470 is opened is executed, the opening / closing drive motor 466 is controlled to stop energization, and then the door member 470 is opened. The lens member 460 located on the back side of the door member 470 becomes visible. Then, the player can visually recognize the characters "super hot" displayed on the third symbol display device 81 through the lens member 460. By visually recognizing the display of the third symbol display device 81 through the lens member 460, the display is enlarged and displayed, and the player can feel the display more impressively.

On the other hand, when the door member 470 is not opened even though the opening / closing drive motor 466 is controlled to stop energization, the character "super hot" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Although the door member 470 is opened and the lens member 460 can be visually recognized, it gives the impression that a problem has occurred that the door member 470 is not opened. Therefore, in the production, the door member 470 detects that the door member 470 has not been opened although the power supply stop control of the opening / closing drive motor 466 is controlled by the origin sensor or the like capable of detecting the state. After that, the effect is changed so that the characters "super hot" are not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, even if the door member 470 is not opened, the character "super hot" is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can be made to recognize that the effect that the door member 470 is not opened is executed. , It is possible to prevent the impression that the above-mentioned problem has occurred. In this case, the employee may be notified that the problem has occurred by turning on a specific LED or notifying the hall computer through an external output terminal.

Further, as a scenario in which the lens member 460 and the door member 470 of the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 are dropped, a scenario in which the lens member 460 and the door member 470 are moved from the retracted position to the overhanging position in one operation, and a plurality of operations (for example, 2) A scenario for moving from the retracted position to the overhanging position may be provided. As a result, even if the door member 470 is not opened after that even though the opening / closing drive motor 466 is controlled to stop energization, even if the door member 470 is opened by the second operation, the door member 470 is opened twice. It is possible to make the player feel that the door member 470 moves from the retracted position to the overhanging position by the operation, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, in the falling accessory scenario in which the door member 470 is opened and the falling accessory scenario in which the door member 470 is not opened, the drive speed of the vertical drive motor 431 is changed to change the inertial force acting on the door member 470. It may be configured as follows. Specifically, in the falling accessory scenario in which the door member 470 is opened, the drive speed of the vertical drive motor 431 is increased so that the inertial force acting on the door member 470 is increased, while the door member 470 is opened. In the falling accessory scenario, the drive speed of the vertical drive motor 431 is reduced so that the inertial force acting on the door member 470 is reduced. As a result, the opening and closing of the door member 470 can be controlled with high accuracy. It is not limited to changing the drive speed of the vertical drive motor 431 according to the scenario of the falling accessory, and even in the same falling accessory scenario, for example, when moving upward and when moving downward. The drive speed of the vertical drive motor 431 may be changed.

Further, depending on the effect pattern, the case where the opening / closing motor 466 is driven to open the door member 470 and the case where the opening / closing motor 466 is not driven to open the door member 470 may be switched. For example, when an effect pattern with a high degree of expectation is executed, an opening / closing motor 466 is driven to open the door member 470 in order to surely open the door member 470, while when an effect pattern with a low degree of expectation is executed, opening / closing is performed. The door member 470 is opened without driving the motor 466. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the door member 470 is not opened in spite of the highly expected effect pattern.

An RTC (real-time clock) 292 is connected to the input / output port 225 in this embodiment. This RTC292 is used as a timekeeping means for timekeeping and is provided with a dedicated internal power source (battery in this embodiment), so that the timekeeping can be performed even when the pachinko machine 10 is not supplied with power. You can continue. Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured, the same time information can be acquired by the plurality of pachinko machines 10 by setting the same time (for example, the current time) in the time measuring means. ..

With this configuration, apart from the normal production, a special mode of production (time) according to the elapsed time on a regular basis (5 minutes every hour) regardless of the game status of each pachinko machine 10. The effect) can be executed synchronously on a plurality of pachinko machines 10. In addition, during a specific time (every 1 minute elapses from the start of the time effect) during the period in which this time effect is executed (displayed) (hereinafter referred to as the time effect period), the specific time effect suggesting the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Is executed. Specifically, in the specific time effect (countdown effect), a total of 4 countdown characters ("3", "2", "1", "0") are in order for 3 seconds (12 seconds in total). After being displayed, a character image (such as a girl's image) is displayed for 8 seconds for a total of 20 seconds, and the display (effect) mode is set according to the elapsed time from the start of the effect. For example, at the start time of the effect (0 seconds after the start of the effect), a display (effect) mode in which "3" is displayed as a countdown character is set. Further, when 6 seconds have passed from the start of the effect, a display (effect) mode in which "1" is displayed as a countdown character is set. In this specific time effect (countdown effect), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state and not in the time saving state (so-called latent probability change state), the countdown characters (“3, 2, 1 ... ") is displayed in red (displayed in black if it is not in the latent probability change state). Details will be specifically described in the first control example.

Here, the state in which the game state is the probability change state and not the time saving state (so-called latent probability change state) is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, and the game state in which the transition to the special game state is easy (that is, the game). It is a favorable condition for the person). On the other hand, since the latent probability change state is not the time saving state, the hit probability of the normal symbol is the same as the normal state, and as described above, when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state. It is difficult to win the second prize opening 640. In this case, as in the normal state, the ball is fired toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory 640a so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"). ), It is advantageous for the player to get many chances of big hit lottery by winning the first winning opening 64 and aim to become a big hit. In this way, the latent probability change state is the same operation (game method) as the normal state except that the probability of becoming a big hit as the internal state of the pachinko machine 10 is increased, so that the player can change the current game state. It is difficult to determine whether it is in the normal state or the latent probability change state. Further, as will be described in detail later, in the latent probability change state, the same effect as in the normal state is selected and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can display on the third symbol display device 81. From the displayed effect, it is difficult to determine whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent probability change state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the specific time effect executed when there is a latent probability change state in the time effect period, the displayed countdown characters ("3, 2, 1, ...") Are usually It is displayed in a different color (red) than in the state. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the gaming state is a latent probability changing state which is an advantageous state for the player in the specific time production. As a result, the player can be interested in the production content of the specific time production, and the player's interest can be improved.

In addition, in order to improve the accuracy of timekeeping by the timekeeping means (RTC), a correction means (GPS, radio clock, etc.) for correcting time information from the outside may be provided.

In addition, the time information is corrected every time power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time it is started) by a correction means (for example, GPS, radio clock, etc.) for correcting the time information from the outside. May be good. As a result, the time information by the timing means can be updated every time the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time it is started) without providing a dedicated internal power source (battery in the present embodiment). , Manufacturing cost and maintenance cost of timekeeping means (replacement cost due to deterioration of internal power supply, etc.) can be reduced. The correction of the time information by the correction means is not limited to each time the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time it is started up), and may be executed periodically (for example, every hour).

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

Here, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 will be described. The third symbol is composed of the main symbols of the numbers "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the variation display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variation display is performed. It is configured to generate a jackpot after it is over. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A" or "big hit C", the variable display in which the main symbols of the odd numbers "1, 3, 4, 7, 9" are aligned and stopped is displayed. Will be. Further, in the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are aligned.

The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, the upper 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the other lower 1/3 is the advance notice effect. It is a sub-display area Ds that displays a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The substantially center of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first winning opening 64, and the small area Ds2 is. The small area Ds3 is an area for displaying the advance notice effect image, and the small area Ds3 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the second winning opening 640. Is.

On the actual display screen, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbols displayed in the center, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbols are visibly displayed, so a total of nine main symbols are displayed at the maximum. In some cases. In the sub-display area Ds, one "●" symbol is displayed for one reserved ball, and the reserved symbol corresponds to a maximum of four reserved balls for each of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. Is displayed. That is, a maximum of eight reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In the present embodiment, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same reserved symbol (design), but the design is not limited to this, and a different symbol (for example, the special symbol 1 is designated as a "●" symbol. The symbol 2 may be configured to be displayed as a white square symbol).

As a result, the reserved balls of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, that is, the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, can be displayed in an easy-to-identify manner. In addition, since the display mode of the reserved ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 is displayed differently depending on the hit type of the normal symbol, the player can easily determine that the reserved ball has occurred in a long time. be able to.

In the present embodiment, in the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the above-mentioned main symbol, reserved symbol, etc., character display, notice effect display of characters, etc., and total The display of the number of fluctuations is displayed as appropriate. When the reserved symbol is not displayed, it means that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entered into the first winning opening 64 is set to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds3, the number of reserved balls is displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the amount. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

A sub-display device 690 is connected to the display control device 114. The sub-display device 690 is a display device (for example, a liquid crystal panel) having a resolution different from that of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, the resolution of the third symbol display device 81 is (horizontal 800 pixels (pixels) x vertical 600 pixels (pixels)), and the resolution of the sub-display device 690 is (horizontal 400 pixels (pixels) x vertical). It is 300 pixels (pixels)) (see FIG. 82). The resolutions of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 may be different from those described above, and the resolution of the sub display device 690 and the resolution of the third symbol display device 81 are the same. It may be present, or the resolution of the sub display device 690 may be higher than that of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the display system that can be adopted as the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 is not limited to the system using the liquid crystal panel, and any display (for example, PDP system, CRT system, organic system) is used. EL method, MEMS shutter method, etc.) may be adopted.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 81, but the display control device 114 in the present embodiment includes the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 with respect to the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. Display control is performed using one image data (in this embodiment, image data having a resolution of 1200 pixels (pixels) in width × 600 pixels (pixels) in height) including the images to be displayed in each. Of the one image data, the image data (area of 800 pixels (pixels) in width × 600 pixels (pixels) in height) of the portion corresponding to the resolution of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image data (area of 400 pixels (pixels) in width × 300 pixels (pixels) in height) of the portion corresponding to the resolution of the sub-display device 690 in the remaining portion is displayed on the sub-display device 690. The remaining data (area of 400 pixels (pixels) in width × 300 pixels (pixels) in height) is unused.

As a result, it becomes easy to synchronize the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, and the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 deviate from each other. It is possible to suppress the trouble that occurs.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 12. First, the accommodation structure of each unit 300 to 700 in the rear case 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7.

FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200 with the disassembled operation unit 200 viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 7 shows a state in which the combined operation unit 500 is mounted on the rear case 210.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, one side (front side of the paper in FIG. 6) of the operation unit 200 is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The back case 210 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 211a in the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

The operation unit 200 includes a vertical operation unit 400, a combined operation unit 500, a tilt operation unit 600, and a slide operation unit 700 in the internal space of the rear case 210, and is configured as one unit.

Specifically, the composite operation unit 500 is arranged in the upper right portion of the region formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7). With respect to the state shown in FIG. 7, the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 are arranged below the region formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210. Further, with respect to the state shown in FIG. 7, the vertical operation unit 400 is arranged on the front side of the composite operation unit 500 in a laminated state, and is housed in the back case 210 (see FIG. 5).

As described above, in the present embodiment, other operation units (for example, the vertical operation unit 400) are arranged in a laminated state in which the other operation units (for example, the vertical operation unit 400) are overlapped on the front side with respect to the predetermined operation unit (for example, the composite operation unit 500). Therefore, in front view, a predetermined operating unit can be shielded by another operating unit.

In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is formed of a light-transmitting material and the operation unit arranged on the back side of the game board 13 is visible to the player, a predetermined operation unit. Only the necessary part of the above can be made visible to the player, and the other part can be shielded from the player by another operation unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member that is shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the entire member is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. ..

Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, the outline of the operation modes of the vertical operation unit 400, the combined operation unit 500, the tilt operation unit 600, and the slide operation unit 700 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 8 to 10, FIGS. 5 to 7 will be referred to as appropriate.

8 to 10 are front views of the operating unit 200. In FIG. 8, the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) of the vertical movement unit 400 is arranged at the overhanging position, and in FIG. 9, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 26) of the composite operation unit 500 is in the extended state. The formed state is shown in FIG. 10, in which the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged substantially in the center in the width direction.

As shown in FIG. 8, the vertical movement unit 400 operates the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the arm member 440 is retracted above the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 440 is lowered, and the lens member 460 (see FIG. 18) is in the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. ) Is placed.

As shown in FIG. 9, in the composite operation unit 500, the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 22) is arranged at an overhanging position so as to project downward, and the front plate member 546 is located at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, The front plate member 546 is arranged in the extended state arranged in the front surface of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. It is possible to form a reduced state (see FIG. 5) that is retracted upward. In the reduced state shown in FIG. 5, the front plate member 546 is retracted above the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2).

As shown in FIG. 10, in the tilting operation unit 600, the support column member 720 (see FIG. 47) of the slide operation unit 700 is slid to the left and right to move the evacuation position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhang shown in FIG. It is possible to move to and from the position. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the tilting operation unit 600 is retracted to the right outside of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and is visually recognized by the player inside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 10, the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2).

Note that FIG. 10 shows a state in which the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 (see FIG. 46) are opened so that the internal sub-display device 690 can be visually recognized. That is, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the state of FIG. 10, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) visually recognized through the opening 211a and the sub-display inside the tilting operation unit 600 are displayed. Both the effect displayed on the device 690 and the effect can be visually recognized by the player.

Each of these operation units 400 to 700 is formed so as to be able to operate independently, and is arranged in a stacked state as described above. Therefore, among the operation units 400 to 700 With respect to those arranged in different layers, even if the operating member projects inward of the opening 211a of the back case 210, it can be operated at the same time. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 8 to 10, each of the operation units 400 to 700 can be operated independently, and these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

FIG. 11 is a front view of the operating unit 200. In FIG. 11, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the composite operation unit 500 is in the extended state, and the arm member 440 and the lens member 460 of the vertical operation unit 400 are arranged at the overhanging positions and the door member 470. Is formed in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 11, the front plate member 546 of the composite operation unit 500 is visually recognized through the lens member 460 of the vertical operation unit 400. As will be described later, the lens member 460 is formed with a magnifying lens process, so that the front plate member 546 is magnified.

That is, from the state shown in FIG. 11, the rotating plate 520 (see FIG. 24) of the composite operation unit 500 is swung around the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24), and the front plate member 546 is moved up and down by the vertical operation unit 400. When the lens member 470 is moved to a position separated from the lens member 470 in front view (see FIG. 39), the front plate member 546 is visually recognized in a normal size. As a result, the state in which the front plate member 546 is visually recognized in a normal size and the state in which the front plate member 546 is visually magnified (see FIG. 11) can be switched, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

FIG. 12 is a front view of the operating unit 200. In FIG. 12, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the composite operation unit 500 is in the extended state, the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the retracted position and is in the tilted state, and the tilting operation unit 600 and the front plate member 546 are in the tilted state. The state immediately before the contact with is illustrated. When the tilting operation unit 600 is further tilted, the tilting operation unit 600 and the front plate member 546 are brought into contact with each other. In this case, by swinging the composite operation unit 500 clockwise in front view (see FIG. 39), it is possible to produce an effect as if a force is applied from the tilt operation unit 600 to the composite operation unit 500. (The movements of the units can be associated with each other to create a more complicated effect). As a result, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Next, the board surface lower unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the board surface 13 and the board surface lower unit 300. As shown in FIG. 13, a receiving opening 13a is formed in the lower part of the game board 13 so as to be opened along the lower edge of the inner rail 61 through which the board surface lower unit 300 is inserted.

FIG. 14 is a front exploded perspective view of the lower board unit 300. As shown in FIG. 14, the board surface lower unit 300 is arranged with a base member 310 internally fitted and fixed in the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13 and the base member 310 at the lower left side of the front view, and a ball is inserted into the first out port. The lower left plate member 320 that guides the ball to 314, the lower right plate member 330 that is arranged at the lower right of the front view of the base member 310 and guides the ball to the second out port 315, and the lower left plate that is fastened and fixed to the base member 310 from the front. It mainly includes a front lid member 340 in which the member 320 and the lower right plate member 330 are pivotally supported by the insertion shaft 343.

The base member 310 has a plate-shaped main body portion 311 having a shape substantially equivalent to the shape of the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13 and having a cross-sectional shape slightly smaller than the receiving opening 13a, and the front side of the main body portion 311. A decorative front plate portion 312 formed in a thin plate shape in a covering manner, a movable effect member 313 attached to a substantially central portion in the width direction of the decorative front plate portion 312, and a movable effect member 313 formed on the left side of the front view. The first out port 314, which is a rectangular hole, and the second out port 315, which is a rectangular hole formed on the right side of the front view of the movable effect member 313, are mainly provided.

The movable effect member 313 is provided at the lower edge of the game board 13 in the width direction and is rotated by a drive device (not shown). Here, when the out port is arranged at the lower edge of the game board 13 in the width direction, the movable effect member 313 cannot be arranged at the lower edge of the game board 13 in the width direction. In the present embodiment, the out port is not arranged at the lower edge of the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, and the first out port 314 and the second out port 315 are arranged at positions separated from the center of the game board 13 to the left and right. This makes it possible to secure a space for arranging the movable effect member 313 on the lower edge of the game board 13 in the width direction.

The shapes of the first out port 314, the second out port 315, the left lower plate member 320, and the right lower plate member 330 will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (a) is a front view of the base member 310, the first out port 314, the second out port 315, the lower left plate member 320, and the lower right plate member 330, and FIG. 15 (b) is FIG. 15 (a). It is sectional drawing of the base member 310 and the lower left plate member 320 in line XVb-XVb of). Note that FIG. 15A shows the outer shape of the front lid member 340 fastened and fixed to the base member 310, and the nails formed above the first out port 314 and the second out port 315.

The first out port 314 and the second out port 315 are openings through which balls are discharged from the game area. The formation length of the second out port 315 in the width direction is shorter than that of the first out port 314. The reason will be described later. Further, a guide rib 315a extending in the front-rear direction is formed on the upper inner side surface of the second out port 315. The guide rib 315a makes it possible to suppress the resistance applied to the ball when the ball flowing into the second out port 315 bounces high and collides with the upper bottom surface of the second out port 315. Further, the flow of the balls discharged from the second out port 315 can be adjusted in the front-rear direction, and the variation in the direction of the discharged balls can be suppressed.

Further, the cushioning rib 322 of the lower left plate member 320, which will be described later, is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 13) (see FIG. 15A). As a result, even in the present embodiment in which the vertical width of the game area becomes larger toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the effect of suppressing the bounce of the ball falling on the lower left plate member 320 is not impaired. That is, the closer to the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, the higher the falling height of the ball, so that the impact when the dropped ball collides with the lower left plate member 320 may be large. On the other hand, since the cushioning rib 322 is formed higher toward the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, the cushioning rib 322 bends closer to the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, thereby providing a cushioning effect that softens the impact of dropping. The degree can be increased.

Here, the relationship between the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 and the landing frequency of the falling ball will be described. For example, if the height of the ball landing on the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is high, but the frequency at which the ball reaches that position is extremely low, even if the bounce of the ball is not suppressed, the discharge of other balls is hindered. It may not be. If the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is increased up to this case, the space in the game area is unnecessarily suppressed. Therefore, it is preferable that the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is set not only by the falling height of the ball but also by the relationship between the falling height and the frequency at which the ball lands at that position.

As shown in FIG. 15, the spheres flowing down above the buffer ribs 322 and 332 start flowing down along the paths c1 and c2, and then reach the landing areas z0 to z4 via the plurality of branches b1 to b10. In the following description, the probability that the sphere will flow down is equal (1/2) in the paths c1 and c2, and the probability of branching to the left and right in the branches b1 to b10 is equal (1/2), respectively. To explain. It is assumed that the ball does not flow down from the upper right.

The probability that the ball will reach the landing area z0 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z0, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b5 and reach the route c11. The branch b5 may be reached from the route c1 via the branch b1 or may be reached from the route c2. Therefore, the probability that the sphere will reach the path c11 and the sphere will reach the landing area z0 is 1/8 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 2) of the probability of the sphere flowing down from the path c1. Since it is represented by the sum of the probability of a sphere flowing down from the path c2 1/4 (= 1/2 × 1/2), it is 3/8 (“^” means a power). That is, each probability is the product of the probability that the sphere flows down the paths c1 and c2 1/2 and the number obtained by raising 1/2 by the number of branches b1 to b10 through which the sphere passes before reaching the landing area z0. It is represented by.

The probability that the ball will reach the landing area z1 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z1, the branch b3 flows down the left side to reach the route c15, the branch b4 flows down the left side to reach the route c16, or the branch b6 flows down the right side to reach the route c14. It is necessary to reach the route c13 or flow down the right side at the branch b7 to reach the route c13.

Up to the branch b3, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 can be considered, and since there are three branches before the sphere reaches the path c15, the probability that the sphere will reach the path c15 is 1/16 (=). It is 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 3). Further, up to the branch b4, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 can be considered, and since there are four branches before the sphere reaches the path c16, the probability that the sphere will reach the path c16 is 1/32. (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 4). Further, up to the branch b6, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 can be considered, and since there are three branches before the sphere reaches the path c14, the probability that the sphere will reach the path c14 is 1/16. (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 3).

Up to the branch b7, both the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 and the path c2 can be considered, and the case where there are four branches before the sphere flowing down from the path c1 reaches the path c13 and the case where there are three branches. May exist. There are two branches before the sphere flowing down from the path c2 reaches the path c13. Therefore, the probability that the sphere will reach the path c13 is 3/32 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 4 + 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 3) of the sphere that flows down from the path c1. It is 7/32 because it is represented by the sum of the probability of the sphere flowing down from the path c2 1/8 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 2).

Here, the probability that the ball will reach the landing region z1 is 12/32 because it is the sum of the probabilities that the ball will reach the paths c13 to c16 described above.

The probability that the ball will reach the landing area z2 will be described. The probability that the sphere will reach the landing region z2 can be expressed by the probability that the sphere will reach the path c12, which is equal to the probability that the sphere that has reached the branch b7 will reach the path c13. Therefore, the probability that the ball will reach the landing area z2 is 7/32.

The probability that the ball will reach the landing area z3 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z3, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b9 to reach the route c17, or to flow down the left side at the branch b10 to reach the route c18.

Up to branch b9, only the case where the sphere flows down from path c1 is considered, and since there are six branches before the sphere reaches path c17, the probability that the sphere will reach path c17 is 1/128 (=). It is 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 6). Further, up to the branch b10, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 can be considered, and since there are seven branches before the sphere reaches the path c18, the probability that the sphere will reach the path c18 is 1/256. (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 7).

The probability that the ball will reach the landing area z3 is 3/256 because it is the sum of the probabilities that the ball will reach the paths c17 and c18 described above.

The probability that the ball will reach the landing area z4 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z4, it is necessary to flow down the right side at the branch b10 and reach the route c19. It is assumed that all the spheres that have flowed down on the right side of the branch b10 flow down on the path c19. The probability that the sphere will reach path c19 is equal to the probability that the sphere that has reached branch b10 will reach path c18. Therefore, the probability that the ball will reach the landing area z4 is 1/256 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 7).

From these facts, the ratio of the sphere reaching each landing region z0 to z4 is (z0: z1: z2: z3: z4) = (96: 96: 56: 3: 1). This ratio correlates with the buffer ribs 322 and 332.

For example, when the landing area z1 and the landing area z3 are compared, the height of the spheres falling into the landing areas z1 and z3 is the same, but the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is higher in the landing area z3. It is smaller than z1. This is because the ratio of the ball reaching the landing area z3 is 1/32 of the ratio of the ball reaching the landing area z1. That is, even if the bouncing of the falling ball is not suppressed as much as the landing area z1, there is little possibility that the discharge of the ball will be delayed in the landing area z3. Therefore, in the landing area z3, the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward by reducing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 as compared with the landing area z1.

For example, when comparing the landing area z2 and the landing area z4, the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is longer than the falling distance of the ball to the landing area z2 even though the falling distance of the ball to the landing area z4 is longer. The landing area z2 is larger than the landing area z4. This is because the ratio of the ball reaching the landing area z4 is 1/56 of the ratio of the ball reaching the landing area z2. That is, even if the bouncing of the falling ball is not suppressed as much as the landing area z2, there is little possibility that the discharge of the ball will be delayed in the landing area z4. Therefore, in the landing area z4, the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward by reducing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 as compared with the landing area z2.

In the above description, the probability of branching of the spheres of the branches b1 to b10 is equal to the left and right (1/2), but by changing the width of the nail, the spheres of the branches b1 to b10 can be separated. It is possible to adjust the probability of branching. For example, by making the distance between the nails in the flow path through which the arrow on the left side of the branch b1 passes as small as the diameter of the sphere, the probability that the sphere will flow down along the arrow on the right side at the branch b1 is greater than 1/2. can do. In the other branches b2 to b10, the probability of branching of the sphere can be adjusted in the same manner.

As a result, the frequency with which the sphere reaches the paths c11 to c19 can be adjusted, and the degree of freedom in designing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 can be improved.

Further, the cushioning rib 322 is formed so as to be inclined downward as the upper surface is directed toward the rear (see FIG. 15 (b)). As a result, the ball flow to the first out port 314 can be made faster.

It will be described back to FIG. The lower left plate member 320 includes a long plate-shaped main body portion 321 and a cushioning rib 322 in which thin plates continuously provided in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the main body portion 321 are extended in the front-rear direction, respectively. A connecting front plate 323 formed in a manner of connecting the front surfaces of the 322, a step portion 324 formed by protruding upward at the left end of the main body portion 321 in the front view, and extending from the step portion 324 to the left in the front view. It mainly includes a ball flow rail portion 325 to be formed, and a shaft support hole 326 formed in the front-rear direction at the right end portion of the main body portion 321 in the front view.

The buffer rib 322 is a portion through which the ball toward the first out port 314 passes, and suppresses the vertical rebound of the ball falling in the vertical direction. That is, since the cushioning rib 322 is formed of thin plates that are continuously provided in the left-right direction, when it is hit by a falling sphere, it bends in the thickness direction, so that the impact of the collision can be softened. Further, when the sphere moves on the upper surface of the cushioning rib 322 in the left-right direction, the sphere is caught between the cushioning ribs 322 and the sphere is braked. Further, the height and aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 are increased toward the right side in the front view (inward in the width direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2)).

The connecting front plate 323 improves the strength of the cushioning rib 322 by connecting the cushioning rib 322.

The step portion 324 is a raised portion for dropping the ball flowing down from the ball flow rail portion 325 in the vertical direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent a load in the left-right direction from being applied to the buffer rib 322 from the ball flowing down the ball flow rail portion 325. As a result, it is possible to prevent the buffer rib 322 from being bent in the left-right direction by receiving a load in the left-right direction.

That is, since the cushioning rib 322 is formed from a thin wall portion extending in the front-rear direction, there is a risk of breaking when a load in the left-right direction is applied. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a ball that has a velocity in the left-right direction and rolls on the upper surface of the ball flow rail 325 that may apply a load in the left-right direction to the buffer rib 322 moves up and down from the step portion 324 to the buffer rib 322. It is formed in a manner of falling in a direction. As a result, the position where the ball lands on the buffer rib 322 can be moved to the right in the width direction as the speed in the left-right direction of the ball increases.

Therefore, when the ball lands on the buffer rib 322, the load applied to the buffer rib 322 in the left-right direction can be reduced toward the left (outside) in the width direction. Therefore, as the buffer rib 322 moves to the left in the width direction, the possibility of bending due to a load in the left-right direction of the sphere decreases, and the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 can be made smaller than that to the right in the width direction. .. In this case, since the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 can be formed along the curved surface formed on the lower surface of the game board 13, the buffer rib 322 is arranged as compared with the case where the buffer rib 322 has the same length in the width direction. The position can be lowered.

Here, while keeping the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 constant at the left and right positions in the width direction (in a state where the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 is formed by the same curve as the lower surface of the buffer rib 322), the lower surface of the game board 13 It is also conceivable to form the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 along the curved surface formed in. However, in this case, the arrangement position of the step portion 324 is high, and the arrangement position of the ball flow rail portion 325 formed by inclining downward toward the step portion 324 is also high. In this case, the dead space between the ball flow rail portion 325 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 13) becomes large, and the game area is suppressed.

On the other hand, the larger the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322, the greater the action of reducing the momentum of the ball (deceleration action). Therefore, the cushioning rib 322 is formed in a manner in which the aspect ratio is increased from the vicinity of the step portion 324 toward the center of the game area.

The upper surface of the buffer rib 322 is formed with the same curve as the curve of the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 up to the front of the step portion 324 so as not to affect the formation height of the step portion 324 (in the middle of the buffer rib 322 in the left-right direction). It is also possible that the height is formed to the maximum). However, in this case, the ball that has reached the landing area z1 is prevented from rolling to the left. Therefore, the ball tends to stay in the landing area z1, and it becomes difficult to smoothly discharge the ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the height of the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 does not fluctuate much in the width direction of the buffer rib 322, the ball that has reached the landing region z1 easily rolls to the left (landing region z2 side). Move. Therefore, since the ball can flow to the landing area z2 before the ball stays in the landing area z1, the discharge of the ball can be smoothed.

Further, the step portion 324 has a function of damming the ball flowing down above the buffer rib 322 and flowing to the left. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from bouncing beyond the width of the first out port 314 after colliding with the front lid member 340 (see FIG. 13).

The shaft support hole 326 is a portion through which the insertion shaft 343 of the front lid member 340 is inserted and supported by the shaft.

The lower right plate member 330 includes a long plate-shaped main body portion 331, a cushioning rib 332 in which thin wall portions continuously provided in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the main body portion 331 are extended in the front-rear direction, respectively. A connecting front plate 333 formed in a manner of connecting the front surfaces of the cushioning ribs 332, a recessed portion 324 formed by being recessed downward at the right end of the main body portion 331 in the front view, and the recessed portion 324 to the right in the front view. It mainly includes a ball flow rail portion 335 extending to the center and a shaft support hole 336 formed in the front-rear direction at the left end portion of the main body portion 331 in the front view.

The configuration of the lower right plate member 330 and the configuration of the lower left plate member 320 are common in many parts. That is, the main body 331 is the main body 321, the cushioning rib 332 is the cushioning rib 322, the connecting front plate 333 is the connecting front plate 323, the ball flow rail part 335 is the ball flow rail part 325, and the shaft support hole 336 is the shaft. Since the technical ideas are the same as those of the support hole 326, the description of the common parts will be omitted.

The cushioning rib 332 is formed to have a shorter left and right forming width than the cushioning rib 322. As a result, the left and right forming widths of the second out port 315 can be shortened, and the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward as compared with the first out port 314. It is possible to secure an arrangement space for the large opening solenoid 65b of the winning device 65 (the arrangement position of the first variable winning device 65 can be lowered downward).

Here, the formation width of the buffer rib 332 can be made shorter than that of the buffer rib 322 because the flow path of the ball to the second out port 315 is regulated. That is, as shown in FIG. 14, by disposing the first variable winning device 65 at the upper right of the front view of the second out opening 315, the ball flows into the first specific winning opening 65a when the opening / closing plate is opened. When the opening / closing plate is closed, the ball is dropped vertically downward on the front side of the first variable winning device 65. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down to the second out port 315 from the upper right of the front view. In other words, a non-flow area in which the flow of the ball is restricted is formed in the upper right portion of the second out port 315.

Therefore, the flow direction of the ball to the lower right plate member 330 is limited to the vertical fall and the flow from the width direction (from the ball flow rail portion 335) (the flow from diagonally upper right is restricted). .. Therefore, since there is no inflow of the ball from the diagonally upper right side, the direction in which the ball bounces can be restricted, the forming width of the buffer rib 332 can be narrowed, and the forming width of the second out port 315 can be narrowed. As a result, the arrangement space of the first variable winning device 65 can be secured.

The recessed portion 334 is a recess for bouncing a ball that has flowed down the ball flow rail portion 335. Therefore, the forming width of the recessed portion 334 is set to a width on which the ball can be placed without abutting on the adjacent buffer rib 332.

The ball that has flowed down the ball flow rail portion 335 is dropped onto the recessed portion 334, rebounds when it comes into contact with the upper surface of the recessed portion 334, and falls onto the buffer rib 332. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cushioning rib 332 from being loaded with a load from the width direction, and to prevent the cushioning rib 332 from breaking.

The recessed portion 334 is formed in front of the fastening hole B into which the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the base member 310 to the game board 13 is inserted. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the use of a fastening tool such as a screwdriver when screwing the fastening screw into the fastening hole B in order to fasten and fix the board surface lower unit 300 to the game board 13. That is, the recessed portion 334 has both an effect of preventing the cushioning rib 332 from breaking and an effect of facilitating fastening and fixing of the base member 310.

The front lid member 340 includes a plate-shaped main body 341 having a first winning opening 64 formed at the uppermost portion, an opening 342 having an opening formed in the center of the main body 341 to make the rotation effect member 313a visible. It mainly includes a pair of insertion shafts 343 that are inserted into the shaft support holes 326 and 336.

The main body portion 341 is formed in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the side wall portion limits the flow direction of the ball. That is, the ball that collides with the main body 341 from the right cannot penetrate to the left, while the ball that collides with the main body 341 from the left cannot penetrate to the right.

The insertion shaft 343 is a portion to be inserted into the shaft support holes 326 and 336. Therefore, the diameter of the insertion shaft 343 is formed to be slightly smaller than the shaft support holes 326 and 336.

Next, the vertical operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 21. FIG. 16 is a front perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400. Note that FIGS. 16 and 17 show a state in which the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is arranged at the retracted position.

FIG. 18 is a front exploded perspective view of the vertical operation unit 400, and FIG. 19 is a rear exploded perspective view of the vertical operation unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the vertical movement unit 400 includes a base member 410 having a vertical groove portion 414 that is recessed from the rear side to the front side on the right side of the rear view and the recess is extended in the vertical direction. , The rotary crank member 420 that is rotated around the connecting hole 413 of the base member 410, the drive device 430 that generates the driving force of the rotary crank member 420, and the base member 410 that the driving force is transmitted from the rotary crank member 420. The arm member 440 that swings around the shaft portion 412 of the base member 410 is arranged on the opposite side of the vertical groove portion 414 of the base member 410 and is formed so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in conjunction with the swing of the arm member 440. The slide member 450, the lens member 460 suspended from the sliding hole 443 formed at the tip of the arm member 440, and formed so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in conjunction with the swing of the arm member 440, and the lens member thereof. It mainly includes a pair of door members 470 that are pivotally supported by the 460.

The base member 410 has a main body portion 411 formed in the shape of a long plate on the left and right, and a shaft support hole 442 of the arm member 440 is provided so as to project in a columnar shape from the right end portion of the main body portion 411 toward the front side. A shaft portion 412 to be supported, a connecting hole 413 formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction to connect the rotary crank member 420 and the transmission gear 432, and a main body portion 411 formed from the back side to the front side on the right side in the rear view. It mainly includes a vertical groove portion 414 in which the recess to be formed extends in the vertical direction, and a recessed portion 415 that is recessed from the front to the back side on both the left and right outer sides of the vertical groove portion 414.

The upper and lower groove portions 414 are portions in which the expansion / contraction effect device 540 of the composite operation unit 500 is housed on the back surface side in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). As will be described later, in the composite operation unit 500, the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is suppressed as the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves toward the contracted state. Therefore, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is swung to cause the vertical groove portion 414. It is prevented from colliding with the left and right inner surfaces. The recessed portion 415 is a portion where the slide guide portion 452 of the slide member 450 is guided.

The rotary crank member 420 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 421 and a sliding protrusion 422 that is projected in a columnar shape from one end of the main body portion 421 to the front side and is inserted into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440. Mainly includes an engaging portion 423 that is engaged with the fitting portion 432a of the transmission gear 432 and makes it impossible for the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420 to rotate relative to each other.

When the sliding protrusion 422 is inserted into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440 and rotated, the driving force of the drive device 430 is transmitted to the arm member 440, and the arm member 440 is swung around the shaft portion 412. ..

The drive device 430 includes a vertical drive motor 431 fastened and fixed to the base member 410, a drive gear 431a rotationally driven by the vertical drive motor 431, and a transmission gear 432 meshed with the drive gear 431a. The transmission gear 432 is mainly provided with a fitting portion 432a formed on the front side thereof with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting hole 413 and whose inner side surface is fitted to the engaging portion 423 of the rotary crank member 420. ..

The fitting portion 432a is a portion having a recess having a cross-sectional shape in which a circular shape is arranged at each apex of the triangle, and is inserted into the connecting hole 413 of the base member 410 and the rotary crank member 420 on the tip side thereof. The engaging portion 423 of the above is fitted so as not to rotate relative to each other. As a result, the main body 411 of the base member 410 is formed by sandwiching the plate between the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420, and as described above, the relative rotation of the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420 is disabled. , The transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420 rotate in synchronization with each other. That is, the driving force of the vertical drive motor 431 is transmitted to the rotary crank member 420 via the transmission gear 432.

The arm member 440 has a main body portion 441 formed in the shape of a long rod, a shaft support hole 442 formed on the proximal end side (right side when viewed from the front) and swingably supported by the axial portion 412, and a proximal end side. The sliding hole 443, which is formed as a long hole on the swinging end side, which is the opposite end of the lens member 460, through which the sliding protrusion 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted, and the sliding protrusion 422 of the rotary crank member 420 are inserted. It mainly includes a bottomed hole-shaped insertion portion 444.

The shape of the insertion portion 444 is set so that the rotary crank member 420 can rotate once with the sliding protrusion portion 422 inserted through the insertion portion 444. Therefore, the arm member 440 can swing regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 420.

The slide member 450 includes a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 451 and a slide guide portion 452 that extends rearward from the left and right end portions of the main body portion 451 and is vertically slidable to the recessed portion 415. A central guide recess 453 formed in the center of the width direction of the 451 and extending in the vertical direction through which the sliding protrusion 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted, and both left and right ends of the main body 451. The portion is mainly provided with a recess formed in the front surface and extended in the vertical direction, and both end guide recessed portions 454 in which the stable slide portion 464 of the lens member 460 is guided.

The lens member 460 includes a plate-shaped main body 461 having a circular opening in the center, a magnifying lens 462 formed with a magnifying lens processed to be fitted into the opening of the main body 461, and a center in the width direction of the main body 461. A sliding protrusion 463 that is projected toward the back side at the upper end portion and is slidably inserted into the sliding hole 443 of the arm member 440, and a sliding protrusion portion 463 that is projected toward the back side at both ends in the width direction of the main body portion 461 and slides. A stable slide portion 464 that is slidably inserted into both end guide recessed portions 454 of the member 450, and a lower shaft portion 473 and an upper side of the door member 470 that are rotatably arranged in the lower left of the front view of the main body portion 461. It mainly includes a pair of rotary cylinders 465 through which the shaft portion 474 is inserted, and an opening / closing drive motor 466 that rotates the pair of rotary cylinders 465 in opposite directions by a transmission mechanism (not shown).

The moving operation of the vertical operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view of the vertical operation unit 400. Note that FIG. 20 shows a closed state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is arranged at the overhanging position.

When the arm member 440 is swung from the retracted position (see FIG. 16) to the overhanging position (see FIG. 20), the lens member 460 is axially supported by the sliding hole 443 on the swinging end side of the arm member 440. The moving protrusion 463 (see FIG. 18) is slid around the central guide recessed portion 453 of the slide member 450. Since the lens member 460 is guided in the vertical direction by the recessed portions 454 at both ends of the slide member 450 and the slide member 450 is guided in the vertical direction by the recessed portion 415 of the base member 410, the lens is caused by the swing of the arm member 440. The member 460 is slid in the vertical direction.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 18 and 19. The door member 470 is formed by dividing a circular plate into upper and lower parts, and has a lower main body portion 471 formed on the lower side, an upper main body portion 472 formed on the upper side of the lower main body portion 471, and a lower side. A lower shaft portion 473 that projects into a columnar shape on the back side at the lower end portion of the main body portion 471 and is inserted into the rotating cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as not to rotate relative to each other, and a circle on the back side at the lower end portion of the upper main body portion 472. It mainly includes an upper shaft portion 474 that is projected in a columnar shape and is inserted into the rotating cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as not to rotate relative to each other.

The lower main body 471 includes a guide protrusion 471a projecting from the side surface on the side that comes into contact with the upper main body 472, and the upper main body 472 is the side surface that comes into contact with the lower main body 471. It is provided with a receiving recessed portion 472a that is recessed in. By fitting these guide protrusions 471a and the receiving recessed portion 472a, the lower main body 471 and the upper main body 472 in the closed state can be relatively aligned. In the present embodiment, since the guide protrusion 471a is projected in a tapered shape, the guide protrusion 471a can be reliably fitted to the recessed portion 472a.

The operation of the door member 470 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical operation unit 400. Note that FIG. 21 shows an open state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is arranged at the overhanging position.

The lower shaft portion 473 and the upper shaft portion 474 (see FIG. 19) are rotated by the rotation of the rotary cylinder 465 (see FIG. 18) of the lens member 460. Since the pair of rotary cylinders 465 are rotated in opposite directions by the driving force of the opening / closing drive motor 466 (see FIG. 19), the door member 470 is opened from the closed state (see FIG. 20) to the open state (see FIG. 21). In this case, the lower main body portion 471 and the upper main body portion 472 can be swung outward (opposite directions) from each other. Further, when the door member 470 is changed from the open state (see FIG. 21) to the closed state (see FIG. 20), the lower main body portion 471 and the upper main body portion 472 can be swung inward with each other.

As a result, the time for swinging the lower main body portion 471 and the upper main body portion 472 can be halved as compared with the case where the front side of the lens member 460 is covered by swinging a single cover member.

Next, the combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 45. The composite operation unit 500 swings the rotating arm member 550 from the retracted position (see FIG. 22) to the overhanging position (see FIG. 9) to arrange the expansion / contraction effect device 540 on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. It is a unit. Further, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is formed so as to be swingable around the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24) of the base member 510.

FIG. 22 is a front perspective view of the composite operation unit 500, and FIG. 23 is a rear perspective view of the composite operation unit 500. It should be noted that FIGS. 22 and 23 show a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position, which is the terminal position formed on the outside of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 24 is a front exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 500, and FIG. 25 is a rear exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the composite operation unit 500 is a unit that performs an effect by sliding and swinging the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and the base member 510 forming the skeleton and the base member 510 thereof. Fastened to the front of the rotating plate 520 with the rotating plate 520 formed rotatably around the first shaft portion 512 of the above, and the first driving device 530 which is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 to generate the driving force of the rotating plate 520. One end is connected to the expansion / contraction effect device 540 which is fixed and formed so as to expand and contract in the radial direction of the rotary plate 520, and the other end on the opposite side is pivotally supported by the base member 510. The rotating arm member 550 that forms the expansion and contraction operation of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 by the swinging operation, the second drive device 560 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 to generate the driving force of the rotation arm member 550, and the second A rotary crank member 570 that transmits the driving force of the drive device 560 to the rotary arm member 550, and a mechanical portion on the rotary shaft side such as the rotary arm member 550 and the rotary crank member 570 that are fastened and fixed from the front of the base member 510. It mainly includes a front cover 580 for blindfolding.

The base member 510 includes a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 511, a columnar first shaft portion 512 projecting from a substantially central lower portion in the width direction of the main body portion 511 toward the front, and the first shaft portion 512 thereof. Three rows of arcuate holes 513 drilled along the central arc and a first through hole 514 drilled adjacent to the second arcuate hole 513b of the three rows of arcuate holes 513. A columnar second shaft portion 515 projecting forward from the main body portion 511 at a substantially intermediate position between the shaft portion 512 and the right end portion of the main body portion 511, and adjacent to the second shaft portion 515. A second through hole 516 to be bored, a columnar third shaft portion 517 projecting forward from the lower right end portion of the main body portion 511 when viewed from the front, and a curved shape formed forward from the edge of the main body portion 511. It is mainly provided with a bent wall portion 518 to be formed.

The first shaft portion 512 is a portion that is inserted into the shaft support hole 522 of the rotary plate 520 and serves as a rotary shaft of the rotary plate 520. Therefore, the diameter of the first shaft portion 512 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522 of the rotating plate 520.

The arc-shaped hole 513 includes a first arc-shaped hole 513a, a second arc-shaped hole 513b, and a third arc-shaped hole 513c from the side closer to the first shaft portion 512.

The first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c are elongated holes through which the insertion shaft 525 of the rotating plate 520 is inserted to guide the rotation of the rotating plate 520. As a result, the load received on the first shaft portion 512 when the rotating plate 520 is rotated can be reduced, and the durability of the rotating plate 520 can be improved. Although FIGS. 24 and 25 show a state in which the collar is fastened to the tip of the insertion shaft 525, the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c are formed by the collar and the main body 521. Placed in between (inserted before fastening the collar).

The second arc-shaped hole 513b is an elongated hole in which the arc-shaped rack 526 of the rotating plate 520 is arranged and moved. The upper side of the substantially central portion is opened, and the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 is arranged in the opened portion. As a result, the toothed portion between the drive motor 531 of the first drive device 530 and the arcuate rack 526 of the rotary plate 520 can be arranged in the plate thickness portion of the main body portion 511, so that the thickness of the composite operation unit 500 can be increased. The dimensions in the longitudinal direction (dimensions in the front-rear direction of FIG. 22) can be suppressed.

The first through hole 514 and the second through hole 516 are through holes through which the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 and the drive gear 562 of the second drive device 560 are inserted, respectively.

The second shaft portion 515 is a columnar portion to which the lid portion 575 of the rotating crank member 570 is fastened and fixed to the front side and serves as the central axis of rotation of the main body portion 571. Therefore, the diameter of the second shaft portion 515 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 571 of the rotating crank member 570.

The third shaft portion 517 is a portion that is inserted into the shaft support hole 552 of the rotating arm member 550 and serves as a central axis for rotation of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the diameter of the third shaft portion 517 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 of the rotating arm member 550. A torsion spring 517a that generates an urging force that moves the rotating arm member 550 toward the retracted position is wound around the third shaft portion 517.

The torsion spring 517a is formed in such a manner that the arm portions extend from both ends of the coil portion wound around the third shaft portion 517. One arm is fixed to the lower right part of the bent wall portion 518 when viewed from the front (near the first stopper portion 518a), and the other arm on the opposite side of the one arm is engaged with the rotating arm member 550. Locked to the stop 555.

The bent wall portion 518 includes a first stopper portion 518a adjacent to the third shaft portion 517, a second stopper portion 518b formed to the right of the first shaft portion 512, and a left side of the first shaft portion 512. A third stopper portion 518c formed in the above is mainly provided.

The first stopper portion 518a is a portion that regulates the rotation of the rotating arm member 550. That is, when the rotating arm member 550 is lowered to the overhanging position (see FIG. 9), it comes into contact with the first stopper portion 518a and the lowering is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 24, the second stopper portion 518b is arranged below the third stopper portion 518c. Since the lower surface of the rotary plate 520 is formed symmetrically with respect to the shaft support hole 522 (see FIG. 37), the rotary plate 520 rotates at a larger rotation angle in the rotation direction toward the second stopper portion 512b. Can be done. That is, in the expansion / contraction effect device 540 described later, the maximum angle of the front-view clockwise swing is formed larger than the front-view counterclockwise swing.

The rotary plate 520 has a fan-shaped plate-shaped main body portion 521, a shaft support hole 522 drilled in a circular shape in the thickness direction at the root portion of the main body portion 521, and a main body having a width slightly larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522. A rail receiving groove 523 that is linearly recessed in the front surface of the portion 521, a pair of telescopic stoppers 524 that are formed so as to project forward on both sides of the lower end portion of the rail receiving groove 523, and projecting from the back surface of the main body portion 521. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) insertion shafts 525 and an arc-shaped rack protruding from the back surface of the main body 521 in an arc shape centered on the shaft support hole 522 and having gear teeth engraved on the outer peripheral portion. 526 and are mainly provided.

The first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510 is inserted into the shaft support hole 522. Therefore, the rotating plate 520 is swung around the first shaft portion 512.

The rail receiving groove 523 is a portion where the slide rail 545 of the telescopic effect device 540 is fastened and fixed, and the telescopic effect device 540 expands and contracts along the extending direction of the rail receiving groove 523. Therefore, the moving direction of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is changed depending on the posture of the rotating plate 520.

The expansion / contraction stopper 524 is a portion that is brought into contact with the inner surface of the slide plate 544 of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the vertical direction to regulate the movement width of the slide plate 544. It is formed on both sides of the rail receiving groove 523, and by contacting the inner side surface of the slide plate 544 on both sides thereof, it is possible to suppress the slide rail 545 from receiving a load in the direction orthogonal to the expansion / contraction direction, and improve durability. Can be planned.

The insertion shaft 525 is a portion that is inserted into the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c of the base member 510 to guide the rotation of the rotating plate 520, and has a diameter of the first arc-shaped hole 513a and a third circle. It is formed slightly smaller than the width dimension of the arcuate hole 513c. Further, by fastening and fixing a collar member having a diameter larger than the width dimension of the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c to the tip, the rotating plate 520 is connected to the base member 510 so as not to be pulled out.

The arc-shaped rack 526 is inserted into the second arc-shaped hole 513b of the base member 510 and meshes with the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530. Since the meshing portion between the arcuate rack 526 and the first drive device 530 is formed in the region including the thickness portion of the base member 510, the dimension of the composite operation unit 500 in the thickness direction can be suppressed.

The first drive device 530 mainly includes a drive motor 531 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510, and a drive gear 532 that is inserted into the first through hole 514 of the base member 510 and is axially rotated by the drive motor 531.

Next, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. 26 is a front exploded perspective view of the telescopic effect device 540, and FIG. 27 is a rear exploded perspective view of the telescopic effect device 540.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is a main body of a rotating arm member 550 between a main body member 541 forming a skeleton and a pair of main body members 541 fastened and fixed to the back surface of the main body member 541. The first guide member 542 and the second guide member 543 through which the portion 551 is inserted and the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the first guide member 542 and the second guide member 543 are arranged so as to be axially slidable along the extending direction. The slide plate 544 is connected to the slide plate 544 and the rotary plate 520, and one end of the slide plate 544 is fitted into the rail receiving groove 523 and fastened and fixed, and the slide rail 545 is raised to the front side of the main body member 541. The front plate member 546 to be fastened and fixed, the connecting sliding member 547 to be slidably supported by the shaft support portion 546c of the front plate member 546, and the front hanging portion to be fastened and fixed to the connecting sliding member 547. The decorative member 548 in which the 548b is movably formed in front of the main body member 541 is mainly provided.

The main body member 541 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 541a forming a skeleton, a columnar protrusion 541b projecting toward the back side at the center portion in the width direction of the main body portion 541a, and the back surface of the protrusion 541b. The first raised fastening portion 541c projecting in pairs on the left side of the view, the second raised fastening portion 541d projecting in pairs on the right side of the rear view of the protrusion 541b, and the upper left portion of the main body portion 541a in the rear view. It mainly includes a protruding guide fastening portion 541e and a fastening hole 541f formed on the front side of the main body portion 541a (three locations in the present embodiment) to fasten and fix the front plate member 546.

The protrusion 541b is a portion inserted into the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the diameter of the protrusion 541b is formed to be slightly smaller than the width dimension of the inner peripheral surface of the arcuate hole 554. Further, since the protrusion 541b is inserted into the arcuate hole 554, the main body member 541 can be interlocked by swinging the rotary arm member 550.

The first raised fastening portion 541c is a portion for fastening and fixing the first guide member 542, and the second raised fastening portion 541d is a portion for fastening and fixing the second guide member 543. The reason why the second raised fastening portion 541d is separated in the vertical direction from the first raised fastening portion 541c is longer because the position that does not interfere with the rotating arm member 550 is selected and arranged. Here, in the present embodiment, the rotating arm member does not pass through the lower left side of the main body member 541 in the rotation locus (see FIGS. 37, 40, and 44). Therefore, the arrangement interval of the pair of second raised fastening portions 541d can be widened as compared with the first raised fastening portion 541c, and the rigidity of the second raised fastening portion 541d can be improved.

The guide fastening portion 541e is a portion where the auxiliary fastening portion 542e of the first guide member 542 is fastened and fixed, and is a portion where the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 is guided in the extended state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540. That is, even if the protrusion 541b is not guided by the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550, the guide fastening portion 541e guides the rotating arm member 550 to the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 when rotating upward. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 and the expansion / contraction effect member 540 are operated in conjunction with each other.

The fastening hole 541f is a through hole through which the fastening portion 546b of the front plate member 546 is fastened and fixed.

The first guide member 542 includes a fastening plate portion 542a that is fastened and fixed to the first raised fastening portion 541c, and a rear surface regulating portion that extends upward from a position where the first guide member 542 is one step higher on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 542a. 542b, a guide rail portion 542c projecting from both left and right sides of the back surface regulating portion 542b to the back surface in a wall shape, and a portion projecting to the rear surface side at the upper end portion of the back surface regulating portion 542b are formed to penetrate in the vertical direction. The insertion hole 542d and the auxiliary fastening portion 542e extending from the back surface regulating portion 542b and being fastened and fixed to the guide fastening portion 541e are mainly provided.

The back surface regulating portion 542b is a portion disposed on the back surface of the rotating arm member 550, and is a portion that prevents the rotating arm member 550 from moving to the back surface and the protrusion 541b from falling out of the arcuate hole 554. is there.

The guide rail portion 542c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 expands and contracts, and suppresses the deviation of the posture of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 542.

The insertion hole 542d is a hole through which the slide rod 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 542d is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the slide rod 544e, the slide plate 544 is formed so as to be slidable with respect to the first guide member 542.

The second guide member 543 includes a fastening plate portion 543a that is fastened and fixed to the second raised fastening portion 541d, and a rear surface regulating portion that extends upward from a position where the second guide member 543 is one step higher on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 543a. 543b, a guide rail portion 543c projecting from both left and right sides of the back surface regulating portion 543b in a wall shape to the back surface, and a portion projecting to the rear surface side at the upper end portion of the back surface regulating portion 543b are formed to penetrate in the vertical direction. It is mainly provided with an insertion hole 543d.

The back surface regulating portion 543b is a portion disposed on the back surface of the rotating arm member 550, and is a portion that prevents the rotating arm member 550 from moving to the back surface and the protrusion 541b from falling out of the arcuate hole 554. is there.

The guide rail portion 543c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 expands and contracts, and suppresses the deviation of the posture of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 543.

The insertion hole 543d is a hole through which the slide rod 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 543d is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the slide rod 544e, the slide plate 544 is formed so as to be slidable with respect to the first guide member 543.

The slide plate 544 is formed of a main body portion 544a formed in a rectangular plate shape, a recessed portion 544b in which a wide recess extending in the vertical direction is formed on the back surface of the main body portion 544a, and the recessed portion 544b. Both end recessed portions 544c in which recesses extending in the vertical direction are formed on the front surfaces of both left and right sides, and rail receivers projecting in a semicircular shape toward the front surface at the upper and lower end portions of the both end recessed portions 544c. A portion 544d, a columnar slide rod 544e extending in the vertical direction inside the recessed portions 544c at both ends, and an effect auxiliary wall 544f projecting toward the front substantially in the vertical center of the main body portion 544a. Mainly provided is a stopper portion 544 g which is projected toward the back surface at both left and right ends at the upper and lower ends of the recessed portion 544b.

The recessed portion 544b is a portion that guides the slide plate 544 with respect to the expansion / contraction stopper 524 of the rotating plate 520. Therefore, the width of the inner surface of the recessed portion 544b is formed to be slightly larger than the width dimension of the telescopic stopper 524.

The recessed portions 544c at both ends are portions that accommodate the protrusions through which the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543 are formed. As a result, the protrusions through which the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543 are formed can be guided from the outside.

The rail receiving portion 544d is a portion accommodated in the guide rail portions 542c and 543c of the guide members 542 and 543. As a result, wobbling of the guide members 542 and 543 with respect to the slide plate 544 can be suppressed.

The slide rod 544e is a columnar rod that is inserted into the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543. As a result, the guide members 542 and 543 are formed so as to be slidable in the extending direction (vertical direction in FIG. 26) of the slide rod 544e.

The effect assisting portion 544f is a portion that is brought into contact with the back hanging portion 548c of the decorative member 548 when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is in the extended state to move the decorative member 548. Thereby, the appearance of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 can be changed.

The stopper portion 544g is a portion that is brought into contact with the telescopic stopper 524 of the rotating plate 520 and defines the vertically moving end of the slide plate 544.

The slide rail 545 is a commercially available mini rail member. One end is fastened and fixed along the rail receiving groove 523 of the rotating plate 520, and the other end on the opposite side of the one end is fastened and fixed to the recessed portion 544b of the slide plate 544.

The front plate member 546 is an effect portion that can be visually recognized by the player, and is a plate-shaped main body portion 546a formed in substantially the same shape as the main body member 541 in front view, and the main body portion 546a toward the back side. It mainly includes a fastening portion 546b that protrudes according to the formation position of the fastening hole 541f, and a pair of shaft support portions 546c that project from the upper end portion of the main body portion 546a toward the back surface side.

The fastening portion 546b is a portion for fixing the front plate member 546 to the main body member 541, and the fastening portion 546b is fastened and fixed by screwing through the fastening hole 541f.

The shaft support portion 546c is a portion that slidably supports the connecting sliding member 547. Therefore, the diameter of the shaft support portion 546c is formed to be slightly smaller than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding elongated hole 547b of the connecting sliding member 547.

The connecting sliding member 547 is formed in the vertical direction with a main body portion 547a formed in a plate shape and a pair of sliding elongated holes 547b formed in an elongated hole shape extending vertically and formed in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes a pair of insertion holes 547c.

The long sliding hole 547b is a portion through which the shaft support portion 546c of the front plate member 546 is inserted. Therefore, the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding elongated hole 547b is formed to be slightly larger than that of the shaft support portion 546c. A collar member having an outer shape larger than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding elongated hole 547b is fastened and fixed to the tip of the shaft support portion 546c, so that the connecting sliding member 547 is pivotally supported by the front plate member 546 so as not to be pulled out. To. The insertion hole 547c is a circular hole through which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the decorative member 548 is inserted.

The decorative member 548 includes a main body portion 548a formed in a plate shape and to which the connecting sliding member 547 is fastened and fixed from below, a front hanging portion 548b formed by hanging downward on the front side of the main body portion 548a, and a main body portion 548a. Mainly includes a back hanging portion 548c formed by hanging downward on the back side of the above.

When the connecting sliding member 547 moves with respect to the front plate member 546, the front hanging portion 548b is visually recognized as being covered with the front plate member 546 (see FIG. 43) and separated from the front plate member 546 (FIG. FIG. 43). 37) and can be formed. Thereby, the appearance of the expansion / contraction effect member 540 can be changed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The back hanging portion 548c is a portion that comes into contact with the effect auxiliary wall 544f of the slide plate 544 by the expansion / contraction operation of the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and the back hanging portion 548c abuts on the effect auxiliary wall 544f to cause the decorative member 548. Is moved relative to the front plate member 546.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 24 and 25. The rotary arm member 550 is close to a main body portion 551 formed in a long rod shape, a shaft support hole 552 bored in one end of the main body portion 551 in the front-rear direction, and the shaft support hole 552. The deformed elongated hole 553, which is a specially shaped bottomed elongated hole formed on the back side of the main body portion 551, and the front side of the other end, which is the opposite end of one end, are formed. The arc-shaped hole 554, which is an arc-shaped bottomed elongated hole, and the shaft support hole 552 of the main body 551 are projected toward the back side, the tip is bent like a hook, and the other arm of the torsion spring 517a is locked. The locking portion 555 is mainly provided.

The shaft support hole 552 is a circular hole through which the third shaft portion 517 of the base member 510 is inserted. Therefore, the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the third shaft portion 517, whereby the rotary arm member 550 is rotatably formed around the third shaft portion 517.

The deformed elongated hole 553 is a portion through which the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is inserted. The shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 will be described later.

The arc-shaped hole 554 is a long hole through which the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is inserted. Therefore, the width dimension of the arcuate hole 554 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 541b. Further, the arc formed by the arcuate hole 554 coincides with the arc formed by the protrusion 541b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is swung around the first shaft portion 512 in the extended state (FIGS. 37 to 39). See up to).

Further, the arcuate hole 554 includes a mouth tip portion 554a which is opened to the tip end portion of the other end portion of the rotary arm member 550 and whose width is widened at the tip end portion.

The second drive device 560 is a device that generates a driving force for rotating the rotary crank member 570, and is inserted through the drive motor 561 fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and the second through hole 516 of the base member 510. It mainly includes a drive gear 562 that is pivotally rotated by a drive motor 561.

The drive gear 562 is meshed with the transmission gear teeth 572 of the rotating crank member 570. As a result, when the drive gear 562 is rotated, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated accordingly.

The rotary crank member 570 is a member that transmits a driving force to the rotary arm member 550, and is engraved on the ring-shaped main body portion 571 pivotally supported by the second shaft portion 515 and the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 571. A sliding gear tooth 572 to be provided, a regulation umbrella portion 573 formed so as to cover the front side of the transmission gear tooth 572, and a sliding portion projecting to the front side at a position eccentric from the center of the main body portion 571. It mainly includes a protruding portion 574 and a lid portion 575 formed with a diameter larger than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 571 and fastened and fixed to the front side of the second shaft portion 515.

The transmission gear teeth 572 are meshed with the drive gear 562 of the second drive device 560. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 561 is transmitted to the rotary crank member 570.

The regulation umbrella portion 573 prevents the drive gear 532 from being displaced to the front side of the transmission gear tooth 572. Thereby, the meshing relationship between the drive gear 532 and the transmission gear tooth 572 can be optimized.

The sliding protrusion 574 is a portion inserted into the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550. That is, whether or not the transmission of the driving force is formed is determined by the relationship between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shape of the rotating arm member 550.

The lid portion 575 is a portion for disposing the main body portion 571 on the base member 510 so as not to be pulled out.

The relationship between the swing of the rotary arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 31. First, the shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 (a) and 29 (a).

28 (a) and 29 (a) are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570. Note that FIG. 28A shows a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 29A shows a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the overhanging position. 28 (a) and 29 (a), the deformed elongated hole 553 and the sliding protrusion 574 are shown by hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 are shown by imaginary lines. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 28A, in a state where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position, the straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 and the sliding protrusion 574 and the rotating crank member 570 An upward orthogonal state is formed in which the straight line connecting the rotation axis and the shaft support hole 552 is orthogonal to each other.

As shown in FIG. 29 (a), in a state where the rotary arm member 550 is arranged at the overhang position, a straight line connecting the rotary shaft and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotary crank member 570 and the rotary crank member 570 It is possible to form a downward orthogonal state in which the straight line connecting the rotation axis and the shaft support hole 552 is orthogonal to each other. Note that FIG. 29A shows a state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated by a predetermined angle counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the above-mentioned downward orthogonal state.

The deformed elongated hole 553 has a transmission groove portion 553a in which a driving force is transmitted to the rotation arm member 550 by moving the sliding protrusion portion 574, and a first non-transmission wall portion connected from the upper end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a. Mainly, the second non-transmission wall portion 553c connected from the lower end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a to the 553b, and the selection wall portion 553d connecting the first non-transmission wall portion 553b and the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. Be prepared.

As shown in FIG. 28A, the transmission groove portion 553a is a recessed groove that extends linearly to the left from the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 in an upward orthogonal state. The transmission groove portion 553a is formed with a length such that the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotary crank member 570 can move from the upward orthogonal state to the downward orthogonal state, and the forming width of the inner peripheral surface thereof is slightly smaller than the diameter of the sliding protrusion 574. It is formed large. Therefore, the driving force is transmitted from the rotary crank member 570 to the rotary arm member 550 while the sliding protrusion 574 moves through the transmission groove portion 553a.

As shown in FIG. 28A, the first non-transmission wall portion 553b is a sliding projection centered on the rotation axis of the rotary crank member 570 from the upper wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in an upward orthogonal state. It is a wall portion formed along the circumscribed circle of the portion 574. That is, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in the front view from the upward orthogonal state, the rotary crank member 570 idles with respect to the rotary arm member 550, and the driving force from the rotary crank member 570 is the rotary arm. Not transmitted to member 550.

The movement of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 28A). The direction is directed to the rotation axis of the rotation crank member 570. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first non-transmission wall portion 553b, the load applied to the sliding protrusion 574 by rotating the rotating arm member 550 is the rotation of the rotating crank member 570. Aimed at the axis. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first non-transmission wall portion 553b, the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is prevented.

As shown in FIG. 29A, the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is a rotary crank from the lower side wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in a state where the rotary arm member 550 is arranged at the overhanging position. It is a wall portion formed along the circumscribed circle of the sliding protrusion 574 centered on the rotation axis of the member 570. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the downward orthogonal state (the state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the front view clockwise from the state of FIG. 29 (a)). The rotary crank member 570 runs idle with respect to the rotary arm member 550, and the driving force is not transmitted from the rotary crank member 570 to the rotary arm member 550.

When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 29A, the moving direction of the second non-transmission wall portion 553b is directed toward the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570. Be done. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 29B), the load applied to the sliding protrusion 574 by rotating the rotating arm member 550. Is directed to the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second non-transmission wall portion 553c, the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is prevented.

The selected wall portion 553d is a wall portion formed from a smooth curved surface connecting the right end portion of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b in front view and the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c in front view, and is the first non-transmission wall portion. The transmission wall portion 553b is formed above the extended curve.

The selection wall portion 553d is arranged so as to face the right side portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c, and is formed in such a manner that the distance from the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is increased toward the left end portion of the selection wall portion 553d. Therefore, for example, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in the front view from an upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A), the sliding protrusion 574 exceeds the first non-transmission wall portion 553b and the second non-transmission In the margin portion D (see FIG. 32B) until the wall portion 553c is reached, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotation is not restricted. That is, the driving force is not transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is not restricted by the sliding protrusion 574.

The right end of the second non-transmission wall 553c is formed along the arc S1 centered on the shaft support hole 552 (the formation angle with the arc S1 is small), while the right end of the selected wall 553d is formed. It is formed so as to intersect the arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the formation angle between the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c and the arc S1.

In this case, when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 required to correspond to the change amount changes. That is, the swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount in a state where the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the selected wall portion 553d are in contact with each other. The swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 is smaller than that of the rotating arm member 550 when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c are in contact with each other and change by a predetermined amount. Therefore, depending on whether the sliding protrusion 574 rotates along the second non-transmission wall portion 553c or along the selective wall portion 553d, the rotation arm member 550 swings with respect to the speed of the rotation crank member 570. The speed can be changed.

A description will be given by returning from FIG. 28 to FIG. 31. 28 to 31 are front views of the rotary arm member 550 and the rotary crank member 570 showing the swing of the rotary arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 28A, the above-mentioned upward orthogonal state is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position), and in FIGS. 28 to 31, the rotating crank member 570 is counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The rotated state is shown in order, the deformed elongated hole 553 and a part of the rotating crank member 570 are shown by hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 are shown by imaginary lines. ..

In addition, in FIGS. 28 to 31, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 detects a posture of expansion / contraction in the vertical direction by a position detection sensor (not shown), and the swing is stopped at that posture. That is, in FIGS. 28 to 31, the protrusion 541b moves only in the vertical direction. In this case, the swing of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is prevented by the resistance between the first drive device 530 (see FIG. 25) and the drive gear 532.

In the state of FIG. 28A, the rotating crank member 570 is in an upward orthogonal state. In this case, the reference horizontal line O is set at a position vertically downward by a distance h1 from the protrusion 541b. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is in the upward orthogonal state, the protrusion 541b is arranged at a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

From the state of FIG. 28 (a), when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)), it is rotated counterclockwise by an angle T1). A state in which the sliding protrusion 574 is moved through the transmission groove portion 553a of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is arranged vertically upward by a distance h2 (h2 <h1) from the reference horizontal line O (FIG. 28 (b). ) Is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and are in contact with each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). ). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

From the state of FIG. 28 (b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)), and then the angle T2 (T2 ≈ 180 degrees> T1) counterclockwise. ), The sliding protrusion 574 is moved through the transmission groove portion 553a of the deformed elongated hole 553 (transmission region) and invades the region facing the second non-transmission wall portion 553c, and the protrusion 541 is used as a reference. It reaches the state of being arranged at a position vertically above the horizon O by a distance h3 (h3 <h2) (see FIG. 29 (a)). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

From the state of FIG. 28 (c), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)), and is rotated counterclockwise by an angle T3 (T3> T2). Then, the sliding protrusion 574 is slid on the second non-transmission wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 to reach the state shown in FIG. 29 (b). During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotating arm is rotated from the sliding protrusion 574. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position vertically upward by a distance h3 from the reference horizon O.

When the rotary arm member 550 is rotated clockwise from the front view from the states of FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b), the sliding protrusion 574 is directed toward the rotation axis of the rotary crank member 570. It is pushed by the non-transmission wall portion 553c. In this case, the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted from moving, thereby restricting the swing of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise from the front view from the states of FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b).

Here, as a method of stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state of FIG. 29A, it is conceivable to stop the rotating crank member 570. However, if the effect speed of the rotary arm member 550 is set to a high speed until just before reaching the overhang position and the rotary crank member 570 is suddenly stopped, a load is applied to the second drive device 560 and the speed of the rotary crank member 570 is reduced. If it is made loose, the effect cannot be improved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the rotating arm is rotated by rotating the rotating crank member 570 to the state of FIG. 29 (b) without stopping in the state of FIG. 29 (a). The rotation of the member 550 can be stopped in the state shown in FIG. 29 (a) (the protrusion 541 can be stopped vertically upward by a distance h3 from the reference horizontal line O). As a result, the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is maintained until the rotating arm member 550 reaches the overhanging position, and then the rotating crank member changes from the state of FIG. 29 (a) to the state of FIG. 29 (b). The 570 can be decelerated. Therefore, it is not necessary to suddenly stop the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both an improvement in the effect of the rotating arm member 550 and an improvement in the durability of the second drive device 560.

From the state of FIG. 29 (b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)), and then counterclockwise at an angle T4 (T4 ≈ 270 degrees> T3). ), The sliding protrusion 574 is slid on the second non-transmission wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and reaches the state shown in FIG. 30 (a). During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotating arm is rotated from the sliding protrusion 574. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position vertically upward by a distance h3 from the reference horizon O.

That is, while the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise 1/4 turn from the state shown in FIG. 29 (a), the rotary arm member 550 is maintained in the same posture, and the protrusion 541b is in the same position. Be maintained. The length at which the rotating arm member 550 is maintained in the same posture and the protrusion 541b is maintained at the same position is the length during which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated 1/4 turn in the present embodiment. You don't have to be limited to that. The length at which the front plate member 546 is continuously arranged at the lower position can be changed by changing the length of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A) of the deformed elongated hole 553. For example, by making the second non-transmission wall portion 553c longer than that of the present embodiment, the length that the front plate member 546 continues to be arranged at the lower position can be made longer than that of the present embodiment.

From the state of FIG. 30A, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A)) and is rotated counterclockwise by an angle T5 (T5> T4). ), The sliding protrusion 574 pushes up the selected wall portion 553d of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position vertically upward by a distance h2 (h2> h3) from the reference horizontal line O. (See FIG. 30B) is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and are in contact with each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). ).

That is, when the rotary arm member 550 and the rotary crank member 570 are rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the selective wall portion 553d and the sliding protrusion 574 are brought into contact with each other, whereby the rotary arm member The driving force is transmitted to the 550 (transmission area).

From the state of FIG. 30 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)), and is rotated counterclockwise by an angle T6 (T6> T5). Then, the sliding protrusion 574 invades the region of the deformed elongated hole 553 facing the first non-transmission wall portion 553b, and the protrusion 541 vertically upwards from the reference horizon O by a distance h1 (h1> h2). It reaches a state where it is arranged at a separated position (see FIG. 31). During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and are in contact with each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). ).

From the state of FIG. 31, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the sliding protrusion 574 is moved in the region of the deformed elongated hole 553 facing the first non-transmission wall portion 553b, and is shown in FIG. The state of 28 (a) is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotating arm is rotated from the sliding protrusion 574. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area).

When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 31, the sliding protrusion 574 is pushed by the second non-transmission wall portion 553c toward the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570. .. In this case, the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted from moving, thereby restricting the swing of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 31.

Here, as a method of stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state of FIG. 31, it is conceivable to stop the rotating crank member 570. However, if the effect speed of the rotary arm member 550 is set to a high speed until just before reaching the evacuation position and the rotary crank member 570 is suddenly stopped, a load is applied to the second drive device 560 and the speed decrease of the rotary crank member 570 is gradual. If it is set to, the effect cannot be improved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is stopped in the state of FIG. 31 by rotating the rotating crank member 570 to the state of FIG. 28A without stopping in the state of FIG. 31. Can be done. As a result, the speed of the rotary crank member 570 is maintained until the rotary arm member 550 reaches the overhang position, and then the rotary crank member 570 is decelerated from the state of FIG. 31 to the state of FIG. 28 (a). Can be made to. Therefore, it is not necessary to suddenly stop the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, it is possible to improve both the effect of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 linked to the rotating arm member 550 and the durability of the second drive device 560.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, by rotating the rotary crank member 570 once in the same direction, the rotary arm member 550 can be reciprocally swung between the retracted position and the extended position.

From these facts, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise at a constant speed as shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, the protrusion 541b is the reference horizontal line for half the period of the rotation cycle of the rotating crank member 570. It is moved downward from a position vertically upward by a distance h1 from O to a position separated by a distance h3 (h3 <h1). The protrusion 541b is maintained at a position vertically above the reference horizon O by a distance h3 for a period of 1/4 of the subsequent rotation cycle, and the protrusion 541b is maintained at a position vertically upward by a distance h3 for a period of 1/4 of the subsequent rotation cycle. It is moved vertically upward from a position separated by a distance h3 to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1> h3). As a result, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (moving speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction) can be doubled.

Here, at the retracted position of the rotating arm member 550, the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 can form an upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A), and the rotating arm member 550 is extended. At the position, the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 can form a downward orthogonal state (see FIG. 29 (a)). From the state shown in FIG. 29 (a), a downward orthogonal state can be formed by rotating the rotating crank member 570 clockwise by a predetermined amount.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated half a circumference (180 degrees) in order to swing the rotating arm member 550 from the retracted position to the overhanging position. Therefore, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the time required for the rotary arm member 550 to swing from the retracted position to the overhang position (from FIGS. 28 (a) to 29 (a)). (See) and the time required to swing from the overhang position to the retracted position (see FIG. 29 (a) through FIG. 31 to FIG. 28 (a)) can be made equivalent.

The relationship between the swing of the rotary arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 35. 32 to 35 are front views of the rotary arm member 550 and the rotary crank member 570 showing the swing of the rotary arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 32 to 35, the state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in the front view is shown, and the deformed elongated hole 553 and a part of the rotating crank member 570 are shown by hidden lines and expanded and contracted. The front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the effect device 540 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

In addition, in FIG. 32 (a), the above-mentioned upward orthogonal state is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position), and in FIGS. 32 (b) to 35, the rotating arm is formed from FIG. 32 (a). The states in which the member 550 and the rotary crank member 570 are rotated by a predetermined amount are shown in order in chronological order.

In the state of FIG. 32A, the rotating crank member 570 is in an upward orthogonal state. In this case, the protrusion 541b is arranged at a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 32 (a) (rotated clockwise by an angle T11 from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a))), it slides. The protrusion 574 is moved in the region of the deformed elongated hole 553 facing the first non-transmission wall portion 553b, and reaches the state shown in FIG. 32 (b). During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotating arm is rotated from the sliding protrusion 574. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position vertically above the reference horizon O by a distance h1.

When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 32B, the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted from moving, so that the rotating arm member 550 is restricted from swinging. To. Therefore, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 32 (b).

From the state of FIG. 32 (b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the front view (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) and is rotated clockwise by an angle T12 (T12> T11). ) And, as shown in FIG. 33A, the sliding protrusion 574 is slightly separated from the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 is swung downward by the action of gravity. In this case, the rotating arm member 550 is in the margin D from the state shown in FIG. 32B until the sliding protrusion 574 crosses the first non-transmission wall portion 553b and reaches the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. The driving force is not transmitted to the (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position vertically above the reference horizon O by a distance h4 (h4 <h1).

From the state of FIG. 33 (a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the front view (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) and is rotated clockwise by an angle T13 (T13> T12). ) And, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the sliding protrusion 574 is brought into contact with the second non-transmission wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 that swings downward by the action of gravity. To. That is, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 from the state shown in FIG. 33 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 34 (a) (transmission region). In the state of FIG. 33B, the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h5 (h5 <h4).

From the state of FIG. 33 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in the front view (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) and only at an angle T14 (T14 ≈ 90 degrees> T13) clockwise. (Rotated), the sliding protrusion 574 is housed in the right end of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position vertically upward from the reference horizon O by a distance h3. (See FIG. 34 (a)) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is brought into contact with the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, and the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region).

Here, the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 32 (b) to 34 (a) and the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 30 (a) to 31 are the rotations. Although the rotation direction of the dynamic crank member 570 is different, the rotation region (phase) of the rotation crank member 570 is the same.

In this case, in the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 32 (b) to 34 (a), the inner circumference of the deformed elongated hole 553 in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570. While the surfaces are not in contact with each other, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (non-transmission region), while the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 30A to 31 is always , The driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region).

Therefore, the mode of transmitting the driving force to the rotating arm member 550 can be changed depending on the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570. As a result, by reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, it is possible to form two ways of producing the rotating arm member 550.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 rotates between FIGS. 32 (a) and 34 (a), the rotating crank member 570 rotates clockwise in the front view. When rotated, the rotating arm member 550 is swung by free fall depending on the gravitational acceleration until the sliding protrusion 574 comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 (non-transmission region). On the other hand, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the rotary arm member 550 is swung at a speed dependent on the rotational speed of the rotary crank member 570 (transmission region).

As a result, even when the rotation speed of the rotary crank member 570 is constant, the rotation when the rotary crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase by reversing the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570. The variation of the swing speed of the arm member 550 can be increased.

Further, since the increase in the variation of the swing speed of the rotating arm member 550 is achieved by the shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 (formation of the margin portion D), the mode of transmitting the driving force to the rotating arm member 550 can be determined. Other members such as a changeover switch for changing can be eliminated, and the member cost can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the margin portion D is formed on the shaft support hole 552 side of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, as compared with the case where the margin portion D is formed on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552 with respect to the rotation shaft of the rotary crank member 570, while the sliding protrusion 574 passes through the margin portion D by a predetermined distance. The distance that the protrusion 541b moves downward can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to significantly change the operation of the rotating arm member 550 when the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570 is changed while suppressing the formation range of the margin portion D of the rotating crank member 570.

From the state of FIG. 34 (a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the front view (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) and is rotated clockwise by an angle T15 (T15> T14). ), The sliding protrusion 574 is slid on the second non-transmission wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 to reach the state shown in FIG. 34 (b). During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotating arm is rotated from the sliding protrusion 574. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position vertically upward by a distance h3 from the reference horizon O.

When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise from the front view from the state of FIG. 34 (b), the sliding protrusion 574 is directed toward the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570 by the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. Be pushed. In this case, since the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted from moving, the swing of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 34 (b).

From the state of FIG. 34 (b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in the front view (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)), and only the angle T16 (T16 ≈ 180 degrees> T15) clockwise. (Rotated), the sliding protrusion 574 is slid on the second non-transmission wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 to reach the state shown in FIG. 35 (a). During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotating arm is rotated from the sliding protrusion 574. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position vertically upward by a distance h3 from the reference horizon O.

From the state of FIG. 35 (a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the front view (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) and is rotated clockwise by an angle T17 (T17> T16). ), The sliding protrusion 574 is moved through the transmission groove 553a (transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is arranged vertically upward from the reference horizon O by a distance h2 (h2> h3) (FIG. 35). (See (b)) is reached. That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

Here, when the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 and the swing of the rotary arm member 550 are constantly linked, it is difficult to shift the start timing of the rotary crank member 570 and the rotary arm member 550. .. Therefore, when starting the rotary crank member 570 and the rotary arm member 550, it is necessary to generate a large force corresponding to the rigidity of the force that overcomes the inertia of each member. Therefore, a drive device having a large driving force is required, and there is a risk that the drive device will become large.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the start timing of the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550 can be shifted. That is, for example, from the state of FIG. 34 (b) to the state of FIG. 35 (a), only the rotary crank member 570 is rotated, and from the state of FIG. 35 (a) to the state of FIG. 35 (b). The rotary arm member 550 can be started by interlocking with the rotary crank member 570.

As a result, the momentum of the rotating crank member 570 can be used to start the rotating arm member 550, so that the driving force required for the second driving device 560 can be suppressed. Therefore, the second drive device 560 can be miniaturized.

When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the front view from the state of FIG. 35 (b), the sliding protrusion 574 is moved through the transmission groove portion 553a to reach the state of FIG. 32 (a). During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and are in contact with each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). ). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

From these facts, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise at a constant speed as shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, the protrusion 541b is a reference in a period of 1/4 of the rotation cycle of the rotating crank member 570. It is moved downward from a position vertically above the horizon O by a distance h1 to a position separated by a distance h3 (h3 <h1). The protrusion 541b is maintained at a position vertically above the reference horizon O by a distance h3 for a period of 1/4 of the subsequent rotation cycle, and the protrusion 541b is vertically separated from the reference horizon O for a period of half of the subsequent rotation cycle. It is moved upward from a position separated by a distance h3 to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1> h3). As a result, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (moving speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction) can be doubled.

Further, the moving speed of the rotating arm member 550 is partially increased by the gravitational acceleration when moving downward, while the speed is always along the rotating speed of the rotating crank member 570 when moving upward. Will be done. As a result, the mode of speed change of the protrusion 541b (expansion / contraction effect device 540) can be changed depending on the direction of movement of the protrusion 541b (expansion / contraction effect device 540).

With reference to FIG. 36, a change in the distance of the protrusion 541b (expansion / contraction effect device 540) from the reference horizontal line O when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise will be described.

FIG. 36 is a graph showing the distance of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28A) from the reference horizontal line O. In the graph shown in FIG. 36, the swing angle is shown on the horizontal axis with the upper orthogonal state of the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28 (a)) as the left end and increasing to the right from there. Shows the distance of the protrusion 541b from the reference horizontal line O.

In FIG. 36, the distance of the protrusion 541b from the reference horizontal line O when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise is shown by the curve CC1, and the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise. The distance of the protrusion 541b from the reference horizontal line O is indicated by the curve CW1. The curves CC1 and CW1 correspond to the states of the protrusions 541b from FIGS. 28 to 35, respectively, and for comparison when the rotating crank members 570 of each curve are arranged in the same phase, A curve obtained by reversing the curve CC1 from side to side is shown as an imaginary line as a curve CC2. By comparing the curves CC1 and CW1, as described above, by reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, the ascending speed and the descending speed of the protrusion 541b moved up and down by the rotating arm member 550 are changed. Can be done.

As a comparison target of the curve CW1, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates clockwise, it rotates until the sliding protrusion 574 comes into contact with the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A). The case where the arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A) is arranged at the retracted position is shown by a broken line as a curve CW2. This corresponds to the case where the torsion spring 517a (see FIG. 23) is set to have a large urging force for swinging the rotating arm member 550 upward. In this case, the period in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position can be lengthened.

In the curves CC1 and CW1, the rotary crank member 570 and the rotary arm member 550 (in the angle range N1 in which the distance of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28A) from the horizontal reference line O is maintained unchanged. A non-transmission region is formed in which the driving force is not transmitted to and from FIG. 28 (a)). The width of this angle range N1 can be adjusted by the forming width of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A).

Further, in the curve CW1, the angle until the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28 (a)) comes into contact with the deformed elongated hole 553 (see FIG. 28 (a)) of the rotating arm member 550. In the range N2, a non-transmission region in which the driving force is not transmitted is formed between the rotary crank member 570 and the rotary arm member 550. The width of this angle range N2 can be adjusted by the forming width of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b (see FIG. 28A).

As shown in FIG. 36, a curve is formed between the angle T11 to the angle T14 and the angle T4 to the angle T6 when the rotating crank members 570 (see FIG. 28A) are arranged in the same phase. The shapes of CW1 and the curve CC1 are different (the curve CW1 and the curve CC2 obtained by reversing the curve CC1 do not overlap).

That is, the angle is better when the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28A) rotates between the angle T4 and the angle T6 in a manner of lifting the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A). The curve is gentler than when the rotating crank member 570 rotates in a manner of pushing down the rotating arm member 550 between 11 and the angle T14.

This is because, on the curve CW1, the sliding protrusion 574 (see FIG. 28A) abuts on the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A) of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A). (See FIG. 28A) is rotated, and in the curve CC1, the sliding protrusion 574 comes into contact with the selected wall portion 553d (see FIG. 28A) of the irregular elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 is rotated. By.

A description will be given by returning to FIG. 28 (a). As described above, in the deformed elongated hole 553, the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along the arc S1 centered on the shaft support hole 552 (the formation angle with the arc S1 is small). The right end portion of the selected wall portion 553d is formed so as to intersect the arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the formation angle between the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c and the arc S1. To.

In this case, when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 required to correspond to the change amount changes. That is, the swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount in a state where the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the selected wall portion 553d are in contact with each other. The swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 is smaller than that of the rotating arm member 550 when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c are in contact with each other and change by a predetermined amount.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, even when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the rotary crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase depending on the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570. The moving speed of the protrusion 541b can be changed.

Although the case where the rotary crank member 570 is rotated in one direction has been described in FIGS. 28 to 35, the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570 can be reversed in the middle. The timing for reversing the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570 is a state in which the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first non-transmission wall portion 553b (for example, FIGS. 28 (a), 31 and 32 (a)). And FIG. 32 (b), the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position), and the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (for example, FIG. 29 (a), Refer to FIGS. 29 (b), 34 (b) and 35 (a), the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the overhanging position).

In this case, since the rotating arm member 550 is not brought into contact with the rotating crank member 570 in the rotating direction, the resistance applied from the rotating arm member 550 to the rotating crank member 570 when the rotating crank member 570 is reversed in the rotating direction is increased. It can be suppressed. Further, in the present embodiment, a position detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position and a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the overhanging position is arranged. It is possible to facilitate control of reversing the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570 while the moving arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position or the overhanging position.

By reversing the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570, it is possible to increase the variation of the reciprocating operation of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the vertical direction.

For example, from the state where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 28 (a)), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise half a turn (see FIG. 29 (a)), and then rotated. An example is an example in which the rotation arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position by reversing the direction of rotation of the dynamic crank member 570 and rotating it half a turn clockwise (see FIG. 28A). That is, the sliding protrusion 574 is moved on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552.

In this case, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is separated from the reference horizon O by a distance h1 vertically upward from the reference horizon O for half the period of the rotation cycle of the rotary crank member 570, and is a distance h3 (h3 <h1). ) Moves down to a position separated. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis is from 0 degrees to 180 degrees. Next, the protrusion 541b is moved from a position vertically above the reference horizon O by a distance h3 to a position separated from the reference horizon O by a distance h1 (h1> h3) for half the period of the rotation cycle of the rotary crank member 570. Move up. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis is from 180 degrees to 360 degrees.

As a result, when the rotary crank member 570 rotates at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is moved downward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3) and is moved up by a predetermined distance (h1-h3). Can be the same as the period.

Further, for example, from the state where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 32 (a)), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise 1/4 turn (see FIG. 34 (a)). Next, a case where the rotation arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position is exemplified by reversing the direction of rotation of the rotary crank member 570 and rotating it counterclockwise by 1/4 turn (FIG. 32). See (a)). That is, it is a case where the sliding protrusion 574 moves on the side close to the shaft support hole 552.

In this case, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is separated from the reference horizon O by a distance h1 vertically upward from the reference horizon O in a period of 1/4 of the rotation cycle of the rotary crank member 570, and is a distance h3 (h3) from the reference horizon O. It moves down to a position separated by <h1). In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along the curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis is from 0 degrees to 90 degrees. Next, the protrusion 541b is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1> h3) from a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 in a period of 1/4 of the rotation cycle of the rotary crank member 570. Move up to the position. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis is from 270 degrees to 360 degrees.

As a result, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is moved downward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3) and rises by a predetermined distance (h1-h3). The period of movement can be the same, and the predetermined period can be shortened as compared with the case where the sliding protrusion 574 is moved on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552.

Further, when the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves downward, it can be partially (from an angle T11 to an angle T13) a free fall, while the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves upward. In this case, it is constantly moved at a speed that follows the rotation speed of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, even if the rotation speed of the rotary crank member 570 is the same, the movement mode of the telescopic effect device 540 when the rotary crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase depending on the moving direction of the protrusion 541b of the telescopic effect device 540 ( The degree of speed change) can be changed. In other words, the curve CW1 and the curve CC2 in the range from the angle T11 to the angle T13 in FIG. 36 can be made different.

Next, the difference in the swing angle due to the difference in the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 will be described. First, the swing angle when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the expansion state will be described.

37 to 39 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. In addition, in FIGS. 37 to 39, the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an extended state (the case where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the overhanging position) is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 37, a state in which the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510 is shown, and in FIG. 38, the protrusion 541 is frontal from the state of FIG. 37. The state of being moved counterclockwise is shown, and FIG. 39 shows the state of the protrusion 541 being moved clockwise from the state of FIG. 37. The posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIGS. 37 to 39 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIG. 29 (a). Therefore, in FIGS. 37 to 39, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the extension state is formed in an arc shape centered on the first shaft portion 512 and rotates. Along the extending direction of the arcuate hole 554 of the arm member 550. In other words, the arcuate hole 554 extends along the swing locus of the protrusion 541b. Therefore, the inner surface of the arcuate hole 554 is not arranged so as to face the swing direction of the protrusion 541b, and the arcuate hole 554 does not act as a stopper for stopping the swing of the protrusion 541b. Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b depends on how the swing of the rotating plate 520 is regulated. That is, the rotary plate 520 can swing until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, the protrusion 541b can swing counterclockwise to a swing angle θ1, and the rotary plate 520 is the second. It can swing until it comes into contact with the stopper portion 518b, and the protrusion 541b can swing clockwise up to a swing angle θ2.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, when the protrusion 541b is swung to the left side in the front view at a swing angle θ2, the protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550. In this case, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is moved in the expansion / contraction direction independently of the rotating arm member 550, and the protrusion 541b cannot return to the arcuate hole 554, which may cause a malfunction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even when the protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550, the first raising fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 are the rotating arm members. By being arranged so as to be engaged with the 550, the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 can be aligned with each other. That is, it is possible to prevent the expansion / contraction effect device 540 from being moved in the expansion / contraction direction independently of the rotation arm member 550.

As a result, the length of the rotating arm member 550 can be shortened while eliminating the defect that the protrusion 541b cannot return to the arcuate hole 554. As a result, the arrangement area of the rotating arm member 550 can be suppressed, and the arrangement area of other movable members can be secured accordingly. In addition, the material cost of the rotating arm member 550 can be reduced.

Further, when the rotating arm member 550 swings in a state where the protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554 (see FIG. 39), the positional relationship between the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 shifts, and the protrusion 541b becomes a circle. It becomes difficult to return to the arc-shaped hole 554, which may cause a malfunction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sliding protrusion 574 comes into contact with the deformed elongated hole 553 to prevent the rotating arm member 550 from swinging (see FIG. 39).

In addition, the movement locus of the point far from the rotation axis of the sliding protrusion 574 (the point farthest from the rotation axis) is formed along the side surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 that is in contact with the sliding protrusion 574. (See FIG. 39), so that the rotary crank member 570 can be rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 39 while maintaining the posture of the rotary arm member 550.

Here, for example, as shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, when the rotary crank member 570 rotates counterclockwise, immediately after the rotary arm member 550 is arranged at the overhang position (FIG. 29 (a). ), The protrusion 541b is separated from the arc hole 554, and then the protrusion 541b returns to the arc hole 554 by the time the rotary crank member 570 is arranged in the state shown in FIG. 30 (a). think of. After the protrusion 541b returns to the arcuate hole 554, the rotary crank member 570 is further rotated, and even if the rotary arm member 550 swings to the state shown in FIG. 30B, the protrusion 541b Does not cause a malfunction in which the wheel cannot return to the arcuate hole 554.

In this case, when the rotary arm member 550 and the expansion / contraction effect device 540 are each swung, the rotary crank member 570 is stopped or started controlled according to the positional relationship between the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554. There is no need to continue the rotation of the rotating crank member 570. In other words, it is only necessary to control the timing of the swing of the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and the rotating crank member 570 does not need to be controlled, and the rotation may be continued. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the control load of a complicated operation in which the expansion / contraction effect device 540 and the rotation arm member 550 are swung at different timings.

In the present embodiment, the mouth end portion 554a is formed so that the width of the arcuate hole 554 can be widened toward the opening end portion (left end portion in FIG. 39) of the arcuate hole 554. As a result, it is possible to greatly tolerate the positional deviation (positional deviation in the expansion / contraction direction of the expansion / contraction effect device 540) when the protrusion 541b returns to the arcuate hole 554, and the first raised fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e A large clearance with the rotating arm member 550 can be secured.

Next, the swing angle when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state which is a state between the expansion state and the reduction state will be described. By swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise from the state where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is in the extension state (see FIG. 37), the protrusion 541b moves corresponding to the arcuate hole 554, and the expansion / contraction effect is produced. The device 540 forms an intermediate state.

40 to 42 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. In addition, in FIGS. 40 to 42, the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state (the case where the rotation arm member 550 is arranged between the extension position and the retracted position) is illustrated. In this case, the radius formed by the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is shorter than that when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the extension state (see FIGS. 37 to 39). That is, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction.

Further, in FIG. 40, a state in which the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510 is shown, and in FIG. 41, the protrusion 541 is in front of the protrusion 541 from the state of FIG. The state of being moved counterclockwise is shown, and FIG. 42 shows the state of the protrusion 541 being moved clockwise from the state of FIG. 40.

The posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIGS. 40 to 42 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIG. 28 (b). Therefore, in FIGS. 40 to 42, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2.

At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven in conjunction with the movement of the arcuate hole 554 upward by the swing of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the arcuate hole 554 has both a function of changing the swing angle of the protrusion 541b and a function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546, as will be described later. As a result, the functions can be integrated.

As shown in FIGS. 40 to 42, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state and the shape of the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 have a radius of curvature. Although the central axes of are the same on the upper side, the radius of curvature and the posture are different from each other. Since the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 intersect at the formation angle α1 (see FIG. 42), the arc-shaped hole 554 acts as a stopper for stopping the swing of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 42). ..

As shown in FIG. 41, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the protrusion 541b does not come into contact with the arcuate hole 554. That is, since the rotating plate 520 can swing until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, the protruding portion 541b can swing up to a swing angle θ3 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (angle θ3 =). Angle θ1).

As shown in FIG. 42, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the first stopper surface 554b of the arcuate hole 554. In this state, the guide fastening portion 541e is brought into contact with the upper side surface of the rotating arm member 550 to prevent the state change of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction. Therefore, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is shaken in the state of FIG. 42. The movement is stopped.

That is, the rotating plate 520 does not swing until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, and the protruding portion 541b can swing clockwise up to a swing angle θ4 (angle θ4 <angle θ2). .. Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 by changing the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540. In the state of FIG. 42, the guide fastening portion 541e is brought into contact with the main body portion 551 of the rotating arm member 550.

Next, the swing angle when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms a reduced state will be described. By swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise from the state where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is in the intermediate state (see FIG. 40), the protrusion 541b moves corresponding to the arcuate hole 554, and the expansion / contraction effect is produced. The device 540 forms a reduced state.

43 to 45 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. In addition, in FIGS. 43 to 45, the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms a reduced state (the case where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position) is illustrated. In this case, the radius formed by the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is shorter than that when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state (see FIGS. 40 to 42). That is, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction.

Further, in FIG. 43, a state in which the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510 is illustrated, and in FIG. The state of being moved counterclockwise is illustrated, and FIG. 45 shows a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise from the front view from the state of FIG. 43. The posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIGS. 43 to 45 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIG. 28 (a). Therefore, in FIGS. 43 to 45, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven in conjunction with the movement of the arcuate hole 554 upward by the swing of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the arcuate hole 554 has both a function of changing the swing angle of the protrusion 541b and a function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546. As a result, the functions can be integrated.

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms a reduced state and the shape of the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 are different from each other. The central axis of the radius of curvature is inverted. That is, the central axis of the radius of curvature of the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is below the protrusion 541b, and the central axis of the radius of curvature of the arcuate hole 554 is located above the arcuate hole 554. In this case, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 intersect at a formation angle α2 (angle α2> angle α1), and the arcuate hole 554 acts as a stopper to stop the swing of the protrusion 541b ( (See FIGS. 44 and 45).

As shown in FIG. 44, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the second stopper surface 554c of the arcuate hole 554. In this case, the rotating plate 520 does not swing until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c (see FIG. 41), and the protruding portion 541b can swing counterclockwise to a swing angle θ5. (Angle θ5 <Angle θ1 = Angle θ3).

As shown in FIG. 45, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the third stopper surface 554d of the arcuate hole 554. In this case, the rotating plate 520 does not swing until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, and the protruding portion 541b can swing clockwise up to a swing angle θ6 (angle θ6 <angle θ4). <Angle θ2). Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction. As a result, the variation of the swing width of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 can be increased.

Here, the formation angle α2 between the movement locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 in the reduced state is formed larger than the formation angle α1 between the movement locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 in the intermediate state. To.

In the relationship between the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554, if the formation angle is 90 degrees, the protrusion 541b is swung across the arcuate hole 554, and the protrusion 541b The swing angle of is minimized. On the other hand, in the relationship between the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554, if the formation angle is 0 degrees (see FIGS. 37 to 39), the protrusion 541b is along the extending direction of the arcuate hole 554. The swing angle of the protrusion 541b is maximized. Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in the reduced state (formation angle α2) can be made smaller than the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in the intermediate state (formation angle α1) (formation angle α1 <formation angle α2). ).

As described above, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b is changed by changing the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and at that time, the inner peripheral surface of the arcuate hole 554 (first stopper surface 554b, second The stopper surface 554c and the third stopper surface 554d) function as stoppers that regulate the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540. As a result, the inner peripheral surface of the arcuate hole 554 can also be used as a portion that regulates the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in each case where the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is different. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the space for arranging the stopper that regulates the swing angle of the protrusion 541b.

Further, the stopper that regulates the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is retracted from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 by arranging the rotation arm member 550 at the retracted position. Therefore, unlike the case where the fixed stopper is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81, the stopper remains on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81 even if the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position. Can be prevented. As a result, when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position, the other member can be arranged in front of the third symbol display device 81, so that another movable member (for example, the slide operation unit 700) can be arranged. It is possible to secure an overhanging space for the support column member 720).

Further, the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 has a function as a stopper for regulating the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and a second drive to the expansion / contraction effect device 540 by swinging the rotation arm member 550. It has a function as a transmission device that transmits the driving force of the device 560 and causes the expansion / contraction effect device 540 to perform the expansion / contraction operation. As a result, the functions can be integrated and the number of parts can be reduced.

The tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 57. The tilting operation unit 600 is a unit that swings the effect member 620 (tilting operation) (see FIG. 12), and the sliding operation unit 700 is a unit that slides the tilting operation unit 600 in the left-right direction. FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700, and FIG. 47 is a rear perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700. Note that FIGS. 46 and 47 show a state in which the support member 720 (see FIG. 47) of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 is arranged at the retracted position.

FIG. 48 is a front exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700, and FIG. 49 is a rear exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700. In addition, in FIGS. 48 and 49, the tilting operation unit 600 is shown without being disassembled for easy understanding.

The slide operation unit 700 is formed by fastening and fixing one end to a base member 710 formed in a long plate shape in the left-right direction and a slide plate 711 of the base member 710 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. A strut member 720, a slide rail 730 in which one end is fastened and fixed to the strut member 720 and the other end in which the base member 610 of the tilting operation unit 600 is fastened and fixed is formed so as to be expandable and contractible in the vertical direction. A connecting member 740 in which the rear rail portion 716 of the main body portion 710 is slidably supported and pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600, and a driving force for movement of the support member 720 in the left-right direction are generated. It mainly includes a drive device 750 and a back cover member 760 formed on the back side of the drive device 750 and fastened and fixed to the base member 710.

The base member 710 is a member that forms the skeleton of the slide operation unit 700, and is a slide plate 711 that is formed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and to which a support member 720 is fastened and fixed from the back side, and a rear view of the base member 710. A shaft support hole 712 that is recessed in the lower left with a circular cross section and supports the fixed shaft portion 753a, and a shaft support hole that is recessed in a long hole shape extending in the left-right direction in the lower right of the rear view of the base member 710. A slide shaft support hole 713 in which the movable shaft portion 754a is slidably supported while the vertical position is matched with the 712, and a sliding shaft support hole 713 formed so as to be vertically swingable by a solenoid, in the left-right direction of the locking portion 725 of the support member 720. The lever member 714 that regulates the movement of the base member 714, the front rail portion 715 that projects the upper end portion of the base member 710 toward the front side in an arc shape with a downward cross section and rolls the upper rolling member 742 of the connecting member 740, and the front surface thereof. The vertical position of the rear rail portion 716, which is recessed in the rail portion 715 from the rear side in an arc shape and through which the insertion plate portion 741b of the connecting member 740 is inserted, coincides with the shaft support hole 712 at the lower left side of the base member 710 when viewed from the rear. The slide origin detection sensor 717, which is located on the right side of the shaft support hole 712, and the slide shaft support hole 713 at the lower right side of the base member 710 when the vertical position coincides with the slide. It mainly includes a slide origin detection sensor 718 arranged at a position on the left side of the shaft support hole 713.

Since the lever member 714 regulates the sliding movement of the support member 720 to be fastened and fixed to the slide plate 711 in the left-right direction, the driving force of the driving device 750 when the tilting operation unit 600 is maintained in the retracted position is not required. Can be done.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the tilting operation unit 600 is moved along the forming direction (arc trajectory) of the front rail portion 715 and the rear rail portion 716, the left and right of the support column member 720 connected to the tilting operation unit 600 are left and right. The sliding movement in the direction can occur due to the action of gravity applied to the tilting operation unit 600. For example, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 46), the moving direction of the tilting operation unit 600 is directed diagonally downward along the shape of the front rail portion 715. Therefore, even if the movement direction of the support column member 720 connected to the tilting operation unit 600 is the left-right direction along the movement direction of the slide plate 711, the support column member 720 may be moved by gravity. In the present embodiment, the lever member 714 is swung downward to be engaged with the locking portion 725 of the support member 720, and the movement of the support member 720 in the left-right direction is restricted, so that the driving force of the drive device 750 is restricted. The strut member 720 can be maintained in the retracted position even if the above is unnecessary. Therefore, the durability of the drive device 750 can be improved.

The slide origin detection sensor 717 is used to detect whether or not the support column member 720 is arranged at the origin position (retracted position) of the slide movement. The slide origin detection sensor 717 has a pair of light emitting parts and a light receiving part, and the light emitting parts and the light receiving part are provided side by side in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, the light emitting unit is arranged so as to irradiate light from the back side to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light emitting unit can receive (detect) the light emitted from the light emitting unit. The light receiving portion is arranged with a gap of 10 mm on the front side of the. Details will be described later, but when the strut member 720 that is movable in the left-right direction is moved to the origin position (retracted position), the lower end portion of the strut member 720 is placed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717. It is configured to be located. Therefore, when the strut member 720 is arranged at the origin position (retracted position), the light directed from the light emitting portion to the light receiving portion is shielded by the lower end portion of the strut member 720. Thereby, by determining whether or not the light emitted from the light emitting portion to the light receiving portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717 is shielded, whether or not the support column member 720 is arranged at the origin position (retracted position) is determined. It can be determined.

The slide position detection sensor 718 is used to detect whether or not the support column member 720 is arranged at the overhang position of the slide movement. The slide position detection sensor 718 has a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit having the same positional relationship as the slide origin sensor 717. Although the details will be described later, when the strut member 720 that is movable in the left-right direction is moved to the overhanging position, the lower end portion of the strut member 720 is located between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide position detection sensor 718. It is configured as follows. Therefore, when the strut member 720 is arranged at the overhanging position, the light directed from the light emitting portion to the light receiving portion is shielded by the lower end portion of the strut member 720. Thereby, by determining whether or not the light emitted from the light emitting portion to the light receiving portion of the slide position detection sensor 718 is blocked, it is determined whether or not the support column member 720 is arranged at the overhanging position. Can be done.

The strut member 720 is formed in a vertically long plate shape and is continuously provided in the lower end portion of the main body portion 721 in the left-right direction and is bored in the front-rear direction, and the slide plate 711 of the base member 710. The first fastening portion 722 into which the screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted, and the second fastening portion 730 which is vertically connected to the left end of the main body portion 721 and is bored in the front-rear direction to fasten and fix the slide rail 730. A long hole extending in a direction parallel to the continuous connection direction of the portion 723 and the second fastening portion 723, and a slide hole 724 formed on the right side of the main body portion 721 when viewed from the front, and the right side of the main body portion 721. The lower lid portion in which the belt 755 of the drive device 750 is sandwiched between the hook-shaped locking portion 725 that protrudes upward from the lower end portion and meshes with the lever member 714 and the main body portion 721 that is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the main body portion 721. From the 726, the rolling portion 727 projecting from the back side of the lower end portion of the main body portion 721 and forming the inner peripheral surface of the slide recessed portion 764 of the back cover member 760 so as to be rollable, and the upper end portion of the main body portion 721. It mainly includes a coil spring 728 that is suspended from the lower front and connected to the hook-shaped portion 617 of the base member 610 at the lower end.

The slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed to the support column member 720 in a posture that allows expansion and contraction in the continuous direction of the second fastening portion 723.

The slide hole 724 is a long hole extending in a direction parallel to the continuous connection direction of the second fastening portion 723, and is a long hole through which the auxiliary member 615 of the tilting operation unit 600 is inserted. Therefore, the slide hole 724 can suppress the deviation of the posture of the tilting operation unit 600 that moves up and down in the left-right direction (relative rotation of the tilting operation unit 600 with respect to the support column member 720).

The lower lid portion 726 is formed with a tooth profile extending in the front-rear direction on the upper surface side. This tooth profile is formed to be meshed with the tooth profile formed on the inner peripheral surface of the belt 755 of the drive device 750. As a result, it is possible to prevent the support column member 720 from slipping on the belt 755 of the drive device 750.

Further, the lower lid portion 726 is provided with a shielding portion 726a on the lower surface side for shielding the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717 or the slide position detection sensor 718. The shielding portion 726a has a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in the slide direction (horizontal direction) of the support member 720 (and the tilting operation unit 600), and the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the movable direction is the slide origin detection sensor 717 or the slide position detection sensor 718. It is formed thinner (about 1 mm) than the gap (about 10 mm) between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion. The shielding portion 726a can be moved between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717 or the slide position detection sensor 718 by moving the support column member 720 in the left-right direction. When the support column member 720 (and the tilting operation unit 600) is at the origin position (retracted position), the shielding portion 726a is located between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717, and the slide origin is obtained. The light emitted from the light emitting portion of the detection sensor 717 to the light receiving portion is blocked. Further, when the support column member 720 (and the tilting operation unit 600) is in the overhanging position, the shielding portion 726a is located between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide position detection sensor 718, and the slide position detection is performed. The light emitted from the light emitting portion of the sensor 718 to the light receiving portion is shielded. As a result, when it is detected that the light receiving portion (or light emitting portion) of the slide origin detection sensor 717 is shielded by the shielding portion 726a, the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the origin position (evacuation position). It can be determined. Further, when it is detected that the light receiving portion (or light emitting portion) of the slide position detection sensor 718 is shielded by the shielding portion 726a, it can be determined that the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the overhanging position. it can.

The rolling portion 727 is rotatably inserted into the slide recessed portion 764 of the back cover 760 to suppress frictional resistance and suppress tilting in the front-rear direction about the lower end portion of the support column member 720. be able to.

The coil spring 728 is an urging force that moves the tilting operation unit 600 upward. Since the urging force from the coil spring 728 is constantly applied to the tilting operation unit 600, it is possible to prevent the tilting operation unit 600 from falling downward due to gravity.

The connecting member 740 is pivotally supported by a triangular plate-shaped main body member 741 rotatably supported by the shaft supporting portion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 and a rolling shaft 741c projecting from the main body member 741. A pair of tubular upper rolling members 742 that are rolled on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 of the member 710 and a rolling shaft 741c of the main body member 741 are fastened and fixed from the front side to cover the front side of the front rail portion 715. The front cover member 743 arranged in the embodiment and the lower half portion disposed on the lower portion on the back side of the front cover member 743 are externally fitted and held by the front cover member 743, and the upper half portion rolls on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. It mainly includes a cylindrical lower rolling member 744 that is moved.

The main body member 741 is a member formed in the shape of a triangular plate, which is a circular recess recessed from the back surface at the upper end portion, and is a shaft rotatably supported by the shaft support protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600. A branch 741a, an insertion plate portion 741b that is a plate-shaped member projecting to the front side at the lower end portion and is slidably inserted into the back rail portion 716 of the base member 710, and an insertion plate portion from the shaft support portion 741a. It mainly includes a pair of rolling shafts 741c which are projected in a columnar shape from a position line-symmetrical to the perpendicular line drawn to 741b to the front side and the upper rolling member 742 is rotatably supported.

Since the insertion plate portion 741b is inserted into the back rail portion 716 of the base member 710, the connecting member 740 is formed so as to be movable along the back rail portion 716. Therefore, the tilting operation unit 600 pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 741a is also formed so as to be movable along the rear rail portion 716.

The rolling shaft 741c is formed in pairs at positions symmetrical with respect to the perpendicular line drawn from the shaft support portion 741a to the insertion plate portion 741b. Therefore, when the pair of rolling shafts 741c abuts on the front rail portion 715 formed in an arc shape via the upper rolling portion 742, the load applied to the connecting member 740 from the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 ( The force in the normal direction of the arc) passes through the shaft support 741a. Therefore, the connecting member 740 can stably hold the shaft support portion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600.

The upper rolling member 742 is rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 741a and abuts on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715. That is, when the connecting member 740 is slid along the front rail portion 715, the upper rolling portion 742 is rolled on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715. As a result, the frictional resistance generated during the sliding movement of the connecting member 740 can be reduced, and the driving force required for the sliding movement can be suppressed.

The lower half of the lower rolling member 744 is rotatably fitted to the lower portion of the front cover member 743, and the upper end thereof is brought into contact with the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. That is, when the connecting member 740 is slid along the front rail portion 715, the lower rolling portion 744 is rolled on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. As a result, the frictional resistance generated between the connecting member 740 and the front rail portion 715 when the connecting member 740 slides can be reduced, and the driving force required for the slide movement can be suppressed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper rolling member 742 rolls on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715, and the lower rolling member 744 rolls on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail portion 715 are sandwiched between the upper rolling member 742 and the lower rolling member 744 of the connecting member 740 while suppressing the frictional resistance.

Here, since the center of gravity of the tilting operation unit 600 is formed upward as described later, there is a risk of tilting in the front-rear direction. In this case, since the connecting member 740 sandwiches the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail portion 715 by the upper rolling member 742 and the lower rolling member 744, the connecting member 740 is tilted in both the front and rear directions of the tilting operation unit 600. , Can generate resistance. This makes it easier to maintain the posture of the tilting operation unit 600.

The front cover member 743 is pivotally supported from the front side of the rolling shaft 741c of the connecting member 740 so that the upper rolling member 742 cannot be pulled out.

The drive device 750 is attached to a drive motor 751 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 and generates a driving force that slides and moves the support member 720, a drive gear 752 that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 751, and the drive gear 752. A shaft fixed gear 753 that is meshed and around which a belt 755 is wound, and a shaft moving gear 754 that is arranged apart from the shaft fixed gear 753 and is formed so that the belt 755 is wound and the rotary shaft 754a is slidable. , A belt 755 that is wound around the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 and moved by the rotation of the shaft fixed gear 753, and a coil that generates an urging force that moves the shaft moving gear 754 in a direction away from the shaft fixed gear 753. Mainly provided with a spring 756.

The shaft fixed gear 753 includes a fixed shaft portion 753a which is a cylindrical member as a rotating shaft and is inserted into a shaft support hole 712 of the base member 710. Further, the shaft moving gear 754 includes a moving shaft portion 754a which is a cylindrical member as a rotating shaft and is inserted into the slide shaft support hole 713 of the base member 710.

The shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 are formed as gears having the same shape. On the inner peripheral surface of the belt 755, a tooth profile that meshes with the gear teeth of the shaft fixing gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 is formed. As a result, slippage between the belt 755 and the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 can be suppressed, and the amount of rotation of the shaft fixed gear 753 can be reliably transmitted to the belt 755.

One end of the coil spring 756 is fixed to a hook-shaped portion formed on the right side of the slide shaft support hole 713n of the base member 710 when viewed from the rear, and the other end is fixed to a case covering the shaft movement gear 754. .. As a result, an urging force for moving the shaft moving gear 754 to the opposite side of the shaft support hole 712 can be generated, and an appropriate tension can be applied to the belt 755, so that the belt 755 can move the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft. It is possible to prevent the gear 754 from falling off.

The back cover member 760 is a member that covers the drive device 750 on the back surface of the base member 710, and has a main body portion 761 formed in a box shape with the front side open and a fixed shaft portion 753a on the bottom surface of the main body portion 761. A recessed portion 762 that is a recess for receiving, a moving recessed portion 763 that is a recess that is extended in the same shape as the slide shaft support hole 713 and receives the moving shaft portion 754a, and a moving recessed portion 763 that is extended in the left-right direction to receive the rolling portion 727. It mainly includes a slide recessed portion 764 which is a recess.

The slide recessed portion 764 is a recess in which the rolling portion 727 is rolled on the upper and lower inner side surfaces thereof. The frictional resistance of the sliding movement of the strut member 720 is suppressed, and the strut member 720 is suppressed from tilting in the front-rear direction. That is, when the strut member 720 is tilted in the front-rear direction, the rolling portion 727 is brought into contact with either the upper inner side surface or the lower inner side surface of the slide recessed portion 764. As a result, the inclination of the support column member 720 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed.

Next, the tilting operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. FIG. 50 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600, and FIG. 51 is a rear exploded perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600.

The tilting operation unit 600 includes a plate-shaped base member 610 that is fastened and fixed to the other end of the slide rail 730, and a box-shaped effect member 620 whose lower end is swingably supported by the base member 610. The first drive device 630 that generates the driving force for the swing of the effect member 620, the transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the first drive device 630 to the effect member 620, and the transmission member 640 that abuts and transmits the drive force. It mainly includes a torsion spring 650 that generates an urging force that moves the member 640, and a second drive device 660 that generates a driving force that opens and closes the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 of the effect member 620. ..

The base member 610 has a main body portion 611 formed in a vertically long plate shape while the slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed, and a shaft support portion of the connecting member 740 projecting in a columnar shape from the front side of the main body portion 611. A shaft support protrusion 612 on which 741a is pivotally supported and a circular hole formed in the vertical direction above the shaft support protrusion 612 so that the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 can swing. The first shaft support hole 613 and the circular hole formed vertically above the first shaft support hole 613 in the front-rear direction, and the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640 is oscillatingly supported. A biaxial support hole 614, an auxiliary member 615 formed on the back surface of the main body 611 and inserted into the slide hole 724 of the support member 720 so as to be vertically slidable, and an insertion hole through which the drive shaft of the first drive device 630 is inserted. It includes a 616, a hook-shaped hook-shaped portion 617 extending from the lower end portion of the main body portion 611 toward the back surface side, and a pair of light emitting portions and a light receiving portion arranged on the upper left portion of the back surface of the main body portion 611. It mainly includes a plumb bob origin sensor 618.

The second shaft support hole 614 includes a lower receiving plate portion 614a projecting from the lower edge thereof toward the front surface in an arcuate cross section. The lower receiving plate portion 614a guides the rotation of the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640. The lower receiving plate portion 614a is formed to have a left-right width substantially equal to the outer diameter of the tubular portion 642 (see FIG. 53 (a)).

By inserting the auxiliary member 615 into the slide hole 724, the inclination of the base member 610 in the left-right direction can be suppressed, so that the base member 610 can be smoothly slid and moved in the up-down direction.

The hook-shaped portion 617 is a portion on which one end of the coil spring 728 is hung and an urging force is applied.

The effect member 620 and the second drive device 660 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a front exploded perspective view of the effect member 620 and the second drive device 660. The sub-display device 690 arranged inside the effect member 620 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and FIGS. 50 and 51 are appropriately referred to for the description of the effect member 620 and the second drive device 660.

The effect member 620 is a box-shaped member in which the sub-display device 690 is arranged inside, and extends from above and below the rectangular plate-shaped main body member 621 and the main body member 621 from above and below to the main body member 621. An upper and lower cover member 622 that can be bent in an embodiment, and a left and right cover member 623 that is a plate-shaped member attached from both side surfaces of the upper and lower cover member 622 and forms a rectangular box shape having an open front together with the upper and lower cover member 622. A member that opens and closes the front opening, the first curtain member 624 that is connected to and moved to the fitting hole 665a of the second drive device 660, and a member that opens and closes the front opening together with the first curtain member 624. A second curtain member 625 that is moved by being pulled by the first curtain member 624, a cylindrical swing shaft portion 626 projecting from the lower back surface of the main body member 621, and a position on the lower left side of the back surface of the main body member 621. It is mainly provided with a sensor shielding portion 627 arranged at a position of shielding the light emitted from the light emitting portion to the light receiving portion of the tilting origin sensor 618 when the effect member 620 is arranged at the origin position. , The center of gravity position G (see FIG. 53) is formed above (higher position) than the swing shaft portion 626. The center of gravity position G is formed on a straight line passing through the sliding shaft portion 621a and the swinging shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53) in the inverted state (see FIG. 53).

The main body member 621 includes a columnar sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 51) that projects vertically above the swing shaft portion 626 toward the back surface side. The sliding shaft portion 621a is slidably inserted into the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 51).

The upper and lower cover members 622 are members that accommodate the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 inside in a state where the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are opened by the driving force of the driving device 660. ..

The left and right cover member 623 includes a slide groove 623a which is formed in a groove shape on the inner side surface and allows the slide protrusion 625c of the second curtain member 625 to slide.

In the slide groove 623a, a curved groove formed in an arc shape is connected to the upper and lower ends of a linear groove extending vertically. As a result, the second curtain member 625 is slidably moved along the shape of the slide groove 623a in such a manner that linear movement and curved movement occur in order.

The first curtain member 624 is a member that swings in the vertical direction about the opening / closing shaft 664 of the second drive device 660, and has a main body portion 624a having a C-shaped cross section and a main body portion thereof. A fitting portion 624b that protrudes from the end of the 624a in the left-right direction and is fitted into the fitting hole 665a of the second drive device 660 so as not to rotate relative to each other, and one end near the fitting portion 624b is the main body. Mainly includes a connecting member 624c which is oscillatedly supported by the 624 and whose other end is connected to the connecting protrusion 625b of the second curtain member 625.

The second curtain member 625 is a member that is pulled by the first curtain member 624 and is moved in the vertical direction, and has a main body portion 625a formed in a plate shape having a C-shaped cross section and a C-shaped cross section of the main body portion 624a. A connecting protrusion 625b that protrudes from the end in the left-right direction and is connected to the other end of the connecting member 624c, and a slide groove of the left and right cover member 623 that protrudes outward in the left-right direction from the vicinity of the bent portion of the main body 625a. It mainly includes a slide protrusion 625c inserted through the 623a.

The second drive device 660 includes a drive motor 661 fastened and fixed to the back side of the effect member 620, a drive gear 662 pivotally supported by the drive motor 661, and one gear meshed with the drive gear 662 to each other. A pair of transmission gears 663 that are rotated in opposite directions, and an opening / closing shaft that is rotatably supported on the front side of the main body member 621 of the effect member 620 by a shaft support mechanism (not shown) that is inserted into the transmission gear 663 so as not to rotate relative to each other. It mainly includes a 664 and a transmission member 665 fixed to both ends of the pair of opening / closing shafts 664 so as not to rotate relative to each other.

The transmission member 665 includes a fitting hole 665a into which the fitting portion 624b of the first curtain member 624 is fitted so as not to rotate relative to each other. As a result, the first curtain member 624 is swung up and down about the opening / closing shaft 664.

The description will be returned to FIGS. 50 and 51. The first drive device 630 includes a drive motor 631 in which a drive shaft is inserted into an insertion hole 616 of the base member 610 and fastened and fixed to the base member, and a screw gear-shaped worm 632 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 631. A worm wheel 633 having a screw tooth gear shape that meshes with the worm 632 is mainly provided.

The worm 632 is formed of double-threaded screws. In the present embodiment, the number of teeth of the worm wheel 633 that meshes with the worm 632 is about 20, so that the worm wheel 633 makes one rotation while the worm 632 makes 10 rotations. As a result, the rotation angles of the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 when the drive motor 631 is operated in the minimum unit of control resolution can be significantly reduced.

The worm wheel 633 has a locking protrusion 633a that protrudes from the center of the rotation shaft, is inserted into the second shaft support hole 614 of the base member 610, and is locked to the tubular portion 643 of the transmission member 640 so as not to rotate relative to each other. Be prepared. The transmission of the driving force between the worm 632 and the worm wheel 633 is structurally limited to one direction from the worm 632 to the worm wheel 633 (when the worm wheel 633 actively rotates, the force is wormed. 632 in the axial direction). As a result, the load received on the drive motor 631 when the worm wheel 633 is stopped can be reduced. Further, the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 can be stopped in a state where the power of the drive motor 631 is cut off, and the power consumption of the drive motor 631 can be suppressed.

The transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. 53 (a) and 53 (b) are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. In FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b), the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIGS. 50 and 51 are appropriately referred to for the description of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. To do. Further, in FIG. 53A, an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is arranged vertically above the tubular portion 642 is shown, and in this state, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 is the urging force of the transmission member 640. It is balanced in the swing direction. FIG. 53 (b) shows a state in which the transmission member 640 is swung by a predetermined amount counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the effect member 620 is swung by a predetermined amount from the inverted state of FIG. 53 (a).

The transmission member 640 is a member that is swung by the rotation of the worm wheel 633 (see FIG. 50), and is front and rear at one end of a main body portion 641 formed in a long rectangular rod shape and the main body portion 641. A length extending in the axial direction of the tubular portion 642 extending in the direction and locking the locking protrusion 633a of the first drive device 630 and the other end of the main body portion 641 in the axial direction of the tubular portion 642. The sliding hole 643 formed as a hole, the contact portion 644 disposed on both sides of the main body portion 641 in the swing direction, and the contact portion 644 and the front side surface of the main body portion 641 are connected. Mainly includes a wide arc-shaped front arc plate portion 645 and a wide arc-shaped rear arc plate portion 646 connecting the contact portion 644 and the back side side surface of the main body portion 641.

As shown in FIG. 53, the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 645, and the rear arc plate portion 646 are arranged so as to surround the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. This makes it possible to prevent the torsion spring 650 from falling off (disengaging) from the transmission member 640.

The tubular portion 642 is pivotally supported by the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) of the base member 610, and is locked to the locking protrusion 633a (see FIG. 50) of the first drive device 630 so as not to rotate relative to each other. To.

The sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is inserted into the sliding hole 643. As a result, when the transmission member 640 is swung around the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) by the driving force of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 50), the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 The effect member 620 is swung around the first shaft support hole 613 while being slid through the sliding hole 643 (sliding and moving in the shaft radial direction).

By swinging the effect member 620 in this way, it is possible to suppress the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the drive motor 631 is rotated in the minimum unit of the control resolution of the first drive device 630. For example, as a method of swinging the effect member 620, a method of directly connecting a gear to the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and transmitting the driving force of the drive motor to the gear can be considered. However, in this case, the angle P0, which is the minimum unit of the resolution of controlling the drive motor (see FIG. 53 (a), is shown several times larger than the actual angle P0 for easy understanding. The amount of movement X1 in which the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 deviates from the inverted state in the left-right direction when rotated by the effect member 620 increases as the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 separates from the swing shaft portion 626. Therefore, the farther the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is from the swing shaft portion 626, the more difficult it becomes to adjust the position of the center of gravity G of the effect member 620, and the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is arranged directly above the swing shaft portion 626. It becomes difficult to make the effect member 620 stand still in the inverted state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the effect member 620 is connected to the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620. The length from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the tubular portion 642 which is the swinging shaft of the transmission member 640 is the length from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the swinging shaft portion 626 which is the swinging shaft of the effect member 620. It is formed shorter than the above.

Therefore, even when the effect member 620 is long in the radial direction of the swing shaft portion 626, the angle P0, which is the minimum unit of the control resolution of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 53 (a), is understood. (The angle is shown several times larger than the actual angle P0) to suppress the movement amount X2 of the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 when the first drive device 630 is operated. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the effect member 620 stand still in an inverted state in which the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is arranged directly above the swing shaft portion 626 which is the swing axis.

Further, as a method of swinging the effect member 620, a gear tooth is formed on the effect member 620 on an arc centered on the swing shaft portion 626, and a gear meshing with the gear tooth is rotated by a drive motor. A method of swinging the effect member 620 can be considered. However, in this case, the larger the swing range of the effect member 620, the larger the range for forming the gear teeth on the arc is required in the left-right direction of the effect member 620. Therefore, when the effect member 620 is formed in a thin shape in the swing direction, the gear teeth on the arc protrude from the effect member 620, which hinders the effect of the effect. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the effect member 620 is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the effect member 620, the cylindrical portion 642, which is the swing axis, is the swing shaft portion 626, which is the swing axis of the effect member 620. It is arranged vertically above the above, and is connected to the swing shaft portion 621a at the center in the left-right direction of the effect member 620. Since the effect member 620 swings following the transmission member 640, the formation range of the transmission member 640 with respect to the swing range of the effect member 620 can be suppressed near the center in the left-right direction of the effect member 620. As a result, even if the effect member 620 is thin in the left-right direction, it is possible to prevent the transmission member 640 from protruding from the effect member 620, and the degree of freedom in designing the effect member 620 can be improved.

The lower surface of the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640. As a result, the weight of the effect member 620 is applied not only to the swing shaft portion 626 but also to the transmission member 640. That is, a force opposed to the weight of the effect member 620 can be generated not only from the swing shaft portion 626 but also from the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640. Therefore, the effect member 640 can be supported at two points, the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642, and the radial force applied to the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 can be suppressed. ..

Here, since the effect member 620 is in the normal state in the inverted state shown in FIG. 53A, the transmission member 640 can be swung from the inverted state to a predetermined amount and then quickly returned to the inverted state. Is desirable.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), when the transmission member 640 is swung counterclockwise from the front view at a swing angle φ1 from the state shown in FIG. 53 (a), the effect member 620 Is swung at a swing angle of φ2 (φ2 <φ1).

That is, the swing angle of the effect member 620 is smaller than the swing angle of the transmission member 640 that is swung by the driving force of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 50). Therefore, the effect member 620 can be easily returned to the inverted state (see FIG. 53A).

Further, in the present embodiment, a long hole-shaped sliding hole 643 is formed in the axial direction of the transmission member 640, and the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is inserted into the sliding hole 643. The swing shafts of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are different, and the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 has a shorter swing radius than the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620. Therefore, the transmission member 640 As the sliding shaft portion 621a swings, the sliding shaft portion 621a moves away from the swinging shaft of the transmission member 640. Therefore, the arm length R1 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state (see FIG. 53A) is swung by a predetermined amount from the inverted state (see FIG. 53A). (See FIG. 54 (b)), the arm length R2 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640 is shortened.

That is, the closer to the inverted state, the shorter the arm length of the transmission member 640, and the arm length of the transmission member 640 is constant with respect to the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the transmission member 640 is swung by a predetermined angle. Compared with the case of, it can be made smaller as it approaches the inverted state. Therefore, even if the rotation speed of the drive motor 631 is not changed, the operating speed of the effect member 620 is increased near the predetermined stop position, while the operation speed of the effect member 620 is decreased near the inverted state, and the effect member 620 is inverted. It is possible to easily stand still in the state (it is possible to facilitate stop control of the effect member 620 while the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is arranged vertically above the first shaft support hole 613).

With reference to FIG. 55, the effect member 620 swings with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 640 by changing the arm length from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640. The change in angle will be described.

FIG. 55 is a schematic view schematically showing the swing angle of the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53 (a)) with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53 (a)). In FIG. 55, the rotary shaft M1 corresponds to the swing shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53 (a)) which is the rotary shaft of the effect member 620, and the rotary shaft M2 is the tubular portion 642 which is the swing shaft of the transmission member 640. (See FIG. 53 (a)). The straight lines a1 to a4 are schematic representations of the arrangement of the transmission members 640, and are straight lines drawn radially from the rotation axis M2. The straight lines a1 pass through the rotation axis M1 and the straight lines a2 to a4 are the straight lines a1. Is formed in a manner in which the formation angles of are sequentially added by 15 degrees. That is, the angles formed by the adjacent straight lines a1 to a4 are 15 degrees each.

An arc drawn with a radius equal to the arm length R1 (see FIG. 53 (a)) centered on the rotation axis M2 is illustrated by the arc SR1, and the arm length R2 centered on the rotation axis M2 (see FIG. 54 (b)). An arc drawn with a radius equal to is illustrated by arc SR2. The arc SR0 is an arc drawn around the rotation axis M1, and is an arc having a radius having a length obtained by adding the distance between the rotation axis M1 and the rotation axis M2 to the arm length R1.

These arcs assume the locus of the connection position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53 (a)). In the present embodiment, the sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 53 (a)) as a connecting position is projected from the effect member 620, and the connection position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the arc SR0. .. When the connection position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the arc SR1 or the arc SR2, a long hole is formed in the effect member 620 in the axial direction, and the transmission member 640 is used to form a long hole. It is assumed that the shaft to be inserted into the elongated hole is projected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the intersection of the straight line a1 and the arc SR0 is shown at the intersection P10, the intersection of the straight line a1 and the arc SR1 is shown at the intersection P11, and the intersection of the straight line a1 and the arc SR2 is shown at the intersection P12. Illustrated in.

Similarly, the intersection of the straight line a2 and the arc SR0 is shown at the intersection P20, the intersection of the straight line a2 and the arc SR1 is shown at the intersection P21, and the intersection of the straight line a2 and the arc SR2 is shown at the intersection P22. The intersection of the straight line a3 and the arc SR0 is shown at the intersection P30, the intersection of the straight line a3 and the arc SR1 is shown at the intersection P31, and the intersection of the straight line a3 and the arc SR2 is shown at the intersection P32. The intersection of the straight line a4 and the arc SR0 is shown at the intersection P40, the intersection of the straight line a4 and the arc SR1 is shown at the intersection P41, and the intersection of the straight line a4 and the arc SR2 is shown at the intersection P42. The intersection P10 and the intersection P11 are arranged at the same position, and the intersection P40 and the intersection P42 are arranged at the same position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P10 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P20 is shown by the angle A10, and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P11. The angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P21 is shown by the angle A11, and the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P12 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P22 is shown by the angle A12. Will be done.

Similarly, the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P20 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P30 is shown by the angle A20, and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P21 and the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P31 are shown. The angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P22 is shown by the angle A21, and the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P22 is shown by the angle A22. The angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P30 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P40 is shown by the angle A30, and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P31 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P41. The angle formed by the and is shown by the angle A31, and the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P32 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P42 is shown by the angle A32. It should be noted that these angles correspond to the swing angles of the effect member 620.

Here, the ratio of (distance between the rotating shaft M1 and the rotating shaft M2: arm length R1: arm length R2) is (1: 2.32: 2.54) in the present embodiment. When the angle is actually measured, the angle A32 is 11.07 degrees, the angle A31 is 10.77 degrees, and the angle A30 is 11.37 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a4 and the straight line a3, the swing angle of the staging member 640 is the largest when the transmitting member 640 and the staging member 620 are connected along the arc SR0. , The transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are formed along the arc SR2 as described above (the angle A30 is closer to the angle A32 than the angle A31).

The angle A22 is 10.87 degrees, the angle A21 is 10.59 degrees, and the angle A20 is 10.82 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a3 and the straight line a2, the swing angle when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected along the arc SR0 is along the arc SR2. It is less than the case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between the angle A22 and the angle A20 is smaller than the difference between the angle A20 and the angle A21 (the angle A20 is closer to the angle A22 than the angle A21).

The angle A12 is 10.78 degrees, the angle A11 is 10.50 degrees, and the angle A10 is 10.53 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a2 and the straight line a1, the swing angle when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected along the arc SR0 is along the arc SR1. This is more than the case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between the angle A12 and the angle A10 is larger than the difference between the angle A10 and the angle A11 (the angle A10 is closer to the angle A11 than the angle A12).

From these, by setting the locus of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53 (a)) to the arc SR0, for example, when the transmission member 640 is swung at a constant velocity, the effect member It can be seen that the degree of freedom in adjusting the angular velocity of 620 can be improved. That is, the angular velocity when the transmission member 640 is arranged on the straight line a4 is closer to the angular velocity (high-speed side) when the locus of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is the arc SR2, and the transmission member 640 is on the straight line a1. The angular velocity at the time of arrangement can be brought closer to the angular velocity (low speed side) when the locus of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is the arc SR1.

Further, when the ratio of each angle is calculated, the angle A22 / angle A32 is 0.98, and the angle A12 / angle A22 is 0.99. The angle A21 / angle A31 is 0.98, and the angle A11 / angle A21 is 0.99. That is, when the locus of the connecting position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53 (a)) is the arcs SR1 and SR2, the transmission member 640 is swung toward the inverted state at a constant velocity. In this case, the reduction ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 is as small as 1 to 2%.

On the other hand, the angle A20 / angle A30 is 0.95, and the angle A10 / angle A20 is 0.97. That is, when the locus of the connecting position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53 (a)) is an arc SR0 (an arc centered on the rotation axis M1), the transmission member 640 is inverted at a constant velocity. The reduction ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 when it is swung toward the state can be set to 3 to 5%. That is, the reduction ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 can be increased as compared with the case where the locus of the connecting position is the arcs SR1 and SR2 (arcs centered on the rotation axis M2).

As shown in FIG. 53A, the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is in contact with the lower end portion of the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state. In the inverted state, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is formed vertically above the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640, so that the force due to the own weight of the effect member 620 is applied to the swing shaft portion. It is hung vertically downward with respect to 626 and the tubular portion 642. Therefore, since the force of the component in the direction in which the effect member 620 is swung is not generated by the own weight of the effect member 620, the posture of the effect member 620 is maintained in the inverted state even if the power of the first drive device 630 is cut off. Can be done. As a result, the durability of the first drive device 630 can be improved.

Further, since the force due to the own weight of the effect member 620 is applied vertically downward to the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642, the rotational resistance of the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 can be increased. It is possible to easily maintain the posture of the effect member 620 in the inverted state.

The torsion spring 650 is an elastic spring in which an urging force is generated in the direction of rewinding the coil portion 651 (direction of pushing back the transmission member 640) as the transmission member 640 swings, and the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620. The coil portion 651 wound around, the urging arm portion 652 extending along both side surfaces of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 in the swing direction, and the end of the coil portion 651 and the end of the urging arm portion 652. It mainly includes a connecting arm portion 653 that connects the portions through between the tubular portion 642 and the swing shaft portion 626.

The coil portion 651 is formed with an inner diameter of about three times the diameter of the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620. Therefore, when the urging arm portion 652 is swung to generate a load that deforms the coil portion 651 in diameter, the amount of deformation of the coil portion 651 can be secured, and the urging arm portion 652 or the connecting arm portion 653 is deformed. Can be suppressed from concentrating.

The urging arm portion 652 is surrounded by the main body portion 641, the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 645, and the back arc plate portion 646 of the transmission member 640. As a result, it is possible to prevent the urging arm portion 652 from falling off (disengaging) from the transmission member 640.

Further, the urging arm portion 652 is formed so as to be in contact with the lower receiving plate portion 614a on the swinging plane of the transmission member 640. Therefore, an urging force for pushing back the transmission member 640 is generated from the urging arm portion 652 arranged in the swing direction of the transmission member 640, and the urging arm portion arranged on the opposite side of the transmission member 640 in the swing direction. The 652 is prevented from moving to the lower receiving plate portion 614a. As a result, the torsion spring 650 is formed so as to be able to generate an urging force in the direction of pushing back the transmission member 640 regardless of the swing direction of the transmission member 640.

At the connecting portion of the urging arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653, a bent portion 653a that is bent on the opposite side of the transmission member 640 is formed. In this case, as will be described later, the abutting portion 644 of the transmission member 640 is pressed against the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650, so that the bent portion 653a is extended (see FIG. 54 (b)). As a result, the contact position between the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 becomes far from the tubular portion 642, and the moment applied to the transmission member 640 from the torsion spring 650 is increased. Can be done.

With reference to FIG. 54, a change in the urging force generated from the torsion spring 650 and pushing back the transmission member 640 will be described. 54 (a) and 54 (b) are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. In FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIG. 53 is appropriately used to explain the change in the urging force generated from the torsion spring 650. refer.

Further, in FIG. 54 (a), from the state of FIG. 53 (b), the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise in the front view, and the urging arm portion 652 on the left side in the front view is the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640. The state of starting to be pressed against the inner surface is shown. In FIG. 54 (b), the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front view, and the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 is pulled from the state of FIG. 54 (a). The extended state is illustrated.

In the state of FIG. 54A, an urging force that pushes back the transmission member 640 is generated in the urging arm portion 652 on the left side of the torsion spring 650 when viewed from the front. This urging force is the sum of the urging force generated starting from the coil portion 651 and the urging force generated starting from the bent portion 653a.

That is, in the state of FIG. 53B, since the transmission member 640 is not pressed against the bending portion 653a arranged on the left side of the front view among the pair of bending portions 653a, the urging arm on the left side of the front view of the torsion spring 650. Only the urging force starting from the coil portion 651 is generated in the portion 652 as the urging force for pushing back the transmission member 640.

On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 54A, in addition to the urging force starting from the coil portion 651, the urging force is generated by the deformation of the urging arm portion 652 starting from the bent portion 653a. Therefore, the spring constant of the urging arm portion 652 can be increased. The deformation of the urging arm portion 652 starting from the bent portion 653a is shorter than the deformation starting from the coil portion 651, so that the unit deformation amount of the transmission member 640 is shorter. The urging force generated by the hit can be increased.

In the state of FIG. 54B, the bending portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 is pushed by the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640, so that the angle formed by the urging arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653 is widened. As a result, the contact position length L1 which is the distance between the contact position of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 and the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the tubular portion 642 in the state of FIG. 54 (a). The same contact position length L2 in the state of FIG. 54 (b) is separated from the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640. That is, the contact position length is extended. As a result, the arm length of the torsion spring 650 that pushes back the transmission member 640 is lengthened, so that the moment applied from the torsion spring 650 to the transmission member 640 can be increased.

Therefore, for example, when the urging force generated by the torsion spring 650 is substantially the same in the state of FIG. 54 (a) and the state of FIG. 54 (b), the transmission member 640 is more loaded in FIG. 54 (b). The moment to be made can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to push back the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 that pushes back the transmission member 640 is small while the swing angle of the transmission member 640 (effect member 620) from the retracted position is small, and the swing angle is large. Indeed, it is elastically increased, and is increased more than the elastic increase with the state of FIG. 54 (a) as a boundary. Therefore, when the urging force of the torsion spring 650 required when the effect member 620 is set to the maximum swing angle (see FIG. 54B) is determined, the torsion spring only elastically increases. When the swing angle is small, the urging force can be set smaller (a soft spring can be used).

As a result, the degree to which the operating speed of the effect member 620 at the start of swinging is decelerated by the urging force of the torsion spring 650 can be reduced, and the operating speed of the effect member 620 at the start of operation can be increased. ..

Further, since the urging force is increased by the elastic increase or more with the state of FIG. 54 (a) as a boundary, the swing angle of the effect member 620 is set to be equal to or more than the state of FIG. 54 (a). The deceleration acceleration of the effect member 620 can be increased. As a result, the timing at which the effect member 620 starts decelerating can be delayed between the swinging operations of the effect member 620. Therefore, the swing angle at which the effect member 620 can be swung at a high speed can be increased, and the effect of the tilting operation unit 600 can be improved.

Next, the sliding operation of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a front view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700. In FIG. 56, the state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position is shown by an imaginary line, and the state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is slid and moved by a predetermined amount from the retracted position is shown by a solid line.

As shown in FIG. 56, the connecting member 740 connecting the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700, which are formed so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, is formed so as to be movable in the extending direction of the front rail portion 715. .. Here, since the weight of the tilting operation unit 600 is loaded on the connecting member 740, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position, the tilting operation unit 600 is moved to the left along the front rail portion 715 by gravity. Be urged towards you. Therefore, in order to maintain the tilting operation unit 600 in the retracted position, it is conceivable to fix the drive device 750.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lever member 714 is formed so as to be swingable up and down, and when the lever member 714 is swung downward, it is meshed with the locking portion 725 of the strut member 720 and left and right of the strut member 720. Slide movement in the direction is restricted.

As a result, the tilting operation unit 600 can be mechanically maintained in the retracted position. Therefore, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the retracted position, the tilting operation unit 600 is moved in a state where the drive device 750 is stopped. Can be maintained in the retracted position. Therefore, the durability of the drive device 750 can be improved.

From the state where the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the retracted position, the lever member 714 is swung upward to operate the driving device 750, so that the support column member 720 can be moved and the tilting operation unit 600 is moved in the left-right direction. Can be slid to.

As shown in FIG. 56, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the retracted position in the inverted state, the shaft support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 is arranged vertically below the center of gravity G of the tilting operation unit 600.

Here, since the direction of slide movement of the tilting operation unit 600 is along the front rail portion 715, the tilting operation unit 600 is moved while being slid by a predetermined amount from the retracted position (see the imaginary line in FIG. 56) in FIG. 56. Always has a vertical component.

Therefore, if the center of gravity G of the tilting operation unit 600 and the shaft support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 are displaced in the vertical direction, a load may be applied from the connecting member 740 in the direction of rotating the tilting operation unit 600. This also applies when the tilting operation unit 600 is slid and moved in the opposite direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the shaft support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 is arranged vertically below the center of gravity G, the vertical component of the force applied from the connecting member 740 to the tilting operation unit 600 and the center of gravity G are aligned. It is formed on the same line. As a result, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting member 740 in the direction of rotating the tilting operation unit 600, and it is possible to stabilize the posture of the tilting operation unit 600.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the influence of the tilting motion (swinging motion) of the tilting motion unit 600 on the sliding motion of the sliding motion unit 700 will be described. FIG. 57 is a front view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700. Note that FIG. 57 shows a state in which the effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is swung to the state shown in FIG. 54 (b).

As shown in FIG. 57, in a state where the effect member 620 is swung counterclockwise in the front view, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is arranged on the left side in the front view with respect to the connecting member 740. Therefore, the acceleration applied to the connecting member 740 toward the left in the front view is increased.

In this case, since the driving force required to slide the tilting operation unit 600 from the retracted position can be suppressed, the drive motor 751 of the drive device 750 can be miniaturized.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the tilting operation unit 2600 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59.

In the first embodiment, the case where the contact surface of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 is a flat surface has been described, but the tilting operation unit 2600 in the second embodiment is the main body portion of the transmission member 2640. The 2641 includes an abutting portion 2641a that comes into contact with the tip end portion of the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

58 (a), 58 (b) and 59 are front views of the transmission member 2640 and the torsion spring 650 in the second embodiment. In FIGS. 58 (a), 58 (b) and 59, the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines. Further, FIG. 58 (a) shows an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 2640 is arranged vertically above the tubular portion 642, and FIG. 58 (b) shows the inverted state of FIG. 58 (a). The transmission member 2640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined amount when viewed from the front, and the lower surface of the abutting portion 2641a is in contact with the tip end portion of the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. A state in which the transmission member 2640 is further swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front is shown from the state shown in FIG. 58 (b).

As shown in FIG. 58, when the transmission member 2640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 58 (a)), the main body portion 2641 is pressed against the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650, and the main body portion 2641 is pressed. The torsion spring 650 generates an urging force that swings in the direction of returning to the inverted state. When the transmission member 2640 is swung and the urging arm portion 652 is deformed, the coil portion 651 is deformed in diameter by the connecting arm portion 653 connected to the urging arm portion 652 on the deformed side. That is, as the diameter of the coil portion 651 is reduced, the urging force that swings the transmission member 2640 in the direction of returning to the inverted state is increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58, due to the difference in the swing angle between the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the transmission member 2640, the contact position between the main body portion 2641 of the transmission member 2640 and the urging arm portion 652 ( The tip position of the urging arm portion 652) is changed by the swing of the transmission member 2640. That is, the more the transmission member 2640 is swung, the more the tip of the urging arm 652 is moved to the tip side of the main body 2641 (the side closer to the sliding hole 643).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), when the lower surface of the abutting portion 2641a is in contact with the tip end portion of the urging arm portion 642, the transmission member 2640 is further rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The urging arm portion 642 is restricted from moving toward the tip end side of the main body portion 2641 by the abutting portion 2641a.

As shown in FIG. 59, when the transmission member 2640 is swung in a state where the transfer arm portion 642 is restricted from moving by the contact portion 2641a, the torsion spring 650 is deformed as a whole. That is, the root side (bending portion 653a side) of the urging arm portion 642 is moved downward by the amount that the urging arm portion 642 is restricted from moving toward the tip end side of the main body portion 2641. As a result, the connecting arm portion 653 is moved in the direction of reducing the diameter of the coil portion 651 (the direction in which the urging force of the torsion spring 650 increases).

That is, it is possible to increase the urging force of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 2640 is swung to the state shown in FIG. 59 as compared with the case where the contact portion 2641a is not provided. As a result, the degree of change in the urging force generated by the torsion spring 650 (the rate of increase in the urging force with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 2640) is increased in the state shown in FIG. 59 as compared with the state shown in FIG. 58. Can be done. Therefore, when the swing angle of the transmission member 2640 is small, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 is suppressed and the starting speed of the transmission member 2640 is increased, while when the swing angle is large (see FIG. 59). The urging force of the torsion spring 650 can be increased non-linearly (more than the elastic change), and sufficient urging force can be obtained to return the transmission member 2640 to the inverted state.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the tilting operation unit 3600 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60.

In the first embodiment, the case where the contact surface of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 has a constant width has been described, but the tilting operation unit 3600 in the third embodiment is the main body portion of the transmission member 3640. The side surface of the 3641 that comes into contact with the tip end portion of the torsion spring 650 is provided with an inclined side surface 3641a that is inclined so as to become wider toward the tip end side. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

60 (a) and 60 (b) are front views of the transmission member 3640 and the torsion spring 650 in the third embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 60A and FIG. 60B, the outer shape of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines. Further, FIG. 60 (a) shows an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 3640 is arranged vertically above the tubular portion 642, and FIG. 60 (b) shows an inverted state of FIG. 60 (a). The state in which the transmission member 3640 is swung by a predetermined amount counterclockwise when viewed from the front is shown.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the transmission member 3640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 60A), the main body portion 3461 is pressed against the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650, and the main body portion 3641 is pressed. The torsion spring 650 generates an urging force that swings in the direction of returning to the inverted state.

When the transmission member 3640 is swung from the state shown in FIG. 60 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 60 (b), the difference in swing angle between the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the transmission member 3640 The contact position between the main body portion 3641 of the transmission member 3640 and the urging arm portion 652 (the tip position of the urging arm portion 652) is changed by the swing of the transmission member 3640. That is, as the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 from the inverted state (see FIG. 60 (a)) becomes larger, the tip of the urging arm 652 becomes the tip side of the main body 3641 (the side closer to the sliding hole 643). ) Is moved to.

Therefore, the tip of the urging arm portion 652 slides along the inclined side surface 3641a of the main body portion 3461. That is, when the transmission member 3640 is swung, the torsion spring 650 is deformed due to the width of the transmission member 3640 being expanded by the inclined side surface 3641a in addition to the deformation caused by the swing angle of the transmission member 3640. .. In this case, the width of the transmission member 3640 is further expanded toward the tip of the transmission member 3640. Therefore, the larger the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 from the inverted state (see FIG. 60A), the more the inclined side surface 3641a As a result, the width of the transmission member 3640 is increased, so that the torsion spring 650 is greatly deformed. Therefore, as the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 increases, the rate of increase in the urging force generated by the torsion spring 650 (change in the urging force of the torsion spring 650 with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 3640) can be increased.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the tilting operation unit 4600 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64.

In the first embodiment, the case where the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 is fixed has been described, but in the tilting operation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, the transmission member 4640 is in contact with the contact portion 644 in addition to the contact portion 644. A moving contact member 4647 having a width shorter than that of the portion 644 is provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 61 (a) is a rear perspective view of the transmission member 4640 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 61 (b) is a rear perspective view of the moving contact member 4647. In FIG. 61A, the moving contact member 4647 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the front arc plate portion 4645 of the transmission member 4640 has guide holes 4645a that are symmetrically arranged symmetrically at intervals shorter than the arrangement interval of the contact portions 644 and are bored in the front-rear direction. Be prepared. The guide hole 4645a is a through hole that guides the pair of back surface protrusions 4647b of the moving contact member 4647 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the moving contact member 4647 has a main body portion 4647a formed in a long plate shape and a pair of back projections projecting from both ends of the main body portion 4647a to the back surface side. Mainly includes a portion 4647b and a front protrusion portion 4647c projecting from the substantially center of the main body portion 4647 to the front side in a hemispherical tip.

One end of the coil spring 4648 is fixed to the opposite side of the front protrusion 4647c of the main body 4647a, and the other end of the coil spring 4648 is fixed to the main body 641b (FIG. 62 (c) and FIG. (See FIG. 62 (d)). Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the coil spring 4648 is not shown in FIGS. 61 (a), 61 (b), 62 (a) and 62 (b).

The back protrusion 4647b is a portion to be inserted into the guide hole 4645a of the transmission member 4640 from the front side, and has a sufficient length (contacts with the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650) from the front arc plate portion 4645 at the time of insertion. It is formed in such a way that a possible length) is projected. The back surface protrusion 4647b is formed so as to be inclined at an angle of contact (see FIG. 64 (b)) with the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 on a surface (line). As a result, the load applied to the urging arm 652 is reduced (stress concentration is suppressed) as compared with the case where the urging arm 652 and the back projection 4647b are in contact with each other at a point, and the urging arm 652 Durability can be improved.

The front protrusion 4647c is a portion that comes into contact with the main body member 4621 (see FIG. 63) of the effect member 4620, and the moving contact member 4647 has a relationship with the escape opening 4621a formed in the main body member 4621. It may be separated from the front arc plate portion 4645 (see FIG. 62 (c)), or the moving contact member 4647 may be brought close to the front arc plate portion 4645 (see FIG. 62 (d)). Since the tip of the front protrusion 4647c is formed in a hemispherical shape, it is possible to easily mount the front protrusion 4647c on the surface of the main body member 4621 from the escape opening 4621a.

62 (a) and 62 (b) are rear perspective views of the transmission member 4640, and FIGS. 62 (c) and 62 (d) are top views of the transmission member 4640. In addition, in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (c), the state in which the moving contact member 4647 is separated from the front arc plate portion 4645 is shown in FIGS. 62 (b) and 62 (d). The state in which the 4647 is brought close to the front arc plate portion 4645 is shown in each figure.

FIG. 63 is a front schematic view schematically showing the main body member 4621 of the effect member 4620. The transmission member 4640 that forms an inverted state with respect to the main body member 4621 is the central state 4640C, and the state in which the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise in the front view is the counterclockwise swing state 4640L. The state of being swung clockwise in the front view is shown as a clockwise swing state 4640R by imaginary lines. Further, in the central state 4640C, the counterclockwise swing state 4640L, and the clock swing state 4640R, the abutting portion 644, the front arc plate portion 4645, and the rear arc plate portion 646 are omitted for easy understanding. ..

The main body member 4621 includes an escape opening 4621a bored in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 63, the relief opening 4621a is a region (central state 4640C and counterclockwise swing) in which the front protrusion 4647c (see FIG. 62) moves when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise in the front view. It is formed in a moving state (between 4640L).

When the front protrusion 4647c of the transmission member 4640 overlaps the relief opening 4621a in front view, the front protrusion 4647c is inserted through the relief opening 4621a, and the moving contact member 4647 is moved by the elastic force of the coil spring 4648 to the transmission member 4640. It is separated from the main body portion 641 of the above (see FIG. 62 (c)). On the other hand, when the front protrusion 4647c does not overlap with the escape opening 4621a (overlaps with the main body member 4621), the front protrusion 4647c is brought into contact with the back side surface of the main body member 4621 of the effect member 4620, and the moving contact member The 4647 is brought close to the main body 641 of the transmission member 4640 (see FIG. 62 (d)).

That is, the back projection 4647b of the moving contact member 4647 projects to a position where it can contact the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise from the front view. Is done. Therefore, when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise from the front view, the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 is generated as compared with the case where the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front view. The rate of increase of the urging force (the degree of increase of the urging force with respect to the swing angle) can be increased.

64 (a) and 64 (b) are front views of the transmission member 4640 and the torsion spring 650. In addition, in FIGS. 64A and 64B, the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 4620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the main body portion 4647a of the moving contact member 4647 is shown for easy understanding. Illustration is omitted. Further, FIG. 64 (a) shows an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 4640 is arranged vertically above the tubular portion 642, and FIG. 64 (b) shows the inverted state of FIG. 64 (a). A state in which the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise by a predetermined amount in front view and the urging arm portion 652 on the left side in front view is in contact with the back protrusion 4647b is shown.

As shown in FIG. 64 (b), while the swing angle of the transmission member 4640 is small, it is possible to contact the urging arm portion 652 from the opposite side (contact portion 644 side) of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 4640. By doing so, it is possible to increase the urging force generated by the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is rotated clockwise in the front view.

As a result, while increasing the starting speed when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise in the front view, the urging force when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise in the front view is improved. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect member 4620 from colliding with the inner surface of the back case 210.

That is, when the effect member 4620 is in the inverted state while the tilting operation unit 4600 is arranged in the retracted position, the inner surface of the rear case 210 is brought close to the effect member 620 (see FIG. 5). Here, when the effect member 4620 is vigorously swung from the state of being swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 57) to the inverted state, the effect member 4620 cannot be fully decelerated, and the rear case 210 There is a risk that the effect member 4620 will collide with the inner surface of the.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rear projection portion 4647b is projected at the timing when the effect member 4620 is swung clockwise from the inverted state (see FIG. 62 (d)), and the urging force of the torsion spring 650 is applied. Can be increased. As a result, the effect member 4620 is sufficiently provided when the effect member 4620 is tilted clockwise from the front view while maintaining a high operating speed when the effect member 4620 is tilted counterclockwise from the inverted state. Can be slowed down to.

Further, the direction of pushing back the back protrusion 4647b at the contact point between the back protrusion 4647b and the urging arm 652 arranged on the opposite side of the transmission member 4640 in the swing direction (FIG. 64 (b), counterclockwise when viewed from the front). ) Is urged. As a result, the transmission member 4640 can be pushed back with a larger urging force as compared with the case where the transmission member 4640 is pushed back only by the urging arm portion 652 arranged on the side close to the transmission member 4640 (right side in FIG. 64B). Can be pushed back. On the other hand, it is also possible to improve the urging force generated by the urging arm portion 652 arranged on the side close to the transmission member 4640.

That is, as shown in FIG. 64, the distance from the position where the contact portion 644 arranged on the opposite side of the transmission member 4640 and the urging arm portion 652 are in contact with the lower receiving plate portion 614a. The distance from the lower receiving plate portion 614a to the bent portion 653a is shorter than that of the above. In this case, it is easy to move the bent portion 653a by the force from the contact portion 644 with the lower receiving plate portion 614 as a fulcrum, but the reverse is difficult (the distance from the fulcrum to the point of action is different). Because there is).

Therefore, the urging force generated by the deformation of the urging arm portion 652 on the left side of the front view caused by the contact between the contact portion 644 and the urging arm portion 652 is generated by the deformation of the entire torsion spring 650. That is, when the urging arm portion 652 on the left side of the front view and the back protrusion 4647b are brought into contact with each other, the bent portion 653a on the left side of the front view is left side of the front view (inner diameter of the coil portion 651) with the lower receiving plate portion 641a as a fulcrum. Deformation that is moved in the direction of narrowing) causes deformation of the connecting arm portion 653, the coil portion 651, and the urging arm portion 652 on the right side of the front view. In this case, since the coil portion 651 is deformed so that the inner diameter is reduced, an urging force is generated on the coil portion 651 and the connecting arm portion 653 to the side where the inner diameter of the coil portion 651 is increased, and the right side (transmission member) in front view. The urging arm portion 652 (on the swinging direction side of the 4640) can improve the urging force that pushes back the transmission member 640.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the combined operation unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68.

In the first embodiment, when the rotation arm member 550 is arranged at the overhanging position, the second non-transmission wall portion 553c has a shape along a circle centered on the rotation axis of the rotation crank member 570. However, the rotating arm member 5550 according to the fifth embodiment includes a recessed portion 5556 in which the non-transmission wall portion 5553c is recessed in a direction away from the rotating crank member 570. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

65 to 68 are front views of the combined operation unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 65, the state in which the rotary arm member 5550 is arranged at the overhanging position and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotary crank member 570 is arranged near the left end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is shown in FIG. 66. Then, from the state of FIG. 65, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the sliding protrusion 574 is housed in the first recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c. However, in FIG. 67, the rotation crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the state of FIG. 66 to the position where the sliding protrusion 574 is separated from the recessed portion 5556. From the state, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the sliding protrusion 574 is housed in the recessed portions 5556 on two surfaces from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5535c. To.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c of the composite operation unit 5550 includes a recessed portion 5556 recessed in a direction away from the rotating crank member 570.

The recessed portion 5556 has an arc-shaped (about 1/4 of the circular shape) first wall portion 5556a formed on the left side of the front view and an arc-shaped (about 1/4 of the circular shape) formed on the right side of the front view. The second wall portion 5556b of the above is mainly provided, and the shape is such that the sliding projection portion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 can be slid. That is, the recessing depth of the recessed portion 5556 from the second non-transmission wall portion 55553c is set to be equal to or less than the radius of the sliding protrusion 574, and the connecting portion between the recessed portion 5556 and the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is smooth. It is formed from a curved surface.

When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 65 to the state shown in FIG. 66, a gap is generated between the sliding protrusion 574 and the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c. The rotating arm member 5550 is swung until it comes into contact with the sliding protrusion 574 by the urging force generated by the torsion spring 517a. In this case, as the rotary crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the first recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is rotated while being slid by the sliding protrusion 574. The moving arm member 5550 is swung.

That is, from the state shown in FIG. 65 to the state shown in FIG. 66, the rotating arm member 5550 is merely swung by the urging force of the torsion spring 517a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second driving device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not swung. Therefore, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotary crank member 570 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a, the rotary arm member 5550 and the rotation The crank member 570 forms a non-transmissive state.

When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, the sliding protrusion 574 is the first concave portion from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c. It is pressed against the second wall portion 5556b of the setting portion 5556, and the rotating arm member 5550 is swung (pushed down) again to the overhanging position. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, the rotating arm member 5550 is swung by the second wall portion 5556b being pushed and moved by the sliding protrusion portion 574. The driving force of the second driving device 560 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 5550 via the rotating crank member 570.

Therefore, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotary crank member 570 is arranged to face the second wall portion 5556b, the rotary arm member 5550 and the rotation The crank member 570 forms a transmission state.

When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 67 to the state shown in FIG. 68, a gap is generated between the sliding protrusion 574 and the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c. The rotating arm member 5550 is swung until it comes into contact with the sliding protrusion 574 by the urging force generated by the torsion spring 517a. In this case, as the rotary crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the second recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is rotated while being slid by the sliding protrusion 574. The moving arm member 5550 is swung.

That is, from the state shown in FIG. 67 to the state shown in FIG. 68, the rotating arm member 5550 is merely oscillated by the urging force of the torsion spring 517a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second driving device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not swung. Therefore, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotary crank member 570 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a, the rotary arm member 5550 and the rotation The crank member 570 forms a non-transmissive state.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view and the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a, the rotation is rotated. When a non-transmission state is formed between the dynamic crank member 570 and the rotary arm member 5550 and the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second wall portion 5556b, the rotary crank member 570 and the rotary arm member A transmission state is formed with the 5550.

If the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570 is reversed, the relationship between the first wall portion 5556a and the second wall portion 5556b is reversed. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550 when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a. A transmission state is formed between the two, and when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second wall portion 5556b, a non-transmission state is formed between the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550. To.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, in the present embodiment, the rotating arm member 5550 is in a retracted position (see FIG. 22) and an overhanging position without switching the swing direction of the rotating crank member 570. In addition to the swinging motion of swinging between positions, the rotating arm member 5550 has a small width near the overhang position (the lower end of the front plate member 546 is moved between positions U1 and U2). It is possible to form a swinging motion that is swung.

As a result, the rotating arm member 5550 can generate a swinging motion that is difficult to form by switching the driving direction of the driving device 560. That is, it is possible to cause the rotating arm member 5550 to perform a swinging motion having a small width in the vicinity of the overhanging position by repeatedly switching the driving direction of the driving device 560 at short intervals. However, in this case, the width of the swing operation depends on the switching speed of the drive direction of the drive device 560. Further, even if the drive direction of the drive device 560 is switched while the speed of the swinging motion of the rotary arm member 5550 is high, the inertia of the drive device 560 and the rotary arm member 5550 is large and the drive direction cannot be switched instantly. , There was a risk that the time required to switch the drive direction would be long.

On the other hand, in the swinging operation near the overhanging position of the rotating arm member 5550 in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to switch the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570, so that the time required for switching the driving direction is unnecessary. can do.

Further, the operating speed of the operation in which the rotating arm member 5550 is swung clockwise in the front view (upward swinging motion) depends on the urging force generated by the torsion spring 517a, and the rotating arm member 5550 is in front view. The operating speed of the clockwise swinging motion (downward swinging motion) depends on the rotational speed of the rotary crank member 570. Therefore, by increasing the urging force of the torsion spring 517a and increasing the rotational speed of the rotary crank member 570, it is possible to increase the swing speed of the rotary arm member 5550 in the vicinity of the overhanging position.

As a result, it is possible to achieve both high speed of the swinging operation near the overhanging position of the rotating arm member 5550 and shortening of the switching time of the swinging direction.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the combined operation unit 6500 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating arm member 550 of the composite operation unit 500 is integrally molded has been described, but the rotating arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment is formed by connecting the two members. .. By relatively swinging the two members, the posture of the arcuate hole 554 formed at the other end is changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

69 (a) and 69 (c) are partial front views of the rotating arm member 6550 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 69 (b) shows rotation in the direction of arrow LXIXb of FIG. 69 (a). It is a partial top view of the arm member 6550. Note that FIG. 69 (a) shows a state in which the first posture in which the tip of the tip swing member 6556 is directed upward is formed, and FIG. 69 (b) shows a state in which the tip of the tip swing member 6556 is directed downward. The state in which the second posture to be directed is formed is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 69A, the rotating arm member 6550 is connected to a main body portion 6551 pivotally supported by a third shaft portion 517 (see FIG. 71) and the other end portion of the main body portion 6551. It mainly includes a tip swing member 6556 and a switching device 6590 fixed to the upper surface of the other end of the main body 6551 to switch the posture of the tip swing member 6556. An arcuate hole 6554 is formed in the tip swing member 6556.

The main body portion 6551 is provided with a shaft support hole 6551a which is formed in the other end portion in the front-rear direction and serves as a swing center of the tip swing member 6556.

The tip swing member 6556 is formed so that the end portion on the side connected to the main body portion 6551 sandwiches the main body portion 6551 in the front-rear direction, and the tip swing member 6556 is formed with a shaft support hole 6556a formed as a swing center of the tip swing member 6556. , A shaft support rod 6556b which is a rod material to be inserted into the shaft support hole 6556a and the shaft support hole 6551a of the tip swing member 6556, and an extension extending from the shaft support hole 6556a to the opposite side of the arcuate hole 6554. It mainly includes a sliding shaft 6556c that protrudes in the front-rear direction from the end of the portion and is connected to the guide slot 6591d of the switching device 6590.

The arcuate hole 6554 includes a return portion 6554a projecting from the upper inner surface. The return portion 6554a is a portion that slides on the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect member 6540, and when it is slid from the tip side of the arcuate hole 6554, resistance is suppressed while sliding in the opposite direction. It is a left-right asymmetrical protrusion whose sliding resistance increases when it is moved.

70 (a) and 70 (b) are front perspective views of the switching device 6590. Note that FIG. 70 (a) shows a pushed-up state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed up from the switch member 6592, and FIG. 70 (b) shows a pushed-down state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed down with respect to the switch member 6592. Is illustrated. Further, the pushed-up state corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 69 (c), and the pushed-down state corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 69 (a).

The C-shaped member 6591 has a long plate-shaped main body portion 6591a in which a hole having an inner diameter through which a moving cylindrical portion 6592a can be inserted is formed in the center, and an inner diameter same as the inner diameter of the hole formed in the main body portion 6591a. The tubular guide portion 6591b, which is projected in a cylindrical shape and has a groove processed on the inner peripheral surface, and the main body portion 6591a are arranged so as to face each other in the front-rear direction of the main body portion 6551, extending downward from both ends in the long direction. A pair of arm portions 6591c and a guide elongated hole 6591d which is a long hole formed on the tip end side of the arm portion 6591c and guided by the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip swinging member 6556 are mainly provided.

The grooving formed on the inner peripheral surface of the tubular guide portion 6591b is a grooving for forming a knock mechanism in relation to the moving cylindrical portion 6592a of the switch member 6592. By this groove processing, the C-shaped member 6591 is switched between a pushed-up state and a pushed-down state each time it is pushed in the direction of being pressed against the switch member 6592. It should be noted that the illustration of other members such as the spring member that forms the urging force necessary for forming the knock mechanism is omitted, and in the present embodiment, the tubular guide portion 6591b is the pushing portion 6541a of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 (FIG. 71) is pushed.

The switch member 6592 includes a moving cylindrical portion 6592a in which a protrusion that is inserted through the tubular guide portion 6591a and is movable in a groove on the inner peripheral surface of the tubular guide portion 6591a is projected from the outer peripheral surface, and the moving cylindrical portion 6592a as an axis. It mainly includes a fixing plate portion 6592b that is rotatably connected and fixed to the upper surface of the main body portion 6551 of the rotating arm member 6550.

Here, in the knock mechanism, the cylindrical member and the cylindrical member guided on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member rotate relative to each other, and their relative positions in the axial direction are switched. That is, when the tubular member and the cylindrical member do not rotate relative to each other, it becomes difficult to switch the relative position in the axial direction.

On the other hand, the moving cylindrical portion 6592a of the switch member 6592 is axially rotatably connected to the fixed plate portion 6592b. Therefore, when the C-shaped member 6591 is moved in a direction close to the switch member 6592 (when pushed downward in FIG. 70A), the moving cylindrical portion 6592a can rotate relative to the tubular guide portion 6591b. And the knock mechanism works.

Therefore, it is possible to switch between the push-up state and the push-down state without relatively rotating the fixing plate portion 6592b fixed to the main body portion 6551 of the rotation arm member 6550 and the C-shaped member 6591. Therefore, the state of the switching device 6590 can be switched between the pushed-up state and the pushed-down state while maintaining the state in which the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip swinging member 6556 is inserted into the guide slot 6591d of the C-shaped member 6591. it can.

71 (a) and 71 (b) are front views of the combined operation unit 6500. FIG. 71A illustrates a state in which the rotating arm member 6550 is arranged at the overhanging position and the switching device 6590 is in the pushed-up state, and FIG. K4 shows the rotating arm member 6550 arranged at the overhanging position for switching. The state in which the device 6590 is pushed down is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 71A and 71B, the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is arranged at a position where it is swung to the left end of the swingable range.

As shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b), the front view clock of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is obtained by switching the state of the switching device 6590 in the state where the rotating arm member 6550 is arranged at the overhanging position. The maximum swing angle around can be switched.

That is, when the switching device 6590 forms a pushed-up state (see FIG. 71 (a)), the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect member 6540 is brought into contact with the upper inner surface of the arcuate hole 6554, and the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 The swing angle is limited.

At this position, the inner surface of the arcuate hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a function as stoppers, and even when the swing speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is high, the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is arranged in the arrangement shown in FIG. It can be stopped suddenly (the movement locus RI of the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the return portion 6554a).

On the other hand, when the switching device 6590 forms a depressed state (see FIG. 71B), the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 does not collide with the arcuate hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a (the protrusion 541b of the protrusion 541b). The movement locus RI does not come into contact with the return portion 6554a). Therefore, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is moved along the arc-shaped hole 6554, and the protrusion 541b is discharged outward from the mouth tip portion 554a of the arc-shaped hole 6554.

Therefore, the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is swung clockwise in the front view until the rotating plate 520 is brought into contact with the second stopper portion 518b (see FIG. 71 (b)). At this position, the second stopper portion 518b functions as a stopper, and even when the swing speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is high, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 can be suddenly stopped.

As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of swing angles (two types in the present embodiment) when the telescopic effect device 6540 is swung clockwise in the front view and the telescopic effect device 6540 is suddenly stopped. Variations can be increased. To switch the state of the switching device 6590, the expansion / contraction effect member 6540 is swung counterclockwise in the front view, so that the tubular guide portion 6591b of the switching device 6590 is moved from the upper right portion in the front view of the main body member 6541a to the right. It is generated by being pushed by the pushing portion 6541a extending in the direction. Therefore, as the drive device for swinging the tip swing member 6556, the second drive device 560 for causing the swing of the expansion / contraction effect member 6540 is also used, so that the number of drive devices arranged can be reduced.

Further, in FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b), the swing range of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 can be changed by slightly swinging the tip swing member 6556. In this case, since the swing angle is small, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the change.

Here, assuming that when the rotating arm member 6550 is in a state where the player can see it (see FIG. 71), the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 can be grasped from the change in the state of the rotating arm member 6550. Expectations for the operation of the telescopic effect device 6540 are diminished, and the degree of attention of the telescopic effect device 6540 is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in order to change the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540, the swing angle of the tip swing member 6556 is small, which makes it difficult for the player to notice the change. it can. As a result, the expectation for the operation of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 can be increased, and the degree of attention of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 can be improved.

<7th Embodiment>
Next, the tilting operation unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 72.

In the first embodiment, a case where an elongated hole-shaped sliding hole 643 is formed at the end of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is supported in the sliding hole 643 so as to be guideable has been described. In the tilting operation unit 7600 in the embodiment, a shaft support hole 7634 is formed at the end of the transmission member 7600, and the effect member 620 is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 7634. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

72 (a) and 72 (b) are front views of the tilting operation unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment. 72 (a) shows an inverted state in which the shaft support hole 7634 of the transmission member 7640 is arranged vertically above the tubular portion 642, FIG. 72 (b) shows the inverted state, and FIG. 72 (b) shows the inverted state. A state in which the transmission member 7640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined angle is shown. In addition, in FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the effect member 620 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the transmission member 7640 and the base member 7610 on the back side thereof are visible. At the same time, the torsion spring 650 and the shaft support protrusion 612 are not shown.

As shown in FIG. 72 (a), the base member 7610 includes a sliding hole 7613 bored in the front-rear direction below the second shaft support hole 614 of the main body portion 611. The sliding hole 7613 is a long hole through which the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 is inserted, and the long hole is formed along the vertical direction in the longitudinal direction. The swing shaft portion 626 is supported by the sliding hole 7613 so as to be slidable.

The transmission member 7640 is provided with a shaft support hole 7634 at an end opposite to the end on which the tubular portion 642 of the main body 641 is formed. The shaft support hole 7643 is a portion that swingably supports the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620, and is bored with an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sliding shaft portion 621a.

The swinging operation of the effect member 620 is caused by the transmission member 7640 swinging around the second shaft support hole 614 due to the rotation of the drive motor 631 of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 51).

In the present embodiment, since the sliding shaft portion 621a is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 7634, when the transmission member 7640 swings, the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 follows the swing locus of the transmission member 7640. (The sliding shaft portion 621a does not move in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 641). On the other hand, since the swing shaft portion 626 is inserted through the sliding hole 7613, when the transmission member 7640 swings, the swing shaft portion 626 slides relative to the base member 7610.

Here, the difference between the swing angle of the transmission member 7640 and the swing angle of the effect member 620 will be described. As shown in FIG. 72B, when the transmission member 7640 swings by the transmission swing angle φ71 from the inverted state, the effect member 620 swings by the effect swing angle φ72 (effect swing angle φ72 <transmission swing). Moving angle φ71). Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is oscillated by the minimum unit of the resolution of the drive motor 631, the oscillating angle of the effect member 620 can be made smaller than the oscillating angle of the transmission member 7640. As a result, the accuracy of adjusting the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the transmission member 7640 swings by the transmission swing angle φ71 from the inverted state can be made smaller than that in the case of the first embodiment. explain.

The connecting line J1 shown in FIG. 72B is a line drawn from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the swing shaft portion 626. The virtual connecting line J2 has the same length as the connecting line J1, and when the swing shaft portion 626 is arranged above the sliding hole 7613 from the line drawn in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 641 through the tubular portion 642. (See FIG. 72 (a)) is a line drawn to the center of the swing shaft portion 626. The virtual angle φ73, which is the swing angle of the virtual connecting line J2, is the first embodiment when the first shaft support hole 613 of the first embodiment is formed above the sliding hole 7613. Corresponds to the swing angle of the effect member 620 that swings as the transmission member 640 swings by the transmission swing angle φ71.

As shown in FIG. 72B, the effect swing angle φ72 is made smaller than the virtual angle φ73, and according to the tilting operation unit 7600 of the seventh embodiment, the effect when the transmission member 7640 is swung by a predetermined angle. The swing angle of the member 620 can be made smaller than that of the first embodiment. Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is swung in the minimum unit of resolution of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 51), the swing amount of the effect member 620 can be made smaller than that, and the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be adjusted. The accuracy of can be improved.

<First control example>
Next, control examples in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 134. In the first control example, the control process (process related to the control of the game such as the display effect) executed by the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment will be described. In this control example, the display image used when the power is turned on is controlled so as to be corrected and used at the time of normal production. As a result, a common display image can be used when the power is turned on and when the normal effect is produced, so that the capacity of the character ROM 234 (see FIG. 79) in the display control device 114 can be saved.

In this control example, in the effect in which a specific accessory (expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9)) is movable, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. It is controlled to correct the content of the effect to be performed. As a result, in the effect of moving a specific accessory, for example, when the third symbol display device 81 becomes difficult to see, the display contents displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are displayed on the sub display device 690. By doing so, it is possible to make the game machine easy for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents.

In this control example, an inertial force is used to open the door member 470 attached to the vertical movement unit (falling accessory) 400. Specifically, as will be described later, in the effect of forming the open state of the door member 470 after the door member 470 attached to the vertical movement unit 400 is moved, the opening / closing drive that keeps the door member 470 in the closed state. The motor 466 is controlled so as not to be excited (energization stop control). Then, when the door member 470 attached to the vertical movement unit (falling accessory) 400 is completely moved in the falling direction, the door member 470 is opened by the inertial force generated in the door member 470. In this way, the door member 470 can be opened without driving the opening / closing drive motor 466, so that the power consumption can be reduced.

In this control example, a notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the fluctuation display becomes a big hit is displayed in the fluctuation display. This advance notice effect includes an effect including a display mode (countdown) similar to the specific time effect suggesting the game state described above. Specifically, the countdown notice effect is an effect in which an image (such as a girl's image) indicating the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit is displayed after the countdown characters ("3, 2, 1, ...") Are displayed. include. There is a specific time production (countdown production) that suggests the game state, which is a production that includes the same kind of display mode (countdown), and a countdown notice production that suggests the expectation of a big hit. If it is executed more than once, the player may be confused.

Therefore, in this control example, when the countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) as a notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit, the same type of display is displayed until the variable display in which the countdown notice effect is executed is completed. The specific time effect (countdown effect), which is an effect including the mode (countdown), is restricted (avoided) so as not to be executed. As a result, when the countdown notice effect is executed during the time effect period, the effect is prevented so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) including the same display mode (countdown) as the countdown notice effect is not executed (displayed). Execution (display) can be restricted (avoided). As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is confused because the effects including the same type of display mode (countdown) are duplicated in the time effect period.

In this control example, the ball entry effect displayed based on the entry into the winning opening is sequentially displayed in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display area. As a result, even when the interval at which the game ball enters the winning opening is short, the period for displaying the ball entry effect can be extended, and the game machine makes it easy for the player to visually recognize the ball entry effect. be able to.

Note that this control example is not limited to the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment, and may be executed by any of the pachinko machines 10 of each of the above-described embodiments, or each of the above-described embodiments may be combined. It may be executed by the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10 in the first control example>
First, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 73, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for drawing special symbols, drawing ordinary symbols, setting the display on the first symbol display device 37, setting the display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting the display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 102). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203y of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each of which is composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are set according to the timing of entering the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640. Are stored respectively. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is usually used in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the ball entry port (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 102).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 is generated at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 75A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It can be divided into two types, one for the period during which the symbol is in a high probability state). That is, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 75A) is composed of a first random number table for low probability and a first random number table for high probability, and is included in each table. The number of random numbers that are big hits is different. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The first random number table 202a for the low probability of the special symbol and the first random number table 202a for the high probability of the special symbol are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol. If it is a random number that is out of order, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out of order.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on 37 is the one at the time of a big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random number value "0" is the first random number table 202a for the low probability. (See FIG. 75 (a)). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/400".

Further, in the present embodiment, as a kind of missed special symbol, a missed type (small hit) is provided in which the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened, although it is not a big hit of the special symbol. When this small hit occurs, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 0.2 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls are won), and then the opening / closing operation is closed twice. Repeated. That is, the same opening / closing operation as in the case of a jackpot C (2R probability variation time saving no jackpot) is performed. Two random numbers "10, 11" are defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 75 (a)) as random number values (judgment values) that are small hits when the special symbol has a low probability. Since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 2 while the total number of random numbers is 400, the probability of being a small hit of the first special symbol is "2/400".

Since the small hit is a kind of loss, the game state is not changed before and after the small hit. For example, if a small hit occurs during the probability variation state of a special symbol, the probability variation state of the special symbol continues even after the end of the small hit, and the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol). ), The normal state continues even after the end of the small hit. As described above, this small hit is the same as when the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is the same as the case where the 2R probability variation time is short and no big hit. It is possible to make the player who visually recognizes the movement expect that the 2R probability variation time is short and no big hit. Therefore, every time a small hit is made in the normal state, it can be expected that the game shifts to a probabilistic state of a special symbol that is more advantageous than the normal state, so that the game in the normal state is prevented from becoming monotonous ( Can be suppressed). In addition, even if the special symbol is not a big hit, the player can increase the chances of winning the prize ball by configuring the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a in a part of the loss (small hit). be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the number of balls held by the player is excessively reduced in the normal state or the like, which is excessively disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random number values that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values "0 to 9" are the first random number table 202a for high probability (FIG. 75 (a). ) Is stored in). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/40". Further, as the random number value (determination value) to be a small hit, only "10" is defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 75A). While the total number of random numbers is 400, the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 1, so the probability of small hits is "1/400".

It should be noted that the probability of a small hit when the special symbol has a high probability is lower than that when the special symbol has a low probability because the number of rounds is large and the number of rounds is large when the special symbol has a high probability. It becomes a jackpot with a long opening period of the specific winning opening 65a (16R jackpot in which the opening operation is repeated 16 times until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won), and a large number of prize balls are acquired. This is because the game is played with expectation, so even if it becomes a small hit, it is only annoying. In other words, in the normal state, a small hit may result in a 2R probability change time reduction and no big hit (it may shift to an advantageous probability change state after the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a). However, in the state where the probability change state has already been reached, regardless of whether it is a small hit or a 2R probability change time saving no big hit, a prize ball is hardly obtained and the current state (probability change state) is merely maintained. Is. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit is low in the high probability state of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game in the high probability state of the special symbol.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and is provided in the ROM 202 together with the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 75B). Specifically, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 39", the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) is selected, and when the value is "40 to 79", the jackpot B (16R). (Time saving jackpot) is selected, and when it is "80 to 99", jackpot C (2R probability variation with time saving and no jackpot) is selected.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot types set in the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 75 (b)) are three types of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, but are not limited to four types. The above jackpot types may be selected, or only two or less types, for example, one type of jackpot may be selected. Further, the type and ratio of the jackpot types selected for the jackpot of the special symbol 1 and the jackpot of the special symbol 2 may be set differently.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at a symbol other than the reach symbol. (For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "completely off" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur, two stop (effect) patterns are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the value of the RAM 203 reaches the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first winning opening 64, which is for low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely off".

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 102) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 76) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. There is.

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 76. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the fluctuation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 76 (b)) and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 76 (c)). And at least the deviation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 76D) are set. Although not shown, a variation pattern table or the like in a time-saving game state is set in addition to this.

First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (b). FIG. 76B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (fluctuation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, various normal reach (30 seconds), various super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set respectively. For each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value.

Specifically, for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50", and for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), "51 to 179", various special reach (90 seconds). ), Each of "180 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the MPU 201 hits the fluctuation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. Select from the variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 76 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d2 (normal). The deviation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is deviation. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, as described above, the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", the complete deviation is set, and if the value is in the range of "80 to 99", the deviation reach is set.

Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. For a short deviation (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as a determination value, and for a long deviation (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

In addition, for the off-reach, "0-149" is for various out-of-normal reach (30 seconds), and "150-197" is for various out-of-order super reach (60 seconds). "198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the normal game state, and acquires it from the out-of-order (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2. A fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern selection table 202d2 based on the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 76D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern selection table 202d3 for deviation (probability variation). The deviation (probability variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that is out of alignment when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 differs from the deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 described above in that the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is set.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete deviation is determined. , If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the out-of-reach is determined.

As described above, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching is set lower when it is out of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from becoming long at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels bored because the game is delayed in the probabilistic game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

Further, in this control example, the variation pattern table 202d is provided with a variation pattern selection table (not shown) for shortening the working hours. This time-saving variation pattern selection table is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. The time saving fluctuation pattern selection table is defined so that a fluctuation pattern of 0.6 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. This 0.6-second fluctuation pattern is composed of a 0.125-second period in which the symbols and the like are displayed in a variable manner and a 0.475-second period in which the symbols and the like are stopped and displayed. As a result, in the time-saving game state, one variation display is completed in a short time (0.6 seconds), so that the turnover rate (efficiency) of the game in the time-saving game state can be improved. Further, by setting the period in which the symbol is displayed in a variable manner to a very short period (0.125 seconds), it is possible to give the player the impression that the turnover rate (efficiency) of the game is very good.

Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. , It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second hit random number table (see FIG. 75 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is set. , If it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the second hit random number table (see FIG. 75 (c)), it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and a high probability time (normal symbol) with a higher probability of hitting the normal symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 75 (c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5-28". These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 In, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 In, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the release period of the second winning opening 640 is further. Is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", so that the ball can easily enter the first winning opening 64. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but the opening time And the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92). At the same time, the update is repeated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 102).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 74. As described above, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, a second per random number table 205c, and a variation pattern table 202d. Since the contents of each table provided in the ROM 202 are as described above with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. , Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, time saving medium counter 203h, jackpot flag 203i, counter buffer 203y, and other memory area 203z. doing.

The special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first winning opening 64 (special symbol 1), and has one execution area and four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area). In each of these areas, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, the original special symbol jackpot lottery is performed. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the starting prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) is obtained. It is described that the prediction is to pre-read the lottery result of the special symbol thereafter. In addition, as various information, whether it is right or wrong, the type of stop, the fluctuation pattern, and the like are applicable.

Then, when the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information in the special symbol 1 of the RAM 233 or It is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the corresponding special symbol among the special symbols 2.

In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize when the main controller 110 wins the start. From, various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is predicted. In addition, this prediction (look-ahead) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the gaming state (normal gaming state or probabilistic gaming state) at the time when the fluctuation corresponding to the start winning is started. .. As a result, the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the starting prize can be accurately predicted.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2), and the first winning opening 64 (special symbol 1) is used with respect to the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. ) Is changed to the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2), and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding first area). Among the vacant areas (4 areas), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the winnings stored in the other hold areas are stored. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64 (starting winning). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S504 in FIG. 96). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 93).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 93 and S505 in FIG. 96). ). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual reserved ball in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls in the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d only in that the first winning opening (special symbol 1) is changed to the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2). Since the other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 by the process of S510 in FIG. 96, and is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 93). Further, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the variation display in the special symbol 2) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S206 in FIG. 93 and S511 in FIG. 96). reference).

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a reserved ball number (standby) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67. It is a counter that counts the number of times) up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see S804 in FIG. 99). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 98).

When the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 99). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal symbol entry port (through gate) 67 and the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c. (S803: No in FIG. 99).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). If the value of the probability variation flag 203g is on, the pachinko machine 10 has the special symbol. If the value of the probability variation flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial value of this probability variation flag 203g is set to off, and in the jackpot control process, the start timing of the ending effect based on jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) or jackpot C (2R probability variation time saving no jackpot) (big hit game). When it is determined that it is the end timing), it is set to on (see S1214 in FIG. 103). Then, it is referred to in the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 95) and the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 94) in order to determine whether or not the game state is a probabilistic variation state (S403 of FIG. 95, FIG. (See S303 in 94), it is set to off when the next jackpot game is started (see S1202 in FIG. 103).

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 95, S213) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 94, S208) is executed, the special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (FIG. 95, S213) or the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (FIG. 94, S208), the value of the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if the value is on, the first for high probability. While the special symbol lottery is performed based on the random number table 202a per unit, if the value of the probability variation flag 203g is off, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability. Will be.

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the special symbol. When the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is larger than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the special symbol. If the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol. The time saving medium counter 203h is set to 100 when the jackpot B (16R time saving jackpot) is executed at the start timing of the ending effect (that is, the end timing of the jackpot game) by the jackpot control process (FIG. 103). See S1215). Then, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not the time is shortened in the normal symbol variation processing (see S708 in FIG. 98), and is subtracted by 1 each time the variation time elapses in the special symbol variation processing. (See S222 in FIG. 93). When the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is larger than 0 and the above-mentioned probability change flag 203g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability changing state and the time saving state of the special symbol.

The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203i is turned on, the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state is executed by the jackpot control process (FIG. 103, S1206) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The small hit flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not a small hit has occurred. When the small hit flag 203j is turned on, the small hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened by the big hit control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is executed.

The time saving flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the special symbol (high probability state of the normal symbol). When the value of the time saving flag 203k is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the special symbol, and when the value of the time saving flag 203k is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (normal symbol). It indicates that it is a low probability state). When the initial value of the time saving flag 203k is set to off and it is determined in the jackpot control process that it is the start timing (end timing of the jackpot game) of the ending effect based on the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot). , Is set to on (see S1214 in FIG. 103). Then, in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 98), the game is referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the time saving state (see S708, S715, and S719 in FIG. 98), and the next jackpot game is started. If set to off (see S1202 in FIG. 103).

As described above, in the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), both the probability variation flag 203g and the time saving flag 203k are set to ON, and the time saving game is given together with the probability variation game. On the other hand, in the jackpot C (2R probability variation with time reduction and no jackpot), the probability variation flag 203g is set to on, but the time reduction flag 203k remains off, and only the probability variation game is given. The reason why the time saving flag 203k is provided separately from the time saving medium counter 203h is that the time saving state of the normal symbol given by the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) continues at least until the next jackpot. is there. That is, since the period of the time saving state is variable depending on the timing of the big hit, the time saving period is indefinite, and the number of times cannot be set for the time saving medium counter 203h. Therefore, the fixed number of times (100 times) set after the end of the jackpot B is counted by the time reduction counter 203h, while the time reduction state set after the end of the jackpot A is set by the time reduction flag 203g. It is configured. As a result, it is possible to more accurately determine the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Here, in the probabilistic game (probability change state of the special symbol), the probability of becoming a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is set to a high probability. It is difficult for the player to determine whether the current game is a normal game or a probabilistic game unless it is suggested that the game is a probabilistic game by changing the production mode. .. On the other hand, in the time-saving game, since the opening number and opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 are changed, it is easy to determine whether the game is a normal game or a time-saving game. ..

Therefore, when the player is given a time-saving game together with the probability-changing game based on the jackpot A (16R probability-changing jackpot), the player can easily recognize that it is a probability-changing game, but the jackpot C (2R probability-changing time-saving no If only the probabilistic game is given based on the jackpot), it becomes difficult to recognize that the game is a probabilistic game (so-called latent probabilistic state). As a result, the player needs to infer whether the game state is a normal game or a probabilistic game, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, since the small hit that the same opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a as in the case of the big hit C is executed is provided, the specific winning opening 65a opens / closes for two rounds. Is executed, it is not necessarily a jackpot C. Therefore, every time the opening / closing operation of two rounds is executed, it is possible to expect the jackpot C, so that the interest of the player can be further improved.

The other memory area, 203z, is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the MPU 201. The stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by MPU201 are stored, and the work area (work area) where various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. are stored. Have.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 102) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 101) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 100) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (a). At least the variation pattern selection table 222a and the ball entry effect selection table 222b are stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Since the variation pattern selection table 222a is already known, it will be briefly described. However, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough variation indicated by the variation pattern command is shown. Further detailed fluctuation contents are determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a from the contents (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.)). Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one variation mode is determined from a plurality of types by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

The ball entry effect selection table 222b is a table that defines the effect content of the ball entry effect that is executed based on the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 during the time saving game. Here, the ball entry effect is an effect that is executed in an manner corresponding to the number of fluctuations until the big hit in order to suggest the degree of expectation of the big hit. More specifically, each time a prize information command is received from the main control device 110 during the time saving game, a jackpot is made in the reserved ball from the stored contents of the prize information storage area 223a updated based on the prize information command. Whether or not there is a corresponding reserved ball, and if there is a reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot, the number of fluctuations until the jackpot is determined, and the effect is executed according to the number of fluctuations until the jackpot is reached. Will be done.

Further, the ball entry effect of 1 is executed in one display area of the display area divided into four in the third symbol display device 81, and once the ball entry effect is started, the display content of the previous ball entry effect is displayed. Can be displayed in different display areas while displaying the ball entry effect corresponding to the new ball entry. That is, each time the ball enters the second entry port 640, the entry effect is displayed in order in the four display areas provided on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a maximum of four types are displayed. Is configured to be simultaneously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The ball entry effect selection table 222b is defined in association with the number of fluctuations until the effect content of the ball entry effect becomes a big hit. The ball entry effect selection table 222b is referred to when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 640 during the time-saving game in the ball entry effect setting process (see FIG. 115) described later, and the ball entry effect selection table 222b is referred to. It is used to select the effect content of the effect (see S2403 in FIG. 115).

There are six types of ball entry effects, from level 0 ball entry effect to level 5 ball entry effect (see Fig. 78), and as the number of fluctuations until a big hit decreases, A high-level ball entry effect is selected. As a result, the player can predict the number of times until a big hit (expectation degree of a big hit) by determining the level of the ball entry effect, so that the player's interest can be improved.

The display image of the ball entry effect in this control example includes a comment part for displaying comments according to the level (for example, "hurry", "chance?", Etc.) and a predetermined symbol (for example, "star mark"). It is composed of a level suggestion part for suggesting the level of the current ball entry effect according to the number of balls, and the display mode of each part (comment part and level suggestion part) is set according to the level of the ball entry effect. As a comment to be displayed in the comment section, a plurality of comments corresponding to the level of the ball entry effect are defined, and are selected according to the value of the effect counter 223i. On the other hand, in the level suggestion section, the number of "star" symbols corresponding to the level of the ball entry effect (that is, the number of fluctuations until a big hit) is displayed. For example, in the level 0 notice effect, there are 0 "stars" (see 81a in FIG. 89 (a)), and in the level 1 notice effect, there is one "star" (see 81b in FIG. 89 (b)). Two "stars" are displayed in the level 2 notice effect (see 81c in FIG. 89 (b)). As a result, the player can easily determine the level of the ball entry effect being executed. On the other hand, in the comment section, since the comment selected according to the value of the effect counter 223i is displayed, the variation of the display mode in the ball entry effect can be increased, and the player's interest can be improved. It should be noted that the level suggestion part may not be provided, and only the comment part may be configured to suggest the number of fluctuations up to the jackpot. As a result, the level of the ball entry effect can be estimated only from the display of the comment section, so that the display content of the ball entry effect can be more noticed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 78, the detailed contents of the ball entry effect selection table 222b will be described. FIG. 78 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ball entry effect selection table 222b. As described above, in the ball entry effect selection table 222b, the effect content of the ball entry effect for suggesting the number of fluctuations until the jackpot is defined in association with the number of fluctuations until the jackpot.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations up to the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is greater than 4, that is, the lottery result corresponding to the jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. If not, it is stipulated that the level 0 entry effect is selected. Further, when the number of fluctuations up to the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is four, that is, the lottery result of the jackpot of the second special symbol is stored in the fourth hold of the winning information storage area 223a. In this case, it is stipulated that the level 1 entry effect is selected.

Similarly, if the number of fluctuations to the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is 3 times, the level 2 ball entry effect is performed once, and if it is 2, the level 3 ball entry effect is performed once. In the case of, the level 4 entry effect is selected, and in the case of 0 times (a big hit due to the fluctuation), the level 5 entry effect is selected. In this way, by configuring the player to execute different levels of ball entry effects according to the number of fluctuations up to the jackpot, it is possible to make the player predict the number of fluctuations up to the jackpot. Therefore, since the display effect can be paid more attention to the game, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will continue. FIG. 77B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a display area counter 223f, and an effect. At least a time storage area 223g, an effect mode storage area 233h, an avoidance flag 233i, an effect counter 223j, a power cutoff flag 223y, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (first area to fourth area for special symbol 1, first area to fourth area for special symbol 2). Winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in response to the start prize when the main control device 110 wins the start. Therefore, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is the area number among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area) of the corresponding special symbol among the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. The small areas (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. ), Which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variation effect of the special symbol 1 held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1607 in FIG. 107). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 hold ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

Further, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, has a maximum of 4 reserved balls (waiting times) for the variation effect of the special symbol 2 held in the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts up to times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a special symbol in which the number of reserved balls is added by entering the second winning opening 640 and is different from the display of the reserved ball number symbol of the special symbol 1 on the third symbol display device 81. The difference is only in that it is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol of symbol 2, and the others are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 hold ball of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved sphere symbols corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c synchronizes with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110. , Its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 203b of the main control device 110. It can be changed while making it. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on in the variation pattern reception process executed when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1701 in FIG. 108), and the variation display on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It is turned off when the setting is made (see S1802 in FIG. 109). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1604 in FIG. 107), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1807 in FIG. 109). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variation effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

The display area counter 223f is used to specify a display area for displaying the above-mentioned ball entry effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into four (first area 81a, second area 81b, third area 81c, fourth area 81d) for each display area. It is configured so that different ball entry effects can be displayed. The display area counter 223f determines a display area for displaying the current ball entry effect from among these four display areas (see the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d, FIG. 89 or FIG. 90). Used for. The display area counter 223f is initialized to 1 when the voice lamp control device 113 starts up, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 1 to 4 in the ball entry effect setting process (see FIG. 115) described later.

Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90, but when a new ball entry effect is selected, the new ball entry effect corresponds to the value of the display area counter 223f. It is controlled to be displayed for the display area of. Specifically, when the value of the display area counter 223f is 1, the display of the ball entry effect is set in the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. If the value is 2, it is set in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81, and if the value is 3, it is set in the first area 81c of the third symbol display device 81, and the value is 4. If there is, it is controlled so as to be set in the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. Since the value of the display area counter 223f is configured to be updated by 1 in ascending order, reach the maximum value of 4, and then return to 1 when further updated, a maximum of 4 ball entry effects can be obtained. It is possible to simultaneously display different display areas (first area 81a, second area 81b, third area 81c, fourth area 81d) (see FIGS. 89 and 90). Since a plurality of different ball entry effects can be displayed at the same time, the display effects can be diversified.

The effect time storage area 223 g is an area for storing the start time of the time effect described above. Based on the start time of the time effect stored in the effect time storage area 223 g and the current time acquired from RTC292, the time effect to be executed regularly (5 minutes every hour) and the time effect of the time effect A specific time effect that is executed at a specific time during execution (from the start of each time effect to the elapse of 5 minutes every 1 minute) is executed (see FIG. 91). This effect time storage area 223 g is set by the time setting process (see FIG. 105) of the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. , Information indicating the start time of the time effect and the specific time effect is set relative to the power-on time. Specifically, when the power of the voice lamp control device 113 is turned on at 9:00, first, 9:55, 55 minutes after the power on time (9:00), is the first time effect. It is set as information indicating the start time of. Then, the time every hour (10:55, 11:55, ...) From the start time of the first time effect is set for 24 hours as information indicating the start time of the time effect. In addition, from the start time of each time production to the passage of 5 minutes every minute (9:56, 9:57, 9:58, 9:59, 10:56, 10:57 ... ) Is set as information indicating the start time (start timing) of the specific time effect. Further, since the time production period is 5 minutes, the information indicating the time (10:00, 11:00, etc.) 5 minutes after the start time of the time production is the normal game period (effect mode A). It is set as information indicating the start time (see FIG. 91).

In this control example, each time effect (time effect, specific time effect) is set to be executed based on the time when the power is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each time effect is not limited to this. The start time of (time effect, specific time effect) may be set. For example, every hour may be set as the start time of the time effect. As a result, when the power of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is turned on, even if the power-on time is deviated, the start time of the time effect is not deviated, and the time effect is synchronously executed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10. can do.

The effect mode storage area 223h is an area in which information indicating the current effect period is stored, and based on the information in the effect mode storage area 223h, an effect corresponding to the effect period is selected and executed (displayed). .. In this control example, in addition to the time production period described above, when it is determined that a big hit will be made after the end of the time production period (the pending winning information is a big hit or a variable display that becomes a big hit). Is being executed), and three effect periods are set: a time effect extension period and a normal game period that does not correspond to either the time effect period or the time effect extension period. For the sake of simplification of the following description, the normal game period will be referred to as the effect mode A, the time effect period will be referred to as the effect mode B, and the time effect extension period will be referred to as the effect mode C. In the effect mode storage area 223h, when the effect mode A is set as information for identifying these three effect modes, the value “00H” indicating the effect mode A is the effect mode storage area 223h. When the effect mode B is set, the value "01H" indicating the effect mode B is stored, and when the effect mode C is set, the value indicating the effect mode C is used. A certain "02H" is stored. By storing the information corresponding to the effect period (effect mode) in the effect mode storage area 223h in this way, it is possible to easily identify which effect period the current effect period is.

The avoidance flag 223i determines whether or not the countdown notice effect including the countdown display mode is executed (displayed) as the advance notice effect (time notice effect) executed (displayed) in the time effect period (effect mode B). It is a flag used to do so. When the avoidance flag 223i is on, it indicates that the countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) as the time notice effect, and when it is off, it indicates that the countdown notice effect is not executed (displayed). When the avoidance flag 223i is on, it is restricted (avoided) so that the specific time effect (countdown effect), which is an effect including the same type of display mode (countdown), is not executed (displayed). As a result, when the countdown advance notice effect is executed as the time advance notice effect, the execution (display) of the effect can be restricted (avoided) so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not executed (displayed). As a result, it is possible to prevent duplicate productions including the same type of display mode (countdown) during the time production period, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is confused.

This avoidance flag 223i is turned on when the countdown notice effect is selected as the advance notice effect (time notice effect) selected in the effect mode B (time effect period) in the advance notice selection process (see FIG. 111). It is set (see S2007 in FIG. 111). Then, it is set to off when the variable display in which the countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) ends.

It should be noted that, without providing such an avoidance flag 223i, it is possible to select and execute an effect having a different display mode between the normal advance notice effect and the time advance notice effect. Specifically, the countdown notice effect is selected in the normal notice effect, but the countdown notice effect may not be selected in the time notice effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent duplicate productions including the same type of display mode (countdown) during the time production period.

The effect counter 223j is a counter used in the voice lamp control device 113 for selection of various effects (variation pattern, notice effect, etc.), various lottery, etc. Although not shown, the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 ( (See FIG. 106), the update is repeated in the range of 0 to 198.

The power cutoff flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not there has been a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y receives the power-off command from the main control unit 110 and is set to on before the power-off process is executed (see S1518 in FIG. 106). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (FIG. 104), when the power cutoff flag 223y is on (see 1308: Yes in FIG. 104), a certain period of time has passed since the power cutoff flag 223y was set to on. This is the case where the voice lamp control device 113 is started up before the elapse of (100 milliseconds), that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not disappeared, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete due to the disappearance of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there are cases, the information on the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1309 in FIG. 104). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 107) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation for.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S2502 in FIG. 116) executed after the boot process (see S2501 in FIG. 116) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a is provided with a correction information table 234a3 (see FIG. 79). The correction information table 234a3 contains data (hereinafter, correction) for correcting an image (hereinafter, referred to as a power-on image) displayed on the display device (third symbol display device 81, sub-display device 690) when the power is turned on. Information) is stored (see FIG. 80 (b)). In this control example, the capacity of the character ROM 234 is reduced by diverting and displaying the image when the power is turned on in an effect other than when the power is turned on. However, if the image at the time of power-on is diverted and displayed in the same display mode (position, size) in each effect other than when the power is turned on, the visibility of each effect may be impaired. Therefore, by using the correction information table 234a3 to correct the image at power-on to an appropriate display mode (position, size) in each effect other than when the power is turned on, the power is turned on without impairing the visibility of each effect. The time image is diverted and displayed.

The power-on image is composed of three types of images, and it is possible to correct the display mode (position, size) for each of the various power-on images. Here, three types of images (hereinafter, referred to as various power-on images) constituting the power-on image will be described. The power-on image is an image for notifying the player or the like that initialization processing or the like accompanying the power-on is being performed, and the power-on main image and the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Consists of an image that fluctuates when the power is turned on, which is an image for notifying the lottery result of Has been done. These various power-on images are displayed on each display device (third symbol display device 81, sub-display device 690) in a predetermined display mode (position, size) at the time of power-on. It will be described later with reference to FIG. 82.

The correction information table 234a3 is referred to in the special effect correction process (see FIG. 121) or the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131), and the correction information according to the currently executed (displayed) effect is the correction information storage area 233 m. Stored in. The correction information stored in the correction information storage area 233m is referred to when generating a drawing list (see FIG. 87) in the drawing process (see FIG. 134), and is used to set various power-on image display modes. Detailed information (displayability, display position (coordinates) or size (magnification)) is corrected based on the correction information. As a result, it is possible to correct and display various power-on images (main image at power-on, variable image at power-on, and title image at power-on).

Here, the contents of the correction information table 234a3 will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (b). FIG. 80B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the correction information table 234a3. The correction information table 234a3 stores correction information corresponding to each effect of various power-on images (main image at power-on, variable image at power-on, and title image at power-on), and is a correction for normal effect. At least information, correction information for demo production, correction information for moving the telescopic accessory, and correction information for moving the tilting accessory are provided.

The correction information for each effect includes correction information corresponding to displayability (on or off), correction information corresponding to the coordinate correction amount, and correction information corresponding to the enlargement ratio for each image type of the image when the power is turned on. Is stipulated. The correction information corresponding to displayability (on or off) is a value for determining whether or not to display the corresponding image, and when the value is on, the corresponding image is set to be displayed. It is (corrected) and set (corrected) so that the corresponding image is hidden when the value is off. Further, the correction information corresponding to the coordinate correction amount is for correcting the display position (coordinates) of the corresponding image, and the position (coordinates) displayed when the corresponding image is turned on is changed to this coordinate correction amount. It is set (corrected) to be displayed at the moved position (coordinates) based on the corresponding correction information. Further, the correction information corresponding to the enlargement ratio is for correcting the size (enlargement ratio) of the corresponding image, and this enlargement is performed in the lower right direction with the upper left corner of the corresponding image as the origin (reference point). The image is set (corrected) to be enlarged (or reduced to the upper left) based on the rate.

The correction information for the normal effect is the correction information used when the initialization process at the time of turning on the power is completed and the normal game is performed in the pachinko machine 10. Further, the correction information for the demo effect is the correction information used when the demo effect is executed (displayed). Further, the correction information for moving the telescopic accessory is the correction information used when the movable effect (expandable accessory scenario) of the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is executed (displayed). Further, the correction information for moving the tilting accessory is correction information used when the movable effect (tilting accessory scenario) of the effect member 620 in the tilting operation unit 600 is executed (displayed).

Specifically, as the correction information for normal production, the main image at power-on and the title image at power-on are set to off, and the variable image at power-on is set to on. The coordinate correction amount of the fluctuating image when the power is turned on is set to (-600, -450), and the enlargement ratio is set to x1 (equal magnification). As a result, when the normal effect is executed, the main image at power-on and the title image at power-on are corrected so as to be hidden, and the variable image at power-on is the position (coordinates) displayed at power-on. ) To (-600, -450), the position (coordinates) is corrected so that it is displayed at the same size. Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, due to this correction, a normal effect is executed on the power-on variation image displayed at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. If so, it is displayed in the upper left corner of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 83 (a)).

Further, as the correction information for the demonstration effect, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are set to off, and the title image at power-on is set to on. The correction amount of the coordinates of the title image when the power is turned on is set to (-700,0), and the enlargement ratio is set to x2 (2 times). As a result, when the demo effect is executed, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are corrected so as to be hidden, and the title image at power-on is the position (coordinates) displayed at power-on. ) To (-700,0), the position (coordinates) is corrected so that it is displayed twice as large. Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, when the power-on title image displayed in the center of the sub-display device 690 at the time of power-on is demo-produced by this correction. Is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 83 (b)).

Here, the demo effect is a case where the next variable effect accompanying the entry into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect is stopped. , This is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

Further, as for the correction information for moving the telescopic accessory, the main image at power-on and the title image at power-on are set to off, and the variable image at power-on is set to on. The coordinate correction amount of the fluctuating image when the power is turned on is set to (200, -450), and the enlargement ratio is set to × 1 (equal magnification). As a result, when the effect (expandable accessory scenario) in which the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is movable is executed, the main image at power-on and the title image at power-on are corrected so as to be hidden. Then, the fluctuating image at power-on is corrected so that it is displayed at the same size at the position (coordinates) moved (200, -450) from the position (coordinates) displayed at power-on. Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, due to this correction, the power-on variation image displayed in the upper left corner of the third symbol display device 81 when the normal effect is executed is displayed. When the telescopic accessory scenario is executed, it is displayed in the upper left corner of the sub-display device 690.

Further, the correction information for moving the tilting accessory is set to the same information as the correction information for normal production. As a result, when the effect of moving the effect member 620 of the tilt operation unit 600 (tilting accessory scenario) is executed, the display mode (position) of various power-on images is the same as when the normal effect is executed. , Size) is corrected.

In this way, when an effect other than when the power is turned on is executed, the display mode (position, size) of various images when the power is turned on is corrected based on the correction information of the correction information table 234a3 according to the effect. Is displayed. As a result, various power-on images can be diverted and displayed in each effect other than when the power is turned on, so that the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved. In addition, since the images at the time of turning on various powers can be corrected and displayed in appropriate display modes (position, size) in each effect, the images at the time of turning on various powers can be diverted without impairing the visibility of each effect. Can be displayed.

In addition, it may be corrected so that the position where the image is displayed is moved when various powers are turned on in conjunction with the movement of the accessory that is moved in each effect. Specifically, correction information of various power-on images corresponding to the elapsed time in one effect is defined. For example, when the effect of displaying the variable image when the power is turned on is displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81, the effect of gradually sliding (moving) the tilting operation unit 600 from right to left is executed. Suppose. In this case, by sliding the fluctuating image when the power is turned on to the left according to the operation of the tilting operation unit 600, the fluctuating image when the power is turned on is slid and displayed at a position not to be the back surface of the tilting operation unit 600. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the fluctuation image when the power is turned on from becoming difficult to see due to the operation of the tilting operation unit 600. That is, the player can clearly see the fluctuating image when the power is turned on. Further, when the fluctuation image when the power is turned on is moved and displayed to the area where the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, the image is moved to the sub display device 690 built in the tilting operation unit 600. The coordinates may be set so as to be displayed. With such a configuration, the variable image when the power is turned on can be moved and displayed without impairing the visibility of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The target to be moved and displayed is not limited to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, and may be a third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a reserved symbol, or a symbol such as a character. There may be.

Further, when moving the images when various powers are turned on, the images may be moved back and forth between the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. In this case, when the image is displayed across the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, the resolutions of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 are different, so that the difference in resolution is known. It may be adjusted (converted) using a scaler (for example, a video scaler) of. As a result, the range in which the images can be moved when various powers are turned on can be expanded.

Further, correction information may be set so that various power-on images can be moved when the power is turned on. In this case, the correction information used at the time of power-on may be read together with the program in the first program storage area that is first read at the time of power-on. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the origin return operation for moving various accessories to the origin position is executed when the power is turned on. Therefore, since various accessories are moved by the origin return operation, there is a timing at which the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 are difficult to see. Therefore, by correcting the display position (coordinates) of the images when the power is turned on according to the movable state of the various characters, it is easy to visually recognize the images when the power is turned on even during the origin return operation of the various characters. Can be.

Next, the image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 87) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and draws one frame of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 118 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, a third symbol area 235d, and a title image area 235f when the power is turned on are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the character ROM 234 outputs the main image at power-on, the variable image at power-on, and the image data corresponding to the title image area 235f at power-on from the main image area at power-on. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer to 235a (see FIG. 116).

Here, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, a display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, and a power-on image displayed in the display area will be described. First, FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship between the image drawn by the display control device 114 and the display areas of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. The pachinko machine 10 in this control example includes a third symbol display device 81 and a sub display device 690, and the image displayed on each display device (third symbol display device 81 and sub display device 690) is constant. Control for updating every period (for example, 20 milliseconds) is executed by the display control device 114.

Specifically, the display control device 114 updates (draws) image data for 1200 pixels (pixels) horizontally × 600 pixels (pixels) vertically at regular intervals (for example, 20 milliseconds). By setting these image data in each display device, the image displayed on each display device (third symbol display device 81 and sub-display device 690) is updated at regular intervals. The image data corresponding to each pixel is composed of three data, that is, data corresponding to R (red), data corresponding to G (green), and data corresponding to B (blue), respectively. There is. The data of each color is composed of, for example, 8 bits, and the gradation (level) of each color can be set in 8-bit increments (that is, 256 steps). That is, as a setting value for each color, any one of 256 levels from "00H" to "FFH" can be set.

Each pixel provided in each display device is provided with an area capable of developing red color, a region capable of developing green color, and an area capable of developing blue color, and image data is set. By doing so, the gradation (level) of each color can be set. In addition, each pixel (pixel) constituting each display device is sufficiently fine, and a region capable of developing red color, a region capable of developing green color, and a region capable of developing blue color, which constitute one pixel (pixel) It is difficult to distinguish the area from the naked eye. Therefore, with the naked eye, the appearance of the combined color of these three colors is obtained.

The image data set for each pixel will be described with reference to specific examples. For example, if the R data is FFH (255 gradations) and the data of other colors are 00H (0 gradations), the pixel in which the image data is set is red with the maximum gradation (maximum level). Is displayed (the pixel has the maximum gradation of red appearance). If the R data and the G data are 80H (128 gradations) and the B data is 00H (0 gradations), the red color is 128/255 gradations and the green color is 128/255 gradations. As a result of synthesizing, the pixels in which the image data is set are displayed with the appearance of yellow with the maximum gradation. Further, if the R data, the G data, and the B data are all FFH (255 gradations), all three colors of R, G, and B are set to the maximum gradation (255/255 gradations). As a result of synthesizing these three colors, the pixel in which the data is set is displayed with a white appearance. On the other hand, if the data of all three colors is 00H, all three colors are not displayed, and as a result, the pixels in which the data are set are displayed with a black appearance.

In this way, the display color of each pixel that constitutes the display screen of each display device can be expressed in 256 stages for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), so that each display can be expressed. A vivid image can be displayed on the device. In this control example, a region capable of developing red color, a region capable of developing green color, and a region capable of developing blue color are provided in each pixel, but the colors required for displaying an image are comprehensively provided. It may be changed within the range that can be expressed. For example, instead of the three colors of red, green, and blue, the three colors of yellow, cyan, and magenta may be used. Further, in addition to red, green, and blue, a region capable of developing yellow may be provided in each pixel, and 8-bit data corresponding to yellow may be added to the image data. By adding a region capable of developing yellow, the color expression can be made more vivid. In particular, since a color containing a large amount of yellow component and frequently used in display effects (for example, gold) can be vividly expressed, the interest of display effects can be further improved.

As shown in FIG. 81, coordinate data is associated with the display data of each pixel (pixel) constituting the image data. Here, the coordinate data is data for specifying a set position (set pixel) of data in each display device. In the present embodiment, the range of 0 to 1200 can be specified as the horizontal coordinates, and the range of 0 to 600 can be specified as the vertical coordinates.

In the horizontally long rectangular area shown in FIG. 81, the coordinates of the position of the upper left corner are defined as the origin coordinates (0,0), and the coordinates of the position of the lower right corner are defined as (1200,600). Further, the image data defined in the rectangular area having the four points of the coordinates (0,0), (800,0), (0,600), and (800,600) as the vertices is displayed in the third symbol. This is an area (area for a third symbol display device) that defines an image to be displayed on the device 81. Each coordinate is set so that the arrangement of each pixel data in this region coincides with the position where the image data is actually set in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, the image data defined in the rectangular region having the four points (800, 0), (1200, 0), (800, 300), and (1200, 300) as vertices is transmitted to the sub display device 690. This is an area (area for a sub-display device) that defines an image to be displayed. Further, the rectangular-shaped area having the remaining four points (800, 300), (1200, 300), (800, 600), and (1200, 600) as vertices is a spare area (unused area). The image data in this area is not used for display.

In this way, the display control device 114 in this control example draws the image data to be set in the third symbol display device 81 and the image data to be set in the sub display device 690 as one image data. Whether to display on the third symbol display device 81 or on the sub display device 690 is changed according to the coordinates of the image data. This makes it easy to synchronize the images (effects) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, and the images (effects) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. ) Can be suppressed. Not limited to this, the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 may be configured to be drawn separately.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 by the display control device 114 when the power is turned on will be described. Here, the main image at power-on is defined as image data for horizontal 450 pixels (pixels) × vertical 200 pixels (pixels), and the variable image at power-on is for horizontal 100 pixels (pixels) × vertical 100 pixels (pixels). The title image at power-on is defined as image data of 200 pixels (pixels) in width × 50 pixels (pixels) in height. In order to simplify the explanation of the display position (coordinates) of the various power-on images, when indicating the display position (coordinates) of the various power-on images, the upper left corner of the image data of the various power-on images is used. It is assumed that the coordinates of a pixel (pixel) are typically pointed to (indicated). For example, the main image at power-on in FIG. 82 (a) is within a rectangular region having four points (100, 50), (550, 50), (100, 250), and (550, 250) as vertices. It is the image data displayed in. In this case, the coordinates (100, 50) of the pixels in the upper left corner of the image data of the main image at power-on are typically pointed (shown) as the display position (coordinates) of the main image at power-on. The display position (coordinates) of the main image when the power is turned on is expressed as (100, 50).

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 first transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on title image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on title image area 235f. Next, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b, and then stored in the resident video RAM 235. The remaining image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the display control device 114 first displays the title image at power-on by using the image data stored in the title image area 235 g at power-on. The display position (coordinates) of the title image at power-on is (900, 100), and the title image at power-on is displayed at the center of the sub-display device 690 (see FIG. 82 (a)).

Next, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. The display position (coordinates) of the main image at power-on is (100, 50), and the main image at power-on is displayed at the center of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 82 (a)). While these displays are being performed, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

Here, since the sub-display device 690 has a lower resolution of the display screen than the third symbol display device 81, the image data set to display the image on the sub-display device 690 is the third symbol display device. The amount of data is smaller than the image data for displaying an image on 81. Therefore, in the display control device 114, the image (title image at power-on) to be displayed on the sub-display device 690, which has a small amount of data for displaying the image, is first stored in the resident video RAM. It is possible to shorten the time from when is input until the image is displayed.

After that, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 receives the third symbol display device 81. At the lower right position (coordinates of (600, 450)) when facing the screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the "○" symbol and the power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol. Is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period (see FIGS. 82 (b) and 82 (c)). Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image showing it is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image showing it is stopped. It will be displayed for a certain period later.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images showing "○" and "×" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image at power-on is already resident in the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on, so that at the time of power-on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ..

Further, since the fluctuation image when the power is turned on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the game that was executed before the power failure was executed when the power was once cut off and restored due to a power failure or the like during the execution of the game. Since the fluctuation or the result of the fluctuation in the above can be immediately confirmed by a simple fluctuation effect, the dissatisfaction felt by the player can be reduced.

As an image displayed when the power is turned on, a simple character image or the like may be provided and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, even in a simple variable effect displayed when the power is turned on, the variation of the effect can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the simple character image used here may be a character image used in the sub display device 690 at the time of normal production. As a result, the character image with a small data capacity displayed on the sub display device 690 can be shared and used without newly providing a simple character image, so that the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved and the character ROM 234 can be resident. The image transfer time to the video RAM 235 can be shortened.

Further, the images that have been transferred to the resident video RAM 235 may be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. As a result, even in the simple production performed between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the normal game can be started, the variation of the production can be gradually increased, so that the player's interest can be improved. Can be done.

Further, when transferring an image to the resident video RAM 235, the image compressed so that the resolution is lowered by a known image compression technique is transferred, and then the transferred image is decompressed to the resident video RAM 235. You may. Then, when the compressed image is stored in the resident video RAM, the image may be displayed on the sub-display device 690. As a result, even if the image is compressed to a low resolution, the image can be displayed without discomfort if the sub display device 690 has a low resolution, and the time from when the power is turned on until the image is displayed. Can be shortened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the display screens during the normal effect and the demo effect will be described. FIG. 83 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the normal effect, and FIG. 83 (b) shows the display of the third symbol display device 81 during the demo effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the screen schematically.

At the time of normal production, the display coordinates of the variation image when the power is turned on are (-600, -450) and displayed based on the correction information table 234a3 described later. Since the display coordinates of the power-on variation image at power-on are (600,450), the power-on variation image is displayed at the position (0,0) during normal production (FIG. 83 (a). )reference). This fluctuation image when the power is turned on is used to show the fluctuation result of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) at the time of normal production.

Further, at the time of the demonstration effect, the display coordinates of the title image at the time of power-on are displayed as (−700,0) based on the correction information table 234a3 described later. Since the display position of the title image at power-on when the power is turned on is (900, 100), the title image at power-on is displayed at the position (200, 100) during the demonstration effect (FIG. 83 (b). )reference).

Returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball is entered into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, but the variation is caused in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the production is not started immediately.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a correction information storage area 233m, a special effect correction flag 233n, a background image change flag 233p, and an effect mode flag 233r.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table and display data in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 as a kind of fixed value data, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. Or, if it is any of the jackpot C, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

Further, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory 640a is opened as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball is the second prize. The easier it is to enter the mouth 640, the more prize balls. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, the number of balls held is difficult to decrease, or the number of balls held is not reduced. Therefore, the player is in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease or the number of balls held is reduced. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a boy image and a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table.

When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time production) depending on this back type, the player of the background The back image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. During that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

“Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 85). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 87) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 86). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 86).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 86, in the example of FIG. 86, In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 87) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 86, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is displayed. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 sets it on in the main process (see FIG. 116) (see S2505 in FIG. 116). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S4805 in FIG. 132 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2801 in FIG. 118 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2809 in FIG. 118 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 118B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 118 (b), see S2810). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 119 to 127) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 128 to 130) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4701 in FIG. 132 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 132 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 57), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 for each frame A drawing list (see FIG. 87) described later, which describes the drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 87) described later, which describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 118 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S4305 in FIG. 130) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 87) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 87, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other image contents to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites by overwriting in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 creates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed ( Each time (see S2803 in FIG. 118) is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4307 in FIG. 128). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2502 in FIG. 116) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4913 in FIG. 133). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4914 in FIG. 133). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 134).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 118 (b)) is executed (see S5002 in FIG. 134).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The correction information storage area 233m is an area in which the correction information of the correction information table 234a3 described above is stored, and based on the correction information stored in the correction information storage area 233m, various power-on images (mainly when the power is turned on). The display mode (position, size) of the image, the variable image when the power is turned on, and the title image when the power is turned on) is corrected and displayed. The correction information storage area 233m has initial values for all image types when the power of the voice lamp control device 113 is turned on (display availability is ON, coordinate correction amount is (0,0), enlargement ratio is × 1 times (equal magnification). )) Is set, so that when the power is turned on, various power-on images are displayed at the initial positions (see FIG. 82). Then, the correction information of the correction information table 234a3 is set according to the game state (displayed effect). For example, if the normal effect is being executed, the correction information for the normal effect in the correction information table 234a3 is set (see S4604 in FIG. 131).

The special effect correction flag 233n is the correction information (expandable accessory scenario) corresponding to the movable effect (expandable accessory scenario or tilting accessory scenario) of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9). This is a flag for determining whether or not the correction information for moving or moving the tilting accessory) is set in the correction information storage area 233m. When the special effect correction flag 233n is on, it indicates that the correction information for moving the telescopic accessory or for moving the tilting accessory is set in the correction information storage area 233 m, and when it is off, the telescopic combination Indicates that the correction information for moving an object or moving a tilting accessory is not set in the correction information storage area 233 m. When the special effect flag 233n is on, in the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131), the correction information for the normal effect or the demo effect is not set in the correction information storage area 233 m (FIG. 131). S4602: See No). As a result, the telescopic accessory is movable, which is set in the correction information storage area 233 m, even though the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is in motion. It is possible to prevent the correction information for the use or the movement of the tilting accessory from being rewritten into the correction information for the normal effect or the demo effect by the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131). As a result, although the movable effect of the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is being executed, the display mode (position, size) of various power-on images is displayed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the display mode (position, size) corresponding to the normal effect or the demo effect is obtained, and prevent (suppress) the player from being confused.

This special effect correction flag 233n is set to on when the correction information for the expansion / contraction accessory movement or the tilting accessory movement is set in the correction information storage area 233m in the special effect correction process (see FIG. 121). (See S3205 in FIG. 121). Then, it is set to off when the variation display (effect) is stopped (see S4101 in FIG. 126 (b)). That is, when the movable effect of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is stopped, the special effect correction flag 233n is set to off. By setting the special effect correction flag 233n to off, it becomes possible to set the correction information for the normal effect or the demo effect in the correction information storage area 233 m by the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131) (FIG. 131 S4602: Yes). In this way, the correction information according to the effect can be set in the correction information storage area 233 m, so that the images at the time of turning on various powers are corrected and displayed in the display mode (position, size) suitable for each effect. Can be done.

The rear image change flag 233p is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The rear image change flag 233p is set to on when a rear image change command or an effect mode change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S4001 in FIG. 126 (a)). Then, it is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S4909 in FIG. 133), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S4910 in FIG. 133). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The effect mode flag 233r is a flag set and referred to for determining the current effect mode (effect period), and the rear image is changed based on the effect mode set in the effect mode flag 233r. The effect mode flag 233r is set based on the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4002 in FIG. 126 (a)), and will be described later based on the value of the set effect mode flag 233r. Back image data is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see S4911 in FIG. 133). As a result, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 can be changed according to the effect mode set by the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90, a ball entry effect executed during the time-saving game of this control example will be described. This ball entry effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the variation display during execution (variation) will be a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening 640. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a timing chart when the ball entry effect is executed. In the time-saving game in this control example, the fluctuation display based on the second special symbol is 0.6 seconds (a period of 0.125 seconds in which the symbol or the like is variablely displayed and a period of 0.475 seconds in which the symbol or the like is stopped and displayed). It ends with). In this case, if the expected degree of big hit is displayed in one display area based on the execution of the variable effect, the variable effect is completed in a short time (0.6 seconds) (that is, the display of the expected degree of big hit is displayed. (It finishes in 0.6 seconds), so it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the degree of expectation that will be a big hit.

Therefore, in this control example, the ball entry effect indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed in order from the first region 81a to the fourth region 81d of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, for example, the first While displaying the ball entry effect in the area 81a, the next ball entry effect can be displayed in the second area 81b. As a result, it is possible to prolong the display period of the ball entry effect indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit, and it is possible to provide a game machine in which the player can easily recognize the degree of expectation of a big hit, that is, an easy-to-understand game machine.

In addition, the ball entry effect indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit means that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 640 even when the holding of the second winning opening 640 is the upper limit (4 in this control example). It is displayed based on (so-called ball entry effect is displayed even at the time of overflow). As a result, even if the holding of the second winning opening 640 is the upper limit (4), it is possible to make the player want to continuously put the game ball into the second winning opening 640, and the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the person.

Furthermore, the ball entry effect that indicates the degree of expectation of a big hit is a production that corresponds to the number of remaining fluctuations until the big hit. Specifically, as will be described later, based on the decrease in the number of remaining fluctuations until a big hit, the ball entry effect with a high expectation of a big hit (high level ball entry effect) is controlled. As a result, the level of the ball entry effect (expectation for a big hit) gradually increases, so that the player can gradually foresee the arrival of a big hit, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Specifically, it will be described with reference to FIG. 88. First, when the game state shifts to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 4 during the jackpot game, the fluctuation based on the oldest winning ball among the reserved balls A variation 1 is started. Here, assuming that there is no jackpot winning information in the winning information of each reserved ball, the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot is undecided (greater than 4). In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, the level 0 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, if the first ball is entered into the second winning opening 640 (the lottery result is out of order) during the execution of the variation 1, the level 0 winning effect is the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. The number of reserved balls of the second special symbol changes to 4 (see FIG. 89 (a)).

Next, when the variation 1 ends, the variation 2 based on the reserved balls is started, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 3. If a second ball is entered into the second winning opening 640 (the lottery result is a big hit) during the execution of the change 2, the number of remaining fluctuations until the big hit is four times. In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, the level 1 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, the level 1 ball entry effect is displayed in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol changes to 4.

Then, when the fluctuation 2 ends and the fluctuation 3 based on the reserved ball is started, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 3, and the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot decreases to 3. In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, the level 2 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, if there is a third ball entering the second winning opening 640 (the lottery result is off) during the execution of the variation 3, the level 2 entry effect is displayed in the third area 81c of the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 89 (b)), the reserved symbol of the second special symbol changes to 4. Further, if the fourth winning ball (overflow) is made to the second winning opening 640 during the execution of the variation 3, the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot is three times. In this case, the level 2 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, the level 2 entry effect is displayed in the fourth area 81d of the third display device 81.

Next, when the fluctuation 3 ends and the fluctuation 4 based on the reserved ball is started, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 3, and the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot decreases to 2. In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, the level 3 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). However, if there is no entry into the second winning opening 640 during the execution of the variation 4, the entry effect is not newly displayed, and the variation 4 ends as it is.

When the variation 4 ends, the variation 5 based on the reserved ball is started, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reduced to 2, and the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot is reduced to 1. In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, the level 4 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, if a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the execution of the variation 5, the level 4 entry effect is displayed in the first area 81a of the third display device 81 (see FIG. 90A). ), The number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases to 3.

Then, when the fluctuation 5 ends, the fluctuation 6 based on the reserved balls of the jackpot winning information is started, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reduced to 2, and the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot is 0 (corresponding). Fluctuation decreases to jackpot). In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, the level 5 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, if a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the execution of this variation 6, the level 5 entry effect is displayed in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 90 (b)). (See), the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases to 3. After that, when the fluctuation of the fluctuation 6 is completed, the jackpot game is executed.

As described above, in this control example, the type of the ball entry effect is changed according to the number of remaining fluctuations up to the jackpot, so that the player can hit the jackpot before the fluctuation based on the jackpot is executed. It is possible to recognize in advance that this is the case, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, since the level of the ball entry effect gradually increases based on the decrease in the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot, the player can gradually foresee the arrival of the jackpot, and the player's interest can be enhanced. Can be improved.

Further, in this control example, the turnover rate (efficiency) of the game is improved by shortening the fluctuation time (0.6 seconds) of one fluctuation effect in the time-saving game. However, since the fluctuation time is short, the fluctuation effect executed (displayed) during the fluctuation time is also shortened. As a result, if the game ball is not continuously inserted into the second winning opening 640, the variable effect is not continuously performed (that is, the period during which the variable effect is not executed (displayed) becomes long), and the game is boring. There is a risk of becoming. Therefore, in this control example, the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. As a result, the player can be made to want the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640, and the game ball can be continuously entered into the second winning opening 640. It can be displayed continuously, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In this control example, the ball entry effect is performed according to the number of remaining fluctuations up to the jackpot, but the ball entry effect is not limited to this, and it is difficult for the player to recognize the number of remaining fluctuations up to the jackpot. May be executed, or the above-mentioned ball entry effect may be performed regardless of the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to provide a case where the jackpot is a big hit without predicting the arrival of the jackpot, and it is possible to give the game a surprise and improve the interest of the player.

Further, in this control example, the above-mentioned ball entry effect is configured to be sequentially displayed in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the ball entry effect based on one ball entry will be continuously displayed until four game balls are newly entered in the second winning opening 640, and the game ball will be displayed in the second winning opening 640. Even when the ball entry interval is very short, it is possible to secure a time for displaying the ball entry effect, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player cannot visually recognize (recognize) the ball entry effect. It should be noted that the area where the ball entry effect is not displayed may be discriminated and the area where the ball entry effect is not displayed may be preferentially used for display. As a result, it is possible to secure a longer time for displaying the ball entry effect.

Further, in this control example, the holding of the second winning opening 640 is the upper limit, and even when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 (so-called overflow), the ball entry effect is performed. ing. As a result, even if the hold of the second winning opening 640 is the upper limit, the ball entry effect is displayed based on the entry of the ball, so that the holding of the second winning opening 640 is the upper limit for the player. Even so, it is possible to make the player want to continuously enter the game ball into the second winning opening 640, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. In addition, since the ball entry effect is displayed more than the number of times the time saving game is given, it is possible to make the player feel that a lot of time saving games are given.

In this control example, the ball entry effect is configured to be displayed in order (clockwise) in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, it may be configured to be displayed in the reverse order (counterclockwise), or may be displayed randomly. Further, the display order may be changed when a specific effect or variation is executed or when there is a big hit winning information. As a result, it is possible to change the order of the displayed ball entry effects, prevent the game from becoming monotonous, and prevent the player from getting bored early.

Further, the display order of the ball entry effect displayed in each area (first area 81a to fourth area) of the third symbol display device 81 may be changed according to the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, when the expectation of a big hit is low, the ball entry effect is displayed in order (clockwise) in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d, while when the expectation of a big hit is high. Is displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise). As a result, the player can recognize the degree of expectation in the display order of the ball entry effect displayed in each area (first area 81a to fourth area), and each area (first area 81a to fourth area). Since it is not necessary to look closely at the content of the ball entry effect displayed on the player, the burden on the player can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, each effect period (each effect mode) set in this control example will be described. In this control example, as described above, there are a normal game period (effect mode A), which is a period during which a normal effect is executed (displayed), and an effect period set periodically (5 minutes every hour). At the end of the time production period (production mode B), which is the period during which a special mode of production (time production) according to the elapsed time is executed (displayed), and the time production period (production mode B). After that, a time production extension period (effect mode C) is provided to shift to the case where it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit (when the pending winning information is a jackpot or the variable display that becomes a jackpot is being executed). ..

FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing each effect period (normal game period, time effect period, time effect extension period) in this control example. As described above, in this control example, information indicating the start times of the normal game period (effect mode A) and the time effect period (effect mode B) is set in the effect time storage area 223 g. The effect time storage area 223 g is RTC292 (timekeeping means) by the time setting process (see FIG. 105) in the start-up process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. ), The information indicating the start time of the normal game period (effect mode A) and the time effect period (effect mode B) is set based on the time information (information indicating the power-on time). .. Each effect period is set based on the information indicating the start time of the effect time storage area 223 g.

Specifically, in the effect time storage area 223 g, information indicating the time 55 minutes after the power-on time is set as information indicating the start time of the first time effect. As a result, the time effect period (effect mode B) is set 55 minutes after the power-on time. The normal game period (effect mode A) is set for 55 minutes after the power is turned on. Since the time effect period is 5 minutes, the information indicating the time 5 minutes after the start time of the time effect is set as the information indicating the start time of the normal game period (effect mode A). As a result, when 5 minutes have passed from the start time of the time effect, the normal game period (effect mode A) is set. In this way, information indicating the start time of the production time storage area 223g is set so that the normal game period (55 minutes) and the time production period (5 minutes) are repeatedly set, and 5 minutes every hour. The time production period (effect mode B) of is set.

Here, when 5 minutes of the time effect period elapses, it is determined whether or not a hold memory stored at that time or a special symbol that is changing and the hit / fail determination result is a big hit is set. Then, when it is determined that a jackpot is set, the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is set by the time until the fluctuation ends. In this case, the normal game period (effect mode A) is set when the time effect extension period (effect mode C) ends.

Further, when the remaining time of the time effect period (effect mode B) is 3 seconds or less, the third symbol display device 81 may or may not shift to the time effect extension period (effect mode C) thereafter. The display mode of is switched to the precursor display mode suggesting the end of the time production period. By switching to this precursor display mode, the variable display of the third symbol (regardless of whether it is a big hit or a miss) that has been executed (displayed) until then becomes a display mode that is difficult for the player to see. It is variable. Specifically, it is reduced and continuously variablely displayed at the lower right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Then, regardless of the fluctuation display that has been executed (displayed) until then, the third symbol indicating the deviation is stopped and displayed at the center of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the third symbol indicating the pseudo deviation). The design is displayed). Here, the third symbol, which is pseudo-stop-displayed in the precursor display mode, is displayed with a slight shaking to notify that the stop-display is not completely performed. In this way, by switching to the precursor display mode and displaying it as if the third symbol was stopped and displayed, it seems as if the third symbol was stopped and displayed at the same timing as the other pachinko machines 10. Can be made. As a result, the display mode at the end of the time production period can be set to the same display mode on the plurality of pachinko machines 10, and it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

In addition, when the remaining time of the time effect period (effect mode B) is 3 seconds or less, even if the variation display of the third symbol is not executed (displayed), the display mode is similarly changed to the precursor display mode. Can be switched. As a result, the display mode can be switched to the precursor display mode regardless of whether or not the variable display is executed (displayed). Therefore, the display mode at the end of the time production period is the same as the display mode on the plurality of pachinko machines 10. can do.

In the precursor display mode, the display mode in which the variable display of the third symbol, which has been executed (displayed) until then, is changed and is difficult for the player to see is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, the player may change the display of the third symbol to a variable display in a mode that is difficult to recognize, or may not display it at all. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the third symbol indicating the pseudo-disengagement is displayed, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of making the third symbol appear as if it is stopped and displayed.

Further, at the timing when the time production period (effect mode B) ends (that is, the timing of the division of whether or not to shift to the time production extension period (effect mode C)), it indicates that it is the time production period. After the word "super fish school time", the word "end?" (Notification mode) is displayed. After that, when the time production extension period (effect mode C) is set, the characters "Super fish school time extension !!" are displayed to notify that the time production extension period (effect mode C) has been started, and the fish school The background image of is displayed again. The effect executed (displayed) during the time effect extension period is called an extension effect.

When the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is entered, the variable display of the third symbol, which has been changed (reduced) to a display mode that is difficult for the player to see, is changed to the precursor display mode. It is displayed again (enlarged) in a visible (easy) display mode (see FIG. 83). When the variation display of the third symbol is changed (enlarged) to a visible (easy) display mode again, the player is notified (displayed) as if a new special symbol variation has started. (Hereafter, it is called re-variation production). As a result, the variable display of the third symbol, which has been changed (reduced) to a display mode that is difficult for the player to see in the precursor display mode, is changed (enlarged) again to a visible (easy) mode. It can be changed (enlarged) without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is a period until the variable display that becomes a jackpot is completed (that is, until the jackpot game is started). In the time effect extension period (effect mode C), the remaining time (for example, 115 seconds) of the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the jackpot game is started). The remaining time until is displayed on the third symbol display device 81).

In the present embodiment, when the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is set, the hold memory that becomes the jackpot is set, or the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot has already started (changing). ). Therefore, shifting to the time production extension period (effect mode C) informs the player of the jackpot. Here, during the time effect period, the same effect is executed synchronously between the same pachinko machines 10, and an effect as to whether or not to shift to the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is displayed at the same timing. .. As a result, by shifting to the time production extension period (effect mode C), other (surrounding) players can also determine that the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit (that is, a big hit for the surrounding players). Since it can be notified that it will be, it is possible to fuel the gambling spirit of other (surrounding) players.

On the other hand, when the time production period (production mode B) ends and the normal game period (production mode A) is set, the end of the time production period (production mode B) is notified of "Super fish school time end !!" The characters are displayed. This display is displayed until the variable display of the third symbol, which is changed to the display mode that is difficult for the player to see in the precursor display mode, is stopped and displayed. Then, from the next variation, the reduced display of the third symbol is canceled, and the third symbol is variablely displayed in the normal size. With this configuration, even if the time effect period (effect mode B) ends and then the time effect extension period (effect mode C) does not shift, the mode can be switched to the precursor display mode, making it difficult to see. The variable variable display can be stopped without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, if the variation display of the third symbol is not executed (displayed) when the remaining time of the time effect period (effect mode B) is 3 seconds or less, the normal game period (effect mode A) is set. When set, the characters "Super fish school time end !!" notifying the end of the time effect period (effect mode B) are displayed for a predetermined time (3 seconds). Then, from the next variation, the third symbol is displayed in a variable size (see FIG. 83 (a)) without being reduced.

In the present embodiment, when the condition for setting the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is subsequently a big hit (the reserved winning information is a big hit, or a variable display that becomes a big hit is being executed. However, the case is not limited to this, and a hold memory in which a variable pattern to be a super reach is selected may be set, or a lottery unrelated to the special symbol lottery is executed and a predetermined lottery result is obtained. It may be configured to be set when becomes. As a result, it is possible to provide a case where a big hit is not obtained even though the time shift to the time effect extension period (effect mode C) has been started. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the player wins the jackpot during the time production extension period (effect mode C), so that the player's interest can be improved.

Here, in the time effect period (effect mode B), a specific time effect (countdown effect) is performed periodically (every minute) (see FIG. 91). As a result, during the time production period, the same specific time production (countdown production) can be performed in synchronization with another (for example, adjacent) pachinko machine 10 installed, and the plurality of pachinko machines 10 have a sense of unity. It is possible to further enhance the effect of time production aimed at providing a certain production.

Further, in this specific time effect (countdown effect), the content of the effect changes based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state and not in the time saving state (so-called latent probability change state), the countdown characters displayed in the countdown effect (“3, 2”). 1, 1 ... ") Is displayed in red (displayed in black if it is not in the latent probability change state). As a result, the player can easily recognize that the gaming state is a probabilistic state and not a time-saving state (so-called latent probabilistic state). Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the production content of the specific time production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. It should be noted that the notification mode for notifying the latent probability change state is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, a design (image) or a character for notifying that the latent probability change state may be displayed. In this case, as those symbols (images), various power-on images may be corrected and diverted. As a result, it is not necessary to separately prepare a symbol (image) for notifying the latent probability change state, so that the data capacity (ROM capacity) can be reduced.

Further, in this control example, in addition to the above-mentioned specific time effect (countdown effect), a countdown notice effect including the same type of display mode (countdown) is executed. This countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. That is, it may be executed (displayed) at a timing different from the specific time effect (countdown effect) that is executed periodically (every minute). Therefore, a countdown notice effect including a specific time effect (countdown effect) and the same type of display mode (countdown) may be executed at a timing different from that of another pachinko machine 10 of the same type installed (for example, next to it). is there. As a result, the game can be given unexpectedness, and the interest of the player can be improved. In the countdown notice effect, after the countdown characters ("3, 2, 1, ...") Are displayed, a character symbol suggesting the degree of expectation that will be a big hit is displayed, or the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit (or Pressing) is suggested, and a pattern or character suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed based on the repeated hitting (or pressing) of the frame button 22.

In this control example, it is conceivable that the effect timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect) is set during the execution (display) of the countdown notice effect. In this case, the effects including the same type of display mode (countdown) may be duplicated (or overwritten) and displayed, resulting in a gaming machine that is difficult for the player to understand. Therefore, in this control example, the avoidance flag 223i described above is set to on during the execution of the countdown notice effect (see S2007 in FIG. 111), and when the avoidance flag 223i is on, the specific time effect (see S2007 in FIG. 111). It is configured so that the countdown effect) is not executed (set) (see S2305: Yes in FIG. 114). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the above-mentioned problems from occurring, and to make the game machine easy for the player to understand.

In this control example, the configuration for avoiding (restricting) the duplicate display of the effect including the countdown mode has been described by taking the countdown mode as an example. However, the effect of avoiding (restricting) overlapping display is not limited to the effect including the countdown mode. The same applies to other effects that may be displayed in duplicate among the effects including the same type of aspect. For example, when the effects suggesting the pressing of the button may be displayed in duplicate, the effect suggesting the pressing of the button may be avoided (restricted) from being displayed in duplicate.

In this control example, when the countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) in order to prevent the effects (countdown effect, countdown notice effect) including the same type of mode (countdown) from being displayed in duplicate, it is specified. Avoided (restricted) so that the time effect (countdown effect) is not executed (displayed). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the effects including the same type of effect (countdown) may be adjusted (extended or shortened) or the start timing may be changed. For example, when a specific time effect (countdown effect) is executed 20 seconds later, a countdown notice effect (normally, the effect time is 30 seconds) is executed (set). In this case, the production time of the countdown notice effect may be shortened (for example, shortened to 15 seconds) and set. Thereby, even if one of the effects including the same type of effect is not hidden, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the effect including the same type of effect from being displayed in duplicate. As a result, more effects can be displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, by changing the start timing of any one of the effects including the same type of mode (countdown), the following may be performed. For example, the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect) may be delayed until the countdown notice effect ends (or until a predetermined time elapses after the end).

Further, when the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect) is delayed, the display (effect) mode (that is, the start timing) that would have been set (displayed) if not delayed was not delayed. A specific time effect (countdown effect) may be started (displayed) from the display (effect) mode displayed on the other pachinko machine 10. Specifically, a case where the specific time effect (countdown effect) is delayed by 5 seconds will be described as an example. As described above, the specific time effect (countdown effect) is an effect in which the characters of the countdown are counted down by 1 every 3 seconds from "3". Therefore, when the delay time is 5 seconds, the display (effect) mode displayed when the delay is not made (the display (effect) mode displayed on the other pachinko machine 10) is "2" as a countdown character. Is a display (effect) mode in which is displayed. In line with this, the specific time effect (countdown effect) that is started with a delay of 5 seconds is controlled so as to start from the display (effect) mode in which "2" is displayed as the countdown character. As a result, the specific time effect (countdown effect) whose start timing is delayed can be displayed in synchronization with the specific time effect (countdown effect) executed (displayed) by the other pachinko machine 10. As a result, the specific time effect (countdown effect) executed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is executed (displayed) without deviation, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

As a method of delaying the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect), a means (timekeeping means) for measuring the period in which the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect) is delayed is provided, and based on the measurement result. An example is a method of setting a display (effect) mode of a specific time effect (countdown effect) that is started with a delay. As another method, during the period in which the specific time effect (countdown effect) is delayed, a process of setting the display (effect) mode of the effect (for example, an image display pointer update process) is executed as a control process. Even if it is done, there is a method of processing so that the image and sound related to the specific time effect (countdown effect) are not output (for example, muting only the sound related to the specific time effect).

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 92 to 103. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When they reach 299, 99, 239), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless it is a big hit of a special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 2203d (holding number N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (variable display in the special symbol). (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (that is, whether there is a reserved memory of the special symbol 2) (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 102) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and extracts the extracted values from the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (that is, there is no reserved ball of the special symbol 2) (S204: No), it is special. It is determined whether the value (N1) of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (that is, the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 are stored) (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 are not stored) (S209: No), the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 Since there are no reserved balls in both cases, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211 the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203e is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

In the process of S208, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 94. After that, this process ends.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B elapsed? Whether or not it is determined (S213). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S213: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S214), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S213, if the fluctuation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S213: Yes), the stop setting process is executed (S215), and this process ends. The stop setting process (S215) will be described later with reference to FIG. 95.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the special symbol variation start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and is special with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area common to the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery for "special symbol jackpot", "special symbol small hit", or "special symbol miss" ( This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 while performing the hit / fail determination).

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , The stop type selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S302).

If the probability is changing (S302: Yes), whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. The lottery result is obtained from the first random number table (see FIG. 75A) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values set in the first random number table (see FIG. 75A) one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values of these hits match. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined to be a big hit, but the determination value is not limited to the same, and different random values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be jackpots. The number of random numbers may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, if the probability change is not in progress (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol, so that the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 Based on the value and the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 75A), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table for low probability. As a random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, one of "0" is set, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per first and the random number value that becomes this hit match, the big hit of the special symbol Is determined to be. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), A display mode at the time of a big hit indicating a big hit is set (S306).

In the process of S306, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set according to the determined jackpot type (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C). Further, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined from the first hit type selection table (see FIG. 75 (b)) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S307). Specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table. In this first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 39", the jackpot type is jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), which is any of the values "40 to 79". The jackpot type in the case is jackpot B (16R time saving jackpot), and the jackpot type in the case of any of "80 to 99" is jackpot C (2R probability variation time saving no jackpot). After that, the process proceeds to S310.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). After that, the process proceeds to S310.

In the process of S310, a variation pattern command for notifying each determined variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S310), a stop type command is set (S311), and then this process is terminated and a special symbol is displayed. Return to variable processing.

Next, the stop setting process (S215) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the stop setting process (S215). This stop setting process (S215) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92).

In the stop setting process (S215), first, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S261). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) of FIG. When this special symbol change start processing is executed, a lottery of special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Be told. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot is A, the jackpot is B, the jackpot is C, the jackpot is small, or the hit is off.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on and the jackpot C is reached. In that case, the yellow LED is turned on. If it is a small hit, the purple LED is turned on, and if it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped. It should be noted that the lighting mode is not limited to the above-mentioned LED display color and lighting mode, and other lighting modes may be used as long as the lighting mode can identify each big hit, small hit type, and fluctuation state.

After the processing of S261 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing (this lottery result). Is a big hit of a special symbol (S262). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S262: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to on (S263), the start of the jackpot is set (S264), and then the process proceeds to S265.

On the other hand, in the process of S262, if the current lottery result is not a big hit (S262: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S266). If the result of this lottery is a small hit (S266: Yes), the small hit flag 203j is set to on (S267), the start of a small hit is set (S268), and then the process proceeds to S265.

In the process of S266, if the result of the lottery this time is out of order (S266: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is 1 or more (S269). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S269: No), the process proceeds to S265. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203h is 1 or more (S269: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S270), and the process proceeds to S265.

In the process of S265, a stop command is set (S265), and this process is terminated.

Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and starts winning. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing hold processing for the value when there is.

When the start winning process (FIGS. 96, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S501). Here, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (S502). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S503).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S501: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (503: No), the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S501: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is added by 1 (S504). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (5405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 102) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S505, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. Special symbol 1 The reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S506). In the process of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processes S507 to S512, the same process is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640 for the processing of S501 to S506. The only difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640, and the other processes are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening 640 (S507: No), the look-ahead process is executed after the process of S512 (S513). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, a look-ahead process (S513), which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S513).

In this look-ahead process (FIGS. 97, S513), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S601). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S601; No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is a probability change (S602), and the gaming state is determined. If is probabilistic (S602: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 75A) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. In the process of S602, if the gaming state is not probable (S602: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 75A) (S604), and S605. Move on to processing. In the process of S605, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result executed in the processes of S603 and S604 is set (S605), and this process is terminated. In this look-ahead process (S513), not only in the present embodiment, but also the type of the selected variation pattern (off reach, super reach, special reach, etc.) is discriminated, and the voice lamp control device 113 is subjected to the winning information command. May be configured to notify.

Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device and the electric combination associated with the second winning opening 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the object 640a.

In this ordinary symbol variation processing (FIGS. 98, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S701). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. Monaka and are included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S701: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is larger than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S708).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a big hit of the special symbol (S709). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711.

In the processing of S709, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired by the processing of S707. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 75 (c)).

In the process of S708, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S708: No), the process proceeds to the process of S711. In the processing of S711, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S707 is low. Based on the second hit random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 75 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S710 or S711 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S712), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S712: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S714), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S714: Yes), the special symbol is currently being hit. Whether or not it is determined (S715). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. , The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S715, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so that the second winning opening 640 The opening period of the electric accessory 640a accompanying the above is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719. In the process of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S714: No), the process proceeds to the process of S717. In the processing of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set to 0. . Set to 2 seconds, set the number of times of opening to 1 (S717), and shift to the process of S719.

In the process of S712, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S712: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

In the process of S719, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S719), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S719: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device. The fluctuation time of is set to 3 seconds (S720), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S719: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the time of the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S702: Yes). S722). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

In the process of S722, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S722: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S722, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S723). In the process of S723, the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S718, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S723, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 102) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S713 or the process of S718.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIGS. 98, S106) is the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S724). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S725), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S725, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 102) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S716 or the process of S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (FIGS. 99, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S803).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S803: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is added by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S805), and this process is terminated. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S901) as the setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1002). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process shifts to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if it is not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is shifted to S1012 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1012 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1114 of the main process (FIG. 102), the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1012). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1010.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1007: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of shutting off the drive power is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1010, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Here, when a special symbol that is changing is stored, the display control device 114 displays the power-on fluctuation image (see FIGS. 82 (b) to (C)) of the voice lamp control device 113. You will be instructed to do so. The fluctuation instruction may be executed by, for example, the initial setting (S1001) in the startup process, or may be executed by another process. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 102), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), the output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is stored on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 93) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 96) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 103) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the first 1 The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 102), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92). The details of the jackpot control process (S1104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 98), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start with devices 37A, 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94) ends, the first symbol display device 37A, The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 94) after ending the variation display executed in 37B. , 37B stops display (lights up display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 98), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S723 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 98), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S713 or the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 98). ).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1109). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process is shifted to S1101, and each process after S1101 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1109: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1111).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the process of S1108, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 100 has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S1112 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1114), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1108 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1101 to S1107, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is set in the initial setting process (S1001) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1101 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 102), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (see FIG. 102). Large opening port) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIGS. 103, S1104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1201). Specifically, if the process of S264 of the stop setting process (see FIG. 95) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1201, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1201: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g and the time saving flag 203k are both set to off (S1202), and the opening command is set (S1203). This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1201: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1204). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. In the process of S1204, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S1204: Yes), the process of S1205 is executed. In the process of S1205, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1205). In the process of S1205, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S1206), and a new one is opened. A round number command indicating the number of rounds to start is set (S1207), and this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1205 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1205: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied. Determine (S1208). If the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1208: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1209), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1208, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1208: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1210). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball ejection time, has elapsed. To determine as. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1210: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is turned off (S1211), and the ending command is set (S1212). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is A or C (S1213). In the process of S1213, if the jackpot type is not A or C (S1213: No), 100 is set in the time saving / medium counter (S1217), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1213, if the jackpot type is A or C (S1213: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is turned on (S1214), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is A (S1215). If the jackpot type is not A (S1215: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1215, if the jackpot type is A (S1215: Yes), the time saving flag 203k is turned on (S1216), and then this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 115. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1514 (see FIG. 80) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (S1516: Yes in FIG. 106), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1519. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1519 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1302: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1514. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1519 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the data shifts to S1308.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1302: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process in S1519, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1304, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1306). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power off flag 223y is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S1519 is executed (see S1519 in FIG. 106). That is, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1519 is executed, the process of S1308 is reached at the moment when the power-off flag 223y is turned on. This is the case where the power failure is started after the power failure of S1519 has been executed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), after clearing the work area of the RAM in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1309) and setting the power off flag 223y to off (S1310). , Set the initial value of RAM223 (S1311). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110. After that, the interrupt permission is set (S1312), the time setting process is executed (S1313), and the process shifts to the main process. Details of the time setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 105.

On the other hand, the process of S1308 is reached with the power cutoff flag 223y turned off because the start-up process this time was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S1308 to S1306 was performed via the process of S1308. This is the case when the process is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1309, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1311, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1312), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1311), the time setting process is executed (S1313), and the process shifts to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1309 is that when the processing of S1308 is reached via the processing of S1304 to S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1304. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, the time setting process (S1313) executed in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the time setting process (S1313). This time effect setting process (S1313) is a process for setting information indicating the start time at which the normal game period (effect mode A) and the time effect period (effect mode B) are executed in the effect time storage area 223 g. ..

In the time setting process (S1313), first, time information is acquired from RTC292 (S1401). As the time information acquired here, the values of "hours and minutes" are acquired. The RTC292 is a timekeeping means having a battery inside, and when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the same current time is initially set in the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years of operating time. The RTC292 also has a calendar function, and has a configuration in which the "date" can be determined. Therefore, for example, on Christmas day, it is possible to control to change to a background image dedicated to Christmas or to display a special character such as Santa.

Then, based on the time information (power-on time) acquired in the process of S1401, the normal game period (effect mode A), the time effect period (effect mode B), and the start time at which the specific time effect is executed (set) are set. Each is calculated and set in the effect time storage area 223 g (S1402), and this process is terminated.

The information set in the effect time storage area 223 g in the process of S1402 will be specifically described by taking as an example the case where the power of the voice lamp control device 113 is turned on at 9:00. In the effect time storage area 223 g, 9:55, 55 minutes after the power-on time (9:00), is set as information indicating the start time of the first time effect. Then, the time every hour (10:55, 11:55, ...) From the start time of the first time effect is set for 24 hours as information indicating the start time of the time effect. In addition, every minute (9:56, 9:57, 9:58, 9:59, 10:56, 10:57 ...) from the start timing of the time production during the time production. It is set as information indicating the start time (start timing) of the specific time effect. Further, since the time production period is 5 minutes, the information indicating the time (10:00, 11:00, etc.) 5 minutes after the start time of the time production is the normal game period (effect mode A). It is set as information indicating the start time (see FIG. 91).

In this control example, each time effect (time effect, specific time effect) is set to be executed based on the time when the power is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each time effect is not limited to this. The start time of (time effect, specific time effect) may be set. For example, every hour may be set as the start time of the time effect. As a result, when the power of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is turned on, even if the power-on time is deviated, the start time of the time effect is not deviated, and the time effect is synchronously executed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10. can do.

In this control example, RTC292 is used as the timekeeping means, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a counter may be provided as a timekeeping means as follows. When measuring (timekeeping) the normal game period (55 minutes), the counter value should be counted up (or counted down) periodically (for example, every second) after the normal game period (55 minutes) is started. Measure (timekeeping) with. Then, when the value of the counter reaches a value indicating 55 minutes (for example, 3300), it is determined that 55 minutes have passed. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to provide the RTC292, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at a lower cost.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1501 this time was executed (S1501), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1511 without performing the processes of S1502 to S1510. In the process of S1501, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1502 to S1510 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1511 and the variation display setting process of S1512 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1511 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1512 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1502). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1508 described later (S1503), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1504). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be.

Further, at the time of recovery from the power outage due to a power failure or the like, the effect permission command based on the game executed at the time of the power outage is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 101). .. The voice lamp control device 113 creates a display variation pattern command in the power-on notification process (S1504) based on the reception of the effect permission command including the fact that the special symbol is changing, and the display control device 113. It is transmitted to 114. The display control device 114 determines the fluctuation start command of the power-on fluctuation image by a simple command determination process (see FIG. 118 (b)), and uses the power-on fluctuation image based on the fluctuation pattern based on the received command. A variable display is performed (see FIG. 82 (b) or (c)). As described above, the display variation pattern command created here is for executing the variation display by the variation image at power-on, which is a simple image. Therefore, the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 110) described later. ) Is simpler than the one selected in. As a result, the processing load for creating the display variation pattern command can be reduced, and the variation image when the power is turned on can be displayed with good response when the power is restored from the power failure.

Further, after the effect permission command based on the game that was executed when the power is turned off is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 101), it is executed based on the effect permission command. A stop command for stopping the variable display is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display stop command to the display control device 114 based on the reception of this stop command. The display control device 114 determines that a display stop command has been received by a simple command determination process (see 118 (b)), and uses a display mode based on the received command to change the power-on variation image (FIG. 82 (b) or FIG. (See (c)) is stopped.

Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1505 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1505, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1508), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1509, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1510). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1509 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1511). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107.

Next, the process proceeds to S1512. In the process of S1512, the variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 109.

After finishing the variable display setting process (S1512), the synchronous effect management process for executing the effect based on the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 is executed (S1513), and the specific time is set in the time effect period (effect mode B). A specific time effect process for executing the effect is executed (S1514). Then, the ball entry effect setting process for executing the ball entry effect based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1515), and the process proceeds to S1516. Details of the synchronous effect management process (S1513), the specific time effect process (S1514), and the ball entry effect setting process (S1515) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, 114, and 116, respectively.

When the ball entry effect setting process (S1515) is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1516). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1516 (S1516: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1518), and the power-off process is executed (S1519). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1520), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1516 (S1516: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1517), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1517: No), the process returns to the process of S1501 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1517: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1511). This command determination process (S1511) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. ..

In the command determination process (S1511), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is generated from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation pattern reception process (S1602) is executed to return to the main process.

Here, the details of the variation pattern reception process (S1602) will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern reception process (S1602). This variation pattern reception process (S1602) extracts the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and various accessories (upper and lower operation unit devices (upper and lower operation unit devices) based on the extracted variation pattern accessory scenario. This is a process for setting the operation of the falling accessory) 400, the expansion / contraction effect device (expansion / extension accessory) 540, the tilting operation unit (tilting accessory) 600, and the like).

In the variation pattern reception process, first, the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1701), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1702). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 109) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a falling accessory scenario in the extracted variation pattern type (S1703). In the process of S1703, when it is determined that there is a falling accessory scenario (S1703: Yes), it is a case where the movable effect of the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 is executed. (Falling accessory) A falling accessory scenario for moving the 400 is set (S1704). The falling accessory scenario set in the process of S1704 defines the operation of the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 for the same time as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect set based on the fluctuation pattern type. is there. By driving the vertical drive motor 431 based on this falling accessory scenario, the vertical operation unit device (falling accessory) 400 and the fluctuation effect can be moved in synchronization (interlocking).

After finishing the process of S1704, it is next determined whether or not there is an open setting of the door member 470 of the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 (S1705). In the process of S1705, when it is determined that the door member 470 is set to be open (S1705: Yes), the opening / closing drive motor 466 is not excited (off) so that the door member 470 is opened. Set (energization stop control). As a result, the static torque (so-called detent torque) of the opening / closing drive motor 466 for keeping the door member 470 in the closed state is minimized, and the inertial force that causes the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 to move in the falling direction. Will open the door member 470. Although not shown, when the door member 470 is not set to open, that is, when the door member 470 is left in the closed state, the opening / closing drive motor 466 is excited and controlled so that the opening / closing drive motor 466 is stopped. .. As a result, when the door member 470 is not set to open, the static torque of the opening drive motor 466, that is, the door member 470 is closed even if the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 moves in the falling direction. Since the torque for maintaining the state (so-called holding torque) is excited to the maximum, the door member 470 is maintained in the closed state and is not opened. The torque (holding torque) for keeping the door member 470 in the closed state does not have to be maximized, and the door member 470 does not have to be maximized when the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 moves in the falling direction. The torque may be such that the door member 470 is not opened by the inertial force generated in. In this case, the current for exciting the opening / closing drive motor 466 can be made weak, so that the power consumption can be reduced.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1705 that there is no opening setting for the falling accessory (S1705: No), the processing of S1706 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S1707, and it is determined that there is no falling accessory scenario. In the case (S1703: No), the processing from S1704 to S1706 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1707.

After finishing the processing of S1703, S1705 or S1706, it is determined whether or not there is a telescopic accessory scenario (S1707). In the process of S1707, when it is determined that there is a telescopic accessory scenario (S1707: Yes), the drive motor 561 is moved so that the front plate member 546 of the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) moves downward. The expansion / contraction accessory scenario for exciting control is set, and the process proceeds to S1709. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1707 that there is no telescopic accessory scenario (S1707: No), the process of S1708 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1709.

In the process of S1709, it is determined whether or not there is a tilted accessory scenario (S1709). In the process of S1709, when it is determined that there is a tilting accessory scenario (S1709: Yes), the drive motor 631 is excited and controlled so that the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) moves to the overhanging position. A tilting accessory scenario is set (S1710), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1709, if it is determined that there is no tilting accessory scenario (S1709: No), the process of S1708 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 107, the description will continue. In the process of S1601, if the variation pattern command is not received (S1601: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1603). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1603: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1604), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1605), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 109) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1603: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1606). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1606: Yes), it is determined whether the received hold ball number command is the special figure 1 hold ball number command or the special figure 2 hold ball number command. , That is, the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of hold numbers N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) and the special symbol 2 hold ball of the main control device 110. The value of the number counter 203e (the number of holdings N2 of the fluctuation display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1607). Further, in the process of S1608, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is set. After the processing of S1607 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is performed when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, or a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is broken, every time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the process of S1607. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the starting prize or drawing the special symbol. Can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S1607 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is issued. Set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1606, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S1606: No), then it is determined whether the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1608). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the processing of S1608 (S1608: Yes), the winning information (such as the lottery result of the special symbol) based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. (S1609), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the winning information command is not received (S1608: No), it is determined whether or not the command related to the jackpot is received (S1610). In the process of S1610, when a command related to a jackpot is received (S1610: Yes), a process corresponding to the command related to the received jackpot is executed (S1611), and this process is terminated. Examples of commands related to jackpots include an opening command, a number of rounds command, and an ending command. Further, as the process corresponding to the received command related to the jackpot, for example, there is a process of setting a display opening command, a display round number command, and a display ending command.

If it is determined in the process of S1610 that the command related to the jackpot has not been received, it is determined (S1610: No) whether or not the stop command has been received (S1612). In the process of S1612, if it is determined that the stop command has been received (S1612: Yes), the executed variation display stop process is executed (S1613), the avoidance flag 223i is set to off (S1614), and so on. A display stop command is set (S1615), and this process ends.

The display stop command set by the process of S1615 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is stored in the command output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. , Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop command, the display control device 114 stops the variable effect being executed in a display mode based on the stop type set by the stop type command.

On the other hand, in the process of S1612, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S1612: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1616), the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is stored in the display control device 114. Set the command to send to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the variation display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1512). This variation display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1801). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1801: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1806 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1802), and then the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is set. The variation pattern selection process for selection is executed (S1803).

Here, the details of the variation pattern selection process (S1803) will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1803). In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern type according to the effect mode is selected based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 and the effect counter 223j counted by the voice lamp control device 113. is there.

In the variation pattern selection process, first, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S1901). Next, it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (normal game period) (S1902). The effect mode is determined by referring to the value of the effect mode storage area 223h. As described above, the value of the effect mode storage area 223h indicates that the effect mode is A if it is "00H", indicates that it is the effect mode B if it is "01H", and if it is "02H". It indicates that it is the production mode C.

If the value of the effect mode storage area 223h is determined to be the effect mode A (normal game period) in the process of S1902 (S1902: Yes), it is extracted in the process of S1702 of the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108). Based on the variation pattern type and the effect counter 223j acquired in the process of S1901, the variation pattern of the corresponding normal game period (effect mode A) is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S1903), and this process is performed. finish. Based on the variation pattern selected here, it is set as a display variation pattern command in the variation display setting process described later (see S1804 in FIG. 109).

On the other hand, in the process of S1902, if it is determined that the current effect mode is not the effect mode A (normal game period) (S1902: No), then the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period). Whether or not it is determined (S1904).

If the value of the effect mode storage area 223h is determined to be the effect mode B (time effect period) in the process of S1904 (S1904: Yes), it is extracted in the process of S1702 of the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108). The variation pattern of the corresponding time effect period (effect mode B) is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S1905) based on the variation pattern type and the effect counter 223j acquired in the process of S1901, and this process is performed. finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1904, when it is determined that the current effect mode is not the effect mode B (time effect period) (S1904: No), the current effect mode is the effect mode C (time effect extension period). is there. In this case, the corresponding time effect extension period (effect mode C) is based on the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S1702 of the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108) and the effect counter 223j acquired in the process of S1901. The variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S1906), and this process ends.

In this way, in the variation pattern selection process (S1803), since the variation pattern according to the current effect mode is selected, the variation display according to each effect period (effect mode) is executed (displayed). Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 109, the description will be continued. When the process of S1803 is completed, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S1803, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Set (S1804). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started. After finishing the process of S1804, the advance notice selection process for setting the advance notice effect (suggesting the expectation degree of a big hit) based on the hit / fail determination result is executed (S1805). It should be noted that this advance notice selection process is also configured so that the advance notice effect according to the current effect mode is selected.

Here, the details of the advance notice selection process (S1805) will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the advance notice selection process (S1805). This advance notice selection process (S1805) is executed in the above-mentioned variation display setting process (see FIG. 109), and is a process for setting a notice effect based on the hit / fail determination result according to the current effect mode.

In the advance notice selection process (S1805), first, the effect counter 223j is acquired (S2001), and it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (normal game period) (S2002). In the process of S2002, if it is determined that the current effect mode (value of the effect mode storage area 223h) is the effect mode A (normal game period) (S2002: Yes), it is stored in the prize information storage area 223a. Based on the hit / fail determination result of each reserved ball and the value of the effect counter 223j, the normal advance notice effect, which is the advance notice effect of the normal game period, is selected (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2011.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2002, if it is determined that the current effect mode is not the effect mode A (normal game period) (S2002: No), then the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period). Whether or not it is determined (S2004).

In the processing of S2004, when it is determined that the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2004: No), the result of determining whether or not each of the reserved balls stored in the winning information storage area 223a is determined. , The time advance notice effect, which is the advance notice effect of the time effect period, is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223j (S2005), and the process proceeds to S2006.

In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the time advance notice effect selected in the process of S2005 is a advance notice effect (countdown advance notice effect) including the display mode of the countdown (S2006). In the process of S2006, if it is determined that the selected time advance notice effect is a countdown advance notice effect (S2006: Yes), the avoidance flag 223i is turned on in order not to execute the specific time effect (countdown effect). (S2007), the process proceeds to S2011. By setting the avoidance flag 223i to ON by the process of S2007, it becomes possible to determine that the countdown notice effect is executed. When the avoidance flag 223i is on, it is controlled so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not executed in the specific time effect process (see FIG. 114) described later (S2305: Yes in FIG. 114). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the effects (countdown notice effect, specific time effect (countdown effect)) including the same type of display mode (countdown) from being performed in duplicate, which is a problem that the player is confused. Can be prevented (suppressed).

In the present embodiment, when the countdown notice effect is executed based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the avoidance flag 223i is set to be turned on so that the specific time effect is not executed. It is not limited to. For example, the timing at which the countdown notice effect is executed based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640 is pre-read (estimated) based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. That is, the period during which the countdown notice effect is executed is pre-read (estimated). Based on the look-ahead (guess) result, it may be set so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not executed in duplicate during the period when the countdown notice effect is executed. As a result, the process for executing the specific time effect can be stopped before the timing when the specific time effect is started. As a result, preparations for executing the specific time effect (for example, image data transfer processing) can be omitted, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Further, the prevention (suppression) of duplication is not limited to the display mode, and the duplication of voice and music may be prevented (suppressed). Further, it may be possible to prevent (suppress) the sound from being different depending on the display mode. For example, it prevents (suppresses) that the voice "press the button" is output even though the message "press the button" is not displayed.

Further, the present invention is not limited to preventing (suppressing) duplication of effects including the same type of display mode, and may prevent the effects including the same type of display mode from being continuously (or frequently) executed. Specifically, the avoidance flag 223i is set on so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not executed in the vicinity of the period in which the countdown notice effect is executed (for example, 1 minute before and after). As a result, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easier to understand for the player.

On the other hand, in the process of S2006, if it is determined that the selected time advance notice effect is other than the countdown advance notice effect (S2006: No), the process of S2007 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2011.

In the processing of S2004, if it is determined that the current effect mode is not the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2004: No), then whether the current effect mode is the effect mode C (time effect extension period). Whether or not it is determined (S2008). If it is determined in the process of S2008 that the current effect mode is the effect mode C (time effect extension period) (S2008: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the result of determining whether or not the fluctuation is correct is correct. (S2009).

In the processing of S2009, when it is determined that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the fluctuation is a hit (S2009: Yes), the super fish school notice effect which is a notice effect suggesting that the change is a big hit is selected ( S2010), the process proceeds to S2011.

When the processing of S2003, S2006, S2007 or S2010 is completed, a display warning command indicating the selected notice effect is set (S2011), and this processing ends. The display notice command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display notice command, the display control device 114 displays the notice effect corresponding to the command on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2008 that the current effect mode is not the effect mode C (time effect extension period) (S2008: No), or in the process of S2009, the result of determining whether or not the fluctuation is appropriate is incorrect. If it is determined (S2009: No), since there is no advance notice effect to be executed, this process is terminated as it is. In the processing of S2003 and S2005, the advance notice effect may not be selected depending on the value of the effect counter 223j. In that case as well, the present process is terminated without setting the display advance notice command.

In this control example, in the time effect extension period (effect mode C), the specific time effect (countdown effect) that is periodically (every minute) executed in the time effect period (effect mode B) is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific time effect (countdown effect) may be executed in the same manner as the time effect period (effect mode B). In this case, the avoidance flag 223i described above may be used to control so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not performed at a timing overlapping with the countdown advance notice effect as in the time effect period (effect mode B). As a result, even in the time effect extension period (effect mode C), it is possible to prevent the countdown advance notice effect and the like from being executed in duplicate, and it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand. Further, the display mode of the specific time effect that is periodically executed in the time effect extension period (effect mode C) may not include the display mode of the countdown. As a result, even if the specific time effect is periodically executed in the time effect extension period (effect mode C), the effect including the same kind of display mode (countdown) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game machine to the player.

Returning to FIG. 109, the description will be continued. After the processing of S1805 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1806). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1806: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1806: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1807), and then in the process of S1605 of the command determination process (see FIG. 107), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1808). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1809), and the process proceeds to S1810. In the process of S1810, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1810). .. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, a synchronous effect management process (S1513), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1513). In this synchronous effect management process (S1513), time information is acquired from RTC292, and based on the time information, it is determined whether it is a normal game period, a time effect period, or a time effect extension period, and an effect indicating that is indicated. Execute the process to set the mode.

In the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 112, S1513), first, the time information of "hours and minutes" is acquired from RTC292 (S2101). Then, it is determined whether or not a value (“00H”) indicating the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223h (S2102). When it is determined that the value (“00H”) indicating the effect mode A is set (S2102: Yes), the time data acquired in the process of S2101 is the transition timing to the effect mode B (time effect period) ( Whether it is the period of the time production period) is determined (S2103). In the processing of S2103, when it is determined that it is the transition timing to the effect mode B (time effect period), that is, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the time effect (S2103: Yes), the effect mode storage area 223h Set a value (“01H”) indicating the effect mode B (time effect period) in (S2104), set a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2105), and perform this process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2103 that it is not the time effect period, the processes of S2104 and S2105 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2102 that the value (“00H”) indicating the effect mode A (normal game period) is not set (S2102: No), the effect mode B (the effect mode B (normal game period)) is set to the effect mode storage area 223h. It is determined whether or not a value (“01H”) indicating the time effect period) is set (S2106). When it is determined that the value (“01H”) indicating the effect mode B (time effect period) is set in the process of S2106 (S2106: Yes), the time data acquired in the process of S2101 ends the time effect. It is determined whether it is within 3 seconds from the above, that is, within 3 seconds until the end timing of the time production period (the start timing of the normal game period) (S2107).

In the process of S2107, if it is determined that the end timing of the time effect period (the start timing of the normal game period) is within 3 seconds (S2107: Yes), the extension effect for executing (displaying) the extension effect is performed. The setting process is executed (S2108). After that, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 106). The extension effect setting process (S2108) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 113.

On the other hand, in the process of S2107, if it is determined that the acquired time data is not within 3 seconds from the end of the time effect, it means that the end timing of the time effect period (start timing of the normal game period) is longer than 3 seconds. , The process of S2108 is skipped, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S2106, the value (“00H”) indicating the effect mode B (time effect period) is not set in the effect mode storage area 223h, that is, the current effect mode is the effect mode C (time effect extension period). If it is determined to be present (S2106: No), it is determined whether or not it is outside the time effect extension period, that is, whether or not it is the end timing of the time effect extension period (effect mode C) (S2109). In the process of S2109, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect extension period (S2109: Yes), a value (“00H”) indicating the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223h. (S2110), a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode A (normal game period) is set (S2111), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2109, if it is determined that the acquired time data is not the end timing of the time effect extension period (S2109: No), the processes of S2110 and S2111 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, an extension effect setting process (S2108), which is one process in the synchronous effect management process (see FIG. 112) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the contents of this extension effect setting process (S2108).

In the extension effect setting process (FIG. 113, S2108), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S2201). When it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S2201: Yes), a value (“00H”) indicating the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223h (S2202). Then, a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode A (normal game period) is set (S2203), and this process ends.

In this control example, as described above, if the jackpot game is being executed 3 seconds before the end of the time effect period (effect mode B) (S2201: Yes), it is normal after the end of the jackpot game. It is controlled so as to shift to the game period (effect mode A) (S2202 and S2203), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the jackpot game is executed 3 seconds before the end of the time production period (effect mode B), if the jackpot game ends before the end of the time production period (effect mode B). , The time effect period (effect mode B) may be set. In addition, even if the jackpot game is executed 3 seconds before the end of the time production period (effect mode B), if it is determined that the jackpot will be a jackpot after that (when the pending winning information is a jackpot). The game may be shifted to the time production extension period (effect mode C) after the jackpot game is completed. As a result, even if the jackpot game is being executed, the extended effect can be executed (displayed) 3 seconds before the end of the time effect period (effect mode B), so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S2201: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the time effect period (effect mode B) (S2204). In the process of S2204, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect period (effect mode B) (S2204: Yes), whether or not the revariation effect is set, that is, the extension effect is executed ( It is determined whether or not it is decided (shift to the effect mode C) (S2205). When the revariating effect is set, that is, when it is determined that the extended effect is executed (shift to the effect mode C) (S2205: Yes), the effect mode is set in the effect mode storage area 223h. A value indicating C (“02H”) is set (S2206), a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode C is set (S2207), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2205 that the re-variation effect is not set (S2205: No), then the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is not shifted and the normal game period (effect mode A) is not set. ), So the process shifts to S2202. As a result, at the end of the time production period (effect mode B) (S2204: Yes), if the time production extension period (effect mode C) is not shifted (S2205: No), the stage shifts to the production mode A (normal game period). (S2202 and S2203).

Further, in the processing of S2204, when it is determined that the end timing of the time effect period (effect mode B) is not reached (that is, the time effect is continuously executed) (S2204: No), it corresponds to the winning information storage area 223a. It is determined whether or not the winning information is stored, or whether or not the winning / failing determination result during the fluctuation is a hit (S2208). In the process of S2208, when the winning information that hits the winning information storage area 223a is stored, or if it is determined that the winning / failing judgment during the fluctuation is winning (S2208: Yes), the winning fluctuation ends. The time until the time is calculated is set as the production time (extended production time) of the time production extension period (S2209). Then, the revariation effect is set (S2210), and this process is terminated.

Here, the re-variation effect is an effect that suggests a transition from the time effect period to the time effect extension period and notifies (displays) the player as if a new special symbol change has started. .. Specifically, the display mode in which the display mode of the school of fish appears from the right is displayed, and the variable display of the third symbol, which is changed (reduced) to the display mode that is difficult for the player to see, is visually recognized again. Variable (enlarged) to possible (easy) aspects. As described above, in this control example, when the remaining time of the time effect period (effect mode B) is 3 seconds or less, the display mode is switched to the precursor display mode, which has been executed (displayed) until then. The variable display of the three symbols is changed to a display mode (reduced display) that makes it difficult for the player to see. In the re-variation effect, when the variation display of the third symbol, which has been changed (reduced) to a display mode that is difficult for the player to see, is changed (enlarged) to a viewable (easy) mode again. The display mode in which the display mode of the school of fish appears from the right is displayed. As a result, the player pays attention to the display mode of the school of fish, so that the variable display of the third symbol can be changed (enlarged) without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2208, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the winning information storage area 223a is not stored and the winning / failing determination result during the fluctuation is incorrect (S2208: No), S2209 and S2210. This process is skipped and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 114, a specific time effect process (S1514), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific time effect processing (S1514). This specific time effect process (S1514) is a process for executing (displaying) the specific time effect in the time effect period (effect mode B).

In the specific time production process, first, time information is acquired from RTC292 (S2301). Next, with reference to the effect mode storage area 233h, it is determined whether the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2302). In the process of S2302, if it is determined that the current effect mode is not the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2302: No), it is not determined as the timing to execute the specific time effect in the subsequent processes. , Ends this process as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2302, when it is determined that the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2302: Yes), then the time information (current time) acquired in the process of S2301 is displayed. Based on the information indicating the start time of the specific time effect stored in the effect time storage area 223 g, it is determined whether or not the specific time effect timing is reached (S2303). If it is determined in the process of S2303 that it is not the specific time effect timing (S2303: No), it is not the timing to execute the specific time effect, so this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S2303, if it is determined that the effect is a specific time effect (S2303: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the demo effect is being executed (S2304). If it is determined in the process of S2304 that the demo effect is being executed (S2304: Yes), this process ends as it is. This is an effect that suggests whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a probabilistic gaming state (latent probabilistic state) during the execution of the demo effect, that is, when the player is not playing a game. It is possible to hide the effect for a specific time, and prevent (suppress) the player who is not playing the game from suggesting the game state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2304 that the demo effect is not being executed (S2304: No), then it is determined whether or not the avoidance flag 223i is on (S2305). In the process of S2305, when it is determined that the avoidance flag 223i is on (S2305: Yes), it is the case where the countdown notice effect is executed among the advance notice effects based on the entry into the second winning opening 640. Therefore, in order not to display the specific time effect (countdown effect), which is an effect including the same type of display mode (countdown), this process is terminated as it is (that is, the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not set. ).

If it is determined in the process of S2305 that the avoidance flag 223i is off (S2305: No), a specific time effect command for display is set in order to execute the specific time effect (countdown effect), and this process is performed. To finish.

If the countdown notice effect based on the winning of the second winning opening 640 is executed (when the avoidance flag 223i is on) during the execution of the specific time effect by the process of S2305, the countdown related to the specific time effect is executed. It is controlled so that the effect is not executed (S2305: Yes). As a result, the countdown notice effect and the specific time effect (countdown effect), which are effects including the same type of display mode (countdown), are not executed in duplicate, so that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115, a ball entry effect setting process (S1515), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ball entry effect setting process (S1515). This ball entry effect setting process (S1515) is a process for displaying the ball entry effect based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 640 during the time saving game. The type of this ball entry effect is changed according to the number of remaining fluctuations until a big hit. Further, the area where the ball entry effect is displayed is set in order from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81.

In the ball entry effect setting process (S1515), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is during the time-saving game (S2401). If it is determined in the process of S2401 that the time-saving game is not in progress, the ball entry effect based on the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 is not executed (displayed), so that the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, when it is determined that the time-saving game is in progress (S2401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second winning opening 640 (S2402). In this control example, a ball entry command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (not shown) based on the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 in the main control device 110 (not shown). In the voice lamp control device 113, by receiving the ball entry command, it is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 that the ball has entered the second winning opening 640, and in the processing of S2402, the second winning opening It is determined whether or not the ball has entered the 640.

Not limited to this, the voice lamp control device indicates that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 640 by providing a ball entry detection switch that detects that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 640. It may be possible to detect with 113. Further, the ball entry detection switch may also be used as a switch for detecting entry into the second winning opening 640 used in the main control device 110. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced.

In the process of S2402, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second winning opening 640 (S2402: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, when the above-mentioned entry command is received from the main control device 110 and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 640 (S2402: Yes), the winning information is stored. The ball entry effect is selected based on the winning information stored in the area 223a and the ball entry effect selection table 222b (S2403). Then, the display ball entry effect command is set based on the ball entry effect selected in the process of S2403 and the display area counter 223f (S2404). The display incoming ball effect command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. , Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ball entry effect command, the display control device 114 displays the ball entry effect in the display area (first area 81a to fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81) corresponding to the command.

When the processing of S2404 is completed, the value of the display area counter 223f is added by 1 (S2405), and it is determined whether or not the added value of the display area counter 223f is 5 (S2406). If the value of the display area counter 223f is determined to be 5 in the process of S2406 (S2406: Yes), the ball entry effect is entered in the fourth area 81d (see FIG. 89 or FIG. 90) in the ball entry effect setting process. Is set to be displayed, and the value of the display area counter 223f is initialized to 1 (S2407) in order to set the area for displaying the ball entry effect to the first area 81a (see FIG. 89 or FIG. 90). This process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2406, if it is determined that the display area counter 223f is not 5 (that is, any of 2 to 4) (S2406: No), it is necessary to initialize the value of the display area counter 223f. Therefore, the process of S2407 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Here, by the processing of S2404, the ball entry effect can be displayed in the area of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the display area counter 223f. Specifically, when the value of the display area counter 223f is 1, it is in the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81, and when it is 2, it is in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81. If it is, the ball entry effect is displayed in the first area 81c of the third symbol display device 81, and if it is 4, the ball entry effect is displayed in the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the winning effect setting process (S1515) is executed by the processing of S2405 to S2407, and the value of the display area counter 223 can be updated every time the display ball entry effect command is set, so that the third symbol The ball entry effect can be displayed in order from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the display device 81, and after the ball entry effect is displayed in the fourth area 81d, the ball entry effect is displayed again from the first area 81a. It can be displayed in order. As a result, the ball entry effect based on one ball entry will be continuously displayed until four game balls are newly entered in the second winning opening 640, and the game ball will be displayed in the second winning opening 640. Even when the ball entry interval is very short, it is possible to secure the time for the ball entry effect to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player cannot visually recognize (recognize) the ball entry effect (or is difficult).

In this control example, the ball entry effect is configured to be displayed in order (clockwise) in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be displayed in the reverse order (counterclockwise), or may be displayed randomly. Further, the display order may be changed when a specific effect or variation is executed or when there is a big hit winning information. As a result, it is possible to change the order of the displayed ball entry effects, prevent the game from becoming monotonous, and prevent the player from getting bored early.

Further, the display order of the ball entry effect displayed in each area (first area 81a to fourth area) of the third symbol display device 81 may be changed according to the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, when the expectation of a big hit is low, the ball entry effect is displayed in order (clockwise) in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d, while when the expectation of a big hit is high. Is displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise). As a result, the player can recognize the degree of expectation in the display order of the ball entry effect displayed in each area (first area 81a to fourth area), and each area (first area 81a to fourth area). Since it is not necessary to look closely at the content of the ball entry effect displayed on the player, the burden on the player can be reduced.

Further, in this control example, the ball entry effect is displayed in order from the first region 81a of the third symbol display device 81 to the four regions of the fourth region 81d, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display area of the third symbol display device may be further subdivided (for example, divided into six areas from the first area to the sixth area) and displayed in order, or the display of the third symbol display device may be displayed. The number of divisions of the region may be reduced (for example, the region may be divided into two regions from the first region to the second region) for display.

Further, in this control example, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to select which of the display areas (first area 81a to fourth area 81d) of the third symbol display device 81 is to be displayed. However, the present invention may be configured to be selected by the display control device 114, for example. As a result, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 134. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 116, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2501), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2501) will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2501) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND type flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads out and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2601). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2602). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2601.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2602, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2602, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2603). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2604), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2501 in FIG. 116) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2502 in FIG. 116) (S2605), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2501) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 117, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2601 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, it is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2601 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2602. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2603 to S2605 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2601 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2601. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S2602 and S2602, the processes of S2603 to S2605 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes S2603 to S2605 may be executed without performing the processes S2601 and S2602. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 116. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2502). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2503). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2503, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2504). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2504, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2505). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 132 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S4702 in FIG. 132 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118 (b)), the main image at power-on and the variation image at power-on (see FIG. 82), which are images at power-on, are simply drawn. The command determination process (see S2809 in FIG. 118 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2810 in FIG. 118 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64, and the main control device 110 issued a voice lamp control device to instruct the start of the variation effect. When the display variation pattern command is received via 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on (see FIG. 82) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. Can be done. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2505, interrupt permission is set (S2506), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2506, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (a). FIG. 118 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing or the simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (b). FIG. 118 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 87) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2801), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2801: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not the image at power-on (see FIG. 82 (a)). In order to display the normal effect image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2802) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2803) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2802), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the image. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 119 to 127.

In the display setting process (S2803), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2802) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2804). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S2803) or the simple display setting process (S2809). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

When the task process is completed, the effect information correction process is executed (S2805). In this effect information correction process (S2805), among the images for one frame determined in the above-mentioned task process, various power-on images (main image at power-on, fluctuation at power-on) used for display at power-on are used. For sprites (images, title images when the power is turned on), the presence or absence of display, display coordinate position, and enlargement ratio are corrected. The effect information correction process (S2805) may be configured to be executed within the task process (S2804).

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2806). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2807). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer setting process (S2806) determined by the task process (S2804) and the effect information correction process (S2805). The drawing list shown in FIG. 87 is generated from the transfer instruction set by the above, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 134.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2808). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2808, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear out reach, front / rear out reach, complete The stop type table corresponding to the missed, chance eye) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2801 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2801: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (see FIG. 82) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2809) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2810) is executed to display S2804. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 to 127, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2802), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 119, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2901), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2901: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2901: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2803) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2902), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2903).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2904), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2904: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2905), the process returns to the process of S2901.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2905) will be described with reference to FIG. 120A. FIG. 120A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S3001).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3001, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3001 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S3001 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3003). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S3003, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3001, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S3004), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S3005). Then, when both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3006) and the effect of moving the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is executed. A special effect correction process for correcting the effect screen is executed (S3007). When the processing of S3007 is completed, the variation pattern command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3005, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3001. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S3002. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2504, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the details of the special effect correction process (S3007) will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing a special effect correction process (S3007). In this special effect correction process (S3007), when an effect in which the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is movable is executed, the display device (third symbol display device 81 or This is a process for correcting the display mode (position, size) of various power-on images displayed on the sub-display device 690).

In the special effect correction process (S3007), first, it is determined whether or not the effect based on the received fluctuation pattern command is an effect that moves the telescopic effect device (expandable accessory) 540 (whether or not there is an elastic accessory scenario). (S3201). If it is determined in the process of S3201 that there is a telescopic accessory scenario (S3201: Yes), the front member 546 of the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) moves to the lower position in the fluctuation, and the third symbol This is a case where an effect that makes the display device 81 difficult to see (or cannot be seen) is executed. In this case, the correction information for moving the telescopic accessory is set in the correction information storage area 233m from the correction information table 234a3 (S3202), and the process proceeds to S3205. By the process of S3202, the power-on fluctuation image (see FIG. 83A) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is corrected and displayed on the sub display device 690. Therefore, even when the front member 546 of the telescopic device 540 moves to the front side of the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily visually recognize the variation image when the power is turned on by looking at the sub display device 690. it can. Here, the fluctuating image when the power is turned on is a “◯” symbol displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 83 (a). In addition to the "○" symbol, the "x" symbol is also displayed as a variable image. By alternately displaying the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol, the variable image notifies that the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is being displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed, the hit of the special symbol is notified, and when the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed, the miss of the special symbol is notified.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that there is no telescopic accessory scenario (S3201: No), then the effect based on the received fluctuation pattern command is the effect of moving the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9). Whether or not (whether or not there is a tilted character scenario) is determined (S3203). In the process of S3203, when it is determined that there is a tilting accessory scenario (S3203: Yes), the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) provided with the sub display device 690 is movable in the fluctuation, and the sub This is a case where an effect that makes the display device 690 difficult to see is executed. In this case, the correction information for tilting accessory movement is set in the correction information storage area 233m from the correction information table 234a3 (S3204), and the process proceeds to S3205. Even when the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) provided with the sub-display device 690 is moved by the process of S3204 and the sub-display device 690 is difficult to see, the player can perform the third operation. The variable image when the power is turned on displayed on the symbol display device 81 can be easily visually recognized.

Further, in the processing of S3202 and S3204 described above, the display that is easy for the player to see is displayed by setting the information for correcting the display mode (position, size) of the variation image when the power is turned on according to the effect to be executed. It is controlled so as to be an aspect. As a result, it is not necessary to hold an image in a display mode that is easy for the player to see for each effect to be executed, so that the area of ROM 234 can be saved.

When the processing of S3202 or S3204 is completed, the special effect correction flag 233n is set to ON (S3205), and this processing is completed. The special effect correction flag 233n, which is turned on in the process of S3205, is displayed in various power-on image display modes (position, size) when the telescopic accessory scenario or the tilting accessory scenario is executed in the special effect correction process (S3007). This is a flag indicating that the information for correcting the above) has been set. By setting this special effect correction flag 233n to ON, the correction information for the normal effect is executed even though the variation based on the telescopic accessory scenario and the tilting accessory scenario is executed in the effect information correction process described later. Can be prevented (suppressed) from being stored in the correction information storage area 233 m. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3203 that there is no tilting accessory scenario (S3203: No), this process is terminated as it is.

As described above, the tilting operation unit (tilting accessory) 600 has a first curtain member 624 and a second curtain member 625 (see FIG. 50), and these curtain members are tilting operation units. The sub-display device 690 provided in the above can be switched between an open state in which the player can see it and a closed state in which the sub-display device 690 is difficult for the player to see. Therefore, when the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are in the closed state, the image to be displayed on the sub display device 690 may be corrected to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. Further, whether or not the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are closed depends on the accessory scenario in the production, as in the case of determining the operation of the telescopic accessory or the tilting accessory described above. It may be determined based on the origin sensor, or the origin sensor detecting the origin positions of the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625, and it is determined that these curtain members are in the origin position (closed state). When this is done, the display of the sub display device 690 may be switched to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, even when the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are closed, that is, the sub display device 690 becomes difficult to see due to a defect or the like, the display image of the sub display device 690 is corrected. Then, it can be displayed on the third symbol display device.

Further, in the tilting operation unit (tilting accessory) 600 and the expansion / contraction effect device (expansion accessory) 540 described above, the correction information is similarly changed based on the determination result of the origin sensor that detects the origin position. May be good. As a result, even if the operation is different from the character scenario due to a failure of the character, the state is accurately detected and various effects are displayed in the game of the third symbol display device 81 or the sub display device 690. It can be displayed in a position that can be seen by a person.

In the present embodiment, the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves up and down and the case where the tilting operation unit 600 tilts are described, but the tilting operation unit 600 slides on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. When an operating scenario is set, the same processing as that executed in this special effect correction processing (S3007) may be executed. Even when the tilting operation unit 600 slides, a series of operation scenarios for the sliding operation are set by the voice lamp control device 113. In that case, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies by the display variation pattern command that the variation pattern executes the slide operation. In that case, the slide operation correction information is set in the correction information storage area 233 m. Here, the slide motion correction information is corrected and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the slide motion, and the power-on variation image (“◯” symbol (or “x”) shown in FIG. 83 (a). The display coordinates are set so that the (variable display))) moves to a position not on the back side of the tilting operation unit 600 that slides. In the present embodiment, the variable image (see FIG. 83 (a)) is displayed on the upper left of the third symbol display device 81, but when it is configured to be displayed on the lower right, the tilting operation unit 600 is displayed from the right side. When the sliding operation is performed to the left, the display is set by gradually sliding (moving) to the left in accordance with the operation of the tilting operation unit 600. Such coordinate information is set in the slide motion correction information. Further, when the tilting operation unit 600 is slid to the left in accordance with the operation of the tilting operation unit 600 and is moved to the area where the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, the tilting operation unit 600 is displayed. The coordinates may be set so as to move to and display the sub-display device 690 built in the device. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily display a variable image (see FIG. 83A) indicating that the special symbol is being changed by the player. In the present embodiment, the object to be moved and displayed is a variable image (see FIG. 83 (a)), but it may be a third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or it may be a reserved symbol. It may be a design such as a character. The above-mentioned slide operation correction information is set in the display control device 114 in advance corresponding to the operation scenario of the slide operation set in the voice lamp control device 113, and the coordinate information is set according to the slide operation timing. Is set to be variable.

Further, in this control example, the display position of the image when various powers are turned on is corrected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image (character image) displayed by the third symbol display device 81 or the sub display device 690 during normal production is performed. Or, the display position of the variable symbol) may be corrected.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2904, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2904: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2906). If there is a display variable type command (S2906: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2907), and the process returns to the process of S2901.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2907) will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (b). FIG. 120B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete out of order, or chance eye) is supported. The stop type table is determined (S3101), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S3102).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S3102 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S3103), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3102 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2804), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S3102 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S3103, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, but before drawing is performed by the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is transmitted from the character ROM 234. The image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness of the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3101, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S3102.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the processing of S2906 (S2906: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot related command among the unprocessed commands (S2908). If it is determined that there is a jackpot-related command in the processing of S2908 (S2908: Yes), the jackpot-related command processing is executed (S2909), and the process returns to the processing of S2901.

Here, the details of the jackpot-related command processing (S2909) will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related command processing (S2909). This jackpot-related command process (S2909) is a process corresponding to various commands (display opening command, display round number command, display ending command) for executing the jackpot effect received from the voice lamp control device 113. It is a process to be executed.

In the jackpot-related command processing (S2909), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S3301). If it is determined in the process of S3301 that there is a display opening command (S3301: Yes), the opening command process (S3302) is executed to shift to the process of S3303.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S3302) will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (a). FIG. 123 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In this opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3401). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3401 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S. S3404). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3405), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3404, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401 The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S3402. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, when this opening command processing is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, the image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced due to the slow read speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data used for the above to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect of the third symbol display device 81 is completed, and thus indicates the first round. If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There was a risk that time would be generated and the player would be anxious about whether or not the operation had stopped, or had a sense of discomfort.

Further, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects (for 16 rounds) in the third symbol display device 81 are completed. If the image data required for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, there is a lot of waiting time from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. There is a risk that the player may feel uneasy or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped.

Therefore, in this control example, when the display opening command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and by the time the jackpot variation display is completed on the third symbol display device 81. , Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects are performed in the third symbol display device 81 (for 5 rounds). ) When the process is completed, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not feel anxious or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is started from there. The third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is completed by the end of the variable effect that is a big hit. As a result, when the fluctuation effect that becomes a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the opening effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is worried that the operation is not stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Returning to FIG. 122, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3301, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S3303), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S3303: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3305.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S3304) will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). FIG. 123B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S3304). This round number command process (S3304) executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S3501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3502).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3501, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3505), the round number command processing is ended, and the process returns to the jackpot-related command processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 122. In the processing of S3303, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S3303: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3305), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S3305: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3306), and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, in the process of S3305, if there is no display ending command (S3305: No), the process of S3306 is skipped and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S3306) will be described with reference to FIG. 124 (a). FIG. 124 (a) is a flowchart showing the ending command process (S3306). This ending command process (S3306) executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer 233d Is set to (S3601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3602).

Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3603). S3604). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3605), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2908, if it is determined that there is no jackpot related command (S2908: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notice command among the unprocessed commands (S2910), and the display notice is given. If there is a command (S2910: Yes), the advance notice command processing is executed (S2911), and the process returns to the processing of S2901.

Here, the details of the advance notice command processing (S2911) will be described with reference to FIG. 124 (b). FIG. 124 (b) is a flowchart showing the advance notice command processing. This notice command process executes the process corresponding to the display notice command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the advance notice command processing, first, the advance notice effect display data table indicated by the display advance notice command is determined, and the determined advance notice effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S3701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3702).

Then, based on the advance notice effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3705), the notice command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By this advance notice command processing (S2911), the display data table buffer 233d is set based on the advance notice effect display data table, so that the advance notice effect set in the voice lamp control device 113 corresponding to the effect mode is the third symbol. It will be displayed on the display device 81.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 119. In the process of S2910, if it is determined that there is no display notice command (S2910: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display entry effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2912). If there is a ball entry effect command for display (S2912: Yes), the ball entry effect command process is executed (S2913), and the process returns to the process of S2901.

Here, the details of the ball entry effect command processing (S2913) will be described with reference to FIG. 125 (a). FIG. 125A is a flowchart showing the ball entry effect command processing (S2913). This ball entry effect command process (S2913) executes a process corresponding to the display ball entry effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ball entry effect command processing, first, the ball entry effect display data table indicated by the display ball entry effect command is determined. Then, the determined ball entry effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed so as to be displayed in the display area (any of the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d) indicated by the command. Set to buffer 233d (S3801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3802).

Then, based on the ball entry effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3805), the ball entry effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By this ball entry effect command processing (S2913), the display data table buffer 233d is set based on the ball entry effect display data table and the display area indicated by the command, and is selected by the voice lamp control device 113. The ball entry effect is sequentially displayed in each display area (first area 81a to fourth area 81d) of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the ball entry effects are displayed in order in the four display areas (first area 81a to fourth area 81d) provided on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a maximum of four types of ball entry effects are displayed. Can be displayed simultaneously on the third symbol display device 81.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 119. In the process of S2912, if it is determined that there is no display entry ball effect command (S2912: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display specific time effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2914). ), If there is a specific time effect command for display (S2914: Yes), the specific time effect command process is executed (S2915), and the process returns to the process of S2901.

Here, the details of the specific time effect command processing (S2915) will be described with reference to FIG. 125 (b). FIG. 125 (b) is a flowchart showing the specific time effect command processing (S2915). This specific time effect command process (S2915) executes a process corresponding to the display specific time effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the specific time effect command processing, first, the specific time effect display data table indicated by the specific time effect command for display is determined, and the determined specific time effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S3901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3902).

Then, based on the specific time effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3905), the ball entry effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By this specific time effect command processing (S2915), the display data table buffer 233d is set based on the specific time effect display data table, so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) selected by the voice lamp control device 113 is the first. 3 It will be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2914, if it is determined that there is no display specific time effect command (S2914: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display effect mode change command among the unprocessed commands (S2916). ), If there is a display effect mode change command (S2916: Yes), the effect mode change command process is executed (S2917), and the process returns to the process of S2901.

Here, the details of the effect mode change command process (S2917) will be described with reference to FIG. 126 (a). FIG. 126 (a) is a flowchart showing the effect mode change command process (S2917). This effect mode change command process (S2917) executes a process corresponding to the display specific time effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the effect mode change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233p is set to on (S4001), the effect mode flag 233r corresponding to the effect mode type based on the received command is set to on (S4002), and this process is performed. To finish.

The back image change flag 233p set to be turned on in the process of S4001 causes the process (S491 to S4915) for changing the back image to be executed in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) described later. Further, the effect mode flag 233r set to be turned on in S4002 is referred to in the process for changing the rear image in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) (see S4911 in FIG. 133), and is set to the effect mode flag 233r. The back image is changed based on the set effect mode type. As a result, the rear image can be changed in response to the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the rear image can be changed based on the change of the effect mode, and the player can easily recognize that the effect mode has been changed.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2916, if it is determined that there is no display effect mode command (S2916: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop command among the unprocessed commands (S2918), and the display is performed. If there is a stop command (S2918: Yes), the stop command process is executed (S2919), and the process returns to the process of S2901.

Here, the details of the stop command processing (S2919) will be described with reference to FIG. 126 (b). FIG. 126 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop command process (S2919). This stop command process (S2919) executes a process corresponding to the display stop command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop command process, the special effect correction flag 233n is set to off (S4101), and this process ends. As described above, the special effect correction flag 233n set to off in the process of S4101 is the expansion / contraction effect device in the special effect correction process (S3007) executed when the variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. Correction information corresponding to the correction information storage area 233 m when there is a telescopic accessory scenario in which 540 (see FIG. 9) is movable, or when there is a tilting accessory scenario in which the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is movable. The correction information of the table 234a3 is stored and turned on.

This stop command process is a process executed based on the stop command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 when each variation effect is stopped. Therefore, when the variation effect based on the telescopic accessory scenario or the tilting accessory scenario is stopped, the special effect correction flag 233n is turned off. As a result, in the effect information correction process (see S2804) executed in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118 (b)), the correction information for the normal effect or the correction information for the demo effect is set in the correction information storage area 233 m. By doing so, the image in which the coordinates and the like displayed based on the variation effect of the telescopic accessory scenario or the tilting accessory scenario have been corrected will be corrected to the original coordinates and displayed.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 119. In the processing of S2918, if it is determined that there is no display stop command (S2918: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2920), and there is an error command. If (S2920: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2921), and the process returns to S2901 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2921) will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S4202). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4201, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S4202 is determined, and the error type is supported. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S4202 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 119. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2920 (S2920: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2922), and the process returns to the process of S2901.

Other unprocessed commands include, for example, a rear image change command. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the rear image change command is received, the rear image change command process is executed (S2922). In this back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 223p for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S4703) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command is set to ON. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are turned on. Set the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type to off, end this back image change command processing, and return to the command judgment processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 223p set by the rear image change command process is turned on, the changed rear image type is specified from the set rear image discrimination flag. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the set back image discrimination flag at that time The type of back image to be displayed is specified in, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. The video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the back image change command processing, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

In the processing of S2901 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2901: Yes). ), The processing of S2902 to S2922 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2901 to S2922 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2901 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2809) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, the commands required to display the power-on image (see FIG. 82) from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 120 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 120 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and others. For the command of, the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Further, when the power is cut off during the fluctuation of the special symbol and then restored, the special transmission is performed in S1010 of the start-up process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 described above when the power is turned on. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives an effect permission command including the fact that the symbol is changing, the display control device in the process of S1504 of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. A simple command determination process (S2809) when the display control device 114 receives a variation start command (received process in S1616 of the command determination process (FIG. 107, S1511)) of the variation image when the power is turned on, which is output to 114. In the simple display setting process (S2810) executed after the reception process, the start of the variation display (the display data table of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d) is set. At the timing when the main control device 110 outputs the instruction to start the fluctuation of the variable image at power-on corresponding to the special symbol that was fluctuating when the power is turned off, the variable image at power-on is the power supply of the resident video RAM 235. Since the image has already been transferred to the variable image area 235b at the time of input, the start of the variable display is immediately executed (display start) in the third symbol display device 81. In this case, the fluctuation images when the power is turned on shown in FIGS. 82 (b) to 82 (c) are displayed alternately.

It should be noted that the effect permission command based on the game that was executed when the power was turned off is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 101), and then executed based on the effect permission command. A stop command for stopping the variable display is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display stop command to the display control device 114 based on the reception of this stop command. The display control device 114 determines that a display stop command has been received by a simple command determination process (see 118 (b)), and uses a display mode based on the received command to change the power-on variation image (FIG. 82 (b) or FIG. (See (c)) is stopped.

If the display control device 114 completes the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 before receiving the display stop command for stopping the power-on fluctuation image, only the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. Is displayed at the coordinate position (see FIG. 83 (a)) for the normal effect of the third symbol display device 81. This is because the display stop command for stopping the variable image when the power is turned on defines the stop mode of the variable image when the power is turned on, so that the stop mode for normal production cannot be selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display control device 114 may determine and display the stop mode based on the stop mode (big hit or miss) of the fluctuating image when the power is turned on. As a result, even when the fluctuation of the fluctuating image when the power is turned on is executed, it is possible to switch to the normal production from the time when the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is completed, and the interest of the player can be improved. ..

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 120A) executed in this case, in the processing of S3001, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3002, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2803), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 128, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4301: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S4302 to S4304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S4302), S4303 to S4304 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S4303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S4304).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process (S4304) will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S4401).

In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and each sprite is required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle. Various parameters are determined.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4401, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 128. After the warning image setting process (S4304) or in the process of S4303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4303: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4305.

In S4305, the pointer update process is executed (S4305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Therefore, the respective values are updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S4501, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S4502). As a result, if it is End information (S4502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S4503), and if it is a demo display data table (S4503: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S4504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4505), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S4503: No). S4506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 128 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S4306 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4308). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S4308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S4309).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S4309: Yes), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S4310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Full data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4311). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S4314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2804), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S4315, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4309, if the confirmation display flag is off instead of on (S4309: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S4316). If the demo display flag is off (S4316: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect. Therefore, the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S4317) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4318). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4320), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S4321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S4316, if the demo display flag is on (S4316: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2810) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on ends, the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. A process of setting the display data table, which specifies that the display data table (see 82) is to be stopped and displayed, in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the details of the effect information correction process (S2805), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the effect information correction process (S2805). This effect information correction process (S2805) corrects the positions at which various power-on images (main image at power-on, variable image at power-on, title image at power-on) are displayed during normal effect or demo effect. It is a process for using.

In the effect information correction process (S2805), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601). If it is determined in the process of S4601 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601: No), the simple image at the time of turning on the power is displayed, so the effect information is not corrected. End the process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4601 that the simple image display flag 233c is off (S4601: Yes), the transfer of the resident image is completed in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 132 (a)) described later. Since the normal effect can be executed, it is next determined whether or not the special effect correction flag 233n is off (S4602).

When it is determined in the process of S4602 that the special effect correction flag 233n is on (S4602: No), the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is movable in the above-mentioned special effect correction process (see FIG. 121). This is a case where the correction information corresponding to the effect based on the telescopic accessory scenario or the tilting accessory scenario in which the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is movable is already stored in the correction information storage area 233m. This process ends as it is without setting the correction information.

On the other hand, in the process of S4602, when it is determined that the special effect correction flag 233n is off (S4602: Yes), the demo display flag is turned off in order to set the correction information according to the currently executed effect. It is determined whether or not it is (S4603).

If it is determined in the process of S4603 that the demo display flag is off (S4603: Yes), it means that the demo effect is not executed, that is, the normal effect is executed. Therefore, the correction information storage area Correction information for normal production is set from the correction information table 234a3 to 233m (S4604), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4603, when it is determined that the demo display flag is on (S4603: No), it means that the demo effect is being executed, so the demo is performed from the correction information table 234a3 to the correction information storage area 233m. The effect correction information is set (S4605), and this process ends.

In this way, in the effect information correction process (S2805), the correction information for correcting the display position of various power-on images according to the state of the pachinko machine 10 (power-on, normal effect, demo effect, etc.) The settings are being made. As a result, in a plurality of states of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform an effect using a common image, so that the capacity of the ROM 234 can be saved. In addition, since it is configured to correct the display mode such as the display position and the enlargement ratio, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to see according to each effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2806), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 132A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4701). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4701: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S4702), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 132 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S4701 (S4701: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4703), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 133.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4702), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2806) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 132 (b). FIG. 132 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4702).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S4801), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4801: Yes). ), Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4802). In the process of S4802, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S4802 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4802: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4802: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4803. Further, as a result of the processing of S4801, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4801: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4803.

In the process of S4803, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4803), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4803: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4804), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S4803 (S4803: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S4805), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2809 in FIG. 118 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2810 in FIG. 118 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 119 to 127) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 128 to 130) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) (see S4701: No in FIG. 132 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 becomes a resident video RAM 235 excluding the main image at power-on, the variable image at power-on, and the title image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. All resident target image data to be resident can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Further, in this control example, various power-on images (main image at power-on, variable image at power-on, title image at power-on) displayed at power-on are corrected in the display position in the normal production. Was configured to be available. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare images to be used at the time of turning on the power and at the time of normal production, so that the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved.

Further, in this control example, the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 is treated as one image data, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the sub display device according to the coordinates. Whether to display on 690 is controlled. As a result, it is not necessary to separately control (transfer, etc.) the images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, so that the control load can be reduced. Not limited to this, image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 may be provided respectively.

Further, since the sub display device 690 has a lower resolution than the third symbol display device 81, the amount of image data displayed on the sub display device 690 is the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It will be less than the amount. Therefore, in the display control device 114, the image (title image at power-on) to be displayed on the sub-display device 690, which has a small amount of image data, is first stored in the resident video RAM, so that the power is turned on. It is possible to shorten the time from when the image is displayed.

Here, the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 is composed of one image data as described above. Therefore, when the power-on title image (see FIG. 82 (a)), which is the power-on image, is displayed on the sub-display device 690 when the power is turned on, the area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 ( 0 data may be set for the data (area of 800 horizontal × 600 vertical) as shown in FIG. 81. Not limited to this, when the power is turned on, first, the image data to be displayed on the sub display device 690 is matched with the resolution of the sub display device 690 (see FIG. 81, image data of 400 horizontal × 300 vertical). May be used to display on the sub-display device 690. In this case, when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 690 (main image at power-on, variable image at power-on, etc.) is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 and Using the image data (see FIG. 81, width 1200 x height 600) for displaying on the sub display device 690, the display is switched between the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. As a result, the amount of image data to be displayed and set on the sub display device 690 when the power is turned on can be reduced. Therefore, the image when the power is turned on (title image when the power is turned on) is displayed on the sub display device 690 after the power is turned on. It is possible to shorten the time until.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, a normal image transfer setting process (S4703), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2806) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4703).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4305) of the display setting process (S2803) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S4901). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4902), and if it is transfer data information (S4902: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4903) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4904), and the process proceeds to S4905.

Further, in the process of S4902, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S4902: No), the processes of S4903 and S4904 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4905. In the process of S4905, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4905), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4905: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4906).

In the process of S4906, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S4906 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4906: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4906: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4907. Further, as a result of the processing of S4905, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S4905: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4907.

In the process of S4907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4907), and if the transfer start flag is on (S4907: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S4908), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4903 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S4913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4907: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 223p is on (S4909). If the rear image change flag 223p is not on but off (S4909: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change 223r flag is on (S4909: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 223p is set to off (S4910), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the back image discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4911). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4912), and the process proceeds to S4913.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S4909, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S4913, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4913). The discrimination in the processing of S4913 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S4913, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4913: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4913 (S4913: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4914). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S4914, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4915), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. The update of the stored image data discrimination flag 233j sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data to "on" as described above, and also sets the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing this normal image transfer process, the back image is changed. Of the image data used in the above, the image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2807), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2804) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2806), the drawing list shown in FIG. 87 is generated (S5001). That is, in the processing of S5001, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2804). , Corresponds the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing to the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. As various drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2806), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S5002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the processing of S5002 (S5003). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 118 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the first control example, the display image used when the power is turned on is controlled so as to be corrected and used at the time of normal production or the like. As a result, a common display image can be used both when the power is turned on and when the normal production is performed, so that the capacity of the ROM can be saved.

Further, in this control example, in the effect in which a specific accessory (expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9)) is movable, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 are used. It is controlled to correct the content of the effect displayed in. As a result, in the effect of moving a specific accessory, for example, when the third symbol display device 81 becomes difficult to see, the display contents displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are displayed on the sub display device 690. By doing so, it is possible to make the game machine easy for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents.

Further, in the effect that the vertical movement unit 400 is movable and the door member 470 is opened, the opening / closing drive motor 466 for keeping the door member 470 in the closed state is not excited when the door member 470 is dropped and moved. Control (energization stop control). As a result, even if the opening / closing drive motor 466 is not driven, the door member 470 is opened by the inertial force acting on the door member 470 when the door member 470 is dropped and moved, so that the power consumption can be reduced.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, when a specific advance notice effect is executed based on the ball entering the winning opening in the time effect period that is periodically executed, the effect executed during the time effect period is restricted. It is controlled to do. As a result, when the countdown effect, which is a specific advance notice effect, is executed, the countdown effect executed during the time effect period can be limited. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is confused by the overlapping countdown effects during the time effect period.

Further, the ball entry effect displayed based on the entry into the winning opening is sequentially displayed in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display area. As a result, even when the interval at which the game ball enters the winning opening is short, the period for displaying the ball entry effect can be extended, and the game machine makes it easy for the player to visually recognize the ball entry effect. be able to.

Note that this control example is not limited to the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment, and may be executed by any of the pachinko machines 10 of each of the above-described embodiments, or each of the above-described embodiments may be combined. It may be executed by the pachinko machine 10.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 156. In the above-described first control example, the ball entry effect executed in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the time effect period (effect mode B) executed periodically (5 minutes every hour), and the time effect period By executing a wide variety of display effects such as a specific time effect executed during (effect mode B), the player's interest is improved. In the first control example, the time effect period and the start time of the specific time effect are set when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. As a result, it is possible to start each effect (time effect, specific time effect, etc.) at the same timing for the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in which the power is turned on at the same timing, so that the plurality of pachinko machines 10 can be started. It is possible to perform a unified production with.

In addition to this, in the second control example, a technique capable of suitably controlling the operation of the tilting operation unit 600 and the like will be described. Here, as described above, the accessory such as the tilting operation unit 600 is driven by a drive motor composed of a stepping motor or the like. It is generally known that this drive motor is more likely to cause individual differences and is more likely to deteriorate over time than display devices (third symbol display device 81, sub-display device 690). That is, when image data is set for the display device, problems such as delay in display hardly occur, but when operation data is set for the drive motor, the drive speed decreases due to aged deterioration or the like. There is a possibility that problems such as (decrease in torque) and step-out may occur. That is, even if the same operation scenario is set, there is a possibility that the number of operation steps and the operation speed may vary, so that different operations may be executed in each pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, in the second control example, the operating status of the tilting operation unit 600, the sliding operation unit 700, etc. is checked every time the power is turned on, and if deterioration occurs, a correction value for correcting the operation scenario is set. Configured to set. As a result, in each pachinko machine 10, the operations of various accessories driven by the drive motor can be suitably executed.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 136, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 for detecting the slide operation position of the slide operation unit 700 in the present embodiment will be described. As described above, the base member 710 of the slide operation unit 700 has a slide origin sensor 717 for detecting whether or not the support column member 720 is in the origin position (retracted position), and whether or not the support member 720 is in the overhang position. A slide position sensor 718 for detection is provided (see FIG. 49). Since these are composed of the same type of sensors, only the slide position detection sensor 718 will be described here, and the description of the slide origin detection sensor 717 will be omitted.

FIG. 136A shows the positional relationship between the light-shielding plate 726a and the slide position detection sensor 718 in a state where the slide operation unit 700 is in the process of sliding in the direction from the origin (retracted position) to the overhanging position. It is a figure shown. As shown in FIG. 136 (a), the slide position detection sensor 718 is provided with a light-shielding detection unit 718a. The light-shielding detection unit 718a indicates both the light-emitting unit and the light-receiving unit described above, and the light-shielding plate 726a depends on whether or not the light emitted from the light-emitting unit of the light-shielding detection unit 718a is received by the light-receiving unit. Can be determined whether or not is in the overhanging position.

In the example of FIG. 136 (a), the light-shielding plate 726a is arranged in the right direction in the front view from the light-shielding detection unit 718a. That is, it shows a state in which the light-shielding detection unit 718a and the light-shielding plate 726a are misaligned. In this case, since there is nothing blocking between the light emitting unit of the light blocking detection unit 718a and the light receiving unit, the light from the light emitting unit is received by the light receiving unit. While the light receiving unit receives light, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is in the L (low) state. The output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is received by the voice lamp control device 113, and if the output is L (low), it is determined that the support column member 720 has not reached the overhanging position.

On the other hand, when the left end of the light-shielding plate 726a hangs on the right end of the light-shielding detection unit 718a, the light emitted from the light-emitting unit begins to be shielded by the light-shielding plate 726a (see FIG. 136 (b)). Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (c), when the light-shielding plate 726a is arranged so as to completely overlap the light-shielding detection unit 718, the light emitted from the light-emitting part of the light-shielding detection unit 718a is completely shielded. .. That is, the light receiving unit cannot receive light. In this case, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is set to H (high). When the voice lamp control device 113 detects that the output from the slide position detection sensor 718 is H (high), it determines that the support column member 720 is in the overhanging position. Here, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is H (high) or L (low) based on the voltage value of the output signal. That is, if the voltage output from the slide position detection sensor 718 is 5V, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is determined to be H (high), and if the voltage is 0V, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is L. To determine.

Since the slide origin sensor 717 has the same configuration, the output is set to H (high) if the support column member 720 is in the origin position (retract position), and the output is L if it deviates from the origin position (retract position). Set to (low). The voice lamp control device 113 only determines whether the output of each sensor is H or L, and the support member 720 is roughly arranged (whether it is the origin position or the overhang position, or between them. Is the position of) can be easily grasped.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138, the tilting origin sensor 618 for detecting whether or not the effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is in the origin position (inverted state) will be described. The tilt origin sensor 618 is composed of the same type of sensor as the slide origin detection sensor 717 and the slide position detection sensor 718 described above.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a case where the effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is in the origin position (inverted state). As shown in the figure, when the effect member 620 is in the origin position (inverted state), the sensor shielding portion 627 provided on the effect member 620 side is the light emitting portion of the tilted origin sensor 618 provided on the base member 610 side. Since it is arranged between the light receiving part and the light receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting part is blocked and does not reach the light receiving part. That is, the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 is set to H (high). By outputting this H (high) signal to the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to notify that the effect member is in the origin position (inverted state).

FIG. 138 (a) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the tilt origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding portion 627 when the effect member 620 tilts to the left in the front view (swing motion). 138 (b) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the tilting origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding portion 627 when the effect member 620 tilts to the right in the front view (swinging motion). is there.

As shown in FIG. 138 (a), when the effect member 620 tilts to the left in the front view (swing operation), the sensor shielding portion 627 provided on the effect member 620 also interlocks with the effect member 620. And variable to the upper left. As a result, the tilted origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding portion 627 are displaced from each other, so that the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the tilted origin sensor 618 can be received by the light receiving portion. Similar to the other sensors described above, the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 is set to L (low) while the light from the light emitting unit is received by the light receiving unit. By outputting this H (high) signal to the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to notify that the effect member 620 is deviated from the origin position (inverted state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 138 (b), when the effect member 620 tilts to the right in the front view (swing operation), the sensor shielding portion 627 provided on the effect member 620 also becomes the effect member 620. In conjunction with this, it changes in the lower right direction. As a result, the tilted origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding portion 627 are displaced from each other, so that the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the tilted origin sensor 618 can be received by the light receiving portion. Therefore, also in this case, the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 is set to L (low), and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified.

In this way, by using the tilting origin sensor 618, it is possible to easily detect whether or not the effect member 620 is in the origin position (inverted state) and notify the voice lamp control device 113.

In this control example, a single tilting origin sensor 618 is used to determine only whether or not the effect member 620 is at the origin position, but the present invention is not limited to this mode. Sensors for detecting whether or not the effect member 620 is in the maximum movable position when the tilting motion (swinging motion) is performed on the right side and the left side may be provided, respectively. With this configuration, when the tilting motion (swinging motion) reaches the maximum movable position, the swinging motion can be reliably stopped and the swinging direction can be reversed in the opposite direction (origin direction). it can. Therefore, when the swinging motion is executed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the effect member 620 from operating beyond the range of motion, so that the possibility of failure or abnormal operation can be reduced.

<About the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 142. First, FIG. 139 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example.

As shown in FIG. 139, in this control example, various sensors 230 are electrically connected to the input / output ports 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. Specifically, the various sensors 230 are provided with at least the tilt origin sensor 618, the slide origin detection sensor 717, and the slide position detection sensor 718 described above. In addition to these, various sensors such as a sensor for detecting the origin position of the vertical operation unit 400 and a sensor for detecting the origin position of the combined operation unit 500 are provided. Since the various sensors 230 can accurately grasp the operating state of each accessory, the operation of the accessory can be suitably controlled.

Further, in this control example, as other devices constituting the device 228, the slide drive motor 751 for performing the slide operation of the slide operation unit 700 and the tilt operation (swing operation) of the tilt operation unit 600 are performed. A tilting drive motor 661 for this purpose is provided. Each operating unit can be driven by these motors.

Next, the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 140 (a). As shown in FIG. 140 (a), in addition to the configuration of ROM 222 in the first control example, an operation scenario table 222c and a swing area table 222d are added to the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. Has been done.

The operation scenario table 222c is a data table that defines the operation contents when the effect using each accessory is executed. More specifically, it is a data table in which set values (operating speed, number of operating steps, operating direction, etc.) to be set for various drive motors corresponding to each accessory are specified. The details of this operation scenario table 222c will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142 (a).

FIG. 141 (a) is a block diagram showing an operation scenario table 222c. In this operation scenario table 222c, data is stored for each type of accessory that can be driven (variable). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 141 (a), for example, when an effect of driving the slide operation unit 700 is set, the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the slide drive motor 751 is used. Set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the tilting drive motor 661 when the slide operation table 222c1 that defines the set value to be set for the setting value or the effect of driving the tilting operation unit 600 is set. A tilting operation table 222c2 or the like that defines the set value to be set is provided.

These will be described more specifically with reference to FIGS. 141 (b) and 141 (c). FIG. 141 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the above-mentioned slide operation table 222c1. As shown in FIG. 141 (b), in the slide operation table 222c1, the set value set for the motor control IC (motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer 223n indicating the progress of the setting based on the operation scenario. (Operating speed, number of operating steps, and operating direction) are specified.

Here, the operating speed indicates the frequency with which the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) for setting the operation of one step to the slide drive motor 751, and the signal output per second ( It is expressed by the number of pulses) (pps, pulses per second). For example, if the operating speed is 100 pps, it means that the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) 100 times per second to the slide drive motor 751. That is, it means that the slide drive motor 751 is driven at a speed of 100 steps per second. The number of operation steps indicates the number of operations executed by the slide drive motor 751. In other words, a signal (pulse) for setting the operation of one step from the motor driver to the slide drive motor 751. ) Is output. For example, the number of operation steps of 120 means that the operation of one step is set 120 times for the slide drive motor 751. Further, the operating direction means the driving direction of the sliding drive motor 751 (rotational direction of the motor), and two types of directions, a positive direction and a negative direction, can be set. In the slide drive motor 751, the direction from the retracted position (origin position) to the overhanging position is a positive direction, and the direction from the overhanging position to the retracted position (origin position) is a negative direction. By setting these set values for the motor driver for driving the slide drive motor 751, the corresponding operation can be accurately executed.

As shown in FIG. 141 (b), the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223n is an operation for sliding the support column member 720 of the slide operation unit 700 from the retracted position (origin position) to the overhanging position (outward route). Operation) is associated. Specifically, 100 pps is specified as the operation speed, 120 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is specified as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when the timing for driving the slide operation unit 700 is reached in the effect.

Note that 120 steps means a design value of the number of steps up to the overhanging position. That is, it means that the support column member 720 reaches the detection position of the slide position detection sensor 718 (see FIG. 136 (c)) by driving the slide drive motor 751 in 120 steps in the operation as designed. Here, the operation as designed means that the slide drive motor 751 accurately executes the same operation without step-out or idling, and various gears for transmitting the driving force of the motor to the support column member 720. It means the operation when the above and the like rotate accurately.

The value "02H" of the operation pointer 223n is associated with an operation (return operation) for sliding the support column member 720 of the slide operation unit 700 from the overhanging position to the retracted position (origin position). Specifically, 100 pps is specified as the operation speed, 120 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when it is time to retract the slide operation unit 700 to the origin position (evacuation position) in the effect. The timing of this evacuation is predetermined according to the type of effect.

Further, FIG. 141B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the tilting operation table 222c2 described above. Similar to the slide operation table 222c1, the tilt operation table 222c2 also has set values (operation speed, number of operation steps, and operation direction) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer 223n. It is stipulated. The operation pointer values "01H" and "02H" are associated with set values for tilting the effect member 620 to the left in the front view (swinging operation). That is, the operation pointer value "01H" includes an operation speed of 100 pps, 10 operation steps, and a forward operation direction as set values for tilting the operation from the origin position (inverted state) to the left in the front view. It is stipulated. When this set value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 operates at an operating speed of 100 pps in 10 steps to the left in the front view.

Further, the operation pointer value "02H" has an operation speed of 100 pps, 10 operation steps, and a negative direction as set values for returning the effect member 620 tilted to the left in the front view to the origin position (inverted state). The operating directions of are specified respectively. When this set value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 operates at an operating speed of 100 pps in 10 steps to the left in the front view. By setting the set value corresponding to the operation pointer value "01H" and setting the set value corresponding to the operation pointer value "02H" after the set operation is completed, the effect member 620 is viewed right from the origin position. After performing a 10-step tilting motion (swinging motion) in the direction, a return motion to the origin position (inverted state) is performed.

Further, the motion pointer values "03H" and "04H" are associated with set values for tilting the effect member 620 to the right in the front view (swinging motion). That is, the operation pointer value "03H" includes an operation speed of 100 pps, 10 operation steps, and a forward operation direction as set values for tilting the operation from the origin position (inverted state) to the right in the front view. It is stipulated. When this set value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 operates at an operating speed of 100 pps in 10 steps to the right in the front view.

Further, the operation pointer value "02H" has an operation speed of 100 pps, 10 operation steps, and a negative direction as set values for returning the effect member 620 tilted to the left in the front view to the origin position (inverted state). The operating directions of are specified respectively. When this set value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 operates at an operating speed of 100 pps in 10 steps to the left in the front view. By setting the set value corresponding to the operation pointer value "03H" and setting the set value corresponding to the operation pointer value "04H" after the set operation is completed, the effect member 620 is viewed right from the origin position. After performing a 10-step tilting motion (swinging motion) in the direction, a return motion to the origin position (inverted state) is performed.

In this way, by defining the setting contents for the motor driver in association with the value of the operation pointer 223n, the value of the operation pointer 223n can be updated and the setting value corresponding to the updated value can be set. , The operation of the effect member 620 can be easily set.

In the operation scenario table 222c, in addition to the slide operation table 222c1 (see FIG. 141 (b)) and the tilt operation table 222c2 (see FIG. 141 (c)) described above, a driving accessory (vertical operation unit 400 and the like) A dedicated data table is specified for each type of the combined operation unit 500, etc. (not shown). By referring to the table corresponding to each accessory defined in the operation scenario table 222c and outputting the set value to the corresponding motor driver, the same operation can be executed every time in the corresponding effect.

In reality, the motors, gears, etc. may have operation variations due to individual differences, deterioration over time, etc. Therefore, even if the set values specified in the operation scenario table 222c are set at the same timing, the desired operation can be performed. You may not be able to do it. The details will be described later, but in this control example, in order to absorb the influence of the above-mentioned variation, it is measured (analyzed) how much the operation of the accessory deviates from the design value when the power is turned on, and the analysis result is obtained. It is configured to correct (correct) the setting value of the slide operation accordingly. That is, it is configured to add (or subtract) a correction value for correcting individual variation or the like to the set value specified in the operation scenario table 222c. As a result, even under the influence of individual differences and aging deterioration, the operation of the accessory in each pachinko machine 10 can be executed without discomfort.

Further, the operation scenario table 222c of this control example defines an initial operation table 222c5 in which the setting contents for the motor driver corresponding to each accessory are defined in the initial operation executed based on the power-on of the pachinko machine 10. (See FIG. 141 (a)). By executing the initial operation based on the initial operation table 222c5, it is possible to determine whether or not each accessory operates normally. Further, at the time of executing the initial operation, the content of the tilting motion (swinging motion) of the tilting motion unit 600 and the content of the sliding motion of the sliding motion unit 700 are analyzed, and a correction value for correcting the motion according to the analysis result. Is identified. The details of the initial operation table 222c5 will be described with reference to FIG. 142 (a).

FIG. 142 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the initial operation table 222c5. As shown in FIG. 142 (a), the initial operation table 222c5 is used to set the type of accessory for which the operation is set and the motor driver corresponding to the accessory in association with the value of the operation pointer 223n. Set values (operating speed, number of operating steps, and operating direction) are specified.

More specifically, the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223n is associated with the slide operation unit 700 as the type of accessory, and the operation content is defined as the operation at an operation speed of 100 pps in the forward direction. The number of operation steps is not defined, and the slide operation is repeated in the positive direction (direction of the overhang position) until the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is detected to be H (high). That is, the flow of setting the operation of one step, confirming whether the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is H (high), and setting the operation of one step again if the output remains L (low). The operation is repeated with. The number of operation steps set until the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 becomes H (high) is counted by the correction counter 223w, and the number of operation steps from the origin position to the overhang position is designed after the operation is completed. The difference from the value of 120 steps is analyzed. A correction value for correcting the set value of the slide operation is calculated according to the analyzed difference. Here, when the one-step operation is repeatedly set, there is a delay of, for example, 10 milliseconds with respect to the one-step operation so that the operation speed is the same as when the operation of a plurality of steps is set during the normal game. Set. That is, it is configured so that the operation of one step is set every 10 milliseconds (at an operating speed of 100 pps). As a result, the operation mode can be the same as that during the normal game, so that it is possible to prevent the user from misunderstanding that an abnormality has occurred from the appearance of the operation. In the following description, when the operation is set for each sensor for each step, the delay is set so as to have the same operation speed as during the normal game.

The tilting operation unit 600 is associated with the values "02H" to "05H" of the operation pointer 223n as a type of accessory for setting the initial operation. As the operation content corresponding to the value "02H" of the operation pointer 223n, an operation of 10 steps of operation steps is defined at an operation speed of 100 pps in the forward direction. Further, as the operation content corresponding to the value "03H" of the operation pointer 223n, the operation until the tilt origin sensor 618 is detected at an operation speed of 100 pps in the negative direction is specified. Further, as the operation content corresponding to the value "04H" of the operation pointer 223n, a 10-step operation is defined at an operation speed of 100 pps in the negative direction, and as an operation content corresponding to the value "05H" of the operation pointer 223n, the positive direction The operation that continues until the tilt origin sensor 618 is detected at an operating speed of 100 pps is specified.

Summarizing the initial operations set for the tilt operation unit 600, when the slide operation unit 700 operates to the overhang position and the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the initial operation is updated to "02H", first, The effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is operated 10 steps to the left in the front view. When the 10-step operation is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the initial operation is updated to "03H", and the operation toward the origin (that is, the operation toward the right in the front view) is set. .. This operation is repeatedly executed step by step until it is detected that the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 becomes H (high), similarly to the operation executed at the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223n.

Then, when it is detected that the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 becomes H (high), the value of the operation pointer 223n is updated to "04H", and the operation is performed in 10 steps to the right in the front view (that is, the origin position). The motion in the direction of passing through and further tilting motion) is set. When the operation of these 10 steps is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223n is updated to "05H", and the operation in the origin direction (that is, the operation in the front left direction) is set. This operation is also repeatedly executed step by step until it is detected that the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 becomes H (high), similarly to the operation executed at the value "03H" of the operation pointer 223n. By executing these movements, it is easy to determine whether or not the tilting movements (swinging movements) in the front-view right direction and the front-view left direction, in which the effect member 620 can be driven in the normal gaming state, can be normally executed. You can check.

In the initial operation of the tilting operation unit 600, the number of operation steps until the effect member 620 separated from the origin position returns to the origin position by executing the tilting operation (swinging operation) is the correction counter 223w. After returning to the origin position, the difference from the design value is analyzed. A correction value for correcting the set value of the slide operation is calculated according to the analyzed difference. That is, in this control example, when it is determined that one of the tilting motion and the sliding motion is different from the design motion, the set value (operating speed) for the slide motion unit 700 is corrected. It is configured to do.

The slide operation unit 700 is associated with the value "06H" of the operation pointer 223n as a type of accessory, and an operation with an operation speed of 100 pps in the forward direction is defined as an operation content. As in the operation when the value of the operation pointer 223n is "01H", the operation of one step is repeatedly set until it is detected that the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 becomes H (high).

Although not shown, the initial operation table 222c5 also defines initial operations corresponding to accessories other than the above. By executing the initial operation using the initial operation table 222c5, it is possible to easily determine whether or not there is a defect in the accessory that executes the effect operation in various effects when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the pachinko machine 10 having a problem from playing the game, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In this control example, during the execution of the initial operation based on the initial operation table 222c5, the initial operation is executed and the correction value for correcting the operation speed of the slide operation table 222c1 is calculated, but it is not always the case. It is not necessary to specify the slide operation table 222c1 in the operation scenario table 222c. Instead of calculating the correction value for correcting the operation speed, an operation scenario of the slide operation during the normal game is created based on the number of operation steps of the slide operation at the initial operation and the swing operation, and the RAM 223 is used. It may be configured to be stored. In order to explain this modification more concretely, it is assumed that the number of operation steps to the overhanging position of the slide operation is 125 steps in the initial operation, and the number of operation steps required for one cycle of the swing operation is 45 steps. It is assumed that the case is determined. In this case, first, the actual number of operation steps up to the overhang position determined by the initial operation is set as the number of operation steps of the slide operation. Then, the operation speed of the slide operation for executing the swing operation (3 × 45 steps) of exactly 3 cycles (3 times) until the slide operation of 125 steps is executed is set as the operation speed during the normal game. Set. That is, 100 pps × 125 steps / (3 × 45 steps) = 93 pps is set as the operating speed. Then, when an effect is set in which the sliding motion and the swinging motion are combined and executed during the normal game, the number of motion steps of 125 steps and the motion speed of 93 pps calculated in the initial motion are set to the support member 720. It may be set for each slide operation. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably execute the swinging operation a predetermined number of times (three times) until the strut member 720 slides to the overhanging position. Further, the capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced as compared with the case where the slide operation table 222c1 is specified in the ROM 222.

In this control example, the correction value is calculated based on the number of operation steps in the initial operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the operation time required for the sliding operation and the operation time required for the swinging operation, the deviation from the design operation time is determined, and the correction value for correcting the deviation is calculated. You may. Further, in the above modification, the setting contents of the slide operation are calculated based on the number of operation steps in the initial operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the operation time required for the slide operation and the operation time required for the swing operation, the number of operation steps of the slide operation so as to reach the overhang position of the slide operation at the timing when the swing operation ends three times. And the operating speed may be determined.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 140. The swing area table 222d is a data table that is referred to when the effect member 620 of the tilting accessory 600 is tilted (swinging motion), and defines a direction in which the tilting motion is possible. Here, in this control example, the tilting operation (swinging operation) of the effect member 620 and the sliding operation of the support member 720 are configured to be executed in conjunction with each other. More specifically, while the strut member 720 is performing a sliding motion from the origin position to the overhanging position, the effect member 620 tilts three times (swinging motion) above the strut member 720. It is controlled to perform (the swinging motion to the left and the swinging motion to the right are alternately performed three times each). That is, the position where the effect member 620 executes the swinging motion is changed according to the transition of the sliding motion.

Further, as described above, the tilting operation unit 600 including the effect member 620 is arranged in the lower part of the region formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 5), and the support member 720 is the origin. In the state of being in the position or the overhanging position, the effect member 620 and the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 212 are configured to be close to each other. Therefore, for example, the effect member 620 swings to the right in the front view near the origin position of the slide operation, or the effect member 620 swings to the left in the front view near the overhang position of the slide operation. If the operation is performed, the effect member 620 and the outer wall portion 212 may collide with each other. Therefore, in this control example, the swing area table 222d is defined with an operation direction in which the effect member 620 can execute the swing operation, thereby preventing collision (interference) between the effect member 620 and the outer wall portion 212. ing. When both the sliding operation of the support member 720 and the tilting operation (swinging operation) of the effect member 620 are normal operations (operations as designed), the effect member 620 and the outer wall portion 212 are engaged. The operation scenario is specified so that there is no risk of collision (interference). The swing area table 222d is useful, for example, in an irregular situation where the sliding operation is stopped in the middle due to a defect or the operation speed is changed in the middle.

Here, first, see FIG. 144 for an operation mode when both the tilting operation (swinging operation) of the effect member 620 and the sliding operation of the support member 720 perform a normal operation (operation as designed). I will explain. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the number of operation steps of the swinging operation of the effect member 620 and the number of operation steps of the sliding operation of the support member 720. In this figure, the number of steps "0" indicates the origin position of each accessory (effect member 620, support member 720). Further, the range in which the number of steps of the swinging motion is positive means that the effect member 620 is arranged on the left side of the front view from the origin position, and the range in which the number of steps is negative is from the origin position. Also means that the effect member 620 is arranged on the right side of the front view.

As shown in FIG. 144, until the sliding operation is performed 10 steps, the swinging operation to the left is executed one step for each step of the sliding operation. That is, the swinging motion in the direction away from the outer wall portion 212 arranged on the right side of the origin position of the sliding motion is executed. Then, when the number of steps of the slide operation becomes 10 and the number of steps of the swing operation becomes 10 steps in the positive direction (see position a in FIG. 144), the direction of the swing operation is reversed and the negative direction is obtained. Switch the direction of the swing motion to. This swinging motion in the negative direction is executed beyond the origin position of the effect member 620. When the number of steps of the sliding operation becomes 30, and the effect member 620 reaches a position 10 steps advanced in the negative direction (rightward in the front view) from the origin position (see position b in FIG. 144), the head swings again. Reverse the direction of movement and switch to the forward swinging movement.

Then, after that, the sliding operation proceeds while reversing the direction of the swinging operation every 20 steps (see the c, d, and e positions in FIG. 144). Then, the number of operation steps of the slide operation becomes 120 steps (reaches the overhanging position of the slide operation), and the effect member 620 operates based on the fact that the effect member 620 reaches the origin position from the negative direction (right side of the origin position). Is stopped. Even when returning to the origin position, the strut member is returned to the origin position of the sliding operation while maintaining the relationship shown in FIG. 144.

By executing the slide operation and the swing operation shown in FIG. 144, the same swing operation can be executed each time without causing the effect member 620 to collide with other configurations. On the other hand, since the effect member 620 and the support member 720 are driven by the drive motor, the correspondence relationship shown in FIG. 144 is broken even if the same operation scenario is set due to individual differences in the drive motor and gears and deterioration over time. there is a possibility. In addition, the sliding operation and the swinging operation may be temporarily stopped due to the influence of failure or noise. Even in such a case, if the same set values (operating speed, number of operating steps, operating direction) as in normal operation are set, the effect member 620 may collide (interfere) with the outer wall portion 212. May occur. Therefore, in this control example, by providing the swing region table 222d in which the swing direction in which the swing motion is possible is defined according to the number of steps of the slide motion, the trouble that the effect member 620 interferes with other configurations is suppressed. It is configured to be.

The details of the swing region table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 142 (b). FIG. 142B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the swing area table 222d in this control example. In this control example, every time the effect member 620 reaches the origin position of the swinging motion, the swinging area table 222d is referred to, and the direction of the swinging motion is determined.

As shown in FIG. 142 (b), in the swing area table 222d, the direction (neck) in which the swing operation can be executed is associated with the number of operation steps (progress of the slide operation) of the slide operation of the support member 720. Swingable direction) is specified. In addition, the relationship between the number of operation steps of the slide operation and the swingable direction is the slide operation in the direction from the origin position to the overhang position (outward route) or the direction from the overhang position to the origin position (return route). ) Is specified by distinguishing whether it is a sliding operation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), in the outbound slide operation (slide operation corresponding to the operation pointer value "01H"), the number of operation steps of the slide operation is in the range of "0 to 14". The swingable direction "left side" is associated with it. That is, when it is detected that the effect member 620 has reached the origin position in an operation range relatively close to the origin position of the slide operation (the number of operation steps is in the range of 0 to 14), the effect member 620 is viewed from the front. Swinging to the right is prohibited (regulated). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the outer wall portion 212 and the effect member 620 from being damaged due to the collision between the right side portion of the outer wall portion 212 at the origin position of the sliding operation and the effect member 620.

Further, "both sides" are associated with the range of the number of operation steps "15 to 104" of the slide operation as the swingable direction. That is, when it is detected that the effect member 620 has reached the origin position in the range of the number of operation steps "15 to 104", the swing operation is performed without limitation on both the right side of the front view and the left side of the front view. Can be set. This is because, within the range of the number of operation steps, the outer wall portion 212 and the effect member 620 are sufficiently separated from each other, and there is no possibility of collision (interference) regardless of the operation direction.

Further, the swingable direction "right side" is associated with the number of operation steps "105 to 120" of the slide operation. That is, when it is detected that the effect member 620 has reached the origin position in an operation range relatively close to the overhang position of the slide operation (the number of operation steps is in the range of 105 to 120), the effect member 620 is placed in front of the effect member 620. Swinging to the left side of the eye is prohibited (regulated). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the outer wall portion 212 and the effect member 620 from being damaged due to the collision between the left side portion of the outer wall portion 212 at the overhanging position of the sliding operation and the effect member 620.

On the other hand, in the outbound slide operation (slide operation corresponding to the operation pointer value "02H"), the swingable direction "right side" is associated with the range of the number of operation steps "0 to 14" of the slide operation. The number of operation steps "15 to 104" is associated with the swingable direction "both sides", and the number of operation steps "105 to 120" is associated with the swingable direction "left side". By setting the operation direction of the swinging operation with reference to these correspondences even during the sliding operation on the outward path, the effect member 620 can be operated without colliding with the outer wall portion 212.

Summarizing the swingable directions, as shown in FIG. 143, the area (0 steps to 14 steps) for 15 steps including the origin position of the slide operation (detection position of the slide origin detection sensor 717) is on the left side (front view). It is possible to set the swing motion only in the left direction). On the other hand, in the area (104 steps to 120 steps) for 15 steps including the overhang position of the slide operation (detection position of the slide position detection sensor 718), the swing operation is set only on the right side (right direction in front view). It becomes possible. In areas other than the above, the swing motion can be set without limitation in the direction. By defining the direction of the swinging motion corresponding to the number of steps of the sliding motion in this way, it is possible to prevent the effect member 620 from interfering with other configurations of the pachinko machine 10.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 140. In addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example, the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example includes a step counter 223k, an operation scenario flag 223m, an operation pointer 223n, and a swing direction flag. 223o, correction value storage area 223p, additional operation flag 223q, origin return flag 223r, initial operation flag 223s, slide standby flag 223t, swing standby flag 223u, swing counter 223v, and correction. Counter for 223w has been added.

The step counter 223k is a counter for counting the number of operation steps of each accessory driven by the drive motor. The counting reference (the position where the number of operation steps is 0) is set at the origin position of each accessory. The step counter 223k is configured to be able to separately count the number of operation steps for each type of accessory. That is, the step counter 223k is as many as the number of drive motors for driving the accessory, such as a counter for counting the number of operation steps of the effect member 620 and a counter for counting the number of operation steps of the support member 720. Separate counters are provided.

The step counter 223k is set to the type of drive motor that outputs the execution signal each time an execution signal indicating that the operation of one step is executed is received from any of the various drive motors provided in the pachinko machine 10. The corresponding counter value is updated one by one (see S1622 in FIG. 149). Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the origin return operation for returning various accessories to the origin position is executed, but when the various accessories return to the origin by the origin return operation, the step counter 223k 0 is set for the value. By this origin return operation, the position where the value of the step counter 223k becomes 0 can be surely set to the origin position of each accessory, so that the operation status (drive position) of each accessory can be accurately grasped. it can.

The operation scenario flag 223m is a flag indicating which operation scenario is set among the operation scenarios corresponding to the effect operations of each accessory, which are defined in the operation scenario table 222c. The operation scenario flag 223m is composed of, for example, 1 byte (8 bits), and each bit is associated with the type of operation scenario. For example, the 0th bit of the operation scenario flag 223m corresponds to the slide operation table 222c1, and if the 0th bit is 1 (on), it means that the slide operation table 222c1 is set as the operation scenario. If it is 0 (off), it means that the slide operation table 222c1 is not set. Similarly for the other bits, if the operation scenario corresponding to each bit is set, the corresponding bit is set to 1 (on), and if the corresponding operation scenario is not set, the corresponding bit is 0. Set to (off).

When an operation scenario is specified based on the variation pattern command in the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108), the operation scenario flag 223m is set to 1 (on) for the bit corresponding to the scenario (see FIG. 108). See S1704, S1708, and S1710 in FIG. 108). Further, every time the variation effect in which the operation scenario is set ends, the bit corresponding to the set scenario is set to 0 (off). With this operation scenario flag 223m, the type of operation scenario currently set can be easily determined.

The operation pointer 223n is a pointer used to identify the progress status of the set operation scenario. As described above, each data table constituting the operation scenario table 222c is defined by associating the value of the operation pointer 223n with the operation content (operation speed, number of operation steps, operation direction) to be set. In this control example, the operation of the setting content of 1 is set in the drive motor, and when the operation according to the setting content is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223n is updated.

Further, the operation pointer 223n can update the pointer value separately for each set operation scenario. That is, the operation pointer 223n is a general term for different pointers provided for each operation scenario. For each pointer constituting the operation pointer 223, "01H" is set as the value by newly setting the corresponding operation scenario. After that, each time the operation content corresponding to the pointer value is completed, the pointer value is updated (see S5312 in FIG. 150, S5411 in FIG. 151, S5505 in FIG. 152, S5710 and S5711 in FIG. 154). The operation content corresponding to the pointer value is set. Further, when the variation effect in which the corresponding operation scenario is set is completed, the pointer value is reset to "00H". By using this operation pointer 223n, it is possible to accurately grasp the set operation scenario.

The swing direction flag 223o is a flag indicating the direction of the swing operation. When the value of the swing direction flag 223o is on, it indicates that the swing operation in the positive direction (front view left direction) is executed, and when it is off, it indicates that the swing direction is in the negative direction (front view right direction). Indicates that the swinging motion of is being performed. This swing direction flag 223o corresponds to the operation content indicated by the value of the updated operation pointer 223n when the value of the operation pointer 223n is updated in the case where the operation scenario corresponding to the tilting operation is set. It is updated to the value (see S5507 in FIG. 152). That is, when the forward swing motion is set as the operation content, the swing direction flag 223o is set to on, and when the negative swing motion is set, the swing direction flag 223o is set. Set to off. When the origin position is reached in the swinging motion, the direction of the swinging motion is specified with reference to the swing direction flag 223o. Then, it is determined based on the swing area table 222d whether or not there is no problem in passing through the origin while keeping the same swing operation direction.

The correction value storage area 223p is a storage area for storing the correction value for correcting the variation in the operation of the accessory due to aged deterioration, individual differences, and the like. More specifically, a correction value for correcting the operation speed of the support member 720 according to the actual operation of the effect member 620 is stored. The correction value stored in the correction value storage area 223p is calculated during the execution of the initial operation executed based on the power being turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and is stored in the correction value storage area 223p. (See S5406 and S5409 in FIG. 151). The correction values are roughly classified into at least a correction value according to the actual swinging motion of the effect member 620 and a correction value according to the actual sliding motion of the strut member 720. The number of steps of the slide operation can be corrected according to the correction value of.

The correction value according to the actual swinging motion of the effecting member 620 is the design value of the number of steps when the effecting member 620 swings from the origin position to the right in the front view and to the left in the front view. (Since the swinging motion of 10 steps on the outward path and 10 steps on the return path is executed in two directions, a total of 40 steps) is compared with the number of steps actually required to set a series of motions and return to the origin. is there.

On the other hand, the correction values according to the actual swinging motion of the strut member 720 are the design value (120 steps) of the number of steps when the strut member 720 slides from the origin position to the overhanging position. It is a ratio to the number of steps required to operate from the origin position to the overhang position in the slide operation of. By correcting the setting contents of the operation scenario with these correction values, the mode of the slide operation of the support member 720 can be matched with the mode of the actual swing operation of the effect member 620. That is, when the actual number of steps required for the swinging motion is larger than the design value, it is necessary to set a larger number of steps than the design value, so that the execution period of the swinging motion becomes long. Even in this case, the correction value for delaying the operation speed of the slide operation is stored in order to match the timing when the swinging operation of 3 round trips is completed and the timing when the overhang position of the slide operation is reached. It is stored in the area 223p.

On the other hand, when the actual number of steps required for the swinging motion is smaller than the design value, the swinging motion is completed in a number of steps smaller than the design value, so that the execution period of the swinging motion is shortened by mi. Even in this case, the correction value for accelerating the operation speed of the slide operation is stored in order to match the timing when the swinging operation of 3 round trips is completed and the timing when the overhang position of the slide operation is reached. It is stored in the area 223p.

When setting the slide operation, the swing operation is performed by setting the correction value stored in the correction value storage area 223p by multiplying the operation speed specified in the slide operation table 223c1 as a new operation speed. The timing of completion can be matched with the timing of reaching the overhang position of the sliding motion. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operation quality when the effect member 620 and the support member 720 are operated at the same time.

The additional operation flag 223q is a flag for indicating whether or not it is an additional operation period that may be set after the number of operation steps specified in the operation scenario table 222c has been exhausted. Here, in this control example, when the output of the corresponding sensor does not become H (high) even though the number of operation steps specified in the operation scenario table 222c has been exhausted, additional operation is performed in the sensor direction. Is configured to set. This additional operation is repeatedly set step by step until the output of the corresponding sensor becomes H (high). The period during which this additional operation is set is called the additional operation period. By setting this additional operation period, even if the number of steps until the sensor is detected shifts due to aging deterioration, individual differences, etc., it is possible to move the sensor toward the sensor without immediately notifying the error. it can. This additional operation flag 223q is an abnormality detection process executed when the output of the corresponding sensor does not become H (high) even after the number of operation steps specified in the operation scenario table 222c has elapsed (see FIG. 155). When it is detected that the output of the corresponding sensor becomes L (low) due to the additional operation, it is set to off (see S5604 in FIG. 153).

The home-returning flag 223r is executing a home-return operation (an operation for returning an accessory deviated from the home position to the home position) that is executed when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10. It is a flag indicating whether or not. If the home return flag 223r is on, it indicates that the home return operation is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the home return operation is not being executed. The home return flag 223r is set in the home return process (see FIG. 146).
It is set to on when the home return operation is set (see S5103 in FIG. 146). On the other hand, in the origin return operation, it is set to off when it is determined that all the accessories have returned to the origin position (see S5304 in FIG. 150). By using the home return flag 223r, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the home return operation is in progress.

The initial operation flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not the initial operation, which is executed to determine whether or not each accessory operates normally after the origin return operation is completed, is being executed. .. If the initial operation flag 223s is on, it indicates that the initial operation is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the initial operation is not being executed. The initial operation flag 223s is set to on after the home return operation is completed (see S5304 in FIG. 150), and is set to off when all the operations specified in the initial operation table 222c5 are completed. .. By using the initial operation flag 223s, it can be easily determined whether or not the initial operation is being executed.

With the slide standby flag 223t, in the effect in which the effect member 620 and the support member 720 operate in conjunction with each other, the slide operation of the support member 720 to the overhanging position ends before the swing operation of the effect member 620. This is a flag for determining whether or not the slide waiting period is set in the case of. This slide standby period is a period for waiting the slide operation until the swing operation is completed, and when the operation of returning the slide operation from the overhanging position to the origin position is executed, the swing operation of the effect member 620 is performed. And the sliding operation of the support member 720 are set to start at the same time.

When the slide waiting flag 223t is on, it indicates that the slide waiting period is in progress, and when it is off, it indicates that the slide waiting period is not in progress. This slide standby flag 223t is set to on when it is determined in the slide operation process (see FIG. 156) that the slide operation is completed and the swing operation is not completed (see S5909 in FIG. 156). ). On the other hand, when both the sliding operation and the swinging operation are completed and the operation of returning from the overhanging position to the origin position is set, it is set to off (see S5706 in FIG. 154).

In the effect in which the effect member 620 and the support member 720 operate in conjunction with the swing standby flag 223u, the swing operation of the effect member 620 ends before the slide operation of the support member 720 to the overhanging position. This is a flag for determining whether or not the swing waiting period is set when the case is closed. This swing waiting period is a period for waiting the swinging motion until the sliding motion is completed, and when the motion of returning the sliding motion from the overhanging position to the origin position is executed, the swinging member 620 swings. It is set to start the operation and the sliding operation of the support member 720 at the same time.

When the swing waiting flag 223u is on, it indicates that the swing waiting period is in progress, and when it is off, it indicates that the swing waiting period is not in progress. The swing standby flag 223u is set to on when it is determined in the tilt direction setting process (see FIG. 154) that the swing motion (tilt motion) is completed and the slide motion is not completed. (See S5703 in FIG. 154). On the other hand, when both the sliding operation and the swinging operation are completed and the operation of returning from the overhanging position to the origin position is set, it is set to off (see S5910 in FIG. 156).

The swing counter 223s is a counter for counting the number of executions when the swing operation is executed. In this control example, based on the tilting operation table 222c2, the swinging operation is executed 10 steps each in the left-right direction from the origin position, and then the operation of returning to the origin position is repeated three times. However, if the exact same operation is specified for the tilting operation table 222c2 three times, the capacity of the ROM 222 may be compressed. Therefore, in this control example, only the operation content for one swinging motion is specified in the tilting motion table 222c2, and one swinging motion is completed (that is, the motion pointer defined in the tilting motion table 222c2). Every time (all the operations corresponding to the values "01H" to "04H" of 223n are completed), the swing counter 223s is used to count the number of swings. Then, when the number of counts reaches 3, the swinging motion is ended, and when the number of counts is less than 3, the value of the operation pointer 223n is returned to "01H", and "01H" to "" again. It is configured to set the operations corresponding to "04H" in order. As a result, the swinging motion can be repeated the same number of times (three times) each time while reducing the amount of data in the tilting motion table 222c2.

The correction counter 223w is a counter for counting the number of steps of the actual swinging operation of the effect member 620 and the number of steps of the actual sliding operation of the support member 720 in the initial operation. By comparing the number of steps counted by the correction counter 223w with the design value of the number of steps, it is possible to analyze (determine) how much the actual operation deviates from the design value. That is, it is possible to analyze (discriminate) the effects of individual differences and aging deterioration. A correction value for correcting the operation speed of the slide operation is calculated according to the number of steps of each accessory counted by the correction counter 223w (see S5406 and S5409 in FIG. 151).

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 to 156, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. First, FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. This start-up process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, as in the first control example.

In each of the start-up processes S1301 to S1313, the same process as each process of S1301 to S1313 executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 104) in the first control example is executed. The start-up process in the second control example differs in that the origin return process (S1321) is executed in addition to the start-up process in the first control example.

This origin return process (S1321) is executed after the processes S1301 to S1312 are executed as in the first control example, and is a process for returning the accessory deviated from the origin position to the origin position. Then, after the origin return process (S1321) is executed, the time setting process (S1313) is executed, and this process is completed.

Next, the details of the origin return processing (S1321) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the origin return process (S1321). The origin return process (S1321) is a process for moving (moving) an accessory that is not at the origin position when the power is turned on, among various accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10.

In the origin return processing (S1321), first, is there an origin sensor (for example, slide origin detection sensor 717, tilt origin sensor 618, etc.) having an output of L (0V) (that is, the light receiving portion of the sensor is not shielded from light)? Whether or not it is determined (S5101). If it is determined in the processing of S5101 that there is an origin sensor having an output of L (0V) (S5101: Yes), one of the accessories (directing member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600, strut member of the sliding operation unit 700). 720 etc.) is not at the origin position. Therefore, in this case, in order to return (move) the accessory that is deviated from the origin position to the origin position, the process proceeds to S5102.

In the process of S5102, the operation (movable) in the origin direction is set for the accessory corresponding to the sensor whose output is L (0V) (S5102). Then, the return-to-origin flag 223r is set to ON (S5103), and this process ends. In the process of S5102, for example, an operation of twice the number of steps from the origin position to the overhang position in each accessory is set so as to surely return to the origin position.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5101, when it is determined that there is no origin sensor whose output is L (0V) (S5101: No), it means that all the accessories are already in the origin position at the time of turning on the power. To do. That is, since it is not necessary to return (move) the accessory to the origin position, each process of S5104 and S5105 for setting the initial operation of the accessory is executed.

In the process of S5104, the start of the initial operation is set for various accessories (S5104), the flag 223s during the initial operation is set to on (S5105), and the present process is ended. As described above, the initial operation is performed to check whether the various accessories are operating normally. Since it is possible to check whether the various accessories operate normally each time the power is turned on, it is possible to detect abnormalities of the various accessories at an early stage.

By executing this origin return process (S1321), all the accessories can be returned (movable) to the origin position. Since the step counter 223k of the corresponding accessory can be reset to 0 when the return to the origin position is triggered, the number of operation steps of all the accessories can be accurately grasped after the return to the origin. Further, since the initial operation can be executed after returning to the origin, the same operation can be performed every time in the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine from the appearance whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the initial operation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the main process. Similar to the first control example, this main process is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113.

Of the main processes, in each of the processes S1501 to S1520, the same processes as those of S1501 to S1520 executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) in the first control example are executed. The main process in the second control example differs in that the accessory operation setting process (S1531) is executed in addition to the main process in the first control example.

This accessory operation setting process (S1531) is executed after the processes S1501 to S1515 are executed as in the first control example. Then, after the execution of the accessory operation setting process (S1531), each process from S1516 to S1520 is executed. This accessory operation setting process (S1531) is a process for setting the operation of each accessory based on the selected variation pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the details of the above-mentioned accessory operation setting process (S1531) will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the accessory operation setting process (S1531). As described above, this accessory operation setting process (S1531) is a process for setting the operation of various accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10.

In the accessory operation setting process (S1531), first, it is determined whether or not it is the operation start timing of the accessory (S5201). Here, the operation start timing of the accessory and the type of the accessory to be operated are defined for each fluctuation pattern. In the process of S5201, it is determined whether or not the operation start timing has been reached based on the progress of the fluctuation pattern.

If it is determined in the process of S5201 that it is not the operation start timing of the accessory (S5201: No), it is not necessary to set the operation of the accessory, so that the main process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5201 that it is the operation start timing of the accessory (S5201: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S5202 in order to set the operation of the accessory whose start timing has come.

In the process of S5202, the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the operation to be started (sliding operation, tilting (swinging) operation, initial operation, etc.) is set to "01H" (S5202). Then, the operation content corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223n is read from the table corresponding to the accessory to be operated this time in the operation scenario table 222c (S5203). Next, it is determined whether or not the operation content read out in the process of S5203 is the sliding operation of the support column member 720 (S5204).

If it is determined in the process of S5204 that the read operation content is a slide operation (S5204: Yes), the read operation content is stored in the correction value storage area 223p with respect to the operation speed (pps). A value obtained by multiplying the existing correction value (both the correction value corresponding to the sliding motion and the correction value corresponding to the swinging motion) is set as the operating speed (S5205), and the process proceeds to S5206. As described above, this correction value is a value calculated based on the number of operation steps of the actual swinging operation of the effect member 620 in the initial operation and the actual number of operation steps of the support member 720. By correcting the operation speed of the slide operation with this correction value, the end timing of the swing operation and the operation end timing of the slide operation can be matched.

On the other hand, in the process of S5204, if it is determined that the read operation content is not a slide operation (S5204: No), it is not necessary to correct the operation, so the process of S5205 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5206. ..

When the processing of S5204 or S5205 is completed, the operation command is set based on the read operation content (or the corrected operation content) (S5206), and this processing is terminated. The operation command set by the process of S5206 is stored in a ring buffer (not shown) for command transmission provided in the RAM 223. Then, in the command output process (S502) of the main process (see FIG. 147) executed by the MPU 221, various motors (up and down drive motor 431, opening / closing drive motor 466, slide drive motor 751) corresponding to the command, It is transmitted toward the control IC (not shown) of the tilting drive motor 661). Control ICs (not shown) for various motors drive and control various motors based on received operation commands. As a result, various accessories corresponding to various motors are moved.

Next, the command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S1511). This command determination process (S1511) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 147) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 as in the first control example, and as described above, the main control device. This is a process for determining a command received from 110 and executing the corresponding control.

In each of the command determination processes (S1511), S1601 to S1616, the same processes as those of S1601 to S1616 executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 107) in the first control example are executed. .. The command determination process (S1511) in the second control example differs in that the processes S1621 to S1623 are executed in addition to the command determination process (S1511) in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same parts as those of the command determination process (see FIG. 107) in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the command determination process (S1511) in the second control example, first, the processes S1601 to S1615 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example. Then, in the process of S1612, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S1612: No), various motors (up / down drive is also 431, opening / closing drive motor 466, slide drive motor 751, tilting drive). It is determined whether or not an execution signal (execution command) output from a control IC (not shown) of the motor 661) has been received (S1621). If it is determined in the process of S1621 that the execution command has not been received from the motor driver (control IC) corresponding to each accessory, the process of S1616 is executed and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1621, when it is determined that the execution command has been received from any of the motor drivers (control IC) (S1621: Yes), it corresponds to the motor driver (accessory) that outputs the operation command. The step counter 223k is updated (S1622), an execution command process for controlling the operation of each accessory is executed according to an execution command (execution signal) (S1623), and this process is terminated. By updating (adding) the step counter 223k corresponding to the operation by the process of S1622, the state (number of operation steps) of each operation (sliding operation, swinging operation, etc.) can be accurately determined.

Next, the details of the execution command processing (S1623) described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 156. First, FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing execution command processing (S1623. This execution command processing (S1623) includes various motors (upper and lower drive 431, opening / closing drive motor 466, slide drive motor 751, tilting). This is a process executed when an execution signal (execution command) transmitted from a control IC (not shown) of the drive motor 661) is received.

In the execution command process (S1623), first, it is determined whether or not the home-returning flag 223r is on (S5301). If it is determined in the process of S5301 that the home return flag 223r is on (S5301: Yes), the home return process (see FIG. 145) executed in the above-mentioned start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 145). In FIG. 146), it means that the home return operation is being executed. Therefore, in this case, in order to determine whether or not the origin return operation is completed, whether or not there is an origin sensor having an output of L (0V) (that is, the light receiving portion of the sensor is not shielded from light). Determine (S5302).

In the process of S5302, when it is determined that there is an origin sensor having an output of L (0V) (S5302: Yes), one of the accessories is deviated from the origin position (that is, is being restored (movable)). ) In this case, since the process of returning (moving) the accessory to the origin position is continued, this process is terminated as it is. When a plurality of accessories are returning to the origin, the operation stop is set in order from the accessory determined to have returned to the origin position in the process of S5302. In addition, if there is an accessory that does not return to the origin even after the set number of steps of the origin return operation has elapsed, there is a high possibility that the drive motor is not operating normally due to a failure or the like, so an error is notified. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S5302, when it is determined that there is no origin sensor whose output is L (0V) (S5302: No), all the accessories are in the origin position (that is, the return (movable) is completed). Since this is the case, the process of returning (moving) the accessory to the origin position is completed, and the start of the initial operation of the various accessories is set (S5303). Then, the origin return flag 223r is set to off, the initial operation flag 223s is set to on (S5304), and the present process is terminated.

In the processing of S5301, if it is determined that the home return flag 223r is not on (S5301: No), it means that all the accessories have been returned (movable) to the home position. It is determined whether or not the flag 223s is on (S5305). In the process of S5305, when it is determined that the initial operation flag 223s is ON (S5305: Yes), it means that the initial operation of various accessories is being executed, so that the setting during the initial operation is performed. The initial operation process of (S5306) is executed, and this process is terminated. Details of this initial operation process (S5306) will be described later with reference to FIG. 151.

On the other hand, in the process of S5305, when it is determined that the initial operation flag 223s is off (S5305: No), then it is determined whether or not the received execution command is a command corresponding to the tilting operation (S5307). ). In the process of S5307, if it is determined that the received execution command is a command corresponding to the tilting (swinging) operation (S5307: Yes), the tilting (swinging) operation is executed (tilting drive motor 661). In order to drive), the tilting operation process is executed (S5308), and this process is terminated. Details of this tilting operation process (S5308) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 152 to 155.

In the processing of S5307, if it is determined that the received execution command is not a command corresponding to the tilt (swing) operation (S5307: No), then whether or not the received execution command is a command corresponding to the slide operation. (S5309). In the process of S5309, when the received execution command is determined to be a command corresponding to the slide operation (S5309: Yes), the slide operation is executed (to drive the slide drive motor 751). The process of the process is executed (S5310), and the present process is terminated. Details of this slide operation process (S5310) will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

On the other hand, in the process of S5309, when it is determined that the received execution command is not a command corresponding to the slide operation (S5309: No), it is a case where an execution command for another accessory (operation) is received. In this case, in order to determine whether or not the operation of the accessory corresponding to the received execution command is completed, whether or not the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the accessory reaches the set number of steps. Determine (S5311). If it is determined in the process of S5311 that the set number of steps has not been reached (S5311: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S5311, when it is determined that the set number of steps has been reached (S5311: Yes), then 1 is added to the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the received execution command (corresponding to the operation) (S5311: Yes). S5312). Then, the operation content corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223n after addition is read from the operation scenario table 222c (S5313), an operation command is set based on the read operation content (S5314), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, details of the initial operation process (S5306) executed in the above-mentioned execution command process (see FIG. 150) will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process (S5306). This initial operation process (S5306) is a process for executing the initial operation of various accessories.

In the initial operation process (S5306), first, 1 is added to the value of the correction counter 223w (S5401). As described above, the correction counter 223w is used to count the actual number of operation steps of the support member 720 and the actual number of operation steps of the effect member 620 in the initial operation. That is, the number of operation steps of the initial operation for the slide operation executed while the value of the operation pointer 223n is "01H" is counted, and the correction corresponding to the slide operation is performed by the ratio of the number of operation steps to the design value of 120. Used to calculate the value. Further, the number of operation steps of the initial operation corresponding to the swing operation, which is executed when the value of the operation pointer 223n is between "02H" and "05H", is counted, and the number of operation steps in one cycle of the swing operation is counted. It is used to calculate the correction value corresponding to the swinging motion by the ratio with the design value of 40.

In this control example, the value of the correction counter 223w is updated in each initial operation process (that is, even after the initial operation of the swing operation is completed), but the swing operation is performed. After the initial operation is completed and the calculation of the correction value is completed, the update process (S5401) of the correction counter 223w may be skipped. As a result, the processing load in the initial operation processing (S5306) can be reduced.

When the processing of S5401 is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the initial operation is read (S5402), the initial operation table 222c5 is referred to based on the read value of the operation pointer 223n, and the operation of the corresponding accessory is completed. It is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied (S5403). In the process of S5403, when it is determined that the completion condition of the operation of the corresponding accessory is not satisfied (S5403: No), the operation for one step is set for the corresponding accessory (S5404). , End this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5403 that the completion condition of the operation of the corresponding accessory is satisfied (S5403: Yes), then whether or not the value of the operation pointer 223n read in the processing of S5402 is 01H. (S5405). When it is determined that the value of the operation pointer 223n is 01H in the process of S5405 (S5405: Yes), it means that the sliding operation of the support column member 720 on the outward path is completed in the initial operation (FIG. 142 (a)). )reference). Therefore, in this case, the ratio of the design value (120 steps) of the number of operation steps of the slide operation to the actual number of operation steps (count value of the correction counter 223w) (the value of the correction counter 223w is divided by 120). The value) is stored in the correction value storage area 223p as the correction value for the slide operation (S5406). Then, the value of the correction counter 223w is initialized (S5407), and the process proceeds to S5411.

By initializing the correction counter 223w in the process of S5406, it can be used to count the actual number of operation steps in the initial operation of the swing operation to be executed next. Therefore, the counter that counts the actual number of operation steps required for the slide operation and the counter that counts the actual number of operation steps required for the swing operation can be covered by one shared counter (correction counter 223w). , The capacity of the RAM 223 can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S5405, when it is determined that the value of the operation pointer 223n is not "01H" (S5405: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the operation pointer 223n is "05H" (S5406). ). In the process of S5406, when it is determined that the value of the operation pointer 223n is 05H (S5408: Yes), the initial operation of the swing operation (the operation corresponding to the values "02H" to "05H" of the operation pointer 223n) is performed. Since it means that all are completed, the process of calculating the correction value corresponding to the swinging motion is performed. That is, 40, which is the design value of the number of operation steps in one cycle of the swing operation, is set to the number of operation steps actually required for the swing operation in the initial operation (between the values "02H" and "05H" of the operation pointer 223n. The value divided by the counted correction counter 223w) is stored in the correction value storage area 223p as the correction value for the tilting (swinging) operation (S5409). Then, the value of the correction counter value 223w is initialized (S5410), and the process proceeds to the process of S5411.

If it is determined in the process of S5408 that the value of the operation pointer 223n is not "05H" (that is, "06H" or more) (S5408: No), the process proceeds to the process of S5411 as it is.

When the processing of S5407, S5408 or S5410 is completed, 1 is added to the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the initial operation (S5411), and the operation corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223n after the addition is set (S5412). This process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152, the details of the tilting operation process (S5308) executed in the above-mentioned execution command process (see FIG. 150) will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the tilting operation process (S5308). This tilting operation process (S5308) is a process for setting the tilting operation of the effect member 620 provided in the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9).

In the tilting motion processing (S5308), first, it is determined whether or not the additional motion flag 223q for the swinging (tilting) motion is on (S5501). As described above, this additional operation flag 223q is set in the sensor direction when the output of the corresponding sensor does not become H (high) even though the number of operation steps specified in the operation scenario table 222c has been exhausted. Indicates whether or not it is an additional operation period for which an additional operation is set.

In the process of S5501, when it is determined that the additional operation flag 223q for the swing (tilt) operation is on (S5501: Yes), it means that the additional operation period of the effect member 620 is in progress, so that the origin sensor The additional operation process (S5502) for executing the additional operation until (tilt origin sensor 618) is detected is executed, and this process is terminated. Details of this additional operation process (S5502) will be described later with reference to FIG. 153.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5501, when it is determined that the additional operation flag 223q for the swinging (tilting) operation is off (S5501: No), then the tilting for tilting (swinging) the effect member 620 is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of steps of the drive motor 661 has reached the set number of steps (S5503). That is, it is determined whether or not the tilting (swinging) operation (outward path operation or return path operation) of the effect member 620 is completed.

If it is determined in the process of S5503 that the number of operation steps of the tilting drive motor 661 has not reached the set number of steps (S5503: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5505, when it is determined that the number of operation steps of the tilting drive motor 661 has reached the set number of steps (see tilting operation table 222c2) (S5503: Yes), the operation pointer 223n of 1. Since it means that the tilting (swinging) motion (outward path motion or return path motion) of the effect member 620 corresponding to the value is completed, then the tilting (swinging) motion of the effect member 620 is the outward path motion (opposite to the origin position). It is determined from the value of the current operation pointer 223n whether or not the operation is in the direction (S5504). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation pointer 223n is either "01H" or "03H".

In the process of S5504, if it is determined that the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 is the outward path operation (movement in the direction opposite to the origin position) (S5504: Yes), then the effect member 620 is returned. (Movable operation in the direction of the origin position) is executed (S5505 to S5507).

In the process of S5505, 1 is added to the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the tilting (swinging) operation (S5505), and the operation content corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223n after the addition is added to the operation scenario table 222c (tilting operation). It is read from the table 222c2) and set (S5506). Then, the value of the swing direction flag 223o is updated (reversed) to a value corresponding to the swing direction of the return route (S5507), and this process is terminated. For example, when the processing of S5507 is executed in the state where the value of the swing direction flag 223o is 1 (forward swing operation), the value of the swing operation flag 223o is updated (reversed) to 0 and the value is 0. When the process of S5507 is executed in the state of (swinging motion in the forward direction), the value of the swinging motion flag 223o is updated (reversed) to 1. As a result, the swing direction flag 223o can be updated in accordance with the reversal of the motion direction of the swing motion, so that the motion direction can be accurately grasped.

On the other hand, in the process of S5504, the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 was the return path operation (operation toward the origin position) (the value of the operation pointer 223 corresponding to the effect member 620 is "02H" or " If it is determined to be "04H") (S5504: No), it means that the effect member 620 is moved in the direction of the origin position. Next, the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) corresponding to the effect member 620 is output. Is H (5V) (whether the effect member 620 is the origin position) or not (S5509).

If the output of the origin sensor (tilting origin sensor 618) is determined to be L (0V) in the processing of S5509 (S5508: No), the tilting drive motor 661 is not driven as set. Since there is a high possibility that an abnormality such as the movement of the 620 being hindered or the number of steps shifting due to aged deterioration has occurred, the abnormality detection process is executed (S5510), and this process is completed. To do. The details of this abnormality detection process (S5510) will be described later with reference to FIG. 155.

On the other hand, in the process of S5509, if the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) is determined to be H (5V) (S5508: Yes), the tilt direction setting process is executed (S5509), and this process is performed. To finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the details of the additional operation process (S5502) executed in the above-described tilting operation process (see FIG. 152) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing additional operation processing. In this additional operation process (S5502), in the tilt operation process (see FIG. 152) described above, the effect member 620 provided in the tilt operation unit 600 is moved to the origin position even after the operation of the set number of operation steps is completed. This is a process that is executed (S5508: No) when it is not (there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred), and the effect member 620 is moved to the origin position or an error notification is performed.

In the additional operation process (S5502), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the origin sensor (tilting origin sensor 618) is H (5V) (S5601). If it is determined in the processing of S5601 that the output of the origin sensor (tilting origin sensor 618) is not H (5V) (S5601: No), the previous additional operation processing (S5502) or the abnormal operation processing described later (FIG. This means that the effect member 620 is deviated from the origin position even after the one-step operation set in (see 155) is executed. In this case, it is determined whether or not the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the tilting (swinging) operation is 10 or more (S5605).

When it is determined in the process of S5605 that the value of the step counter 223k is smaller than 10, an additional operation for one step is set in order to move the effect member 620 to the origin position again (S5606). , End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S5605, when it is determined that the value of the step counter 223k is 10 or more (S5605: Yes), the additional operation process (S5502) is repeatedly executed so as not to return to the origin position, and the process of S5606. This is a case where the effect member 620 is not moved to the origin position even though the effect member 620 (tilting drive motor 661) is moved (additionally operated) by 10 steps or more. That is, it means that the operation of the number of operation steps that can sufficiently reach the origin position within the range of the normal operation has been executed. Therefore, in this case, an error command is set (S5607) to end this process.

When setting an error command, the operation is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and the operation of the effect member 620 is a tilting (swinging) operation outside the normal movable (setting) range, and further tilting (movable). Then, when there is a risk of contact with other accessories, an error command may be set to end the process.

Further, the number of operation steps for determining an error is not limited to 10 steps, and may be arbitrarily determined according to the type of accessory or drive motor. For example, when a drive motor that is relatively easily deteriorated (the number of operation steps is likely to shift) is adopted, the number of operation steps until it is determined to be an error may be increased (for example, 15 times). On the contrary, when a drive motor having a relatively accurate and long life is adopted, it may be configured to determine an error with a smaller number of operation steps (for example, 5 times).

If the output of the origin sensor (tilting origin sensor 618) is determined to be H (5V) in the processing of S5601 (S5601: Yes), the processing of S5606 executed in the previous additional operation processing (S5502) (S5606). Alternatively, this is a case where the effect member 620 is moved to the origin position by the one-step operation set by the abnormality detection process (processing of S5801). In this case, the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the tilting (swinging) operation is updated (S5602), and the operation content corresponding to the updated value of the operation pointer 223n is described in the operation scenario table 222c (tilting operation table 222c2). Read from and set (S5603). Then, the additional operation flag 223q for the swinging (tilting) operation is set to off (S5604), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the details of the tilt direction setting process (S5509) executed in the tilt operation process (see FIG. 152) described above will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the tilt direction setting process. This tilt direction setting process (S5502) is executed when the effect member 620 provided in the tilt operation unit 600 reaches the origin position in the swing operation in the above-described tilt operation process (see FIG. 152) (S5508: Yes). It is a process to be performed.

In the tilt direction setting process (S5509), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the swing counter 223v is 3 (or larger than 3) (S5701). The value of the swing counter 223v is updated by the process of S5714, which will be described later, and each time the swing operation of the effect member 620 is executed once (it is regarded as one round trip on the left side and one round trip on the right side). Is added to 1 (see S5715). Therefore, when the value of the swing counter 223v is 3, the swing operation of the effect member 620 is executed three times.

In the process of S5701, when it is determined that the value of the swing counter 223v is 3 (S5701: Yes), it is the case where the swing (tilt) operation of the effect member 620 is completed a specified number of times (3 times). Therefore, next, it is determined whether or not the sliding operation of the support column member 720 provided in the tilting operation unit 600 is the outward path (or the outward path) (S5702). In the process of S5702, if it is determined that the sliding operation of the support member 720 is the return path (or the return path) (S5702: No), then the swinging operation of the effect member 620 is not performed. This process ends as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sliding motion of the strut member 720 is the outward path (outward path) (S5702: Yes), after the sliding motion of the strut member 720 (outward path motion) is completed, the neck of the effect member 620 In order to execute the swing operation, the process proceeds to S5703.

In the process of S5703, it is determined whether or not the sliding operation (outward path operation) of the support member 720 has been completed (S5703). More specifically, if the slide standby flag 223t is on, it is determined that the slide operation (outward path operation) of the support member 720 is completed, and if the slide standby flag 223t is off, the slide operation of the support member 720 (outward path operation) is completed. It is determined that the outbound operation) has not been completed.

In the process of S5703, when the slide standby flag 223t is turned on and it is determined that the slide operation has been completed (S5703: Yes), the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the slide operation is set to 02H and tilted. (Swing) 03H is set to the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the operation (S5705). Then, based on the value of the operation pointer 223n set by the process of S5705, the operation content is read from the operation scenario table (slide operation table 222c1 and tilt operation table 222c2) and set (S5706). By the process of S5706, the support member 720 of the tilting operation unit 600 is moved in the return direction, and the effect member 620 is set to swing (tilt) (three reciprocates).

When the process of S5706 is completed, the slide standby flag 223t is set to off (S5707), the value of the swing counter 223v is initialized to 0 (S5708), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5703, when the slide standby flag 223t is off and it is determined that the slide operation is not completed (S5703: No), the support member 720 waits until the slide operation is completed. The swing standby flag 223u is set to ON (S5704), the value of the swing counter 223v is initialized to 0 (S5708), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S5701 that the value of the swing counter 223v is not 3 (2 or less) (S5701: No), the process shifts to the process of S5709 in order to continue the swing (tilt) operation. ..

In the process of S5709, the swing direction before reaching the origin position is specified based on the value of the swing direction flag 223o (S5709). Then, the swingable direction is specified based on the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide operation and the swing region table 222d (see FIG. 142) (S5710).

When the processing of S5710 is completed, the swinging direction (traveling direction) after passing the origin is specified from the swinging direction before reaching the origin specified in the processing of S5709, and the swinging direction (traveling direction) after passing the origin is determined. , It is determined whether or not it matches the swingable direction specified in the process of S5710 (S5711). In the process of S5711, if it is determined that the swing direction (traveling direction) after passing the origin is not the swingable direction (S5711: No), the swinging direction (traveling direction) after passing the origin is the swingable direction. The value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the swinging (tilting) operation is updated three times (S5712), and the process proceeds to S5714.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5711 when it is determined that the swinging (tilting) direction (traveling direction) after passing through the origin is the swingable direction (S5711: Yes), the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swinging motion The value is updated once (S5713), and the process proceeds to S5714.

Here, the processing of S5712 and S5713 will be specifically described. When the tilt direction setting process (S5509) is executed, it is the case where the effect member 620 is at the origin position as described above. In this case, the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swing motion is "02H" (when the swing direction is on the left side) or "04H" (when the swing direction is on the right side). .. Therefore, when the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swing motion is updated three times, when 02H (swing direction is on the left side) is set, 01H (swing direction is on the left side) is set and 04H (swing direction is on the left side). If the swing direction is set to the right, 03H (the swing direction is to the right) is set. That is, it is updated to a value that operates in the outward direction in the same direction as the previously set swing direction. As a result, if the swinging (advancing) direction after passing through the origin is not the swingable direction, the outward movement is set to operate in the same direction again.

On the other hand, when the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the swing motion is updated once, 02H (the swing direction is on the left side) is set, and 03H (the swing direction is on the right side) is set. When "04H" (swing direction is on the right side) is set, "01H" (swing direction is on the left side) is set. That is, it is updated to a value that operates in the outward direction in the direction opposite to the previously set swing direction (direction passing through the origin position). As a result, when the swinging (advancing) direction after passing the origin is the swingable direction, the outward movement is set to the direction of passing the origin position in the opposite direction), and the effect member 620 is set to the origin position. It can be swung (tilted) in the left-right direction as the center.

In the process of S5711, the determination of whether or not the swinging (advancing) direction after passing through the origin is the swingable direction is not limited to the above. For example, by the time the effect member 620 reaches the origin position, the position where the support member 720 is moved is pre-read (estimated), the swingable direction is specified, and the swingable direction is determined. Good. With this configuration, the swingable direction can be determined more accurately. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the problem that the effect member 620 comes into contact with other configurations (other accessories, outer wall portion 212, etc.).

When the processing of S5712 or S5713 is completed, the operation scenario table (tilt operation table 222c2) is referred to based on the updated value of the operation pointer 223n, and the operation content is read and set (S5714). Then, the value of the swing counter 223v is updated (S5715), and this process is terminated. The update of the value of the swing counter 223v in the process of S5715 is added by 1 when the effect member 620 reciprocates once to the left and right (when the effect member 620 reciprocates to the left and then reciprocates to the right). Not limited to this, it is natural that 1 is added each time the effect member 620 is moved to the origin position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the details of the abnormality detection setting process (S5510) executed in the above-described tilting operation process (see FIG. 152) will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the abnormality detection process. In the above-described tilting motion processing (see FIG. 152), the abnormality detection process (S5510) is performed when the return path motion of the effect member 620 is completed, that is, when the movement to the origin position is completed, the origin sensor (tilting origin sensor). This is a process executed when it is determined by 618) that the effect member 620 is deviated from the origin position.

In the abnormality detection process (S5510), first, an operation command corresponding to the one-step operation is set for the accessory (here, the effect member 620) in which the abnormality is detected (S5801). Then, the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the accessory whose operation is set by the processing of S5801 is reset to 0 (S5802), and the additional operation flag 223q for the swinging (tilting) operation is set to ON (S5803). This process ends. By the processing of S5801 to S5803, in the above-mentioned additional operation processing (FIG. 153), the additional operation for a maximum of 10 steps is executed, and the effect member 620 is moved to the origin position (see S5606 in FIG. 153). Further, in the additional operation process (FIG. 153), if the effect member 620 is not moved to the origin position even if the additional operation for 10 steps is executed, an error notification is performed (see S5607 in FIG. 153). ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the details of the slide operation process (S5310) executed in the above-described execution command process (see FIG. 150) will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the slide operation process. In the slide operation process (S5310), in the above-described execution command process (see FIG. 150), the execution command corresponding to the slide operation is received, that is, the operation for one step corresponding to the slide operation of the support member 720 is completed. This is the process that is executed when

In the slide operation process (S5310), first, it is determined whether or not the additional operation flag 223q for the slide operation is ON (S5901). When it is determined in the process of S5901 that the additional operation flag 223q for the slide operation is on (S5901: Yes), the return operation of the support member 720 is completed, that is, the movement to the origin position is completed. Regardless of this, the origin sensor (slide origin detection sensor 717) determines that the support member 720 is not at the origin position, and the additional operation of 10 steps is executed. In this case, the above-mentioned additional operation process (FIG. 153) is executed on the slide operation accessory (post member 720) (S5902) to end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S5901 when it is determined that the additional operation flag 223q for the slide operation is off (S5901: No), then the number of steps set by the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide operation (slide operation table 222c1). (See) is determined (S5903).

In the process of S5903, if it is determined that the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide operation has not reached the set number of steps (see the slide operation table 222c1) (S5903: No), the slide operation is continued. Is executed, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5903, when the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide operation determines that the set number of steps has been reached (S5903: Yes), the support column member 720 is moved to the origin position or the overhang position. Is. In this case, in order for the corresponding sensor (slide origin detection sensor 717 or slide position detection sensor 718) to determine whether or not the strut member 720 is movable at the origin position or the overhang position, the corresponding sensor It is determined whether or not the output is H (5V) (S5904).

In the process of S5904, when it is determined that the output of the corresponding sensor is L (0V), that is, the strut member 720 is not moved to the origin position or the overhang position (S5904), the above-mentioned abnormality detection process (See FIG. 155) is executed for the slide operation accessory (post member 720) (S5905), and this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S5904, when it is determined that the output of the corresponding sensor is H (5V), that is, the support column member 720 is moved to the origin position or the overhang position (S5904: Yes). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the slide operation is 01H (outward route operation) (S5906).

When it is determined in the process of S5906 that the value of the operation pointer 223n is "02H" (return operation) (S5906: No), the timing to end the slide operation of the support column member 720 provided in the slide operation unit 700. Therefore, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5906, when the value of the operation pointer 223n is determined to be 01H (outward path operation) (S5906: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S5907 in order to operate the support column member 720 in the return path.

In the process of S5907, it is determined whether or not the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 has been completed (S5907). In the process of S5907, it is determined whether or not the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 has been completed based on whether or not the swinging standby flag 223u is on. Specifically, when the swing standby flag 223u is on, it is determined that the tilting (swing) operation of the effect member 620 has been completed, and when the swing standby flag 223u is off, it is determined. It is determined that the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 is incomplete.

In the process of S5907, when it is determined that the swing standby flag 223u is off, that is, the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 is not completed (S5908: No), the sliding operation is completed. The slide standby flag 223t is set to ON (S5908) to indicate, and this process ends. The slide standby flag 223t set to be turned on by the process of S5908 is referred to when determining whether or not the slide operation is completed in the tilt direction setting process (see FIG. 154) described above (see S5703 of FIG. 154). ..

On the other hand, in the process of S5907, when it is determined that the swing standby flag 223u is on, that is, the tilt (swing) operation of the effect member 620 has been completed (S5908: Yes), the tilt operation unit 600 In order to operate the return path, the process shifts to the process of S5909.

In the process of S5909, the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the slide operation is set to 02H (return operation), and the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the tilt (swing) operation is set to "03H" (swing start operation to the right). Set (S5909). Then, the operation content corresponding to the value of the updated operation pointer 223n is read from the slide operation table 222c1 and the tilt operation table 222c2, respectively, and set (S5910). After that, the swing standby flag 223u is set to off (S5911), and this process ends.

As described above, in this control example, when the initial operation based on the power-on is executed, the actual number of operation steps between the swing operation of the effect member 620 and the slide operation of the support member 720 is analyzed, and the actual operation step number is analyzed with the design value. It is configured so that the difference can be discriminated. Then, by correcting the operation speed of the slide operation according to the difference from the design value, it is possible to match the timing at which the tilting operation of the effect member 620 and the slide operation of the support member 720 end. That is, the operation content (three swinging operations) of the effect member 620, which is predetermined, can be completed before the sliding operation is completed. Therefore, even if the sliding motion is completed, only the swinging motion is continuously executed, or even if the swinging motion is completed, the sliding motion is not completed, and the sliding motion is continued with the effect member 620 stopped. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of variations in operation such as slackening. Therefore, when the swinging motion of the effect member 620 and the sliding motion of the strut member 720 are combined to operate, the operation quality can be improved.

Further, in this control example, the swingable direction in the swing motion is defined according to the number of steps of the slide motion. Then, when the origin position of the swinging motion is reached during the swinging motion of the effect member 620, the number of steps of the current sliding motion is determined, and the swinging motion in the opposite direction is performed after passing through the origin. It is configured to determine if it is feasible. As a result, even if the correspondence between the number of operation steps of the slide operation and the number of operation steps of the swing operation deviates from the correspondence shown in FIG. 144 due to some trouble or abnormality, another configuration ( It is possible to prevent (suppress) the problem that the outer wall portion 212 and the like) and the effect member 620 interfere (collide) with each other.

In this control example, in the initial operation, the actual number of operation steps of the slide operation and the actual number of operation steps of the swing operation are analyzed and the correction value is calculated. The calculation timing is not limited to this. For example, even when it is determined that the player is not playing the game (during the demonstration), the actual number of steps of the sliding motion and the swing motion is analyzed and the correction value is calculated. May be good. As a result, even if the number of motion steps of the slide motion or the swing motion changes during the game, the correction value according to the changed motion can be calculated in the demo production, so that the swing motion and the slide motion can be calculated. It is possible to further improve the operation quality in the effect operation in which the operation is compounded. Further, for example, the motion scenario of the slide motion may be corrected during the execution of the effect in which the slide motion and the swing motion are executed in combination. More specifically, for example, when the swing motion and the slide motion are executed in combination, the number of steps required for the first cycle of the swing motion is counted (or the operation time is counted). You may calculate the number of remaining operation steps (or operation time) required to perform the swing operation for a total of 3 cycles (3 times). Then, based on the number of remaining steps for performing the swinging motion of three cycles (three times) (that is, for executing the swinging motion of the remaining two cycles) and the number of remaining motion steps of the sliding motion. , May be configured to correct the operating speed of the sliding operation. More specifically, for example, when the number of operation steps of the slide operation is 70 and the operation of one cycle of the slide operation is completed, 80 steps (two cycles) of the swing operation remain. become. In this case, a value (80 steps / 70 steps) corrected by multiplying the operation speed of the subsequent slide operation by the ratio of the number of remaining operation steps of the slide operation and the number of remaining operation steps of the swing operation. × 100 pps) may be set to a new operating speed. Further, in the initial operation, the actual number of operation steps required for the swing operation and the actual number of operation steps required for the slide operation are determined in advance, and the correction value is calculated in consideration of the determination result. You may. Specifically, in the tilt direction setting process (see FIG. 154), this process determines whether or not the swing counter 223v is 1 (whether or not one cycle of the swing operation has ended). When it is determined that one cycle has been completed, the process of determining the number of remaining operation steps of the slide operation and the swing operation may be executed. Then, the operation speed of the slide operation may be corrected according to the calculated number of remaining operation steps. As a result, the slide motion can be corrected each time the effect of the slide motion and the swing motion are executed in combination, so that the slide motion can be more reliably reached at the overhang position. The swinging motion can be performed a specified number of times (3 times). Further, in the above case, the slide operation table 222c1 may be abolished. Then, based on the number of operation steps (or operation time) of the effect member 620 at the end of one cycle of the swing operation, the operation content of the support member 720 is calculated so as to match the remaining operation of the effect member 620. It may be configured as follows.

In this control example, the operation speed of the slide operation is corrected based on the correction value, but it may be configured to correct both the operation speed of the slide operation and the operation speed of the swing operation. good. Specifically, for example, the ratio between the actual number of operation steps of the slide operation and the design value is multiplied by the operation speed as the correction value of the slide operation, and the overhang position is reached when the operation as designed is executed. The time may be matched with the time to reach the overhang position in the actual operation. Specifically, for example, when the number of operation steps is 10% more than the design value, the increase in the number of steps is absorbed (offset) by the operation speed by increasing the operation speed by 10%, and the operation time as designed. It may be configured to reach the overhanging position with. Similarly, the correction value may be calculated from the actual number of operation steps of the swing operation, and the time until the swing operation is reciprocated three times may be matched with the operation at the design value. As a result, the movement of the accessory can be completed in the same operation time each time, and the same number of swinging movements can be reliably executed.

In this control example, when correcting the operation speed of the slide operation, the correction value was calculated by the ratio between the number of design operation steps and the actual number of operation steps, but instead of calculating the correction value Therefore, a plurality of operation scenarios may be prepared according to the deviation width between the number of design operation steps and the actual number of operation steps. Then, by determining the deviation width between the number of design operation steps and the actual number of operation steps, an operation scenario corresponding to the deviation width may be selected. As a result, when the slide operation is executed, it is not necessary to recalculate the operation speed from the correction value every time, and the operation scenario corresponding to the deviation width may be read and set. Therefore, the processing of the MPU 211 of the voice lamp control device 113 The load can be reduced.

In this control example, the correction value for correcting the operation content of the slide operation is calculated, but the correction value that can be selected may be specified in advance in the ROM 222 or the like. Then, a correction value corresponding to the deviation width between the number of design operation steps and the actual number of operation steps may be selected and used as the correction value when setting the slide operation. As a result, the correction value can be selected by a relatively light process of selecting the correction value corresponding to the deviation width instead of the process of calculating the correction value, so that the processing load of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reduced. be able to.

In this control example, the correction value is calculated based on the ratio of the actual number of steps required for the sliding operation and the swinging operation to the number of design steps (Type value), but this is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the time required for the sliding operation and the swinging operation may be measured, and the correction value may be calculated by the ratio with the design operation time. For example, the design operation time of the slide operation from the origin position to the overhang position by the support member 720 is 1.2 seconds (120 steps ÷ 100 pps), whereas it takes 1 to actually reach the overhang position. If it takes .5 seconds (when the required time is 1.25 times longer), 1.25 may be stored in the correction value storage area 223p as the correction value for the slide operation.

In this control example, the swingable direction specified in the swing area table 222d is determined every time the origin position of the swing operation is reached according to the number of steps of the slide operation of the support member 720, and after reaching the origin. It was configured to determine the swing direction, but it is not limited to this configuration. For example, the position coordinates of the effect member 620 including the slide position are calculated for each step of the swinging motion, and it is determined whether or not the effect member 620 fits in the region between the origin position and the overhang position. It may be configured as. More specifically, for example, when the effect member 620 performs a swinging motion to the right in the front view, the horizontal coordinates (coordinates in the slide operation direction) of the end points of the right end of the upper surface of the effect member 620 arranged on the far right side. May be configured to be calculated for each step. Then, when the calculated horizontal coordinates match the horizontal coordinates of the right end (10 cm to the right from the origin position) of the effect member 620 when both the effect member 620 and the support member 720 are at the origin position, the right direction is obtained. It may be configured to invert the swinging direction toward the origin (leftward when viewed from the front) while paying close attention to the swinging motion. Similarly, when the effect member 620 swings to the left in the front view, the horizontal coordinates (coordinates in the slide operation direction) of the end points of the left end of the upper surface of the effect member 620 arranged on the leftmost side are set by one step. It may be configured to be calculated for each. Then, when the effect member 620 is in the origin position and the support member 720 is in the overhang position and the horizontal coordinates of the left end of the effect member 620 (10 cm to the left from the overhang position) are matched, the swing to the left is achieved. It may be configured to invert the swing direction toward the origin (rightward when viewed from the front) while gazing at the movement.

Hereinafter, the method of calculating the horizontal coordinates will be described more specifically. In this modification, the width of the effect member 620 is 20 cm, the operating radius of the swing operation is 15 cm, and the rotation angle of the effect member 620 by performing the swing operation in one step of the operation of the effect member 620 is 6 degrees ( That is, 60 degrees in 10 steps), and the horizontal distance from the origin position to the overhang position is 60 cm (that is, 0.5 cm in one step). In this case, for example, when the 5-step effect member 620 is operated to the right, the effect member 620 rotates 30 degrees (6 degrees × 5 steps). As a result, the midpoint of the upper surface of the effect member 620 can be changed by 7.5 cm (15 steps as horizontal coordinates) in the right direction of the front view (15 cm × sin 30 °). Then, the horizontal coordinates of the right end points on the upper surface of the effect member 620 are about 8.7 cm (18 steps as horizontal coordinates) to the right side (10 cm × cos 30 °) further to the right side of the front view from the center of the upper surface. That is, the right end of the effect member 620 is the right end of the effect member 620 for 33 steps as the horizontal coordinates. Therefore, considering that the width of the right half of the effect member 620 at the origin position (inverted state) is 20 steps (10 cm), when the number of operation steps of the slide operation is 13 steps or less from the origin position, it moves to the right. The swinging motion of is stopped and the swinging direction is reversed to the left.

In this way, the number of sliding motion steps and the number of swing motion steps are converted into horizontal coordinates, and the swing direction is compared with the left and right horizontal coordinate thresholds (coordinates of the limit that does not interfere with the outer wall portion 212). By varying, even if the swinging motion and the sliding motion deviate from the design motion, the swinging motion can be operated within the range that can prevent (suppress) interference. Therefore, since it is possible to realize a more dynamic swinging motion, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In this control example, a method of correcting an operation scenario of an accessory in which an effect member 620 is provided above a support member 720 and a swing operation and a slide operation are performed integrally has been described, but the present invention can be applied. The accessory is not limited to this configuration. Any accessory that operates in conjunction with each other can be applied. For example, the same members as the effect member 620 are provided on the right side and the left side of the game board 13, and these members do not slide. It may be configured to perform swinging motions in synchronization with each other.

In this control example, the swingable direction is defined, and control is performed so that the effect member 620 and other configurations such as the outer wall portion 212 do not collide (interfere), but the swing operation is changed during the operation. The conditions for doing so are not limited to this. For example, it may be determined whether or not the timing of reaching the overhanging position by the sliding operation and the timing of reaching the origin position from the right side of the front view may be different. Then, when the timing is likely to shift, the operation content (set value) of the swinging motion is corrected, and the timing of reaching the overhang position by the sliding motion and the effect member 620 reach the origin position from the right side of the front view. You may make it coincide with the timing of doing. More specifically, for example, at a predetermined position between the origin position of the slide operation and the overhang position (for example, 10 steps before the overhang position), the number of remaining steps until the swing operation is completed is determined. To do. Then, it may be configured to correct the operation speed at which the swing operation is completed with the remaining number of steps. For example, if it is determined that only 5 steps are left up to the origin position of the swinging motion when the sliding motion has 10 steps remaining, the operating speed of the swinging motion is set to half (100 pps → 50 pps). , The swinging motion may be corrected to be executed exactly 5 steps while the sliding motion is executed 10 steps. Further, when the number of remaining steps of the swinging motion is smaller than that of the sliding motion, a weight may be inserted instead of changing the operating speed. The weight may be added only once, or may be added in multiple times. On the other hand, on the contrary, when it is determined that 20 steps of the swinging motion to the origin position of the swinging motion remain while the sliding motion has 10 steps remaining, the operating speed of the swinging motion is doubled (100 pps → By setting (200 pps), it may be corrected so that the swinging motion is executed exactly 20 steps while the sliding motion is executed 10 steps. Further, instead of determining the timing for correcting the operation content of the swing operation based on the number of operation steps of the slide operation, the slide position may be determined by a sensor or the like to determine whether or not to correct the swing operation. .. In this way, by matching the timing at which the sliding operation ends with the timing at which the swinging operation ends, it is possible to improve the appearance quality when the effect member 620 and the support member 720 operate in combination. it can. In addition, as an example of another condition for changing the swing motion during the operation, the position of the slide motion (the number of remaining motion steps) and the number of swing motions are determined during the slide motion, and the remaining motion is determined. It may be determined whether or not the predetermined number of swings (3 times) can be completed by the number of steps. Then, when it is determined that the number of swings is less than the predetermined number of swings, the motion speed of the swing motion may be changed to correct the motion to achieve the predetermined number of swings. The process of determining the number of remaining motion steps and the number of swings and the process of correcting the motion speed of the swing motion are the processes of S5901 in the slide motion process (see FIG. 156) in which the additional motion flag 223q is set. It may be executed after it is determined to be off (S5901: No).

In this control example, in the additional operation processing (see FIG. 153), when the output of the corresponding sensor does not become H even if the operation of one additional step is performed in the sensor direction, an error command is set to generate an error. Although it was configured to notify, the method of notifying an error is not limited to this. For example, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, and operates the accessory that has detected the abnormality for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) in a dedicated operation mode (for detecting an abnormality). It may be configured to keep the operation and stop the operation of the accessory that has not detected another abnormality. With this configuration, it is possible to easily visually determine which accessory has an abnormality. That is, the clerk in the hall or the like can easily determine that some abnormality has occurred in the accessory that continues to operate when the error is notified.

In this control example, it is assumed that the accessory (the effect member 620 and the support member 720) operates in combination, but instead of or in addition to this, the support member 720 and other configurations are used. May be linked and controlled. For example, the strut member 720 may be configured to switch the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 in conjunction with the sliding operation. In this case, a lighting pattern may be set according to the sliding operation of the support column member 720. Further, the lighting mode may be switched each time the support column member 720 returns to the origin position. For example, the lighting color of the illumination units 29 to 33 may be switched as red → green → blue → red ... each time the origin position and the overhang position are reciprocated once by the sliding operation. With this configuration, the lighting color set during the previous slide operation can be simply stored and switched according to the start of the slide operation, so the lighting control of the illumination units 29 to 33 is simplified. can do. Further, as compared with the case where the lighting pattern is switched according to the progress status of the slide operation, it is possible to suppress the deviation between the progress status of the slide operation and the switching timing of the lighting pattern. Therefore, it is possible to improve the appearance quality during the sliding operation. In addition, since the lighting color may be switched when the position returns to the origin position, the drive motor for sliding the strut member 720 may be changed, or the mechanism such as the gear ratio may be changed. Even if the round trip time is changed, the lighting control data before the change can be used as it is. That is, since the step of changing the lighting pattern according to the changed configuration can be omitted, the work of the designer can be reduced.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 173. In the first control example described above, when displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 or the sub display device 690 during a normal game, the capacity of the character ROM 234 is increased by diverting the images at the time of turning on various powers. The technology for reduction was explained.

On the other hand, in the third control example, a control method capable of further increasing the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect, which is one of the interesting effects executed by the sub display device 690, will be described. Although the details will be described later, the timing effect is an effect that suggests the timing of pressing (operating) the frame button 229 provided on the front frame 14 by the image displayed on the sub display device 690. It is a kind of hobby effect that is executed while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed. In this timing effect, points are added each time the timing suggested by the sub-display device 690 matches the timing when the player actually operates the frame button 229, and the points are acquired by the end of the timing effect. If the points are equal to or higher than the predetermined reference value (quota), the player is given a privilege.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that a frame button 229 is provided instead of the frame button 22, and the voice lamp control device 113 has. The configurations of the provided ROM 222 and RAM 223 have been partially changed, and some processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. is there. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 157. As shown in FIG. 157, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the frame button 229 is provided on the left side of the front view with respect to the ball lending operation unit 40, and the frame button 22 is deleted. The frame button 229 is composed of four types of buttons: an upper button UB, a right button RB, a left button LB, and a lower button DB. These four types of buttons are used in timing production. That is, the timing effect is configured to suggest the pressing (operation) timing of the frame button 229 and the type of button to be pressed (operated) (see FIGS. 163 and 164). Then, when the timing suggested by the effect matches the type of the button, points are added.

Next, a display mode of the timing effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 to 165. First, FIG. 163 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the sub-display device 690 when the timing effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 163, when the timing effect is executed, a plurality of display areas (display areas 901, 902, 903, 904a, 904b, 904c, 904d, 905) are displayed on the sub-display device 690.

The display areas 904a, 904b, 904c, 904d, and 905 displayed in the lower half of the display area of the sub-display device 690 suggest to the player when to press (operate) the frame button 229 and the type of button to be operated. Is the display area where the display is performed. As shown in FIG. 163, the display area 905 is composed of a vertically long rectangular shape pressing suggestion area 911a and four horizontally long rectangular shape scroll display areas 911b to 911e. The scroll display areas 911b to 911e are displayed vertically arranged in this order.

The scroll display areas 911b to 911e are configured so that various images can be scrolled and displayed in the left direction of the front view (direction of the pressing suggestion area 911a). As various images displayed by scrolling, as shown in FIG. 163, for example, scroll bars 912a to 912e, continuous hitting bars 913a, and the like are provided. Points are added by pressing a button of the corresponding type at the timing when various scroll-displayed images are scrolled to a position where they overlap with the pressing suggestion area 911a. The scroll bar is configured so that the corresponding points (10 points or 50 points) are added by pressing the corresponding button type once at the timing when the pressing suggestion area 911a overlaps. On the other hand, the continuous hit bar is configured so that the corresponding points (50 points) are added by pressing the corresponding button 10 times while overlapping the pressing suggestion area 911a.

Above the pressing suggestion area 911a, a balloon-type display area 901 pointing to the pressing suggestion area 911a is displayed. In this display area 901, the characters "Push the buttons at the timing when the bars overlap and aim for 1000 points!" Are displayed. Depending on the display content of the display area 901, points will be added if the frame button 229 is pressed at the timing when various images scrolled in each scroll display area 911b to 911e scroll to the position of the pressing suggestion area 911a. It can be easily understood by the player.

Further, a substantially rectangular display area 902 is displayed on the upper right of the sub display device 690. The display area 902 is acquired when a type of image that can be scroll-displayed in each scroll display area 911b to 911e and a button of the corresponding type are pressed (operated) at the timing when the image overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a. The correspondence with the points that can be done is displayed. Specifically, the white scroll bar is displayed as 50 points, the hatched scroll bar is displayed as 10 points, and the scroll bar with the characters "Continuous hit !!" is displayed. It is displayed that it is 50 points. By clearly indicating the correspondence between the image and the points in the display area 902, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from having doubts about the increase or decrease of the points, so that the player can safely produce the timing. You can play the game inside.

Below the display area 902, a horizontally long rectangular display area 903 is displayed. In this display area 903, the total points acquired in the timing production this time and the quota are displayed. In the example of FIG. 163 (a), the quota is 1000 points, whereas 100 points have been obtained so far. Therefore, the characters "points: 0100/1000" are displayed in the display area 902. Is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize the current point regarding the quota. Therefore, since the game can be performed aiming at the quota, the player's motivation to participate can be improved.

In this control example, when the quota is achieved in the timing effect, the current game state is notified as a privilege. In this control example, as in the first control example, a 2R probability variation jackpot is provided as a jackpot type. In addition, as a kind of loss, a small hit is provided for the same opening operation as the 2R probability variation jackpot, and it is not possible to distinguish whether the 2R probability variation jackpot was won or a small hit from the production and the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a. It is configured as follows. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the game state after the opening operation of 2R of the specific winning opening 65a is executed. Therefore, in this control example, as a privilege of the timing effect, if the quota is achieved at the end of the timing effect, the current game state (whether it is a probabilistic state of a special symbol or a low probability state) is notified. It is configured as follows. As a result, a player who wants to know the current game state can be actively participated in the timing production. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Also, by setting the privilege when the timing production is successful to the one that does not affect the game result (notification of the current game state), whether the privilege is given purely by the skill of the player's pressing (operation) timing. You can decide whether or not. On the other hand, if a quota (for example, a jackpot) whose result has already been decided at the start of fluctuation (before the timing production is started) is set as a privilege, the timing production is started. Before, the result of the timing effect (whether or not the mode for achieving the quota can be displayed) is determined. If there is a timing effect in which the quota cannot be achieved, there is a risk that the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect will be diminished. On the other hand, in this control example, the privilege given when the quota is achieved in the timing effect is set to "notification of the game state" which does not affect the game result. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not to grant the privilege purely according to the skill of pressing the frame button 229. That is, when the privilege is given, the player can have a stronger feeling that the privilege has been acquired by himself / herself. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production.

Circular display areas 904a to 904d are vertically arranged and displayed on the left side of the display area 905. The display areas 904a to 904d are displayed so that their vertical positions are substantially the same as those of the scroll display areas 911b to 911e. Further, inside these display areas 904a to 904d, the characters "upper", "right", "left", and "lower" are displayed, respectively. With these characters, the player can easily recognize the button type corresponding to the scroll display areas 911b to 911e having substantially the same vertical position as the display areas 904a to 904d. That is, it is recognized that the scroll display area 911b whose vertical position is substantially the same as the display area 904a on which the character "upper" is displayed is a display area for suggesting the pressing (operation) timing of the upper button UB. Can be done. Similarly, the scroll display area 911c suggests the pressing (operation) timing of the right button RB, the scroll display area 911d suggests the pressing (operation) timing of the left button LB, and the scroll display area 911e suggests the lower button DB. It is possible to easily recognize that the timing of pressing (operation) of is suggested.

By executing the timing effect, the frame button 229 can be operated with the aim of achieving the quota, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 163 (b) and 164 (a), a display mode when the operation of the frame button 229 is detected in the timing effect will be described. First, FIG. 163 (a) shows a display mode in which the frame button 229 can be pressed (points can be obtained) at the timing when the scroll-displayed image in the timing effect overlaps the press suggestion region 911a. ing.

FIG. 163 (b) shows the display contents when the player presses the upper button UB at the timing when the white scroll bar 912a scrolled and displayed in the slide display area 911b overlaps with the pressing suggestion area 911a. .. As shown in FIG. 163 (b), when it is detected that the player presses the upper button UB, the display area 904a with the character "up" (corresponding to the upper button UB) lights up. As a result, the player can be made aware that the pachinko machine 10 has normally detected the operation (pressing) of the player, so that the game can be performed during the timing production with greater peace of mind.

Further, on the left side of the display areas 904a to 904d, a display area 921 is formed to indicate that the player has pressed (operated) the frame button 229 in a timely manner. Since the characters "GREAT" are displayed in the display area 921, the player can easily recognize that the operation timing of the frame button 229 is correct. Further, below the display area 921, a character 922 indicating a point given by the successful pressing is displayed. The character "+50" 922 makes it easy for the player to recognize the points earned. In addition, the display of the display area 903 is updated according to the acquired points (0100/1000 → 0150/1000). From these display contents, it is possible to make the player recognize that both the timing of pressing the frame button 229 and the button type match (successfully pressed). In addition, the points earned (granted) and the total points up to now can be easily confirmed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 164 (a), the display contents when the timing of pressing the button deviates from the suggestion display area 911a will be described. FIG. 164 (a) is a diagram showing the display contents when the press of the upper button UB is detected before the scroll bar 912a reaches the press suggestion region 911a. Also in this case, the display area 904a with the character "up" (corresponding to the upper button UB) is lit in order to notify that the pressing of the upper button UB is normally detected.

Further, on the left side of the display area 904a, a display area 921 is formed to indicate that the player has failed to press (operate) the frame button 229. Since the characters "BAD" are displayed in the display area 921, the player can easily recognize that the pressing (operation) timing of the frame button 229 is incorrect. Further, below the display area 921, a character 924 indicating that a penalty has been imposed due to the failure to press is displayed. The character "-10" 924 makes it easy to recognize that the points have been subtracted due to the failure of pressing. Therefore, since the frame button 229 can be operated more carefully, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect. In addition, the display of the display area 903 is updated according to the subtracted points (0100/1000 → 0090/1000). From these display contents, it is possible to make the player recognize that the frame button 229 has failed to be pressed. In addition, the subtracted points and the total points up to now can be easily confirmed.

Next, examples of modes having different difficulty levels will be described. Although the details will be described later, in this control example, when executing the timing effect, the difficulty level of the timing effect to be executed this time can be determined from a plurality of difficulty levels. In addition, the determined difficulty level is not fixed, and may be reviewed in the middle of the production depending on the progress of the timing production, the participation status of the player in the timing production, and the like.

FIG. 164 (b) is a diagram illustrating an mode of timing effect having a high degree of difficulty. As shown in FIG. 164 (b), in this modified example, the higher the difficulty level, the higher the appearance rate of the scroll bars (scroll bars 915a to 915e in which 10 points are given when the pressing is successful) with few points. Become. That is, the quota cannot be achieved unless the frame button 229 is pressed more and more accurately. In addition, the higher the difficulty level, the faster the scroll speed. As a result, it is difficult to match the timing of pressing the frame button 229. By providing timing effects having different difficulty levels, it is possible to deal with both a player who is good at pressing the frame button 229 at the same timing and a player who is not good at pressing the frame button 229. That is, the difficulty level can be changed according to the skill of the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 165, a display mode when notifying the result of the timing effect will be described. FIG. 165 (a) shows a display displayed on the sub-display device 690 when the quota of 1000 points is achieved (for example, 1200 points are acquired) in the timing effect executed during the probability variation state of the special symbol. It is a figure exemplifying the contents. As shown in FIG. 165 (a), when it is determined that the timing effect is completed and the quota is achieved, a result notification area 916 for notifying the result of the timing effect is formed inside the display area 905. Will be done. As a result, the characters "The quota has been achieved !! The current state has changed !!" are displayed in the notification area. By this display, it is possible to make the player recognize that the current gaming state is the probabilistic state of the special symbol. In the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, the character "current state is low probability ..." is displayed instead of the character "current state is probable change !!".

On the other hand, FIG. 165 (b) illustrates the display content displayed on the sub-display device 690 when the quota of 1000 points is not reached (for example, only 600 points can be obtained) in the timing effect. It is a figure. As shown in FIG. 165 (b), even when it is determined that the timing effect has ended and the quota has not been achieved, a result notification area 916 for notifying the result of the timing effect is provided inside the display area 905. It is formed. As a result, the characters "Sorry that the quota has not been achieved ..." are displayed in the notification area. That is, only the fact that the quota could not be achieved by the timing effect is notified, and the current game state is not notified (the privilege is not given).

In this way, by achieving the quota in the timing production, the current game state is notified in the result notification area 916, so that the player who wants to know the current game state is actively participated in the timing production. Can be done.

In this control example, the notification of the game state is set as a privilege when the score is achieved, but the privilege in the timing production is not limited to this. Any privilege that does not depend on the game result determined before the execution of the timing effect is determined. For example, by achieving the quota, the display mode of the subsequent display effect (variable pattern effect) is special. It may be configured to change to the embodiment. With this configuration, it is possible to actively participate in the timing effect in order to see the display effect in a special mode.

In this control example, when the difficulty level is changed, the type and number of scroll bars and the scroll speed are changed, but the method of changing the difficulty level is not limited to this. For example, the quota points may be increased as the difficulty level increases. Further, for example, as the difficulty level increases, the types of buttons used may increase.

In this control example, points are added by detecting 10 presses while the continuous hit bar overlaps with the press suggestion area 911a, but the number of presses is not limited to 10 times. Absent. It may be set to a number less than 10 times, or it may be set to a large number of times. Further, the number of presses may be changed according to the difficulty level, and for example, the number of presses may be increased as the difficulty level increases. This makes it possible to have a variety of methods for changing the difficulty level.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 162. FIG. 158 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 158, in this control example, the frame button 229 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. The frame button 229 is provided with four types of buttons: an upper button UB, a right button RB, a left button LB, and a lower button DB. As described above, these four types of buttons are used in timing effects (see FIGS. 163 and 164).

Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 159 (a). In addition to the configuration of ROM 222 in the first control example, the ROM 222 in the present control example is provided with a timing effect selection table 222d and a pressing period table 222e.

The timing effect selection table 222d is a data table in which the mode of the timing effect, which is a kind of the interest effect executed during the variable display of the special symbol, is defined. When executing the timing effect, the timing effect selection table 222d is referred to, and the display mode (difficulty level) of the sub display device 690 during the timing effect is set. The difficulty level means the ease of timing adjustment when the frame button 229 is pressed (operated) according to the timing and button type suggested by the sub-display device 690. The higher the difficulty level, the more severe the timing of pressing (operating) the frame button 229, or the more severe the pressing (operation) of more button types in a short period of time (see FIG. 164 (b)).

Further, the timing effect of this control example is divided into three types of periods (early stage period, middle stage period, and final stage period), and the display mode can be set at different timings for each period. .. More specifically, at the start of the timing effect, the mode of the early stage period is selected from the timing effect selection table 222d, and the early period of the timing effect is started. Then, at the end of the early stage period, the mode of the middle stage period is selected from the timing effect selection table 222d, and the middle stage period of the timing effect is started. Further, at the end of the middle stage period, the mode of the final stage period is selected from the timing effect selection table 222d, and the final stage period of the timing effect is started.

The details of the timing effect table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 160. As shown in FIG. 160, in the timing effect table 222d, the effect mode of the timing effect is defined in association with the value of the difficulty counter 223γ indicating the difficulty level of the timing effect. More specifically, as an aspect of the early stage period, the early stage effect for difficulty level 5 is associated with the value "4" of the difficulty level counter 223γ, and the difficulty level 4 is associated with the value "3" of the difficulty level counter 223γ. The early stage production is associated. Although not shown in the illustration, similarly, the early stage effect for difficulty level 3 is associated with the value "2" of the difficulty level counter 223γ, and the value "1" of the difficulty level counter 223γ is used for difficulty level 2. An early stage effect is associated, and an early stage effect for difficulty level 1 is associated with a value "0" of the difficulty counter 223γ. The larger the difficulty level, the higher the difficulty level. That is, the early stage production for difficulty level 5 is the mode with the highest difficulty level, and the early stage production for difficulty level 1 is the mode with the lowest difficulty level.

The mode of the midfield period is also defined. That is, as an aspect of the mid-stage period, the mid-stage effect for difficulty level 5 is associated with the value "4" of the difficulty counter 223γ, and the mid-stage effect for difficulty level 4 is associated with the value "3" of the difficulty counter 223γ. The value "2" of the difficulty counter 223γ is associated with the midfield effect for difficulty level 3, and the value "1" of the difficulty counter 223γ is associated with the midfield effect for difficulty 2. The midfield effect for difficulty level 1 is associated with the value "0" of the difficulty level counter 223γ.

Furthermore, the aspect of the final period is also defined. That is, as an aspect of the middle stage period, the final stage effect for difficulty level 5 is associated with the value "4" of the difficulty counter 223γ, and the final stage effect for difficulty level 4 is associated with the value "3" of the difficulty level counter 223γ. The value "2" of the difficulty counter 223γ is associated with the final stage effect for difficulty level 3, and the value "1" of the difficulty level counter 223γ is associated with the final stage effect for difficulty level 2. The final stage effect for difficulty level 1 is associated with the value "0" of the difficulty level counter 223γ.

Although details will be described later, the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is updated in a timely manner according to the game situation of the player. For example, when setting the mode of the middle stage period, if it is determined that the number of points earned by the player in the early stage period is relatively small (for example, less than 200), the value of the difficulty counter is subtracted by 1 and subtracted. The effect mode of the difficulty level corresponding to the later value is set. As a result, the mode of the middle stage period can be set to a mode in which the difficulty level is lower than that of the early stage period. Therefore, the player cannot obtain points for a long time, so that he / she can participate in the production during the timing production. It is possible to prevent (suppress) giving up. On the contrary, when it is determined that the player has acquired a relatively large number of points in the early stage, 1 is added to the value of the difficulty counter 223γ. As a result, when a player who is good at timing production plays a game, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from being delayed due to the continuation of a mode that is less difficult for the player.

As described above, since it is possible to select an effect having a different difficulty level from the timing effect selection table 222d according to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ, it is possible to diversify the mode of the timing effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. Further, by setting different difficulty levels, it is possible to set the difficulty level according to the skill of each player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the timing production can be improved.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 159 (a). The pressing period table 222e determines whether or not it is determined that when the frame button 229 is pressed, the image such as the scroll bar is pressed (successfully pressed) at the timing of 911 overlapping the pressing suggestion area 911a. It is a data table specified in association with the elapsed time since the start of. When any of the buttons (up button UB, right button RB, left button LB, down button DB) constituting the frame button 229 is pressed during the execution of the timing effect, this pressing period table 222e is referred to, and this time. It is determined whether the button press of is successful or unsuccessful. Then, if it succeeds, the effect of adding points is executed (see FIG. 163 (b)), and if it fails, the effect of subtracting points (penalty is imposed) is executed (FIG. 164 (a). )reference). The details of the pressing period table 222e will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162.

FIG. 161 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pressing period table 222e. As shown in FIG. 161, as the pressing period table 222e, a plurality of data tables according to the set period and the difficulty level are defined. For example, as a table corresponding to the early stage production for difficulty level 1 set in the early stage period, the table 222e1 for early stage difficulty level 1 is provided. When the early stage effect for difficulty level 1 is set, the table 222e1 for early stage difficulty level 1 is set as the corresponding pressing period table. Similarly, the same applies to the early stage production for difficulty level 2 to the early stage production for difficulty level 5, and as the corresponding pressing period tables, the early stage difficulty level 2 table 222e2 to the early stage difficulty level 5 table 222e5 are defined. ing.

Further, the middle stage period is the same as the early stage period. Specifically, as a pressing period table corresponding to the middle stage production for difficulty level 1 to the middle stage production for difficulty level 5, the table for middle stage difficulty level 1 2226 to the middle stage difficulty level A table 222e10 for 5 is provided.

On the other hand, the final stage has a different structure from the early stage and the middle stage. That is, a plurality of pressing period tables are associated with the effect mode for the final period of 1. Here, the plurality of pressing period tables mean tables having different widths (period lengths) of success and detection. Even if the effect for the final period of the same aspect is displayed, the difficulty level can be made different by making the period detected as successful different. That is, the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be reduced because the difficulty level can be varied without increasing the display mode of the timing effect.

A table having a wide range of success is selected when it is determined that the player has acquired few points (for example, less than 600 points) by the time the final stage is reached. If too few points are earned by the end of the game, the player may give up on achieving the quota in the timing production. Therefore, in this control example, when setting the final stage period, it is determined whether or not the points are less than 600 points, and if it is less than 600 points, a pressing period table having a wide range of detection as success is selected. It is configured. As a result, the range of success and detection becomes wider, so that the player can more easily obtain points, so that he / she can participate in the timing production without giving up until the end.

On the other hand, a table having a narrow range of detection as success is selected when it is determined that the player has acquired a large number of points (for example, 900 points or more) by the time the final stage is reached. If too many points are earned by the end of the final period, the player may feel a margin and the operation of the frame button 229 during the final period may become complicated. Therefore, in this control example, by selecting a table having a narrow range detected as success, it is possible to execute the operation of the frame button 229 while giving a feeling of tension until the end of the timing effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production.

When the production of the final period corresponding to difficulty 1 to difficulty 3 is selected, the pressing period table in which the range detected as success is a normal range and the pressing range in which success is detected are relatively wide. Period table and may be selected. For example, when the final stage production for difficulty level 1 is selected as the production mode for the final stage period, either the final stage difficulty level 1 normal range table 222e13 or the final stage difficulty level 1 wide range table 222e18 is selected as the pressing period table. Be selected.

On the other hand, when the production of the final period corresponding to the difficulty level 4 and the difficulty level 5 is selected, the range detected as success is the pressing period table having a normal width and the range detected as success. In addition to a relatively wide press period table, a press period table with a relatively narrow range of success detection may be selected. For example, when the final stage production for difficulty level 5 is selected as the production mode for the final stage period, the final stage difficulty level 5 narrow range table 222e13, the final stage difficulty level 5 normal range table 222e17, and the final stage difficulty level are used as the pressing period table. 5 Wide range table 222e22 may be selected.

It should be noted that the timing effect is configured to select the pressing period table whose range of detection as success is narrow only when the effect of the final period corresponding to the difficulty level 4 or the difficulty level 5 is selected. This is because there is a high possibility that a good player is playing the game. When a player who is good at timing production is playing a game, there is a risk that the timing production in the normal detection range may seem too easy. Therefore, in this case, in addition to displaying in a highly difficult mode, the range for detecting success is also narrowed so that even a player who is good at timing production can enjoy it. As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the timing production can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 162, the specific contents of each table constituting the pressing period table 222e will be described by taking the table 222e3 for the early difficulty level 3 as an example. The early stage effect for difficulty level 3 is set as the effect mode in accordance with the setting of the table 222e3 for the early stage difficulty level 3, and the display mode of the early stage effect for difficulty level 3 is shown in FIG. 162 (a). ) Is the display mode shown in. Therefore, in explaining the table 222e for difficulty level 3 in the early stage, FIG. 163 will also be referred to in a timely manner.

FIG. 162 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the table 222e3 for the early stage difficulty level 3. As shown in FIG. 162, in the early stage difficulty level 3 table 222e3, the type of pressing period (value of the timing effect pointer 223δ that is periodically updated) is associated with the elapsed time from the start of the timing effect. Whether it is a success period, a failure period, or a continuous hit period) is specified. Further, the types of the pressing period are defined as a pressing period for the upper button UB, a pressing period for the right button RB, a pressing period for the left button LB, and a pressing period for the lower button DB, respectively.

Specifically, the elapsed time from the start of the timing effect is in the range of 0 ms to 1499 milliseconds (1.499 seconds), and the failure period is associated with the pressing period for all button types. .. If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined to be a failure. Further, in the range of the elapsed time in the range of 1500 milliseconds to 1699 milliseconds, the success period is associated with the pressing period for the upper button UB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated with the pressing period for other button types. Therefore, in this period, when the upper button UB is operated, it is determined as success and points are added, and when another button is operated, it is determined as failure. As for the display contents of the sub display device 690 during this period, only the scroll bar (scroll bar 912a in FIG. 163) that is scroll-displayed in the scroll display area 911b overlaps the press suggestion area 911a, and the other scroll display area 911b. The scroll bar displayed in scrolls in ~ 911e displays a state in which the press suggestion area 911a has not been reached.

In addition, the elapsed time in the range of 1700 milliseconds to 2199 seconds is associated with a failure period as a pressing period for all button types. If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined to be a failure. Then, in the range of the elapsed time in the range of 2200 milliseconds to 2399 milliseconds, the success period is associated with the pressing period for the lower button DB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated with the pressing period for other button types. Therefore, in this period, when the lower button DB is pressed, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and when another button is pressed, it is determined to be a failure. As for the display contents of the sub display device 690 during this period, only the scroll bar (scroll bar 912e in FIG. 163) that is scroll-displayed in the scroll display area 911e overlaps the press suggestion area 911a, and the other scroll display area 911a. The scroll bar displayed in scrolls in ~ 911d is displayed in a state in which the press suggestion area 911a has not been reached.

The elapsed time in the range of 2400 milliseconds to 2999 seconds is associated with a failure period as a pressing period for all button types. If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined to be a failure. Then, in the range of the elapsed time of 3000 milliseconds to 3199 milliseconds, the success period is associated with the pressing period for the right button RB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated with the pressing period for other button types. Therefore, in this period, when the right button RB is pressed, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and when another button is pressed, it is determined to be a failure. As for the display contents of the sub display device 690 during this period, only the scroll bar (scroll bar 912b in FIG. 163) that is scroll-displayed in the scroll display area 911c overlaps the press suggestion area 911a, and the other scroll display area 911b. , 911d, and 911e, the scroll bar displayed by scrolling is displayed in a state where the pressing suggestion area 911a has not been reached.

The elapsed time in the range of 3200 milliseconds to 3799 seconds is associated with a failure period as a pressing period for all button types. If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined to be a failure. Then, in the range of the elapsed time in the range of 3800 milliseconds to 4999 milliseconds, the continuous hitting period is associated with the pressing period for the upper button UB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated with the pressing period for other button types. Therefore, in this period, when the upper button UB is pressed 10 times, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and when another button is operated, it is determined to be a failure. As for the display contents of the sub display device 690 during this period, only the continuous hit bar (continuous hit bar 913a in FIG. 163) scrolled and displayed in the scroll display area 911b overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a, and the other scroll display area 911c. The scroll bar displayed in scrolls in ~ 911e displays a state in which the press suggestion area 911a has not been reached.

In the range of the elapsed time from 5000 milliseconds to 5199 milliseconds, the continuous hitting period is associated with the pressing period for the upper button UB, and the success period is associated with the pressing period for the right button RB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated with the pressing period for other button types. Therefore, in this period, when the upper button UB is pressed a total of 10 times or when the right button RB is pressed, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and when other buttons are operated, it is determined to be a failure. To. In this period, the display contents of the sub display device 690 include a continuous hit bar (continuous hit bar 913a in FIG. 163) that is scroll-displayed in the scroll display area 911b and a scroll bar that is scroll-displayed in the scroll display area 911d (FIG. The scroll bar 912c) in 163 overlaps with the pressing suggestion area 911a, and the scroll bars displayed in scrolls in the other scroll display areas 911d and 911e are displayed in a state where they have not reached the pressing suggestion area 911a.

Although the illustration is omitted, the pressing period according to the button type is also specified for the elapsed time thereafter. By using the table 222e3 for difficulty level 3 in the early stage, the pressing period can be updated in synchronization with the display mode of the timing effect. Since the other tables specified in the pressing period table 222e have the same configuration, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 159 (b). In addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example, the RAM 223 in this control example includes a timing effect permission flag 223α, a latent probability change flag 223β, a difficulty level counter 223γ, a timing effect pointer 223δ, and a continuous hit count counter 223ε. A continuous hit success flag 223ζ and a score counter 223η are provided.

The timing effect permission flag 223α is a flag indicating whether or not it is possible to set a timing effect as an entertaining effect when selecting a mode of variable display. When the timing effect permission flag 223α is on, it indicates that the timing effect can be set as a mode of the variation effect, and when it is off, it indicates that the timing effect cannot be set.

Here, as described above, in this control example, it is difficult to identify from the outside (from the player's point of view) whether the 2R probability variation big hit or the small hit. That is, when the specific winning opening 65a performs the 2R opening operation, it may be a 2R probability variation jackpot and shift to a probability variation state of a special symbol, or it is merely a small hit and the game state is not changed. I can't tell if it was. In other words, if the opening operation of 2R by the specific winning opening 65a has never been executed after the jackpot A or jackpot B is completed, the current gaming state is clear to the player. Therefore, even if the timing effect is executed in this case, there is a possibility that the player does not want to obtain the privilege of notifying the game state and does not participate in the timing effect. Therefore, in this control example, if the opening operation of 2R by the specific winning opening 65a is never executed after the jackpot A or jackpot B is executed, the timing effect is set to off by setting the timing effect to off. It is configured so that it is not selected (see S1827 in FIG. 173).

Further, the timing effect permission flag 223α is set to be turned on by becoming a 2R probability variation big hit or a small hit (see S1824 in FIG. 173). Once the timing effect is executed, the timing effect permission flag 223α is reset to off (see FIG. 6412). As a result, the opportunity for the timing effect to be executed can be limited to only once for each 2R opening operation by the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, since it is possible to work on the timing production more seriously, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production.

The probability variation state flag 223β is a flag for determining whether or not the special symbol is in the high probability state. When the probability change state flag 223β is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probability change state, and when it is off, it indicates that it is not in the probability change state. This probability variation state flag 223β is set to on when a variation pattern command corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot (big hit A) or the 2R probability variation jackpot (big hit C) is received (see S1823 and S1826 in FIG. 173), and the 16R time reduction. It is set to off when a variation pattern command corresponding to the jackpot (big hit B) is received (see S1826 in FIG. 173). When the quota is achieved in the timing effect and the current gaming state is notified, the gaming state is notified with reference to the probability variation state flag 223β.

The difficulty level counter 223γ is a counter for identifying the difficulty level of the effect set in each period of the timing effect (early stage period, middle stage period, final stage period). If the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is 0, the effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 1 is selected, if the value is 1, the effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 2 is selected, and if the value is 2, the effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 2 is selected. , The production mode corresponding to the difficulty level 3 is selected. If the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is 3, the effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 4 is selected, and if the value is 4, the effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 5 is selected.

The initial value of the difficulty counter 223γ is set to 0. That is, it is reset to 0 when the power is turned on. In addition, when setting the production mode during the middle period of the timing production, if it is determined that the player has acquired a relatively large number of points (the difficulty level is too low for the player currently playing), 1 is added to the counter value (see S6203 in FIG. 170). As a result, the difficulty level can be made higher as the effect mode selected in the middle stage period than in the effect mode in the early stage period. On the other hand, in setting the production mode during the middle stage period, if it is determined that the number of points earned by the player is small (the difficulty level is too high for the player currently playing), the counter value is subtracted by 1. (See S6207 in FIG. 170). As a result, the difficulty level can be made lower than that of the production mode in the early stage period as the production mode selected in the middle stage period. In this way, by using the difficulty level counter 223γ, the difficulty level can be changed according to the skill of the player, so that the difficulty level can be adjusted to be more suitable for the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production.

The timing effect pointer 223δ is a pointer for indicating the elapsed time from the start of the timing effect, and is updated every 1 millisecond. During the execution of the timing effect, the timing effect pointer 223δ is referred to, and the type of the pressing period is determined. The timing effect pointer 223δ is periodically updated, for example, in the main process.

The continuous hit count counter 223ε is a counter for counting how many times the corresponding button is pressed during the continuous hit period of the timing effect. Whether or not the repeated hits are successful is determined according to the value of the continuous hit count counter 223ε. The continuous hit count counter 223ε is incremented by 1 each time the corresponding button operation is detected during the continuous hit period (see S6007 in FIG. 168), and is reset to 0 when the specified number of repeated hits is reached during the continuous hit period (FIG. 168). See S6011). It is also reset to 0 at the end of the continuous hitting period. The number of repeated hits counter 223ε can be used to accurately determine the number of repeated hits.

The continuous hit success flag 223ζ is a flag indicating whether or not the predetermined number of repeated hits has been reached during the continuous hit period, and if it is on, it indicates that the number of repeated hits has been reached. On the other hand, if it is off, it indicates that the number of repeated hits has not been reached or the period of repeated hits has not been reached. The continuous hit success flag 223ζ is set to on when it is determined that the specified number of repeated hits has been reached (see S6011 in FIG. 168), and is set to off when the continuous hit period ends. While the continuous hit success flag 223ζ is on, even if the button corresponding to the set continuous hit period is continuously pressed more than a specified number of times, it is controlled so as not to be determined as a failure. As a result, the player can be made to hit repeatedly without worrying about the number of repeated hits.

The score counter 223η is a counter for counting the points (scores) acquired by the player in the timing effect of 1. At the end of the timing effect, the value of the score counter 223η is compared with the quota of 1000 points, and it is determined whether or not the quota has been achieved. The score counter 223η is updated every time the pressing of the frame button 229 is detected during the timing effect (see S6010, S6014, and S6016 in FIG. 168).

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, the timed change of the display mode when the fluctuation pattern in which the timing effect is set is executed will be described. First, as a premise, the timing effect has a certain probability (for example, 10) when the timing effect permission flag 223α is turned on and a variation effect with a variation time of 30 seconds or more (a variation effect in which reach occurs) is selected. It is a production that is selected with a% probability).

As shown in FIG. 166, when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the variable effect in which the timing effect is set, the reach effect is generated in the third symbol display device 81. Then, when 5 seconds have passed from the occurrence of the reach effect (15 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation), the effect mode of the early stage period is selected, and the timing effect of the selected effect mode is started on the sub display device 690. Will be done.

When 5 seconds have passed since the timing production was started (20 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation), the early stage period ends, the production mode of the middle stage period is selected, and the middle stage period is started based on the selection contents. .. Furthermore, when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the middle stage period (25 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation), the middle stage period ends, the production mode of the final stage period is selected, and the final stage period starts based on the selection contents. .. Then, when 2 seconds have passed from the start of the final stage period, the final stage period ends and the notification of the result (whether or not the quota is achieved) of the timing effect of this time is set. This notification is performed for 1 second.

<About the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 173, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. First, FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example.

Of these main processes, the processes S1501 to S1511 and S1513 to S1520 are the same as the processes S1501 to S1511 and S1513 to S1520 executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) in the first control example, respectively. The process is executed. Further, in the main process in the third control example, when the process of S1510 is completed, the timing effect process (S1541) for performing various settings during the timing effect is executed, and the process shifts to S1511. In the process of S1511, the same process as the command determination process (S1511) in the first control example is executed, and then the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 109) is replaced with the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 109) in the first control example. S1542) is executed. When the variation display setting process 2 is completed, the processes after S1513 are executed as in the first control example.

Here, the details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1507) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 167) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 168. The frame button input monitoring / effect processing itself was also executed in the main processing (see FIG. 106) in the first control example, but since the detailed description thereof has been omitted, it will be described again.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1507), first, it is determined whether or not the timing effect is in progress (S6001), and if it is determined that the timing effect is not in progress (S6001: No), this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing is being produced (S6001: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the press of the operation button (frame button 229) is detected (S6002). Then, when it is determined that the pressing of the operation button (frame button 229) is not detected (S6002: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the press of the operation button (frame button 229) is detected in the process of S6002 (S6002: Yes), the press period table 222e corresponding to the type of the button for which the press is detected is read (S6003). After that, the pressing period type is specified based on the read pressing period table 222e and the value of the timing effect pointer 223δ (S6004).

When the number of processes of S6004 is increased, it is next determined whether or not it is a continuous hitting period (S6005), and if it is determined that it is a continuous hitting period (S6005: Yes), then whether or not the continuous hitting success flag 223ζ is on (S6006). When it is determined that the continuous hit success flag 223ζ is on (S6007: Yes), it means that the frame button has been pressed a predetermined number of times (10 times) during the continuous hit period, and the number of repeated hits needs to be counted. Since there is no such thing, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6006, when it is determined that the continuous hit success flag 223ζ is off (S6006: No), 1 is added to the continuous hit count counter 223ε (S6007), and whether or not the value after addition is 10 or more. Is determined (S6008). That is, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number of times (10 times) of repeated hits has been achieved in one continuous hit period. In the process of S6008, when it is determined that the value of the repeated hit count counter 223ε after addition is smaller than 10 (S6008: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the updated repeated hit count counter 223ε is 10 or more (S6008: Yes), it means that the predetermined number of repeated hits has been achieved, so a display success effect command is set. As a result (S6009), an effect corresponding to the success of repeated hits is set, and 50 is added to the score counter 223η as points (scores) corresponding to the success of repeated hits (S6010). After that, the continuous hit count counter 223ε is reset, the continuous hit success flag 223ζ is set to ON (S6011), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S6005, when it is determined that it is not the continuous hitting period (S6005: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the pressing success period (S6012), and it is not the pressing success period (pressing failure period). If it is determined (S6012: No), a display failure effect command is set (S6013). By this display failure command, an effect of notifying the player that the pressing timing of the frame button 229 deviates from the timing suggested by the sub-display device 690 is displayed (see FIG. 164 (a)). By notifying the failure of the pressing, the player can be given an opportunity to correct the pressing timing of the frame button 229, and the next pressing can be performed more carefully. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate. When the process of S6013 is completed, 10 is subtracted from the score counter 223η (S6014) as a penalty for the failure of pressing, and this process is terminated. In the process of S6014, if the value of the score counter is already 0, the points are not subtracted.

On the other hand, in the process of S6012, when it is determined that the pressing success period is reached (S6012: Yes), the player is notified that the pressing is successful by setting the display success effect command (S6015) (FIG. See 163 (b)). By this notification, the player can recognize the successful timing, so that the frame button 229 can be operated at the same timing next time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate. Then, points (scores) corresponding to the types of bars overlapping the pressing suggestion region 911a when the pressing is successful are added to the success score counter 223η (S6016), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the details of the timing effect processing (S1541) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 167) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 169. As described above, this timing effect processing (S1541) is a process for performing various settings during the timing effect.

In this timing effect processing (S1541), first, it is determined whether or not the timing effect is set (S6101), and if it is determined that the timing effect is not set (S6101: No), this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timing effect is set (S6101: Yes), then it is determined whether or not 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (S6102), and it is determined that 15 seconds have elapsed. (S6102: Yes) means that it is the start timing of the timing effect. Therefore, in order to determine the mode of the timing effect this time, first, the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is read out (S6103).

When the processing of S6103 is completed, the effect mode (difficulty level) corresponding to the read counter value is then selected from the timing effect selection table 222d (see FIG. 160) (S6104). For example, if the difficulty counter 223γ is 4, the early stage effect for difficulty level 5 is selected, and if the difficulty level counter 223γ is 1, the early stage effect for difficulty level 2 is selected. Then, a display early stage mode command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect mode selected in the process of S6104 is set (S6105). By receiving this display early stage mode command, the display control device 114 starts the timing effect of the corresponding difficulty level in the sub display device 690.

When the processing of S6105 is completed, the table corresponding to the value of the difficulty counter 223γ read in S6103 is read from the pressing period table 222e (S6106), and the read table is stored in the pressing period storage area (S6107). This process ends. This pressing period storage area is provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 (not shown). In the processing of S6004 of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see FIG. 168), the pressing period table 222e stored in the pressing period storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 229 is successful. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S6102, when it is determined that 15 seconds have not passed since the start of the fluctuation (S6102: No), it is determined whether or not the timing is 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (S6108). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to shift to the middle period of the timing effect. In the process of S6108, if it is determined that 20 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation (it is the timing to shift to the middle stage period) (S6108: Yes), the middle stage setting process for setting the mode of the middle stage period is executed. (S6109), this process is terminated. The details of this middle stage setting process (S6109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 170.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6108, when it is determined that 20 seconds have not elapsed from the start of fluctuation (not the transition timing to the middle stage period) (S6108: No), then 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation. Whether or not it is determined (S6110). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the transition timing from the middle stage period to the final stage period. In the process of S6110, when it is determined that 25 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation (S6110: Yes), the final stage setting process for setting the effect mode of the final stage period is executed (S6111), and this process is terminated. Details of this final stage setting process (S6111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 171.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6110, when it is determined that the timing does not elapse 25 seconds from the start of fluctuation (S6110: No), then it is determined whether or not the timing is 27 seconds elapsed from the start of fluctuation (S6112). .. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to set the notification effect (notification mode) for notifying the result of the timing effect. In the process of S6112, when it is determined that the timing is 27 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (S6112: Yes), the notification mode setting process for setting the notification effect (notification mode) for notifying the result of the timing effect is performed. Execute (S6113) and end this process. Details of this notification mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 172.

On the other hand, if it is determined that 27 seconds have not passed since the start of the fluctuation (S6112: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the continuous striking period (S6114). If it is determined that it is not the end timing of the continuous hitting period (S6114: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the continuous hitting period (S6114: Yes), the continuous hitting success flag 223ζ is set to off (S6115), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 170, the details of the middle stage setting process (S1507) executed in the timing effect process (see S1541 and FIG. 169) will be described. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing this middle stage setting process (S1507). In the middle stage setting process (S6109), first, the value of the score counter 223η is read out (S6201), and it is determined whether or not the value of the score counter 223η is larger than 600 (S6202).

If it is determined that the read value is larger than 600 (S6202: Yes), a relatively large number of points can be obtained in the early stage, and the difficulty level may be too easy for the player currently playing. .. Therefore, in this case, by adding 1 to the value of the difficulty counter 223γ (S6203), it is controlled so that the production mode having a higher difficulty level than the early stage period is set as the production mode in the middle stage period. As a result, it is possible to change the production mode (difficulty level) to match the skill of the player in the middle of the timing production, so that the player's willingness to participate in the timing production can be improved. After the processing of S6203 is completed, the processing is shifted to S6209.

In the process of S6202, when it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is 600 or less (S6202: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the read score counter 223η is smaller than 50 (S6204). When it is determined that the read value is smaller than 50 (S6204: Yes), it indicates that the points acquired by the player in the early period are extremely small. That is, there is a possibility that the difficulty level of the timing production in the early stage is too difficult for the player to keep up with the timing production or the timing production itself is abandoned. In this case, by setting the value of the difficulty counter 223γ to 0 (S6205), it is controlled so that the effect mode having the lowest difficulty level is selected as the effect mode set after the middle stage period. As a result, players who had difficulty in adjusting the timing of pressing due to the difficulty of the early stage being too high, or just looking at the production mode of the early stage gave the impression that it would be difficult, and abandoned the timing production. It is possible to improve the motivation of the player who has lost his / her participation in the timing production. When the process of S6205 is completed, the process shifts to S6209.

In the process of S6204, when it is determined that the value of the read score counter 223η is 50 or more (S6204: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 200 (S6206). In the processing of S6206, if it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 200 (S6206), the difficulty level is too high for the player, and the pace ends at a point significantly lower than the quota. It means that there is a high possibility. In this case, the player may decide that the quota cannot be achieved during the timing production and give up participation in the timing production. In addition, although he participated in the timing production until the end, the points earned are too low for the quota, and there is a risk that he will give up participating in the timing production from the next time onward. Therefore, in order to prevent these situations, the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is subtracted by 1 in the processing of S6207 (S6207). As a result, the difficulty level after the middle stage period can be made easy, so that the player who did not get much points in the early stage period can improve the motivation to participate in the timing production. When the processing of S6207 is completed, the processing shifts to S6209.

On the other hand, in the process of S6206, when it is determined that the value of the read score counter 223η is 200 or more (S6206: No), the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is read (S6208), and the process proceeds to the process of S6209.

In the process of S6209, a mode of the middle stage effect is selected from the effect selection table 222d based on the value of the difficulty counter 223γ (S6209), and a display early stage mode command for notifying the display control device 114 of the selected mode. Is set (S6210). Then, the data table corresponding to the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is read from the pressing period table 222e (S6211), the read table is stored in the pressing period storage area (S6212), and this process is terminated.

By executing this midfield setting process, it is possible to change the mode of production after the midfield period to a mode of difficulty that more closely matches the skill of the player, according to the points acquired by the player in the early stage. , It is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production.

Next, the details of the final stage setting process (S6111) executed in the timing effect process (see S1541 and FIG. 169) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 171. As described above, this final stage setting process (S6111) is a process for setting the effect mode of the final stage period of the timing effect.

In this final stage setting process (S6111), first, the value of the score counter 223η is read out (S6301), and it is determined whether or not the value is larger than 900 (S6302). That is, it is determined whether or not 900 points or more have been obtained by the end of the middle stage period. Then, when it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is larger than 900 (S6302: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is larger than 3 (S6303).

When it is determined that the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is 3 or less (S6303: No), the table whose success period is in the normal range is read from the pressing period table 222e, and the process is shifted to S6309. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is larger than 3 (S6303: Yes), the table for a narrow range corresponding to the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is read out from the pressing period table 222e (S6303: Yes). S6304), the process proceeds to S6309.

In this way, the reason why the tables having different success period lengths are set according to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is to match the difficulty level with the player. That is, if a relatively high difficulty level (difficulty level 4 or difficulty level 5) is set even after the middle stage period, it is highly possible that the skill of the player is high. Then, since the process shifts to the process of S6303 when a relatively large number of points have been acquired, there is a possibility that the current difficulty level is too easy for the player. Therefore, in order to make the difficulty level even more difficult for highly skilled players, the success range is set to be narrower than the early stage period and the middle stage period. As a result, it is possible to provide a more difficult timing effect to a player with a high skill level, so that the player's interest in the timing effect can be improved.

On the other hand, when the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is 3 or less and the process shifts to the processing of S6303, there is a possibility that many points have been obtained by fluke despite the relatively low skill. In this case, if the difficulty level is increased, there is a risk that the frame button 229 will fail to be pressed continuously at the end of the game, which may give a bad impression to the timing effect. In particular, even though the quota of 1000 points was exceeded at the start of the final stage production, it failed continuously during the final stage period, and if the quota was broken at the end of the production by accumulating penalties, the player's There is a risk that the motivation for timing production will be greatly reduced. Therefore, in this control example, when the difficulty counter 223γ, which is presumed to have low skill, is 3 or less, the range of the success period is maintained as normal even if a relatively large number of points are acquired. doing. As a result, it is possible to improve the motivation for the timing effect for the player with low skill.

In the process of S6302, when it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is 900 or less (S6302: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 600 (S6306). When it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 600 in the processing of S6305 (S6206: Yes), a wide-range table corresponding to the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is read from the pressing period table 222e (S6307). The process proceeds to S6309. If the value of the score counter 223η is less than 600, the player has acquired relatively few points by the middle period, and the difficulty level is likely to be too high for the player. Therefore, in this case, by selecting a pressing period having a wide success period, it is configured so that there is a high possibility that it will be determined as successful when the frame button 229 is pressed. That is, the difficulty level can be adjusted to the player. In addition, by widening the success period in the final stage period, it becomes easier to succeed in pressing, so that the player can be made to think that he / she is in good condition (getting the knack). Therefore, even if the quota is not reached, it is possible to make the illusion that more points can be obtained next time from the response during the final stage. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation to participate in the next timing production.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6306, when it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is 600 or more (S6305: No), the table for the normal range corresponding to the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is read from the pressing period table 222e. The process proceeds to S6309. In the process of S6309 executed after any of the processes of S6104, S6105, S6107, and S6108 is executed, the data table read from the press period table 222e is stored in the press period storage area (S6308), and this process is performed. To finish.

By this final stage setting process, the range of the success period of the final stage period can be changed to a width that more closely matches the skill of the player according to the points acquired by the player by the end of the middle stage period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172, details of the notification mode setting process (S6113) executed in the timing effect processing (see S1541 and FIG. 169) will be described. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing this notification mode setting process (S6113). As described above, this notification mode setting process is a process for setting a notification effect (notification mode) for notifying the result of the timing effect.

In the notification mode setting process (S6113), first, the value of the score counter 223η is read (S6401), and it is determined whether or not the value is 1000 or more (S6402). That is, in the timing effect, it is determined whether or not the quota of 1000 points has been achieved. In the processing of S6402, when it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 1000 (that is, the quota could not be achieved in this timing effect) (S6402: No), then the display control device 114 is contacted. A notification mode (see FIG. 165) at the time of failure is set (S6403).

When the processing of S6303 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the score counter 223η is 50 or less (S6404). When the value of the score counter 223η is 50 or less (S6404: Yes), the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is set to 0 (S6405), and the process proceeds to S6412. When the value of the score counter 223η is 50 or less, it is highly possible that the player has given up early just by visually recognizing the mode of the early stage period. Therefore, in this case, in the next timing production, the production mode having the easiest difficulty level is selected, and it is possible to make the person feel that the quota can be achieved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the next timing production.

On the other hand, when the value of the score counter 223η is larger than 50 (S6404: No), 1 is subtracted from the value of the difficulty counter 223γ (S6406), and the process proceeds to S6412. When the value of the score counter 223η is larger than 50, it means that the quota was not met after participating in the timing production as it was. Therefore, in this case, the player's willingness to participate can be improved by lowering the difficulty level selected in the next timing production by one level.

In the processing of S6402, when it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is 1000 or more (the quota of the timing effect is achieved), the probability change state flag 223β is read (S6407), and the current state is the probability change state of the special symbol. Whether or not (whether or not the probability change state flag 223β is on) is determined (S6408). Then, when it is determined that the probabilistic state is present (S6408: Yes), a notification mode for notifying the display control device 114 of the probabilistic state is set, and the process shifts to S6411. On the other hand, in the processing of S6408, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the probabilistic state (low probability state of the special symbol) (S6408: No), notification for notifying the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is given. The mode is set (S6409), and the process shifts to S6411.

In the process of S6411, 1 is added to the value of the difficulty counter 223γ, and the process shifts to S6412. When the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is 4, which is the maximum value, the value is kept at 4. In the process of S6412, by setting the timing effect permission flag 223α to off, the timing effect is not selected until the next 2R probability variation big hit or small hit (S6412), and this process ends. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 173, details of the variable display setting process 2 (S1542) executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) will be described. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 2 (S1542) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Of the variation display setting process 2 (S1542), each process of S1801 to S1810 is the same as each process of S1801 to S1810 executed in the variation display setting process (S1512, see FIG. 109) in the first control example. The process is executed.

Further, in the variation display setting process 2 (S1542) in this control example, when the process of S1805 is completed, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot C (2R probability variation jackpot). Determine (S1821). In the processing of S1821, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern corresponds to the jackpot C (S1821: Yes), it means that the transition to the probabilistic state of the special symbol is performed, so the probabilistic state flag 223β is set to ON (S1821: Yes). S1823), the process proceeds to S1824.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1821, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern does not correspond to the jackpot C (S1821: No), then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern corresponds to the small hit (S1822), and the small hit is determined. If it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to the pattern (S1822: Yes), the process shifts to S1824. In the process of S1824, by setting the timing effect permission flag 223α to ON, the mode of the timing effect can be selected as an interesting effect in the subsequent variable effect (S1824), and the process proceeds to S1806.

In the process of S1822, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern does not correspond to the small hit (S1822: No), then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern corresponds to the jackpot A or the jackpot B (S1825). If it is determined in the process of S1825 that neither the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot A nor the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot B is (S1825: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1806. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern corresponds to either the jackpot A or the jackpot B (S1825: Yes), the probability variation state flag 223β is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot type (S1826). That is, if it is a jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), the probability variation state flag 223β is set to on, and if it is a jackpot B (16R time reduction jackpot), the probability variation state flag 223β is set to off. Next, the timing effect permission flag 223α is set to off (S1827), and the processing after S1806 is executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to be able to execute a timing effect that can acquire points by operating a plurality of types of buttons in a timely manner, and when the quota is achieved, the current privilege is present. It is configured to notify the game status. As a result, the player who wants to know the current game state can be actively participated in the timing production, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Also, by setting the privilege when the timing production is successful to the one that does not affect the game result (notification of the current game state), whether the privilege is given purely by the skill of the player's pressing (operation) timing. You can decide whether or not. On the other hand, if a quota (for example, a jackpot) whose result has already been decided at the start of fluctuation (before the timing production is started) is set as a privilege, the timing production is started. Before, the result of the timing effect (whether or not the mode for achieving the quota can be displayed) is determined. If there is a timing effect in which the quota cannot be achieved, there is a risk that the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect will be diminished. On the other hand, in this control example, the privilege given when the quota is achieved in the timing effect is set to "notification of the game state" which does not affect the game result. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not to grant the privilege purely according to the skill of pressing the frame button 229. That is, when the privilege is given, the player can have a stronger feeling that the privilege has been acquired by himself / herself. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production.

Further, in this control example, the difficulty level can be changed according to the point acquisition status of the player during the execution of the timing effect. That is, it is configured to determine the skill of the player from the point acquisition status and change the production mode to a difficulty level that more closely matches the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the difficulty level from becoming too difficult, or conversely, the difficulty level from becoming too easy to diminish the willingness to participate in the timing production. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production.

Further, in this control example, when the timing effect is completed, the difficulty level of the next timing effect is changed to a difficulty level more suitable for the player according to the point acquisition status of the player. .. With this configuration, the player's willingness to participate in the timing production can be further improved.

In this control example, when three types of periods, an early stage period, a middle stage period, and a final stage period, are set, the production mode is selected according to the skill of the player and the participation status in the timing production. However, the period is not limited to three types. For example, it may be configured to set the effect mode for each of the five types of periods. By increasing the period, it is possible to more accurately determine the skill of the player and the like, and to provide a production mode that matches the skill. On the contrary, the period may be shortened. As a result, the number of processes for determining the skill of the player and the like can be reduced, so that the processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced.

In this control example, when three types of periods, an early stage period, a middle stage period, and a final stage period, are set, the production mode is selected according to the skill of the player and the participation status in the timing production. However, the difficulty level of one or a plurality of periods may be fixed, and only the difficulty level of a part of the period may be changed according to the skill of the player or the like. More specifically, for example, the difficulty level in the early stage period may be set to a production mode in which the difficulty level is relatively easy. As a result, it is possible to give the player who visually recognizes the aspect of the early stage the impression that the quota can be easily achieved by the timing production, so that the player's willingness to participate in the timing production can be improved. ..

In this control example, based on the fact that the frame button 229 is operated 10 times during the continuous striking period, it is determined that the continuous striking is successful and points are added. The criteria for determining is not limited to 10 operations. An arbitrary value can be set according to the length of the continuous striking period and the length of the continuous striking bar. In addition, the number of times it is determined that the repeated hits have been successful may be changed according to the set effect mode. For example, in the case of a production mode in which the difficulty level is low (for example, the difficulty level is 1), the number of times it is determined that the repeated hits are successful is set to a number less than 10 times (for example, 6 times), and vice versa. In the case of a production mode in which the difficulty level is relatively high (for example, the difficulty level is 4 or 5), the number of times it is determined that the repeated hits are successful is set to a number of times more than 10 times (for example, 15 times). You may. As a result, it is possible to make a difference in the difficulty level not only by the display pattern of the scroll bar and the range of the success period, but also by the number of times it is determined that the repeated hits have been successful, so there is a variety of variations for changing the difficulty level. Can be given.

In this control example, based on the fact that the frame button 229 is operated a predetermined number of times (10 times) during the continuous hitting period, it is determined that the continuous hitting is successful and points are added. It may be configured so that it can be determined as a continuous hit in the operation. For example, by continuously pressing the button of the corresponding type for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds or more) during the continuous striking period, it is determined that the continuous striking is successful in the same manner as when the repeated striking is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times). May be good. As a result, even a player who is not good at repeated hits can obtain points by simply holding down (holding down) the frame button 229 to determine that the player is hit repeatedly, so that the burden on the player can be reduced. .. In this case, the points given by repeatedly hitting a predetermined number of times (10 times) during the continuous hitting period are obtained from the points given when the frame button 229 is simply kept pressed (long pressed) during the continuous hitting period. May be configured to increase. With this configuration, advanced players with high skills are made to aggressively hit repeatedly, and players with low skills (who are not good at hitting repeatedly) are long-pressed to earn points as much as possible. Can be made. That is, since it is possible to provide various participation methods for the continuous hitting period according to the skill of the player, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production.

In this control example, a plurality of periods are provided as a period for setting the difficulty level of the timing effect, but instead of this, the difficulty level is set according to the number of times the operation of the frame button 229 fails or succeeds. It may be configured to be fluidly variable. As a result, the operation status of the player can be reflected in the difficulty level in real time.
The effect mode in the early stage is set to the effect mode of the difficulty level corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, during the early period, the difficulty counter 223
In this control example, the notification of the game state is a privilege of the timing effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lottery result of the special symbol may be notified by the timing effect. That is, it may be configured to notify the jackpot when the quota is achieved in the timing effect. In this case, if the lottery of the special symbol is missed and the timing effect is selected, the timing effect of the effect mode in which the quota cannot be achieved may be selected. More specifically, for example, when the timing effect is executed in the case where the special symbol is out of alignment, the total points that can be obtained by the scroll bar or the continuous hit bar that is scrolled from the early stage to the final stage are obtained. It may be configured to have a maximum of 900 to 990 points, and in the case of a special symbol hit, for example, a pattern that can obtain a maximum of 1000 to 1200 points may be selected. That is, as the effect mode defined for the timing effect selection table 222d, the effect mode for the jackpot corresponding to each period and each difficulty level and the effect mode for the miss may be separately defined. Then, when setting the effect mode for each period in the timing effect process (see FIG. 169) (S6104 in FIG. 169, S6209 in FIG. 170, S6104, S6105, S6107, S6108 in S in FIG. 171), it is being executed. It may be configured to determine the result of the variable effect (whether it is a big hit or a miss) and select the effect mode. With such a configuration, the difficulty level in the timing production can be matched with the skill of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the timing production can be improved. In addition, by changing the upper limit of points that can be earned between the jackpot mode and the missed mode, it is possible to prevent the quota from being achieved even though the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order ( Can be suppressed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust because the jackpot is not started even though the quota has been achieved, and the player can participate in the timing production with peace of mind.

In this control example, the timing effect is set so that the timing effect is not set at least once after the end of the jackpot A or the jackpot B, or after the jackpot C is reached. However, the execution condition of the timing effect is It is not limited to this. For example, the ease of selection of the timing effect may be changed according to the number of reserved balls. Specifically, the larger the number of reserved balls, the easier it is to select the timing effect, and the smaller the number of reserved balls, the more difficult it is to be selected. As described above, in the timing effect of this control example, it is necessary to press the plurality of buttons (up button UB, right button RB, left button LB, down button DB) constituting the frame button 229 in a timely manner. For this reason, it is difficult to participate in the timing effect with one hand, and it is easier to succeed in pressing with both hands. That is, a player who tries to achieve the quota by the timing effect may temporarily release his hand from the operation handle 51 and participate in the timing effect. Therefore, if the number of reserved balls is small and the number of reserved balls cannot be increased during the timing effect, the lottery of the special symbol may be interrupted after the end of the variable effect in which the timing effect is set. is there. That is, there is a risk that the game efficiency will deteriorate. Therefore, by making it difficult to set the timing effect in the situation where the number of reserved balls is small, the player can launch the ball in the situation where the number of reserved balls is small, so that the reserved balls can be easily stored. Therefore, the game efficiency can be improved. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is large, the number of reserved balls may increase further by continuing to hit the balls during the fluctuation, and there is a risk that the number of incoming balls exceeding the upper limit of the number of reserved balls will be detected. is there. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the number of reserved balls from overflowing by increasing the frequency of occurrence of the timing effect that makes it easy to achieve the quota by participating with both hands.

In this control example, as a timing effect, an effect of pressing a plurality of buttons (up button UB, right button RB, left button LB, down button DB) constituting the frame button 229 in a timely manner is executed. However, the number of buttons is not limited to four. For example, an effect of pressing a single frame button at the right time may be executed as a timing effect. With this configuration, it is possible to participate in the timing effect with the other hand while operating the handle 51 with one hand, so that the player can participate in the timing effect without lowering the game efficiency. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production. Further, by reducing the types of buttons to be operated in the timing effect, the game can be made easier to understand. On the other hand, the types of buttons to be operated may be larger than those in this control example. As the number of buttons to be operated increases, the difficulty level of the timing effect can be increased, so that the player who has a high skill in the timing effect can be satisfied. The skill of the player may be determined from the point acquisition status, the total points acquired in the previous timing production, and the like, and the number of buttons to be used may be increased or decreased according to the skill. That is, when the skill is low or it is determined that the player has not participated at all last time, for example, a timing effect in which one type of button can be used is configured to execute the timing effect for other players. May set the mode of timing effect using four types of buttons. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the difficulty level is clearly lowered from the appearance, so that it is possible to improve the motivation of the player with low skill to participate.

In this control example, when the variable effect for which the timing effect is set is executed, the timing effect is configured to start 5 seconds after the reach occurs, and is configured to be executed for 14 seconds. However, the start period and duration of the timing effect are not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the timing effect may be executed by using all the fluctuation times. Even if the timing effect is executed on the sub display device 690, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, even if the timing effect is executed by spending all the fluctuation time, the special symbol It is possible to prevent (suppress) the lottery result from being overlooked. Therefore, since the timing effect can be executed for a longer period of time, the interest of the player can be further improved.

In this control example, the timing effect is executed during the execution of the variable effect, but the execution period of the timing effect is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to execute the timing effect during the jackpot (special game state). In this case, by achieving the norm in the timing effect, it may be configured to be notified that the special symbol will shift to the probabilistic state after the jackpot ends. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from becoming a mere task for winning a prize ball, and thus it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the jackpot. In this case, if the player fails to achieve the quota despite the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), for example, the low probability state of the special symbol is notified during the notification period of the timing effect. A reverse effect may be performed at the ending of the jackpot to notify the probability change state of the special symbol. As a result, even if the quota cannot be achieved by the timing effect, the game can be performed with the expectation that the reverse effect will occur during the ending period, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. ..

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 186. In the first control example, a control example in which each accessory performs a variable operation individually or in combination has been described. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, a suitable control method for the accessory that performs the variable operation and the lighting operation in combination will be described.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that the rotary lighting unit 800 is added as an accessory for performing a movable effect in a variable effect or the like. The point, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. It is a point that has been done. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, a front view of the game board 13 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 and 186. FIG. 185 is a front view of the game board 13 when the above-mentioned rotary lighting unit 800 is in the retracted position, and FIG. 186 is a front view of the game board 13 when the rotary light unit 800 is in the overhang position. .. When the rotary lighting unit 800 is outside the execution period of the effect of performing the variable operation, it is arranged at the retracted position shown in FIG. 185. On the other hand, when the effect that the rotary lighting unit 800 performs a variable operation is set, the rotary lighting unit 800 is arranged at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 186, and the operation according to the effect (rotational operation and lighting operation). Is done.

As shown in FIG. 185, the retracted position of the rotary lighting unit 800 is the lower left of the front view of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 185, when the rotary lighting unit 800 is arranged in the retracted position, the upper right portion of the rotary lighting unit 800 is only slightly visible, and most of them are hidden by other configurations and cannot be visually recognized from the front. Become. On the other hand, the overhanging position of the rotary lighting unit 800 is below the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 186. In this case, most of the rotary lighting unit 800 can be visually recognized by the player from the front.

Next, the configuration of the rotary lighting unit 800 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 178. First, FIG. 175 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rotary lighting unit 800 in this control example, and FIG. 175 (b) is a side view of the rotary lighting unit 800 from the left side.

As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the rotary lighting unit 800 is provided with a substantially circular rotating member 820 that can rotate around the rotary shaft 822 on the front side, and lighting that can be turned on and off on the back side thereof. A device 810 is provided. The rotating member 820 is provided with six through holes 821a to 821f. These through holes 821a to 821f are all formed in a circular shape having the same diameter, and are arranged at equal intervals (every 60 degrees) on the circumference centered on the rotation shaft 822. As a result, every time the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees, the same shape (appearance) is obtained (six-fold symmetry). Further, the rotating member 820 is made of a translucent material (for example, PS material). Therefore, even when a portion other than the back side of the through holes 821a to 821f is lit, the rough lighting state can be visually recognized from the front side.

The lighting device 810 is provided with an insertion port 812 for inserting the rotating shaft 822 of the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 175 (b)). Through the insertion hole 812, the rotating shaft 822 is physically connected to a drive motor for rotating the rotating member 810. That is, only the rotating member 810 is rotated by the drive motor, and the lighting device 810 does not rotate.

The front side of the lighting device 810 is composed of a light guide plate, and an LED is provided on the back side (inside of the lighting device 810) of the light guide plate. By turning on the LED inside, the player can visually recognize the light of the LED through the light guide plate. Further, the LEDs are evenly arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to illuminate all of the front side, and by lighting all the LEDs, the front side of the lighting device 810 looks evenly lit.

Further, on the front surface side of the lighting device 810, a plurality of regions capable of locally emitting circular light are provided. That is, six circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are provided. The shapes of these circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are formed by circles having substantially the same diameter as the through ports 821a to 821f. Further, they are arranged at equal intervals (every 60 degrees) in a circumferential shape centered on the insertion hole 812. Since the circumference on which the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are arranged and the circumference on which the through holes 821a to 821f are arranged are configured to have substantially the same diameter, any of the circumferences can be obtained by rotating the rotating member 820. By reaching the front side of any of the circular lighting areas, all the through holes are configured to completely overlap on the front side of all the circular lighting areas.

In order to locally emit light from the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f, for example, the light guide plate is divided from the other regions at the circumferential portion of each circular lighting region 811a to 811f, and the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are formed. A partition may be provided inside so that the light of the LED provided in the above does not leak to other areas. Then, the LEDs provided in the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f may be configured so that the lighting can be controlled separately. With this configuration, if all the LEDs are turned on, the front side of the lighting device 810 will appear to be turned on as a whole, while the LEDs provided in any of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f will be independent. By turning on the light, only the area can be made to look like a circular light.

Here, the LEDs provided in the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are composed of red LEDs and white LEDs, and the LEDs provided in the other areas are composed of only white LEDs. .. When the lighting device 810 is turned on as a whole, all the white LEDs are turned on so that the entire lighting device 810 is turned on in white. On the other hand, when lighting only a part or all of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f, it is configured to set the lighting of the red LED provided in the corresponding area.

Next, a lighting control method of the lighting device 810 for each rotation speed of the rotating member 820 will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 178. Here, first, the outline of the effect using the rotary lighting unit 800 will be described. In this control example, as an effect using the rotary lighting unit 800, each time the rotary member 820 rotates and the through holes 821a to 821f and the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f overlap each other in the front-rear direction (that is,). Every time the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees), the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are turned into a red lighting state one by one. In this effect, the number of circular lighting areas that are in the red lighting state suggests the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to have the player confirm the state of the rotary lighting unit 800 in the expectation that as many circular lighting areas as possible will be lit. During this period, the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is relatively slow (for example, a rotation speed of 60 degrees per second) so that the player can easily visually recognize the number of circular lighting regions in the lighting state. ) Is set (low speed rotation state is set).

Further, the above-mentioned low-speed rotation state continues until the rotating member 820 makes one rotation. When the rotating member 820 makes one rotation, the rotation speed is accelerated. Then, when the rotation speed becomes a predetermined speed or more (for example, one rotation or more per second), the lighting device 820 is switched to the fully lit state. Even after the rotation speed becomes a predetermined speed or more (for example, one rotation or more per second), the rotation speed is continuously accelerated. Then, when it is determined that the rotation speed has reached a relatively high speed (speed of three rotations per second) (high-speed rotation state has been reached), intermittent lighting of the front in-phase is set for the lighting device 810. (That is, all white LEDs are set to turn on and off repeatedly at a constant frequency). The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 178, but the lighting frequency and the lighting period of the intermittent lighting are such that the rotation direction of the rotating rotating member 810 has the appearance of reverse rotation due to the so-called wagon wheel effect. Set.

Then, after the appearance of reverse rotation is obtained, the number of circular lighting areas lit in the low-speed rotation state is lit again in accordance with the lighting frequency of intermittent lighting. Even in this high-speed rotation state, the number of lights in the circular lighting area may be increased. Therefore, since the player can confirm the production to the end, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

In this control example, only the rotational operation of the rotating member 820 is defined in the operation scenario as the operation of the rotating lighting unit 800. Then, the lighting device 810 is configured to determine the rotation speed from the actual rotation operation of the rotating member 820 and switch the lighting mode. More specifically, in the operation scenario corresponding to the effect of operating the rotary lighting unit 800, first, the operation of moving the rotary lighting unit 800 from the retracted position (see FIG. 185) to the overhanging position (see FIG. 186) is performed. It is stipulated. Then, as an operation when the movement to the overhang position (see FIG. 186) is completed (the sensor detects that the overhang position has been reached), the operation scenario includes the rotation operation of the rotating member 820 in the low speed rotation state. Is stipulated. Further, as an operation when a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) has elapsed after setting the low speed rotation state, an operation of accelerating the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is specified. Then, as an operation to be set after the operation of accelerating the rotation speed, an operation of decelerating the rotation speed and stopping the rotation of the rotating member 820 is defined when a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) elapses in the high-speed rotation state. As a subsequent operation, an operation of moving the rotary lighting unit 800 to the retracted position is specified. As described above, only the operation of the rotating member 820 is defined in the operation scenario, and the lighting mode of the lighting device 810 is changed according to the speed of the rotating member 820, whereby the rotating operation of the rotating member 820 and the lighting device 810 are performed. It is possible to suppress the deviation from the lighting control of. That is, when the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is changed, the lighting mode can be changed more reliably, so that the appearance quality of the rotating lighting unit 800 can be improved.

Next, a method of lighting control in a low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation) will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177. First, FIG. 176 is a diagram showing an example of lighting control in which the appearance is deteriorated in a low speed rotation state (during low speed operation), and FIG. 177 is a diagram showing an example of lighting control in the present control example during low speed rotation (during low speed operation). It is a figure which showed the lighting control example. That is, a control method for preventing the appearance as shown in FIG. 176 during low-speed rotation (during low-speed operation) and giving the appearance as shown in FIG. 177 will be described.

As described above, FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating lighting control in which the appearance quality deteriorates in a low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation). In this example, it is the figure which showed the case where the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees in the state which two circular lighting regions are lit in the low speed rotation state.

When the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f overlaps with the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f, the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f become visible through the through holes 821a to 821f. FIG. 176 (a) shows a state in which the through ports 821e and 821f overlap with the two circular lighting areas set in the lighting state, respectively.

Further, FIG. 176 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the rotating member 820 is rotated and the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are deviated from each other. In this bad example, the next lighting position is lit before the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f match, so that the through holes 821a, 821e, 821f are halfway through. The red light in the circular lighting area leaked out halfway. Therefore, the appearance quality has deteriorated. This is because the through holes 821a to 821f continuously change according to the amount of rotation of the rotating member 820, whereas the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are fixed. That is, since the lighting positions of the circular lighting regions cannot be continuously followed by the through holes 821a to 821f, the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are deviated from each other. The appearance quality deteriorates.

In FIG. 176 (c), the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees while maintaining the lighting state of each circular lighting region in the state of FIG. 176 (b), the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f, and the circular lighting regions 811a to 811a to It shows the case where the position of 811f matches again. In this case, as in FIG. 176 (a), since the arrangements of the two circular lighting regions set in the lighting state and the through holes 821e and 821f overlap, the light from the circular lighting region can be cleaned from the front. It can be visually recognized. As described above, when one or a plurality of circular lighting regions are lit at the rotation position where the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f do not match, the appearance quality deteriorates. (See Fig. 176 (b)). Therefore, in this control example, in order to improve the appearance quality, the lighting control is performed so as to be in the lighting state shown in FIG. 177.

FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating a lighting control method in a low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation) in this control example. As shown in FIG. 177, in this control example, the corresponding circular lighting area is controlled to be lit only when the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f match. (See FIGS. 177 (a) and 177 (c)), and at other intermediate positions, all the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are set to the extinguished state. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent one or a plurality of circular lighting areas from being lit in a state where the through holes 821a to 821f and the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are misaligned, resulting in a half-finished appearance. Can be (suppressed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the appearance quality in the low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation).

Whether or not the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f coincide with each other can be detected by a rotation sensor (not shown). This rotation sensor is configured so that the output becomes H each time the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees. For example, whether the through hole 821a coincides with (overlaps) the position of the circular lighting region 811a or coincides with (overlaps) the circular lighting region 811b, it coincides with the circular lighting region 811c. It matches the circular lighting area 811f, whether it is in the presence (overlapping) state, in the state of matching (overlapping) with the circular lighting area 811d, or in the state of matching (overlapping) with the circular lighting area 811e. The output is similarly set to H even in the overlapping (overlapping) state. On the other hand, when the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are misaligned, the output is set to L.

Next, a lighting control method in a high-speed rotation state (during high-speed operation) will be described with reference to FIG. 178. As described above, at the time of high-speed rotation, all the white LEDs are set to repeat turning on and off at a constant frequency (24 Hz). In addition, one lighting period is configured to be extremely short (for example, on DUTY 0.5%), and the arrangement of the rotating member 810 at the moment of lighting is somehow visible (not recognizable as rotating). It is configured to be the period of.

As shown in FIG. 178, in the high-speed rotation state, every time the rotating member 820 rotates 45 degrees, the entire lighting device 810 is momentarily lit in white (all lit). In the high-speed rotation state, the rotating member 820 rotates 3 times per second (1080 degrees per second), whereas the lighting frequency is set to 24 Hz (24 times per second) (1080 degrees ÷ 24 times). = 45 degrees). On the other hand, since the lighting device 810 is turned off except for the period in which the rotating member is lit momentarily, the rotating member 820 cannot be seen. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the rotating rotating member 820 cannot be continuously visually recognized, and the rotating member 820 is recognized as having a frame advance of 24 Hz.

When the lighting device 810 is momentarily fully lit in the arrangement shown in FIG. 178 (a), the appearance of the rotating member 820 from the player's point of view will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. 178. ) Is recognized by the player, but since the lighting period is instantaneous (on DUTY 0.5%), the player can only recognize the arrangement of the rotating member 820 and cannot recognize the rotation direction. .. After that, since the lighting device 810 is set to the extinguished state until the rotating member 820 rotates 45 degrees (see FIG. 178 (b)), the player cannot visually recognize the appearance of the rotating member 820 during this period.

In the next 24 Hz period (that is, in the arrangement shown in FIG. 178 (b)), the lighting device 810 is momentarily fully lit again. Also in this case, since the lighting period is sufficiently short as in the arrangement of FIG. 178 (a), the player can recognize only the arrangement of the rotating member 820. Then, the lights are turned off again until the next 24 Hz period (see FIG. 178 (d)), and when the next 24 Hz period is reached, all the lights are momentarily set and the arrangement of FIG. 178 (e) is recognized by the player. Will be done. After that, the arrangement of the rotating member 820 is recognized at 24 Hz by the same control.

Here, as described above, the rotating member 820 is configured to have the same shape (appearance) (symmetrical 6 times) every time it is rotated 60 degrees. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 178, the period is By recognizing only the arrangement of the rotating member 820, the rotation direction can be misidentified. That is, in reality, from the arrangement shown in FIG. 178 (a), the through holes 821a to 821f rotate 45 degrees clockwise (positive direction) to reach the arrangement shown in FIG. 178 (c). Nevertheless, the rotating member 820 can be recognized as if it has rotated 15 degrees counterclockwise. This is because the through hole 821a and the through hole 821f cannot be visually distinguished from each other, so that the through hole 821a is closest to the position where the through hole 821a is arranged (different by 15 degrees) in FIG. 178 (a). ), The through hole 821f can be recognized (misidentified) as the through hole 821a.

After that, similarly, the original rotation direction and the rotation direction recognized by the player can be reversed by continuing to recognize that the rotation is in the direction in which the apparent rotation amount is the smallest. In this way, the change in the rotation direction of the rotating member 820 can be omitted by configuring the rotating member 820 so that the rotation direction is changed only by switching the lighting control. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an excessive load applied to the drive motor due to sudden stop or sudden reversal in order to change the rotation direction, so that the drive motor is less likely to break down. it can. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 that can operate stably for a longer period of time.

In this control example, the lighting device 810 is set to fully lit every time the rotating member 820 rotates 45 degrees (that is, at 24 Hz) in the high-speed rotation state, but the frequency at which the lighting device 810 is lit is limited to this. It's not a thing. In the high-speed rotation state, the angle at which the rotating member 820 rotates from one full lighting to the next full lighting is larger than 30 degrees (that is, half of 60 degrees, which is the distance between adjacent through holes), and is 60 degrees. It can be arbitrarily determined within a range smaller than (that is, the distance between adjacent through holes). That is, the angle when comparing the arrangement of the through hole 1 before the rotation and the arrangement of the through hole adjacent to the rotation direction opposite to the rotation direction (that is, the left side) after the rotation is It suffices if the through hole of 1 is smaller than the angle actually rotated. With this configuration, it can be mistaken that the vehicle has moved (rotated) in the direction in which the movement angle is small (the movement distance is small). Therefore, every time the lighting device 810 is momentarily set to full lighting, it penetrates. It can be seen as if the hole has moved to the position of the through hole adjacent to the opposite side. Therefore, it is possible to make the driver feel that the motor is rotating in the reverse direction only by controlling the lighting without changing the rotation speed or the rotation direction, thereby preventing (suppressing) an excessive load from being applied to the drive motor. , It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 10 that can operate stably for a longer period of time.

<About the electrical configuration in the 4th control example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 174. FIG. 174 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 174, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example, the RAM 223 in the first control example includes a lighting state counter 223θ, a lighting position storage area 223ι, a lighting setting flag 223κ, and an initial identification flag 223λ. , A speed identification timer 223μ, a previous value storage area 223ν, and a speed storage area 223ξ have been added.

The lighting state counter 223θ is a counter indicating the type of lighting state of the lighting device 810, and can indicate different lighting states depending on the counter value. Specifically, "01H" means a lighting state (see FIG. 177) for performing lighting control in a low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation), and "02H" means high-speed rotation from a low-speed rotation state. It means that it is a lighting state (all lighting states) when the rotation speed is accelerated, which transitions to a state, and "03H" is a lighting state (see FIG. 178) in a high-speed rotation state (high-speed operation). Means. On the other hand, if the counter value is "00H", it means that the lighting control of the lighting device 810 is not performed. The lighting state counter 223θ is updated at the timing of switching the lighting state (see S6613 in FIG. 181, S6805 in FIG. 183, and S6909 in FIG. 184). The lighting state counter 223θ is referred to in the lighting control process (see FIG. 180) executed in the main process, and the lighting control is set according to the counter value.

The lighting position storage area 223ι is an area in which information indicating the lighting state of each of the circular lighting areas 821a to 821f is stored. The lighting position storage area 223ι is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the 0th to 5th bits correspond to the circular lighting areas 821a to 821f, respectively. Each bit constituting the lighting position storage area 223ι indicates that the corresponding circular lighting area is in the lighting state when the value is 1 (on), and indicates that the lighting position is off when the value is off. The information stored in the lighting position storage area 223ι is circular every time it is detected that the output of the rotation sensor becomes H in the low-speed rotation state or the high-speed rotation state (arrangement of through holes 821a to 821f and a circle). Each time the positions of the lighting areas 811a to 811f overlap each other), the value is updated (see S6608 and S6610 in FIG. 181 and S6911 and S6912 in FIG. 184). In addition, all the values are cleared at the timing when the effect using the rotary lighting unit 800 ends.

The lighting set flag 223κ is a flag indicating whether or not the lighting state has been updated based on the output of the rotation sensor becoming H. If the lighting setting flag 223κ is on, it indicates that the lighting state has been updated based on the output of the rotation sensor becoming H, and if it is off, the lighting state is not updated. Show that. When the H output of the rotation sensor is detected while the lighting setting flag 223κ is off, the lighting state is updated and the lighting setting flag 223κ is set to on (S6612 in FIG. 181 and FIG. 184). (See S6913). Further, after updating the lighting state, it is set to off when the L output of the rotation sensor is detected for the first time (see S6604 in FIG. 181 and S6910 in FIG. 184). By controlling the lighting state to be updated with reference to the lighting setting flag 223κ, it is possible to prevent the lighting state from being updated a plurality of times while the output of the rotation sensor is H. be able to.

The initial identification flag 223λ is a flag indicating whether or not a reference value (value of the speed identification timer 223μ) has been acquired in order to identify the rotation speed of the rotating member 820. If this initial identification flag 223λ is on, it indicates that the reference value (value of the speed identification timer 223μ) has been acquired to identify the rotation speed, and if it is off, the reference value has not been acquired. Show that. If the first identified flag 223λ is on, the rotation speed is calculated based on the already acquired reference value (see S6701 in FIG. 182). On the other hand, if the first identified flag 223λ is off, the flag is set to on after the reference value for identifying the rotation speed is acquired (see S6703 in FIG. 182). By using this initial identification flag 223λ, the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 can be accurately determined.

The speed identification timer 223μ is a timer used to calculate the rotation speed of the rotating member 820. The speed identification timer 223μ is updated periodically (every 1 millisecond), for example, in the main process. The rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is calculated by determining the time from when the output of the rotation sensor becomes H to when the output becomes H next by the difference in the values of the speed identification timer 223μ.

The previous value storage area 223ν is a storage area for storing the value of the speed identification timer 223μ at the time when the H output of the rotation sensor is detected. Next, when the rotation sensor has H output, the time required to rotate 60 degrees due to the difference between the value stored in the previous value storage area 223ν and the current value of the speed identification timer 223μ. Is calculated. The rotation speed is calculated based on the calculated time (S6706 in FIG. 182). The data stored in the previous value storage area 223ν is overwritten with the current value of the speed identification timer 223μ after the rotation speed is calculated each time the rotation speed identification process (see FIG. 182) is executed. ..

The speed storage area 223ξ is a storage area for storing information corresponding to the rotation speed of the rotating member 820. The data stored in the speed storage area 223ξ is overwritten each time the rotation speed is calculated in the rotation speed identification process (see S6706 in FIG. 182). The rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is determined based on the information according to the rotation speed stored in the speed storage area 223ξ, and the lighting control of the lighting device 810 is performed according to the rotation speed.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 179 to 184. First, FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. In each of the main processes S1501 to S1520, the same process as each process of S1501 to S1520 in the first control example is executed.

Further, in the main process in this control example, when the liquid crystal effect execution management process of S1510 is completed, the speed identification timer 223μ is updated by adding 1 (S1551), and the process shifts to S1511. As described above, the speed identification timer 223μ is a timer used to calculate the speed of the rotating member 820.

Further, in the main process in this control example, when the ball entry effect setting process of S1515 is completed, the lighting control process for controlling the lighting state of the lighting device 810 is then executed (S1552). Then, after the lighting control process (S1551) is executed, the processes S1516 to S1520 are executed, and this process is completed.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned lighting control process (S1552) will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 184. First, FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing a lighting control process (S1552). This lighting control process (S1552) is a process for controlling the lighting state of the lighting device 810 according to the speed of the rotating member 820.

In the lighting control process (S1552), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the lighting state counter value 223θ is “01H” (S6501). In the processing of S6501, when it is determined that the lighting state counter value 223θ is 01H (S6501: Yes), the low-speed processing for setting the lighting state when the rotating member 820 is set to the low-speed rotating state. (S6502) to end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S6501 when it is determined that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is not "01H" (S6501: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is "02H". (S6503). Then, when it is determined that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is “02H” (S6503: Yes), the lighting state in the acceleration state during the transition of the rotating member 820 from the low speed rotation state to the high speed rotation state is set. This process is executed during acceleration (S6504), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S6503, when it is determined that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is not “02H” (S6503: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is “03H” (S6503: No). S6505). In the process of S6505, when the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is determined to be "03H" (S6505: Yes), the high-speed processing for setting the lighting state in the high-speed rotating state of the rotating member 820 is executed. (S6506), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is not “03H” (S6505: No), the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is “00H” and it is not necessary to control the lighting device 810. , End this process.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned low-speed processing (S6502) will be described with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the low speed processing (S6502). As described above, this low-speed processing (S6502) is a processing for setting the lighting state when the rotating member 820 is set to the low-speed rotation state.

In the low-speed processing (S6502), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the rotation sensor is H (high) (S6601), and when it is determined that the output is not H (the output is L) (S6601). : No), then it is determined whether or not the lighting setting flag 223κ is on (S6602). In the process of S6602, when it is determined that the lighting set flag 223κ is off (S6602: No), the through holes 821a to 821f are arranged at positions deviated from the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f. In addition, since it means that the lighting device 810 has already been set to the extinguished state, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S6602, when it is determined that the lighting setting flag 223κ is on (S6602: Yes), the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are in the state where any of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f is lit. Since it means that the through holes 821a to 821f are arranged at the positions deviated from each other, all the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are turned off (S6603). This prevents the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f and the through holes 821a to 821f from being displaced from each other in the presence of the circular lighting area set to the lighting state (see FIG. 176 (b)). Since it can be (suppressed), the appearance quality can be improved. When the process of S6603 is completed, the lighting set flag is set to off (S6604), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S6601, when it is determined that the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the lighting setting flag 223κ is on (S6605), and the lighting setting flag is determined. When it is determined that 223κ is on (S6605: Yes), the lighting state has already been set, and it is not necessary to set the lighting state again, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lighting setting flag 223κ is not on (that is, it is off) (S6605: No), the output of the rotation sensor is in the H position (circular lighting regions 811a to 811f). , The position where the positions of the through holes 821a to 821f overlap), but this means that the lighting state has not been set. Therefore, in this case, first, the rotation speed identification process for identifying the rotation speed of the rotation member 820 is executed (S6606). The details of this rotation speed identification process (S6606) will be described later with reference to FIG. 182.

When the processing of S6606 is completed, it is determined whether or not the rotation speed is faster than one rotation per second (S6607), and if it is determined that the rotation speed is one rotation or less per second (S6607: No), the range of the low speed rotation state. Since the rotation speed is within, in order to set the lighting state illustrated in FIG. 177, first, the data of each bit of the lighting position storage area 223ι is shifted to the upper bit side (S6608), and then the shifted data of the shifted data. Among them, it is determined whether or not the number of bits having a value of 1 (on) matches the target value (expected degree) of the present production (S6609).

In the processing of S6609, when it is determined that the number of bits having a value of 1 (on) is less than the target value (S6609: No), one bit higher than the bits having a value of 0 (off) is 1. The bit set to is set to 1 (S6610), and the process shifts to S6611. By the process of S6610, the number of circular lighting regions set to the lighting state can be increased by one. On the other hand, when the number of bits having a value of 1 (on) matches the target value (expected degree), the processing of S6610 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S6611.

In the process of S6611, among the bits of the lighting position storage area 223ι, the lighting position (circular lighting area) corresponding to the on bit is set to be lit in red, and the lighting setting flag 223κ is set to on. (S6611), this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S6607, when it is determined that the rotation speed is faster than one rotation per second (S6607: Yes), the rotating member 820 is in an accelerating state during the transition from the low speed rotation state to the high speed rotation state. This means that all the white EDs provided inside the lighting device 810 are set to the lighting state (S6612). Then, "02H" is set to the value of the lighting state counter 223θ (S6613), the first identification flag 223λ is set to off (S6614), and this process is terminated.

By executing this low-speed processing, it is possible to set the lighting state described above in FIG. 177 in the low-speed rotation state, so that the appearance quality can be improved.

Next, the rotation speed identification process (S6606) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 182. As described above, this rotation speed identification process (S6606) is a process for identifying (calculating) the rotation speed of the rotating member 820. In this rotation speed identification process (S6606), first, it is determined whether or not the first identification flag 223λ is on (S6701).

If it is determined in the processing of S6701 that the initial identification flag 223λ is not on (that is, it is off) (S6701: No), the value of the speed identification timer 223μ is stored in the previous value storage area 223ν ( S6702), the initial identification flag 223λ is set to ON (S6703), and this process ends. As described above, by storing the value of the speed identification timer 223μ in the previous value storage area 223ν, the time required for the rotating member 820 to rotate 60 degrees in the next rotation speed identification process can be easily calculated. be able to.

On the other hand, in the process of S6701 when it is determined that the initial identification flag 223λ is on (S6701: Yes), the value of the speed identification timer 223μ is read (S6704), and the read value and the previous value storage area are read. The difference from the value stored in is calculated (S6705). This difference represents the time from when the output of the rotation sensor becomes H last time to when it becomes H again this time. That is, it means the time required for the rotating member 820 to rotate 60 degrees. When the processing of S6705 is completed, the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is then calculated from the calculated difference (time required to rotate 60 degrees), stored in the speed storage area (S6706), and the main processing is completed. To do. An appropriate lighting state can be set according to the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 calculated by this process.

Next, the above-mentioned acceleration processing (S6504) will be described with reference to FIG. 183. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the acceleration processing (S6504). This acceleration processing (S6504) is a process for setting a lighting state in the acceleration state during the transition from the low-speed rotation state to the high-speed rotation state.

In the acceleration processing (S6504), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6801), and when it is determined that the output is not H (that is, L) (S6801: No). ), This process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the output is H in the process of S6801 (S6802: Yes), the above-mentioned rotation is determined in order to determine whether or not the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 has reached the speed in the high-speed rotation state. The speed identification process (S6802) is executed. Since this rotation speed identification process is merely the same process as the rotation speed identification process described with reference to FIG. 182, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the processing of S6802 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the calculated rotation speed is 3 rotations per second (S6803), and it is determined that the calculated rotation speed is not 3 rotations per second (1 rotation or more and less than 3 rotations per second). (S6803: No) does not shift to the high-speed rotation state, so this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S6803, when it is determined that the rotation speed of the rotating member is 3 rotations per second (S6803: Yes), it means that the state has changed to the high-speed rotation state. Switch. That is, a command for setting the lighting mode of the lighting frequency of 24 Hz and the on DUTY of 0.5% is set for the LED driver of the lighting device 810 (S6804). After that, by setting "03H" as the value of the lighting state counter 223θ, it indicates that the state has transitioned to the high-speed rotation state (S6805), the first identified flag 223λ is set to off (S6806), and this process ends. To do. By this acceleration processing, the transition to the high-speed rotation state can be immediately identified and the lighting state can be switched.

Next, the above-mentioned high-speed processing (S6506) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 184. As described above, this high-speed processing (S6506) is a processing for setting the lighting state when the rotating member 820 is set to the high-speed rotating state. In this high-speed processing, first, it is determined whether or not the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6901), when it is determined that the output is not H (that is, L) (S6901: No), and then , It is determined whether or not the lighting setting flag 223κ is on (S6902).

If it is determined in the process of S6902 that the lighting setting flag 223κ is off (S6902: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S6902, when it is determined that the lighting setting flag 223κ is on (S6902: Yes), the lighting state of the circular lighting area in which the red LED is set to be lit is canceled (turned off) (S6903). ), Set the lighting set flag 223κ to off (S6904), and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S6901 when it is determined that the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6901), it is determined whether or not the lighting setting flag 223λ is on, and the lighting setting flag 223λ is on. In the case of (S6905), it means that the lighting state has already been set, and since it is not necessary to set the lighting state again, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lighting setting flag 223λ is not on (that is, it is off) (S6906: No), then the lighting period in the high-speed rotation state (24 Hz, on DUTY 0.5% period). It is determined whether or not (S6906), and if it is not the lighting period (S6906: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S6906, when it is determined that the lighting period (24 Hz, on DUTY 0.5% period) is in the high-speed rotation state (S6906: Yes), then the high-speed rotation state is terminated from the rotation speed of the rotating member 820. In order to determine whether or not it is, the rotation speed identification process is executed (S6907). Since the rotation speed identification process (S6907) is the same process as the rotation speed identification process (S6606) described above in FIG. 182, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the rotation speed identification process (S6907) is completed, it is then determined whether or not the calculated rotation speed is less than 3 rotations per second (S6908), and if it is less than 3 rotations per second (S698: Yes). Since it means that the high-speed rotation state is terminated based on the operation scenario and the rotating member 820 starts decelerating toward the rotation stop, the processes of S6909 to S6911 for setting the end of the lighting state are executed. That is, by setting the extinguishing of all the LEDs (S6909) and setting "00H" for the lighting state counter 223θ, it is shown that the state of performing the lighting control of the lighting device 810 is completed (S6910). Then, the lighting setting flag 223κ is set to off, and all the data in the lighting position storage area 223ι is cleared to 0 (S6911), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6908 that the rotation speed is not less than 3 rotations per second (the rotation speed in the high-speed rotation state is maintained) (S6908: No), first, the lighting position storage area The data of each bit of 223ι is shifted to the lower bit side (S6912). That is, the data is shifted in the opposite direction to the low speed rotation state. Then, referring to the data after the shift, the red LED provided at the lighting position (circular lighting area) corresponding to the bit whose value is 1 (on) is set to the ON state (S6913). Then, the lighting setting flag 223κ is set to ON (S6914), and this process is terminated.

By executing the process of S6913, in addition to the white LED controlled in the lighting state illustrated in FIG. 178, the red LEDs provided in the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are controlled to display the variation. The expected degree of jackpot can be displayed again. Further, since the red LED is lit only during the lighting period of the white LED and when the output of the rotation sensor is H, the red LED is lit every time the rotating member 820 rotates 180 degrees. Set. This is because the angle at which the rotating member 820 rotates in one cycle of lighting is 45 degrees, whereas the circular lighting regions are arranged every 60 degrees, so that the least common multiple of these is 180 degrees. Here, as described above, when the rotating member 820 is rotated 45 degrees clockwise in the high-speed rotation state, it looks like it is rotated 15 degrees counterclockwise from the player's point of view. Therefore, when the rotating member 820 is rotated 180 degrees clockwise, it looks as if it is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the player's point of view. Therefore, by executing the processes of S6912 and S6913, the lighting position of the red LED is made to follow the appearance of the player counterclockwise each time the rotation is advanced by one circular lighting region counterclockwise. You can move one around. Therefore, in the high-speed rotation state, it is possible to make the appearance as if the rotation direction is changed only by the lighting control without changing the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotating member 820. In addition, it is possible to perform a lighting effect of a red LED indicating the degree of expectation according to the appearance that the rotation has started in the opposite direction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, a rotary lighting unit 800 that performs both a rotary operation and a lighting operation is added to the configuration. The rotary lighting unit 800 is composed of a rotary member 820 that rotates and a lighting device 810 that has a fixed orientation, and the circular lighting device 810 is circular through through holes 821a to 821f provided in the rotary member 820. The player is made to visually recognize the red light emitted from the lighting areas 811a to 811f, and the degree of expectation for the jackpot is notified by the number of light emitting points. However, if one or a plurality of circular lighting areas are lit in a state where the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are misaligned, there is a risk that the appearance will be halfway. Therefore, in this control example, the corresponding circular lighting area is controlled to be lit only when the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f coincide with each other, and the lighting device is lit when the positions are displaced. It is configured to turn off the entire 810. With this configuration, the appearance quality of the rotary lighting unit 800 can be improved.

Further, in this control example, the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 can be determined according to the detection frequency of the rotation sensor, and the lighting control of the lighting device 810 can be changed according to the rotation speed. Instead of setting the rotation control of the rotating member 820 and the lighting control of the lighting device 810 independently according to the elapsed time, the lighting control of the lighting device 810 is changed by discriminating the actual rotation speed of the rotating member 820. By doing so, it is possible to execute lighting control that matches the actual operation of the rotating member 820.

In this control example, the lighting device 810 is arranged on the back side of the rotating member 820, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be arranged on the back side of the rotating member 820, and an image showing the degree of expectation of a jackpot may be displayed at each through-hole position. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect with a higher degree of freedom as compared with the case where the lighting device 810 is arranged, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this control example, the rotating member 820 is provided with six through holes 821a to 821f, but the number of through holes can be arbitrarily determined. Further, the configuration in which the lighting mode of the lighting device 810 can be visually recognized from the front side of the rotating member 820 is not limited to the through hole penetrating to the back side. For example, instead of the through hole, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or the like may be arranged so that the lighting mode on the back side can be visually recognized. Further, by making the thickness thinner than the other positions of the rotating member 820, the lighting mode on the back side may be easier to see than the other parts.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front rail portion 715 is formed from a single arc shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front rail portion 715 may be formed from a plurality of arcs, and the directions of adjacent arcs may be reversed (wave shape). In this case, since the slide moving speed of the effect member 620 is intermittently changed and the posture of the effect member 620 is unstable, it is possible to make the effect member 620 rattle.

In each of the above embodiments, when the effect member 620 forms an inverted state, the case where the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is vertically above the first shaft branch 613 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the center of gravity may be arranged diagonally above the first shaft branch 613.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the upper surface of the cushioning rib 322 of the left lower plate member 320 is horizontal in the left-right direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper surface of the cushioning rib 322 may be inclined downward as it approaches the outer side in the width direction. In this case, the speed of the sphere flowing into the upper surface of the lower left plate member 320 from the outside in the board width direction can be reduced by the acceleration in the gravity direction, and the deceleration time of the sphere can be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is formed by a long hole has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sliding hole 643 may be formed in a circular shape, and the displacement between the sliding hole 643 and the sliding shaft portion 621a may be adjusted by expanding and contracting the transmission member 640. In this case, the arrangement range of the transmission member 640 can be suppressed.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the position of the contact portion 644 can be switched between the two positions has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position of the contact portion 644 may be continuously variable (movable). In this case, the rate of change in the urging force of the torsion spring 650 can be continuously increased.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the posture of the tip swinging member 6556 changes at two positions has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the posture change of the tip swing member 6556 may be caused in a plurality of stages. In this case, it is possible to form a plurality of types of swing amounts of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540, and it is possible to increase the variation of the effect.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Of course, each of the above-described embodiments and control examples, or a part thereof may be combined and configured. Further, although it is composed of a plurality of control devices, it may be composed of one integrated control device or several integrated control devices.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<An example of the technical idea of changing the driving force transmission with the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550>
A crank member that is rotated around a first axis and has a protrusion projecting at a position eccentric to the first axis, and an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted are provided and separated from the first position and the first position. An arm member formed so as to be movable between the second position and a driving device for generating a driving force for rotating the crank member about the first axis are provided, and the insertion portion is inserted. When the protrusion abuts on the inner peripheral surface of the insertion portion facing the moving direction of the protrusion, the driving force is transmitted to the arm member, and the arm member is moved to the first position and the second position. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a transmission region formed so as to be movable between positions and a non-transmission region which is a region connected to the transmission region and in which transmission of the driving force is blocked. A1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a crank member having a protrusion protruding at a position eccentric from the rotation axis and an arm member having an insertion portion through which the protrusion of the crank member is inserted are provided. , There is a gaming machine in which the arm member operates in conjunction with the rotation of the crank member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-000306). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the crank member and the arm member are always interlocked with each other. Therefore, the arm member is driven from the start of the crank member, and the timing of starting the crank member and the timing of driving the arm member cannot be shifted. In this case, when the crank member is started, a large force is required to overcome the inertia of the crank member and the arm member, which causes a problem that the drive device becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, since the insertion portion of the arm member includes a transmission region and a non-transmission region connected to the transmission region, the crank is in a state where the protrusion is inserted into the non-transmission region. By starting the member, the timing of driving the arm member and the timing of starting the crank member can be shifted. That is, even if the crank member is started, the driving force is not transmitted to the arm member until the protrusion enters the transmission region from the non-transmission region. As a result, it is possible to suppress the driving force required when starting the crank member, and it is possible to reduce the size of the driving device.

The arm member may be stopped or moved while the protrusion moves in the non-transmission region. For example, when the arm member is moved, it may be moved by gravity or an elastic force generated by an auxiliary elastic spring.

Examples of the insertion portion include a recessed portion having a bottom and a long hole through which the insertion portion is inserted.

In the game machine A1, the crank member is formed so as to be able to rotate one or more rotations, and the insertion portion becomes the transmission region when the crank member is rotated in one rotation direction, while the crank member is formed. The gaming machine A2 is provided with a selection region that becomes the non-transmission region by being rotated in another rotation direction that is the opposite direction of the one rotation direction.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the mode of transmitting the driving force to the arm member can be changed depending on the rotation direction of the crank member. As a result, by reversing the direction of the driving force of the driving device without changing the rotational speed of the crank member, it is possible to form two speed modes of the arm member when the crank members are arranged in the same phase. It is possible to increase the variation in the speed of the arm member.

In the game machine A2, the insertion portion is separated from the protrusion and the inner peripheral surface of the insertion portion facing the moving direction of the protrusion when the crank member is rotated in one rotation direction. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the selection region is formed by providing a margin portion to be formed.

In addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the game machine A3 is formed by the insertion portion having a margin portion, so that the mode of transmitting the driving force to the arm member is changed. No member is required, and the material cost can be reduced.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, at least one of the first position or the second position is formed as the end position of the movement range of the arm member, and the first position or the end position formed as the end position. When the arm member is arranged at either one of the second positions, the arm member formed as the terminal position toward the other on the opposite side of either the first position or the second position. A game machine A4 characterized in that a bound suppression mechanism for suppressing movement is formed.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, when the arm member is arranged at either the first position or the second position formed as the end position of the movable range of the arm member, the arm member is arranged. It is possible to suppress the driving force that needs to be generated by the driving device in order to suppress the movement of the arm member toward the other on the opposite side. Therefore, the durability of the drive device can be improved.

As the bounce suppressing mechanism, the arm is used when the attractive force of the magnet is used, when the movement is suppressed by a claw-shaped member, and when the load received from the arm member by the protrusion of the crank member is directed in the axial direction of the crank member. An example is a case where an insertion portion of a member is formed.

When attracting with a magnet, the magnet is required as a separate member, but the internal composition of the magnet can generate attractive forces of various sizes, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

When the claw-shaped member suppresses the movement, a drive device for operating the claw-shaped member is required, but the claw-shaped member can mechanically stop the movement of the arm member.

When the insertion portion of the arm member is formed in such a manner that the load received from the protrusion of the crank member from the arm member is directed toward the axis of the crank member, it is not necessary to dispose of another member for suppressing the movement of the arm member. The bounce of the arm member can be mechanically suppressed.

In the game machine A4, when the arm member is arranged at at least one of the first position and the second position, the outer shape of the insertion portion in the vicinity of the connection position of the non-transmission region with the transmission region is the same. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the bounce suppressing mechanism is formed by being substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion about the rotation axis of the crank member.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the bounce suppressing mechanism is formed by continuing the rotation of the crank member after the arm member is arranged at the first position or the second position. As a result, the change from the moving state of the arm member to the stopped state can be smoothly formed.

Further, in the bound suppression mechanism, since the load applied from the insertion portion to the protrusion is directed to the rotation axis of the crank member, it is possible to suppress the load applied in the rotation direction of the crank member and suppress the load applied to the drive device. can do.

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is arranged at the first position, the outer shape of the insertion portion in the vicinity of the connection position of the non-transmission region with the transmission region is the outer shape of the crank member. It is substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion about the rotation axis, and an urging force for moving the arm member from the first position to the second position is applied to the non-transmission region of the insertion portion. At least one of the inner recessed portion protruding inside the insertion portion or the outer recessed portion protruding outside the insertion portion having a size capable of accommodating the protrusion is formed on the side surface on the first position side. A game machine A6 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is arranged at the first position, the outer shape near the connection position with the transmission area of the non-transmission area of the insertion portion. However, it is substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion centered on the rotation axis of the crank member, and an urging force for moving the arm member from the first position to the second position is applied to the arm member. In this case, by arranging the protrusion of the crank member in the non-transmission region of the insertion portion, the movement of the arm member is prevented by the protrusion, and the arm member is stopped. When the crank member is rotated and the protrusion is moved in the non-transmission region so that the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess are arranged to face each other, the arm member is moved. That is, when the protrusion is arranged to face the inner recess, the inner recess is pushed out into the protrusion and the arm member is moved to the opposite side of the crank member. Further, when the protrusion is arranged to face the outer recess, the protrusion is housed in the outer recess and the arm member is moved to the crank member side.

As a result, the protrusion of the crank member moves in the non-transmission region, so that the movement width is different from the movement movement of the arm member that occurs when the protrusion moves in the transmission region due to the rotation of the crank member. Can be caused. Therefore, it is possible to improve the durability of the drive device and to change the moving width of the arm member at the same time.

That is, in order to change the moving width of the arm member, it is necessary to reverse the direction of the driving force of the driving device according to the moving width of the arm member. In this case, the control load on the drive device becomes large, and it is difficult to perform an operation having a small movement width such as vibration.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A6, the protrusion of the crank member is moved in the non-transmission region, and the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess are arranged to face each other, so that the movement of the arm members having different movement widths is formed. To. Therefore, the movement width of the movement of the arm member can be changed without reversing the direction of the driving force of the driving device. Further, by narrowing the forming interval of the adjacent inner recessed portion or outer recessed portion, it is possible to cause the arm member to perform an operation having a small movement width such as vibration.

The mode in which the protrusion can be accommodated may be a mode in which the recessed portion includes the entire protrusion, or a mode in which a part of the protrusion is included in the recess.

<An example of the technical idea of limiting the swing width of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 with the arcuate hole 554>
A movable member that can move along a predetermined movement locus and can be arranged at a first position and a second position that are different from each other, and the movable member that moves corresponding to the movable member and abuts on the movable member to move the movable member. A stopper member that limits the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the member and changes the movement width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or the second position. A game machine B1 characterized by being provided with.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a movable member formed so as to be movable and a stopper member for limiting the moving width of the movable member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-016623). reference). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the stopper member is fixed so as not to be movable, the stopper member is prepared separately depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or the second position. There is a problem that the space for arranging the stopper member becomes wide.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the stopper member moves in response to the movable member, the stopper member when the movable member is arranged at the first position is arranged at the second position. It can also be used as a stopper member for cases. As a result, the space for arranging the stopper member can be suppressed.

Further, since the stopper member changes the moving width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or the movable member is arranged at the second position, the variation of the moving width of the movable member is increased. be able to.

Examples of the stopper member include a protrusion that protrudes from the transmission member and comes into contact with the movable member, and an inner wall portion of a recess that is recessed in the transmission member and accommodates a part of the movable member.

Examples of modes of movement include linear movement, curved movement, meandering movement, vibration, rocking, and rotational movement. Further, the movement width in each movement mode means, for example, an actual movement distance or a straight line distance between two points in the case of linear movement, curved movement, meandering movement, vibration, etc., and swings and rotational movements. In the case of, etc., it means the actual movement distance, movement angle, etc.

In the game machine B1, the movable member includes an intermediate member that is swingably supported by the first shaft and expands and contracts in the radial direction of the first shaft, and the first position and the second position , The expansion / contraction length of the intermediate member is different, the predetermined movement locus is formed in an arc shape centered on the first axis, and the stopper member is a case where the intermediate member is in a predetermined expansion / contraction state. The gaming machine B2, characterized in that the movable member is extended along the predetermined movement locus.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the movable member is oscillatingly supported around the first axis and is formed so as to be able to expand and contract in the radial direction of the first axis. It is equipped with a member. Therefore, the radius of curvature of a predetermined movement locus of the movable member centered on the first axis can be changed depending on the length of the intermediate member in the expansion / contraction direction.

Here, the stopper member is extended along a predetermined movement locus of the movable member when the intermediate member is in a predetermined expansion / contraction state (curvature in the extension direction of the stopper member and the intermediate member in a predetermined expansion / contraction state). The curvature of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member is the same as the case where In this case, when the intermediate member is in a predetermined expansion / contraction state, the movable member is moved along the stopper member, and the movable member can be moved along the extending direction of the stopper member. Therefore, the moving width (swing angle) of the movable member can be maximized.

On the other hand, when the intermediate member is in a stretched state different from the predetermined stretched state, the curvature of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member and the curvature in the extending direction of the stopper member can be made different, and the predetermined movement of the movable member can be made different. The locus and the extending direction of the stopper member can be crossed. Therefore, the moving width of the movable member can be shortened. Therefore, the moving width of the movable member can be changed by changing the expansion / contraction state of the intermediate member.

In the game machine B2, the movable member includes a protrusion projecting toward the stopper member, the stopper member includes an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted, and the protrusion is inserted into the insertion portion. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the movable member and the stopper member are interlocked with each other in the expansion / contraction direction of the intermediate member in the inserted state, and the movable member is brought into contact with the insertion portion.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the movable member and the stopper member are interlocked with each other in the expansion / contraction direction of the intermediate member by inserting the protrusion of the movable member into the insertion portion of the stopper member. , The drive device for expanding and contracting the movable member and the drive device for moving the stopper member can be used in combination. Further, the insertion portion regulates the movement of the movable member by being brought into contact with the movable member. That is, the insertion portion of the stopper member has a function as a stopper for restricting the movement of the movable member and a function for interlocking the movable member and the stopper member. As a result, the functions can be integrated.

In the game machine B3, the game machine B4 is characterized in that the arrangement of the first axis with respect to the insertion portion is reversed between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side by the expansion and contraction operation of the intermediate member.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, the intermediate member is expanded and contracted, so that the arrangement of the first axis with respect to the insertion portion is reversed between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side. As a result, the movement width of the movable member can be changed depending on whether the first axis is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the insertion portion or the first axis is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the insertion portion.

That is, when the first axis is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement locus of the protrusion follows the shape of the insertion portion when the movable member is moved by a predetermined movement locus), the protrusion The movement locus and the shape of the insertion portion are approximated, and the movement width of a predetermined movement locus of the movable member can be widened. On the other hand, when the first axis is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement locus of the protrusion when the movable member is moved in a predetermined movement locus is substantially reversed from the shape of the insertion portion), the protrusion The angle formed between the movement locus of the movable member and the inner wall surface of the insertion portion is increased, and the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member can be narrowed.

In the game machine B3 or B4, the insertion portion is formed so that the posture can be changed while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member, and the posture of the insertion portion is changed so that the movable member and the insertion portion come into contact with each other. Is changed, and the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member is changed.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3 or B4, the contact position between the movable member and the insertion part is changed by changing the posture of the insertion portion while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member. In this case, the movement width of a predetermined movement locus of the movable member can be changed while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member.

In any of the game machines B3 to B5, the insertion portion is provided with a groove portion that allows the protrusion portion to enter and exit along the movement locus, and the protrusion portion is separated from the insertion portion via the groove portion. A gaming machine B6, wherein a state can be formed, and the movable member includes a positioning assisting portion that is engaged with the stopper member in the separated state.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B3 to B5, it is possible to form a separated state in which the protrusion is separated from the insertion portion via the groove, and the movable member is in the separated state. A positioning auxiliary portion that is engaged with the stopper member is provided. Therefore, the forming range of the stopper member can be reduced as compared with the operating range of the movable member, the material cost of the stopper member can be reduced, and the positional deviation between the movable member and the stopper member in the separated state can be reduced. Can be prevented. That is, even if the protrusion is separated from the insertion portion of the stopper member, the positioning auxiliary portion suppresses the relative movement of the movable member with respect to the stopper member, so that the protrusion can be returned to the insertion portion again.

<Example of technical idea to support two points of production member 620 that is supported upside down>
A base member, a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed on the base member and moves upward from a predetermined position, and a drive device that generates a driving force that displaces the movable member are connected to the movable member. In a gaming machine including a transmission member that transmits a driving force generated from the driving device to the movable member, the transmission member is swingably supported by a shaft support portion formed on the base member. The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the length from the shaft support portion to the connecting position of the movable member and the transmission member is shorter than the length from the support portion to the connecting position of the movable member and the transmission member. ..

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that drives a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed on a base member and moves upward from a predetermined position by transmitting a driving force by a gear (for example). (Refer to JP2011-120640). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the amount of movement of the center of gravity of the movable member when the drive device is operated in the minimum unit of the resolution of the control of the drive device (for example, one step in the stepping motor) is the support portion of the movable member. Is proportional to the length from to the center of gravity of the movable member. Therefore, the farther the center of gravity of the movable member is from the support portion in the radial direction, the more difficult it is to adjust the position of the center of gravity of the movable member.

Further, when the center of gravity of the movable member is displaced to one side from the inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the support portion, a driving force that displaces the movable member in the opposite direction is generated to invert the movable member. Even if an attempt is made to maintain the state, if the center of gravity shifts to the other side due to the driving force, the direction of the driving force and the direction of gravity match, and the movable member is significantly displaced.

Therefore, there is a problem that the longer the movable member is in the radial direction of the support portion, the more difficult it becomes to rest the movable member in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the support portion.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving device to the movable member to move the movable member up is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion of the base member and connected to the movable member. The length from the connecting position of the movable member and the connecting member to the shaft support portion is formed shorter than the length from the connecting position of the movable member and the connecting member to the supporting portion. Therefore, even when the movable member is long in the radial direction of the support portion, the amount of movement of the center of gravity of the movable member when the drive device is operated in the minimum unit of the control resolution of the drive device can be suppressed. it can. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the movable member stand still in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the support portion.

In addition, as a mode in which the movable member is supported by the base member, a mode in which the movable member is pivotally supported by the base member, a mode in which the movable member is slidably supported by the base member, and the like. A combined embodiment and the like are exemplified.

In the game machine C1, the transmission member is characterized in that the arm length from the shaft support portion to the connection position with the movable member is shortened as the movable member moves upward from the predetermined position. Machine C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the more the movable member displaced around the support portion moves up from a predetermined position, the more the transmission member from the shaft support portion to the connection position with the movable member. Arm length is shortened. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved as compared with the case where the arm length of the transmission member is constant.

For example, when the rotation speed of the drive device for rotating the transmission member is constant, the arm length of the transmission member is fixed to a predetermined first length, and the arm length of the transmission member is the first. The description will be made on the assumption that the second length is fixed, which is shorter than the length of. When the rotation speed of the drive device is constant, the transmission member is fixed at the first length as compared with the case where the arm length of the transmission member is fixed at the second length. The moving speed of the center of gravity of the movable member becomes high when the members are arranged in a predetermined phase.

Here, in the vicinity of a predetermined position, the movable member is quickly operated at the speed generated when the transmission member is set to the first arm length, and in the vicinity of the inverted state, the speed generated when the transmission member is set to the second arm length. Consider the case where you want to move the movable member slowly. As a method for that, a method of changing the rotation speed of the drive device on the way can be considered, but it cannot be adopted when it is difficult to change the rotation speed of the drive device. Further, even if the rotation speed of the drive device can be changed, in order to change the rotation speed on the way, a detection sensor for detecting the timing of the change is required, which causes a problem that the cost increases. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the arm length from the shaft support portion of the transmission member to the connection position between the transmission member and the movable member is the predetermined position of the transmission member. It is formed in such a manner that it is shortened as it moves upward from. Therefore, the transmission member can be set to the first arm length near the predetermined position, and the transmission member can be set to the second arm length near the inverted state, so that the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved. ..

In addition, as a configuration in which the arm length from the shaft support portion to the connecting position between the transmission member and the movable member is fixed, a case where the protruding portion protruding from the transmission member is inserted into the movable member and connected is exemplified. To. Further, as a configuration in which the arm length can be changed, a long hole is formed in the transmission member, and a protrusion projecting from the movable member is slidably inserted into the long hole of the transmission member, or is movable. An example is an example in which an elongated hole is provided in a portion where the member is supported by the support portion, and an insertion shaft rod to be inserted into the elongated hole is formed from the base member.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the movable member includes a protrusion projecting in a direction parallel to the support portion, and the transmission member is an elongated hole extending in the radial direction of the shaft support portion. A game machine C3 comprising an insertion portion through which the protrusion portion is inserted.

In the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the insertion portion is extended in the radial direction of the shaft support portion, and the protrusion of the transmission member is inserted into the insertion portion to form the transmission member and the movable member. Is connected, so that the moving direction of the connecting position is limited to the radial direction of the shaft support. Therefore, as the transmission arm swings, the length from the shaft support to the connection position of the transmission member with the movable member can be mechanically changed.

Examples of the insertion portion include a long hole formed through and a recessed portion formed as a bottomed depression.

In the game machine C3, the shaft support portion is arranged vertically above the support portion, and the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged on a straight line connecting the support portion and the protrusion portion.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, when the movable member takes a posture in which the protrusion is arranged vertically above the support, the center of gravity of the support, the shaft support, the protrusion and the movable member is set. It is formed on the vertical line. In this case, the gravity applied to the center of gravity of the movable member is applied vertically downward to the support portion and the shaft support portion. Therefore, since the force in the rotational direction is not applied to the movable member, the posture of the movable member can be maintained even if the power of the driving device is cut off. As a result, the load on the drive device can be reduced.

In the game machines C1 to C4, a worm gear is interposed between the transmission member and the drive device, and the rotation of the drive device is decelerated by the worm gear.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machines C1 to C4, a worm gear is interposed between the transmission member and the drive device, and the rotation of the drive device is decelerated by the worm gear, so that the drive device is controlled. When operating in the minimum unit of the resolution of, the moving width of the movable member can be significantly reduced. Further, since the force transmission direction via the worm gear is limited to one direction from the drive device side to the transmission member side, it is possible to prevent the worm gear from rotating due to the load from the transmission member side, and the drive device. It is possible to reduce the load on the drive device when the vehicle is stopped.

In any of the game machines C1 to C5, an urging device is provided above the support portion in which an urging force for moving the center of gravity of the movable member is generated in both directions in the displacement direction of the movable member. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the center of gravity of the movable member is balanced in the displacement direction in an inverted state arranged vertically above the support portion, and the movable member becomes larger as the movable member is displaced from the inverted state.

According to the game machine C6, in any of the game machines C1 to C5, the urging device generates an urging force for moving the center of gravity of the movable member above the support portion, and the urging force is based on the center of gravity of the movable member. It becomes larger as the movable member is displaced from the state where it is arranged vertically above the support portion (inverted state). That is, the urging force can be minimized in the inverted state.

Therefore, by increasing the urging force when the movable member is moved up from a predetermined position, it is possible to reduce the burden on the drive device that moves the movable member up and down from the state where the movable member is arranged at the predetermined position.

Further, the urging force is generated in both directions in the displacement direction of the movable member, and is balanced in the displacement direction in the inverted state. Therefore, when the movable member is moved up from a predetermined position and the drive device is stopped and controlled, even if the movable member does not reach the inverted state or passes through the inverted state, the posture of the movable member is inverted by the urging force. Can be directed to. This makes it easy to stop the movable member in an inverted state.

In the game machine C6, the movable member can form a first state in which the center of gravity is displaced by a predetermined amount from vertically above the support portion and a second state in which the center of gravity is displaced by a predetermined amount or more. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the rate of change in the urging force when the displacements are the same is larger in the second state than in the first state.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, the movable member is larger than a predetermined amount from the inverted state than the first state on the inverted state side in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged vertically above the support portion. In the second state of displacement, the rate of change in the urging force when the displacement is the same is larger. In this case, when the movable member is started from the state in which the movable member is arranged in the second state, the burden at the time of starting the drive device can be suppressed. Further, since the acceleration of the movable member when the movable member is arranged near the inverted state can be reduced, it is possible to easily stop the movable member in the inverted state.

<Example of technical concept in which the spring constant of the torsion spring 650 changes during swinging>
A movable member formed so as to be movable between the first position and the second position, a driving device for generating a driving force for moving the movable member, and an urging force for returning the movable member to the first position. In a gaming machine including an urging device to generate, the movable member is movable with respect to a change rate of urging force that occurs when the movable member is arranged in a first urging region from the first position to a predetermined position. When the member is arranged in the second urging region formed in the region connected to the first urging region and separated from the first position, the rate of change of the urging force generated is large. A game machine D1 characterized by this.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that uses an urging force by an urging device such as an elastic spring as an auxiliary force when moving a movable member by a driving force generated by the driving device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011). -1240640). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the urging force of the urging device is proportionally increased by the displacement amount of the movable member, and it is difficult to change the purpose of the urging device by arranging the movable member. There was a problem that it was. That is, it was difficult to make the movement of the movable member supple by suppressing the urging force in one region, and to improve the urging force to make the movement of the movable member abrupt in another region.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the rate of change of the urging force urged toward the first position is such that the movable member has a second attachment as compared with the case where the movable member is arranged in the first urging region. It is larger when it is placed in the force area. That is, for example, when the movable member stopped at the second position is started toward the first position (second urging region), a sufficient urging force can be obtained by the urging device, while the movable member is the first. When arranged in the urging region, the change in urging force is suppressed and the movement of the movable member can be made flexible (gentle).

In addition, as a mode in which the change rate of the urging force of the urging device is changed by the arrangement of the movable member, the number of urging devices for generating the urging amount in the movable member increases in the middle, or the urging device is used. An example is a case where the spring constant of the elastic spring is changed by the arrangement of the movable member, which is formed from the elastic spring.

In the game machine D1, the urging device is a pair of long members that intersect the moving direction of the movable member and are arranged on a pair of surfaces that sandwich the movable member in the moving direction, and one end thereof. The movable member is formed of an elastic spring whose portions are arranged to face each other on both side surfaces of the movable member and whose other end, which is the opposite end of the one end, is restrained from moving. A main body sandwiched between a pair of long members and a main body formed on the opposite side of the main body with respect to the pair of long members, and at least one of the pair of long members in the moving direction of the main body. A contact portion formed so as to be contactable, the contact portion is connected and fixed to the movable member, and when the movable member is arranged in the first urging region, the movable member becomes the pair. Of the long members of the above, the movable member is brought into contact with one of the long members on the side where the distance from the movable member is shortened by the movement of the movable member, and an urging force is applied, and the movable member is attached to the other long member. A game machine D2 characterized in that the contact portion is brought into contact with the contact portion and an urging force is applied.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the change rate of the urging force by the urging device is changed, and the contact timing between the movable member and the pair of long members is shifted for each long member. Can be formed by Therefore, it is not necessary to change the urging force of the urging device by control or to prepare another member for improving the urging force.

That is, since the movement of the other end of the pair of long members is restricted, one long member on the side where the distance from the movable member becomes closer due to the movement of the movable member is pressed against the movable member and moves. The other elongated member on the opposite side receives no force from the movable member. Therefore, in the first urging region, when the movable member is moved, the other long member arranged on the opposite side of the movable member in the moving direction stays in place.

On the other hand, in the second urging region, the movable member is moved so that the other long member comes into contact with the contact portion. As a result, an urging force is also generated from the other long member. Therefore, the urging force applied to the movable member in the second urging region can be increased.

Examples of the elastic spring include a coil spring, a torsion spring, and a leaf spring.

In the game machines D1 or D2, the urging device is a pair of long members that intersect the moving direction of the movable member and are arranged on a pair of surfaces that sandwich the movable member in the moving direction. The movable member is formed of an elastic spring whose end portions are arranged to face each other on both side surfaces of the movable member and the other end portion which is the opposite end portion of the one end portion is restrained from moving. , The main body portion sandwiched between the pair of long members and at least one of the pair of long members formed on the opposite side of the main body portion with respect to the pair of long members and in the moving direction of the main body portion. When the movable member is connected and fixed to the movable member and the movable member is arranged in the first urging region, the movable member is provided with a contact portion formed so as to be in contact with the movable member. Of the pair of long members, the movable member is brought into contact with one of the long members on the side where the distance from the movable member becomes closer to be given an urging force, and the movable member is subjected to the second urging. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that when it is arranged in the region, the intermediate portion of the one long member is pressed against the contact portion arranged on the one long member side with respect to the main body portion.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the change in the rate of change of the urging force is formed by pressing the intermediate portion of one of the long members against the abutting portion. That is, one long member that has already been deformed by the movement of the movable member is further deformed starting from the intermediate portion pressed against the abutting portion, so that the rate of change in the urging force changes. Here, in the deformation starting from the intermediate portion, the length of the portion subject to the deformation is shorter than the deformation starting from the other end portion, so that the ratio of the change in the urging force to the moving amount of the movable member is Increase. Thereby, in the second urging region, the change in the urging force with respect to the moving amount of the movable member can be increased. Therefore, the rate of change of the urging force can be increased.

In the game machine D3, the one long member has a first bending point that is bent toward the contact portion side that is arranged to face each other, and at the first bending point, the one long member is said. A game machine D4 characterized in that it is pressed against a contact portion.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, one long member comes into contact with the abutting portion arranged to face each other at the first bending point, so that one long member comes into contact. It is stretched by contact with the part. Therefore, the tip end portion of the urging device that applies the urging force to the movable member can be separated from the other end portion of the long member that is the starting point of the urging force or the first bending point. Therefore, the moment that the movable member is loaded from the urging device in the second urging region can be increased.

In the game machine D4, the movable member includes a tip expansion region that expands in the moving direction so as to move away from the other end of the long member, and one of the movable member and the long member in the tip expansion region. A game machine D5 characterized in that the end portion of the game machine is in contact with the player.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, the movable member includes a tip expansion region, and the movable member and one end of the long member are brought into contact with each other in the tip expansion region. Therefore, when one of the long members is pressed against the contact portion and one of the long members is stretched, the contact position between the movable member and the long member is separated from the other end of the long member. It is moved in the direction, and the amount of deformation of the long member is increased. Therefore, the urging force applied from the urging device to the movable member can be increased.

In any of the game machines D2 to D5, the game machine D6 is characterized in that the arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion can be changed.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D2 to D5, it is possible to increase the variation of the change in the urging force generated by the long member. That is, for example, when the arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion is narrowed, the timing at which the rate of change in the urging force of the long member increases can be set earlier.

<An example of a technical idea in which a plurality of out ports are arranged and a buffer rib 322 is formed on the lower plate 320>
Inside the game area where the ball can flow down, the in-board accessory arranged in contact with the lower edge of the game area and the ball formed on one side in the width direction of the in-board accessory are played. The first out port, which is an opening for discharging from the area, and the second out port, which is an opening formed on the other side in the width direction of the in-board accessory on the opposite side in the width direction and discharging the ball from the game area. The first out port and the second out port include a lower plate portion extending from the lower side surface of the opening to the front and having a guide surface on the upper surface, and the guide portion of the lower plate portion thereof. The surface is provided with a cushioning rib extending in a rib shape in the opening direction of the corresponding side in the first out port or the second out port, and is formed by being raised from the guide surface on the outer side in the width direction. The gaming machine E1 is provided with a stepped portion, and the aspect ratio of the cushioning rib is formed to be smaller toward the outside in the width direction.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of out ports are arranged (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-192301). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, it is preferable to reduce the size of each out port as the number of out ports increases, because it is preferable to secure an arrangement space for an attacker or the like, but if the out port is made too small, There was a problem that the discharge of the game ball might be delayed.

For example, when the height at which the ball bounces up and down on the front side of the out opening is equal to or greater than the vertical width of the out opening, the ball stays in front of the out opening. Further, for example, when the side surface of the accessory is arranged on the side surface in the width direction of the out port to form a wall, the ball flowing from the width direction to the front side of the out port collides with the side surface of the accessory and bounces in the width direction. At this time, if the amount of rebound in the width direction is equal to or greater than the width of the out opening, the ball stays in front of the out opening.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the cushioning rib is formed on the guide surface formed on the lower plate portion, it is possible to suppress the bounce of the ball or decelerate the ball. That is, when the sphere collides from the vertical direction, the cushioning rib bends and deforms, so that the cushioning rib acts as a cushion and the rebound of the sphere can be suppressed. Further, when the spheres collide from the left and right directions, the spheres are fitted into the buffer ribs and braked.

Here, the cushioning rib extending in the opening direction is vulnerable to a load from the left-right direction, and may be damaged by the collision of balls from the left-right direction.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the guide surface is provided with a step portion on the outer side in the width direction, a ball flowing down from the left-right direction toward the buffer rib falls from above the step portion to the buffer rib. .. In this case, the vertical component of the direction of collision of the sphere with the buffer rib can be increased, and damage to the buffer rib can be suppressed.

Since the step portion has a function of damming a ball moving in the left-right direction on the guide surface, it is possible to prevent the ball moving on the guide surface from bouncing back beyond the width of the out opening.

Since the cushioning rib is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game area, a large bounce suppressing effect can be obtained in the vicinity of the center in the width direction of the game area where the flowing balls are likely to concentrate. As a result, the ball can be smoothly discharged from the out port. Further, by matching the curve of the lower side of the game area with the lower surface of the cushioning rib, the arrangement position of the out port can be corrected downward.

Here, the higher the formation height of the cushioning rib, the greater the effect of suppressing the bounce of the sphere because the amount of bending of the cushioning rib increases. That is, the larger the amount of bending of the cushioning rib, the more the cushioning effect works, and it is possible to easily suppress the rebound. Therefore, it is preferable to make the aspect ratio of the cushioning rib constant in the left-right direction (the length in the vertical direction is constant) for the effect of suppressing rebound.

On the other hand, if the aspect ratio of the buffer rib is made constant (the length in the vertical direction is made constant), it is necessary to increase the formation height of the step portion, and the path of the sphere to the step portion is also upward. As a result, the game area is narrowed because it is necessary to arrange the game area in, which is not preferable in terms of space efficiency.

On the other hand, in the game machine E1, the aspect ratio (length in the vertical direction) of the buffer rib is reduced on the outer side in the width direction of the game area where the flowing balls are difficult to concentrate, and the center in the width direction of the game area where the flowing balls are easy to concentrate. In, the aspect ratio (length in the vertical direction) of the buffer rib is increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the ball ejection efficiency and secure the game area at the same time.

Note that the extension in the opening direction is not particularly limited, and means that the extension is in the shape of a linear shape, a corrugation, a chevron, or the like along the opening direction.

In the game machine E1, the guide surface is provided with an outer inclined portion that is inclined downward in the width direction of the game area.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, since the guide surface is provided with an outer inclined portion, the speed of the ball flowing into the guide surface from the outside in the width direction can be reduced by the gravitational acceleration, and the ball can be reduced. The deceleration time can be shortened.

The game machine E3 is characterized in that, in the game machine E1 or E2, a non-flow area in which a ball cannot flow down is formed obliquely above at least one of the first out port and the second out port.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1 or E2, the flow of the ball diagonally downward from the non-flow area toward the guide surface is restricted, so that the flow of the ball to the guide surface is restricted. The number of routes can be reduced. Therefore, the direction in which the flowing ball bounces can be narrowed. As a result, the outer shape of at least one of the first out port and the second out port can be narrowed.

In the game machine E3, the non-flow area is arranged in the game area, and a switchgear that can be opened and closed to the front side is arranged above at least one of the first out port and the second out port. The gaming machine E4, which is formed on the front side of the opening / closing device.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, a non-flow area is formed by the switchgear. As a result, the space created by suppressing the opening size in the direction desired toward the non-flowing region side of the first out port or the second out port can be used as the arrangement space of the switchgear.

Further, in the closed state, the opening / closing device causes the ball flowing down in front of the opening / closing device to flow down the game area, and in the open state, the ball flowing down in front of the opening / closing device moves to the rear of the game area. It has the function of flowing down. Therefore, the formation of the non-flowing region can be surely performed as compared with the case where the sphere flows down irregularly due to collision with a nail or the like.

The game machine E5 is characterized in that any one of the game machines E1 to E4 is provided with a direction adjusting rib extending in a rib shape in the opening direction on the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E4, a direction adjusting rib extending in a rib shape in the opening direction is provided on the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port. , The resistance to the ball flowing down while colliding with the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port can be suppressed.

<Feature F group> (The image when the power is turned on is also used during normal operation)
A display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, a display control means for causing the display means to display the display mode, and a storage means for storing display data corresponding to the display mode displayed by the display control means. The storage means has setting means for reading the display data from the storage means and setting the display data to be displayed on the display means by the display control means, and the storage means executes initial setting of the game. The initial display data corresponding to the initial image to be displayed is stored, and the setting means reads the initial display data from the storage means in the initial setting and sets it as display data to be displayed on the display means. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that, in an effect executed after the completion of the initial setting, the initial display data read in the initial setting is used as display data to be displayed on the display means.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine, various effect images are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. In such a game machine, generally, the image information of the image to be displayed on the display device is stored in the storage means in advance, and when the image is displayed, the corresponding image information is read from the storage means to perform image processing. After applying the image, the display device is configured to display the image (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-223598). However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, as the image information increases, the amount of image data used in the gaming machine increases, and the capacity of the storage means for storing increases and the load due to the reading process and the like increases. There was a problem. Due to such problems, improvement of image display control has been required.

According to the game machine F1, since the initial display data displayed at the time of initial setting is also used for the effect after the initial setting is completed, the display data can be shared, the amount of display data can be reduced, and the image display can be performed. It has the effect of improving control.

In the game machine F1, the display means is composed of a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means, and the display control means is the first display means or the second display means. The setting means reads the initial display data from the storage means in the initial setting and displays the display data on the first display means and the second display means. It is set, and in the effect executed after the initial setting, the initial display data read in the initial setting is set as display data to be displayed on either the first display means or the second display means. A game machine F2 characterized by being something to do.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the display data can be shared for the display means composed of the first display means and the second display means, and the display control can be performed. It has the effect of reducing the load.

In the game machine F2, the game machine F3 is characterized in that the initial display data is set with the display area of the first display means and the second display means as one display area.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F2, the first display means and the second display means can be set as one display data, so that there is an effect that the display control can be simplified.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, a discrimination means for discriminating the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a discrimination result determined by the discrimination means are shown. It has a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information, and the identification information is displayed by the initial identification information displayed in the initial image and the dynamic display after the initial setting is completed. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that it is usually composed of identification information.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F3, the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the initial identification information displayed in the initial image and the normal identification information. Since it is configured, there is an effect that the player can recognize that it is the initial setting.

In the game machine F4, the initial image is a display including a display image including the initial identification information displayed to the first display means and a game information image indicating the game content displayed to the second display means. A game machine F5 characterized in that it is composed of at least an image.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F4, the initial image is composed of an initial identification information displayed on the first display means and a display image including the game information image displayed on the second display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game content and the determination result can be notified to the player at the same time even during the initial setting.

The gaming machine F4 or F5 is characterized in that the initial identification information displayed on the first display means during the initial setting is composed of a smaller amount of data than the normal identification information. F6.

According to the game machine F6, since the initial identification information is composed of display data less than the normal identification information, the control load at the time of initial setting can be reduced and the initial identification information can be read out and displayed quickly. effective.

In any of the game machines F4 to F6, the second display means is configured with a display area smaller than that of the first display means, and when the game is not performed for a predetermined period, the second display means is used. A game machine F7, wherein a display image including the game information image displayed in the initial image is displayed.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F4 to F6, when the game is not performed for a predetermined period, the initial display data is used to display the game information image included in the second display means. Since the image is displayed, there is an effect that the control load can be reduced and the game content can be notified.

In the game machine F7, when the game is not performed for the predetermined period, the display data corresponding to the display image displayed to the first display means among the initial images is set to be hidden. A game machine F8 characterized by being.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F7, since the initial image displayed on the first display means is set to be hidden, there is an effect that different display can be performed on the first display means. is there.

In any of the game machines F2 to F8, when the setting means sets the initial display data read in the initial setting for the first display means in the effect executed after the initial setting, When the display data corresponding to the second display means is set to be hidden and the display data corresponding to the first display means is set to be hidden, the display data corresponding to the first display means is set to be hidden. A game machine F9 characterized by.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F2 to F8, the first display means and the second display means can independently display using the initial display data. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine F9, when the setting means sets the initial display data read in the initial setting for the first display means in the effect executed after the initial setting, it is said that the initial setting is in progress. A game machine F10 characterized in that it is set to be displayed at a different display position.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect of the game machine F9, it is possible to make the player look as if the display is different from the display displayed by the initial setting, and the initial display data can be used in a wide variety of ways. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Characteristic G group> (The position of ○ × changes depending on the fluctuation content between the shutter and the main liquid crystal)
The first display means capable of displaying the identification information, the second display means different from the first display means, and the identification information displayed on the first display means or the second display means are dynamically displayed. The dynamic display means to be displayed, the privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the specific identification information is displayed on the first display means or the second display means, and the dynamic. The gaming machine G1 is characterized by having a switching display means for switching and displaying the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means to either the first display means or the second display means.

Here, for example, by providing a plurality of display means for producing a game machine and performing a variable effect or a jackpot effect with each display means, a player can perform a synergistic effect using the plurality of display means. A game machine for the purpose of improving the interest of the above is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-081256). However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, improvement of convenience by using a plurality of display devices has been required. Due to such problems, improvement in convenience has been required.

According to the game machine G1, the effect (dynamic display of identification information) displayed on the first display means or the second display means is either the first display means or the second display means by the switching display means. It can be switched and displayed. As a result, the identification information can be displayed at a position that is easy for the player to see according to the state of the game, which has the effect of improving convenience.

In the game machine G1, a first driving means that can be driven to a first position that makes it difficult to visually display the identification information that is dynamically displayed on the first display means, and a dynamic display on the second display means. The switching display means has a second driving means that can be driven to a second position that makes it difficult to visually recognize the identification information, and the switching display means is a case where the first driving means is the first position. The identification information is displayed on the second display means, and when the second driving means is in the second position, the identification information is displayed on the first display means. A game machine G2 characterized by this.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, there is an effect that the first driving means and the second driving means can suppress a problem that the visibility of the identification information is hindered.

In the game machine G1 or G2, the second display means has a moving means capable of moving the front side of the first display means, and the switching display means has the second display means moved by the moving means. In this case, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the identification information is switched so as to be displayed on the second display means.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G1 or G2, there is an effect that the second display means can suppress a problem that the visibility of the identification information is hindered.

In any of the game machines G1 to G3, the display data of the display mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means is the display data displayed in one display area as the first display means. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that it is composed of synthetic display data corresponding to the second display means.

According to the game machine G4, in any of the game machines G1 to G3, the display data of the first display means and the second display means can be set as the composite display data, so that the control load can be reduced. is there.

In the game machine G4, coordinate information for setting each display area of the first display means and the second display means as one display area is set, and the composite display data is the composite display data. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that it is composed of display data displayed for each coordinate corresponding to the coordinate information.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G4, there is an effect that the display data to be displayed on the first display means and the second display means can be easily set.

<Characteristic H group> (fall control)
The first in a gaming machine having a movable member having at least movable movable portions at the first position and the second position, and a driving means for driving the movable member to the third position and the fourth position. The movable from the third position to the fourth position in a state where the regulation means for restricting the movement from the position to the second position and the regulation by the regulating means are released based on the establishment of the first condition. The member is driven by the driving means, and based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, the movable member is driven from the third position to the fourth position in a state regulated by the regulating means. The gaming machine H1 is characterized by having a drive control means driven by means.

Here, for example, by moving a movable accessory provided in the game machine, a suggestion of the degree of expectation that will be a big hit is made. In such a game machine, a game machine that improves the interest of the player by increasing the movable pattern of the movable accessory has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-079687). In this case, it is necessary to use a large number of drive devices (for example, a motor) in order to increase the movable pattern of the movable accessory, and there is a problem that the power consumption increases. Due to such problems, it has been required to reduce power consumption.

According to the game machine H1, by driving the driving means, the movable part can be moved by the driving vibration or the like, so that the power consumption is increased as compared with the case where the moving part is moved electrically or the like. It has the effect of suppressing.

The game machine H1 is characterized by having a movable means for moving the movable portion from the second position to the first position.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the movable member is driven to the fourth position by the driving means, so that even when the movable portion is moved to the second position, the movable means is used for the second position. It has the effect of being able to return to one position. In this case, the movable portion may be moved to the first position by the inertial force (acceleration) for driving the movable member from the fourth position to the third position without providing the movable means.

In the game machine H1 or H2, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player and an effect indicating whether or not the privilege is given by the privilege giving means are predetermined. The drive control means has an effect executing means that executes the effect during the effect period, and the drive control means moves the movable member to the third position when the movable condition is satisfied during the period when the effect is executed by the effect execution means. It is driven to the fourth position from the above, and when the effect indicating that the privilege is given by the privilege giving means is executed, it is easy to drive in a state where the regulation by the regulating means is released. A game machine H3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1 or H2, in the production where the privilege is easily given, the movable member is easily driven to the fourth position in the state where the regulation is released, so that the movable part is the second. There is an effect that the player can be expected to be given a privilege when moving to a position.

In any of the game machines H1 to H3, the drive control means is characterized in that the movable member is moved by the same operation in a state where the regulation by the regulation means is released and a state where the regulation is regulated. Game machine H4.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H3, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the determination of whether or not the movable member is regulated by the difference in the driving operation. Here, the operation is a difference in speed, a difference in drive pattern, a difference in drive direction, and the like.

In any of the game machines H1 to H4, the drive control means is a position between the third position and the fourth position when the movable member is driven from the third position to the fourth position. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that it is temporarily stopped at an intermediate position for a predetermined period.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H4, by temporarily stopping the movable part, the movable part can be easily moved to the second position by inertial force or the like when not excited. There is.

In any of the game machines H1 to H5, the fourth position is configured at a position lower than the third position, and the driving means reciprocates between the third position and the fourth position. A game machine H6 characterized in that it is configured to be possible.

According to the game machine H6, in any of the effects of the game machines H1 to H5, there is an effect that the movable portion can be easily moved by the descending gravity.

In any of the game machines H1 to H6, the movable means is composed of a stepping motor, and the regulating means is for energizing the stepping motor in a stopped state.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of the game machines H1 to H6, the movable means and the regulating means can be configured by the stepping motor, and there is an effect that the configuration can be simplified.

<Feature I group> (Avoid executing similar effects)
The specific period is set by the effect executing means capable of executing the effect, the specific period setting means for setting the specific period during which the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means, and the specific period setting means. When the effect of the above is executed, the effect is provided with a specific condition determining means for determining whether or not a specific condition that can be executed is satisfied depending on the execution period of the effect, and the effect executing means is based on the specific condition determining means. The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied.

Here, for example, when a certain time has passed since the power of the game machine was turned on, the process is shifted to a specific effect different from the normal general effect, and the periodic effect that is periodically executed is displayed. A game machine aimed at improving the interest of a player has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252534). In this case, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not the periodic effect is executed when the effect accompanied by the sound or image similar to the periodic effect is executed in the periodic effect that is executed periodically. There was a problem that the player was confused. Due to such problems, a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand has been required.

According to the game machine I1, since it is determined whether or not the specific effect can be executed before the execution, the player can be suppressed from being confused due to a defect in the execution timing of the effect, and the player can easily understand the game. It has the effect of being able to make it.

The game machine I1 has a time measuring means capable of measuring time information, and the specific period setting means starts the specific period based on the time of the predetermined time information by the time measuring means. A game machine I2 characterized in that it is at least set.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the start of a specific period is set based on the timekeeping of predetermined timekeeping information, so that the specific period is set at the same time for other game machines. It has the effect of being easy to configure.

In the game machine I1 or I2, the effect executing means executes a normal effect other than the specific effect during the specific period, and the specific condition determining means is based on the executed normal effect. A game machine I3 characterized in that it determines whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine I1 or I2, the establishment of a specific condition is determined based on the normal effect, so that the specific effect is determined in consideration of the relationship between the specific effect and the normal effect. It has the effect of being able to be executed.

The game machine I3 has an operation means that can be operated by the player and a detection means that detects that the operation means has been operated, and the specific effect and at least one of the normal effects include the specific effect. The specific condition includes an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means, and the specific condition is satisfied when the operation effect of the specific effect and the normal effect are not synchronized. Game machine I4 to play.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I3, it is possible to suppress a problem that a specific effect and an operation effect of a normal effect are executed at the same time, so that it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand. effective.

In any of the game machines I1 to I4, a dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information based on the establishment of a start condition, and the specific identification to which a privilege advantageous to the player is given. It has a special game state setting means for setting a special game state which is a game state in which information is easily displayed, and the specific effect includes a suggestion effect indicating whether or not the special game state is set. A game machine I5 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines I1 to I4, it is possible to recognize that the special game state is set by a specific effect, and to make the specific effect interesting. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the game machines I2 to I5, the specific period setting means sets the specific period for a predetermined period each time a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on, and the effect The execution means executes the specific effect when the specific condition is satisfied for each predetermined period based on the setting of the specific period, and the specific condition determining means executes the specific condition. The gaming machine I6 is characterized by having a delay means for delaying the specific effect and executing the specific effect by the effect executing means when it is determined that is not satisfied.

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I2 to I5, even if a specific condition is not satisfied, a specific effect is executed with a delay, which causes confusion for the player. It has the effect of being able to suppress.

<Characteristic J group> (0.125 seconds production)
An information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a storage means based on the establishment of a start condition. When the discriminating means for discriminating the stored information, the display means for displaying the discriminating result indicating the discriminating result determined by the discriminating means, and the discriminating information indicating the specific discriminating result are displayed on the display means. , Before the establishment of the start condition, based on the privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player, the effect mode output means for outputting a predetermined effect, and the information acquired by the information acquisition means. It also has a pre-determination means for discriminating the acquired information and an effect execution means for executing an effect output based on the determination result of the pre-determination means to the effect mode output means. A plurality of output areas in which the output of the effect is set are set in the output means, and the effect executing means outputs the effect first when executing a new output of the effect. The gaming machine J1 is characterized in that the output of the new effect is executed for the output region different from the above.

Here, for example, in a pachinko machine, when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port and the number of reserved memories increases, the random number information on hold is determined in advance (look-ahead), and the determination result is a predetermined result (big hit). A gaming machine is known for the purpose of increasing the player's expectation as to whether or not the variable display corresponding to the hold becomes a big hit by executing an effect suggesting that the situation is (such as). For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-16499). In such a game machine, if the efficiency of the game is improved by setting the fluctuation time to a short time, the production period such as the lottery result is shortened, which makes it difficult for the player to understand. In response to this problem, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand even when the fluctuation time is shortened.

According to the game machine J1, a plurality of output areas for outputting an effect (an effect suggesting a hold determination result) based on the determination result of the prior determination means are set, and the plurality of output areas are first output. The next effect is output in an output area different from the output area where the effect was output. As a result, even if a new determination result of the pre-determination means is acquired during the execution of the effect, the effect based on the determination result of the pre-determination means is displayed in a different output area to display the effect being executed. It is possible to execute an effect based on the discrimination result of the new pre-discrimination means without ending. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is confused.

In the game machine J1, a predetermined order is set in the plurality of output areas, and the effect executing means is next to the output area for which the effect is output first when the new effect is executed. The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the output of the new effect is executed for the output area in the order corresponding to.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J1, the effects are output in order according to the order set in the output area, so that there is a problem that the output areas of the latest effect and the new effect overlap. It has the effect of being able to suppress it.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the effect mode output means is composed of display means for displaying a predetermined display mode, which is the predetermined effect, and the display area of the display means is divided into a plurality of small areas as the output area. A game machine J3 characterized in that an area is set.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J1 or J2, the following effects are played. That is, a plurality of effects can be displayed at the same time by effectively using the display area. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect period can be set longer.

In the game machine J2 or 3, the storage means is configured to be able to store the information up to a predetermined number predetermined, and the information acquisition means is stored in the storage means when the acquisition condition is satisfied. If the information is less than the predetermined number, the information is acquired, and the effect executing means first obtains the information even when the acquisition condition is satisfied and the information is not acquired by the information acquisition means. The gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the output of the effect is executed for the output area corresponding to the next order of the output area.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J2 or J3, there is an effect that the player can be made to think that more information has been acquired.

In the game machine J3 or J4, when the information is acquired by the acquisition means, the effect content to be executed by the effect execution means is determined based on the determination result of the information by the prior determination means. When the acquisition condition is satisfied and the information is not acquired by the information acquisition means, the effect content determination for determining the effect content to be executed by the effect execution means based on the determination result other than the specific determination result. A game machine J5 characterized by having means.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J3, there is an effect that the player can be made to play the game as if the information was acquired.

In the game machine J5, the effect content determining means determines the effect period together with the effect content, and the determined effect period elapses in the output area where the output of the effect is executed by the effect execution means. The gaming machine J6 is characterized in that it has a termination means for forcibly ending the effect being executed when the effect that has not been performed is being executed.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J5, it is possible to suppress a problem that different effects are output in the same output area, and it is possible to provide the game to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the game machine J5, the effect content determining means determines the effect period together with the effect content, and the effect execution means determines the effect period in the output area for executing the output of the newly determined effect. The gaming machine J7 is characterized in that, when the effect for which has not passed has been executed, the effect being executed is overwritten and the newly determined effect is executed.

According to the game machine J7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J5, it is possible to suppress a problem that different effects are output in the same output area, and it is possible to provide the game to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Characteristic K group> (Operates a combination of accessories under one operating condition)
A first movable means that can move in the first movable range, a second movable means that can move in the second movable range, which is different from the first movable means, and a first movable means with respect to the first movable means. The operation of the first movable setting means for setting a pattern, the second movable setting means for setting a second movable pattern with respect to the second movable means, and the first movable means movable according to the first movable pattern. And, when the operating condition corresponding to the operation of the second movable means that is movable by the second movable pattern is not satisfied, the first or second movable pattern is set so that the operating condition is satisfied. A determination means for determining correction data for correcting at least one of them, and a correction means for correcting at least one of the first or second movable patterns based on the correction data determined by the determination means. The game machine K1 characterized by being equipped with.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member that can be changed by a motor or the like in the configuration. Some of such game machines can perform a wide variety of effect operations by varying a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194). However, in the conventional game machine described above, when the number of variable members is increased, there is a possibility that it becomes difficult to set the operation appropriately. Further, among the above-mentioned game machines, there are those that combine and change a plurality of variable members in one effect, and there are those that can execute a wider variety of effect operations. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when a plurality of variable members are combined and varied, the variable modes may deviate from each other and the operation quality may deteriorate.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, the first movable means is moved in the first movable range, and the second movable means different from the first movable means is moved in the second movable range. A first movable pattern is set by the first movable setting means for the first movable means, and a second movable pattern is set by the second movable setting means for the second movable means. The operating condition is satisfied when the operating conditions corresponding to the operation of the first movable means movable by the first movable pattern and the operation of the second movable means movable by the second movable pattern are not satisfied. In addition, correction data for correcting at least one of the first or second movable patterns is determined by the determination means. Based on the correction data determined by the determination means, at least one of the first or second movable patterns is corrected by the correction means.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of an operation contrary to the operating conditions, so that there is an effect that the first movable means and the second movable means can be suitably moved.

The game machine K1 is provided with an effect executing means for executing a predetermined movable effect, and the first movable means and the second movable means are characterized in that they are movable at least in the predetermined movable effect. Game machine K2 to play.

According to the game machine K2, a predetermined movable effect is executed by the effect executing means. Further, the first movable means and the second movable means are moved at least in a predetermined movable effect.

As a result, the first movable means and the second movable means, which are moved in the predetermined movable effect, can be operated according to the operating conditions. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress that an operation contrary to the operating conditions is performed in the predetermined movable effect, it is possible to improve the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means in the predetermined movable effect. There is.

In the game machine K1 or K2, the second movable means is configured to be attached to the first movable means, and is movable together with the first movable means.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effect of the game machine K1 or K2, the second movable means is configured to be attached to the first movable means and is moved together with the first movable means. There is an effect that an operation having a sense of unity can be performed with the operation of the second movable means.

In any of the game machines K1 to K3, the storage means in which a plurality of different correction data determined by the determination means are stored, and the first movable means and the second movable means when the operation conditions are not satisfied. An information discriminating means for discriminating information necessary for establishing the operating condition based on each movable position with the movable means is provided, and the determining means is based on the information discriminated by the information discriminating means. , The gaming machine K4, characterized in that the correction data is determined from the storage means.

According to the game machine K4, in any of the game machines K1 to K3, a plurality of different correction data determined by the determination means are stored in the storage means. When the operating condition is not satisfied, the information necessary for establishing the operating condition is determined by the information discrimination means based on the movable positions of the first movable means and the second movable means, and the information discrimination is performed. Based on the information determined by the means, the correction data is determined from the storage means by the determination means.

As a result, when the operating conditions are not satisfied, the movable pattern can be corrected by a process having a relatively light processing load of determining the correction data from the storage means, so that the processing load can be reduced. There is.

In any of the game machines K1 to K4, the correction means corrects the movable pattern of the second movable means so that the operation is such that the operating condition is satisfied when the operating condition is not satisfied. A game machine K5 characterized in that it determines data.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines K1 to K4, the following effects are played. That is, when the operating condition is not satisfied, the correction data for correcting the movable pattern of the second movable means is determined by the determining means so that the operation satisfies the operating condition. Therefore, the second movable means is corrected. There is an effect that the operation quality can be improved without any problem.

The game machine K5 includes a period setting means for setting an on-time period for confirming the operation contents of the first movable setting means and the second movable setting means based on the power-on of the game machine, and the determination means. Determines the correction data for correcting the second movable pattern so that the operating condition is satisfied when the operating condition is not satisfied in the closing period, and the correction means is the correction means. The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that it corrects a movable pattern set after the closing period ends based on the correction data determined by the determining means.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effects of the game machine K5, the following effects are produced. That is, the closing period for confirming the operation contents of the first movable setting means and the second movable setting means is set by the period setting means based on the power-on of the game machine, and the operating conditions are satisfied in the turning period. If not, the correction data for correcting the second movable pattern is determined by the determining means so that the operating condition is satisfied. Based on the determined correction data, the movable pattern set after the closing period ends is corrected by the correction means.

As a result, after the closing period is completed, it is possible to set the movable pattern corrected so that the operating conditions are satisfied. That is, there is an effect that the first movable means and the second movable means can be moved in a state where the operating conditions are satisfied during most of the time when the game machine is operating.
<Characteristic L group> (Match the movement of one accessory to the other)
A first movable means that can move in the first movable range, a second movable means that can move in the second movable range and is different from the first movable means, and the first movable means and the second movable means. In a gaming machine provided with a movable control means for moving the first movable means based on predetermined movable data, a first movable data corresponding to a predetermined first movable pattern is set for the first movable means. 1 Movable setting means, a determination means for determining movable data of the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means which is movable in the first movable pattern based on the set first movable data, and a determination means thereof. The gaming machine L1 is provided with a second movable setting means for setting the second movable means to be movable by the movable control means with movable data determined by the determining means.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member that can be changed by a motor or the like in the configuration. Some of such game machines can perform a wide variety of effect operations by changing a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194). However, in the conventional game machine described above, when the number of variable members is increased, there is a possibility that it becomes difficult to set the operation appropriately. Further, among the game machines described above, there are those in which a plurality of variable members are combined and variable in one effect, and there are those that can execute a wider variety of effect operations. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when a plurality of variable members are combined and varied, the variable modes may deviate from each other and the operation quality may deteriorate.

On the other hand, according to the game machine L1, the first movable data corresponding to the first movable pattern predetermined for the first movable means is set by the first movable setting means. Based on the set first movable data, the movable data of the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means that moves in the first movable pattern is determined by the determining means. The second movable setting means is set so that the second movable means can be moved by the movable control means with the movable data determined by the determining means.

As a result, the second movable means can be moved by an operation corresponding to the operation of the first movable means, so that there is an effect that the first movable means and the second movable means can be suitably moved.

The game machine L1 is provided with an effect executing means for executing a predetermined movable effect, and the first movable means and the second movable means are characterized in that they are movable at least in the predetermined movable effect. Game machine L2 to play.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L1, the following effects are played. That is, a predetermined movable effect is executed by the effect executing means. Then, the first movable means and the second movable means are moved at least in a predetermined movable effect.

As a result, the second movable means can be moved by an operation corresponding to the operation of the first movable means in a predetermined movable effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be improved in a predetermined movable effect.

In the game machine L1 or L2, the second movable means is configured to be attached to the first movable means and is movable together with the first movable means. ..

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effect of the game machine L1 or L2, the second movable means is configured to be attached to the first movable means and is moved together with the first movable means. There is an effect that an operation having a sense of unity can be performed with the operation of the second movable means.

In any of the game machines L1 to L3, the determination means is moved by the first movable pattern based on the end of the operation of the first movable means that is movable by the first movable pattern. The gaming machine L4 is characterized in that it determines the movable data of the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines L1 to L3, it is movable in the first movable pattern based on the end of the operation of the first movable means that is movable in the first movable pattern. Since the movable data of the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means is determined by the determining means, it is possible to determine the movable data in consideration of the operation of the series of first movable patterns. Therefore, since the second movable means can be operated in a manner more suitable for the operation of the first movable means, there is an effect that the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be further improved.

The game machine L4 includes a period setting means for setting an initial setting period for performing initial setting based on power-on of the game machine, and the first movable setting means is based on the setting of the initial setting period. The gaming machine L5, characterized in that the first movable data is set.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L4, the following effects are played. That is, the initial setting period for performing the initial setting based on the power-on of the game machine is set by the period setting means. Then, the first movable data is set by the first movable setting means based on the initial setting period being set.

As a result, it is possible to determine the movable data corresponding to the operation of the first movable means that has been moved by the first movable pattern in the initial setting period. Therefore, after the end of the initial setting period, the second movable means is set to the first. There is an effect that it can be moved by an operation corresponding to the movable means.

In the game machine L5, when it is determined that the first movable means is to be moved after the end of the initial setting period, and the movable determining means determines whether or not to move the first movable means. A specific movable setting means for setting specific movable data corresponding to a predetermined specific movable pattern, and the determination means is the second movable for setting an operation corresponding to the specific movable pattern. The gaming machine L6, characterized in that it determines the movable data of the means.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L5, the following effects are played. That is, when it is determined by the movable determination means whether or not to move the first movable means after the end of the initial setting period, and it is determined that the first movable means is to be moved by the movable determining means, a predetermined specification is made. The specific movable data corresponding to the movable pattern of is set by the specific movable setting means. The movable data of the second movable means for setting the operation corresponding to a specific movable pattern is determined by the determining means.

As a result, since the second movable means can be moved by the movement corresponding to the specific movable pattern, there is an effect that the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be improved.

In any of the game machines L1 to L6, the determination means has at least a timing at which the operation of the first movable means for which the first movable pattern is set ends and a timing at which the operation of the second movable means ends. The gaming machine L7 is characterized in that the movable data is determined so as to match.

According to the game machine L7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines L1 to L6, at least the timing at which the operation of the first movable means for which the first movable pattern is set ends and the operation of the second movable means end. Since the movable data is determined by the determining means so as to match the timing of the movement, the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means is determined at the operation end timing, which is one of the timings that the player pays the most attention to. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In any of the game machines L1 to L3, the movable amount of the first movable means that is movable in the first movable pattern according to the set first movable data is set to a predetermined movable amount. Based on this, the gaming machine L8 is characterized in that the operation of the first movable means is determined.

According to the game machine L8, in addition to the effects of the game machines L1 to L3, the movable amount of the first movable means that moves in the first movable pattern according to the set first movable data becomes a predetermined movable amount. Since the operation of the first movable means is determined by the operation determining means based on the above, there is an effect that the operation of the second movable means can be made to correspond to the operation of the first movable means in more detail.

In the game machine L8, the determination means is movable of the second movable means corresponding to the operation from the movable amount of the first movable means to the end of the first movable pattern. A game machine L9 characterized in that it determines data.

According to the game machine L9, in addition to the effect of the game machine L8, the second movable means corresponding to the operation from the movable amount of the first movable means to the end of the first movable pattern. Since the movable data of the above is determined by the determining means, the operation of the second movable means after the predetermined movable amount can be set as the operation corresponding to the operation of the first movable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be improved.

In the game machine L10, based on the fact that the first movable data is set by the first movable setting means, the second movable data corresponding to the second movable pattern predetermined for the second movable means. The game machine L11 is provided with a movable setting means for setting.

According to the game machine L11, in addition to the effect of the game machine L10, the second movable means predetermined with respect to the second movable means based on the fact that the first movable data is set by the first movable setting means. Since the second movable data corresponding to the pattern is set by the movable setting means, the second movable means is operated in the second movable pattern even before the movable amount of the first movable means reaches a predetermined movable amount. be able to. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the second movable means from being stopped until the amount reaches a predetermined amount, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Characteristic M group> (LED lighting control for accessories)
A movable means having a plurality of visible portions which are movable within a predetermined movable range and whose light emitting mode from the back side can be visually recognized from the front side, and a movable means provided on the back side of the movable means and the back side of the movable means. A light emitting means having a light emitting unit capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emitting mode, a movable control means capable of movablely controlling the movable means, and a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern movable by the movable control means. When the specific movable pattern is determined by the decidable movable pattern determining means and the movable pattern determining means, the movable portion is placed at a light emitting position where the visible portion faces the light emitting portion of the light emitting means. It is characterized by including a light emitting control means capable of at least controlling light emission with a specific light emitting pattern that causes the light emitting unit to emit light when the position is positioned and turns off the light when the movable means is moved by a predetermined amount from the light emitting position. Game machine M1.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include variable means operated by a motor or the like in the configuration. Some of such game machines can execute a wide variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, with the diversification of the variable means, there is a possibility that it becomes difficult to appropriately move each variable means in the variable means having a complicated configuration. Further, among the conventional game machines described above, there is one that changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting device composed of LEDs or the like according to the movement of the variable means. In such a game machine, it is possible to execute a more impactful effect operation by causing the light emitting device to emit light in accordance with the operation of the variable means. However, in this conventional game machine, the operation of the variable means and the light emitting mode of the light emitting device may deviate from each other. In such a case, there is a possibility that the appearance quality of the effect operation is deteriorated.

On the other hand, in the game machine M1, the movable means is moved within a predetermined movable range. The movable means is configured to have a plurality of visual recognition portions configured so that the light emitting mode from the back surface side can be visually recognized from the front surface. On the back side of the movable means, a light emitting means having a light emitting portion capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emitting mode is provided. The movable means is movably controlled by the movable control means, and at least a specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining means as the movable pattern to be moved by the movable control means. When the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining means, the light emitting portion is made to emit light when the movable portion is positioned at the light emitting position where the visual recognition portion opposes the light emitting portion of the light emitting means, and the movable means emits light. The light emission is controlled by at least the light emission control means in a specific light emission pattern that emits light when it is moved by a predetermined amount from the light emission position.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the light emitting unit from emitting light when the visual recognition unit and the light emitting unit are displaced from each other, so that the appearance quality of the movable means can be improved when the light emitting means emits light. Therefore, there is an effect that the light emitting means and the movable means can be suitably operated.

In the game machine M1, the movable means is composed of a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effect of the game machine M2, since the movable means is composed of a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis, the light emitting position is generated while the movable means is rotating. And the arrangement other than the light emitting position are repeated alternately. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be operated with a good appearance each time at a light emitting position where it may be arranged a plurality of times.

In the game machine M1 or M2, the movable pattern determining means can determine one movable pattern from a plurality of movable patterns including at least the specific movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern as the movable pattern. The game machine is characterized in that, when the predetermined movable pattern is determined, the light emitting control means controls the light emitting means with a predetermined light emitting pattern different from the specific light emitting pattern. M3.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine M1 or M2, the following effects are played. That is, in the movable pattern determining means, one movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining means from a plurality of movable patterns including at least a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern. When the predetermined movable pattern is determined, the light emitting means is controlled to emit light by the light emitting control means in a predetermined light emitting pattern different from the specific light emitting pattern.

As a result, it is possible to control light emission with different light emission patterns according to the movable pattern, so that the appearance of the movable means can be further changed according to the light emission pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily determine from the appearance which movable pattern is being moved.

In the game machine M3, the game machine M4 is characterized in that the predetermined movable pattern is set to have a moving speed faster than the specific movable pattern.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effect of the game machine M3, the predetermined movable pattern is set to have a movable speed faster than the specific movable pattern, so that the movable pattern of the movable means can be easily discriminated from the movable speed. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine M3 or M4, the predetermined light emitting pattern is a light emitting pattern that causes the light emitting means to emit light even when the movable means is located at a position other than the light emitting position.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effect of the game machine M3 or M4, if the light emission is controlled by a predetermined light emission pattern, the light emitting means is emitted even when the movable means is located at a position other than the light emitting position. There is an effect that the player can more easily recognize the difference in the light emitting mode of the light emitting means between the specific light emitting pattern and the predetermined light emitting pattern.

In any of the game machines M1 to M5, the movable means is composed of a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis, and the visual recognition unit is on a predetermined circumference centered on the predetermined rotation axis. The movable means is provided at a plurality of locations at equal intervals, the movable means has rotational symmetry according to the number of locations of the visual recognition portion, and the light emitting portion is the same as the number of locations of the visual recognition portion. A game machine M6 characterized in that the number of locations is provided.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines M2 to M5, the following effects are produced. That is, the movable means is composed of a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis. The visual recognition portions are provided at a plurality of locations at equal intervals on a predetermined circumference centered on a predetermined rotation axis. Further, the movable means has rotational symmetry according to the number of visible parts. The number of light emitting units is the same as the number of visible units.

As a result, when the variable means is rotating, the light emitting position is set at each constant rotation angle, so that it is possible to improve the appearance quality before and after the constant rotation angle in the specific movable pattern.

In the game machine M6, as the specific light emitting pattern, each time the rotating body reaches the light emitting position, the light emitting control means has a number of points equal to or more than the number of the light emitting portions that were emitted when the rotating body reached the light emitting position last time. The gaming machine M7 is characterized in that it controls the number of light emitting units so as to emit light.

According to the game machine M7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine M6, the following effects are played. That is, as a specific light emitting pattern, every time the rotating body reaches the light emitting position, the light emitting control means emits light so that the number of light emitting parts equal to or greater than the number of light emitting parts that were emitted when the rotating body reached the light emitting position last time. Is controlled by.

This has the effect of making it easier to recognize that the movable pattern or the light emitting pattern has been switched according to the change in appearance.

In any of the game machines M3 to M7, the movable pattern determined by the movable pattern determining means includes a high-speed movable pattern in which the movable speed is set to be faster than the predetermined movable pattern, and the light emitting control means includes the light emitting control means. The gaming machine M6 is characterized in that, when shifting from the predetermined movable pattern to the high-speed movable pattern, the light emitting unit is controlled to emit light at each predetermined cycle.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines M3 to M7, the following effects are played. That is, the movable pattern determined by the movable pattern determining means includes a high-speed movable pattern in which the movable speed is set faster than the predetermined movable pattern. When shifting from a predetermined movable pattern to a high-speed movable pattern, the light emitting means controls the light emitting unit to emit light at predetermined intervals.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily recognize that the high-speed movable pattern is formed by the cycle in which the light emitting unit emits light.

In the game machine M6, the predetermined cycle is shorter than the cycle in which the movable means in which the high-speed movable pattern is set becomes the light emitting position, and is in the period from the light emitting position to the next moving to the light emitting position. A game machine M7 characterized in that it takes longer than the time to reach a point.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effect of the game machine M7, the predetermined cycle is shorter than the cycle in which the movable means in which the high-speed movable pattern is set becomes the light emitting position, and moves from the light emitting position to the next light emitting position. Since it is configured to be longer than the time required to reach the midpoint between The angle at which the visible portion adjacent to the opposite side of the direction is arranged by rotation during a predetermined cycle is smaller. That is, the visual recognition unit adjacent to the rotation direction opposite to the rotation direction at each predetermined cycle can be mistaken for the visual recognition portion recognized before the predetermined cycle elapses, so that the rotation direction of the movable means is different from the appearance of reverse rotation. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make the appearance that the rotation direction is changed without changing the operation of the variable means, so that there is an effect that the load of the variable means can be reduced.

In the game machine M7, the game machine M8 is characterized in that the light emitting control means causes the light emitting means to emit light in a third light emitting pattern in which each of the light emitting units emits light in a predetermined order.

According to the game machine M8, in addition to the effect of the game machine M7, the following effects are played. That is, since the light emitting means emits light by the light emitting control means in the third light emitting pattern in which each light emitting unit emits light in a predetermined order, it is possible to emit light in a more interesting manner. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K6, L1 to L11, A game machine Z1 in any one of M1 to M8, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K6, L1 to L11, In any of M1 to M8, the gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K6, L1 to L11, In any one of M1 to M8, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of the identification information, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
810 lighting device (light emitting means)
811a to 811f Circular lighting area (light emitting part)
820 Rotating member (movable means)
821a to 821f through hole (visual part)
S1552 Luminous control means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, when performing various effect, it has been proposed the gaming machine for the purpose of improving the player's interest.

JP-A-2007-252534

However, in the above-described Yu technique machine, further improvement of interest has been demanded.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of further improving the interest .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 grants a privilege that can grant a privilege based on a determination means that executes a predetermined determination and the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. A game state setting means capable of setting a means, a first game state in which the privilege is easily given, and a second game state in which the privilege is less likely to be given than the first game state, and an effect capable of executing the effect. The effect executing means includes a specific period setting means for setting a specific period in which a specific effect is executed by the effect executing means, and the effect executing means is the first game during the execution of the specific effect. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect indicating that a state is set, and the suggestion effect is executed when a discrimination game based on the discrimination is performed in a state where the specific period is set. If the discriminant game is not performed in a state in which the specific period is not set or in a state in which the specific period is set, the discriminant game is not executed, and the suggestion effect is , Ru der those configured to be executed every predetermined period during the execution of the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a discriminating means for executing a predetermined discriminating, a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means being a specific discriminant result, and the privilege. A game state setting means capable of setting a first game state in which is likely to be granted, and a second game state in which the privilege is less likely to be granted than the first game state, a production execution means capable of executing the effect, and the effect execution means thereof. The effect executing means includes a specific period setting means for setting a specific period during which a specific effect is executed, and the effect executing means is set to the first gaming state during the execution of the specific effect. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect indicating that the device is present, and the suggestion effect can be executed when the discrimination game based on the discrimination is performed in a state where the specific period is set. , The specific period is not set, or the discriminating game is not performed in the state where the specific period is set, the discriminant game is not executed, and the suggested effect is the specific effect. Since it is configured so that it can be executed at predetermined intervals during the execution of the above, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view disassembled perspective view of a board surface and a board surface lower unit. It is a front view disassembled perspective view of a board lower part unit. (A) is a front view of the base member, the first out port, the second out port, the lower left plate member and the lower right plate member, and (b) is the base member in line XVb-XVb of FIG. 15 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of the lower left plate member. It is a front perspective view of the vertical movement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the vertical movement unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a vertical operation unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a vertical operation unit. It is a front view of the vertical movement unit. It is a front view of the vertical movement unit. It is a front perspective view of the compound operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the expansion / contraction effect device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the expansion / contraction effect device. (A) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (A) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (A) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. It is a front view of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (A) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (A) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (A) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (A) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. It is a graph which shows the distance from the reference horizon of a protrusion. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a tilting operation unit and a sliding operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a tilting operation unit and a sliding operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a slide operation unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a slide operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a tilting operation unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a tilting operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the effect member and the 2nd drive device. (A) and (b) are front views of a transmission member and a torsion spring. (A) and (b) are front views of a transmission member and a torsion spring. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the swing angle of the effect member with respect to the swing angle of a transmission member. It is a front view of the tilting operation unit and the sliding operation unit. It is a front view of the tilting operation unit and the sliding operation unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the transmission member and the torsion spring in the second embodiment. It is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. (A) and (b) are front views of the transmission member and the torsion spring in the third embodiment. (A) is a rear perspective view of the transmission member according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the moving contact member. (A) and (b) are rear perspective views of the transmission member, and (c) and (d) are top views of the transmission member. It is a front schematic diagram schematically showing the main body member of an effect member. It is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. It is a front view of the composite operation unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. (A) is a partial front view of the rotating arm member according to the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a partial top view of the rotating arm member in the direction of arrow LXIXb of FIG. 69 (a). ) Is a partial front view of the rotating arm member. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the switching device. (A) and (b) are front views of the composite operation unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the tilting operation unit according to the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the structure of the various counters, the special symbol holding ball storage area, the special symbol holding ball execution area, and the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first random number table set in the ROM of the main control unit in the first control example, and (b) is set in the ROM of the main control unit in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the 1st hit type selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed the 2nd hit random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram set in the fluctuation pattern selection table. It is the figure which showed the variation pattern table for a jackpot schematically, (c) is the figure which showed the variation pattern table for deviation (normal) typically, and (d) is the variation pattern for deviation (probability variation). It is a figure which showed the table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a figure which showed typically the contents of the ball entry effect selection table in the 1st control example. It is a block diagram which shows typically the electrical structure of the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the work RAM of the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the correction information table in the first control example. is there. It is a figure which showed the set coordinates of the display area in the 1st control example. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode when the power is turned on in the first control example. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A in the first control example, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface B. It is a figure which showed typically the display data table in the 1st control example. It is a figure which showed typically the transfer data table in the 1st control example. It is a figure which showed typically the drawing list in the 1st control example. This is an example of a timing chart of a variation display mode during a time-saving game in the first control example. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed on the third symbol display device during the time reduction in the first control example. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed on the third symbol display device during the time reduction in the first control example. It is a timing chart in which the time effect in the 1st control example is set. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the time setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern reception process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the synchronous effect management process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the extension effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the specific time effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ball entry effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the special effect correction process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the round number command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the ball entry effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the specific time production command processing to be performed. (A) is a flowchart showing the effect mode change command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop command processing executed by. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the effect information correction process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) to (b) are explanatory views about the control of the stepping motor in the 1st control example. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing whether or not detection by the slide position detection sensor is possible for each positional relationship between the slide position detection sensor and the light-shielding plate. It is a figure which showed the positional relationship between the tilting origin sensor, and the sensor shielding part when the effect member is in the origin position. (A) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the tilting origin sensor and the sensor shielding portion when the effect member swings to the left in the front view, and (b) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the effect member and the sensor shield portion. It is a figure which showed the positional relationship between the tilt origin sensor and the sensor shielding part at the time of swinging motion to the right side of view. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario table defined in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is the operation scenario table in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the included slide operation table, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the tilting operation table included in the operation scenario table in the second control example. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the initial operation table included in the operation scenario table in the second control example, and (b) is a ROM of the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the specified content of the specified swing area table schematically. It is a figure which showed the correspondence relationship between the number of operation steps of a slide operation in 2nd control example, and the swingable direction of an effect member. It is a figure which showed the correspondence relationship between the number of operation steps of a swing operation, and the number of operation steps of a slide operation in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the origin return processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the accessory operation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the execution command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the initial operation process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the initial operation process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the additional operation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the tilt direction setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the abnormality detection processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the slide operation process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 3rd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 3rd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the timing effect selection table defined in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the pressing period table defined in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table for the early stage difficulty level 3 included in the pressing period table in the third control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the sub display device during the timing effect, and (b) shows an example of the display contents when the player succeeds in pressing the frame button in the timing effect. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the player fails to press the frame button in the timing effect, and (b) is a case where a high-difficulty effect mode is selected as the timing effect. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the sub-display device in. (A) is a diagram showing the display contents of the sub display device when the player achieves the quota in the timing effect, and (b) is a sub when the player fails to achieve the quota in the timing effect. It is a figure which showed the display content of a display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the change of the mode of the variation effect which the timing effect was set in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the timing effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the mid-stage setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the final stage setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the notification mode setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary lighting unit in the fourth control example, and (b) is a side view of the rotary lighting unit in the fourth control example. FIGS. (A) to (C) are diagrams illustrating a lighting state in which the appearance quality deteriorates when the rotating member is in a low-speed rotating state in the fourth control example. (A) to (c) are diagrams illustrating a lighting state with good appearance when the rotating member is in a low-speed rotating state in the fourth control example. FIGS. (A) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of lighting control when the rotating member is in a high-speed rotating state in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the lighting control processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the low-speed processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the rotation speed identification process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the acceleration processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the high-speed processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine when the rotary lighting unit is in the retracted position in the 4th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine when the rotary lighting unit is in the overhang position in the 4th control example.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 57, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. It is configured by assembling a mouth 63, a first winning mouth 64, a second winning mouth 640, a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device 650, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is inside. It is attached to the back surface side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in a game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2. Further, the first variable winning device 65 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base member 310 of the board surface lower unit 300 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), jackpot B (16R time reduction jackpot), and jackpot C (2R probability variation time reduction no jackpot) are provided. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "16R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state (probability variation state) of a special symbol after a jackpot of 16 rounds and the time is shortened for a normal symbol. "Probability variation with time saving no jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state (probability variation state) of a special symbol after a jackpot of 2 rounds, but the time reduction state of a normal symbol is not given. In addition, the "16R time-saving jackpot" shifts to a low-probability state of a special symbol after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, and is in a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in this embodiment). It is a big hit.

In addition, the "high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol" indicates a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, a so-called probability fluctuation state (probability change state), in other words, a special gaming state. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. The high-probability state (probability variation state) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of a normal symbol (second symbol), which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state of the special symbol" refers to a time when the probability is not changed, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the probability change state. Further, the time saving state (time saving medium) of the normal symbol means a state of the game in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, the normal state of the pachinko machine 10 is a state in which neither the probabilistic state of the special symbol nor the time saving state of the normal symbol is increased (the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) are not increased. ).

During the time saving state of the normal symbol, not only the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is compared with the normal symbol. And a long opening time is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the time saving state, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The electric accessory 640a may be changed to increase the number of times it is opened more than usual. In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is not changed during the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the electric combination is performed once. At least one of the number of times the object 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the time saving state of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the normal symbol (No. 1) It may be changed so that only the hit probability of 2 symbols) is increased as compared with the normal medium.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while synchronizing the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays a normal symbol (second symbol) triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of the above is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 12-inch liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, three symbol sequences of upper, middle, and lower. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol). Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the time saving state of the normal symbol, the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal state. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the time saving state.

It should be noted that the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the time saving state by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit in the time saving state. When the state is easy, the time required for the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set shorter than in the normal state in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is kept constant regardless of the gaming state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. It is configured in. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition to the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37A, It may be performed using a part of 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, balls to the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" The symbol "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize. On the other hand, the electric accessory 640a is provided in the second winning opening 640, and it is difficult to open the electric accessory 640a in the normal time (when the time is not shortened), so that the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 640. Is in a difficult state.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory 640a The ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory 640a is opened by passing through the through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit by getting a lot of chances of a big hit lottery by winning a prize in the second winning opening 640 while making the state.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a first specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. Further, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the left side of the variable display device 80, and a second variable winning device 650 having a circular shape having a size similar to that of the other winning openings 63, 64, 640 is arranged in a substantially central portion thereof. A specific winning opening 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the special winning openings 65a and 650a, which are normally closed, are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning openings 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid 65b (for driving the opening / closing to the right with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis). (See FIG. 15, only the outer shape is shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid 65b is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate toward the front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 is driven to open and close to the left side with a front-view triangular-shaped opening / closing plate arranged on the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a and the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with a large opening solenoid (not shown). The second specific winning opening 650a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the small opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the left to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the second specific winning opening 650a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

In the present embodiment, since it is possible to make the second variable winning device 650 win a ball by hitting left, the trouble of switching between hitting left and hitting right each time the game state changes is eliminated. can do.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are set for a predetermined time. During the opening of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is set for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning openings 65a and 650a. A gaming state that is released a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state. Further, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are not limited to one, and one or more or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or on the lower right side. Not limited to the left side of the variable display device 80, for example, it may be below the first winning opening 64.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 314 and a second out port 315. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are discharged through the first out opening 314 or the second out opening 315 (not shown). You will be guided to the road. The first out opening 314 is arranged on the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, while the second out opening 315 is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64. That is, the second out port 315 is arranged on the opposite side of the first out port 314 with the first winning opening 64 in between.

Therefore, a ball that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side (right side in FIG. 2) of the first winning opening 64 in front view is the inner rail 61. Alternatively, it is flowed down along the inclination of the outer edge member 73 and guided to the ball discharge path through the second out port 315, while being guided to the lower end (inner rail 61) of the game area on the left side of the first winning opening 64 in the front view. The reached ball flows down along the inclination (curvature) of the inner rail 61, and is guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 314.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 102) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 101) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 100) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a vertical drive motor 431, an opening / closing drive motor 466, and other drive motors 531, 561, 631, 661, 751.

Here, various drive motors (up / down drive motor 431, opening / closing drive motor 466, and other drive motors 531, 561, 631, 661, 751) will be described. These various drive motors are composed of, for example, known stepping motors, and a plurality of these various drive motors are provided in association with each accessory in order to operate each accessory mounted on the pachinko machine 10. These various drive motors are driven by a corresponding motor control IC (motor driver). Specifically, a command including at least the number of rotation steps, the rotation direction (positive direction or negative direction), and the rotation speed from the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 to the motor control IC (motor driver). Is output. The control IC (motor driver) drives various corresponding drive motors based on the output command. The motor control IC (motor driver) may be a single IC whose operation can be set for a plurality of drive motors, or a plurality of motor control ICs (motor drivers) may be provided. It may be configured to operate drive motors corresponding to different accessories. When adopting a motor control IC (motor driver) whose operation can be set for multiple drive motors, the command for transmitting the number of rotation steps, etc. includes information for specifying the type of drive motor. You can output it.

Here, the operation of the drive motor will be described by taking the vertical drive motor 431 as an example. When the control IC (motor driver) operates the vertical drive motor 431 based on the set command, the operation is executed for the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 every time the operation of one step is executed. A signal (execution signal) for notifying that the signal has been made is output. From this execution signal, the MPU 221 can grasp the progress of the set operation. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a step counter (not shown). This step counter is provided for each accessory, and is a counter that counts how many steps each accessory has operated from the origin (evacuation) position. That is, the origin (evacuation) position is set as the position of 0 step, and the value is updated by 1 each time the execution signal from the control IC is received. More specifically, the value is added by 1 each time the accessory moves one step in the direction (positive direction) from the origin (evacuation) position to the end point (extension) position. In addition, the value is subtracted by 1 each time one step is performed in the direction (negative direction) from the end point (overhang) position to the origin (evacuation) position. Therefore, the operating position of each accessory can be easily grasped based on the value of the step counter.

Here, the origin position refers to a specific arrangement set for each accessory, and is a position where the origin shifts when the power is turned on. Specifically, each accessory is provided with an origin sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not it is at the origin position, and if the origin sensor is not turned on when the power is turned on, the origin sensor is turned on. The accessory is changed until it is detected (that is, various drive motors are driven). This origin position serves as a reference position for the operation of each accessory. The above-mentioned step counter is reset to 0 when the accessory reaches the origin position by returning to the origin (that is, when the origin sensor detects on). Then, as described above, the value of the step counter is updated by 1 based on the execution signal output from the motor control IC.

Next, an example of control of various drive motors (here, vertical drive motor 431) by a motor control IC (motor driver) will be described with reference to FIG. 135. In order to make the explanation easier to understand, a stepping motor that rotates 90 degrees in one step (that is, makes one revolution in four steps) will be described as an example, but the actual vertical drive motor 431 has one step. It is configured so that the rotation angle can be set more finely. Specifically, it is configured to rotate once in one step.

First, FIG. 135A is a diagram showing an outline of a vertical drive motor 431 composed of a stepping motor. The vertical drive motor 431 is configured to excite a portion corresponding to the excitation control data by sending excitation control data from the voice lamp control device 113 to the corresponding motor control IC. Specifically, the motor control IC is excited by the excitation control data composed of four-digit binary numbers corresponding to "A, B, C, D" shown in FIG. 135 (a). Specifically, if the excitation control data corresponding to each part (that is, any of A, B, C, and D) of the vertical drive motor 431 is "1", the excitation is performed, and the excitation control data is "0". If so, it will not be excited. For example, if the excitation control data is "1100", A and B are excited and C and D are not excited. This excitation control data is defined in an excitation table (see FIG. 135B) provided in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 includes an excitation counter used to select and set one excitation control data from a plurality of excitation control data defined in the excitation table (see FIG. 135 (b)). It is provided. This excitation counter can be updated one by one in the positive direction starting from "0", and when the value is updated after the value of the excitation counter becomes "3", the value returns to "0". It has become. Each time the excitation counter value is updated, the corresponding excitation control data is read and set. When the excitation control data is set, the excitation of each part based on the excitation control data is immediately performed (that is, the vertical drive motor 431 operates without a time lag from the setting of the excitation control data). In addition, the excitation counter can also be updated in the negative direction. That is, the value can be updated in the order of "0"-> "3"-> "2"-> "1"-> "0" starting from "0". When updating in the negative direction, the rotation direction of the vertical drive motor 431 is opposite to that in the case of updating in the positive direction. The direction in which the excitation counter is updated (whether it is in the positive direction or the negative direction) and the update frequency of the excitation counter are predetermined for each type of accessory for which the operation is set. The maximum value of this excitation counter changes according to the number of steps of the drive motor. Specifically, for example, in the case of a drive motor that rotates once in one step (that is, it takes 360 steps for the motor to rotate once), the excitation counter is updated in the range of "0" to "359". It becomes a loop counter.

Next, a specific example of excitation control data for exciting each part of the vertical drive motor 431 will be described with reference to FIG. 135 (b). FIG. 135 (b) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between an excitation table in which excitation control data is defined and a state of a vertical drive motor 431 excited based on the excitation control data defined in the excitation table. As shown in FIG. 135 (b), excitation control data is defined for each value of the excitation counter in the excitation table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), as sequence data corresponding to the vertical drive motor 431, excitation control of "1100, 0110, 0011, 1001" in the order of excitation counters "0" to "3". Each data is specified. Further, when "1100", which is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "0", is set, the positions A and B of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited. Further, when "0110", which is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "1", is set, the positions B and C of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited, so that the excitation counter value is "0". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state of. Further, when "0011", which is the sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "2", is set, the positions C and D of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited, and the excitation counter value is "1". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from. Further, when "1001", which is the sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "3", is set, the positions A and D of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited, so that the excitation counter value is "2". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state of. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 135, the vertical drive motor 431 rotates 90 degrees clockwise each time the value of the excitation counter is updated by one in the positive direction. As described above, when the value of the excitation counter is updated in the negative direction, the vertical drive motor 431 rotates counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

As described above, the control of the vertical drive motor 431 has been described with a simplified operation model, but in the vertical drive motor 431 actually used in the present embodiment, the excitation counter is set to 1 for each step (that is, the excitation counter is set to 1). It can be rotated once (each time it is updated). That is, when each accessory is changed, the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 as many times as the number of steps to be changed, and the excitation control data corresponding to the excitation counter is set each time the excitation counter is updated. Each accessory can be changed accurately.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by setting a command for the motor driver, various drive motors can be driven at the rotation speed, the rotation direction, and the number of rotation steps specified by the command. Therefore, it is possible to realize various production operations using the accessory.

In addition, each accessory has a unique operation pattern set according to the effect. This operation pattern defines a command to be set for the motor control IC (motor driver) described above for each elapsed time.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the operation of the various drive motors is completed based on the command set for the motor driver based on the number of steps in which the various drive motors are operated. That is, has the operation set for each drive motor completed based on the number of steps set by the command and the number of times the execution signal output from the motor driver is received each time the operation of one step is set by the motor driver? It is judged whether or not, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to measure the elapsed time from setting a command for operating various drive motors and determine whether or not the operation of various drive motors is completed based on the elapsed time. ..

Here, the control of the vertical drive motor 431 and the open / close drive motor 466, which are coordinatedly controlled in the present embodiment, will be described. Details will be described in the first control example described later, but in the present embodiment, the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 is used as an effect (falling accessory scenario) in which the vertical motion unit device (falling accessory) 400 is movable. The lens member 460 and the door member 470 are moved in the downward direction (falling direction) of the front view by the drive of the vertical drive motor 431. In the effect (falling accessory scenario), after the lens member 460 and the door member 470 are moved in the downward direction (falling direction) in front view, the door member 470 is opened by the opening / closing drive motor 466, and the door member 470 is opened. There is a production that is not done.

The voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment is used as an opening / closing drive motor 466 for opening / closing the door member 470 when the effect of opening the door member 470 is executed in the effect (falling accessory scenario). On the other hand, control is performed so that the excitation for all the positions A to D is turned off (energization stop control) (see S1706 in FIG. 108). When the excitation for all positions is off, the static torque (so-called detent torque) of the opening / closing drive motor 466, that is, the torque for keeping the door member 470 in the closed state is minimized. In this case, the vertical drive motor 431 is driven, the slide member 450 is moved in the falling direction, and when the movement is completed, an inertial force downward in front view is generated on the door member 470.

Here, in the present embodiment, the torque (static torque) for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is configured to be smaller than the inertial force generated on the door member 470. As a result, when the slide member 450 is moved in the downward direction (falling direction) in front view without driving the opening / closing drive motor 466 to open the door member 470, the inertial force acting on the door member 470 causes the door. The member 470 can be opened. That is, when the door member 470 finishes moving together with the slide member 450 in the front view downward direction (that is, when the arm member 440 and the lens member 460 are arranged in the overhanging position), the door member 470 is viewed from the front. The door member 470 is opened by the action of the inertial force in the direction (that is, the force that tries to continue the movement in the downward direction of the front view). Therefore, the power consumption for driving the opening / closing motor 466 can be reduced.

If the inertial force generated in the door member 470 due to the movement of the slide member 450 is not sufficient to open the door member 470, the opening / closing drive motor 466 may be driven to open the door member 470. In this case, by using the inertial force generated in the door member 470 as the slide member 450 moves, the drive torque of the opening / closing drive motor 466 can be reduced, the power consumption can be reduced, and the opening / closing drive motor can be reduced. The size of 466 can be reduced.

Further, depending on the effect pattern, the case where the opening / closing motor 466 is driven to open the door member 470 and the case where the opening / closing motor 466 is not driven to open the door member 470 may be switched. For example, when an effect pattern with a high degree of expectation is executed, an opening / closing motor 466 is driven to open the door member 470 in order to surely open the door member 470, while when an effect pattern with a low degree of expectation is executed, opening / closing is performed. The door member 470 may be opened without driving the motor 466. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the door member 470 is not opened in spite of the highly expected effect pattern.

Further, when the vertical drive motor 431 is driven and the slide member 450 is not moved in the falling direction, that is, when no inertial force acts on the door member 470, the torque (rest torque) for keeping the door member 470 in the closed state. ) Is configured to provide sufficient torque to keep the door member 470 closed. Therefore, it is not necessary to excite the opening / closing drive motor 466 to keep the door member 470 in the closed state even during the period when the falling accessory scenario is not executed, and the power consumption can be reduced. If the torque (static torque) for keeping the door member 470 in the closed state is insufficient to keep the door member 470 in the closed state, for example, a magnet is attached to the tip of the door member 470. By providing the door member 470, the torque required to maintain the door member 470 in the closed state may be reduced.

On the other hand, when the effect that the door member 470 is not opened is executed as the effect (falling accessory scenario), the opening / closing drive motor 466 for opening / closing the door member is excited and controlled so as not to rotate. Specifically, by continuing to excite the corresponding parts (A to D) of the above-mentioned excitation table (FIG. 135 (b) based on the current excitation counter) for a certain period of time, the opening / closing drive motor 466 stops. A torque to maintain the position (so-called holding torque) is generated, and the door member 470 is maintained in the closed state. As a result, the slide member 450 is produced even though the door member 470 is not opened. It is possible to reliably prevent (suppress) the door member 470 from being opened due to the momentum (inertial force) when the door member is moved in the falling direction.

If the opening / closing control of the door member 470 and the opening / closing state of the door member 470 controlled by the opening / closing control do not match, the effect executed thereafter may be changed.

Specifically, when the effect based on the falling accessory scenario in which the door member 470 is opened is executed, the opening / closing drive motor 466 is controlled to stop energization, and then the door member 470 is opened. The lens member 460 located on the back side of the door member 470 becomes visible. Then, the player can visually recognize the characters "super hot" displayed on the third symbol display device 81 through the lens member 460. By visually recognizing the display of the third symbol display device 81 through the lens member 460, the display is enlarged and displayed, and the player can feel the display more impressively.

On the other hand, when the door member 470 is not opened even though the opening / closing drive motor 466 is controlled to stop energization, the character "super hot" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Although the door member 470 is opened and the lens member 460 can be visually recognized, it gives the impression that a problem has occurred that the door member 470 is not opened. Therefore, in the production, the door member 470 detects that the door member 470 has not been opened although the power supply stop control of the opening / closing drive motor 466 is controlled by the origin sensor or the like capable of detecting the state. After that, the effect is changed so that the characters "super hot" are not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, even if the door member 470 is not opened, the character "super hot" is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can be made to recognize that the effect that the door member 470 is not opened is executed. , It is possible to prevent the impression that the above-mentioned problem has occurred. In this case, the employee may be notified that the problem has occurred by turning on a specific LED or notifying the hall computer through an external output terminal.

Further, as a scenario in which the lens member 460 and the door member 470 of the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 are dropped, a scenario in which the lens member 460 and the door member 470 are moved from the retracted position to the overhanging position in one operation, and a plurality of operations (for example, 2) A scenario for moving from the retracted position to the overhanging position may be provided. As a result, even if the door member 470 is not opened after that even though the opening / closing drive motor 466 is controlled to stop energization, even if the door member 470 is opened by the second operation, the door member 470 is opened twice. It is possible to make the player feel that the door member 470 moves from the retracted position to the overhanging position by the operation, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, in the falling accessory scenario in which the door member 470 is opened and the falling accessory scenario in which the door member 470 is not opened, the drive speed of the vertical drive motor 431 is changed to change the inertial force acting on the door member 470. It may be configured as follows. Specifically, in the falling accessory scenario in which the door member 470 is opened, the drive speed of the vertical drive motor 431 is increased so that the inertial force acting on the door member 470 is increased, while the door member 470 is opened. In the falling accessory scenario, the drive speed of the vertical drive motor 431 is reduced so that the inertial force acting on the door member 470 is reduced. As a result, the opening and closing of the door member 470 can be controlled with high accuracy. It is not limited to changing the drive speed of the vertical drive motor 431 according to the scenario of the falling accessory, and even in the same falling accessory scenario, for example, when moving upward and when moving downward. The drive speed of the vertical drive motor 431 may be changed.

Further, depending on the effect pattern, the case where the opening / closing motor 466 is driven to open the door member 470 and the case where the opening / closing motor 466 is not driven to open the door member 470 may be switched. For example, when an effect pattern with a high degree of expectation is executed, an opening / closing motor 466 is driven to open the door member 470 in order to surely open the door member 470, while when an effect pattern with a low degree of expectation is executed, opening / closing is performed. The door member 470 is opened without driving the motor 466. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the door member 470 is not opened in spite of the highly expected effect pattern.

An RTC (real-time clock) 292 is connected to the input / output port 225 in this embodiment. This RTC292 is used as a timekeeping means for timekeeping and is provided with a dedicated internal power source (battery in this embodiment), so that the timekeeping can be performed even when the pachinko machine 10 is not supplied with power. You can continue. Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured, the same time information can be acquired by the plurality of pachinko machines 10 by setting the same time (for example, the current time) in the time measuring means. ..

With this configuration, apart from the normal production, a special mode of production (time) according to the elapsed time on a regular basis (5 minutes every hour) regardless of the game status of each pachinko machine 10. The effect) can be executed synchronously on a plurality of pachinko machines 10. In addition, during a specific time (every 1 minute elapses from the start of the time effect) during the period in which this time effect is executed (displayed) (hereinafter referred to as the time effect period), the specific time effect suggesting the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Is executed. Specifically, in the specific time effect (countdown effect), a total of 4 countdown characters ("3", "2", "1", "0") are in order for 3 seconds (12 seconds in total). After being displayed, a character image (such as a girl's image) is displayed for 8 seconds for a total of 20 seconds, and the display (effect) mode is set according to the elapsed time from the start of the effect. For example, at the start time of the effect (0 seconds after the start of the effect), a display (effect) mode in which "3" is displayed as a countdown character is set. Further, when 6 seconds have passed from the start of the effect, a display (effect) mode in which "1" is displayed as a countdown character is set. In this specific time effect (countdown effect), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state and not in the time saving state (so-called latent probability change state), the countdown characters (“3, 2, 1 ... ") is displayed in red (displayed in black if it is not in the latent probability change state). Details will be specifically described in the first control example.

Here, the state in which the game state is the probability change state and not the time saving state (so-called latent probability change state) is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, and the game state in which the transition to the special game state is easy (that is, the game). It is a favorable condition for the person). On the other hand, since the latent probability change state is not the time saving state, the hit probability of the normal symbol is the same as the normal state, and as described above, when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state. It is difficult to win the second prize opening 640. In this case, as in the normal state, the ball is fired toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory 640a so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"). ), It is advantageous for the player to get many chances of big hit lottery by winning the first winning opening 64 and aim to become a big hit. In this way, the latent probability change state is the same operation (game method) as the normal state except that the probability of becoming a big hit as the internal state of the pachinko machine 10 is increased, so that the player can change the current game state. It is difficult to determine whether it is in the normal state or the latent probability change state. Further, as will be described in detail later, in the latent probability change state, the same effect as in the normal state is selected and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can display on the third symbol display device 81. From the displayed effect, it is difficult to determine whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent probability change state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the specific time effect executed when there is a latent probability change state in the time effect period, the displayed countdown characters ("3, 2, 1, ...") Are usually It is displayed in a different color (red) than in the state. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the gaming state is a latent probability changing state which is an advantageous state for the player in the specific time production. As a result, the player can be interested in the production content of the specific time production, and the player's interest can be improved.

In addition, in order to improve the accuracy of timekeeping by the timekeeping means (RTC), a correction means (GPS, radio clock, etc.) for correcting time information from the outside may be provided.

In addition, the time information is corrected every time power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time it is started) by a correction means (for example, GPS, radio clock, etc.) for correcting the time information from the outside. May be good. As a result, the time information by the timing means can be updated every time the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time it is started) without providing a dedicated internal power source (battery in the present embodiment). , Manufacturing cost and maintenance cost of timekeeping means (replacement cost due to deterioration of internal power supply, etc.) can be reduced. The correction of the time information by the correction means is not limited to each time the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time it is started up), and may be executed periodically (for example, every hour).

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

Here, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 will be described. The third symbol is composed of the main symbols of the numbers "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the variation display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variation display is performed. It is configured to generate a jackpot after it is over. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A" or "big hit C", the variable display in which the main symbols of the odd numbers "1, 3, 4, 7, 9" are aligned and stopped is displayed. Will be. Further, in the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are aligned.

The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, the upper 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the other lower 1/3 is the advance notice effect. It is a sub-display area Ds that displays a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The substantially center of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first winning opening 64, and the small area Ds2 is. The small area Ds3 is an area for displaying the advance notice effect image, and the small area Ds3 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the second winning opening 640. Is.

On the actual display screen, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbols displayed in the center, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbols are visibly displayed, so a total of nine main symbols are displayed at the maximum. In some cases. In the sub-display area Ds, one "●" symbol is displayed for one reserved ball, and the reserved symbol corresponds to a maximum of four reserved balls for each of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. Is displayed. That is, a maximum of eight reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In the present embodiment, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same reserved symbol (design), but the design is not limited to this, and a different symbol (for example, the special symbol 1 is designated as a "●" symbol. The symbol 2 may be configured to be displayed as a white square symbol).

As a result, the reserved balls of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, that is, the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, can be displayed in an easy-to-identify manner. In addition, since the display mode of the reserved ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 is displayed differently depending on the hit type of the normal symbol, the player can easily determine that the reserved ball has occurred in a long time. be able to.

In the present embodiment, in the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the above-mentioned main symbol, reserved symbol, etc., character display, notice effect display of characters, etc., and total The display of the number of fluctuations is displayed as appropriate. When the reserved symbol is not displayed, it means that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entered into the first winning opening 64 is set to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds3, the number of reserved balls is displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the amount. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

A sub-display device 690 is connected to the display control device 114. The sub-display device 690 is a display device (for example, a liquid crystal panel) having a resolution different from that of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, the resolution of the third symbol display device 81 is (horizontal 800 pixels (pixels) x vertical 600 pixels (pixels)), and the resolution of the sub-display device 690 is (horizontal 400 pixels (pixels) x vertical). It is 300 pixels (pixels)) (see FIG. 82). The resolutions of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 may be different from those described above, and the resolution of the sub display device 690 and the resolution of the third symbol display device 81 are the same. It may be present, or the resolution of the sub display device 690 may be higher than that of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the display system that can be adopted as the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 is not limited to the system using the liquid crystal panel, and any display (for example, PDP system, CRT system, organic system) is used. EL method, MEMS shutter method, etc.) may be adopted.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 81, but the display control device 114 in the present embodiment includes the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 with respect to the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. Display control is performed using one image data (in this embodiment, image data having a resolution of 1200 pixels (pixels) in width × 600 pixels (pixels) in height) including the images to be displayed in each. Of the one image data, the image data (area of 800 pixels (pixels) in width × 600 pixels (pixels) in height) of the portion corresponding to the resolution of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image data (area of 400 pixels (pixels) in width × 300 pixels (pixels) in height) of the portion corresponding to the resolution of the sub-display device 690 in the remaining portion is displayed on the sub-display device 690. The remaining data (area of 400 pixels (pixels) in width × 300 pixels (pixels) in height) is unused.

As a result, it becomes easy to synchronize the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, and the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 deviate from each other. It is possible to suppress the trouble that occurs.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 12. First, the accommodation structure of each unit 300 to 700 in the rear case 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7.

FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200 with the disassembled operation unit 200 viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 7 shows a state in which the combined operation unit 500 is mounted on the rear case 210.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, one side (front side of the paper in FIG. 6) of the operation unit 200 is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The back case 210 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 211a in the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

The operation unit 200 includes a vertical operation unit 400, a combined operation unit 500, a tilt operation unit 600, and a slide operation unit 700 in the internal space of the rear case 210, and is configured as one unit.

Specifically, the composite operation unit 500 is arranged in the upper right portion of the region formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7). With respect to the state shown in FIG. 7, the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 are arranged below the region formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210. Further, with respect to the state shown in FIG. 7, the vertical operation unit 400 is arranged on the front side of the composite operation unit 500 in a laminated state, and is housed in the back case 210 (see FIG. 5).

As described above, in the present embodiment, other operation units (for example, the vertical operation unit 400) are arranged in a laminated state in which the other operation units (for example, the vertical operation unit 400) are overlapped on the front side with respect to the predetermined operation unit (for example, the composite operation unit 500). Therefore, in front view, a predetermined operating unit can be shielded by another operating unit.

In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is formed of a light-transmitting material and the operation unit arranged on the back side of the game board 13 is visible to the player, a predetermined operation unit. Only the necessary part of the above can be made visible to the player, and the other part can be shielded from the player by another operation unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member that is shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the entire member is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. ..

Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, the outline of the operation modes of the vertical operation unit 400, the combined operation unit 500, the tilt operation unit 600, and the slide operation unit 700 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 8 to 10, FIGS. 5 to 7 will be referred to as appropriate.

8 to 10 are front views of the operating unit 200. In FIG. 8, the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) of the vertical movement unit 400 is arranged at the overhanging position, and in FIG. 9, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 26) of the composite operation unit 500 is in the extended state. The formed state is shown in FIG. 10, in which the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged substantially in the center in the width direction.

As shown in FIG. 8, the vertical movement unit 400 operates the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the arm member 440 is retracted above the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 440 is lowered, and the lens member 460 (see FIG. 18) is in the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. ) Is placed.

As shown in FIG. 9, in the composite operation unit 500, the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 22) is arranged at an overhanging position so as to project downward, and the front plate member 546 is located at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, The front plate member 546 is arranged in the extended state arranged in the front surface of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. It is possible to form a reduced state (see FIG. 5) that is retracted upward. In the reduced state shown in FIG. 5, the front plate member 546 is retracted above the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2).

As shown in FIG. 10, in the tilting operation unit 600, the support column member 720 (see FIG. 47) of the slide operation unit 700 is slid to the left and right to move the evacuation position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhang shown in FIG. It is possible to move to and from the position. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the tilting operation unit 600 is retracted to the right outside of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and is visually recognized by the player inside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 10, the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2).

Note that FIG. 10 shows a state in which the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 (see FIG. 46) are opened so that the internal sub-display device 690 can be visually recognized. That is, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the state of FIG. 10, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) visually recognized through the opening 211a and the sub-display inside the tilting operation unit 600 are displayed. Both the effect displayed on the device 690 and the effect can be visually recognized by the player.

Each of these operation units 400 to 700 is formed so as to be able to operate independently, and is arranged in a stacked state as described above. Therefore, among the operation units 400 to 700 With respect to those arranged in different layers, even if the operating member projects inward of the opening 211a of the back case 210, it can be operated at the same time. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 8 to 10, each of the operation units 400 to 700 can be operated independently, and these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

FIG. 11 is a front view of the operating unit 200. In FIG. 11, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the composite operation unit 500 is in the extended state, and the arm member 440 and the lens member 460 of the vertical operation unit 400 are arranged at the overhanging positions and the door member 470. Is formed in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 11, the front plate member 546 of the composite operation unit 500 is visually recognized through the lens member 460 of the vertical operation unit 400. As will be described later, the lens member 460 is formed with a magnifying lens process, so that the front plate member 546 is magnified.

That is, from the state shown in FIG. 11, the rotating plate 520 (see FIG. 24) of the composite operation unit 500 is swung around the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24), and the front plate member 546 is moved up and down by the vertical operation unit 400. When the lens member 470 is moved to a position separated from the lens member 470 in front view (see FIG. 39), the front plate member 546 is visually recognized in a normal size. As a result, the state in which the front plate member 546 is visually recognized in a normal size and the state in which the front plate member 546 is visually magnified (see FIG. 11) can be switched, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

FIG. 12 is a front view of the operating unit 200. In FIG. 12, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the composite operation unit 500 is in the extended state, the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the retracted position and is in the tilted state, and the tilting operation unit 600 and the front plate member 546 are in the tilted state. The state immediately before the contact with is illustrated. When the tilting operation unit 600 is further tilted, the tilting operation unit 600 and the front plate member 546 are brought into contact with each other. In this case, by swinging the composite operation unit 500 clockwise in front view (see FIG. 39), it is possible to produce an effect as if a force is applied from the tilt operation unit 600 to the composite operation unit 500. (The movements of the units can be associated with each other to create a more complicated effect). As a result, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Next, the board surface lower unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the board surface 13 and the board surface lower unit 300. As shown in FIG. 13, a receiving opening 13a is formed in the lower part of the game board 13 so as to be opened along the lower edge of the inner rail 61 through which the board surface lower unit 300 is inserted.

FIG. 14 is a front exploded perspective view of the lower board unit 300. As shown in FIG. 14, the board surface lower unit 300 is arranged with a base member 310 internally fitted and fixed in the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13 and the base member 310 at the lower left side of the front view, and a ball is inserted into the first out port. The lower left plate member 320 that guides the ball to 314, the lower right plate member 330 that is arranged at the lower right of the front view of the base member 310 and guides the ball to the second out port 315, and the lower left plate that is fastened and fixed to the base member 310 from the front. It mainly includes a front lid member 340 in which the member 320 and the lower right plate member 330 are pivotally supported by the insertion shaft 343.

The base member 310 has a plate-shaped main body portion 311 having a shape substantially equivalent to the shape of the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13 and having a cross-sectional shape slightly smaller than the receiving opening 13a, and the front side of the main body portion 311. A decorative front plate portion 312 formed in a thin plate shape in a covering manner, a movable effect member 313 attached to a substantially central portion in the width direction of the decorative front plate portion 312, and a movable effect member 313 formed on the left side of the front view. The first out port 314, which is a rectangular hole, and the second out port 315, which is a rectangular hole formed on the right side of the front view of the movable effect member 313, are mainly provided.

The movable effect member 313 is provided at the lower edge of the game board 13 in the width direction and is rotated by a drive device (not shown). Here, when the out port is arranged at the lower edge of the game board 13 in the width direction, the movable effect member 313 cannot be arranged at the lower edge of the game board 13 in the width direction. In the present embodiment, the out port is not arranged at the lower edge of the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, and the first out port 314 and the second out port 315 are arranged at positions separated from the center of the game board 13 to the left and right. This makes it possible to secure a space for arranging the movable effect member 313 on the lower edge of the game board 13 in the width direction.

The shapes of the first out port 314, the second out port 315, the left lower plate member 320, and the right lower plate member 330 will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (a) is a front view of the base member 310, the first out port 314, the second out port 315, the lower left plate member 320, and the lower right plate member 330, and FIG. 15 (b) is FIG. 15 (a). It is sectional drawing of the base member 310 and the lower left plate member 320 in line XVb-XVb of). Note that FIG. 15A shows the outer shape of the front lid member 340 fastened and fixed to the base member 310, and the nails formed above the first out port 314 and the second out port 315.

The first out port 314 and the second out port 315 are openings through which balls are discharged from the game area. The formation length of the second out port 315 in the width direction is shorter than that of the first out port 314. The reason will be described later. Further, a guide rib 315a extending in the front-rear direction is formed on the upper inner side surface of the second out port 315. The guide rib 315a makes it possible to suppress the resistance applied to the ball when the ball flowing into the second out port 315 bounces high and collides with the upper bottom surface of the second out port 315. Further, the flow of the balls discharged from the second out port 315 can be adjusted in the front-rear direction, and the variation in the direction of the discharged balls can be suppressed.

Further, the cushioning rib 322 of the lower left plate member 320, which will be described later, is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 13) (see FIG. 15A). As a result, even in the present embodiment in which the vertical width of the game area becomes larger toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the effect of suppressing the bounce of the ball falling on the lower left plate member 320 is not impaired. That is, the closer to the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, the higher the falling height of the ball, so that the impact when the dropped ball collides with the lower left plate member 320 may be large. On the other hand, since the cushioning rib 322 is formed higher toward the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, the cushioning rib 322 bends closer to the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, thereby providing a cushioning effect that softens the impact of dropping. The degree can be increased.

Here, the relationship between the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 and the landing frequency of the falling ball will be described. For example, if the height of the ball landing on the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is high, but the frequency at which the ball reaches that position is extremely low, even if the bounce of the ball is not suppressed, the discharge of other balls is hindered. It may not be. If the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is increased up to this case, the space in the game area is unnecessarily suppressed. Therefore, it is preferable that the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is set not only by the falling height of the ball but also by the relationship between the falling height and the frequency at which the ball lands at that position.

As shown in FIG. 15, the spheres flowing down above the buffer ribs 322 and 332 start flowing down along the paths c1 and c2, and then reach the landing areas z0 to z4 via the plurality of branches b1 to b10. In the following description, the probability that the sphere will flow down is equal (1/2) in the paths c1 and c2, and the probability of branching to the left and right in the branches b1 to b10 is equal (1/2), respectively. To explain. It is assumed that the ball does not flow down from the upper right.

The probability that the ball will reach the landing area z0 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z0, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b5 and reach the route c11. The branch b5 may be reached from the route c1 via the branch b1 or may be reached from the route c2. Therefore, the probability that the sphere will reach the path c11 and the sphere will reach the landing area z0 is 1/8 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 2) of the probability of the sphere flowing down from the path c1. Since it is represented by the sum of the probability of a sphere flowing down from the path c2 1/4 (= 1/2 × 1/2), it is 3/8 (“^” means a power). That is, each probability is the product of the probability that the sphere flows down the paths c1 and c2 1/2 and the number obtained by raising 1/2 by the number of branches b1 to b10 through which the sphere passes before reaching the landing area z0. It is represented by.

The probability that the ball will reach the landing area z1 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z1, the branch b3 flows down the left side to reach the route c15, the branch b4 flows down the left side to reach the route c16, or the branch b6 flows down the right side to reach the route c14. It is necessary to reach the route c13 or flow down the right side at the branch b7 to reach the route c13.

Up to the branch b3, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 can be considered, and since there are three branches before the sphere reaches the path c15, the probability that the sphere will reach the path c15 is 1/16 (=). It is 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 3). Further, up to the branch b4, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 can be considered, and since there are four branches before the sphere reaches the path c16, the probability that the sphere will reach the path c16 is 1/32. (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 4). Further, up to the branch b6, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 can be considered, and since there are three branches before the sphere reaches the path c14, the probability that the sphere will reach the path c14 is 1/16. (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 3).

Up to the branch b7, both the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 and the path c2 can be considered, and the case where there are four branches before the sphere flowing down from the path c1 reaches the path c13 and the case where there are three branches. May exist. There are two branches before the sphere flowing down from the path c2 reaches the path c13. Therefore, the probability that the sphere will reach the path c13 is 3/32 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 4 + 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 3) of the sphere that flows down from the path c1. It is 7/32 because it is represented by the sum of the probability of the sphere flowing down from the path c2 1/8 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 2).

Here, the probability that the ball will reach the landing region z1 is 12/32 because it is the sum of the probabilities that the ball will reach the paths c13 to c16 described above.

The probability that the ball will reach the landing area z2 will be described. The probability that the sphere will reach the landing region z2 can be expressed by the probability that the sphere will reach the path c12, which is equal to the probability that the sphere that has reached the branch b7 will reach the path c13. Therefore, the probability that the ball will reach the landing area z2 is 7/32.

The probability that the ball will reach the landing area z3 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z3, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b9 to reach the route c17, or to flow down the left side at the branch b10 to reach the route c18.

Up to branch b9, only the case where the sphere flows down from path c1 is considered, and since there are six branches before the sphere reaches path c17, the probability that the sphere will reach path c17 is 1/128 (=). It is 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 6). Further, up to the branch b10, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 can be considered, and since there are seven branches before the sphere reaches the path c18, the probability that the sphere will reach the path c18 is 1/256. (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 7).

The probability that the ball will reach the landing area z3 is 3/256 because it is the sum of the probabilities that the ball will reach the paths c17 and c18 described above.

The probability that the ball will reach the landing area z4 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z4, it is necessary to flow down the right side at the branch b10 and reach the route c19. It is assumed that all the spheres that have flowed down on the right side of the branch b10 flow down on the path c19. The probability that the sphere will reach path c19 is equal to the probability that the sphere that has reached branch b10 will reach path c18. Therefore, the probability that the ball will reach the landing area z4 is 1/256 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 7).

From these facts, the ratio of the sphere reaching each landing region z0 to z4 is (z0: z1: z2: z3: z4) = (96: 96: 56: 3: 1). This ratio correlates with the buffer ribs 322 and 332.

For example, when the landing area z1 and the landing area z3 are compared, the height of the spheres falling into the landing areas z1 and z3 is the same, but the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is higher in the landing area z3. It is smaller than z1. This is because the ratio of the ball reaching the landing area z3 is 1/32 of the ratio of the ball reaching the landing area z1. That is, even if the bouncing of the falling ball is not suppressed as much as the landing area z1, there is little possibility that the discharge of the ball will be delayed in the landing area z3. Therefore, in the landing area z3, the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward by reducing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 as compared with the landing area z1.

For example, when comparing the landing area z2 and the landing area z4, the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is longer than the falling distance of the ball to the landing area z2 even though the falling distance of the ball to the landing area z4 is longer. The landing area z2 is larger than the landing area z4. This is because the ratio of the ball reaching the landing area z4 is 1/56 of the ratio of the ball reaching the landing area z2. That is, even if the bouncing of the falling ball is not suppressed as much as the landing area z2, there is little possibility that the discharge of the ball will be delayed in the landing area z4. Therefore, in the landing area z4, the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward by reducing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 as compared with the landing area z2.

In the above description, the probability of branching of the spheres of the branches b1 to b10 is equal to the left and right (1/2), but by changing the width of the nail, the spheres of the branches b1 to b10 can be separated. It is possible to adjust the probability of branching. For example, by making the distance between the nails in the flow path through which the arrow on the left side of the branch b1 passes as small as the diameter of the sphere, the probability that the sphere will flow down along the arrow on the right side at the branch b1 is greater than 1/2. can do. In the other branches b2 to b10, the probability of branching of the sphere can be adjusted in the same manner.

As a result, the frequency with which the sphere reaches the paths c11 to c19 can be adjusted, and the degree of freedom in designing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 can be improved.

Further, the cushioning rib 322 is formed so as to be inclined downward as the upper surface is directed toward the rear (see FIG. 15 (b)). As a result, the ball flow to the first out port 314 can be made faster.

It will be described back to FIG. The lower left plate member 320 includes a long plate-shaped main body portion 321 and a cushioning rib 322 in which thin plates continuously provided in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the main body portion 321 are extended in the front-rear direction, respectively. A connecting front plate 323 formed in a manner of connecting the front surfaces of the 322, a step portion 324 formed by protruding upward at the left end of the main body portion 321 in the front view, and extending from the step portion 324 to the left in the front view. It mainly includes a ball flow rail portion 325 to be formed, and a shaft support hole 326 formed in the front-rear direction at the right end portion of the main body portion 321 in the front view.

The buffer rib 322 is a portion through which the ball toward the first out port 314 passes, and suppresses the vertical rebound of the ball falling in the vertical direction. That is, since the cushioning rib 322 is formed of thin plates that are continuously provided in the left-right direction, when it is hit by a falling sphere, it bends in the thickness direction, so that the impact of the collision can be softened. Further, when the sphere moves on the upper surface of the cushioning rib 322 in the left-right direction, the sphere is caught between the cushioning ribs 322 and the sphere is braked. Further, the height and aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 are increased toward the right side in the front view (inward in the width direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2)).

The connecting front plate 323 improves the strength of the cushioning rib 322 by connecting the cushioning rib 322.

The step portion 324 is a raised portion for dropping the ball flowing down from the ball flow rail portion 325 in the vertical direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent a load in the left-right direction from being applied to the buffer rib 322 from the ball flowing down the ball flow rail portion 325. As a result, it is possible to prevent the buffer rib 322 from being bent in the left-right direction by receiving a load in the left-right direction.

That is, since the cushioning rib 322 is formed from a thin wall portion extending in the front-rear direction, there is a risk of breaking when a load in the left-right direction is applied. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a ball that has a velocity in the left-right direction and rolls on the upper surface of the ball flow rail 325 that may apply a load in the left-right direction to the buffer rib 322 moves up and down from the step portion 324 to the buffer rib 322. It is formed in a manner of falling in a direction. As a result, the position where the ball lands on the buffer rib 322 can be moved to the right in the width direction as the speed in the left-right direction of the ball increases.

Therefore, when the ball lands on the buffer rib 322, the load applied to the buffer rib 322 in the left-right direction can be reduced toward the left (outside) in the width direction. Therefore, as the buffer rib 322 moves to the left in the width direction, the possibility of bending due to a load in the left-right direction of the sphere decreases, and the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 can be made smaller than that to the right in the width direction. .. In this case, since the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 can be formed along the curved surface formed on the lower surface of the game board 13, the buffer rib 322 is arranged as compared with the case where the buffer rib 322 has the same length in the width direction. The position can be lowered.

Here, while keeping the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 constant at the left and right positions in the width direction (in a state where the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 is formed by the same curve as the lower surface of the buffer rib 322), the lower surface of the game board 13 It is also conceivable to form the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 along the curved surface formed in. However, in this case, the arrangement position of the step portion 324 is high, and the arrangement position of the ball flow rail portion 325 formed by inclining downward toward the step portion 324 is also high. In this case, the dead space between the ball flow rail portion 325 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 13) becomes large, and the game area is suppressed.

On the other hand, the larger the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322, the greater the action of reducing the momentum of the ball (deceleration action). Therefore, the cushioning rib 322 is formed in a manner in which the aspect ratio is increased from the vicinity of the step portion 324 toward the center of the game area.

The upper surface of the buffer rib 322 is formed with the same curve as the curve of the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 up to the front of the step portion 324 so as not to affect the formation height of the step portion 324 (in the middle of the buffer rib 322 in the left-right direction). It is also possible that the height is formed to the maximum). However, in this case, the ball that has reached the landing area z1 is prevented from rolling to the left. Therefore, the ball tends to stay in the landing area z1, and it becomes difficult to smoothly discharge the ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the height of the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 does not fluctuate much in the width direction of the buffer rib 322, the ball that has reached the landing region z1 easily rolls to the left (landing region z2 side). Move. Therefore, since the ball can flow to the landing area z2 before the ball stays in the landing area z1, the discharge of the ball can be smoothed.

Further, the step portion 324 has a function of damming the ball flowing down above the buffer rib 322 and flowing to the left. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from bouncing beyond the width of the first out port 314 after colliding with the front lid member 340 (see FIG. 13).

The shaft support hole 326 is a portion through which the insertion shaft 343 of the front lid member 340 is inserted and supported by the shaft.

The lower right plate member 330 includes a long plate-shaped main body portion 331, a cushioning rib 332 in which thin wall portions continuously provided in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the main body portion 331 are extended in the front-rear direction, respectively. A connecting front plate 333 formed in a manner of connecting the front surfaces of the cushioning ribs 332, a recessed portion 324 formed by being recessed downward at the right end of the main body portion 331 in the front view, and the recessed portion 324 to the right in the front view. It mainly includes a ball flow rail portion 335 extending to the center and a shaft support hole 336 formed in the front-rear direction at the left end portion of the main body portion 331 in the front view.

The configuration of the lower right plate member 330 and the configuration of the lower left plate member 320 are common in many parts. That is, the main body 331 is the main body 321, the cushioning rib 332 is the cushioning rib 322, the connecting front plate 333 is the connecting front plate 323, the ball flow rail part 335 is the ball flow rail part 325, and the shaft support hole 336 is the shaft. Since the technical ideas are the same as those of the support hole 326, the description of the common parts will be omitted.

The cushioning rib 332 is formed to have a shorter left and right forming width than the cushioning rib 322. As a result, the left and right forming widths of the second out port 315 can be shortened, and the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward as compared with the first out port 314. It is possible to secure an arrangement space for the large opening solenoid 65b of the winning device 65 (the arrangement position of the first variable winning device 65 can be lowered downward).

Here, the formation width of the buffer rib 332 can be made shorter than that of the buffer rib 322 because the flow path of the ball to the second out port 315 is regulated. That is, as shown in FIG. 14, by disposing the first variable winning device 65 at the upper right of the front view of the second out opening 315, the ball flows into the first specific winning opening 65a when the opening / closing plate is opened. When the opening / closing plate is closed, the ball is dropped vertically downward on the front side of the first variable winning device 65. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down to the second out port 315 from the upper right of the front view. In other words, a non-flow area in which the flow of the ball is restricted is formed in the upper right portion of the second out port 315.

Therefore, the flow direction of the ball to the lower right plate member 330 is limited to the vertical fall and the flow from the width direction (from the ball flow rail portion 335) (the flow from diagonally upper right is restricted). .. Therefore, since there is no inflow of the ball from the diagonally upper right side, the direction in which the ball bounces can be restricted, the forming width of the buffer rib 332 can be narrowed, and the forming width of the second out port 315 can be narrowed. As a result, the arrangement space of the first variable winning device 65 can be secured.

The recessed portion 334 is a recess for bouncing a ball that has flowed down the ball flow rail portion 335. Therefore, the forming width of the recessed portion 334 is set to a width on which the ball can be placed without abutting on the adjacent buffer rib 332.

The ball that has flowed down the ball flow rail portion 335 is dropped onto the recessed portion 334, rebounds when it comes into contact with the upper surface of the recessed portion 334, and falls onto the buffer rib 332. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cushioning rib 332 from being loaded with a load from the width direction, and to prevent the cushioning rib 332 from breaking.

The recessed portion 334 is formed in front of the fastening hole B into which the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the base member 310 to the game board 13 is inserted. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the use of a fastening tool such as a screwdriver when screwing the fastening screw into the fastening hole B in order to fasten and fix the board surface lower unit 300 to the game board 13. That is, the recessed portion 334 has both an effect of preventing the cushioning rib 332 from breaking and an effect of facilitating fastening and fixing of the base member 310.

The front lid member 340 includes a plate-shaped main body 341 having a first winning opening 64 formed at the uppermost portion, an opening 342 having an opening formed in the center of the main body 341 to make the rotation effect member 313a visible. It mainly includes a pair of insertion shafts 343 that are inserted into the shaft support holes 326 and 336.

The main body portion 341 is formed in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the side wall portion limits the flow direction of the ball. That is, the ball that collides with the main body 341 from the right cannot penetrate to the left, while the ball that collides with the main body 341 from the left cannot penetrate to the right.

The insertion shaft 343 is a portion to be inserted into the shaft support holes 326 and 336. Therefore, the diameter of the insertion shaft 343 is formed to be slightly smaller than the shaft support holes 326 and 336.

Next, the vertical operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 21. FIG. 16 is a front perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400. Note that FIGS. 16 and 17 show a state in which the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is arranged at the retracted position.

FIG. 18 is a front exploded perspective view of the vertical operation unit 400, and FIG. 19 is a rear exploded perspective view of the vertical operation unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the vertical movement unit 400 includes a base member 410 having a vertical groove portion 414 that is recessed from the rear side to the front side on the right side of the rear view and the recess is extended in the vertical direction. , The rotary crank member 420 that is rotated around the connecting hole 413 of the base member 410, the drive device 430 that generates the driving force of the rotary crank member 420, and the base member 410 that the driving force is transmitted from the rotary crank member 420. The arm member 440 that swings around the shaft portion 412 of the base member 410 is arranged on the opposite side of the vertical groove portion 414 of the base member 410 and is formed so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in conjunction with the swing of the arm member 440. The slide member 450, the lens member 460 suspended from the sliding hole 443 formed at the tip of the arm member 440, and formed so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in conjunction with the swing of the arm member 440, and the lens member thereof. It mainly includes a pair of door members 470 that are pivotally supported by the 460.

The base member 410 has a main body portion 411 formed in the shape of a long plate on the left and right, and a shaft support hole 442 of the arm member 440 is provided so as to project in a columnar shape from the right end portion of the main body portion 411 toward the front side. A shaft portion 412 to be supported, a connecting hole 413 formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction to connect the rotary crank member 420 and the transmission gear 432, and a main body portion 411 formed from the back side to the front side on the right side in the rear view. It mainly includes a vertical groove portion 414 in which the recess to be formed extends in the vertical direction, and a recessed portion 415 that is recessed from the front to the back side on both the left and right outer sides of the vertical groove portion 414.

The upper and lower groove portions 414 are portions in which the expansion / contraction effect device 540 of the composite operation unit 500 is housed on the back surface side in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). As will be described later, in the composite operation unit 500, the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is suppressed as the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves toward the contracted state. Therefore, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is swung to cause the vertical groove portion 414. It is prevented from colliding with the left and right inner surfaces. The recessed portion 415 is a portion where the slide guide portion 452 of the slide member 450 is guided.

The rotary crank member 420 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 421 and a sliding protrusion 422 that is projected in a columnar shape from one end of the main body portion 421 to the front side and is inserted into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440. Mainly includes an engaging portion 423 that is engaged with the fitting portion 432a of the transmission gear 432 and makes it impossible for the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420 to rotate relative to each other.

When the sliding protrusion 422 is inserted into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440 and rotated, the driving force of the drive device 430 is transmitted to the arm member 440, and the arm member 440 is swung around the shaft portion 412. ..

The drive device 430 includes a vertical drive motor 431 fastened and fixed to the base member 410, a drive gear 431a rotationally driven by the vertical drive motor 431, and a transmission gear 432 meshed with the drive gear 431a. The transmission gear 432 is mainly provided with a fitting portion 432a formed on the front side thereof with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting hole 413 and whose inner side surface is fitted to the engaging portion 423 of the rotary crank member 420. ..

The fitting portion 432a is a portion having a recess having a cross-sectional shape in which a circular shape is arranged at each apex of the triangle, and is inserted into the connecting hole 413 of the base member 410 and the rotary crank member 420 on the tip side thereof. The engaging portion 423 of the above is fitted so as not to rotate relative to each other. As a result, the main body 411 of the base member 410 is formed by sandwiching the plate between the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420, and as described above, the relative rotation of the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420 is disabled. , The transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420 rotate in synchronization with each other. That is, the driving force of the vertical drive motor 431 is transmitted to the rotary crank member 420 via the transmission gear 432.

The arm member 440 has a main body portion 441 formed in the shape of a long rod, a shaft support hole 442 formed on the proximal end side (right side when viewed from the front) and swingably supported by the axial portion 412, and a proximal end side. The sliding hole 443, which is formed as a long hole on the swinging end side, which is the opposite end of the lens member 460, through which the sliding protrusion 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted, and the sliding protrusion 422 of the rotary crank member 420 are inserted. It mainly includes a bottomed hole-shaped insertion portion 444.

The shape of the insertion portion 444 is set so that the rotary crank member 420 can rotate once with the sliding protrusion portion 422 inserted through the insertion portion 444. Therefore, the arm member 440 can swing regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 420.

The slide member 450 includes a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 451 and a slide guide portion 452 that extends rearward from the left and right end portions of the main body portion 451 and is vertically slidable to the recessed portion 415. A central guide recess 453 formed in the center of the width direction of the 451 and extending in the vertical direction through which the sliding protrusion 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted, and both left and right ends of the main body 451. The portion is mainly provided with a recess formed in the front surface and extended in the vertical direction, and both end guide recessed portions 454 in which the stable slide portion 464 of the lens member 460 is guided.

The lens member 460 includes a plate-shaped main body 461 having a circular opening in the center, a magnifying lens 462 formed with a magnifying lens processed to be fitted into the opening of the main body 461, and a center in the width direction of the main body 461. A sliding protrusion 463 that is projected toward the back side at the upper end portion and is slidably inserted into the sliding hole 443 of the arm member 440, and a sliding protrusion portion 463 that is projected toward the back side at both ends in the width direction of the main body portion 461 and slides. A stable slide portion 464 that is slidably inserted into both end guide recessed portions 454 of the member 450, and a lower shaft portion 473 and an upper side of the door member 470 that are rotatably arranged in the lower left of the front view of the main body portion 461. It mainly includes a pair of rotary cylinders 465 through which the shaft portion 474 is inserted, and an opening / closing drive motor 466 that rotates the pair of rotary cylinders 465 in opposite directions by a transmission mechanism (not shown).

The moving operation of the vertical operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view of the vertical operation unit 400. Note that FIG. 20 shows a closed state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is arranged at the overhanging position.

When the arm member 440 is swung from the retracted position (see FIG. 16) to the overhanging position (see FIG. 20), the lens member 460 is axially supported by the sliding hole 443 on the swinging end side of the arm member 440. The moving protrusion 463 (see FIG. 18) is slid around the central guide recessed portion 453 of the slide member 450. Since the lens member 460 is guided in the vertical direction by the recessed portions 454 at both ends of the slide member 450 and the slide member 450 is guided in the vertical direction by the recessed portion 415 of the base member 410, the lens is caused by the swing of the arm member 440. The member 460 is slid in the vertical direction.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 18 and 19. The door member 470 is formed by dividing a circular plate into upper and lower parts, and has a lower main body portion 471 formed on the lower side, an upper main body portion 472 formed on the upper side of the lower main body portion 471, and a lower side. A lower shaft portion 473 that projects into a columnar shape on the back side at the lower end portion of the main body portion 471 and is inserted into the rotating cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as not to rotate relative to each other, and a circle on the back side at the lower end portion of the upper main body portion 472. It mainly includes an upper shaft portion 474 that is projected in a columnar shape and is inserted into the rotating cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as not to rotate relative to each other.

The lower main body 471 includes a guide protrusion 471a projecting from the side surface on the side that comes into contact with the upper main body 472, and the upper main body 472 is the side surface that comes into contact with the lower main body 471. It is provided with a receiving recessed portion 472a that is recessed in. By fitting these guide protrusions 471a and the receiving recessed portion 472a, the lower main body 471 and the upper main body 472 in the closed state can be relatively aligned. In the present embodiment, since the guide protrusion 471a is projected in a tapered shape, the guide protrusion 471a can be reliably fitted to the recessed portion 472a.

The operation of the door member 470 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical operation unit 400. Note that FIG. 21 shows an open state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is arranged at the overhanging position.

The lower shaft portion 473 and the upper shaft portion 474 (see FIG. 19) are rotated by the rotation of the rotary cylinder 465 (see FIG. 18) of the lens member 460. Since the pair of rotary cylinders 465 are rotated in opposite directions by the driving force of the opening / closing drive motor 466 (see FIG. 19), the door member 470 is opened from the closed state (see FIG. 20) to the open state (see FIG. 21). In this case, the lower main body portion 471 and the upper main body portion 472 can be swung outward (opposite directions) from each other. Further, when the door member 470 is changed from the open state (see FIG. 21) to the closed state (see FIG. 20), the lower main body portion 471 and the upper main body portion 472 can be swung inward with each other.

As a result, the time for swinging the lower main body portion 471 and the upper main body portion 472 can be halved as compared with the case where the front side of the lens member 460 is covered by swinging a single cover member.

Next, the combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 45. The composite operation unit 500 swings the rotating arm member 550 from the retracted position (see FIG. 22) to the overhanging position (see FIG. 9) to arrange the expansion / contraction effect device 540 on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. It is a unit. Further, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is formed so as to be swingable around the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24) of the base member 510.

FIG. 22 is a front perspective view of the composite operation unit 500, and FIG. 23 is a rear perspective view of the composite operation unit 500. It should be noted that FIGS. 22 and 23 show a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position, which is the terminal position formed on the outside of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 24 is a front exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 500, and FIG. 25 is a rear exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the composite operation unit 500 is a unit that performs an effect by sliding and swinging the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and the base member 510 forming the skeleton and the base member 510 thereof. Fastened to the front of the rotating plate 520 with the rotating plate 520 formed rotatably around the first shaft portion 512 of the above, and the first driving device 530 which is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 to generate the driving force of the rotating plate 520. One end is connected to the expansion / contraction effect device 540 which is fixed and formed so as to expand and contract in the radial direction of the rotary plate 520, and the other end on the opposite side is pivotally supported by the base member 510. The rotating arm member 550 that forms the expansion and contraction operation of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 by the swinging operation, the second drive device 560 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 to generate the driving force of the rotation arm member 550, and the second A rotary crank member 570 that transmits the driving force of the drive device 560 to the rotary arm member 550, and a mechanical portion on the rotary shaft side such as the rotary arm member 550 and the rotary crank member 570 that are fastened and fixed from the front of the base member 510. It mainly includes a front cover 580 for blindfolding.

The base member 510 includes a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 511, a columnar first shaft portion 512 projecting from a substantially central lower portion in the width direction of the main body portion 511 toward the front, and the first shaft portion 512 thereof. Three rows of arcuate holes 513 drilled along the central arc and a first through hole 514 drilled adjacent to the second arcuate hole 513b of the three rows of arcuate holes 513. A columnar second shaft portion 515 projecting forward from the main body portion 511 at a substantially intermediate position between the shaft portion 512 and the right end portion of the main body portion 511, and adjacent to the second shaft portion 515. A second through hole 516 to be bored, a columnar third shaft portion 517 projecting forward from the lower right end portion of the main body portion 511 when viewed from the front, and a curved shape formed forward from the edge of the main body portion 511. It is mainly provided with a bent wall portion 518 to be formed.

The first shaft portion 512 is a portion that is inserted into the shaft support hole 522 of the rotary plate 520 and serves as a rotary shaft of the rotary plate 520. Therefore, the diameter of the first shaft portion 512 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522 of the rotating plate 520.

The arc-shaped hole 513 includes a first arc-shaped hole 513a, a second arc-shaped hole 513b, and a third arc-shaped hole 513c from the side closer to the first shaft portion 512.

The first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c are elongated holes through which the insertion shaft 525 of the rotating plate 520 is inserted to guide the rotation of the rotating plate 520. As a result, the load received on the first shaft portion 512 when the rotating plate 520 is rotated can be reduced, and the durability of the rotating plate 520 can be improved. Although FIGS. 24 and 25 show a state in which the collar is fastened to the tip of the insertion shaft 525, the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c are formed by the collar and the main body 521. Placed in between (inserted before fastening the collar).

The second arc-shaped hole 513b is an elongated hole in which the arc-shaped rack 526 of the rotating plate 520 is arranged and moved. The upper side of the substantially central portion is opened, and the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 is arranged in the opened portion. As a result, the toothed portion between the drive motor 531 of the first drive device 530 and the arcuate rack 526 of the rotary plate 520 can be arranged in the plate thickness portion of the main body portion 511, so that the thickness of the composite operation unit 500 can be increased. The dimensions in the longitudinal direction (dimensions in the front-rear direction of FIG. 22) can be suppressed.

The first through hole 514 and the second through hole 516 are through holes through which the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 and the drive gear 562 of the second drive device 560 are inserted, respectively.

The second shaft portion 515 is a columnar portion to which the lid portion 575 of the rotating crank member 570 is fastened and fixed to the front side and serves as the central axis of rotation of the main body portion 571. Therefore, the diameter of the second shaft portion 515 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 571 of the rotating crank member 570.

The third shaft portion 517 is a portion that is inserted into the shaft support hole 552 of the rotating arm member 550 and serves as a central axis for rotation of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the diameter of the third shaft portion 517 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 of the rotating arm member 550. A torsion spring 517a that generates an urging force that moves the rotating arm member 550 toward the retracted position is wound around the third shaft portion 517.

The torsion spring 517a is formed in such a manner that the arm portions extend from both ends of the coil portion wound around the third shaft portion 517. One arm is fixed to the lower right part of the bent wall portion 518 when viewed from the front (near the first stopper portion 518a), and the other arm on the opposite side of the one arm is engaged with the rotating arm member 550. Locked to the stop 555.

The bent wall portion 518 includes a first stopper portion 518a adjacent to the third shaft portion 517, a second stopper portion 518b formed to the right of the first shaft portion 512, and a left side of the first shaft portion 512. A third stopper portion 518c formed in the above is mainly provided.

The first stopper portion 518a is a portion that regulates the rotation of the rotating arm member 550. That is, when the rotating arm member 550 is lowered to the overhanging position (see FIG. 9), it comes into contact with the first stopper portion 518a and the lowering is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 24, the second stopper portion 518b is arranged below the third stopper portion 518c. Since the lower surface of the rotary plate 520 is formed symmetrically with respect to the shaft support hole 522 (see FIG. 37), the rotary plate 520 rotates at a larger rotation angle in the rotation direction toward the second stopper portion 512b. Can be done. That is, in the expansion / contraction effect device 540 described later, the maximum angle of the front-view clockwise swing is formed larger than the front-view counterclockwise swing.

The rotary plate 520 has a fan-shaped plate-shaped main body portion 521, a shaft support hole 522 drilled in a circular shape in the thickness direction at the root portion of the main body portion 521, and a main body having a width slightly larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522. A rail receiving groove 523 that is linearly recessed in the front surface of the portion 521, a pair of telescopic stoppers 524 that are formed so as to project forward on both sides of the lower end portion of the rail receiving groove 523, and projecting from the back surface of the main body portion 521. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) insertion shafts 525 and an arc-shaped rack protruding from the back surface of the main body 521 in an arc shape centered on the shaft support hole 522 and having gear teeth engraved on the outer peripheral portion. 526 and are mainly provided.

The first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510 is inserted into the shaft support hole 522. Therefore, the rotating plate 520 is swung around the first shaft portion 512.

The rail receiving groove 523 is a portion where the slide rail 545 of the telescopic effect device 540 is fastened and fixed, and the telescopic effect device 540 expands and contracts along the extending direction of the rail receiving groove 523. Therefore, the moving direction of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is changed depending on the posture of the rotating plate 520.

The expansion / contraction stopper 524 is a portion that is brought into contact with the inner surface of the slide plate 544 of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the vertical direction to regulate the movement width of the slide plate 544. It is formed on both sides of the rail receiving groove 523, and by contacting the inner side surface of the slide plate 544 on both sides thereof, it is possible to suppress the slide rail 545 from receiving a load in the direction orthogonal to the expansion / contraction direction, and improve durability. Can be planned.

The insertion shaft 525 is a portion that is inserted into the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c of the base member 510 to guide the rotation of the rotating plate 520, and has a diameter of the first arc-shaped hole 513a and a third circle. It is formed slightly smaller than the width dimension of the arcuate hole 513c. Further, by fastening and fixing a collar member having a diameter larger than the width dimension of the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c to the tip, the rotating plate 520 is connected to the base member 510 so as not to be pulled out.

The arc-shaped rack 526 is inserted into the second arc-shaped hole 513b of the base member 510 and meshes with the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530. Since the meshing portion between the arcuate rack 526 and the first drive device 530 is formed in the region including the thickness portion of the base member 510, the dimension of the composite operation unit 500 in the thickness direction can be suppressed.

The first drive device 530 mainly includes a drive motor 531 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510, and a drive gear 532 that is inserted into the first through hole 514 of the base member 510 and is axially rotated by the drive motor 531.

Next, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. 26 is a front exploded perspective view of the telescopic effect device 540, and FIG. 27 is a rear exploded perspective view of the telescopic effect device 540.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is a main body of a rotating arm member 550 between a main body member 541 forming a skeleton and a pair of main body members 541 fastened and fixed to the back surface of the main body member 541. The first guide member 542 and the second guide member 543 through which the portion 551 is inserted and the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the first guide member 542 and the second guide member 543 are arranged so as to be axially slidable along the extending direction. The slide plate 544 is connected to the slide plate 544 and the rotary plate 520, and one end of the slide plate 544 is fitted into the rail receiving groove 523 and fastened and fixed, and the slide rail 545 is raised to the front side of the main body member 541. The front plate member 546 to be fastened and fixed, the connecting sliding member 547 to be slidably supported by the shaft support portion 546c of the front plate member 546, and the front hanging portion to be fastened and fixed to the connecting sliding member 547. The decorative member 548 in which the 548b is movably formed in front of the main body member 541 is mainly provided.

The main body member 541 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 541a forming a skeleton, a columnar protrusion 541b projecting toward the back side at the center portion in the width direction of the main body portion 541a, and the back surface of the protrusion 541b. The first raised fastening portion 541c projecting in pairs on the left side of the view, the second raised fastening portion 541d projecting in pairs on the right side of the rear view of the protrusion 541b, and the upper left portion of the main body portion 541a in the rear view. It mainly includes a protruding guide fastening portion 541e and a fastening hole 541f formed on the front side of the main body portion 541a (three locations in the present embodiment) to fasten and fix the front plate member 546.

The protrusion 541b is a portion inserted into the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the diameter of the protrusion 541b is formed to be slightly smaller than the width dimension of the inner peripheral surface of the arcuate hole 554. Further, since the protrusion 541b is inserted into the arcuate hole 554, the main body member 541 can be interlocked by swinging the rotary arm member 550.

The first raised fastening portion 541c is a portion for fastening and fixing the first guide member 542, and the second raised fastening portion 541d is a portion for fastening and fixing the second guide member 543. The reason why the second raised fastening portion 541d is separated in the vertical direction from the first raised fastening portion 541c is longer because the position that does not interfere with the rotating arm member 550 is selected and arranged. Here, in the present embodiment, the rotating arm member does not pass through the lower left side of the main body member 541 in the rotation locus (see FIGS. 37, 40, and 44). Therefore, the arrangement interval of the pair of second raised fastening portions 541d can be widened as compared with the first raised fastening portion 541c, and the rigidity of the second raised fastening portion 541d can be improved.

The guide fastening portion 541e is a portion where the auxiliary fastening portion 542e of the first guide member 542 is fastened and fixed, and is a portion where the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 is guided in the extended state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540. That is, even if the protrusion 541b is not guided by the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550, the guide fastening portion 541e guides the rotating arm member 550 to the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 when rotating upward. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 and the expansion / contraction effect member 540 are operated in conjunction with each other.

The fastening hole 541f is a through hole through which the fastening portion 546b of the front plate member 546 is fastened and fixed.

The first guide member 542 includes a fastening plate portion 542a that is fastened and fixed to the first raised fastening portion 541c, and a rear surface regulating portion that extends upward from a position where the first guide member 542 is one step higher on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 542a. 542b, a guide rail portion 542c projecting from both left and right sides of the back surface regulating portion 542b to the back surface in a wall shape, and a portion projecting to the rear surface side at the upper end portion of the back surface regulating portion 542b are formed to penetrate in the vertical direction. The insertion hole 542d and the auxiliary fastening portion 542e extending from the back surface regulating portion 542b and being fastened and fixed to the guide fastening portion 541e are mainly provided.

The back surface regulating portion 542b is a portion disposed on the back surface of the rotating arm member 550, and is a portion that prevents the rotating arm member 550 from moving to the back surface and the protrusion 541b from falling out of the arcuate hole 554. is there.

The guide rail portion 542c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 expands and contracts, and suppresses the deviation of the posture of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 542.

The insertion hole 542d is a hole through which the slide rod 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 542d is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the slide rod 544e, the slide plate 544 is formed so as to be slidable with respect to the first guide member 542.

The second guide member 543 includes a fastening plate portion 543a that is fastened and fixed to the second raised fastening portion 541d, and a rear surface regulating portion that extends upward from a position where the second guide member 543 is one step higher on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 543a. 543b, a guide rail portion 543c projecting from both left and right sides of the back surface regulating portion 543b in a wall shape to the back surface, and a portion projecting to the rear surface side at the upper end portion of the back surface regulating portion 543b are formed to penetrate in the vertical direction. It is mainly provided with an insertion hole 543d.

The back surface regulating portion 543b is a portion disposed on the back surface of the rotating arm member 550, and is a portion that prevents the rotating arm member 550 from moving to the back surface and the protrusion 541b from falling out of the arcuate hole 554. is there.

The guide rail portion 543c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 expands and contracts, and suppresses the deviation of the posture of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 543.

The insertion hole 543d is a hole through which the slide rod 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 543d is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the slide rod 544e, the slide plate 544 is formed so as to be slidable with respect to the first guide member 543.

The slide plate 544 is formed of a main body portion 544a formed in a rectangular plate shape, a recessed portion 544b in which a wide recess extending in the vertical direction is formed on the back surface of the main body portion 544a, and the recessed portion 544b. Both end recessed portions 544c in which recesses extending in the vertical direction are formed on the front surfaces of both left and right sides, and rail receivers projecting in a semicircular shape toward the front surface at the upper and lower end portions of the both end recessed portions 544c. A portion 544d, a columnar slide rod 544e extending in the vertical direction inside the recessed portions 544c at both ends, and an effect auxiliary wall 544f projecting toward the front substantially in the vertical center of the main body portion 544a. Mainly provided is a stopper portion 544 g which is projected toward the back surface at both left and right ends at the upper and lower ends of the recessed portion 544b.

The recessed portion 544b is a portion that guides the slide plate 544 with respect to the expansion / contraction stopper 524 of the rotating plate 520. Therefore, the width of the inner surface of the recessed portion 544b is formed to be slightly larger than the width dimension of the telescopic stopper 524.

The recessed portions 544c at both ends are portions that accommodate the protrusions through which the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543 are formed. As a result, the protrusions through which the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543 are formed can be guided from the outside.

The rail receiving portion 544d is a portion accommodated in the guide rail portions 542c and 543c of the guide members 542 and 543. As a result, wobbling of the guide members 542 and 543 with respect to the slide plate 544 can be suppressed.

The slide rod 544e is a columnar rod that is inserted into the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543. As a result, the guide members 542 and 543 are formed so as to be slidable in the extending direction (vertical direction in FIG. 26) of the slide rod 544e.

The effect assisting portion 544f is a portion that is brought into contact with the back hanging portion 548c of the decorative member 548 when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is in the extended state to move the decorative member 548. Thereby, the appearance of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 can be changed.

The stopper portion 544g is a portion that is brought into contact with the telescopic stopper 524 of the rotating plate 520 and defines the vertically moving end of the slide plate 544.

The slide rail 545 is a commercially available mini rail member. One end is fastened and fixed along the rail receiving groove 523 of the rotating plate 520, and the other end on the opposite side of the one end is fastened and fixed to the recessed portion 544b of the slide plate 544.

The front plate member 546 is an effect portion that can be visually recognized by the player, and is a plate-shaped main body portion 546a formed in substantially the same shape as the main body member 541 in front view, and the main body portion 546a toward the back side. It mainly includes a fastening portion 546b that protrudes according to the formation position of the fastening hole 541f, and a pair of shaft support portions 546c that project from the upper end portion of the main body portion 546a toward the back surface side.

The fastening portion 546b is a portion for fixing the front plate member 546 to the main body member 541, and the fastening portion 546b is fastened and fixed by screwing through the fastening hole 541f.

The shaft support portion 546c is a portion that slidably supports the connecting sliding member 547. Therefore, the diameter of the shaft support portion 546c is formed to be slightly smaller than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding elongated hole 547b of the connecting sliding member 547.

The connecting sliding member 547 is formed in the vertical direction with a main body portion 547a formed in a plate shape and a pair of sliding elongated holes 547b formed in an elongated hole shape extending vertically and formed in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes a pair of insertion holes 547c.

The long sliding hole 547b is a portion through which the shaft support portion 546c of the front plate member 546 is inserted. Therefore, the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding elongated hole 547b is formed to be slightly larger than that of the shaft support portion 546c. A collar member having an outer shape larger than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding elongated hole 547b is fastened and fixed to the tip of the shaft support portion 546c, so that the connecting sliding member 547 is pivotally supported by the front plate member 546 so as not to be pulled out. To. The insertion hole 547c is a circular hole through which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the decorative member 548 is inserted.

The decorative member 548 includes a main body portion 548a formed in a plate shape and to which the connecting sliding member 547 is fastened and fixed from below, a front hanging portion 548b formed by hanging downward on the front side of the main body portion 548a, and a main body portion 548a. Mainly includes a back hanging portion 548c formed by hanging downward on the back side of the above.

When the connecting sliding member 547 moves with respect to the front plate member 546, the front hanging portion 548b is visually recognized as being covered with the front plate member 546 (see FIG. 43) and separated from the front plate member 546 (FIG. FIG. 43). 37) and can be formed. Thereby, the appearance of the expansion / contraction effect member 540 can be changed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The back hanging portion 548c is a portion that comes into contact with the effect auxiliary wall 544f of the slide plate 544 by the expansion / contraction operation of the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and the back hanging portion 548c abuts on the effect auxiliary wall 544f to cause the decorative member 548. Is moved relative to the front plate member 546.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 24 and 25. The rotary arm member 550 is close to a main body portion 551 formed in a long rod shape, a shaft support hole 552 bored in one end of the main body portion 551 in the front-rear direction, and the shaft support hole 552. The deformed elongated hole 553, which is a specially shaped bottomed elongated hole formed on the back side of the main body portion 551, and the front side of the other end, which is the opposite end of one end, are formed. The arc-shaped hole 554, which is an arc-shaped bottomed elongated hole, and the shaft support hole 552 of the main body 551 are projected toward the back side, the tip is bent like a hook, and the other arm of the torsion spring 517a is locked. The locking portion 555 is mainly provided.

The shaft support hole 552 is a circular hole through which the third shaft portion 517 of the base member 510 is inserted. Therefore, the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the third shaft portion 517, whereby the rotary arm member 550 is rotatably formed around the third shaft portion 517.

The deformed elongated hole 553 is a portion through which the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is inserted. The shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 will be described later.

The arc-shaped hole 554 is a long hole through which the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is inserted. Therefore, the width dimension of the arcuate hole 554 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 541b. Further, the arc formed by the arcuate hole 554 coincides with the arc formed by the protrusion 541b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is swung around the first shaft portion 512 in the extended state (FIGS. 37 to 39). See up to).

Further, the arcuate hole 554 includes a mouth tip portion 554a which is opened to the tip end portion of the other end portion of the rotary arm member 550 and whose width is widened at the tip end portion.

The second drive device 560 is a device that generates a driving force for rotating the rotary crank member 570, and is inserted through the drive motor 561 fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and the second through hole 516 of the base member 510. It mainly includes a drive gear 562 that is pivotally rotated by a drive motor 561.

The drive gear 562 is meshed with the transmission gear teeth 572 of the rotating crank member 570. As a result, when the drive gear 562 is rotated, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated accordingly.

The rotary crank member 570 is a member that transmits a driving force to the rotary arm member 550, and is engraved on the ring-shaped main body portion 571 pivotally supported by the second shaft portion 515 and the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 571. A sliding gear tooth 572 to be provided, a regulation umbrella portion 573 formed so as to cover the front side of the transmission gear tooth 572, and a sliding portion projecting to the front side at a position eccentric from the center of the main body portion 571. It mainly includes a protruding portion 574 and a lid portion 575 formed with a diameter larger than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 571 and fastened and fixed to the front side of the second shaft portion 515.

The transmission gear teeth 572 are meshed with the drive gear 562 of the second drive device 560. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 561 is transmitted to the rotary crank member 570.

The regulation umbrella portion 573 prevents the drive gear 532 from being displaced to the front side of the transmission gear tooth 572. Thereby, the meshing relationship between the drive gear 532 and the transmission gear tooth 572 can be optimized.

The sliding protrusion 574 is a portion inserted into the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550. That is, whether or not the transmission of the driving force is formed is determined by the relationship between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shape of the rotating arm member 550.

The lid portion 575 is a portion for disposing the main body portion 571 on the base member 510 so as not to be pulled out.

The relationship between the swing of the rotary arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 31. First, the shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 (a) and 29 (a).

28 (a) and 29 (a) are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570. Note that FIG. 28A shows a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 29A shows a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the overhanging position. 28 (a) and 29 (a), the deformed elongated hole 553 and the sliding protrusion 574 are shown by hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 are shown by imaginary lines. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 28A, in a state where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position, the straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 and the sliding protrusion 574 and the rotating crank member 570 An upward orthogonal state is formed in which the straight line connecting the rotation axis and the shaft support hole 552 is orthogonal to each other.

As shown in FIG. 29 (a), in a state where the rotary arm member 550 is arranged at the overhang position, a straight line connecting the rotary shaft and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotary crank member 570 and the rotary crank member 570 It is possible to form a downward orthogonal state in which the straight line connecting the rotation axis and the shaft support hole 552 is orthogonal to each other. Note that FIG. 29A shows a state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated by a predetermined angle counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the above-mentioned downward orthogonal state.

The deformed elongated hole 553 has a transmission groove portion 553a in which a driving force is transmitted to the rotation arm member 550 by moving the sliding protrusion portion 574, and a first non-transmission wall portion connected from the upper end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a. Mainly, the second non-transmission wall portion 553c connected from the lower end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a to the 553b, and the selection wall portion 553d connecting the first non-transmission wall portion 553b and the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. Be prepared.

As shown in FIG. 28A, the transmission groove portion 553a is a recessed groove that extends linearly to the left from the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 in an upward orthogonal state. The transmission groove portion 553a is formed with a length such that the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotary crank member 570 can move from the upward orthogonal state to the downward orthogonal state, and the forming width of the inner peripheral surface thereof is slightly smaller than the diameter of the sliding protrusion 574. It is formed large. Therefore, the driving force is transmitted from the rotary crank member 570 to the rotary arm member 550 while the sliding protrusion 574 moves through the transmission groove portion 553a.

As shown in FIG. 28A, the first non-transmission wall portion 553b is a sliding projection centered on the rotation axis of the rotary crank member 570 from the upper wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in an upward orthogonal state. It is a wall portion formed along the circumscribed circle of the portion 574. That is, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in the front view from the upward orthogonal state, the rotary crank member 570 idles with respect to the rotary arm member 550, and the driving force from the rotary crank member 570 is the rotary arm. Not transmitted to member 550.

The movement of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 28A). The direction is directed to the rotation axis of the rotation crank member 570. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first non-transmission wall portion 553b, the load applied to the sliding protrusion 574 by rotating the rotating arm member 550 is the rotation of the rotating crank member 570. Aimed at the axis. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first non-transmission wall portion 553b, the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is prevented.

As shown in FIG. 29A, the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is a rotary crank from the lower side wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in a state where the rotary arm member 550 is arranged at the overhanging position. It is a wall portion formed along the circumscribed circle of the sliding protrusion 574 centered on the rotation axis of the member 570. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the downward orthogonal state (the state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the front view clockwise from the state of FIG. 29 (a)). The rotary crank member 570 runs idle with respect to the rotary arm member 550, and the driving force is not transmitted from the rotary crank member 570 to the rotary arm member 550.

When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 29A, the moving direction of the second non-transmission wall portion 553b is directed toward the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570. Be done. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 29B), the load applied to the sliding protrusion 574 by rotating the rotating arm member 550. Is directed to the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second non-transmission wall portion 553c, the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is prevented.

The selected wall portion 553d is a wall portion formed from a smooth curved surface connecting the right end portion of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b in front view and the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c in front view, and is the first non-transmission wall portion. The transmission wall portion 553b is formed above the extended curve.

The selection wall portion 553d is arranged so as to face the right side portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c, and is formed in such a manner that the distance from the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is increased toward the left end portion of the selection wall portion 553d. Therefore, for example, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in the front view from an upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A), the sliding protrusion 574 exceeds the first non-transmission wall portion 553b and the second non-transmission In the margin portion D (see FIG. 32B) until the wall portion 553c is reached, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotation is not restricted. That is, the driving force is not transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is not restricted by the sliding protrusion 574.

The right end of the second non-transmission wall 553c is formed along the arc S1 centered on the shaft support hole 552 (the formation angle with the arc S1 is small), while the right end of the selected wall 553d is formed. It is formed so as to intersect the arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the formation angle between the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c and the arc S1.

In this case, when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 required to correspond to the change amount changes. That is, the swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount in a state where the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the selected wall portion 553d are in contact with each other. The swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 is smaller than that of the rotating arm member 550 when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c are in contact with each other and change by a predetermined amount. Therefore, depending on whether the sliding protrusion 574 rotates along the second non-transmission wall portion 553c or along the selective wall portion 553d, the rotation arm member 550 swings with respect to the speed of the rotation crank member 570. The speed can be changed.

A description will be given by returning from FIG. 28 to FIG. 31. 28 to 31 are front views of the rotary arm member 550 and the rotary crank member 570 showing the swing of the rotary arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 28A, the above-mentioned upward orthogonal state is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position), and in FIGS. 28 to 31, the rotating crank member 570 is counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The rotated state is shown in order, the deformed elongated hole 553 and a part of the rotating crank member 570 are shown by hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 are shown by imaginary lines. ..

In addition, in FIGS. 28 to 31, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 detects a posture of expansion / contraction in the vertical direction by a position detection sensor (not shown), and the swing is stopped at that posture. That is, in FIGS. 28 to 31, the protrusion 541b moves only in the vertical direction. In this case, the swing of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is prevented by the resistance between the first drive device 530 (see FIG. 25) and the drive gear 532.

In the state of FIG. 28A, the rotating crank member 570 is in an upward orthogonal state. In this case, the reference horizontal line O is set at a position vertically downward by a distance h1 from the protrusion 541b. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is in the upward orthogonal state, the protrusion 541b is arranged at a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

From the state of FIG. 28 (a), when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)), it is rotated counterclockwise by an angle T1). A state in which the sliding protrusion 574 is moved through the transmission groove portion 553a of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is arranged vertically upward by a distance h2 (h2 <h1) from the reference horizontal line O (FIG. 28 (b). ) Is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and are in contact with each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). ). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

From the state of FIG. 28 (b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)), and then the angle T2 (T2 ≈ 180 degrees> T1) counterclockwise. ), The sliding protrusion 574 is moved through the transmission groove portion 553a of the deformed elongated hole 553 (transmission region) and invades the region facing the second non-transmission wall portion 553c, and the protrusion 541 is used as a reference. It reaches the state of being arranged at a position vertically above the horizon O by a distance h3 (h3 <h2) (see FIG. 29 (a)). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

From the state of FIG. 28 (c), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)), and is rotated counterclockwise by an angle T3 (T3> T2). Then, the sliding protrusion 574 is slid on the second non-transmission wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 to reach the state shown in FIG. 29 (b). During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotating arm is rotated from the sliding protrusion 574. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position vertically upward by a distance h3 from the reference horizon O.

When the rotary arm member 550 is rotated clockwise from the front view from the states of FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b), the sliding protrusion 574 is directed toward the rotation axis of the rotary crank member 570. It is pushed by the non-transmission wall portion 553c. In this case, the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted from moving, thereby restricting the swing of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise from the front view from the states of FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b).

Here, as a method of stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state of FIG. 29A, it is conceivable to stop the rotating crank member 570. However, if the effect speed of the rotary arm member 550 is set to a high speed until just before reaching the overhang position and the rotary crank member 570 is suddenly stopped, a load is applied to the second drive device 560 and the speed of the rotary crank member 570 is reduced. If it is made loose, the effect cannot be improved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the rotating arm is rotated by rotating the rotating crank member 570 to the state of FIG. 29 (b) without stopping in the state of FIG. 29 (a). The rotation of the member 550 can be stopped in the state shown in FIG. 29 (a) (the protrusion 541 can be stopped vertically upward by a distance h3 from the reference horizontal line O). As a result, the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is maintained until the rotating arm member 550 reaches the overhanging position, and then the rotating crank member changes from the state of FIG. 29 (a) to the state of FIG. 29 (b). The 570 can be decelerated. Therefore, it is not necessary to suddenly stop the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both an improvement in the effect of the rotating arm member 550 and an improvement in the durability of the second drive device 560.

From the state of FIG. 29 (b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)), and then counterclockwise at an angle T4 (T4 ≈ 270 degrees> T3). ), The sliding protrusion 574 is slid on the second non-transmission wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and reaches the state shown in FIG. 30 (a). During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotating arm is rotated from the sliding protrusion 574. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position vertically upward by a distance h3 from the reference horizon O.

That is, while the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise 1/4 turn from the state shown in FIG. 29 (a), the rotary arm member 550 is maintained in the same posture, and the protrusion 541b is in the same position. Be maintained. The length at which the rotating arm member 550 is maintained in the same posture and the protrusion 541b is maintained at the same position is the length during which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated 1/4 turn in the present embodiment. You don't have to be limited to that. The length at which the front plate member 546 is continuously arranged at the lower position can be changed by changing the length of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A) of the deformed elongated hole 553. For example, by making the second non-transmission wall portion 553c longer than that of the present embodiment, the length that the front plate member 546 continues to be arranged at the lower position can be made longer than that of the present embodiment.

From the state of FIG. 30A, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A)) and is rotated counterclockwise by an angle T5 (T5> T4). ), The sliding protrusion 574 pushes up the selected wall portion 553d of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position vertically upward by a distance h2 (h2> h3) from the reference horizontal line O. (See FIG. 30B) is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and are in contact with each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). ).

That is, when the rotary arm member 550 and the rotary crank member 570 are rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the selective wall portion 553d and the sliding protrusion 574 are brought into contact with each other, whereby the rotary arm member The driving force is transmitted to the 550 (transmission area).

From the state of FIG. 30 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)), and is rotated counterclockwise by an angle T6 (T6> T5). Then, the sliding protrusion 574 invades the region of the deformed elongated hole 553 facing the first non-transmission wall portion 553b, and the protrusion 541 vertically upwards from the reference horizon O by a distance h1 (h1> h2). It reaches a state where it is arranged at a separated position (see FIG. 31). During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and are in contact with each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). ).

From the state of FIG. 31, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the sliding protrusion 574 is moved in the region of the deformed elongated hole 553 facing the first non-transmission wall portion 553b, and is shown in FIG. The state of 28 (a) is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotating arm is rotated from the sliding protrusion 574. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area).

When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 31, the sliding protrusion 574 is pushed by the second non-transmission wall portion 553c toward the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570. .. In this case, the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted from moving, thereby restricting the swing of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 31.

Here, as a method of stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state of FIG. 31, it is conceivable to stop the rotating crank member 570. However, if the effect speed of the rotary arm member 550 is set to a high speed until just before reaching the evacuation position and the rotary crank member 570 is suddenly stopped, a load is applied to the second drive device 560 and the speed decrease of the rotary crank member 570 is gradual. If it is set to, the effect cannot be improved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is stopped in the state of FIG. 31 by rotating the rotating crank member 570 to the state of FIG. 28A without stopping in the state of FIG. 31. Can be done. As a result, the speed of the rotary crank member 570 is maintained until the rotary arm member 550 reaches the overhang position, and then the rotary crank member 570 is decelerated from the state of FIG. 31 to the state of FIG. 28 (a). Can be made to. Therefore, it is not necessary to suddenly stop the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, it is possible to improve both the effect of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 linked to the rotating arm member 550 and the durability of the second drive device 560.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, by rotating the rotary crank member 570 once in the same direction, the rotary arm member 550 can be reciprocally swung between the retracted position and the extended position.

From these facts, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise at a constant speed as shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, the protrusion 541b is the reference horizontal line for half the period of the rotation cycle of the rotating crank member 570. It is moved downward from a position vertically upward by a distance h1 from O to a position separated by a distance h3 (h3 <h1). The protrusion 541b is maintained at a position vertically above the reference horizon O by a distance h3 for a period of 1/4 of the subsequent rotation cycle, and the protrusion 541b is maintained at a position vertically upward by a distance h3 for a period of 1/4 of the subsequent rotation cycle. It is moved vertically upward from a position separated by a distance h3 to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1> h3). As a result, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (moving speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction) can be doubled.

Here, at the retracted position of the rotating arm member 550, the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 can form an upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A), and the rotating arm member 550 is extended. At the position, the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 can form a downward orthogonal state (see FIG. 29 (a)). From the state shown in FIG. 29 (a), a downward orthogonal state can be formed by rotating the rotating crank member 570 clockwise by a predetermined amount.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated half a circumference (180 degrees) in order to swing the rotating arm member 550 from the retracted position to the overhanging position. Therefore, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the time required for the rotary arm member 550 to swing from the retracted position to the overhang position (from FIGS. 28 (a) to 29 (a)). (See) and the time required to swing from the overhang position to the retracted position (see FIG. 29 (a) through FIG. 31 to FIG. 28 (a)) can be made equivalent.

The relationship between the swing of the rotary arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 35. 32 to 35 are front views of the rotary arm member 550 and the rotary crank member 570 showing the swing of the rotary arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 32 to 35, the state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in the front view is shown, and the deformed elongated hole 553 and a part of the rotating crank member 570 are shown by hidden lines and expanded and contracted. The front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the effect device 540 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

In addition, in FIG. 32 (a), the above-mentioned upward orthogonal state is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position), and in FIGS. 32 (b) to 35, the rotating arm is formed from FIG. 32 (a). The states in which the member 550 and the rotary crank member 570 are rotated by a predetermined amount are shown in order in chronological order.

In the state of FIG. 32A, the rotating crank member 570 is in an upward orthogonal state. In this case, the protrusion 541b is arranged at a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 32 (a) (rotated clockwise by an angle T11 from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a))), it slides. The protrusion 574 is moved in the region of the deformed elongated hole 553 facing the first non-transmission wall portion 553b, and reaches the state shown in FIG. 32 (b). During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotating arm is rotated from the sliding protrusion 574. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position vertically above the reference horizon O by a distance h1.

When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 32B, the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted from moving, so that the rotating arm member 550 is restricted from swinging. To. Therefore, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 32 (b).

From the state of FIG. 32 (b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the front view (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) and is rotated clockwise by an angle T12 (T12> T11). ) And, as shown in FIG. 33A, the sliding protrusion 574 is slightly separated from the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 is swung downward by the action of gravity. In this case, the rotating arm member 550 is in the margin D from the state shown in FIG. 32B until the sliding protrusion 574 crosses the first non-transmission wall portion 553b and reaches the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. The driving force is not transmitted to the (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position vertically above the reference horizon O by a distance h4 (h4 <h1).

From the state of FIG. 33 (a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the front view (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) and is rotated clockwise by an angle T13 (T13> T12). ) And, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the sliding protrusion 574 is brought into contact with the second non-transmission wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 that swings downward by the action of gravity. To. That is, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 from the state shown in FIG. 33 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 34 (a) (transmission region). In the state of FIG. 33B, the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h5 (h5 <h4).

From the state of FIG. 33 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in the front view (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) and only at an angle T14 (T14 ≈ 90 degrees> T13) clockwise. (Rotated), the sliding protrusion 574 is housed in the right end of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position vertically upward from the reference horizon O by a distance h3. (See FIG. 34 (a)) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is brought into contact with the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, and the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region).

Here, the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 32 (b) to 34 (a) and the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 30 (a) to 31 are the rotations. Although the rotation direction of the dynamic crank member 570 is different, the rotation region (phase) of the rotation crank member 570 is the same.

In this case, in the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 32 (b) to 34 (a), the inner circumference of the deformed elongated hole 553 in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570. While the surfaces are not in contact with each other, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (non-transmission region), while the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 30A to 31 is always , The driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region).

Therefore, the mode of transmitting the driving force to the rotating arm member 550 can be changed depending on the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570. As a result, by reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, it is possible to form two ways of producing the rotating arm member 550.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 rotates between FIGS. 32 (a) and 34 (a), the rotating crank member 570 rotates clockwise in the front view. When rotated, the rotating arm member 550 is swung by free fall depending on the gravitational acceleration until the sliding protrusion 574 comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 (non-transmission region). On the other hand, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the rotary arm member 550 is swung at a speed dependent on the rotational speed of the rotary crank member 570 (transmission region).

As a result, even when the rotation speed of the rotary crank member 570 is constant, the rotation when the rotary crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase by reversing the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570. The variation of the swing speed of the arm member 550 can be increased.

Further, since the increase in the variation of the swing speed of the rotating arm member 550 is achieved by the shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 (formation of the margin portion D), the mode of transmitting the driving force to the rotating arm member 550 can be determined. Other members such as a changeover switch for changing can be eliminated, and the member cost can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the margin portion D is formed on the shaft support hole 552 side of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, as compared with the case where the margin portion D is formed on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552 with respect to the rotation shaft of the rotary crank member 570, while the sliding protrusion 574 passes through the margin portion D by a predetermined distance. The distance that the protrusion 541b moves downward can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to significantly change the operation of the rotating arm member 550 when the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570 is changed while suppressing the formation range of the margin portion D of the rotating crank member 570.

From the state of FIG. 34 (a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the front view (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) and is rotated clockwise by an angle T15 (T15> T14). ), The sliding protrusion 574 is slid on the second non-transmission wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 to reach the state shown in FIG. 34 (b). During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotating arm is rotated from the sliding protrusion 574. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position vertically upward by a distance h3 from the reference horizon O.

When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise from the front view from the state of FIG. 34 (b), the sliding protrusion 574 is directed toward the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570 by the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. Be pushed. In this case, since the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted from moving, the swing of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 34 (b).

From the state of FIG. 34 (b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in the front view (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)), and only the angle T16 (T16 ≈ 180 degrees> T15) clockwise. (Rotated), the sliding protrusion 574 is slid on the second non-transmission wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 to reach the state shown in FIG. 35 (a). During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotating arm is rotated from the sliding protrusion 574. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position vertically upward by a distance h3 from the reference horizon O.

From the state of FIG. 35 (a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the front view (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) and is rotated clockwise by an angle T17 (T17> T16). ), The sliding protrusion 574 is moved through the transmission groove 553a (transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is arranged vertically upward from the reference horizon O by a distance h2 (h2> h3) (FIG. 35). (See (b)) is reached. That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

Here, when the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 and the swing of the rotary arm member 550 are constantly linked, it is difficult to shift the start timing of the rotary crank member 570 and the rotary arm member 550. .. Therefore, when starting the rotary crank member 570 and the rotary arm member 550, it is necessary to generate a large force corresponding to the rigidity of the force that overcomes the inertia of each member. Therefore, a drive device having a large driving force is required, and there is a risk that the drive device will become large.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the start timing of the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550 can be shifted. That is, for example, from the state of FIG. 34 (b) to the state of FIG. 35 (a), only the rotary crank member 570 is rotated, and from the state of FIG. 35 (a) to the state of FIG. 35 (b). The rotary arm member 550 can be started by interlocking with the rotary crank member 570.

As a result, the momentum of the rotating crank member 570 can be used to start the rotating arm member 550, so that the driving force required for the second driving device 560 can be suppressed. Therefore, the second drive device 560 can be miniaturized.

When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the front view from the state of FIG. 35 (b), the sliding protrusion 574 is moved through the transmission groove portion 553a to reach the state of FIG. 32 (a). During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and are in contact with each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). ). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

From these facts, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise at a constant speed as shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, the protrusion 541b is a reference in a period of 1/4 of the rotation cycle of the rotating crank member 570. It is moved downward from a position vertically above the horizon O by a distance h1 to a position separated by a distance h3 (h3 <h1). The protrusion 541b is maintained at a position vertically above the reference horizon O by a distance h3 for a period of 1/4 of the subsequent rotation cycle, and the protrusion 541b is vertically separated from the reference horizon O for a period of half of the subsequent rotation cycle. It is moved upward from a position separated by a distance h3 to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1> h3). As a result, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (moving speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction) can be doubled.

Further, the moving speed of the rotating arm member 550 is partially increased by the gravitational acceleration when moving downward, while the speed is always along the rotating speed of the rotating crank member 570 when moving upward. Will be done. As a result, the mode of speed change of the protrusion 541b (expansion / contraction effect device 540) can be changed depending on the direction of movement of the protrusion 541b (expansion / contraction effect device 540).

With reference to FIG. 36, a change in the distance of the protrusion 541b (expansion / contraction effect device 540) from the reference horizontal line O when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise will be described.

FIG. 36 is a graph showing the distance of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28A) from the reference horizontal line O. In the graph shown in FIG. 36, the swing angle is shown on the horizontal axis with the upper orthogonal state of the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28 (a)) as the left end and increasing to the right from there. Shows the distance of the protrusion 541b from the reference horizontal line O.

In FIG. 36, the distance of the protrusion 541b from the reference horizontal line O when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise is shown by the curve CC1, and the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise. The distance of the protrusion 541b from the reference horizontal line O is indicated by the curve CW1. The curves CC1 and CW1 correspond to the states of the protrusions 541b from FIGS. 28 to 35, respectively, and for comparison when the rotating crank members 570 of each curve are arranged in the same phase, A curve obtained by reversing the curve CC1 from side to side is shown as an imaginary line as a curve CC2. By comparing the curves CC1 and CW1, as described above, by reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, the ascending speed and the descending speed of the protrusion 541b moved up and down by the rotating arm member 550 are changed. Can be done.

As a comparison target of the curve CW1, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates clockwise, it rotates until the sliding protrusion 574 comes into contact with the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A). The case where the arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A) is arranged at the retracted position is shown by a broken line as a curve CW2. This corresponds to the case where the torsion spring 517a (see FIG. 23) is set to have a large urging force for swinging the rotating arm member 550 upward. In this case, the period in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position can be lengthened.

In the curves CC1 and CW1, the rotary crank member 570 and the rotary arm member 550 (in the angle range N1 in which the distance of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28A) from the horizontal reference line O is maintained unchanged. A non-transmission region is formed in which the driving force is not transmitted to and from FIG. 28 (a)). The width of this angle range N1 can be adjusted by the forming width of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A).

Further, in the curve CW1, the angle until the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28 (a)) comes into contact with the deformed elongated hole 553 (see FIG. 28 (a)) of the rotating arm member 550. In the range N2, a non-transmission region in which the driving force is not transmitted is formed between the rotary crank member 570 and the rotary arm member 550. The width of this angle range N2 can be adjusted by the forming width of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b (see FIG. 28A).

As shown in FIG. 36, a curve is formed between the angle T11 to the angle T14 and the angle T4 to the angle T6 when the rotating crank members 570 (see FIG. 28A) are arranged in the same phase. The shapes of CW1 and the curve CC1 are different (the curve CW1 and the curve CC2 obtained by reversing the curve CC1 do not overlap).

That is, the angle is better when the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28A) rotates between the angle T4 and the angle T6 in a manner of lifting the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A). The curve is gentler than when the rotating crank member 570 rotates in a manner of pushing down the rotating arm member 550 between 11 and the angle T14.

This is because, on the curve CW1, the sliding protrusion 574 (see FIG. 28A) abuts on the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A) of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A). (See FIG. 28A) is rotated, and in the curve CC1, the sliding protrusion 574 comes into contact with the selected wall portion 553d (see FIG. 28A) of the irregular elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 is rotated. By.

A description will be given by returning to FIG. 28 (a). As described above, in the deformed elongated hole 553, the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along the arc S1 centered on the shaft support hole 552 (the formation angle with the arc S1 is small). The right end portion of the selected wall portion 553d is formed so as to intersect the arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the formation angle between the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c and the arc S1. To.

In this case, when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 required to correspond to the change amount changes. That is, the swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount in a state where the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the selected wall portion 553d are in contact with each other. The swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 is smaller than that of the rotating arm member 550 when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c are in contact with each other and change by a predetermined amount.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, even when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the rotary crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase depending on the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570. The moving speed of the protrusion 541b can be changed.

Although the case where the rotary crank member 570 is rotated in one direction has been described in FIGS. 28 to 35, the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570 can be reversed in the middle. The timing for reversing the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570 is a state in which the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first non-transmission wall portion 553b (for example, FIGS. 28 (a), 31 and 32 (a)). And FIG. 32 (b), the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position), and the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (for example, FIG. 29 (a), Refer to FIGS. 29 (b), 34 (b) and 35 (a), the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the overhanging position).

In this case, since the rotating arm member 550 is not brought into contact with the rotating crank member 570 in the rotating direction, the resistance applied from the rotating arm member 550 to the rotating crank member 570 when the rotating crank member 570 is reversed in the rotating direction is increased. It can be suppressed. Further, in the present embodiment, a position detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position and a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the overhanging position is arranged. It is possible to facilitate control of reversing the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570 while the moving arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position or the overhanging position.

By reversing the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570, it is possible to increase the variation of the reciprocating operation of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the vertical direction.

For example, from the state where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 28 (a)), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise half a turn (see FIG. 29 (a)), and then rotated. An example is an example in which the rotation arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position by reversing the direction of rotation of the dynamic crank member 570 and rotating it half a turn clockwise (see FIG. 28A). That is, the sliding protrusion 574 is moved on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552.

In this case, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is separated from the reference horizon O by a distance h1 vertically upward from the reference horizon O for half the period of the rotation cycle of the rotary crank member 570, and is a distance h3 (h3 <h1). ) Moves down to a position separated. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis is from 0 degrees to 180 degrees. Next, the protrusion 541b is moved from a position vertically above the reference horizon O by a distance h3 to a position separated from the reference horizon O by a distance h1 (h1> h3) for half the period of the rotation cycle of the rotary crank member 570. Move up. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis is from 180 degrees to 360 degrees.

As a result, when the rotary crank member 570 rotates at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is moved downward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3) and is moved up by a predetermined distance (h1-h3). Can be the same as the period.

Further, for example, from the state where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 32 (a)), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise 1/4 turn (see FIG. 34 (a)). Next, a case where the rotation arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position is exemplified by reversing the direction of rotation of the rotary crank member 570 and rotating it counterclockwise by 1/4 turn (FIG. 32). See (a)). That is, it is a case where the sliding protrusion 574 moves on the side close to the shaft support hole 552.

In this case, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is separated from the reference horizon O by a distance h1 vertically upward from the reference horizon O in a period of 1/4 of the rotation cycle of the rotary crank member 570, and is a distance h3 (h3) from the reference horizon O. It moves down to a position separated by <h1). In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along the curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis is from 0 degrees to 90 degrees. Next, the protrusion 541b is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1> h3) from a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 in a period of 1/4 of the rotation cycle of the rotary crank member 570. Move up to the position. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis is from 270 degrees to 360 degrees.

As a result, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is moved downward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3) and rises by a predetermined distance (h1-h3). The period of movement can be the same, and the predetermined period can be shortened as compared with the case where the sliding protrusion 574 is moved on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552.

Further, when the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves downward, it can be partially (from an angle T11 to an angle T13) a free fall, while the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves upward. In this case, it is constantly moved at a speed that follows the rotation speed of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, even if the rotation speed of the rotary crank member 570 is the same, the movement mode of the telescopic effect device 540 when the rotary crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase depending on the moving direction of the protrusion 541b of the telescopic effect device 540 ( The degree of speed change) can be changed. In other words, the curve CW1 and the curve CC2 in the range from the angle T11 to the angle T13 in FIG. 36 can be made different.

Next, the difference in the swing angle due to the difference in the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 will be described. First, the swing angle when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the expansion state will be described.

37 to 39 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. In addition, in FIGS. 37 to 39, the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an extended state (the case where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the overhanging position) is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 37, a state in which the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510 is shown, and in FIG. 38, the protrusion 541 is frontal from the state of FIG. 37. The state of being moved counterclockwise is shown, and FIG. 39 shows the state of the protrusion 541 being moved clockwise from the state of FIG. 37. The posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIGS. 37 to 39 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIG. 29 (a). Therefore, in FIGS. 37 to 39, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the extension state is formed in an arc shape centered on the first shaft portion 512 and rotates. Along the extending direction of the arcuate hole 554 of the arm member 550. In other words, the arcuate hole 554 extends along the swing locus of the protrusion 541b. Therefore, the inner surface of the arcuate hole 554 is not arranged so as to face the swing direction of the protrusion 541b, and the arcuate hole 554 does not act as a stopper for stopping the swing of the protrusion 541b. Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b depends on how the swing of the rotating plate 520 is regulated. That is, the rotary plate 520 can swing until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, the protrusion 541b can swing counterclockwise to a swing angle θ1, and the rotary plate 520 is the second. It can swing until it comes into contact with the stopper portion 518b, and the protrusion 541b can swing clockwise up to a swing angle θ2.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, when the protrusion 541b is swung to the left side in the front view at a swing angle θ2, the protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550. In this case, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is moved in the expansion / contraction direction independently of the rotating arm member 550, and the protrusion 541b cannot return to the arcuate hole 554, which may cause a malfunction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even when the protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550, the first raising fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 are the rotating arm members. By being arranged so as to be engaged with the 550, the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 can be aligned with each other. That is, it is possible to prevent the expansion / contraction effect device 540 from being moved in the expansion / contraction direction independently of the rotation arm member 550.

As a result, the length of the rotating arm member 550 can be shortened while eliminating the defect that the protrusion 541b cannot return to the arcuate hole 554. As a result, the arrangement area of the rotating arm member 550 can be suppressed, and the arrangement area of other movable members can be secured accordingly. In addition, the material cost of the rotating arm member 550 can be reduced.

Further, when the rotating arm member 550 swings in a state where the protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554 (see FIG. 39), the positional relationship between the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 shifts, and the protrusion 541b becomes a circle. It becomes difficult to return to the arc-shaped hole 554, which may cause a malfunction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sliding protrusion 574 comes into contact with the deformed elongated hole 553 to prevent the rotating arm member 550 from swinging (see FIG. 39).

In addition, the movement locus of the point far from the rotation axis of the sliding protrusion 574 (the point farthest from the rotation axis) is formed along the side surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 that is in contact with the sliding protrusion 574. (See FIG. 39), so that the rotary crank member 570 can be rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 39 while maintaining the posture of the rotary arm member 550.

Here, for example, as shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, when the rotary crank member 570 rotates counterclockwise, immediately after the rotary arm member 550 is arranged at the overhang position (FIG. 29 (a). ), The protrusion 541b is separated from the arc hole 554, and then the protrusion 541b returns to the arc hole 554 by the time the rotary crank member 570 is arranged in the state shown in FIG. 30 (a). think of. After the protrusion 541b returns to the arcuate hole 554, the rotary crank member 570 is further rotated, and even if the rotary arm member 550 swings to the state shown in FIG. 30B, the protrusion 541b Does not cause a malfunction in which the wheel cannot return to the arcuate hole 554.

In this case, when the rotary arm member 550 and the expansion / contraction effect device 540 are each swung, the rotary crank member 570 is stopped or started controlled according to the positional relationship between the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554. There is no need to continue the rotation of the rotating crank member 570. In other words, it is only necessary to control the timing of the swing of the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and the rotating crank member 570 does not need to be controlled, and the rotation may be continued. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the control load of a complicated operation in which the expansion / contraction effect device 540 and the rotation arm member 550 are swung at different timings.

In the present embodiment, the mouth end portion 554a is formed so that the width of the arcuate hole 554 can be widened toward the opening end portion (left end portion in FIG. 39) of the arcuate hole 554. As a result, it is possible to greatly tolerate the positional deviation (positional deviation in the expansion / contraction direction of the expansion / contraction effect device 540) when the protrusion 541b returns to the arcuate hole 554, and the first raised fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e A large clearance with the rotating arm member 550 can be secured.

Next, the swing angle when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state which is a state between the expansion state and the reduction state will be described. By swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise from the state where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is in the extension state (see FIG. 37), the protrusion 541b moves corresponding to the arcuate hole 554, and the expansion / contraction effect is produced. The device 540 forms an intermediate state.

40 to 42 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. In addition, in FIGS. 40 to 42, the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state (the case where the rotation arm member 550 is arranged between the extension position and the retracted position) is illustrated. In this case, the radius formed by the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is shorter than that when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the extension state (see FIGS. 37 to 39). That is, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction.

Further, in FIG. 40, a state in which the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510 is shown, and in FIG. 41, the protrusion 541 is in front of the protrusion 541 from the state of FIG. The state of being moved counterclockwise is shown, and FIG. 42 shows the state of the protrusion 541 being moved clockwise from the state of FIG. 40.

The posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIGS. 40 to 42 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIG. 28 (b). Therefore, in FIGS. 40 to 42, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2.

At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven in conjunction with the movement of the arcuate hole 554 upward by the swing of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the arcuate hole 554 has both a function of changing the swing angle of the protrusion 541b and a function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546, as will be described later. As a result, the functions can be integrated.

As shown in FIGS. 40 to 42, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state and the shape of the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 have a radius of curvature. Although the central axes of are the same on the upper side, the radius of curvature and the posture are different from each other. Since the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 intersect at the formation angle α1 (see FIG. 42), the arc-shaped hole 554 acts as a stopper for stopping the swing of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 42). ..

As shown in FIG. 41, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the protrusion 541b does not come into contact with the arcuate hole 554. That is, since the rotating plate 520 can swing until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, the protruding portion 541b can swing up to a swing angle θ3 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (angle θ3 =). Angle θ1).

As shown in FIG. 42, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the first stopper surface 554b of the arcuate hole 554. In this state, the guide fastening portion 541e is brought into contact with the upper side surface of the rotating arm member 550 to prevent the state change of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction. Therefore, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is shaken in the state of FIG. 42. The movement is stopped.

That is, the rotating plate 520 does not swing until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, and the protruding portion 541b can swing clockwise up to a swing angle θ4 (angle θ4 <angle θ2). .. Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 by changing the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540. In the state of FIG. 42, the guide fastening portion 541e is brought into contact with the main body portion 551 of the rotating arm member 550.

Next, the swing angle when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms a reduced state will be described. By swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise from the state where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is in the intermediate state (see FIG. 40), the protrusion 541b moves corresponding to the arcuate hole 554, and the expansion / contraction effect is produced. The device 540 forms a reduced state.

43 to 45 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. In addition, in FIGS. 43 to 45, the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms a reduced state (the case where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position) is illustrated. In this case, the radius formed by the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is shorter than that when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state (see FIGS. 40 to 42). That is, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction.

Further, in FIG. 43, a state in which the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510 is illustrated, and in FIG. The state of being moved counterclockwise is illustrated, and FIG. 45 shows a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise from the front view from the state of FIG. 43. The posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIGS. 43 to 45 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIG. 28 (a). Therefore, in FIGS. 43 to 45, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven in conjunction with the movement of the arcuate hole 554 upward by the swing of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the arcuate hole 554 has both a function of changing the swing angle of the protrusion 541b and a function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546. As a result, the functions can be integrated.

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms a reduced state and the shape of the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 are different from each other. The central axis of the radius of curvature is inverted. That is, the central axis of the radius of curvature of the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is below the protrusion 541b, and the central axis of the radius of curvature of the arcuate hole 554 is located above the arcuate hole 554. In this case, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 intersect at a formation angle α2 (angle α2> angle α1), and the arcuate hole 554 acts as a stopper to stop the swing of the protrusion 541b ( (See FIGS. 44 and 45).

As shown in FIG. 44, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the second stopper surface 554c of the arcuate hole 554. In this case, the rotating plate 520 does not swing until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c (see FIG. 41), and the protruding portion 541b can swing counterclockwise to a swing angle θ5. (Angle θ5 <Angle θ1 = Angle θ3).

As shown in FIG. 45, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the third stopper surface 554d of the arcuate hole 554. In this case, the rotating plate 520 does not swing until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, and the protruding portion 541b can swing clockwise up to a swing angle θ6 (angle θ6 <angle θ4). <Angle θ2). Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction. As a result, the variation of the swing width of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 can be increased.

Here, the formation angle α2 between the movement locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 in the reduced state is formed larger than the formation angle α1 between the movement locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 in the intermediate state. To.

In the relationship between the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554, if the formation angle is 90 degrees, the protrusion 541b is swung across the arcuate hole 554, and the protrusion 541b The swing angle of is minimized. On the other hand, in the relationship between the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554, if the formation angle is 0 degrees (see FIGS. 37 to 39), the protrusion 541b is along the extending direction of the arcuate hole 554. The swing angle of the protrusion 541b is maximized. Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in the reduced state (formation angle α2) can be made smaller than the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in the intermediate state (formation angle α1) (formation angle α1 <formation angle α2). ).

As described above, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b is changed by changing the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and at that time, the inner peripheral surface of the arcuate hole 554 (first stopper surface 554b, second The stopper surface 554c and the third stopper surface 554d) function as stoppers that regulate the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540. As a result, the inner peripheral surface of the arcuate hole 554 can also be used as a portion that regulates the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in each case where the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is different. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the space for arranging the stopper that regulates the swing angle of the protrusion 541b.

Further, the stopper that regulates the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is retracted from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 by arranging the rotation arm member 550 at the retracted position. Therefore, unlike the case where the fixed stopper is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81, the stopper remains on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81 even if the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position. Can be prevented. As a result, when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position, the other member can be arranged in front of the third symbol display device 81, so that another movable member (for example, the slide operation unit 700) can be arranged. It is possible to secure an overhanging space for the support column member 720).

Further, the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 has a function as a stopper for regulating the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and a second drive to the expansion / contraction effect device 540 by swinging the rotation arm member 550. It has a function as a transmission device that transmits the driving force of the device 560 and causes the expansion / contraction effect device 540 to perform the expansion / contraction operation. As a result, the functions can be integrated and the number of parts can be reduced.

The tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 57. The tilting operation unit 600 is a unit that swings the effect member 620 (tilting operation) (see FIG. 12), and the sliding operation unit 700 is a unit that slides the tilting operation unit 600 in the left-right direction. FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700, and FIG. 47 is a rear perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700. Note that FIGS. 46 and 47 show a state in which the support member 720 (see FIG. 47) of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 is arranged at the retracted position.

FIG. 48 is a front exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700, and FIG. 49 is a rear exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700. In addition, in FIGS. 48 and 49, the tilting operation unit 600 is shown without being disassembled for easy understanding.

The slide operation unit 700 is formed by fastening and fixing one end to a base member 710 formed in a long plate shape in the left-right direction and a slide plate 711 of the base member 710 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. A strut member 720, a slide rail 730 in which one end is fastened and fixed to the strut member 720 and the other end in which the base member 610 of the tilting operation unit 600 is fastened and fixed is formed so as to be expandable and contractible in the vertical direction. A connecting member 740 in which the rear rail portion 716 of the main body portion 710 is slidably supported and pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600, and a driving force for movement of the support member 720 in the left-right direction are generated. It mainly includes a drive device 750 and a back cover member 760 formed on the back side of the drive device 750 and fastened and fixed to the base member 710.

The base member 710 is a member that forms the skeleton of the slide operation unit 700, and is a slide plate 711 that is formed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and to which a support member 720 is fastened and fixed from the back side, and a rear view of the base member 710. A shaft support hole 712 that is recessed in the lower left with a circular cross section and supports the fixed shaft portion 753a, and a shaft support hole that is recessed in a long hole shape extending in the left-right direction in the lower right of the rear view of the base member 710. A slide shaft support hole 713 in which the movable shaft portion 754a is slidably supported while the vertical position is matched with the 712, and a sliding shaft support hole 713 formed so as to be vertically swingable by a solenoid, in the left-right direction of the locking portion 725 of the support member 720. The lever member 714 that regulates the movement of the base member 714, the front rail portion 715 that projects the upper end portion of the base member 710 toward the front side in an arc shape with a downward cross section and rolls the upper rolling member 742 of the connecting member 740, and the front surface thereof. The vertical position of the rear rail portion 716, which is recessed in the rail portion 715 from the rear side in an arc shape and through which the insertion plate portion 741b of the connecting member 740 is inserted, coincides with the shaft support hole 712 at the lower left side of the base member 710 when viewed from the rear. The slide origin detection sensor 717, which is located on the right side of the shaft support hole 712, and the slide shaft support hole 713 at the lower right side of the base member 710 when the vertical position coincides with the slide. It mainly includes a slide origin detection sensor 718 arranged at a position on the left side of the shaft support hole 713.

Since the lever member 714 regulates the sliding movement of the support member 720 to be fastened and fixed to the slide plate 711 in the left-right direction, the driving force of the driving device 750 when the tilting operation unit 600 is maintained in the retracted position is not required. Can be done.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the tilting operation unit 600 is moved along the forming direction (arc trajectory) of the front rail portion 715 and the rear rail portion 716, the left and right of the support column member 720 connected to the tilting operation unit 600 are left and right. The sliding movement in the direction can occur due to the action of gravity applied to the tilting operation unit 600. For example, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 46), the moving direction of the tilting operation unit 600 is directed diagonally downward along the shape of the front rail portion 715. Therefore, even if the movement direction of the support column member 720 connected to the tilting operation unit 600 is the left-right direction along the movement direction of the slide plate 711, the support column member 720 may be moved by gravity. In the present embodiment, the lever member 714 is swung downward to be engaged with the locking portion 725 of the support member 720, and the movement of the support member 720 in the left-right direction is restricted, so that the driving force of the drive device 750 is restricted. The strut member 720 can be maintained in the retracted position even if the above is unnecessary. Therefore, the durability of the drive device 750 can be improved.

The slide origin detection sensor 717 is used to detect whether or not the support column member 720 is arranged at the origin position (retracted position) of the slide movement. The slide origin detection sensor 717 has a pair of light emitting parts and a light receiving part, and the light emitting parts and the light receiving part are provided side by side in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, the light emitting unit is arranged so as to irradiate light from the back side to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light emitting unit can receive (detect) the light emitted from the light emitting unit. The light receiving portion is arranged with a gap of 10 mm on the front side of the. Details will be described later, but when the strut member 720 that is movable in the left-right direction is moved to the origin position (retracted position), the lower end portion of the strut member 720 is placed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717. It is configured to be located. Therefore, when the strut member 720 is arranged at the origin position (retracted position), the light directed from the light emitting portion to the light receiving portion is shielded by the lower end portion of the strut member 720. Thereby, by determining whether or not the light emitted from the light emitting portion to the light receiving portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717 is shielded, whether or not the support column member 720 is arranged at the origin position (retracted position) is determined. It can be determined.

The slide position detection sensor 718 is used to detect whether or not the support column member 720 is arranged at the overhang position of the slide movement. The slide position detection sensor 718 has a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit having the same positional relationship as the slide origin sensor 717. Although the details will be described later, when the strut member 720 that is movable in the left-right direction is moved to the overhanging position, the lower end portion of the strut member 720 is located between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide position detection sensor 718. It is configured as follows. Therefore, when the strut member 720 is arranged at the overhanging position, the light directed from the light emitting portion to the light receiving portion is shielded by the lower end portion of the strut member 720. Thereby, by determining whether or not the light emitted from the light emitting portion to the light receiving portion of the slide position detection sensor 718 is blocked, it is determined whether or not the support column member 720 is arranged at the overhanging position. Can be done.

The strut member 720 is formed in a vertically long plate shape and is continuously provided in the lower end portion of the main body portion 721 in the left-right direction and is bored in the front-rear direction, and the slide plate 711 of the base member 710. The first fastening portion 722 into which the screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted, and the second fastening portion 730 which is vertically connected to the left end of the main body portion 721 and is bored in the front-rear direction to fasten and fix the slide rail 730. A long hole extending in a direction parallel to the continuous connection direction of the portion 723 and the second fastening portion 723, and a slide hole 724 formed on the right side of the main body portion 721 when viewed from the front, and the right side of the main body portion 721. The lower lid portion in which the belt 755 of the drive device 750 is sandwiched between the hook-shaped locking portion 725 that protrudes upward from the lower end portion and meshes with the lever member 714 and the main body portion 721 that is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the main body portion 721. From the 726, the rolling portion 727 projecting from the back side of the lower end portion of the main body portion 721 and forming the inner peripheral surface of the slide recessed portion 764 of the back cover member 760 so as to be rollable, and the upper end portion of the main body portion 721. It mainly includes a coil spring 728 that is suspended from the lower front and connected to the hook-shaped portion 617 of the base member 610 at the lower end.

The slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed to the support column member 720 in a posture that allows expansion and contraction in the continuous direction of the second fastening portion 723.

The slide hole 724 is a long hole extending in a direction parallel to the continuous connection direction of the second fastening portion 723, and is a long hole through which the auxiliary member 615 of the tilting operation unit 600 is inserted. Therefore, the slide hole 724 can suppress the deviation of the posture of the tilting operation unit 600 that moves up and down in the left-right direction (relative rotation of the tilting operation unit 600 with respect to the support column member 720).

The lower lid portion 726 is formed with a tooth profile extending in the front-rear direction on the upper surface side. This tooth profile is formed to be meshed with the tooth profile formed on the inner peripheral surface of the belt 755 of the drive device 750. As a result, it is possible to prevent the support column member 720 from slipping on the belt 755 of the drive device 750.

Further, the lower lid portion 726 is provided with a shielding portion 726a on the lower surface side for shielding the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717 or the slide position detection sensor 718. The shielding portion 726a has a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in the slide direction (horizontal direction) of the support member 720 (and the tilting operation unit 600), and the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the movable direction is the slide origin detection sensor 717 or the slide position detection sensor 718. It is formed thinner (about 1 mm) than the gap (about 10 mm) between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion. The shielding portion 726a can be moved between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717 or the slide position detection sensor 718 by moving the support column member 720 in the left-right direction. When the support column member 720 (and the tilting operation unit 600) is at the origin position (retracted position), the shielding portion 726a is located between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717, and the slide origin is obtained. The light emitted from the light emitting portion of the detection sensor 717 to the light receiving portion is blocked. Further, when the support column member 720 (and the tilting operation unit 600) is in the overhanging position, the shielding portion 726a is located between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide position detection sensor 718, and the slide position detection is performed. The light emitted from the light emitting portion of the sensor 718 to the light receiving portion is shielded. As a result, when it is detected that the light receiving portion (or light emitting portion) of the slide origin detection sensor 717 is shielded by the shielding portion 726a, the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the origin position (evacuation position). It can be determined. Further, when it is detected that the light receiving portion (or light emitting portion) of the slide position detection sensor 718 is shielded by the shielding portion 726a, it can be determined that the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the overhanging position. it can.

The rolling portion 727 is rotatably inserted into the slide recessed portion 764 of the back cover 760 to suppress frictional resistance and suppress tilting in the front-rear direction about the lower end portion of the support column member 720. be able to.

The coil spring 728 is an urging force that moves the tilting operation unit 600 upward. Since the urging force from the coil spring 728 is constantly applied to the tilting operation unit 600, it is possible to prevent the tilting operation unit 600 from falling downward due to gravity.

The connecting member 740 is pivotally supported by a triangular plate-shaped main body member 741 rotatably supported by the shaft supporting portion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 and a rolling shaft 741c projecting from the main body member 741. A pair of tubular upper rolling members 742 that are rolled on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 of the member 710 and a rolling shaft 741c of the main body member 741 are fastened and fixed from the front side to cover the front side of the front rail portion 715. The front cover member 743 arranged in the embodiment and the lower half portion disposed on the lower portion on the back side of the front cover member 743 are externally fitted and held by the front cover member 743, and the upper half portion rolls on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. It mainly includes a cylindrical lower rolling member 744 that is moved.

The main body member 741 is a member formed in the shape of a triangular plate, which is a circular recess recessed from the back surface at the upper end portion, and is a shaft rotatably supported by the shaft support protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600. A branch 741a, an insertion plate portion 741b that is a plate-shaped member projecting to the front side at the lower end portion and is slidably inserted into the back rail portion 716 of the base member 710, and an insertion plate portion from the shaft support portion 741a. It mainly includes a pair of rolling shafts 741c which are projected in a columnar shape from a position line-symmetrical to the perpendicular line drawn to 741b to the front side and the upper rolling member 742 is rotatably supported.

Since the insertion plate portion 741b is inserted into the back rail portion 716 of the base member 710, the connecting member 740 is formed so as to be movable along the back rail portion 716. Therefore, the tilting operation unit 600 pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 741a is also formed so as to be movable along the rear rail portion 716.

The rolling shaft 741c is formed in pairs at positions symmetrical with respect to the perpendicular line drawn from the shaft support portion 741a to the insertion plate portion 741b. Therefore, when the pair of rolling shafts 741c abuts on the front rail portion 715 formed in an arc shape via the upper rolling portion 742, the load applied to the connecting member 740 from the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 ( The force in the normal direction of the arc) passes through the shaft support 741a. Therefore, the connecting member 740 can stably hold the shaft support portion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600.

The upper rolling member 742 is rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 741a and abuts on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715. That is, when the connecting member 740 is slid along the front rail portion 715, the upper rolling portion 742 is rolled on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715. As a result, the frictional resistance generated during the sliding movement of the connecting member 740 can be reduced, and the driving force required for the sliding movement can be suppressed.

The lower half of the lower rolling member 744 is rotatably fitted to the lower portion of the front cover member 743, and the upper end thereof is brought into contact with the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. That is, when the connecting member 740 is slid along the front rail portion 715, the lower rolling portion 744 is rolled on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. As a result, the frictional resistance generated between the connecting member 740 and the front rail portion 715 when the connecting member 740 slides can be reduced, and the driving force required for the slide movement can be suppressed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper rolling member 742 rolls on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715, and the lower rolling member 744 rolls on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail portion 715 are sandwiched between the upper rolling member 742 and the lower rolling member 744 of the connecting member 740 while suppressing the frictional resistance.

Here, since the center of gravity of the tilting operation unit 600 is formed upward as described later, there is a risk of tilting in the front-rear direction. In this case, since the connecting member 740 sandwiches the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail portion 715 by the upper rolling member 742 and the lower rolling member 744, the connecting member 740 is tilted in both the front and rear directions of the tilting operation unit 600. , Can generate resistance. This makes it easier to maintain the posture of the tilting operation unit 600.

The front cover member 743 is pivotally supported from the front side of the rolling shaft 741c of the connecting member 740 so that the upper rolling member 742 cannot be pulled out.

The drive device 750 is attached to a drive motor 751 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 and generates a driving force that slides and moves the support member 720, a drive gear 752 that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 751, and the drive gear 752. A shaft fixed gear 753 that is meshed and around which a belt 755 is wound, and a shaft moving gear 754 that is arranged apart from the shaft fixed gear 753 and is formed so that the belt 755 is wound and the rotary shaft 754a is slidable. , A belt 755 that is wound around the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 and moved by the rotation of the shaft fixed gear 753, and a coil that generates an urging force that moves the shaft moving gear 754 in a direction away from the shaft fixed gear 753. Mainly provided with a spring 756.

The shaft fixed gear 753 includes a fixed shaft portion 753a which is a cylindrical member as a rotating shaft and is inserted into a shaft support hole 712 of the base member 710. Further, the shaft moving gear 754 includes a moving shaft portion 754a which is a cylindrical member as a rotating shaft and is inserted into the slide shaft support hole 713 of the base member 710.

The shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 are formed as gears having the same shape. On the inner peripheral surface of the belt 755, a tooth profile that meshes with the gear teeth of the shaft fixing gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 is formed. As a result, slippage between the belt 755 and the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 can be suppressed, and the amount of rotation of the shaft fixed gear 753 can be reliably transmitted to the belt 755.

One end of the coil spring 756 is fixed to a hook-shaped portion formed on the right side of the slide shaft support hole 713n of the base member 710 when viewed from the rear, and the other end is fixed to a case covering the shaft movement gear 754. .. As a result, an urging force for moving the shaft moving gear 754 to the opposite side of the shaft support hole 712 can be generated, and an appropriate tension can be applied to the belt 755, so that the belt 755 can move the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft. It is possible to prevent the gear 754 from falling off.

The back cover member 760 is a member that covers the drive device 750 on the back surface of the base member 710, and has a main body portion 761 formed in a box shape with the front side open and a fixed shaft portion 753a on the bottom surface of the main body portion 761. A recessed portion 762 that is a recess for receiving, a moving recessed portion 763 that is a recess that is extended in the same shape as the slide shaft support hole 713 and receives the moving shaft portion 754a, and a moving recessed portion 763 that is extended in the left-right direction to receive the rolling portion 727. It mainly includes a slide recessed portion 764 which is a recess.

The slide recessed portion 764 is a recess in which the rolling portion 727 is rolled on the upper and lower inner side surfaces thereof. The frictional resistance of the sliding movement of the strut member 720 is suppressed, and the strut member 720 is suppressed from tilting in the front-rear direction. That is, when the strut member 720 is tilted in the front-rear direction, the rolling portion 727 is brought into contact with either the upper inner side surface or the lower inner side surface of the slide recessed portion 764. As a result, the inclination of the support column member 720 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed.

Next, the tilting operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. FIG. 50 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600, and FIG. 51 is a rear exploded perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600.

The tilting operation unit 600 includes a plate-shaped base member 610 that is fastened and fixed to the other end of the slide rail 730, and a box-shaped effect member 620 whose lower end is swingably supported by the base member 610. The first drive device 630 that generates the driving force for the swing of the effect member 620, the transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the first drive device 630 to the effect member 620, and the transmission member 640 that abuts and transmits the drive force. It mainly includes a torsion spring 650 that generates an urging force that moves the member 640, and a second drive device 660 that generates a driving force that opens and closes the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 of the effect member 620. ..

The base member 610 has a main body portion 611 formed in a vertically long plate shape while the slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed, and a shaft support portion of the connecting member 740 projecting in a columnar shape from the front side of the main body portion 611. A shaft support protrusion 612 on which 741a is pivotally supported and a circular hole formed in the vertical direction above the shaft support protrusion 612 so that the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 can swing. The first shaft support hole 613 and the circular hole formed vertically above the first shaft support hole 613 in the front-rear direction, and the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640 is oscillatingly supported. A biaxial support hole 614, an auxiliary member 615 formed on the back surface of the main body 611 and inserted into the slide hole 724 of the support member 720 so as to be vertically slidable, and an insertion hole through which the drive shaft of the first drive device 630 is inserted. It includes a 616, a hook-shaped hook-shaped portion 617 extending from the lower end portion of the main body portion 611 toward the back surface side, and a pair of light emitting portions and a light receiving portion arranged on the upper left portion of the back surface of the main body portion 611. It mainly includes a plumb bob origin sensor 618.

The second shaft support hole 614 includes a lower receiving plate portion 614a projecting from the lower edge thereof toward the front surface in an arcuate cross section. The lower receiving plate portion 614a guides the rotation of the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640. The lower receiving plate portion 614a is formed to have a left-right width substantially equal to the outer diameter of the tubular portion 642 (see FIG. 53 (a)).

By inserting the auxiliary member 615 into the slide hole 724, the inclination of the base member 610 in the left-right direction can be suppressed, so that the base member 610 can be smoothly slid and moved in the up-down direction.

The hook-shaped portion 617 is a portion on which one end of the coil spring 728 is hung and an urging force is applied.

The effect member 620 and the second drive device 660 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a front exploded perspective view of the effect member 620 and the second drive device 660. The sub-display device 690 arranged inside the effect member 620 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and FIGS. 50 and 51 are appropriately referred to for the description of the effect member 620 and the second drive device 660.

The effect member 620 is a box-shaped member in which the sub-display device 690 is arranged inside, and extends from above and below the rectangular plate-shaped main body member 621 and the main body member 621 from above and below to the main body member 621. An upper and lower cover member 622 that can be bent in an embodiment, and a left and right cover member 623 that is a plate-shaped member attached from both side surfaces of the upper and lower cover member 622 and forms a rectangular box shape having an open front together with the upper and lower cover member 622. A member that opens and closes the front opening, the first curtain member 624 that is connected to and moved to the fitting hole 665a of the second drive device 660, and a member that opens and closes the front opening together with the first curtain member 624. A second curtain member 625 that is moved by being pulled by the first curtain member 624, a cylindrical swing shaft portion 626 projecting from the lower back surface of the main body member 621, and a position on the lower left side of the back surface of the main body member 621. It is mainly provided with a sensor shielding portion 627 arranged at a position of shielding the light emitted from the light emitting portion to the light receiving portion of the tilting origin sensor 618 when the effect member 620 is arranged at the origin position. , The center of gravity position G (see FIG. 53) is formed above (higher position) than the swing shaft portion 626. The center of gravity position G is formed on a straight line passing through the sliding shaft portion 621a and the swinging shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53) in the inverted state (see FIG. 53).

The main body member 621 includes a columnar sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 51) that projects vertically above the swing shaft portion 626 toward the back surface side. The sliding shaft portion 621a is slidably inserted into the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 51).

The upper and lower cover members 622 are members that accommodate the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 inside in a state where the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are opened by the driving force of the driving device 660. ..

The left and right cover member 623 includes a slide groove 623a which is formed in a groove shape on the inner side surface and allows the slide protrusion 625c of the second curtain member 625 to slide.

In the slide groove 623a, a curved groove formed in an arc shape is connected to the upper and lower ends of a linear groove extending vertically. As a result, the second curtain member 625 is slidably moved along the shape of the slide groove 623a in such a manner that linear movement and curved movement occur in order.

The first curtain member 624 is a member that swings in the vertical direction about the opening / closing shaft 664 of the second drive device 660, and has a main body portion 624a having a C-shaped cross section and a main body portion thereof. A fitting portion 624b that protrudes from the end of the 624a in the left-right direction and is fitted into the fitting hole 665a of the second drive device 660 so as not to rotate relative to each other, and one end near the fitting portion 624b is the main body. Mainly includes a connecting member 624c which is oscillatedly supported by the 624 and whose other end is connected to the connecting protrusion 625b of the second curtain member 625.

The second curtain member 625 is a member that is pulled by the first curtain member 624 and is moved in the vertical direction, and has a main body portion 625a formed in a plate shape having a C-shaped cross section and a C-shaped cross section of the main body portion 624a. A connecting protrusion 625b that protrudes from the end in the left-right direction and is connected to the other end of the connecting member 624c, and a slide groove of the left and right cover member 623 that protrudes outward in the left-right direction from the vicinity of the bent portion of the main body 625a. It mainly includes a slide protrusion 625c inserted through the 623a.

The second drive device 660 includes a drive motor 661 fastened and fixed to the back side of the effect member 620, a drive gear 662 pivotally supported by the drive motor 661, and one gear meshed with the drive gear 662 to each other. A pair of transmission gears 663 that are rotated in opposite directions, and an opening / closing shaft that is rotatably supported on the front side of the main body member 621 of the effect member 620 by a shaft support mechanism (not shown) that is inserted into the transmission gear 663 so as not to rotate relative to each other. It mainly includes a 664 and a transmission member 665 fixed to both ends of the pair of opening / closing shafts 664 so as not to rotate relative to each other.

The transmission member 665 includes a fitting hole 665a into which the fitting portion 624b of the first curtain member 624 is fitted so as not to rotate relative to each other. As a result, the first curtain member 624 is swung up and down about the opening / closing shaft 664.

The description will be returned to FIGS. 50 and 51. The first drive device 630 includes a drive motor 631 in which a drive shaft is inserted into an insertion hole 616 of the base member 610 and fastened and fixed to the base member, and a screw gear-shaped worm 632 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 631. A worm wheel 633 having a screw tooth gear shape that meshes with the worm 632 is mainly provided.

The worm 632 is formed of double-threaded screws. In the present embodiment, the number of teeth of the worm wheel 633 that meshes with the worm 632 is about 20, so that the worm wheel 633 makes one rotation while the worm 632 makes 10 rotations. As a result, the rotation angles of the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 when the drive motor 631 is operated in the minimum unit of control resolution can be significantly reduced.

The worm wheel 633 has a locking protrusion 633a that protrudes from the center of the rotation shaft, is inserted into the second shaft support hole 614 of the base member 610, and is locked to the tubular portion 643 of the transmission member 640 so as not to rotate relative to each other. Be prepared. The transmission of the driving force between the worm 632 and the worm wheel 633 is structurally limited to one direction from the worm 632 to the worm wheel 633 (when the worm wheel 633 actively rotates, the force is wormed. 632 in the axial direction). As a result, the load received on the drive motor 631 when the worm wheel 633 is stopped can be reduced. Further, the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 can be stopped in a state where the power of the drive motor 631 is cut off, and the power consumption of the drive motor 631 can be suppressed.

The transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. 53 (a) and 53 (b) are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. In FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b), the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIGS. 50 and 51 are appropriately referred to for the description of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. To do. Further, in FIG. 53A, an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is arranged vertically above the tubular portion 642 is shown, and in this state, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 is the urging force of the transmission member 640. It is balanced in the swing direction. FIG. 53 (b) shows a state in which the transmission member 640 is swung by a predetermined amount counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the effect member 620 is swung by a predetermined amount from the inverted state of FIG. 53 (a).

The transmission member 640 is a member that is swung by the rotation of the worm wheel 633 (see FIG. 50), and is front and rear at one end of a main body portion 641 formed in a long rectangular rod shape and the main body portion 641. A length extending in the axial direction of the tubular portion 642 extending in the direction and locking the locking protrusion 633a of the first drive device 630 and the other end of the main body portion 641 in the axial direction of the tubular portion 642. The sliding hole 643 formed as a hole, the contact portion 644 disposed on both sides of the main body portion 641 in the swing direction, and the contact portion 644 and the front side surface of the main body portion 641 are connected. Mainly includes a wide arc-shaped front arc plate portion 645 and a wide arc-shaped rear arc plate portion 646 connecting the contact portion 644 and the back side side surface of the main body portion 641.

As shown in FIG. 53, the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 645, and the rear arc plate portion 646 are arranged so as to surround the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. This makes it possible to prevent the torsion spring 650 from falling off (disengaging) from the transmission member 640.

The tubular portion 642 is pivotally supported by the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) of the base member 610, and is locked to the locking protrusion 633a (see FIG. 50) of the first drive device 630 so as not to rotate relative to each other. To.

The sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is inserted into the sliding hole 643. As a result, when the transmission member 640 is swung around the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) by the driving force of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 50), the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 The effect member 620 is swung around the first shaft support hole 613 while being slid through the sliding hole 643 (sliding and moving in the shaft radial direction).

By swinging the effect member 620 in this way, it is possible to suppress the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the drive motor 631 is rotated in the minimum unit of the control resolution of the first drive device 630. For example, as a method of swinging the effect member 620, a method of directly connecting a gear to the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and transmitting the driving force of the drive motor to the gear can be considered. However, in this case, the angle P0, which is the minimum unit of the resolution of controlling the drive motor (see FIG. 53 (a), is shown several times larger than the actual angle P0 for easy understanding. The amount of movement X1 in which the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 deviates from the inverted state in the left-right direction when rotated by the effect member 620 increases as the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 separates from the swing shaft portion 626. Therefore, the farther the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is from the swing shaft portion 626, the more difficult it becomes to adjust the position of the center of gravity G of the effect member 620, and the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is arranged directly above the swing shaft portion 626. It becomes difficult to make the effect member 620 stand still in the inverted state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the effect member 620 is connected to the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620. The length from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the tubular portion 642 which is the swinging shaft of the transmission member 640 is the length from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the swinging shaft portion 626 which is the swinging shaft of the effect member 620. It is formed shorter than the above.

Therefore, even when the effect member 620 is long in the radial direction of the swing shaft portion 626, the angle P0, which is the minimum unit of the control resolution of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 53 (a), is understood. (The angle is shown several times larger than the actual angle P0) to suppress the movement amount X2 of the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 when the first drive device 630 is operated. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the effect member 620 stand still in an inverted state in which the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is arranged directly above the swing shaft portion 626 which is the swing axis.

Further, as a method of swinging the effect member 620, a gear tooth is formed on the effect member 620 on an arc centered on the swing shaft portion 626, and a gear meshing with the gear tooth is rotated by a drive motor. A method of swinging the effect member 620 can be considered. However, in this case, the larger the swing range of the effect member 620, the larger the range for forming the gear teeth on the arc is required in the left-right direction of the effect member 620. Therefore, when the effect member 620 is formed in a thin shape in the swing direction, the gear teeth on the arc protrude from the effect member 620, which hinders the effect of the effect. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the effect member 620 is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the effect member 620, the cylindrical portion 642, which is the swing axis, is the swing shaft portion 626, which is the swing axis of the effect member 620. It is arranged vertically above the above, and is connected to the swing shaft portion 621a at the center in the left-right direction of the effect member 620. Since the effect member 620 swings following the transmission member 640, the formation range of the transmission member 640 with respect to the swing range of the effect member 620 can be suppressed near the center in the left-right direction of the effect member 620. As a result, even if the effect member 620 is thin in the left-right direction, it is possible to prevent the transmission member 640 from protruding from the effect member 620, and the degree of freedom in designing the effect member 620 can be improved.

The lower surface of the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640. As a result, the weight of the effect member 620 is applied not only to the swing shaft portion 626 but also to the transmission member 640. That is, a force opposed to the weight of the effect member 620 can be generated not only from the swing shaft portion 626 but also from the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640. Therefore, the effect member 640 can be supported at two points, the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642, and the radial force applied to the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 can be suppressed. ..

Here, since the effect member 620 is in the normal state in the inverted state shown in FIG. 53A, the transmission member 640 can be swung from the inverted state to a predetermined amount and then quickly returned to the inverted state. Is desirable.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), when the transmission member 640 is swung counterclockwise from the front view at a swing angle φ1 from the state shown in FIG. 53 (a), the effect member 620 Is swung at a swing angle of φ2 (φ2 <φ1).

That is, the swing angle of the effect member 620 is smaller than the swing angle of the transmission member 640 that is swung by the driving force of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 50). Therefore, the effect member 620 can be easily returned to the inverted state (see FIG. 53A).

Further, in the present embodiment, a long hole-shaped sliding hole 643 is formed in the axial direction of the transmission member 640, and the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is inserted into the sliding hole 643. The swing shafts of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are different, and the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 has a shorter swing radius than the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620. Therefore, the transmission member 640 As the sliding shaft portion 621a swings, the sliding shaft portion 621a moves away from the swinging shaft of the transmission member 640. Therefore, the arm length R1 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state (see FIG. 53A) is swung by a predetermined amount from the inverted state (see FIG. 53A). (See FIG. 54 (b)), the arm length R2 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640 is shortened.

That is, the closer to the inverted state, the shorter the arm length of the transmission member 640, and the arm length of the transmission member 640 is constant with respect to the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the transmission member 640 is swung by a predetermined angle. Compared with the case of, it can be made smaller as it approaches the inverted state. Therefore, even if the rotation speed of the drive motor 631 is not changed, the operating speed of the effect member 620 is increased near the predetermined stop position, while the operation speed of the effect member 620 is decreased near the inverted state, and the effect member 620 is inverted. It is possible to easily stand still in the state (it is possible to facilitate stop control of the effect member 620 while the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is arranged vertically above the first shaft support hole 613).

With reference to FIG. 55, the effect member 620 swings with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 640 by changing the arm length from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640. The change in angle will be described.

FIG. 55 is a schematic view schematically showing the swing angle of the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53 (a)) with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53 (a)). In FIG. 55, the rotary shaft M1 corresponds to the swing shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53 (a)) which is the rotary shaft of the effect member 620, and the rotary shaft M2 is the tubular portion 642 which is the swing shaft of the transmission member 640. (See FIG. 53 (a)). The straight lines a1 to a4 are schematic representations of the arrangement of the transmission members 640, and are straight lines drawn radially from the rotation axis M2. The straight lines a1 pass through the rotation axis M1 and the straight lines a2 to a4 are the straight lines a1. Is formed in a manner in which the formation angles of are sequentially added by 15 degrees. That is, the angles formed by the adjacent straight lines a1 to a4 are 15 degrees each.

An arc drawn with a radius equal to the arm length R1 (see FIG. 53 (a)) centered on the rotation axis M2 is illustrated by the arc SR1, and the arm length R2 centered on the rotation axis M2 (see FIG. 54 (b)). An arc drawn with a radius equal to is illustrated by arc SR2. The arc SR0 is an arc drawn around the rotation axis M1, and is an arc having a radius having a length obtained by adding the distance between the rotation axis M1 and the rotation axis M2 to the arm length R1.

These arcs assume the locus of the connection position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53 (a)). In the present embodiment, the sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 53 (a)) as a connecting position is projected from the effect member 620, and the connection position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the arc SR0. .. When the connection position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the arc SR1 or the arc SR2, a long hole is formed in the effect member 620 in the axial direction, and the transmission member 640 is used to form a long hole. It is assumed that the shaft to be inserted into the elongated hole is projected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the intersection of the straight line a1 and the arc SR0 is shown at the intersection P10, the intersection of the straight line a1 and the arc SR1 is shown at the intersection P11, and the intersection of the straight line a1 and the arc SR2 is shown at the intersection P12. Illustrated in.

Similarly, the intersection of the straight line a2 and the arc SR0 is shown at the intersection P20, the intersection of the straight line a2 and the arc SR1 is shown at the intersection P21, and the intersection of the straight line a2 and the arc SR2 is shown at the intersection P22. The intersection of the straight line a3 and the arc SR0 is shown at the intersection P30, the intersection of the straight line a3 and the arc SR1 is shown at the intersection P31, and the intersection of the straight line a3 and the arc SR2 is shown at the intersection P32. The intersection of the straight line a4 and the arc SR0 is shown at the intersection P40, the intersection of the straight line a4 and the arc SR1 is shown at the intersection P41, and the intersection of the straight line a4 and the arc SR2 is shown at the intersection P42. The intersection P10 and the intersection P11 are arranged at the same position, and the intersection P40 and the intersection P42 are arranged at the same position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P10 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P20 is shown by the angle A10, and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P11. The angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P21 is shown by the angle A11, and the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P12 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P22 is shown by the angle A12. Will be done.

Similarly, the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P20 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P30 is shown by the angle A20, and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P21 and the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P31 are shown. The angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P22 is shown by the angle A21, and the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P22 is shown by the angle A22. The angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P30 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P40 is shown by the angle A30, and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P31 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P41. The angle formed by the and is shown by the angle A31, and the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P32 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P42 is shown by the angle A32. It should be noted that these angles correspond to the swing angles of the effect member 620.

Here, the ratio of (distance between the rotating shaft M1 and the rotating shaft M2: arm length R1: arm length R2) is (1: 2.32: 2.54) in the present embodiment. When the angle is actually measured, the angle A32 is 11.07 degrees, the angle A31 is 10.77 degrees, and the angle A30 is 11.37 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a4 and the straight line a3, the swing angle of the staging member 640 is the largest when the transmitting member 640 and the staging member 620 are connected along the arc SR0. , The transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are formed along the arc SR2 as described above (the angle A30 is closer to the angle A32 than the angle A31).

The angle A22 is 10.87 degrees, the angle A21 is 10.59 degrees, and the angle A20 is 10.82 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a3 and the straight line a2, the swing angle when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected along the arc SR0 is along the arc SR2. It is less than the case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between the angle A22 and the angle A20 is smaller than the difference between the angle A20 and the angle A21 (the angle A20 is closer to the angle A22 than the angle A21).

The angle A12 is 10.78 degrees, the angle A11 is 10.50 degrees, and the angle A10 is 10.53 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a2 and the straight line a1, the swing angle when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected along the arc SR0 is along the arc SR1. This is more than the case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between the angle A12 and the angle A10 is larger than the difference between the angle A10 and the angle A11 (the angle A10 is closer to the angle A11 than the angle A12).

From these, by setting the locus of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53 (a)) to the arc SR0, for example, when the transmission member 640 is swung at a constant velocity, the effect member It can be seen that the degree of freedom in adjusting the angular velocity of 620 can be improved. That is, the angular velocity when the transmission member 640 is arranged on the straight line a4 is closer to the angular velocity (high-speed side) when the locus of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is the arc SR2, and the transmission member 640 is on the straight line a1. The angular velocity at the time of arrangement can be brought closer to the angular velocity (low speed side) when the locus of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is the arc SR1.

Further, when the ratio of each angle is calculated, the angle A22 / angle A32 is 0.98, and the angle A12 / angle A22 is 0.99. The angle A21 / angle A31 is 0.98, and the angle A11 / angle A21 is 0.99. That is, when the locus of the connecting position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53 (a)) is the arcs SR1 and SR2, the transmission member 640 is swung toward the inverted state at a constant velocity. In this case, the reduction ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 is as small as 1 to 2%.

On the other hand, the angle A20 / angle A30 is 0.95, and the angle A10 / angle A20 is 0.97. That is, when the locus of the connecting position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53 (a)) is an arc SR0 (an arc centered on the rotation axis M1), the transmission member 640 is inverted at a constant velocity. The reduction ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 when it is swung toward the state can be set to 3 to 5%. That is, the reduction ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 can be increased as compared with the case where the locus of the connecting position is the arcs SR1 and SR2 (arcs centered on the rotation axis M2).

As shown in FIG. 53A, the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is in contact with the lower end portion of the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state. In the inverted state, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is formed vertically above the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640, so that the force due to the own weight of the effect member 620 is applied to the swing shaft portion. It is hung vertically downward with respect to 626 and the tubular portion 642. Therefore, since the force of the component in the direction in which the effect member 620 is swung is not generated by the own weight of the effect member 620, the posture of the effect member 620 is maintained in the inverted state even if the power of the first drive device 630 is cut off. Can be done. As a result, the durability of the first drive device 630 can be improved.

Further, since the force due to the own weight of the effect member 620 is applied vertically downward to the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642, the rotational resistance of the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 can be increased. It is possible to easily maintain the posture of the effect member 620 in the inverted state.

The torsion spring 650 is an elastic spring in which an urging force is generated in the direction of rewinding the coil portion 651 (direction of pushing back the transmission member 640) as the transmission member 640 swings, and the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620. The coil portion 651 wound around, the urging arm portion 652 extending along both side surfaces of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 in the swing direction, and the end of the coil portion 651 and the end of the urging arm portion 652. It mainly includes a connecting arm portion 653 that connects the portions through between the tubular portion 642 and the swing shaft portion 626.

The coil portion 651 is formed with an inner diameter of about three times the diameter of the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620. Therefore, when the urging arm portion 652 is swung to generate a load that deforms the coil portion 651 in diameter, the amount of deformation of the coil portion 651 can be secured, and the urging arm portion 652 or the connecting arm portion 653 is deformed. Can be suppressed from concentrating.

The urging arm portion 652 is surrounded by the main body portion 641, the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 645, and the back arc plate portion 646 of the transmission member 640. As a result, it is possible to prevent the urging arm portion 652 from falling off (disengaging) from the transmission member 640.

Further, the urging arm portion 652 is formed so as to be in contact with the lower receiving plate portion 614a on the swinging plane of the transmission member 640. Therefore, an urging force for pushing back the transmission member 640 is generated from the urging arm portion 652 arranged in the swing direction of the transmission member 640, and the urging arm portion arranged on the opposite side of the transmission member 640 in the swing direction. The 652 is prevented from moving to the lower receiving plate portion 614a. As a result, the torsion spring 650 is formed so as to be able to generate an urging force in the direction of pushing back the transmission member 640 regardless of the swing direction of the transmission member 640.

At the connecting portion of the urging arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653, a bent portion 653a that is bent on the opposite side of the transmission member 640 is formed. In this case, as will be described later, the abutting portion 644 of the transmission member 640 is pressed against the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650, so that the bent portion 653a is extended (see FIG. 54 (b)). As a result, the contact position between the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 becomes far from the tubular portion 642, and the moment applied to the transmission member 640 from the torsion spring 650 is increased. Can be done.

With reference to FIG. 54, a change in the urging force generated from the torsion spring 650 and pushing back the transmission member 640 will be described. 54 (a) and 54 (b) are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. In FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIG. 53 is appropriately used to explain the change in the urging force generated from the torsion spring 650. refer.

Further, in FIG. 54 (a), from the state of FIG. 53 (b), the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise in the front view, and the urging arm portion 652 on the left side in the front view is the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640. The state of starting to be pressed against the inner surface is shown. In FIG. 54 (b), the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front view, and the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 is pulled from the state of FIG. 54 (a). The extended state is illustrated.

In the state of FIG. 54A, an urging force that pushes back the transmission member 640 is generated in the urging arm portion 652 on the left side of the torsion spring 650 when viewed from the front. This urging force is the sum of the urging force generated starting from the coil portion 651 and the urging force generated starting from the bent portion 653a.

That is, in the state of FIG. 53B, since the transmission member 640 is not pressed against the bending portion 653a arranged on the left side of the front view among the pair of bending portions 653a, the urging arm on the left side of the front view of the torsion spring 650. Only the urging force starting from the coil portion 651 is generated in the portion 652 as the urging force for pushing back the transmission member 640.

On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 54A, in addition to the urging force starting from the coil portion 651, the urging force is generated by the deformation of the urging arm portion 652 starting from the bent portion 653a. Therefore, the spring constant of the urging arm portion 652 can be increased. The deformation of the urging arm portion 652 starting from the bent portion 653a is shorter than the deformation starting from the coil portion 651, so that the unit deformation amount of the transmission member 640 is shorter. The urging force generated by the hit can be increased.

In the state of FIG. 54B, the bending portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 is pushed by the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640, so that the angle formed by the urging arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653 is widened. As a result, the contact position length L1 which is the distance between the contact position of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 and the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the tubular portion 642 in the state of FIG. 54 (a). The same contact position length L2 in the state of FIG. 54 (b) is separated from the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640. That is, the contact position length is extended. As a result, the arm length of the torsion spring 650 that pushes back the transmission member 640 is lengthened, so that the moment applied from the torsion spring 650 to the transmission member 640 can be increased.

Therefore, for example, when the urging force generated by the torsion spring 650 is substantially the same in the state of FIG. 54 (a) and the state of FIG. 54 (b), the transmission member 640 is more loaded in FIG. 54 (b). The moment to be made can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to push back the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 that pushes back the transmission member 640 is small while the swing angle of the transmission member 640 (effect member 620) from the retracted position is small, and the swing angle is large. Indeed, it is elastically increased, and is increased more than the elastic increase with the state of FIG. 54 (a) as a boundary. Therefore, when the urging force of the torsion spring 650 required when the effect member 620 is set to the maximum swing angle (see FIG. 54B) is determined, the torsion spring only elastically increases. When the swing angle is small, the urging force can be set smaller (a soft spring can be used).

As a result, the degree to which the operating speed of the effect member 620 at the start of swinging is decelerated by the urging force of the torsion spring 650 can be reduced, and the operating speed of the effect member 620 at the start of operation can be increased. ..

Further, since the urging force is increased by the elastic increase or more with the state of FIG. 54 (a) as a boundary, the swing angle of the effect member 620 is set to be equal to or more than the state of FIG. 54 (a). The deceleration acceleration of the effect member 620 can be increased. As a result, the timing at which the effect member 620 starts decelerating can be delayed between the swinging operations of the effect member 620. Therefore, the swing angle at which the effect member 620 can be swung at a high speed can be increased, and the effect of the tilting operation unit 600 can be improved.

Next, the sliding operation of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a front view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700. In FIG. 56, the state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position is shown by an imaginary line, and the state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is slid and moved by a predetermined amount from the retracted position is shown by a solid line.

As shown in FIG. 56, the connecting member 740 connecting the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700, which are formed so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, is formed so as to be movable in the extending direction of the front rail portion 715. .. Here, since the weight of the tilting operation unit 600 is loaded on the connecting member 740, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position, the tilting operation unit 600 is moved to the left along the front rail portion 715 by gravity. Be urged towards you. Therefore, in order to maintain the tilting operation unit 600 in the retracted position, it is conceivable to fix the drive device 750.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lever member 714 is formed so as to be swingable up and down, and when the lever member 714 is swung downward, it is meshed with the locking portion 725 of the strut member 720 and left and right of the strut member 720. Slide movement in the direction is restricted.

As a result, the tilting operation unit 600 can be mechanically maintained in the retracted position. Therefore, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the retracted position, the tilting operation unit 600 is moved in a state where the drive device 750 is stopped. Can be maintained in the retracted position. Therefore, the durability of the drive device 750 can be improved.

From the state where the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the retracted position, the lever member 714 is swung upward to operate the driving device 750, so that the support column member 720 can be moved and the tilting operation unit 600 is moved in the left-right direction. Can be slid to.

As shown in FIG. 56, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the retracted position in the inverted state, the shaft support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 is arranged vertically below the center of gravity G of the tilting operation unit 600.

Here, since the direction of slide movement of the tilting operation unit 600 is along the front rail portion 715, the tilting operation unit 600 is moved while being slid by a predetermined amount from the retracted position (see the imaginary line in FIG. 56) in FIG. 56. Always has a vertical component.

Therefore, if the center of gravity G of the tilting operation unit 600 and the shaft support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 are displaced in the vertical direction, a load may be applied from the connecting member 740 in the direction of rotating the tilting operation unit 600. This also applies when the tilting operation unit 600 is slid and moved in the opposite direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the shaft support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 is arranged vertically below the center of gravity G, the vertical component of the force applied from the connecting member 740 to the tilting operation unit 600 and the center of gravity G are aligned. It is formed on the same line. As a result, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting member 740 in the direction of rotating the tilting operation unit 600, and it is possible to stabilize the posture of the tilting operation unit 600.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the influence of the tilting motion (swinging motion) of the tilting motion unit 600 on the sliding motion of the sliding motion unit 700 will be described. FIG. 57 is a front view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700. Note that FIG. 57 shows a state in which the effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is swung to the state shown in FIG. 54 (b).

As shown in FIG. 57, in a state where the effect member 620 is swung counterclockwise in the front view, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is arranged on the left side in the front view with respect to the connecting member 740. Therefore, the acceleration applied to the connecting member 740 toward the left in the front view is increased.

In this case, since the driving force required to slide the tilting operation unit 600 from the retracted position can be suppressed, the drive motor 751 of the drive device 750 can be miniaturized.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the tilting operation unit 2600 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59.

In the first embodiment, the case where the contact surface of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 is a flat surface has been described, but the tilting operation unit 2600 in the second embodiment is the main body portion of the transmission member 2640. The 2641 includes an abutting portion 2641a that comes into contact with the tip end portion of the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

58 (a), 58 (b) and 59 are front views of the transmission member 2640 and the torsion spring 650 in the second embodiment. In FIGS. 58 (a), 58 (b) and 59, the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines. Further, FIG. 58 (a) shows an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 2640 is arranged vertically above the tubular portion 642, and FIG. 58 (b) shows the inverted state of FIG. 58 (a). The transmission member 2640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined amount when viewed from the front, and the lower surface of the abutting portion 2641a is in contact with the tip end portion of the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. A state in which the transmission member 2640 is further swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front is shown from the state shown in FIG. 58 (b).

As shown in FIG. 58, when the transmission member 2640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 58 (a)), the main body portion 2641 is pressed against the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650, and the main body portion 2641 is pressed. The torsion spring 650 generates an urging force that swings in the direction of returning to the inverted state. When the transmission member 2640 is swung and the urging arm portion 652 is deformed, the coil portion 651 is deformed in diameter by the connecting arm portion 653 connected to the urging arm portion 652 on the deformed side. That is, as the diameter of the coil portion 651 is reduced, the urging force that swings the transmission member 2640 in the direction of returning to the inverted state is increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58, due to the difference in the swing angle between the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the transmission member 2640, the contact position between the main body portion 2641 of the transmission member 2640 and the urging arm portion 652 ( The tip position of the urging arm portion 652) is changed by the swing of the transmission member 2640. That is, the more the transmission member 2640 is swung, the more the tip of the urging arm 652 is moved to the tip side of the main body 2641 (the side closer to the sliding hole 643).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), when the lower surface of the abutting portion 2641a is in contact with the tip end portion of the urging arm portion 642, the transmission member 2640 is further rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The urging arm portion 642 is restricted from moving toward the tip end side of the main body portion 2641 by the abutting portion 2641a.

As shown in FIG. 59, when the transmission member 2640 is swung in a state where the transfer arm portion 642 is restricted from moving by the contact portion 2641a, the torsion spring 650 is deformed as a whole. That is, the root side (bending portion 653a side) of the urging arm portion 642 is moved downward by the amount that the urging arm portion 642 is restricted from moving toward the tip end side of the main body portion 2641. As a result, the connecting arm portion 653 is moved in the direction of reducing the diameter of the coil portion 651 (the direction in which the urging force of the torsion spring 650 increases).

That is, it is possible to increase the urging force of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 2640 is swung to the state shown in FIG. 59 as compared with the case where the contact portion 2641a is not provided. As a result, the degree of change in the urging force generated by the torsion spring 650 (the rate of increase in the urging force with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 2640) is increased in the state shown in FIG. 59 as compared with the state shown in FIG. 58. Can be done. Therefore, when the swing angle of the transmission member 2640 is small, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 is suppressed and the starting speed of the transmission member 2640 is increased, while when the swing angle is large (see FIG. 59). The urging force of the torsion spring 650 can be increased non-linearly (more than the elastic change), and sufficient urging force can be obtained to return the transmission member 2640 to the inverted state.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the tilting operation unit 3600 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60.

In the first embodiment, the case where the contact surface of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 has a constant width has been described, but the tilting operation unit 3600 in the third embodiment is the main body portion of the transmission member 3640. The side surface of the 3641 that comes into contact with the tip end portion of the torsion spring 650 is provided with an inclined side surface 3641a that is inclined so as to become wider toward the tip end side. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

60 (a) and 60 (b) are front views of the transmission member 3640 and the torsion spring 650 in the third embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 60A and FIG. 60B, the outer shape of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines. Further, FIG. 60 (a) shows an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 3640 is arranged vertically above the tubular portion 642, and FIG. 60 (b) shows an inverted state of FIG. 60 (a). The state in which the transmission member 3640 is swung by a predetermined amount counterclockwise when viewed from the front is shown.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the transmission member 3640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 60A), the main body portion 3461 is pressed against the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650, and the main body portion 3641 is pressed. The torsion spring 650 generates an urging force that swings in the direction of returning to the inverted state.

When the transmission member 3640 is swung from the state shown in FIG. 60 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 60 (b), the difference in swing angle between the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the transmission member 3640 The contact position between the main body portion 3641 of the transmission member 3640 and the urging arm portion 652 (the tip position of the urging arm portion 652) is changed by the swing of the transmission member 3640. That is, as the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 from the inverted state (see FIG. 60 (a)) becomes larger, the tip of the urging arm 652 becomes the tip side of the main body 3641 (the side closer to the sliding hole 643). ) Is moved to.

Therefore, the tip of the urging arm portion 652 slides along the inclined side surface 3641a of the main body portion 3461. That is, when the transmission member 3640 is swung, the torsion spring 650 is deformed due to the width of the transmission member 3640 being expanded by the inclined side surface 3641a in addition to the deformation caused by the swing angle of the transmission member 3640. .. In this case, the width of the transmission member 3640 is further expanded toward the tip of the transmission member 3640. Therefore, the larger the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 from the inverted state (see FIG. 60A), the more the inclined side surface 3641a As a result, the width of the transmission member 3640 is increased, so that the torsion spring 650 is greatly deformed. Therefore, as the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 increases, the rate of increase in the urging force generated by the torsion spring 650 (change in the urging force of the torsion spring 650 with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 3640) can be increased.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the tilting operation unit 4600 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64.

In the first embodiment, the case where the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 is fixed has been described, but in the tilting operation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, the transmission member 4640 is in contact with the contact portion 644 in addition to the contact portion 644. A moving contact member 4647 having a width shorter than that of the portion 644 is provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 61 (a) is a rear perspective view of the transmission member 4640 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 61 (b) is a rear perspective view of the moving contact member 4647. In FIG. 61A, the moving contact member 4647 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the front arc plate portion 4645 of the transmission member 4640 has guide holes 4645a that are symmetrically arranged symmetrically at intervals shorter than the arrangement interval of the contact portions 644 and are bored in the front-rear direction. Be prepared. The guide hole 4645a is a through hole that guides the pair of back surface protrusions 4647b of the moving contact member 4647 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the moving contact member 4647 has a main body portion 4647a formed in a long plate shape and a pair of back projections projecting from both ends of the main body portion 4647a to the back surface side. Mainly includes a portion 4647b and a front protrusion portion 4647c projecting from the substantially center of the main body portion 4647 to the front side in a hemispherical tip.

One end of the coil spring 4648 is fixed to the opposite side of the front protrusion 4647c of the main body 4647a, and the other end of the coil spring 4648 is fixed to the main body 641b (FIG. 62 (c) and FIG. (See FIG. 62 (d)). Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the coil spring 4648 is not shown in FIGS. 61 (a), 61 (b), 62 (a) and 62 (b).

The back protrusion 4647b is a portion to be inserted into the guide hole 4645a of the transmission member 4640 from the front side, and has a sufficient length (contacts with the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650) from the front arc plate portion 4645 at the time of insertion. It is formed in such a way that a possible length) is projected. The back surface protrusion 4647b is formed so as to be inclined at an angle of contact (see FIG. 64 (b)) with the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 on a surface (line). As a result, the load applied to the urging arm 652 is reduced (stress concentration is suppressed) as compared with the case where the urging arm 652 and the back projection 4647b are in contact with each other at a point, and the urging arm 652 Durability can be improved.

The front protrusion 4647c is a portion that comes into contact with the main body member 4621 (see FIG. 63) of the effect member 4620, and the moving contact member 4647 has a relationship with the escape opening 4621a formed in the main body member 4621. It may be separated from the front arc plate portion 4645 (see FIG. 62 (c)), or the moving contact member 4647 may be brought close to the front arc plate portion 4645 (see FIG. 62 (d)). Since the tip of the front protrusion 4647c is formed in a hemispherical shape, it is possible to easily mount the front protrusion 4647c on the surface of the main body member 4621 from the escape opening 4621a.

62 (a) and 62 (b) are rear perspective views of the transmission member 4640, and FIGS. 62 (c) and 62 (d) are top views of the transmission member 4640. In addition, in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (c), the state in which the moving contact member 4647 is separated from the front arc plate portion 4645 is shown in FIGS. 62 (b) and 62 (d). The state in which the 4647 is brought close to the front arc plate portion 4645 is shown in each figure.

FIG. 63 is a front schematic view schematically showing the main body member 4621 of the effect member 4620. The transmission member 4640 that forms an inverted state with respect to the main body member 4621 is the central state 4640C, and the state in which the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise in the front view is the counterclockwise swing state 4640L. The state of being swung clockwise in the front view is shown as a clockwise swing state 4640R by imaginary lines. Further, in the central state 4640C, the counterclockwise swing state 4640L, and the clock swing state 4640R, the abutting portion 644, the front arc plate portion 4645, and the rear arc plate portion 646 are omitted for easy understanding. ..

The main body member 4621 includes an escape opening 4621a bored in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 63, the relief opening 4621a is a region (central state 4640C and counterclockwise swing) in which the front protrusion 4647c (see FIG. 62) moves when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise in the front view. It is formed in a moving state (between 4640L).

When the front protrusion 4647c of the transmission member 4640 overlaps the relief opening 4621a in front view, the front protrusion 4647c is inserted through the relief opening 4621a, and the moving contact member 4647 is moved by the elastic force of the coil spring 4648 to the transmission member 4640. It is separated from the main body portion 641 of the above (see FIG. 62 (c)). On the other hand, when the front protrusion 4647c does not overlap with the escape opening 4621a (overlaps with the main body member 4621), the front protrusion 4647c is brought into contact with the back side surface of the main body member 4621 of the effect member 4620, and the moving contact member The 4647 is brought close to the main body 641 of the transmission member 4640 (see FIG. 62 (d)).

That is, the back projection 4647b of the moving contact member 4647 projects to a position where it can contact the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise from the front view. Is done. Therefore, when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise from the front view, the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 is generated as compared with the case where the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front view. The rate of increase of the urging force (the degree of increase of the urging force with respect to the swing angle) can be increased.

64 (a) and 64 (b) are front views of the transmission member 4640 and the torsion spring 650. In addition, in FIGS. 64A and 64B, the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 4620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the main body portion 4647a of the moving contact member 4647 is shown for easy understanding. Illustration is omitted. Further, FIG. 64 (a) shows an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 4640 is arranged vertically above the tubular portion 642, and FIG. 64 (b) shows the inverted state of FIG. 64 (a). A state in which the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise by a predetermined amount in front view and the urging arm portion 652 on the left side in front view is in contact with the back protrusion 4647b is shown.

As shown in FIG. 64 (b), while the swing angle of the transmission member 4640 is small, it is possible to contact the urging arm portion 652 from the opposite side (contact portion 644 side) of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 4640. By doing so, it is possible to increase the urging force generated by the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is rotated clockwise in the front view.

As a result, while increasing the starting speed when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise in the front view, the urging force when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise in the front view is improved. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect member 4620 from colliding with the inner surface of the back case 210.

That is, when the effect member 4620 is in the inverted state while the tilting operation unit 4600 is arranged in the retracted position, the inner surface of the rear case 210 is brought close to the effect member 620 (see FIG. 5). Here, when the effect member 4620 is vigorously swung from the state of being swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 57) to the inverted state, the effect member 4620 cannot be fully decelerated, and the rear case 210 There is a risk that the effect member 4620 will collide with the inner surface of the.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rear projection portion 4647b is projected at the timing when the effect member 4620 is swung clockwise from the inverted state (see FIG. 62 (d)), and the urging force of the torsion spring 650 is applied. Can be increased. As a result, the effect member 4620 is sufficiently provided when the effect member 4620 is tilted clockwise from the front view while maintaining a high operating speed when the effect member 4620 is tilted counterclockwise from the inverted state. Can be slowed down to.

Further, the direction of pushing back the back protrusion 4647b at the contact point between the back protrusion 4647b and the urging arm 652 arranged on the opposite side of the transmission member 4640 in the swing direction (FIG. 64 (b), counterclockwise when viewed from the front). ) Is urged. As a result, the transmission member 4640 can be pushed back with a larger urging force as compared with the case where the transmission member 4640 is pushed back only by the urging arm portion 652 arranged on the side close to the transmission member 4640 (right side in FIG. 64B). Can be pushed back. On the other hand, it is also possible to improve the urging force generated by the urging arm portion 652 arranged on the side close to the transmission member 4640.

That is, as shown in FIG. 64, the distance from the position where the contact portion 644 arranged on the opposite side of the transmission member 4640 and the urging arm portion 652 are in contact with the lower receiving plate portion 614a. The distance from the lower receiving plate portion 614a to the bent portion 653a is shorter than that of the above. In this case, it is easy to move the bent portion 653a by the force from the contact portion 644 with the lower receiving plate portion 614 as a fulcrum, but the reverse is difficult (the distance from the fulcrum to the point of action is different). Because there is).

Therefore, the urging force generated by the deformation of the urging arm portion 652 on the left side of the front view caused by the contact between the contact portion 644 and the urging arm portion 652 is generated by the deformation of the entire torsion spring 650. That is, when the urging arm portion 652 on the left side of the front view and the back protrusion 4647b are brought into contact with each other, the bent portion 653a on the left side of the front view is left side of the front view (inner diameter of the coil portion 651) with the lower receiving plate portion 641a as a fulcrum. Deformation that is moved in the direction of narrowing) causes deformation of the connecting arm portion 653, the coil portion 651, and the urging arm portion 652 on the right side of the front view. In this case, since the coil portion 651 is deformed so that the inner diameter is reduced, an urging force is generated on the coil portion 651 and the connecting arm portion 653 to the side where the inner diameter of the coil portion 651 is increased, and the right side (transmission member) in front view. The urging arm portion 652 (on the swinging direction side of the 4640) can improve the urging force that pushes back the transmission member 640.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the combined operation unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68.

In the first embodiment, when the rotation arm member 550 is arranged at the overhanging position, the second non-transmission wall portion 553c has a shape along a circle centered on the rotation axis of the rotation crank member 570. However, the rotating arm member 5550 according to the fifth embodiment includes a recessed portion 5556 in which the non-transmission wall portion 5553c is recessed in a direction away from the rotating crank member 570. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

65 to 68 are front views of the combined operation unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 65, the state in which the rotary arm member 5550 is arranged at the overhanging position and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotary crank member 570 is arranged near the left end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is shown in FIG. 66. Then, from the state of FIG. 65, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the sliding protrusion 574 is housed in the first recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c. However, in FIG. 67, the rotation crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the state of FIG. 66 to the position where the sliding protrusion 574 is separated from the recessed portion 5556. From the state, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the sliding protrusion 574 is housed in the recessed portions 5556 on two surfaces from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5535c. To.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c of the composite operation unit 5550 includes a recessed portion 5556 recessed in a direction away from the rotating crank member 570.

The recessed portion 5556 has an arc-shaped (about 1/4 of the circular shape) first wall portion 5556a formed on the left side of the front view and an arc-shaped (about 1/4 of the circular shape) formed on the right side of the front view. The second wall portion 5556b of the above is mainly provided, and the shape is such that the sliding projection portion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 can be slid. That is, the recessing depth of the recessed portion 5556 from the second non-transmission wall portion 55553c is set to be equal to or less than the radius of the sliding protrusion 574, and the connecting portion between the recessed portion 5556 and the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is smooth. It is formed from a curved surface.

When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 65 to the state shown in FIG. 66, a gap is generated between the sliding protrusion 574 and the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c. The rotating arm member 5550 is swung until it comes into contact with the sliding protrusion 574 by the urging force generated by the torsion spring 517a. In this case, as the rotary crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the first recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is rotated while being slid by the sliding protrusion 574. The moving arm member 5550 is swung.

That is, from the state shown in FIG. 65 to the state shown in FIG. 66, the rotating arm member 5550 is merely swung by the urging force of the torsion spring 517a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second driving device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not swung. Therefore, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotary crank member 570 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a, the rotary arm member 5550 and the rotation The crank member 570 forms a non-transmissive state.

When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, the sliding protrusion 574 is the first concave portion from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c. It is pressed against the second wall portion 5556b of the setting portion 5556, and the rotating arm member 5550 is swung (pushed down) again to the overhanging position. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, the rotating arm member 5550 is swung by the second wall portion 5556b being pushed and moved by the sliding protrusion portion 574. The driving force of the second driving device 560 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 5550 via the rotating crank member 570.

Therefore, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotary crank member 570 is arranged to face the second wall portion 5556b, the rotary arm member 5550 and the rotation The crank member 570 forms a transmission state.

When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 67 to the state shown in FIG. 68, a gap is generated between the sliding protrusion 574 and the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c. The rotating arm member 5550 is swung until it comes into contact with the sliding protrusion 574 by the urging force generated by the torsion spring 517a. In this case, as the rotary crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the second recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is rotated while being slid by the sliding protrusion 574. The moving arm member 5550 is swung.

That is, from the state shown in FIG. 67 to the state shown in FIG. 68, the rotating arm member 5550 is merely oscillated by the urging force of the torsion spring 517a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second driving device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not swung. Therefore, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotary crank member 570 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a, the rotary arm member 5550 and the rotation The crank member 570 forms a non-transmissive state.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view and the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a, the rotation is rotated. When a non-transmission state is formed between the dynamic crank member 570 and the rotary arm member 5550 and the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second wall portion 5556b, the rotary crank member 570 and the rotary arm member A transmission state is formed with the 5550.

If the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570 is reversed, the relationship between the first wall portion 5556a and the second wall portion 5556b is reversed. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550 when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a. A transmission state is formed between the two, and when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second wall portion 5556b, a non-transmission state is formed between the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550. To.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, in the present embodiment, the rotating arm member 5550 is in a retracted position (see FIG. 22) and an overhanging position without switching the swing direction of the rotating crank member 570. In addition to the swinging motion of swinging between positions, the rotating arm member 5550 has a small width near the overhang position (the lower end of the front plate member 546 is moved between positions U1 and U2). It is possible to form a swinging motion that is swung.

As a result, the rotating arm member 5550 can generate a swinging motion that is difficult to form by switching the driving direction of the driving device 560. That is, it is possible to cause the rotating arm member 5550 to perform a swinging motion having a small width in the vicinity of the overhanging position by repeatedly switching the driving direction of the driving device 560 at short intervals. However, in this case, the width of the swing operation depends on the switching speed of the drive direction of the drive device 560. Further, even if the drive direction of the drive device 560 is switched while the speed of the swinging motion of the rotary arm member 5550 is high, the inertia of the drive device 560 and the rotary arm member 5550 is large and the drive direction cannot be switched instantly. , There was a risk that the time required to switch the drive direction would be long.

On the other hand, in the swinging operation near the overhanging position of the rotating arm member 5550 in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to switch the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570, so that the time required for switching the driving direction is unnecessary. can do.

Further, the operating speed of the operation in which the rotating arm member 5550 is swung clockwise in the front view (upward swinging motion) depends on the urging force generated by the torsion spring 517a, and the rotating arm member 5550 is in front view. The operating speed of the clockwise swinging motion (downward swinging motion) depends on the rotational speed of the rotary crank member 570. Therefore, by increasing the urging force of the torsion spring 517a and increasing the rotational speed of the rotary crank member 570, it is possible to increase the swing speed of the rotary arm member 5550 in the vicinity of the overhanging position.

As a result, it is possible to achieve both high speed of the swinging operation near the overhanging position of the rotating arm member 5550 and shortening of the switching time of the swinging direction.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the combined operation unit 6500 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating arm member 550 of the composite operation unit 500 is integrally molded has been described, but the rotating arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment is formed by connecting the two members. .. By relatively swinging the two members, the posture of the arcuate hole 554 formed at the other end is changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

69 (a) and 69 (c) are partial front views of the rotating arm member 6550 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 69 (b) shows rotation in the direction of arrow LXIXb of FIG. 69 (a). It is a partial top view of the arm member 6550. Note that FIG. 69 (a) shows a state in which the first posture in which the tip of the tip swing member 6556 is directed upward is formed, and FIG. 69 (b) shows a state in which the tip of the tip swing member 6556 is directed downward. The state in which the second posture to be directed is formed is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 69A, the rotating arm member 6550 is connected to a main body portion 6551 pivotally supported by a third shaft portion 517 (see FIG. 71) and the other end portion of the main body portion 6551. It mainly includes a tip swing member 6556 and a switching device 6590 fixed to the upper surface of the other end of the main body 6551 to switch the posture of the tip swing member 6556. An arcuate hole 6554 is formed in the tip swing member 6556.

The main body portion 6551 is provided with a shaft support hole 6551a which is formed in the other end portion in the front-rear direction and serves as a swing center of the tip swing member 6556.

The tip swing member 6556 is formed so that the end portion on the side connected to the main body portion 6551 sandwiches the main body portion 6551 in the front-rear direction, and the tip swing member 6556 is formed with a shaft support hole 6556a formed as a swing center of the tip swing member 6556. , A shaft support rod 6556b which is a rod material to be inserted into the shaft support hole 6556a and the shaft support hole 6551a of the tip swing member 6556, and an extension extending from the shaft support hole 6556a to the opposite side of the arcuate hole 6554. It mainly includes a sliding shaft 6556c that protrudes in the front-rear direction from the end of the portion and is connected to the guide slot 6591d of the switching device 6590.

The arcuate hole 6554 includes a return portion 6554a projecting from the upper inner surface. The return portion 6554a is a portion that slides on the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect member 6540, and when it is slid from the tip side of the arcuate hole 6554, resistance is suppressed while sliding in the opposite direction. It is a left-right asymmetrical protrusion whose sliding resistance increases when it is moved.

70 (a) and 70 (b) are front perspective views of the switching device 6590. Note that FIG. 70 (a) shows a pushed-up state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed up from the switch member 6592, and FIG. 70 (b) shows a pushed-down state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed down with respect to the switch member 6592. Is illustrated. Further, the pushed-up state corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 69 (c), and the pushed-down state corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 69 (a).

The C-shaped member 6591 has a long plate-shaped main body portion 6591a in which a hole having an inner diameter through which a moving cylindrical portion 6592a can be inserted is formed in the center, and an inner diameter same as the inner diameter of the hole formed in the main body portion 6591a. The tubular guide portion 6591b, which is projected in a cylindrical shape and has a groove processed on the inner peripheral surface, and the main body portion 6591a are arranged so as to face each other in the front-rear direction of the main body portion 6551, extending downward from both ends in the long direction. A pair of arm portions 6591c and a guide elongated hole 6591d which is a long hole formed on the tip end side of the arm portion 6591c and guided by the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip swinging member 6556 are mainly provided.

The grooving formed on the inner peripheral surface of the tubular guide portion 6591b is a grooving for forming a knock mechanism in relation to the moving cylindrical portion 6592a of the switch member 6592. By this groove processing, the C-shaped member 6591 is switched between a pushed-up state and a pushed-down state each time it is pushed in the direction of being pressed against the switch member 6592. It should be noted that the illustration of other members such as the spring member that forms the urging force necessary for forming the knock mechanism is omitted, and in the present embodiment, the tubular guide portion 6591b is the pushing portion 6541a of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 (FIG. 71) is pushed.

The switch member 6592 includes a moving cylindrical portion 6592a in which a protrusion that is inserted through the tubular guide portion 6591a and is movable in a groove on the inner peripheral surface of the tubular guide portion 6591a is projected from the outer peripheral surface, and the moving cylindrical portion 6592a as an axis. It mainly includes a fixing plate portion 6592b that is rotatably connected and fixed to the upper surface of the main body portion 6551 of the rotating arm member 6550.

Here, in the knock mechanism, the cylindrical member and the cylindrical member guided on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member rotate relative to each other, and their relative positions in the axial direction are switched. That is, when the tubular member and the cylindrical member do not rotate relative to each other, it becomes difficult to switch the relative position in the axial direction.

On the other hand, the moving cylindrical portion 6592a of the switch member 6592 is axially rotatably connected to the fixed plate portion 6592b. Therefore, when the C-shaped member 6591 is moved in a direction close to the switch member 6592 (when pushed downward in FIG. 70A), the moving cylindrical portion 6592a can rotate relative to the tubular guide portion 6591b. And the knock mechanism works.

Therefore, it is possible to switch between the push-up state and the push-down state without relatively rotating the fixing plate portion 6592b fixed to the main body portion 6551 of the rotation arm member 6550 and the C-shaped member 6591. Therefore, the state of the switching device 6590 can be switched between the pushed-up state and the pushed-down state while maintaining the state in which the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip swinging member 6556 is inserted into the guide slot 6591d of the C-shaped member 6591. it can.

71 (a) and 71 (b) are front views of the combined operation unit 6500. FIG. 71A illustrates a state in which the rotating arm member 6550 is arranged at the overhanging position and the switching device 6590 is in the pushed-up state, and FIG. K4 shows the rotating arm member 6550 arranged at the overhanging position for switching. The state in which the device 6590 is pushed down is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 71A and 71B, the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is arranged at a position where it is swung to the left end of the swingable range.

As shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b), the front view clock of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is obtained by switching the state of the switching device 6590 in the state where the rotating arm member 6550 is arranged at the overhanging position. The maximum swing angle around can be switched.

That is, when the switching device 6590 forms a pushed-up state (see FIG. 71 (a)), the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect member 6540 is brought into contact with the upper inner surface of the arcuate hole 6554, and the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 The swing angle is limited.

At this position, the inner surface of the arcuate hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a function as stoppers, and even when the swing speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is high, the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is arranged in the arrangement shown in FIG. It can be stopped suddenly (the movement locus RI of the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the return portion 6554a).

On the other hand, when the switching device 6590 forms a depressed state (see FIG. 71B), the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 does not collide with the arcuate hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a (the protrusion 541b of the protrusion 541b). The movement locus RI does not come into contact with the return portion 6554a). Therefore, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is moved along the arc-shaped hole 6554, and the protrusion 541b is discharged outward from the mouth tip portion 554a of the arc-shaped hole 6554.

Therefore, the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is swung clockwise in the front view until the rotating plate 520 is brought into contact with the second stopper portion 518b (see FIG. 71 (b)). At this position, the second stopper portion 518b functions as a stopper, and even when the swing speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is high, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 can be suddenly stopped.

As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of swing angles (two types in the present embodiment) when the telescopic effect device 6540 is swung clockwise in the front view and the telescopic effect device 6540 is suddenly stopped. Variations can be increased. To switch the state of the switching device 6590, the expansion / contraction effect member 6540 is swung counterclockwise in the front view, so that the tubular guide portion 6591b of the switching device 6590 is moved from the upper right portion in the front view of the main body member 6541a to the right. It is generated by being pushed by the pushing portion 6541a extending in the direction. Therefore, as the drive device for swinging the tip swing member 6556, the second drive device 560 for causing the swing of the expansion / contraction effect member 6540 is also used, so that the number of drive devices arranged can be reduced.

Further, in FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b), the swing range of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 can be changed by slightly swinging the tip swing member 6556. In this case, since the swing angle is small, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the change.

Here, assuming that when the rotating arm member 6550 is in a state where the player can see it (see FIG. 71), the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 can be grasped from the change in the state of the rotating arm member 6550. Expectations for the operation of the telescopic effect device 6540 are diminished, and the degree of attention of the telescopic effect device 6540 is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in order to change the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540, the swing angle of the tip swing member 6556 is small, which makes it difficult for the player to notice the change. it can. As a result, the expectation for the operation of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 can be increased, and the degree of attention of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 can be improved.

<7th Embodiment>
Next, the tilting operation unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 72.

In the first embodiment, a case where an elongated hole-shaped sliding hole 643 is formed at the end of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is supported in the sliding hole 643 so as to be guideable has been described. In the tilting operation unit 7600 in the embodiment, a shaft support hole 7634 is formed at the end of the transmission member 7600, and the effect member 620 is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 7634. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

72 (a) and 72 (b) are front views of the tilting operation unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment. 72 (a) shows an inverted state in which the shaft support hole 7634 of the transmission member 7640 is arranged vertically above the tubular portion 642, FIG. 72 (b) shows the inverted state, and FIG. 72 (b) shows the inverted state. A state in which the transmission member 7640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined angle is shown. In addition, in FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the effect member 620 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the transmission member 7640 and the base member 7610 on the back side thereof are visible. At the same time, the torsion spring 650 and the shaft support protrusion 612 are not shown.

As shown in FIG. 72 (a), the base member 7610 includes a sliding hole 7613 bored in the front-rear direction below the second shaft support hole 614 of the main body portion 611. The sliding hole 7613 is a long hole through which the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 is inserted, and the long hole is formed along the vertical direction in the longitudinal direction. The swing shaft portion 626 is supported by the sliding hole 7613 so as to be slidable.

The transmission member 7640 is provided with a shaft support hole 7634 at an end opposite to the end on which the tubular portion 642 of the main body 641 is formed. The shaft support hole 7643 is a portion that swingably supports the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620, and is bored with an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sliding shaft portion 621a.

The swinging operation of the effect member 620 is caused by the transmission member 7640 swinging around the second shaft support hole 614 due to the rotation of the drive motor 631 of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 51).

In the present embodiment, since the sliding shaft portion 621a is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 7634, when the transmission member 7640 swings, the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 follows the swing locus of the transmission member 7640. (The sliding shaft portion 621a does not move in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 641). On the other hand, since the swing shaft portion 626 is inserted through the sliding hole 7613, when the transmission member 7640 swings, the swing shaft portion 626 slides relative to the base member 7610.

Here, the difference between the swing angle of the transmission member 7640 and the swing angle of the effect member 620 will be described. As shown in FIG. 72B, when the transmission member 7640 swings by the transmission swing angle φ71 from the inverted state, the effect member 620 swings by the effect swing angle φ72 (effect swing angle φ72 <transmission swing). Moving angle φ71). Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is oscillated by the minimum unit of the resolution of the drive motor 631, the oscillating angle of the effect member 620 can be made smaller than the oscillating angle of the transmission member 7640. As a result, the accuracy of adjusting the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the transmission member 7640 swings by the transmission swing angle φ71 from the inverted state can be made smaller than that in the case of the first embodiment. explain.

The connecting line J1 shown in FIG. 72B is a line drawn from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the swing shaft portion 626. The virtual connecting line J2 has the same length as the connecting line J1, and when the swing shaft portion 626 is arranged above the sliding hole 7613 from the line drawn in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 641 through the tubular portion 642. (See FIG. 72 (a)) is a line drawn to the center of the swing shaft portion 626. The virtual angle φ73, which is the swing angle of the virtual connecting line J2, is the first embodiment when the first shaft support hole 613 of the first embodiment is formed above the sliding hole 7613. Corresponds to the swing angle of the effect member 620 that swings as the transmission member 640 swings by the transmission swing angle φ71.

As shown in FIG. 72B, the effect swing angle φ72 is made smaller than the virtual angle φ73, and according to the tilting operation unit 7600 of the seventh embodiment, the effect when the transmission member 7640 is swung by a predetermined angle. The swing angle of the member 620 can be made smaller than that of the first embodiment. Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is swung in the minimum unit of resolution of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 51), the swing amount of the effect member 620 can be made smaller than that, and the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be adjusted. The accuracy of can be improved.

<First control example>
Next, control examples in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 134. In the first control example, the control process (process related to the control of the game such as the display effect) executed by the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment will be described. In this control example, the display image used when the power is turned on is controlled so as to be corrected and used at the time of normal production. As a result, a common display image can be used when the power is turned on and when the normal effect is produced, so that the capacity of the character ROM 234 (see FIG. 79) in the display control device 114 can be saved.

In this control example, in the effect in which a specific accessory (expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9)) is movable, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. It is controlled to correct the content of the effect to be performed. As a result, in the effect of moving a specific accessory, for example, when the third symbol display device 81 becomes difficult to see, the display contents displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are displayed on the sub display device 690. By doing so, it is possible to make the game machine easy for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents.

In this control example, an inertial force is used to open the door member 470 attached to the vertical movement unit (falling accessory) 400. Specifically, as will be described later, in the effect of forming the open state of the door member 470 after the door member 470 attached to the vertical movement unit 400 is moved, the opening / closing drive that keeps the door member 470 in the closed state. The motor 466 is controlled so as not to be excited (energization stop control). Then, when the door member 470 attached to the vertical movement unit (falling accessory) 400 is completely moved in the falling direction, the door member 470 is opened by the inertial force generated in the door member 470. In this way, the door member 470 can be opened without driving the opening / closing drive motor 466, so that the power consumption can be reduced.

In this control example, a notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the fluctuation display becomes a big hit is displayed in the fluctuation display. This advance notice effect includes an effect including a display mode (countdown) similar to the specific time effect suggesting the game state described above. Specifically, the countdown notice effect is an effect in which an image (such as a girl's image) indicating the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit is displayed after the countdown characters ("3, 2, 1, ...") Are displayed. include. There is a specific time production (countdown production) that suggests the game state, which is a production that includes the same kind of display mode (countdown), and a countdown notice production that suggests the expectation of a big hit. If it is executed more than once, the player may be confused.

Therefore, in this control example, when the countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) as a notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit, the same type of display is displayed until the variable display in which the countdown notice effect is executed is completed. The specific time effect (countdown effect), which is an effect including the mode (countdown), is restricted (avoided) so as not to be executed. As a result, when the countdown notice effect is executed during the time effect period, the effect is prevented so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) including the same display mode (countdown) as the countdown notice effect is not executed (displayed). Execution (display) can be restricted (avoided). As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is confused because the effects including the same type of display mode (countdown) are duplicated in the time effect period.

In this control example, the ball entry effect displayed based on the entry into the winning opening is sequentially displayed in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display area. As a result, even when the interval at which the game ball enters the winning opening is short, the period for displaying the ball entry effect can be extended, and the game machine makes it easy for the player to visually recognize the ball entry effect. be able to.

Note that this control example is not limited to the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment, and may be executed by any of the pachinko machines 10 of each of the above-described embodiments, or each of the above-described embodiments may be combined. It may be executed by the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10 in the first control example>
First, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 73, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for drawing special symbols, drawing ordinary symbols, setting the display on the first symbol display device 37, setting the display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting the display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 102). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203y of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each of which is composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are set according to the timing of entering the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640. Are stored respectively. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is usually used in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the ball entry port (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 102).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 is generated at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 75A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It can be divided into two types, one for the period during which the symbol is in a high probability state). That is, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 75A) is composed of a first random number table for low probability and a first random number table for high probability, and is included in each table. The number of random numbers that are big hits is different. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The first random number table 202a for the low probability of the special symbol and the first random number table 202a for the high probability of the special symbol are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol. If it is a random number that is out of order, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out of order.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on 37 is the one at the time of a big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random number value "0" is the first random number table 202a for the low probability. (See FIG. 75 (a)). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/400".

Further, in the present embodiment, as a kind of missed special symbol, a missed type (small hit) is provided in which the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened, although it is not a big hit of the special symbol. When this small hit occurs, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 0.2 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls are won), and then the opening / closing operation is closed twice. Repeated. That is, the same opening / closing operation as in the case of a jackpot C (2R probability variation time saving no jackpot) is performed. Two random numbers "10, 11" are defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 75 (a)) as random number values (judgment values) that are small hits when the special symbol has a low probability. Since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 2 while the total number of random numbers is 400, the probability of being a small hit of the first special symbol is "2/400".

Since the small hit is a kind of loss, the game state is not changed before and after the small hit. For example, if a small hit occurs during the probability variation state of a special symbol, the probability variation state of the special symbol continues even after the end of the small hit, and the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol). ), The normal state continues even after the end of the small hit. As described above, this small hit is the same as when the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is the same as the case where the 2R probability variation time is short and no big hit. It is possible to make the player who visually recognizes the movement expect that the 2R probability variation time is short and no big hit. Therefore, every time a small hit is made in the normal state, it can be expected that the game shifts to a probabilistic state of a special symbol that is more advantageous than the normal state, so that the game in the normal state is prevented from becoming monotonous ( Can be suppressed). In addition, even if the special symbol is not a big hit, the player can increase the chances of winning the prize ball by configuring the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a in a part of the loss (small hit). be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the number of balls held by the player is excessively reduced in the normal state or the like, which is excessively disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random number values that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values "0 to 9" are the first random number table 202a for high probability (FIG. 75 (a). ) Is stored in). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/40". Further, as the random number value (determination value) to be a small hit, only "10" is defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 75A). While the total number of random numbers is 400, the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 1, so the probability of small hits is "1/400".

It should be noted that the probability of a small hit when the special symbol has a high probability is lower than that when the special symbol has a low probability because the number of rounds is large and the number of rounds is large when the special symbol has a high probability. It becomes a jackpot with a long opening period of the specific winning opening 65a (16R jackpot in which the opening operation is repeated 16 times until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won), and a large number of prize balls are acquired. This is because the game is played with expectation, so even if it becomes a small hit, it is only annoying. In other words, in the normal state, a small hit may result in a 2R probability change time reduction and no big hit (it may shift to an advantageous probability change state after the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a). However, in the state where the probability change state has already been reached, regardless of whether it is a small hit or a 2R probability change time saving no big hit, a prize ball is hardly obtained and the current state (probability change state) is merely maintained. Is. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit is low in the high probability state of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game in the high probability state of the special symbol.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and is provided in the ROM 202 together with the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 75B). Specifically, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 39", the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) is selected, and when the value is "40 to 79", the jackpot B (16R). (Time saving jackpot) is selected, and when it is "80 to 99", jackpot C (2R probability variation with time saving and no jackpot) is selected.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot types set in the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 75 (b)) are three types of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, but are not limited to four types. The above jackpot types may be selected, or only two or less types, for example, one type of jackpot may be selected. Further, the type and ratio of the jackpot types selected for the jackpot of the special symbol 1 and the jackpot of the special symbol 2 may be set differently.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at a symbol other than the reach symbol. (For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "completely off" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur, two stop (effect) patterns are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the value of the RAM 203 reaches the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first winning opening 64, which is for low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely off".

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 102) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 76) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. There is.

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 76. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the fluctuation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 76 (b)) and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 76 (c)). And at least the deviation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 76D) are set. Although not shown, a variation pattern table or the like in a time-saving game state is set in addition to this.

First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (b). FIG. 76B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (fluctuation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, various normal reach (30 seconds), various super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set respectively. For each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value.

Specifically, for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50", and for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), "51 to 179", various special reach (90 seconds). ), Each of "180 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the MPU 201 hits the fluctuation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. Select from the variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 76 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d2 (normal). The deviation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is deviation. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, as described above, the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", the complete deviation is set, and if the value is in the range of "80 to 99", the deviation reach is set.

Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. For a short deviation (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as a determination value, and for a long deviation (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

In addition, for the off-reach, "0-149" is for various out-of-normal reach (30 seconds), and "150-197" is for various out-of-order super reach (60 seconds). "198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the normal game state, and acquires it from the out-of-order (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2. A fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern selection table 202d2 based on the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 76D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern selection table 202d3 for deviation (probability variation). The deviation (probability variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that is out of alignment when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 differs from the deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 described above in that the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is set.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete deviation is determined. , If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the out-of-reach is determined.

As described above, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching is set lower when it is out of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from becoming long at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels bored because the game is delayed in the probabilistic game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

Further, in this control example, the variation pattern table 202d is provided with a variation pattern selection table (not shown) for shortening the working hours. This time-saving variation pattern selection table is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. The time saving fluctuation pattern selection table is defined so that a fluctuation pattern of 0.6 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. This 0.6-second fluctuation pattern is composed of a 0.125-second period in which the symbols and the like are displayed in a variable manner and a 0.475-second period in which the symbols and the like are stopped and displayed. As a result, in the time-saving game state, one variation display is completed in a short time (0.6 seconds), so that the turnover rate (efficiency) of the game in the time-saving game state can be improved. Further, by setting the period in which the symbol is displayed in a variable manner to a very short period (0.125 seconds), it is possible to give the player the impression that the turnover rate (efficiency) of the game is very good.

Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. , It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second hit random number table (see FIG. 75 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is set. , If it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the second hit random number table (see FIG. 75 (c)), it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and a high probability time (normal symbol) with a higher probability of hitting the normal symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 75 (c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5-28". These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 In, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 In, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the release period of the second winning opening 640 is further. Is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", so that the ball can easily enter the first winning opening 64. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but the opening time And the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92). At the same time, the update is repeated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 102).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 74. As described above, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, a second per random number table 205c, and a variation pattern table 202d. Since the contents of each table provided in the ROM 202 are as described above with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. , Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, time saving medium counter 203h, jackpot flag 203i, counter buffer 203y, and other memory area 203z. doing.

The special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first winning opening 64 (special symbol 1), and has one execution area and four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area). In each of these areas, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, the original special symbol jackpot lottery is performed. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the starting prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) is obtained. It is described that the prediction is to pre-read the lottery result of the special symbol thereafter. In addition, as various information, whether it is right or wrong, the type of stop, the fluctuation pattern, and the like are applicable.

Then, when the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information in the special symbol 1 of the RAM 233 or It is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the corresponding special symbol among the special symbols 2.

In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize when the main controller 110 wins the start. From, various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is predicted. In addition, this prediction (look-ahead) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the gaming state (normal gaming state or probabilistic gaming state) at the time when the fluctuation corresponding to the start winning is started. .. As a result, the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the starting prize can be accurately predicted.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2), and the first winning opening 64 (special symbol 1) is used with respect to the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. ) Is changed to the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2), and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding first area). Among the vacant areas (4 areas), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the winnings stored in the other hold areas are stored. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64 (starting winning). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S504 in FIG. 96). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 93).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 93 and S505 in FIG. 96). ). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual reserved ball in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls in the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d only in that the first winning opening (special symbol 1) is changed to the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2). Since the other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 by the process of S510 in FIG. 96, and is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 93). Further, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the variation display in the special symbol 2) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S206 in FIG. 93 and S511 in FIG. 96). reference).

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a reserved ball number (standby) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67. It is a counter that counts the number of times) up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see S804 in FIG. 99). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 98).

When the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 99). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal symbol entry port (through gate) 67 and the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c. (S803: No in FIG. 99).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). If the value of the probability variation flag 203g is on, the pachinko machine 10 has the special symbol. If the value of the probability variation flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial value of this probability variation flag 203g is set to off, and in the jackpot control process, the start timing of the ending effect based on jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) or jackpot C (2R probability variation time saving no jackpot) (big hit game). When it is determined that it is the end timing), it is set to on (see S1214 in FIG. 103). Then, it is referred to in the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 95) and the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 94) in order to determine whether or not the game state is a probabilistic variation state (S403 of FIG. 95, FIG. (See S303 in 94), it is set to off when the next jackpot game is started (see S1202 in FIG. 103).

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 95, S213) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 94, S208) is executed, the special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (FIG. 95, S213) or the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (FIG. 94, S208), the value of the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if the value is on, the first for high probability. While the special symbol lottery is performed based on the random number table 202a per unit, if the value of the probability variation flag 203g is off, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability. Will be.

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the special symbol. When the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is larger than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the special symbol. If the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol. The time saving medium counter 203h is set to 100 when the jackpot B (16R time saving jackpot) is executed at the start timing of the ending effect (that is, the end timing of the jackpot game) by the jackpot control process (FIG. 103). See S1215). Then, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not the time is shortened in the normal symbol variation processing (see S708 in FIG. 98), and is subtracted by 1 each time the variation time elapses in the special symbol variation processing. (See S222 in FIG. 93). When the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is larger than 0 and the above-mentioned probability change flag 203g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability changing state and the time saving state of the special symbol.

The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203i is turned on, the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state is executed by the jackpot control process (FIG. 103, S1206) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The small hit flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not a small hit has occurred. When the small hit flag 203j is turned on, the small hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened by the big hit control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is executed.

The time saving flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the special symbol (high probability state of the normal symbol). When the value of the time saving flag 203k is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the special symbol, and when the value of the time saving flag 203k is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (normal symbol). It indicates that it is a low probability state). When the initial value of the time saving flag 203k is set to off and it is determined in the jackpot control process that it is the start timing (end timing of the jackpot game) of the ending effect based on the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot). , Is set to on (see S1214 in FIG. 103). Then, in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 98), the game is referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the time saving state (see S708, S715, and S719 in FIG. 98), and the next jackpot game is started. If set to off (see S1202 in FIG. 103).

As described above, in the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), both the probability variation flag 203g and the time saving flag 203k are set to ON, and the time saving game is given together with the probability variation game. On the other hand, in the jackpot C (2R probability variation with time reduction and no jackpot), the probability variation flag 203g is set to on, but the time reduction flag 203k remains off, and only the probability variation game is given. The reason why the time saving flag 203k is provided separately from the time saving medium counter 203h is that the time saving state of the normal symbol given by the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) continues at least until the next jackpot. is there. That is, since the period of the time saving state is variable depending on the timing of the big hit, the time saving period is indefinite, and the number of times cannot be set for the time saving medium counter 203h. Therefore, the fixed number of times (100 times) set after the end of the jackpot B is counted by the time reduction counter 203h, while the time reduction state set after the end of the jackpot A is set by the time reduction flag 203g. It is configured. As a result, it is possible to more accurately determine the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Here, in the probabilistic game (probability change state of the special symbol), the probability of becoming a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is set to a high probability. It is difficult for the player to determine whether the current game is a normal game or a probabilistic game unless it is suggested that the game is a probabilistic game by changing the production mode. .. On the other hand, in the time-saving game, since the opening number and opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 are changed, it is easy to determine whether the game is a normal game or a time-saving game. ..

Therefore, when the player is given a time-saving game together with the probability-changing game based on the jackpot A (16R probability-changing jackpot), the player can easily recognize that it is a probability-changing game, but the jackpot C (2R probability-changing time-saving no If only the probabilistic game is given based on the jackpot), it becomes difficult to recognize that the game is a probabilistic game (so-called latent probabilistic state). As a result, the player needs to infer whether the game state is a normal game or a probabilistic game, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, since the small hit that the same opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a as in the case of the big hit C is executed is provided, the specific winning opening 65a opens / closes for two rounds. Is executed, it is not necessarily a jackpot C. Therefore, every time the opening / closing operation of two rounds is executed, it is possible to expect the jackpot C, so that the interest of the player can be further improved.

The other memory area, 203z, is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the MPU 201. The stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by MPU201 are stored, and the work area (work area) where various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. are stored. Have.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 102) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 101) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 100) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (a). At least the variation pattern selection table 222a and the ball entry effect selection table 222b are stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Since the variation pattern selection table 222a is already known, it will be briefly described. However, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough variation indicated by the variation pattern command is shown. Further detailed fluctuation contents are determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a from the contents (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.)). Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one variation mode is determined from a plurality of types by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

The ball entry effect selection table 222b is a table that defines the effect content of the ball entry effect that is executed based on the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 during the time saving game. Here, the ball entry effect is an effect that is executed in an manner corresponding to the number of fluctuations until the big hit in order to suggest the degree of expectation of the big hit. More specifically, each time a prize information command is received from the main control device 110 during the time saving game, a jackpot is made in the reserved ball from the stored contents of the prize information storage area 223a updated based on the prize information command. Whether or not there is a corresponding reserved ball, and if there is a reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot, the number of fluctuations until the jackpot is determined, and the effect is executed according to the number of fluctuations until the jackpot is reached. Will be done.

Further, the ball entry effect of 1 is executed in one display area of the display area divided into four in the third symbol display device 81, and once the ball entry effect is started, the display content of the previous ball entry effect is displayed. Can be displayed in different display areas while displaying the ball entry effect corresponding to the new ball entry. That is, each time the ball enters the second entry port 640, the entry effect is displayed in order in the four display areas provided on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a maximum of four types are displayed. Is configured to be simultaneously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The ball entry effect selection table 222b is defined in association with the number of fluctuations until the effect content of the ball entry effect becomes a big hit. The ball entry effect selection table 222b is referred to when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 640 during the time-saving game in the ball entry effect setting process (see FIG. 115) described later, and the ball entry effect selection table 222b is referred to. It is used to select the effect content of the effect (see S2403 in FIG. 115).

There are six types of ball entry effects, from level 0 ball entry effect to level 5 ball entry effect (see Fig. 78), and as the number of fluctuations until a big hit decreases, A high-level ball entry effect is selected. As a result, the player can predict the number of times until a big hit (expectation degree of a big hit) by determining the level of the ball entry effect, so that the player's interest can be improved.

The display image of the ball entry effect in this control example includes a comment part for displaying comments according to the level (for example, "hurry", "chance?", Etc.) and a predetermined symbol (for example, "star mark"). It is composed of a level suggestion part for suggesting the level of the current ball entry effect according to the number of balls, and the display mode of each part (comment part and level suggestion part) is set according to the level of the ball entry effect. As a comment to be displayed in the comment section, a plurality of comments corresponding to the level of the ball entry effect are defined, and are selected according to the value of the effect counter 223i. On the other hand, in the level suggestion section, the number of "star" symbols corresponding to the level of the ball entry effect (that is, the number of fluctuations until a big hit) is displayed. For example, in the level 0 notice effect, there are 0 "stars" (see 81a in FIG. 89 (a)), and in the level 1 notice effect, there is one "star" (see 81b in FIG. 89 (b)). Two "stars" are displayed in the level 2 notice effect (see 81c in FIG. 89 (b)). As a result, the player can easily determine the level of the ball entry effect being executed. On the other hand, in the comment section, since the comment selected according to the value of the effect counter 223i is displayed, the variation of the display mode in the ball entry effect can be increased, and the player's interest can be improved. It should be noted that the level suggestion part may not be provided, and only the comment part may be configured to suggest the number of fluctuations up to the jackpot. As a result, the level of the ball entry effect can be estimated only from the display of the comment section, so that the display content of the ball entry effect can be more noticed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 78, the detailed contents of the ball entry effect selection table 222b will be described. FIG. 78 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ball entry effect selection table 222b. As described above, in the ball entry effect selection table 222b, the effect content of the ball entry effect for suggesting the number of fluctuations until the jackpot is defined in association with the number of fluctuations until the jackpot.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations up to the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is greater than 4, that is, the lottery result corresponding to the jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. If not, it is stipulated that the level 0 entry effect is selected. Further, when the number of fluctuations up to the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is four, that is, the lottery result of the jackpot of the second special symbol is stored in the fourth hold of the winning information storage area 223a. In this case, it is stipulated that the level 1 entry effect is selected.

Similarly, if the number of fluctuations to the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is 3 times, the level 2 ball entry effect is performed once, and if it is 2, the level 3 ball entry effect is performed once. In the case of, the level 4 entry effect is selected, and in the case of 0 times (a big hit due to the fluctuation), the level 5 entry effect is selected. In this way, by configuring the player to execute different levels of ball entry effects according to the number of fluctuations up to the jackpot, it is possible to make the player predict the number of fluctuations up to the jackpot. Therefore, since the display effect can be paid more attention to the game, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will continue. FIG. 77B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a display area counter 223f, and an effect. At least a time storage area 223g, an effect mode storage area 233h, an avoidance flag 233i, an effect counter 223j, a power cutoff flag 223y, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (first area to fourth area for special symbol 1, first area to fourth area for special symbol 2). Winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in response to the start prize when the main control device 110 wins the start. Therefore, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is the area number among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area) of the corresponding special symbol among the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. The small areas (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. ), Which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variation effect of the special symbol 1 held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1607 in FIG. 107). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 hold ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

Further, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, has a maximum of 4 reserved balls (waiting times) for the variation effect of the special symbol 2 held in the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts up to times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a special symbol in which the number of reserved balls is added by entering the second winning opening 640 and is different from the display of the reserved ball number symbol of the special symbol 1 on the third symbol display device 81. The difference is only in that it is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol of symbol 2, and the others are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 hold ball of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved sphere symbols corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c synchronizes with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110. , Its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 203b of the main control device 110. It can be changed while making it. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on in the variation pattern reception process executed when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1701 in FIG. 108), and the variation display on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It is turned off when the setting is made (see S1802 in FIG. 109). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1604 in FIG. 107), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1807 in FIG. 109). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variation effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

The display area counter 223f is used to specify a display area for displaying the above-mentioned ball entry effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into four (first area 81a, second area 81b, third area 81c, fourth area 81d) for each display area. It is configured so that different ball entry effects can be displayed. The display area counter 223f determines a display area for displaying the current ball entry effect from among these four display areas (see the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d, FIG. 89 or FIG. 90). Used for. The display area counter 223f is initialized to 1 when the voice lamp control device 113 starts up, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 1 to 4 in the ball entry effect setting process (see FIG. 115) described later.

Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90, but when a new ball entry effect is selected, the new ball entry effect corresponds to the value of the display area counter 223f. It is controlled to be displayed for the display area of. Specifically, when the value of the display area counter 223f is 1, the display of the ball entry effect is set in the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. If the value is 2, it is set in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81, and if the value is 3, it is set in the first area 81c of the third symbol display device 81, and the value is 4. If there is, it is controlled so as to be set in the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. Since the value of the display area counter 223f is configured to be updated by 1 in ascending order, reach the maximum value of 4, and then return to 1 when further updated, a maximum of 4 ball entry effects can be obtained. It is possible to simultaneously display different display areas (first area 81a, second area 81b, third area 81c, fourth area 81d) (see FIGS. 89 and 90). Since a plurality of different ball entry effects can be displayed at the same time, the display effects can be diversified.

The effect time storage area 223 g is an area for storing the start time of the time effect described above. Based on the start time of the time effect stored in the effect time storage area 223 g and the current time acquired from RTC292, the time effect to be executed regularly (5 minutes every hour) and the time effect of the time effect A specific time effect that is executed at a specific time during execution (from the start of each time effect to the elapse of 5 minutes every 1 minute) is executed (see FIG. 91). This effect time storage area 223 g is set by the time setting process (see FIG. 105) of the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. , Information indicating the start time of the time effect and the specific time effect is set relative to the power-on time. Specifically, when the power of the voice lamp control device 113 is turned on at 9:00, first, 9:55, 55 minutes after the power on time (9:00), is the first time effect. It is set as information indicating the start time of. Then, the time every hour (10:55, 11:55, ...) From the start time of the first time effect is set for 24 hours as information indicating the start time of the time effect. In addition, from the start time of each time production to the passage of 5 minutes every minute (9:56, 9:57, 9:58, 9:59, 10:56, 10:57 ... ) Is set as information indicating the start time (start timing) of the specific time effect. Further, since the time production period is 5 minutes, the information indicating the time (10:00, 11:00, etc.) 5 minutes after the start time of the time production is the normal game period (effect mode A). It is set as information indicating the start time (see FIG. 91).

In this control example, each time effect (time effect, specific time effect) is set to be executed based on the time when the power is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each time effect is not limited to this. The start time of (time effect, specific time effect) may be set. For example, every hour may be set as the start time of the time effect. As a result, when the power of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is turned on, even if the power-on time is deviated, the start time of the time effect is not deviated, and the time effect is synchronously executed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10. can do.

The effect mode storage area 223h is an area in which information indicating the current effect period is stored, and based on the information in the effect mode storage area 223h, an effect corresponding to the effect period is selected and executed (displayed). .. In this control example, in addition to the time production period described above, when it is determined that a big hit will be made after the end of the time production period (the pending winning information is a big hit or a variable display that becomes a big hit). Is being executed), and three effect periods are set: a time effect extension period and a normal game period that does not correspond to either the time effect period or the time effect extension period. For the sake of simplification of the following description, the normal game period will be referred to as the effect mode A, the time effect period will be referred to as the effect mode B, and the time effect extension period will be referred to as the effect mode C. In the effect mode storage area 223h, when the effect mode A is set as information for identifying these three effect modes, the value “00H” indicating the effect mode A is the effect mode storage area 223h. When the effect mode B is set, the value "01H" indicating the effect mode B is stored, and when the effect mode C is set, the value indicating the effect mode C is used. A certain "02H" is stored. By storing the information corresponding to the effect period (effect mode) in the effect mode storage area 223h in this way, it is possible to easily identify which effect period the current effect period is.

The avoidance flag 223i determines whether or not the countdown notice effect including the countdown display mode is executed (displayed) as the advance notice effect (time notice effect) executed (displayed) in the time effect period (effect mode B). It is a flag used to do so. When the avoidance flag 223i is on, it indicates that the countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) as the time notice effect, and when it is off, it indicates that the countdown notice effect is not executed (displayed). When the avoidance flag 223i is on, it is restricted (avoided) so that the specific time effect (countdown effect), which is an effect including the same type of display mode (countdown), is not executed (displayed). As a result, when the countdown advance notice effect is executed as the time advance notice effect, the execution (display) of the effect can be restricted (avoided) so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not executed (displayed). As a result, it is possible to prevent duplicate productions including the same type of display mode (countdown) during the time production period, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is confused.

This avoidance flag 223i is turned on when the countdown notice effect is selected as the advance notice effect (time notice effect) selected in the effect mode B (time effect period) in the advance notice selection process (see FIG. 111). It is set (see S2007 in FIG. 111). Then, it is set to off when the variable display in which the countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) ends.

It should be noted that, without providing such an avoidance flag 223i, it is possible to select and execute an effect having a different display mode between the normal advance notice effect and the time advance notice effect. Specifically, the countdown notice effect is selected in the normal notice effect, but the countdown notice effect may not be selected in the time notice effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent duplicate productions including the same type of display mode (countdown) during the time production period.

The effect counter 223j is a counter used in the voice lamp control device 113 for selection of various effects (variation pattern, notice effect, etc.), various lottery, etc. Although not shown, the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 ( (See FIG. 106), the update is repeated in the range of 0 to 198.

The power cutoff flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not there has been a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y receives the power-off command from the main control unit 110 and is set to on before the power-off process is executed (see S1518 in FIG. 106). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (FIG. 104), when the power cutoff flag 223y is on (see 1308: Yes in FIG. 104), a certain period of time has passed since the power cutoff flag 223y was set to on. This is the case where the voice lamp control device 113 is started up before the elapse of (100 milliseconds), that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not disappeared, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete due to the disappearance of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there are cases, the information on the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1309 in FIG. 104). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 107) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation for.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S2502 in FIG. 116) executed after the boot process (see S2501 in FIG. 116) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a is provided with a correction information table 234a3 (see FIG. 79). The correction information table 234a3 contains data (hereinafter, correction) for correcting an image (hereinafter, referred to as a power-on image) displayed on the display device (third symbol display device 81, sub-display device 690) when the power is turned on. Information) is stored (see FIG. 80 (b)). In this control example, the capacity of the character ROM 234 is reduced by diverting and displaying the image when the power is turned on in an effect other than when the power is turned on. However, if the image at the time of power-on is diverted and displayed in the same display mode (position, size) in each effect other than when the power is turned on, the visibility of each effect may be impaired. Therefore, by using the correction information table 234a3 to correct the image at power-on to an appropriate display mode (position, size) in each effect other than when the power is turned on, the power is turned on without impairing the visibility of each effect. The time image is diverted and displayed.

The power-on image is composed of three types of images, and it is possible to correct the display mode (position, size) for each of the various power-on images. Here, three types of images (hereinafter, referred to as various power-on images) constituting the power-on image will be described. The power-on image is an image for notifying the player or the like that initialization processing or the like accompanying the power-on is being performed, and the power-on main image and the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Consists of an image that fluctuates when the power is turned on, which is an image for notifying the lottery result of Has been done. These various power-on images are displayed on each display device (third symbol display device 81, sub-display device 690) in a predetermined display mode (position, size) at the time of power-on. It will be described later with reference to FIG. 82.

The correction information table 234a3 is referred to in the special effect correction process (see FIG. 121) or the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131), and the correction information according to the currently executed (displayed) effect is the correction information storage area 233 m. Stored in. The correction information stored in the correction information storage area 233m is referred to when generating a drawing list (see FIG. 87) in the drawing process (see FIG. 134), and is used to set various power-on image display modes. Detailed information (displayability, display position (coordinates) or size (magnification)) is corrected based on the correction information. As a result, it is possible to correct and display various power-on images (main image at power-on, variable image at power-on, and title image at power-on).

Here, the contents of the correction information table 234a3 will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (b). FIG. 80B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the correction information table 234a3. The correction information table 234a3 stores correction information corresponding to each effect of various power-on images (main image at power-on, variable image at power-on, and title image at power-on), and is a correction for normal effect. At least information, correction information for demo production, correction information for moving the telescopic accessory, and correction information for moving the tilting accessory are provided.

The correction information for each effect includes correction information corresponding to displayability (on or off), correction information corresponding to the coordinate correction amount, and correction information corresponding to the enlargement ratio for each image type of the image when the power is turned on. Is stipulated. The correction information corresponding to displayability (on or off) is a value for determining whether or not to display the corresponding image, and when the value is on, the corresponding image is set to be displayed. It is (corrected) and set (corrected) so that the corresponding image is hidden when the value is off. Further, the correction information corresponding to the coordinate correction amount is for correcting the display position (coordinates) of the corresponding image, and the position (coordinates) displayed when the corresponding image is turned on is changed to this coordinate correction amount. It is set (corrected) to be displayed at the moved position (coordinates) based on the corresponding correction information. Further, the correction information corresponding to the enlargement ratio is for correcting the size (enlargement ratio) of the corresponding image, and this enlargement is performed in the lower right direction with the upper left corner of the corresponding image as the origin (reference point). The image is set (corrected) to be enlarged (or reduced to the upper left) based on the rate.

The correction information for the normal effect is the correction information used when the initialization process at the time of turning on the power is completed and the normal game is performed in the pachinko machine 10. Further, the correction information for the demo effect is the correction information used when the demo effect is executed (displayed). Further, the correction information for moving the telescopic accessory is the correction information used when the movable effect (expandable accessory scenario) of the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is executed (displayed). Further, the correction information for moving the tilting accessory is correction information used when the movable effect (tilting accessory scenario) of the effect member 620 in the tilting operation unit 600 is executed (displayed).

Specifically, as the correction information for normal production, the main image at power-on and the title image at power-on are set to off, and the variable image at power-on is set to on. The coordinate correction amount of the fluctuating image when the power is turned on is set to (-600, -450), and the enlargement ratio is set to x1 (equal magnification). As a result, when the normal effect is executed, the main image at power-on and the title image at power-on are corrected so as to be hidden, and the variable image at power-on is the position (coordinates) displayed at power-on. ) To (-600, -450), the position (coordinates) is corrected so that it is displayed at the same size. Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, due to this correction, a normal effect is executed on the power-on variation image displayed at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. If so, it is displayed in the upper left corner of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 83 (a)).

Further, as the correction information for the demonstration effect, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are set to off, and the title image at power-on is set to on. The correction amount of the coordinates of the title image when the power is turned on is set to (-700,0), and the enlargement ratio is set to x2 (2 times). As a result, when the demo effect is executed, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are corrected so as to be hidden, and the title image at power-on is the position (coordinates) displayed at power-on. ) To (-700,0), the position (coordinates) is corrected so that it is displayed twice as large. Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, when the power-on title image displayed in the center of the sub-display device 690 at the time of power-on is demo-produced by this correction. Is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 83 (b)).

Here, the demo effect is a case where the next variable effect accompanying the entry into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect is stopped. , This is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

Further, as for the correction information for moving the telescopic accessory, the main image at power-on and the title image at power-on are set to off, and the variable image at power-on is set to on. The coordinate correction amount of the fluctuating image when the power is turned on is set to (200, -450), and the enlargement ratio is set to × 1 (equal magnification). As a result, when the effect (expandable accessory scenario) in which the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is movable is executed, the main image at power-on and the title image at power-on are corrected so as to be hidden. Then, the fluctuating image at power-on is corrected so that it is displayed at the same size at the position (coordinates) moved (200, -450) from the position (coordinates) displayed at power-on. Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, due to this correction, the power-on variation image displayed in the upper left corner of the third symbol display device 81 when the normal effect is executed is displayed. When the telescopic accessory scenario is executed, it is displayed in the upper left corner of the sub-display device 690.

Further, the correction information for moving the tilting accessory is set to the same information as the correction information for normal production. As a result, when the effect of moving the effect member 620 of the tilt operation unit 600 (tilting accessory scenario) is executed, the display mode (position) of various power-on images is the same as when the normal effect is executed. , Size) is corrected.

In this way, when an effect other than when the power is turned on is executed, the display mode (position, size) of various images when the power is turned on is corrected based on the correction information of the correction information table 234a3 according to the effect. Is displayed. As a result, various power-on images can be diverted and displayed in each effect other than when the power is turned on, so that the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved. In addition, since the images at the time of turning on various powers can be corrected and displayed in appropriate display modes (position, size) in each effect, the images at the time of turning on various powers can be diverted without impairing the visibility of each effect. Can be displayed.

In addition, it may be corrected so that the position where the image is displayed is moved when various powers are turned on in conjunction with the movement of the accessory that is moved in each effect. Specifically, correction information of various power-on images corresponding to the elapsed time in one effect is defined. For example, when the effect of displaying the variable image when the power is turned on is displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81, the effect of gradually sliding (moving) the tilting operation unit 600 from right to left is executed. Suppose. In this case, by sliding the fluctuating image when the power is turned on to the left according to the operation of the tilting operation unit 600, the fluctuating image when the power is turned on is slid and displayed at a position not to be the back surface of the tilting operation unit 600. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the fluctuation image when the power is turned on from becoming difficult to see due to the operation of the tilting operation unit 600. That is, the player can clearly see the fluctuating image when the power is turned on. Further, when the fluctuation image when the power is turned on is moved and displayed to the area where the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, the image is moved to the sub display device 690 built in the tilting operation unit 600. The coordinates may be set so as to be displayed. With such a configuration, the variable image when the power is turned on can be moved and displayed without impairing the visibility of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The target to be moved and displayed is not limited to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, and may be a third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a reserved symbol, or a symbol such as a character. There may be.

Further, when moving the images when various powers are turned on, the images may be moved back and forth between the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. In this case, when the image is displayed across the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, the resolutions of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 are different, so that the difference in resolution is known. It may be adjusted (converted) using a scaler (for example, a video scaler) of. As a result, the range in which the images can be moved when various powers are turned on can be expanded.

Further, correction information may be set so that various power-on images can be moved when the power is turned on. In this case, the correction information used at the time of power-on may be read together with the program in the first program storage area that is first read at the time of power-on. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the origin return operation for moving various accessories to the origin position is executed when the power is turned on. Therefore, since various accessories are moved by the origin return operation, there is a timing at which the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 are difficult to see. Therefore, by correcting the display position (coordinates) of the images when the power is turned on according to the movable state of the various characters, it is easy to visually recognize the images when the power is turned on even during the origin return operation of the various characters. Can be.

Next, the image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 87) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and draws one frame of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 118 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, a third symbol area 235d, and a title image area 235f when the power is turned on are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the character ROM 234 outputs the main image at power-on, the variable image at power-on, and the image data corresponding to the title image area 235f at power-on from the main image area at power-on. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer to 235a (see FIG. 116).

Here, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, a display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, and a power-on image displayed in the display area will be described. First, FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship between the image drawn by the display control device 114 and the display areas of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. The pachinko machine 10 in this control example includes a third symbol display device 81 and a sub display device 690, and the image displayed on each display device (third symbol display device 81 and sub display device 690) is constant. Control for updating every period (for example, 20 milliseconds) is executed by the display control device 114.

Specifically, the display control device 114 updates (draws) image data for 1200 pixels (pixels) horizontally × 600 pixels (pixels) vertically at regular intervals (for example, 20 milliseconds). By setting these image data in each display device, the image displayed on each display device (third symbol display device 81 and sub-display device 690) is updated at regular intervals. The image data corresponding to each pixel is composed of three data, that is, data corresponding to R (red), data corresponding to G (green), and data corresponding to B (blue), respectively. There is. The data of each color is composed of, for example, 8 bits, and the gradation (level) of each color can be set in 8-bit increments (that is, 256 steps). That is, as a setting value for each color, any one of 256 levels from "00H" to "FFH" can be set.

Each pixel provided in each display device is provided with an area capable of developing red color, a region capable of developing green color, and an area capable of developing blue color, and image data is set. By doing so, the gradation (level) of each color can be set. In addition, each pixel (pixel) constituting each display device is sufficiently fine, and a region capable of developing red color, a region capable of developing green color, and a region capable of developing blue color, which constitute one pixel (pixel) It is difficult to distinguish the area from the naked eye. Therefore, with the naked eye, the appearance of the combined color of these three colors is obtained.

The image data set for each pixel will be described with reference to specific examples. For example, if the R data is FFH (255 gradations) and the data of other colors are 00H (0 gradations), the pixel in which the image data is set is red with the maximum gradation (maximum level). Is displayed (the pixel has the maximum gradation of red appearance). If the R data and the G data are 80H (128 gradations) and the B data is 00H (0 gradations), the red color is 128/255 gradations and the green color is 128/255 gradations. As a result of synthesizing, the pixels in which the image data is set are displayed with the appearance of yellow with the maximum gradation. Further, if the R data, the G data, and the B data are all FFH (255 gradations), all three colors of R, G, and B are set to the maximum gradation (255/255 gradations). As a result of synthesizing these three colors, the pixel in which the data is set is displayed with a white appearance. On the other hand, if the data of all three colors is 00H, all three colors are not displayed, and as a result, the pixels in which the data are set are displayed with a black appearance.

In this way, the display color of each pixel that constitutes the display screen of each display device can be expressed in 256 stages for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), so that each display can be expressed. A vivid image can be displayed on the device. In this control example, a region capable of developing red color, a region capable of developing green color, and a region capable of developing blue color are provided in each pixel, but the colors required for displaying an image are comprehensively provided. It may be changed within the range that can be expressed. For example, instead of the three colors of red, green, and blue, the three colors of yellow, cyan, and magenta may be used. Further, in addition to red, green, and blue, a region capable of developing yellow may be provided in each pixel, and 8-bit data corresponding to yellow may be added to the image data. By adding a region capable of developing yellow, the color expression can be made more vivid. In particular, since a color containing a large amount of yellow component and frequently used in display effects (for example, gold) can be vividly expressed, the interest of display effects can be further improved.

As shown in FIG. 81, coordinate data is associated with the display data of each pixel (pixel) constituting the image data. Here, the coordinate data is data for specifying a set position (set pixel) of data in each display device. In the present embodiment, the range of 0 to 1200 can be specified as the horizontal coordinates, and the range of 0 to 600 can be specified as the vertical coordinates.

In the horizontally long rectangular area shown in FIG. 81, the coordinates of the position of the upper left corner are defined as the origin coordinates (0,0), and the coordinates of the position of the lower right corner are defined as (1200,600). Further, the image data defined in the rectangular area having the four points of the coordinates (0,0), (800,0), (0,600), and (800,600) as the vertices is displayed in the third symbol. This is an area (area for a third symbol display device) that defines an image to be displayed on the device 81. Each coordinate is set so that the arrangement of each pixel data in this region coincides with the position where the image data is actually set in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, the image data defined in the rectangular region having the four points (800, 0), (1200, 0), (800, 300), and (1200, 300) as vertices is transmitted to the sub display device 690. This is an area (area for a sub-display device) that defines an image to be displayed. Further, the rectangular-shaped area having the remaining four points (800, 300), (1200, 300), (800, 600), and (1200, 600) as vertices is a spare area (unused area). The image data in this area is not used for display.

In this way, the display control device 114 in this control example draws the image data to be set in the third symbol display device 81 and the image data to be set in the sub display device 690 as one image data. Whether to display on the third symbol display device 81 or on the sub display device 690 is changed according to the coordinates of the image data. This makes it easy to synchronize the images (effects) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, and the images (effects) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. ) Can be suppressed. Not limited to this, the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 may be configured to be drawn separately.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 by the display control device 114 when the power is turned on will be described. Here, the main image at power-on is defined as image data for horizontal 450 pixels (pixels) × vertical 200 pixels (pixels), and the variable image at power-on is for horizontal 100 pixels (pixels) × vertical 100 pixels (pixels). The title image at power-on is defined as image data of 200 pixels (pixels) in width × 50 pixels (pixels) in height. In order to simplify the explanation of the display position (coordinates) of the various power-on images, when indicating the display position (coordinates) of the various power-on images, the upper left corner of the image data of the various power-on images is used. It is assumed that the coordinates of a pixel (pixel) are typically pointed to (indicated). For example, the main image at power-on in FIG. 82 (a) is within a rectangular region having four points (100, 50), (550, 50), (100, 250), and (550, 250) as vertices. It is the image data displayed in. In this case, the coordinates (100, 50) of the pixels in the upper left corner of the image data of the main image at power-on are typically pointed (shown) as the display position (coordinates) of the main image at power-on. The display position (coordinates) of the main image when the power is turned on is expressed as (100, 50).

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 first transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on title image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on title image area 235f. Next, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b, and then stored in the resident video RAM 235. The remaining image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the display control device 114 first displays the title image at power-on by using the image data stored in the title image area 235 g at power-on. The display position (coordinates) of the title image at power-on is (900, 100), and the title image at power-on is displayed at the center of the sub-display device 690 (see FIG. 82 (a)).

Next, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. The display position (coordinates) of the main image at power-on is (100, 50), and the main image at power-on is displayed at the center of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 82 (a)). While these displays are being performed, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

Here, since the sub-display device 690 has a lower resolution of the display screen than the third symbol display device 81, the image data set to display the image on the sub-display device 690 is the third symbol display device. The amount of data is smaller than the image data for displaying an image on 81. Therefore, in the display control device 114, the image (title image at power-on) to be displayed on the sub-display device 690, which has a small amount of data for displaying the image, is first stored in the resident video RAM. It is possible to shorten the time from when is input until the image is displayed.

After that, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 receives the third symbol display device 81. At the lower right position (coordinates of (600, 450)) when facing the screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the "○" symbol and the power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol. Is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period (see FIGS. 82 (b) and 82 (c)). Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image showing it is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image showing it is stopped. It will be displayed for a certain period later.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images showing "○" and "×" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image at power-on is already resident in the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on, so that at the time of power-on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ..

Further, since the fluctuation image when the power is turned on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the game that was executed before the power failure was executed when the power was once cut off and restored due to a power failure or the like during the execution of the game. Since the fluctuation or the result of the fluctuation in the above can be immediately confirmed by a simple fluctuation effect, the dissatisfaction felt by the player can be reduced.

As an image displayed when the power is turned on, a simple character image or the like may be provided and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, even in a simple variable effect displayed when the power is turned on, the variation of the effect can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the simple character image used here may be a character image used in the sub display device 690 at the time of normal production. As a result, the character image with a small data capacity displayed on the sub display device 690 can be shared and used without newly providing a simple character image, so that the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved and the character ROM 234 can be resident. The image transfer time to the video RAM 235 can be shortened.

Further, the images that have been transferred to the resident video RAM 235 may be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. As a result, even in the simple production performed between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the normal game can be started, the variation of the production can be gradually increased, so that the player's interest can be improved. Can be done.

Further, when transferring an image to the resident video RAM 235, the image compressed so that the resolution is lowered by a known image compression technique is transferred, and then the transferred image is decompressed to the resident video RAM 235. You may. Then, when the compressed image is stored in the resident video RAM, the image may be displayed on the sub-display device 690. As a result, even if the image is compressed to a low resolution, the image can be displayed without discomfort if the sub display device 690 has a low resolution, and the time from when the power is turned on until the image is displayed. Can be shortened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the display screens during the normal effect and the demo effect will be described. FIG. 83 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the normal effect, and FIG. 83 (b) shows the display of the third symbol display device 81 during the demo effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the screen schematically.

At the time of normal production, the display coordinates of the variation image when the power is turned on are (-600, -450) and displayed based on the correction information table 234a3 described later. Since the display coordinates of the power-on variation image at power-on are (600,450), the power-on variation image is displayed at the position (0,0) during normal production (FIG. 83 (a). )reference). This fluctuation image when the power is turned on is used to show the fluctuation result of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) at the time of normal production.

Further, at the time of the demonstration effect, the display coordinates of the title image at the time of power-on are displayed as (−700,0) based on the correction information table 234a3 described later. Since the display position of the title image at power-on when the power is turned on is (900, 100), the title image at power-on is displayed at the position (200, 100) during the demonstration effect (FIG. 83 (b). )reference).

Returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball is entered into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, but the variation is caused in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the production is not started immediately.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a correction information storage area 233m, a special effect correction flag 233n, a background image change flag 233p, and an effect mode flag 233r.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table and display data in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 as a kind of fixed value data, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. Or, if it is any of the jackpot C, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

Further, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory 640a is opened as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball is the second prize. The easier it is to enter the mouth 640, the more prize balls. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, the number of balls held is difficult to decrease, or the number of balls held is not reduced. Therefore, the player is in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease or the number of balls held is reduced. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a boy image and a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table.

When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time production) depending on this back type, the player of the background The back image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. During that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

“Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 85). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 87) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 86). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 86).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 86, in the example of FIG. 86, In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 87) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 86, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is displayed. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 sets it on in the main process (see FIG. 116) (see S2505 in FIG. 116). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S4805 in FIG. 132 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2801 in FIG. 118 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2809 in FIG. 118 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 118B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 118 (b), see S2810). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 119 to 127) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 128 to 130) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4701 in FIG. 132 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 132 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 57), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 for each frame A drawing list (see FIG. 87) described later, which describes the drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 87) described later, which describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 118 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S4305 in FIG. 130) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 87) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 87, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other image contents to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites by overwriting in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 creates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed ( Each time (see S2803 in FIG. 118) is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4307 in FIG. 128). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2502 in FIG. 116) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4913 in FIG. 133). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4914 in FIG. 133). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 134).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 118 (b)) is executed (see S5002 in FIG. 134).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The correction information storage area 233m is an area in which the correction information of the correction information table 234a3 described above is stored, and based on the correction information stored in the correction information storage area 233m, various power-on images (mainly when the power is turned on). The display mode (position, size) of the image, the variable image when the power is turned on, and the title image when the power is turned on) is corrected and displayed. The correction information storage area 233m has initial values for all image types when the power of the voice lamp control device 113 is turned on (display availability is ON, coordinate correction amount is (0,0), enlargement ratio is × 1 times (equal magnification). )) Is set, so that when the power is turned on, various power-on images are displayed at the initial positions (see FIG. 82). Then, the correction information of the correction information table 234a3 is set according to the game state (displayed effect). For example, if the normal effect is being executed, the correction information for the normal effect in the correction information table 234a3 is set (see S4604 in FIG. 131).

The special effect correction flag 233n is the correction information (expandable accessory scenario) corresponding to the movable effect (expandable accessory scenario or tilting accessory scenario) of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9). This is a flag for determining whether or not the correction information for moving or moving the tilting accessory) is set in the correction information storage area 233m. When the special effect correction flag 233n is on, it indicates that the correction information for moving the telescopic accessory or for moving the tilting accessory is set in the correction information storage area 233 m, and when it is off, the telescopic combination Indicates that the correction information for moving an object or moving a tilting accessory is not set in the correction information storage area 233 m. When the special effect flag 233n is on, in the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131), the correction information for the normal effect or the demo effect is not set in the correction information storage area 233 m (FIG. 131). S4602: See No). As a result, the telescopic accessory is movable, which is set in the correction information storage area 233 m, even though the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is in motion. It is possible to prevent the correction information for the use or the movement of the tilting accessory from being rewritten into the correction information for the normal effect or the demo effect by the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131). As a result, although the movable effect of the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is being executed, the display mode (position, size) of various power-on images is displayed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the display mode (position, size) corresponding to the normal effect or the demo effect is obtained, and prevent (suppress) the player from being confused.

This special effect correction flag 233n is set to on when the correction information for the expansion / contraction accessory movement or the tilting accessory movement is set in the correction information storage area 233m in the special effect correction process (see FIG. 121). (See S3205 in FIG. 121). Then, it is set to off when the variation display (effect) is stopped (see S4101 in FIG. 126 (b)). That is, when the movable effect of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is stopped, the special effect correction flag 233n is set to off. By setting the special effect correction flag 233n to off, it becomes possible to set the correction information for the normal effect or the demo effect in the correction information storage area 233 m by the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131) (FIG. 131 S4602: Yes). In this way, the correction information according to the effect can be set in the correction information storage area 233 m, so that the images at the time of turning on various powers are corrected and displayed in the display mode (position, size) suitable for each effect. Can be done.

The rear image change flag 233p is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The rear image change flag 233p is set to on when a rear image change command or an effect mode change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S4001 in FIG. 126 (a)). Then, it is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S4909 in FIG. 133), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S4910 in FIG. 133). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The effect mode flag 233r is a flag set and referred to for determining the current effect mode (effect period), and the rear image is changed based on the effect mode set in the effect mode flag 233r. The effect mode flag 233r is set based on the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4002 in FIG. 126 (a)), and will be described later based on the value of the set effect mode flag 233r. Back image data is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see S4911 in FIG. 133). As a result, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 can be changed according to the effect mode set by the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90, a ball entry effect executed during the time-saving game of this control example will be described. This ball entry effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the variation display during execution (variation) will be a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening 640. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a timing chart when the ball entry effect is executed. In the time-saving game in this control example, the fluctuation display based on the second special symbol is 0.6 seconds (a period of 0.125 seconds in which the symbol or the like is variablely displayed and a period of 0.475 seconds in which the symbol or the like is stopped and displayed). It ends with). In this case, if the expected degree of big hit is displayed in one display area based on the execution of the variable effect, the variable effect is completed in a short time (0.6 seconds) (that is, the display of the expected degree of big hit is displayed. (It finishes in 0.6 seconds), so it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the degree of expectation that will be a big hit.

Therefore, in this control example, the ball entry effect indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed in order from the first region 81a to the fourth region 81d of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, for example, the first While displaying the ball entry effect in the area 81a, the next ball entry effect can be displayed in the second area 81b. As a result, it is possible to prolong the display period of the ball entry effect indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit, and it is possible to provide a game machine in which the player can easily recognize the degree of expectation of a big hit, that is, an easy-to-understand game machine.

In addition, the ball entry effect indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit means that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 640 even when the holding of the second winning opening 640 is the upper limit (4 in this control example). It is displayed based on (so-called ball entry effect is displayed even at the time of overflow). As a result, even if the holding of the second winning opening 640 is the upper limit (4), it is possible to make the player want to continuously put the game ball into the second winning opening 640, and the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the person.

Furthermore, the ball entry effect that indicates the degree of expectation of a big hit is a production that corresponds to the number of remaining fluctuations until the big hit. Specifically, as will be described later, based on the decrease in the number of remaining fluctuations until a big hit, the ball entry effect with a high expectation of a big hit (high level ball entry effect) is controlled. As a result, the level of the ball entry effect (expectation for a big hit) gradually increases, so that the player can gradually foresee the arrival of a big hit, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Specifically, it will be described with reference to FIG. 88. First, when the game state shifts to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 4 during the jackpot game, the fluctuation based on the oldest winning ball among the reserved balls A variation 1 is started. Here, assuming that there is no jackpot winning information in the winning information of each reserved ball, the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot is undecided (greater than 4). In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, the level 0 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, if the first ball is entered into the second winning opening 640 (the lottery result is out of order) during the execution of the variation 1, the level 0 winning effect is the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. The number of reserved balls of the second special symbol changes to 4 (see FIG. 89 (a)).

Next, when the variation 1 ends, the variation 2 based on the reserved balls is started, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 3. If a second ball is entered into the second winning opening 640 (the lottery result is a big hit) during the execution of the change 2, the number of remaining fluctuations until the big hit is four times. In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, the level 1 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, the level 1 ball entry effect is displayed in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol changes to 4.

Then, when the fluctuation 2 ends and the fluctuation 3 based on the reserved ball is started, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 3, and the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot decreases to 3. In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, the level 2 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, if there is a third ball entering the second winning opening 640 (the lottery result is off) during the execution of the variation 3, the level 2 entry effect is displayed in the third area 81c of the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 89 (b)), the reserved symbol of the second special symbol changes to 4. Further, if the fourth winning ball (overflow) is made to the second winning opening 640 during the execution of the variation 3, the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot is three times. In this case, the level 2 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, the level 2 entry effect is displayed in the fourth area 81d of the third display device 81.

Next, when the fluctuation 3 ends and the fluctuation 4 based on the reserved ball is started, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 3, and the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot decreases to 2. In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, the level 3 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). However, if there is no entry into the second winning opening 640 during the execution of the variation 4, the entry effect is not newly displayed, and the variation 4 ends as it is.

When the variation 4 ends, the variation 5 based on the reserved ball is started, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reduced to 2, and the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot is reduced to 1. In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, the level 4 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, if a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the execution of the variation 5, the level 4 entry effect is displayed in the first area 81a of the third display device 81 (see FIG. 90A). ), The number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases to 3.

Then, when the fluctuation 5 ends, the fluctuation 6 based on the reserved balls of the jackpot winning information is started, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reduced to 2, and the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot is 0 (corresponding). Fluctuation decreases to jackpot). In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, the level 5 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, if a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the execution of this variation 6, the level 5 entry effect is displayed in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 90 (b)). (See), the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases to 3. After that, when the fluctuation of the fluctuation 6 is completed, the jackpot game is executed.

As described above, in this control example, the type of the ball entry effect is changed according to the number of remaining fluctuations up to the jackpot, so that the player can hit the jackpot before the fluctuation based on the jackpot is executed. It is possible to recognize in advance that this is the case, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, since the level of the ball entry effect gradually increases based on the decrease in the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot, the player can gradually foresee the arrival of the jackpot, and the player's interest can be enhanced. Can be improved.

Further, in this control example, the turnover rate (efficiency) of the game is improved by shortening the fluctuation time (0.6 seconds) of one fluctuation effect in the time-saving game. However, since the fluctuation time is short, the fluctuation effect executed (displayed) during the fluctuation time is also shortened. As a result, if the game ball is not continuously inserted into the second winning opening 640, the variable effect is not continuously performed (that is, the period during which the variable effect is not executed (displayed) becomes long), and the game is boring. There is a risk of becoming. Therefore, in this control example, the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. As a result, the player can be made to want the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640, and the game ball can be continuously entered into the second winning opening 640. It can be displayed continuously, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In this control example, the ball entry effect is performed according to the number of remaining fluctuations up to the jackpot, but the ball entry effect is not limited to this, and it is difficult for the player to recognize the number of remaining fluctuations up to the jackpot. May be executed, or the above-mentioned ball entry effect may be performed regardless of the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to provide a case where the jackpot is a big hit without predicting the arrival of the jackpot, and it is possible to give the game a surprise and improve the interest of the player.

Further, in this control example, the above-mentioned ball entry effect is configured to be sequentially displayed in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the ball entry effect based on one ball entry will be continuously displayed until four game balls are newly entered in the second winning opening 640, and the game ball will be displayed in the second winning opening 640. Even when the ball entry interval is very short, it is possible to secure a time for displaying the ball entry effect, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player cannot visually recognize (recognize) the ball entry effect. It should be noted that the area where the ball entry effect is not displayed may be discriminated and the area where the ball entry effect is not displayed may be preferentially used for display. As a result, it is possible to secure a longer time for displaying the ball entry effect.

Further, in this control example, the holding of the second winning opening 640 is the upper limit, and even when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 (so-called overflow), the ball entry effect is performed. ing. As a result, even if the hold of the second winning opening 640 is the upper limit, the ball entry effect is displayed based on the entry of the ball, so that the holding of the second winning opening 640 is the upper limit for the player. Even so, it is possible to make the player want to continuously enter the game ball into the second winning opening 640, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. In addition, since the ball entry effect is displayed more than the number of times the time saving game is given, it is possible to make the player feel that a lot of time saving games are given.

In this control example, the ball entry effect is configured to be displayed in order (clockwise) in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, it may be configured to be displayed in the reverse order (counterclockwise), or may be displayed randomly. Further, the display order may be changed when a specific effect or variation is executed or when there is a big hit winning information. As a result, it is possible to change the order of the displayed ball entry effects, prevent the game from becoming monotonous, and prevent the player from getting bored early.

Further, the display order of the ball entry effect displayed in each area (first area 81a to fourth area) of the third symbol display device 81 may be changed according to the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, when the expectation of a big hit is low, the ball entry effect is displayed in order (clockwise) in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d, while when the expectation of a big hit is high. Is displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise). As a result, the player can recognize the degree of expectation in the display order of the ball entry effect displayed in each area (first area 81a to fourth area), and each area (first area 81a to fourth area). Since it is not necessary to look closely at the content of the ball entry effect displayed on the player, the burden on the player can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, each effect period (each effect mode) set in this control example will be described. In this control example, as described above, there are a normal game period (effect mode A), which is a period during which a normal effect is executed (displayed), and an effect period set periodically (5 minutes every hour). At the end of the time production period (production mode B), which is the period during which a special mode of production (time production) according to the elapsed time is executed (displayed), and the time production period (production mode B). After that, a time production extension period (effect mode C) is provided to shift to the case where it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit (when the pending winning information is a jackpot or the variable display that becomes a jackpot is being executed). ..

FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing each effect period (normal game period, time effect period, time effect extension period) in this control example. As described above, in this control example, information indicating the start times of the normal game period (effect mode A) and the time effect period (effect mode B) is set in the effect time storage area 223 g. The effect time storage area 223 g is RTC292 (timekeeping means) by the time setting process (see FIG. 105) in the start-up process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. ), The information indicating the start time of the normal game period (effect mode A) and the time effect period (effect mode B) is set based on the time information (information indicating the power-on time). .. Each effect period is set based on the information indicating the start time of the effect time storage area 223 g.

Specifically, in the effect time storage area 223 g, information indicating the time 55 minutes after the power-on time is set as information indicating the start time of the first time effect. As a result, the time effect period (effect mode B) is set 55 minutes after the power-on time. The normal game period (effect mode A) is set for 55 minutes after the power is turned on. Since the time effect period is 5 minutes, the information indicating the time 5 minutes after the start time of the time effect is set as the information indicating the start time of the normal game period (effect mode A). As a result, when 5 minutes have passed from the start time of the time effect, the normal game period (effect mode A) is set. In this way, information indicating the start time of the production time storage area 223g is set so that the normal game period (55 minutes) and the time production period (5 minutes) are repeatedly set, and 5 minutes every hour. The time production period (effect mode B) of is set.

Here, when 5 minutes of the time effect period elapses, it is determined whether or not a hold memory stored at that time or a special symbol that is changing and the hit / fail determination result is a big hit is set. Then, when it is determined that a jackpot is set, the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is set by the time until the fluctuation ends. In this case, the normal game period (effect mode A) is set when the time effect extension period (effect mode C) ends.

Further, when the remaining time of the time effect period (effect mode B) is 3 seconds or less, the third symbol display device 81 may or may not shift to the time effect extension period (effect mode C) thereafter. The display mode of is switched to the precursor display mode suggesting the end of the time production period. By switching to this precursor display mode, the variable display of the third symbol (regardless of whether it is a big hit or a miss) that has been executed (displayed) until then becomes a display mode that is difficult for the player to see. It is variable. Specifically, it is reduced and continuously variablely displayed at the lower right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Then, regardless of the fluctuation display that has been executed (displayed) until then, the third symbol indicating the deviation is stopped and displayed at the center of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the third symbol indicating the pseudo deviation). The design is displayed). Here, the third symbol, which is pseudo-stop-displayed in the precursor display mode, is displayed with a slight shaking to notify that the stop-display is not completely performed. In this way, by switching to the precursor display mode and displaying it as if the third symbol was stopped and displayed, it seems as if the third symbol was stopped and displayed at the same timing as the other pachinko machines 10. Can be made. As a result, the display mode at the end of the time production period can be set to the same display mode on the plurality of pachinko machines 10, and it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

In addition, when the remaining time of the time effect period (effect mode B) is 3 seconds or less, even if the variation display of the third symbol is not executed (displayed), the display mode is similarly changed to the precursor display mode. Can be switched. As a result, the display mode can be switched to the precursor display mode regardless of whether or not the variable display is executed (displayed). Therefore, the display mode at the end of the time production period is the same as the display mode on the plurality of pachinko machines 10. can do.

In the precursor display mode, the display mode in which the variable display of the third symbol, which has been executed (displayed) until then, is changed and is difficult for the player to see is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, the player may change the display of the third symbol to a variable display in a mode that is difficult to recognize, or may not display it at all. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the third symbol indicating the pseudo-disengagement is displayed, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of making the third symbol appear as if it is stopped and displayed.

Further, at the timing when the time production period (effect mode B) ends (that is, the timing of the division of whether or not to shift to the time production extension period (effect mode C)), it indicates that it is the time production period. After the word "super fish school time", the word "end?" (Notification mode) is displayed. After that, when the time production extension period (effect mode C) is set, the characters "Super fish school time extension !!" are displayed to notify that the time production extension period (effect mode C) has been started, and the fish school The background image of is displayed again. The effect executed (displayed) during the time effect extension period is called an extension effect.

When the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is entered, the variable display of the third symbol, which has been changed (reduced) to a display mode that is difficult for the player to see, is changed to the precursor display mode. It is displayed again (enlarged) in a visible (easy) display mode (see FIG. 83). When the variation display of the third symbol is changed (enlarged) to a visible (easy) display mode again, the player is notified (displayed) as if a new special symbol variation has started. (Hereafter, it is called re-variation production). As a result, the variable display of the third symbol, which has been changed (reduced) to a display mode that is difficult for the player to see in the precursor display mode, is changed (enlarged) again to a visible (easy) mode. It can be changed (enlarged) without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is a period until the variable display that becomes a jackpot is completed (that is, until the jackpot game is started). In the time effect extension period (effect mode C), the remaining time (for example, 115 seconds) of the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the jackpot game is started). The remaining time until is displayed on the third symbol display device 81).

In the present embodiment, when the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is set, the hold memory that becomes the jackpot is set, or the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot has already started (changing). ). Therefore, shifting to the time production extension period (effect mode C) informs the player of the jackpot. Here, during the time effect period, the same effect is executed synchronously between the same pachinko machines 10, and an effect as to whether or not to shift to the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is displayed at the same timing. .. As a result, by shifting to the time production extension period (effect mode C), other (surrounding) players can also determine that the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit (that is, a big hit for the surrounding players). Since it can be notified that it will be, it is possible to fuel the gambling spirit of other (surrounding) players.

On the other hand, when the time production period (production mode B) ends and the normal game period (production mode A) is set, the end of the time production period (production mode B) is notified of "Super fish school time end !!" The characters are displayed. This display is displayed until the variable display of the third symbol, which is changed to the display mode that is difficult for the player to see in the precursor display mode, is stopped and displayed. Then, from the next variation, the reduced display of the third symbol is canceled, and the third symbol is variablely displayed in the normal size. With this configuration, even if the time effect period (effect mode B) ends and then the time effect extension period (effect mode C) does not shift, the mode can be switched to the precursor display mode, making it difficult to see. The variable variable display can be stopped without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, if the variation display of the third symbol is not executed (displayed) when the remaining time of the time effect period (effect mode B) is 3 seconds or less, the normal game period (effect mode A) is set. When set, the characters "Super fish school time end !!" notifying the end of the time effect period (effect mode B) are displayed for a predetermined time (3 seconds). Then, from the next variation, the third symbol is displayed in a variable size (see FIG. 83 (a)) without being reduced.

In the present embodiment, when the condition for setting the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is subsequently a big hit (the reserved winning information is a big hit, or a variable display that becomes a big hit is being executed. However, the case is not limited to this, and a hold memory in which a variable pattern to be a super reach is selected may be set, or a lottery unrelated to the special symbol lottery is executed and a predetermined lottery result is obtained. It may be configured to be set when becomes. As a result, it is possible to provide a case where a big hit is not obtained even though the time shift to the time effect extension period (effect mode C) has been started. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the player wins the jackpot during the time production extension period (effect mode C), so that the player's interest can be improved.

Here, in the time effect period (effect mode B), a specific time effect (countdown effect) is performed periodically (every minute) (see FIG. 91). As a result, during the time production period, the same specific time production (countdown production) can be performed in synchronization with another (for example, adjacent) pachinko machine 10 installed, and the plurality of pachinko machines 10 have a sense of unity. It is possible to further enhance the effect of time production aimed at providing a certain production.

Further, in this specific time effect (countdown effect), the content of the effect changes based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state and not in the time saving state (so-called latent probability change state), the countdown characters displayed in the countdown effect (“3, 2”). 1, 1 ... ") Is displayed in red (displayed in black if it is not in the latent probability change state). As a result, the player can easily recognize that the gaming state is a probabilistic state and not a time-saving state (so-called latent probabilistic state). Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the production content of the specific time production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. It should be noted that the notification mode for notifying the latent probability change state is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, a design (image) or a character for notifying that the latent probability change state may be displayed. In this case, as those symbols (images), various power-on images may be corrected and diverted. As a result, it is not necessary to separately prepare a symbol (image) for notifying the latent probability change state, so that the data capacity (ROM capacity) can be reduced.

Further, in this control example, in addition to the above-mentioned specific time effect (countdown effect), a countdown notice effect including the same type of display mode (countdown) is executed. This countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. That is, it may be executed (displayed) at a timing different from the specific time effect (countdown effect) that is executed periodically (every minute). Therefore, a countdown notice effect including a specific time effect (countdown effect) and the same type of display mode (countdown) may be executed at a timing different from that of another pachinko machine 10 of the same type installed (for example, next to it). is there. As a result, the game can be given unexpectedness, and the interest of the player can be improved. In the countdown notice effect, after the countdown characters ("3, 2, 1, ...") Are displayed, a character symbol suggesting the degree of expectation that will be a big hit is displayed, or the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit (or Pressing) is suggested, and a pattern or character suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed based on the repeated hitting (or pressing) of the frame button 22.

In this control example, it is conceivable that the effect timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect) is set during the execution (display) of the countdown notice effect. In this case, the effects including the same type of display mode (countdown) may be duplicated (or overwritten) and displayed, resulting in a gaming machine that is difficult for the player to understand. Therefore, in this control example, the avoidance flag 223i described above is set to on during the execution of the countdown notice effect (see S2007 in FIG. 111), and when the avoidance flag 223i is on, the specific time effect (see S2007 in FIG. 111). It is configured so that the countdown effect) is not executed (set) (see S2305: Yes in FIG. 114). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the above-mentioned problems from occurring, and to make the game machine easy for the player to understand.

In this control example, the configuration for avoiding (restricting) the duplicate display of the effect including the countdown mode has been described by taking the countdown mode as an example. However, the effect of avoiding (restricting) overlapping display is not limited to the effect including the countdown mode. The same applies to other effects that may be displayed in duplicate among the effects including the same type of aspect. For example, when the effects suggesting the pressing of the button may be displayed in duplicate, the effect suggesting the pressing of the button may be avoided (restricted) from being displayed in duplicate.

In this control example, when the countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) in order to prevent the effects (countdown effect, countdown notice effect) including the same type of mode (countdown) from being displayed in duplicate, it is specified. Avoided (restricted) so that the time effect (countdown effect) is not executed (displayed). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the effects including the same type of effect (countdown) may be adjusted (extended or shortened) or the start timing may be changed. For example, when a specific time effect (countdown effect) is executed 20 seconds later, a countdown notice effect (normally, the effect time is 30 seconds) is executed (set). In this case, the production time of the countdown notice effect may be shortened (for example, shortened to 15 seconds) and set. Thereby, even if one of the effects including the same type of effect is not hidden, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the effect including the same type of effect from being displayed in duplicate. As a result, more effects can be displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, by changing the start timing of any one of the effects including the same type of mode (countdown), the following may be performed. For example, the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect) may be delayed until the countdown notice effect ends (or until a predetermined time elapses after the end).

Further, when the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect) is delayed, the display (effect) mode (that is, the start timing) that would have been set (displayed) if not delayed was not delayed. A specific time effect (countdown effect) may be started (displayed) from the display (effect) mode displayed on the other pachinko machine 10. Specifically, a case where the specific time effect (countdown effect) is delayed by 5 seconds will be described as an example. As described above, the specific time effect (countdown effect) is an effect in which the characters of the countdown are counted down by 1 every 3 seconds from "3". Therefore, when the delay time is 5 seconds, the display (effect) mode displayed when the delay is not made (the display (effect) mode displayed on the other pachinko machine 10) is "2" as a countdown character. Is a display (effect) mode in which is displayed. In line with this, the specific time effect (countdown effect) that is started with a delay of 5 seconds is controlled so as to start from the display (effect) mode in which "2" is displayed as the countdown character. As a result, the specific time effect (countdown effect) whose start timing is delayed can be displayed in synchronization with the specific time effect (countdown effect) executed (displayed) by the other pachinko machine 10. As a result, the specific time effect (countdown effect) executed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is executed (displayed) without deviation, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

As a method of delaying the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect), a means (timekeeping means) for measuring the period in which the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect) is delayed is provided, and based on the measurement result. An example is a method of setting a display (effect) mode of a specific time effect (countdown effect) that is started with a delay. As another method, during the period in which the specific time effect (countdown effect) is delayed, a process of setting the display (effect) mode of the effect (for example, an image display pointer update process) is executed as a control process. Even if it is done, there is a method of processing so that the image and sound related to the specific time effect (countdown effect) are not output (for example, muting only the sound related to the specific time effect).

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 92 to 103. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When they reach 299, 99, 239), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless it is a big hit of a special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 2203d (holding number N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (variable display in the special symbol). (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (that is, whether there is a reserved memory of the special symbol 2) (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 102) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and extracts the extracted values from the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (that is, there is no reserved ball of the special symbol 2) (S204: No), it is special. It is determined whether the value (N1) of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (that is, the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 are stored) (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 are not stored) (S209: No), the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 Since there are no reserved balls in both cases, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211 the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203e is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

In the process of S208, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 94. After that, this process ends.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B elapsed? Whether or not it is determined (S213). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S213: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S214), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S213, if the fluctuation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S213: Yes), the stop setting process is executed (S215), and this process ends. The stop setting process (S215) will be described later with reference to FIG. 95.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the special symbol variation start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and is special with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area common to the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery for "special symbol jackpot", "special symbol small hit", or "special symbol miss" ( This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 while performing the hit / fail determination).

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , The stop type selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S302).

If the probability is changing (S302: Yes), whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. The lottery result is obtained from the first random number table (see FIG. 75A) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values set in the first random number table (see FIG. 75A) one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values of these hits match. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined to be a big hit, but the determination value is not limited to the same, and different random values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be jackpots. The number of random numbers may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, if the probability change is not in progress (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol, so that the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 Based on the value and the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 75A), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table for low probability. As a random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, one of "0" is set, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per first and the random number value that becomes this hit match, the big hit of the special symbol Is determined to be. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), A display mode at the time of a big hit indicating a big hit is set (S306).

In the process of S306, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set according to the determined jackpot type (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C). Further, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined from the first hit type selection table (see FIG. 75 (b)) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S307). Specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table. In this first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 39", the jackpot type is jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), which is any of the values "40 to 79". The jackpot type in the case is jackpot B (16R time saving jackpot), and the jackpot type in the case of any of "80 to 99" is jackpot C (2R probability variation time saving no jackpot). After that, the process proceeds to S310.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). After that, the process proceeds to S310.

In the process of S310, a variation pattern command for notifying each determined variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S310), a stop type command is set (S311), and then this process is terminated and a special symbol is displayed. Return to variable processing.

Next, the stop setting process (S215) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the stop setting process (S215). This stop setting process (S215) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92).

In the stop setting process (S215), first, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S261). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) of FIG. When this special symbol change start processing is executed, a lottery of special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Be told. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot is A, the jackpot is B, the jackpot is C, the jackpot is small, or the hit is off.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on and the jackpot C is reached. In that case, the yellow LED is turned on. If it is a small hit, the purple LED is turned on, and if it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped. It should be noted that the lighting mode is not limited to the above-mentioned LED display color and lighting mode, and other lighting modes may be used as long as the lighting mode can identify each big hit, small hit type, and fluctuation state.

After the processing of S261 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing (this lottery result). Is a big hit of a special symbol (S262). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S262: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to on (S263), the start of the jackpot is set (S264), and then the process proceeds to S265.

On the other hand, in the process of S262, if the current lottery result is not a big hit (S262: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S266). If the result of this lottery is a small hit (S266: Yes), the small hit flag 203j is set to on (S267), the start of a small hit is set (S268), and then the process proceeds to S265.

In the process of S266, if the result of the lottery this time is out of order (S266: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is 1 or more (S269). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S269: No), the process proceeds to S265. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203h is 1 or more (S269: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S270), and the process proceeds to S265.

In the process of S265, a stop command is set (S265), and this process is terminated.

Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and starts winning. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing hold processing for the value when there is.

When the start winning process (FIGS. 96, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S501). Here, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (S502). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S503).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S501: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (503: No), the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S501: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is added by 1 (S504). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (5405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 102) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S505, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. Special symbol 1 The reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S506). In the process of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processes S507 to S512, the same process is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640 for the processing of S501 to S506. The only difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640, and the other processes are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening 640 (S507: No), the look-ahead process is executed after the process of S512 (S513). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, a look-ahead process (S513), which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S513).

In this look-ahead process (FIGS. 97, S513), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S601). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S601; No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is a probability change (S602), and the gaming state is determined. If is probabilistic (S602: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 75A) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. In the process of S602, if the gaming state is not probable (S602: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 75A) (S604), and S605. Move on to processing. In the process of S605, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result executed in the processes of S603 and S604 is set (S605), and this process is terminated. In this look-ahead process (S513), not only in the present embodiment, but also the type of the selected variation pattern (off reach, super reach, special reach, etc.) is discriminated, and the voice lamp control device 113 is subjected to the winning information command. May be configured to notify.

Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device and the electric combination associated with the second winning opening 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the object 640a.

In this ordinary symbol variation processing (FIGS. 98, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S701). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. Monaka and are included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S701: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is larger than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S708).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a big hit of the special symbol (S709). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711.

In the processing of S709, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired by the processing of S707. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 75 (c)).

In the process of S708, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S708: No), the process proceeds to the process of S711. In the processing of S711, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S707 is low. Based on the second hit random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 75 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S710 or S711 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S712), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S712: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S714), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S714: Yes), the special symbol is currently being hit. Whether or not it is determined (S715). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. , The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S715, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so that the second winning opening 640 The opening period of the electric accessory 640a accompanying the above is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719. In the process of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S714: No), the process proceeds to the process of S717. In the processing of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set to 0. . Set to 2 seconds, set the number of times of opening to 1 (S717), and shift to the process of S719.

In the process of S712, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S712: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

In the process of S719, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S719), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S719: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device. The fluctuation time of is set to 3 seconds (S720), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S719: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the time of the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S702: Yes). S722). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

In the process of S722, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S722: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S722, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S723). In the process of S723, the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S718, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S723, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 102) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S713 or the process of S718.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIGS. 98, S106) is the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S724). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S725), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S725, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 102) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S716 or the process of S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (FIGS. 99, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S803).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S803: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is added by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S805), and this process is terminated. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S901) as the setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1002). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process shifts to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if it is not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is shifted to S1012 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1012 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1114 of the main process (FIG. 102), the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1012). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1010.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1007: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of shutting off the drive power is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1010, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Here, when a special symbol that is changing is stored, the display control device 114 displays the power-on fluctuation image (see FIGS. 82 (b) to (C)) of the voice lamp control device 113. You will be instructed to do so. The fluctuation instruction may be executed by, for example, the initial setting (S1001) in the startup process, or may be executed by another process. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 102), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), the output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is stored on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 93) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 96) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 103) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the first 1 The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 102), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92). The details of the jackpot control process (S1104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 98), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start with devices 37A, 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94) ends, the first symbol display device 37A, The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 94) after ending the variation display executed in 37B. , 37B stops display (lights up display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 98), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S723 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 98), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S713 or the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 98). ).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1109). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process is shifted to S1101, and each process after S1101 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1109: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1111).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the process of S1108, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 100 has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S1112 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1114), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1108 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1101 to S1107, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is set in the initial setting process (S1001) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1101 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 102), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (see FIG. 102). Large opening port) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIGS. 103, S1104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1201). Specifically, if the process of S264 of the stop setting process (see FIG. 95) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1201, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1201: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g and the time saving flag 203k are both set to off (S1202), and the opening command is set (S1203). This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1201: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1204). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. In the process of S1204, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S1204: Yes), the process of S1205 is executed. In the process of S1205, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1205). In the process of S1205, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S1206), and a new one is opened. A round number command indicating the number of rounds to start is set (S1207), and this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1205 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1205: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied. Determine (S1208). If the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1208: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1209), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1208, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1208: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1210). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball ejection time, has elapsed. To determine as. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1210: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is turned off (S1211), and the ending command is set (S1212). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is A or C (S1213). In the process of S1213, if the jackpot type is not A or C (S1213: No), 100 is set in the time saving / medium counter (S1217), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1213, if the jackpot type is A or C (S1213: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is turned on (S1214), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is A (S1215). If the jackpot type is not A (S1215: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1215, if the jackpot type is A (S1215: Yes), the time saving flag 203k is turned on (S1216), and then this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 115. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1514 (see FIG. 80) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (S1516: Yes in FIG. 106), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1519. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1519 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1302: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1514. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1519 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the data shifts to S1308.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1302: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process in S1519, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1304, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1306). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power off flag 223y is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S1519 is executed (see S1519 in FIG. 106). That is, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1519 is executed, the process of S1308 is reached at the moment when the power-off flag 223y is turned on. This is the case where the power failure is started after the power failure of S1519 has been executed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), after clearing the work area of the RAM in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1309) and setting the power off flag 223y to off (S1310). , Set the initial value of RAM223 (S1311). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110. After that, the interrupt permission is set (S1312), the time setting process is executed (S1313), and the process shifts to the main process. Details of the time setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 105.

On the other hand, the process of S1308 is reached with the power cutoff flag 223y turned off because the start-up process this time was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S1308 to S1306 was performed via the process of S1308. This is the case when the process is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1309, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1311, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1312), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1311), the time setting process is executed (S1313), and the process shifts to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1309 is that when the processing of S1308 is reached via the processing of S1304 to S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1304. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, the time setting process (S1313) executed in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the time setting process (S1313). This time effect setting process (S1313) is a process for setting information indicating the start time at which the normal game period (effect mode A) and the time effect period (effect mode B) are executed in the effect time storage area 223 g. ..

In the time setting process (S1313), first, time information is acquired from RTC292 (S1401). As the time information acquired here, the values of "hours and minutes" are acquired. The RTC292 is a timekeeping means having a battery inside, and when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the same current time is initially set in the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years of operating time. The RTC292 also has a calendar function, and has a configuration in which the "date" can be determined. Therefore, for example, on Christmas day, it is possible to control to change to a background image dedicated to Christmas or to display a special character such as Santa.

Then, based on the time information (power-on time) acquired in the process of S1401, the normal game period (effect mode A), the time effect period (effect mode B), and the start time at which the specific time effect is executed (set) are set. Each is calculated and set in the effect time storage area 223 g (S1402), and this process is terminated.

The information set in the effect time storage area 223 g in the process of S1402 will be specifically described by taking as an example the case where the power of the voice lamp control device 113 is turned on at 9:00. In the effect time storage area 223 g, 9:55, 55 minutes after the power-on time (9:00), is set as information indicating the start time of the first time effect. Then, the time every hour (10:55, 11:55, ...) From the start time of the first time effect is set for 24 hours as information indicating the start time of the time effect. In addition, every minute (9:56, 9:57, 9:58, 9:59, 10:56, 10:57 ...) from the start timing of the time production during the time production. It is set as information indicating the start time (start timing) of the specific time effect. Further, since the time production period is 5 minutes, the information indicating the time (10:00, 11:00, etc.) 5 minutes after the start time of the time production is the normal game period (effect mode A). It is set as information indicating the start time (see FIG. 91).

In this control example, each time effect (time effect, specific time effect) is set to be executed based on the time when the power is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each time effect is not limited to this. The start time of (time effect, specific time effect) may be set. For example, every hour may be set as the start time of the time effect. As a result, when the power of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is turned on, even if the power-on time is deviated, the start time of the time effect is not deviated, and the time effect is synchronously executed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10. can do.

In this control example, RTC292 is used as the timekeeping means, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a counter may be provided as a timekeeping means as follows. When measuring (timekeeping) the normal game period (55 minutes), the counter value should be counted up (or counted down) periodically (for example, every second) after the normal game period (55 minutes) is started. Measure (timekeeping) with. Then, when the value of the counter reaches a value indicating 55 minutes (for example, 3300), it is determined that 55 minutes have passed. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to provide the RTC292, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at a lower cost.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1501 this time was executed (S1501), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1511 without performing the processes of S1502 to S1510. In the process of S1501, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1502 to S1510 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1511 and the variation display setting process of S1512 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1511 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1512 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1502). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1508 described later (S1503), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1504). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be.

Further, at the time of recovery from the power outage due to a power failure or the like, the effect permission command based on the game executed at the time of the power outage is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 101). .. The voice lamp control device 113 creates a display variation pattern command in the power-on notification process (S1504) based on the reception of the effect permission command including the fact that the special symbol is changing, and the display control device 113. It is transmitted to 114. The display control device 114 determines the fluctuation start command of the power-on fluctuation image by a simple command determination process (see FIG. 118 (b)), and uses the power-on fluctuation image based on the fluctuation pattern based on the received command. A variable display is performed (see FIG. 82 (b) or (c)). As described above, the display variation pattern command created here is for executing the variation display by the variation image at power-on, which is a simple image. Therefore, the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 110) described later. ) Is simpler than the one selected in. As a result, the processing load for creating the display variation pattern command can be reduced, and the variation image when the power is turned on can be displayed with good response when the power is restored from the power failure.

Further, after the effect permission command based on the game that was executed when the power is turned off is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 101), it is executed based on the effect permission command. A stop command for stopping the variable display is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display stop command to the display control device 114 based on the reception of this stop command. The display control device 114 determines that a display stop command has been received by a simple command determination process (see 118 (b)), and uses a display mode based on the received command to change the power-on variation image (FIG. 82 (b) or FIG. (See (c)) is stopped.

Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1505 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1505, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1508), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1509, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1510). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1509 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1511). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107.

Next, the process proceeds to S1512. In the process of S1512, the variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 109.

After finishing the variable display setting process (S1512), the synchronous effect management process for executing the effect based on the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 is executed (S1513), and the specific time is set in the time effect period (effect mode B). A specific time effect process for executing the effect is executed (S1514). Then, the ball entry effect setting process for executing the ball entry effect based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1515), and the process proceeds to S1516. Details of the synchronous effect management process (S1513), the specific time effect process (S1514), and the ball entry effect setting process (S1515) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, 114, and 116, respectively.

When the ball entry effect setting process (S1515) is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1516). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1516 (S1516: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1518), and the power-off process is executed (S1519). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1520), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1516 (S1516: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1517), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1517: No), the process returns to the process of S1501 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1517: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1511). This command determination process (S1511) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. ..

In the command determination process (S1511), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is generated from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation pattern reception process (S1602) is executed to return to the main process.

Here, the details of the variation pattern reception process (S1602) will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern reception process (S1602). This variation pattern reception process (S1602) extracts the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and various accessories (upper and lower operation unit devices (upper and lower operation unit devices) based on the extracted variation pattern accessory scenario. This is a process for setting the operation of the falling accessory) 400, the expansion / contraction effect device (expansion / extension accessory) 540, the tilting operation unit (tilting accessory) 600, and the like).

In the variation pattern reception process, first, the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1701), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1702). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 109) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a falling accessory scenario in the extracted variation pattern type (S1703). In the process of S1703, when it is determined that there is a falling accessory scenario (S1703: Yes), it is a case where the movable effect of the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 is executed. (Falling accessory) A falling accessory scenario for moving the 400 is set (S1704). The falling accessory scenario set in the process of S1704 defines the operation of the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 for the same time as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect set based on the fluctuation pattern type. is there. By driving the vertical drive motor 431 based on this falling accessory scenario, the vertical operation unit device (falling accessory) 400 and the fluctuation effect can be moved in synchronization (interlocking).

After finishing the process of S1704, it is next determined whether or not there is an open setting of the door member 470 of the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 (S1705). In the process of S1705, when it is determined that the door member 470 is set to be open (S1705: Yes), the opening / closing drive motor 466 is not excited (off) so that the door member 470 is opened. Set (energization stop control). As a result, the static torque (so-called detent torque) of the opening / closing drive motor 466 for keeping the door member 470 in the closed state is minimized, and the inertial force that causes the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 to move in the falling direction. Will open the door member 470. Although not shown, when the door member 470 is not set to open, that is, when the door member 470 is left in the closed state, the opening / closing drive motor 466 is excited and controlled so that the opening / closing drive motor 466 is stopped. .. As a result, when the door member 470 is not set to open, the static torque of the opening drive motor 466, that is, the door member 470 is closed even if the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 moves in the falling direction. Since the torque for maintaining the state (so-called holding torque) is excited to the maximum, the door member 470 is maintained in the closed state and is not opened. The torque (holding torque) for keeping the door member 470 in the closed state does not have to be maximized, and the door member 470 does not have to be maximized when the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 moves in the falling direction. The torque may be such that the door member 470 is not opened by the inertial force generated in. In this case, the current for exciting the opening / closing drive motor 466 can be made weak, so that the power consumption can be reduced.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1705 that there is no opening setting for the falling accessory (S1705: No), the processing of S1706 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S1707, and it is determined that there is no falling accessory scenario. In the case (S1703: No), the processing from S1704 to S1706 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1707.

After finishing the processing of S1703, S1705 or S1706, it is determined whether or not there is a telescopic accessory scenario (S1707). In the process of S1707, when it is determined that there is a telescopic accessory scenario (S1707: Yes), the drive motor 561 is moved so that the front plate member 546 of the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) moves downward. The expansion / contraction accessory scenario for exciting control is set, and the process proceeds to S1709. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1707 that there is no telescopic accessory scenario (S1707: No), the process of S1708 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1709.

In the process of S1709, it is determined whether or not there is a tilted accessory scenario (S1709). In the process of S1709, when it is determined that there is a tilting accessory scenario (S1709: Yes), the drive motor 631 is excited and controlled so that the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) moves to the overhanging position. A tilting accessory scenario is set (S1710), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1709, if it is determined that there is no tilting accessory scenario (S1709: No), the process of S1708 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 107, the description will continue. In the process of S1601, if the variation pattern command is not received (S1601: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1603). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1603: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1604), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1605), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 109) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1603: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1606). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1606: Yes), it is determined whether the received hold ball number command is the special figure 1 hold ball number command or the special figure 2 hold ball number command. , That is, the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of hold numbers N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) and the special symbol 2 hold ball of the main control device 110. The value of the number counter 203e (the number of holdings N2 of the fluctuation display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1607). Further, in the process of S1608, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is set. After the processing of S1607 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is performed when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, or a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is broken, every time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the process of S1607. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the starting prize or drawing the special symbol. Can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S1607 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is issued. Set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1606, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S1606: No), then it is determined whether the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1608). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the processing of S1608 (S1608: Yes), the winning information (such as the lottery result of the special symbol) based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. (S1609), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the winning information command is not received (S1608: No), it is determined whether or not the command related to the jackpot is received (S1610). In the process of S1610, when a command related to a jackpot is received (S1610: Yes), a process corresponding to the command related to the received jackpot is executed (S1611), and this process is terminated. Examples of commands related to jackpots include an opening command, a number of rounds command, and an ending command. Further, as the process corresponding to the received command related to the jackpot, for example, there is a process of setting a display opening command, a display round number command, and a display ending command.

If it is determined in the process of S1610 that the command related to the jackpot has not been received, it is determined (S1610: No) whether or not the stop command has been received (S1612). In the process of S1612, if it is determined that the stop command has been received (S1612: Yes), the executed variation display stop process is executed (S1613), the avoidance flag 223i is set to off (S1614), and so on. A display stop command is set (S1615), and this process ends.

The display stop command set by the process of S1615 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is stored in the command output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. , Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop command, the display control device 114 stops the variable effect being executed in a display mode based on the stop type set by the stop type command.

On the other hand, in the process of S1612, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S1612: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1616), the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is stored in the display control device 114. Set the command to send to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the variation display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1512). This variation display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1801). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1801: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1806 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1802), and then the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is set. The variation pattern selection process for selection is executed (S1803).

Here, the details of the variation pattern selection process (S1803) will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1803). In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern type according to the effect mode is selected based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 and the effect counter 223j counted by the voice lamp control device 113. is there.

In the variation pattern selection process, first, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S1901). Next, it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (normal game period) (S1902). The effect mode is determined by referring to the value of the effect mode storage area 223h. As described above, the value of the effect mode storage area 223h indicates that the effect mode is A if it is "00H", indicates that it is the effect mode B if it is "01H", and if it is "02H". It indicates that it is the production mode C.

If the value of the effect mode storage area 223h is determined to be the effect mode A (normal game period) in the process of S1902 (S1902: Yes), it is extracted in the process of S1702 of the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108). Based on the variation pattern type and the effect counter 223j acquired in the process of S1901, the variation pattern of the corresponding normal game period (effect mode A) is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S1903), and this process is performed. finish. Based on the variation pattern selected here, it is set as a display variation pattern command in the variation display setting process described later (see S1804 in FIG. 109).

On the other hand, in the process of S1902, if it is determined that the current effect mode is not the effect mode A (normal game period) (S1902: No), then the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period). Whether or not it is determined (S1904).

If the value of the effect mode storage area 223h is determined to be the effect mode B (time effect period) in the process of S1904 (S1904: Yes), it is extracted in the process of S1702 of the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108). The variation pattern of the corresponding time effect period (effect mode B) is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S1905) based on the variation pattern type and the effect counter 223j acquired in the process of S1901, and this process is performed. finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1904, when it is determined that the current effect mode is not the effect mode B (time effect period) (S1904: No), the current effect mode is the effect mode C (time effect extension period). is there. In this case, the corresponding time effect extension period (effect mode C) is based on the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S1702 of the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108) and the effect counter 223j acquired in the process of S1901. The variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S1906), and this process ends.

In this way, in the variation pattern selection process (S1803), since the variation pattern according to the current effect mode is selected, the variation display according to each effect period (effect mode) is executed (displayed). Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 109, the description will be continued. When the process of S1803 is completed, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S1803, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Set (S1804). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started. After finishing the process of S1804, the advance notice selection process for setting the advance notice effect (suggesting the expectation degree of a big hit) based on the hit / fail determination result is executed (S1805). It should be noted that this advance notice selection process is also configured so that the advance notice effect according to the current effect mode is selected.

Here, the details of the advance notice selection process (S1805) will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the advance notice selection process (S1805). This advance notice selection process (S1805) is executed in the above-mentioned variation display setting process (see FIG. 109), and is a process for setting a notice effect based on the hit / fail determination result according to the current effect mode.

In the advance notice selection process (S1805), first, the effect counter 223j is acquired (S2001), and it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (normal game period) (S2002). In the process of S2002, if it is determined that the current effect mode (value of the effect mode storage area 223h) is the effect mode A (normal game period) (S2002: Yes), it is stored in the prize information storage area 223a. Based on the hit / fail determination result of each reserved ball and the value of the effect counter 223j, the normal advance notice effect, which is the advance notice effect of the normal game period, is selected (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2011.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2002, if it is determined that the current effect mode is not the effect mode A (normal game period) (S2002: No), then the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period). Whether or not it is determined (S2004).

In the processing of S2004, when it is determined that the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2004: No), the result of determining whether or not each of the reserved balls stored in the winning information storage area 223a is determined. , The time advance notice effect, which is the advance notice effect of the time effect period, is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223j (S2005), and the process proceeds to S2006.

In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the time advance notice effect selected in the process of S2005 is a advance notice effect (countdown advance notice effect) including the display mode of the countdown (S2006). In the process of S2006, if it is determined that the selected time advance notice effect is a countdown advance notice effect (S2006: Yes), the avoidance flag 223i is turned on in order not to execute the specific time effect (countdown effect). (S2007), the process proceeds to S2011. By setting the avoidance flag 223i to ON by the process of S2007, it becomes possible to determine that the countdown notice effect is executed. When the avoidance flag 223i is on, it is controlled so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not executed in the specific time effect process (see FIG. 114) described later (S2305: Yes in FIG. 114). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the effects (countdown notice effect, specific time effect (countdown effect)) including the same type of display mode (countdown) from being performed in duplicate, which is a problem that the player is confused. Can be prevented (suppressed).

In the present embodiment, when the countdown notice effect is executed based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the avoidance flag 223i is set to be turned on so that the specific time effect is not executed. It is not limited to. For example, the timing at which the countdown notice effect is executed based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640 is pre-read (estimated) based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. That is, the period during which the countdown notice effect is executed is pre-read (estimated). Based on the look-ahead (guess) result, it may be set so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not executed in duplicate during the period when the countdown notice effect is executed. As a result, the process for executing the specific time effect can be stopped before the timing when the specific time effect is started. As a result, preparations for executing the specific time effect (for example, image data transfer processing) can be omitted, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Further, the prevention (suppression) of duplication is not limited to the display mode, and the duplication of voice and music may be prevented (suppressed). Further, it may be possible to prevent (suppress) the sound from being different depending on the display mode. For example, it prevents (suppresses) that the voice "press the button" is output even though the message "press the button" is not displayed.

Further, the present invention is not limited to preventing (suppressing) duplication of effects including the same type of display mode, and may prevent the effects including the same type of display mode from being continuously (or frequently) executed. Specifically, the avoidance flag 223i is set on so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not executed in the vicinity of the period in which the countdown notice effect is executed (for example, 1 minute before and after). As a result, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easier to understand for the player.

On the other hand, in the process of S2006, if it is determined that the selected time advance notice effect is other than the countdown advance notice effect (S2006: No), the process of S2007 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2011.

In the processing of S2004, if it is determined that the current effect mode is not the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2004: No), then whether the current effect mode is the effect mode C (time effect extension period). Whether or not it is determined (S2008). If it is determined in the process of S2008 that the current effect mode is the effect mode C (time effect extension period) (S2008: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the result of determining whether or not the fluctuation is correct is correct. (S2009).

In the processing of S2009, when it is determined that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the fluctuation is a hit (S2009: Yes), the super fish school notice effect which is a notice effect suggesting that the change is a big hit is selected ( S2010), the process proceeds to S2011.

When the processing of S2003, S2006, S2007 or S2010 is completed, a display warning command indicating the selected notice effect is set (S2011), and this processing ends. The display notice command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display notice command, the display control device 114 displays the notice effect corresponding to the command on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2008 that the current effect mode is not the effect mode C (time effect extension period) (S2008: No), or in the process of S2009, the result of determining whether or not the fluctuation is appropriate is incorrect. If it is determined (S2009: No), since there is no advance notice effect to be executed, this process is terminated as it is. In the processing of S2003 and S2005, the advance notice effect may not be selected depending on the value of the effect counter 223j. In that case as well, the present process is terminated without setting the display advance notice command.

In this control example, in the time effect extension period (effect mode C), the specific time effect (countdown effect) that is periodically (every minute) executed in the time effect period (effect mode B) is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific time effect (countdown effect) may be executed in the same manner as the time effect period (effect mode B). In this case, the avoidance flag 223i described above may be used to control so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not performed at a timing overlapping with the countdown advance notice effect as in the time effect period (effect mode B). As a result, even in the time effect extension period (effect mode C), it is possible to prevent the countdown advance notice effect and the like from being executed in duplicate, and it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand. Further, the display mode of the specific time effect that is periodically executed in the time effect extension period (effect mode C) may not include the display mode of the countdown. As a result, even if the specific time effect is periodically executed in the time effect extension period (effect mode C), the effect including the same kind of display mode (countdown) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game machine to the player.

Returning to FIG. 109, the description will be continued. After the processing of S1805 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1806). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1806: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1806: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1807), and then in the process of S1605 of the command determination process (see FIG. 107), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1808). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1809), and the process proceeds to S1810. In the process of S1810, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1810). .. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, a synchronous effect management process (S1513), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1513). In this synchronous effect management process (S1513), time information is acquired from RTC292, and based on the time information, it is determined whether it is a normal game period, a time effect period, or a time effect extension period, and an effect indicating that is indicated. Execute the process to set the mode.

In the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 112, S1513), first, the time information of "hours and minutes" is acquired from RTC292 (S2101). Then, it is determined whether or not a value (“00H”) indicating the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223h (S2102). When it is determined that the value (“00H”) indicating the effect mode A is set (S2102: Yes), the time data acquired in the process of S2101 is the transition timing to the effect mode B (time effect period) ( Whether it is the period of the time production period) is determined (S2103). In the processing of S2103, when it is determined that it is the transition timing to the effect mode B (time effect period), that is, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the time effect (S2103: Yes), the effect mode storage area 223h Set a value (“01H”) indicating the effect mode B (time effect period) in (S2104), set a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2105), and perform this process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2103 that it is not the time effect period, the processes of S2104 and S2105 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2102 that the value (“00H”) indicating the effect mode A (normal game period) is not set (S2102: No), the effect mode B (the effect mode B (normal game period)) is set to the effect mode storage area 223h. It is determined whether or not a value (“01H”) indicating the time effect period) is set (S2106). When it is determined that the value (“01H”) indicating the effect mode B (time effect period) is set in the process of S2106 (S2106: Yes), the time data acquired in the process of S2101 ends the time effect. It is determined whether it is within 3 seconds from the above, that is, within 3 seconds until the end timing of the time production period (the start timing of the normal game period) (S2107).

In the process of S2107, if it is determined that the end timing of the time effect period (the start timing of the normal game period) is within 3 seconds (S2107: Yes), the extension effect for executing (displaying) the extension effect is performed. The setting process is executed (S2108). After that, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 106). The extension effect setting process (S2108) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 113.

On the other hand, in the process of S2107, if it is determined that the acquired time data is not within 3 seconds from the end of the time effect, it means that the end timing of the time effect period (start timing of the normal game period) is longer than 3 seconds. , The process of S2108 is skipped, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S2106, the value (“00H”) indicating the effect mode B (time effect period) is not set in the effect mode storage area 223h, that is, the current effect mode is the effect mode C (time effect extension period). If it is determined to be present (S2106: No), it is determined whether or not it is outside the time effect extension period, that is, whether or not it is the end timing of the time effect extension period (effect mode C) (S2109). In the process of S2109, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect extension period (S2109: Yes), a value (“00H”) indicating the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223h. (S2110), a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode A (normal game period) is set (S2111), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2109, if it is determined that the acquired time data is not the end timing of the time effect extension period (S2109: No), the processes of S2110 and S2111 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, an extension effect setting process (S2108), which is one process in the synchronous effect management process (see FIG. 112) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the contents of this extension effect setting process (S2108).

In the extension effect setting process (FIG. 113, S2108), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S2201). When it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S2201: Yes), a value (“00H”) indicating the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223h (S2202). Then, a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode A (normal game period) is set (S2203), and this process ends.

In this control example, as described above, if the jackpot game is being executed 3 seconds before the end of the time effect period (effect mode B) (S2201: Yes), it is normal after the end of the jackpot game. It is controlled so as to shift to the game period (effect mode A) (S2202 and S2203), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the jackpot game is executed 3 seconds before the end of the time production period (effect mode B), if the jackpot game ends before the end of the time production period (effect mode B). , The time effect period (effect mode B) may be set. In addition, even if the jackpot game is executed 3 seconds before the end of the time production period (effect mode B), if it is determined that the jackpot will be a jackpot after that (when the pending winning information is a jackpot). The game may be shifted to the time production extension period (effect mode C) after the jackpot game is completed. As a result, even if the jackpot game is being executed, the extended effect can be executed (displayed) 3 seconds before the end of the time effect period (effect mode B), so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S2201: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the time effect period (effect mode B) (S2204). In the process of S2204, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect period (effect mode B) (S2204: Yes), whether or not the revariation effect is set, that is, the extension effect is executed ( It is determined whether or not it is decided (shift to the effect mode C) (S2205). When the revariating effect is set, that is, when it is determined that the extended effect is executed (shift to the effect mode C) (S2205: Yes), the effect mode is set in the effect mode storage area 223h. A value indicating C (“02H”) is set (S2206), a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode C is set (S2207), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2205 that the re-variation effect is not set (S2205: No), then the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is not shifted and the normal game period (effect mode A) is not set. ), So the process shifts to S2202. As a result, at the end of the time production period (effect mode B) (S2204: Yes), if the time production extension period (effect mode C) is not shifted (S2205: No), the stage shifts to the production mode A (normal game period). (S2202 and S2203).

Further, in the processing of S2204, when it is determined that the end timing of the time effect period (effect mode B) is not reached (that is, the time effect is continuously executed) (S2204: No), it corresponds to the winning information storage area 223a. It is determined whether or not the winning information is stored, or whether or not the winning / failing determination result during the fluctuation is a hit (S2208). In the process of S2208, when the winning information that hits the winning information storage area 223a is stored, or if it is determined that the winning / failing judgment during the fluctuation is winning (S2208: Yes), the winning fluctuation ends. The time until the time is calculated is set as the production time (extended production time) of the time production extension period (S2209). Then, the revariation effect is set (S2210), and this process is terminated.

Here, the re-variation effect is an effect that suggests a transition from the time effect period to the time effect extension period and notifies (displays) the player as if a new special symbol change has started. .. Specifically, the display mode in which the display mode of the school of fish appears from the right is displayed, and the variable display of the third symbol, which is changed (reduced) to the display mode that is difficult for the player to see, is visually recognized again. Variable (enlarged) to possible (easy) aspects. As described above, in this control example, when the remaining time of the time effect period (effect mode B) is 3 seconds or less, the display mode is switched to the precursor display mode, which has been executed (displayed) until then. The variable display of the three symbols is changed to a display mode (reduced display) that makes it difficult for the player to see. In the re-variation effect, when the variation display of the third symbol, which has been changed (reduced) to a display mode that is difficult for the player to see, is changed (enlarged) to a viewable (easy) mode again. The display mode in which the display mode of the school of fish appears from the right is displayed. As a result, the player pays attention to the display mode of the school of fish, so that the variable display of the third symbol can be changed (enlarged) without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2208, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the winning information storage area 223a is not stored and the winning / failing determination result during the fluctuation is incorrect (S2208: No), S2209 and S2210. This process is skipped and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 114, a specific time effect process (S1514), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific time effect processing (S1514). This specific time effect process (S1514) is a process for executing (displaying) the specific time effect in the time effect period (effect mode B).

In the specific time production process, first, time information is acquired from RTC292 (S2301). Next, with reference to the effect mode storage area 233h, it is determined whether the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2302). In the process of S2302, if it is determined that the current effect mode is not the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2302: No), it is not determined as the timing to execute the specific time effect in the subsequent processes. , Ends this process as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2302, when it is determined that the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2302: Yes), then the time information (current time) acquired in the process of S2301 is displayed. Based on the information indicating the start time of the specific time effect stored in the effect time storage area 223 g, it is determined whether or not the specific time effect timing is reached (S2303). If it is determined in the process of S2303 that it is not the specific time effect timing (S2303: No), it is not the timing to execute the specific time effect, so this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S2303, if it is determined that the effect is a specific time effect (S2303: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the demo effect is being executed (S2304). If it is determined in the process of S2304 that the demo effect is being executed (S2304: Yes), this process ends as it is. This is an effect that suggests whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a probabilistic gaming state (latent probabilistic state) during the execution of the demo effect, that is, when the player is not playing a game. It is possible to hide the effect for a specific time, and prevent (suppress) the player who is not playing the game from suggesting the game state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2304 that the demo effect is not being executed (S2304: No), then it is determined whether or not the avoidance flag 223i is on (S2305). In the process of S2305, when it is determined that the avoidance flag 223i is on (S2305: Yes), it is the case where the countdown notice effect is executed among the advance notice effects based on the entry into the second winning opening 640. Therefore, in order not to display the specific time effect (countdown effect), which is an effect including the same type of display mode (countdown), this process is terminated as it is (that is, the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not set. ).

If it is determined in the process of S2305 that the avoidance flag 223i is off (S2305: No), a specific time effect command for display is set in order to execute the specific time effect (countdown effect), and this process is performed. To finish.

If the countdown notice effect based on the winning of the second winning opening 640 is executed (when the avoidance flag 223i is on) during the execution of the specific time effect by the process of S2305, the countdown related to the specific time effect is executed. It is controlled so that the effect is not executed (S2305: Yes). As a result, the countdown notice effect and the specific time effect (countdown effect), which are effects including the same type of display mode (countdown), are not executed in duplicate, so that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115, a ball entry effect setting process (S1515), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ball entry effect setting process (S1515). This ball entry effect setting process (S1515) is a process for displaying the ball entry effect based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 640 during the time saving game. The type of this ball entry effect is changed according to the number of remaining fluctuations until a big hit. Further, the area where the ball entry effect is displayed is set in order from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81.

In the ball entry effect setting process (S1515), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is during the time-saving game (S2401). If it is determined in the process of S2401 that the time-saving game is not in progress, the ball entry effect based on the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 is not executed (displayed), so that the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, when it is determined that the time-saving game is in progress (S2401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second winning opening 640 (S2402). In this control example, a ball entry command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (not shown) based on the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 in the main control device 110 (not shown). In the voice lamp control device 113, by receiving the ball entry command, it is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 that the ball has entered the second winning opening 640, and in the processing of S2402, the second winning opening It is determined whether or not the ball has entered the 640.

Not limited to this, the voice lamp control device indicates that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 640 by providing a ball entry detection switch that detects that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 640. It may be possible to detect with 113. Further, the ball entry detection switch may also be used as a switch for detecting entry into the second winning opening 640 used in the main control device 110. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced.

In the process of S2402, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second winning opening 640 (S2402: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, when the above-mentioned entry command is received from the main control device 110 and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 640 (S2402: Yes), the winning information is stored. The ball entry effect is selected based on the winning information stored in the area 223a and the ball entry effect selection table 222b (S2403). Then, the display ball entry effect command is set based on the ball entry effect selected in the process of S2403 and the display area counter 223f (S2404). The display incoming ball effect command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. , Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ball entry effect command, the display control device 114 displays the ball entry effect in the display area (first area 81a to fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81) corresponding to the command.

When the processing of S2404 is completed, the value of the display area counter 223f is added by 1 (S2405), and it is determined whether or not the added value of the display area counter 223f is 5 (S2406). If the value of the display area counter 223f is determined to be 5 in the process of S2406 (S2406: Yes), the ball entry effect is entered in the fourth area 81d (see FIG. 89 or FIG. 90) in the ball entry effect setting process. Is set to be displayed, and the value of the display area counter 223f is initialized to 1 (S2407) in order to set the area for displaying the ball entry effect to the first area 81a (see FIG. 89 or FIG. 90). This process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2406, if it is determined that the display area counter 223f is not 5 (that is, any of 2 to 4) (S2406: No), it is necessary to initialize the value of the display area counter 223f. Therefore, the process of S2407 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Here, by the processing of S2404, the ball entry effect can be displayed in the area of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the display area counter 223f. Specifically, when the value of the display area counter 223f is 1, it is in the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81, and when it is 2, it is in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81. If it is, the ball entry effect is displayed in the first area 81c of the third symbol display device 81, and if it is 4, the ball entry effect is displayed in the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the winning effect setting process (S1515) is executed by the processing of S2405 to S2407, and the value of the display area counter 223 can be updated every time the display ball entry effect command is set, so that the third symbol The ball entry effect can be displayed in order from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the display device 81, and after the ball entry effect is displayed in the fourth area 81d, the ball entry effect is displayed again from the first area 81a. It can be displayed in order. As a result, the ball entry effect based on one ball entry will be continuously displayed until four game balls are newly entered in the second winning opening 640, and the game ball will be displayed in the second winning opening 640. Even when the ball entry interval is very short, it is possible to secure the time for the ball entry effect to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player cannot visually recognize (recognize) the ball entry effect (or is difficult).

In this control example, the ball entry effect is configured to be displayed in order (clockwise) in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be displayed in the reverse order (counterclockwise), or may be displayed randomly. Further, the display order may be changed when a specific effect or variation is executed or when there is a big hit winning information. As a result, it is possible to change the order of the displayed ball entry effects, prevent the game from becoming monotonous, and prevent the player from getting bored early.

Further, the display order of the ball entry effect displayed in each area (first area 81a to fourth area) of the third symbol display device 81 may be changed according to the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, when the expectation of a big hit is low, the ball entry effect is displayed in order (clockwise) in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d, while when the expectation of a big hit is high. Is displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise). As a result, the player can recognize the degree of expectation in the display order of the ball entry effect displayed in each area (first area 81a to fourth area), and each area (first area 81a to fourth area). Since it is not necessary to look closely at the content of the ball entry effect displayed on the player, the burden on the player can be reduced.

Further, in this control example, the ball entry effect is displayed in order from the first region 81a of the third symbol display device 81 to the four regions of the fourth region 81d, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display area of the third symbol display device may be further subdivided (for example, divided into six areas from the first area to the sixth area) and displayed in order, or the display of the third symbol display device may be displayed. The number of divisions of the region may be reduced (for example, the region may be divided into two regions from the first region to the second region) for display.

Further, in this control example, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to select which of the display areas (first area 81a to fourth area 81d) of the third symbol display device 81 is to be displayed. However, the present invention may be configured to be selected by the display control device 114, for example. As a result, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 134. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 116, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2501), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2501) will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2501) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND type flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads out and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2601). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2602). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2601.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2602, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2602, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2603). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2604), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2501 in FIG. 116) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2502 in FIG. 116) (S2605), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2501) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 117, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2601 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, it is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2601 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2602. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2603 to S2605 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2601 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2601. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S2602 and S2602, the processes of S2603 to S2605 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes S2603 to S2605 may be executed without performing the processes S2601 and S2602. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 116. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2502). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2503). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2503, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2504). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2504, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2505). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 132 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S4702 in FIG. 132 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118 (b)), the main image at power-on and the variation image at power-on (see FIG. 82), which are images at power-on, are simply drawn. The command determination process (see S2809 in FIG. 118 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2810 in FIG. 118 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64, and the main control device 110 issued a voice lamp control device to instruct the start of the variation effect. When the display variation pattern command is received via 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on (see FIG. 82) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. Can be done. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2505, interrupt permission is set (S2506), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2506, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (a). FIG. 118 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing or the simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (b). FIG. 118 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 87) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2801), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2801: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not the image at power-on (see FIG. 82 (a)). In order to display the normal effect image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2802) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2803) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2802), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the image. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 119 to 127.

In the display setting process (S2803), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2802) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2804). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S2803) or the simple display setting process (S2809). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

When the task process is completed, the effect information correction process is executed (S2805). In this effect information correction process (S2805), among the images for one frame determined in the above-mentioned task process, various power-on images (main image at power-on, fluctuation at power-on) used for display at power-on are used. For sprites (images, title images when the power is turned on), the presence or absence of display, display coordinate position, and enlargement ratio are corrected. The effect information correction process (S2805) may be configured to be executed within the task process (S2804).

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2806). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2807). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer setting process (S2806) determined by the task process (S2804) and the effect information correction process (S2805). The drawing list shown in FIG. 87 is generated from the transfer instruction set by the above, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 134.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2808). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2808, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear out reach, front / rear out reach, complete The stop type table corresponding to the missed, chance eye) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2801 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2801: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (see FIG. 82) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2809) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2810) is executed to display S2804. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 to 127, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2802), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 119, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2901), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2901: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2901: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2803) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2902), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2903).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2904), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2904: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2905), the process returns to the process of S2901.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2905) will be described with reference to FIG. 120A. FIG. 120A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S3001).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3001, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3001 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S3001 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3003). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S3003, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3001, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S3004), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S3005). Then, when both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3006) and the effect of moving the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is executed. A special effect correction process for correcting the effect screen is executed (S3007). When the processing of S3007 is completed, the variation pattern command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3005, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3001. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S3002. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2504, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the details of the special effect correction process (S3007) will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing a special effect correction process (S3007). In this special effect correction process (S3007), when an effect in which the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is movable is executed, the display device (third symbol display device 81 or This is a process for correcting the display mode (position, size) of various power-on images displayed on the sub-display device 690).

In the special effect correction process (S3007), first, it is determined whether or not the effect based on the received fluctuation pattern command is an effect that moves the telescopic effect device (expandable accessory) 540 (whether or not there is an elastic accessory scenario). (S3201). If it is determined in the process of S3201 that there is a telescopic accessory scenario (S3201: Yes), the front member 546 of the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) moves to the lower position in the fluctuation, and the third symbol This is a case where an effect that makes the display device 81 difficult to see (or cannot be seen) is executed. In this case, the correction information for moving the telescopic accessory is set in the correction information storage area 233m from the correction information table 234a3 (S3202), and the process proceeds to S3205. By the process of S3202, the power-on fluctuation image (see FIG. 83A) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is corrected and displayed on the sub display device 690. Therefore, even when the front member 546 of the telescopic device 540 moves to the front side of the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily visually recognize the variation image when the power is turned on by looking at the sub display device 690. it can. Here, the fluctuating image when the power is turned on is a “◯” symbol displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 83 (a). In addition to the "○" symbol, the "x" symbol is also displayed as a variable image. By alternately displaying the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol, the variable image notifies that the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is being displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed, the hit of the special symbol is notified, and when the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed, the miss of the special symbol is notified.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that there is no telescopic accessory scenario (S3201: No), then the effect based on the received fluctuation pattern command is the effect of moving the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9). Whether or not (whether or not there is a tilted character scenario) is determined (S3203). In the process of S3203, when it is determined that there is a tilting accessory scenario (S3203: Yes), the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) provided with the sub display device 690 is movable in the fluctuation, and the sub This is a case where an effect that makes the display device 690 difficult to see is executed. In this case, the correction information for tilting accessory movement is set in the correction information storage area 233m from the correction information table 234a3 (S3204), and the process proceeds to S3205. Even when the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) provided with the sub-display device 690 is moved by the process of S3204 and the sub-display device 690 is difficult to see, the player can perform the third operation. The variable image when the power is turned on displayed on the symbol display device 81 can be easily visually recognized.

Further, in the processing of S3202 and S3204 described above, the display that is easy for the player to see is displayed by setting the information for correcting the display mode (position, size) of the variation image when the power is turned on according to the effect to be executed. It is controlled so as to be an aspect. As a result, it is not necessary to hold an image in a display mode that is easy for the player to see for each effect to be executed, so that the area of ROM 234 can be saved.

When the processing of S3202 or S3204 is completed, the special effect correction flag 233n is set to ON (S3205), and this processing is completed. The special effect correction flag 233n, which is turned on in the process of S3205, is displayed in various power-on image display modes (position, size) when the telescopic accessory scenario or the tilting accessory scenario is executed in the special effect correction process (S3007). This is a flag indicating that the information for correcting the above) has been set. By setting this special effect correction flag 233n to ON, the correction information for the normal effect is executed even though the variation based on the telescopic accessory scenario and the tilting accessory scenario is executed in the effect information correction process described later. Can be prevented (suppressed) from being stored in the correction information storage area 233 m. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3203 that there is no tilting accessory scenario (S3203: No), this process is terminated as it is.

As described above, the tilting operation unit (tilting accessory) 600 has a first curtain member 624 and a second curtain member 625 (see FIG. 50), and these curtain members are tilting operation units. The sub-display device 690 provided in the above can be switched between an open state in which the player can see it and a closed state in which the sub-display device 690 is difficult for the player to see. Therefore, when the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are in the closed state, the image to be displayed on the sub display device 690 may be corrected to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. Further, whether or not the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are closed depends on the accessory scenario in the production, as in the case of determining the operation of the telescopic accessory or the tilting accessory described above. It may be determined based on the origin sensor, or the origin sensor detecting the origin positions of the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625, and it is determined that these curtain members are in the origin position (closed state). When this is done, the display of the sub display device 690 may be switched to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, even when the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are closed, that is, the sub display device 690 becomes difficult to see due to a defect or the like, the display image of the sub display device 690 is corrected. Then, it can be displayed on the third symbol display device.

Further, in the tilting operation unit (tilting accessory) 600 and the expansion / contraction effect device (expansion accessory) 540 described above, the correction information is similarly changed based on the determination result of the origin sensor that detects the origin position. May be good. As a result, even if the operation is different from the character scenario due to a failure of the character, the state is accurately detected and various effects are displayed in the game of the third symbol display device 81 or the sub display device 690. It can be displayed in a position that can be seen by a person.

In the present embodiment, the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves up and down and the case where the tilting operation unit 600 tilts are described, but the tilting operation unit 600 slides on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. When an operating scenario is set, the same processing as that executed in this special effect correction processing (S3007) may be executed. Even when the tilting operation unit 600 slides, a series of operation scenarios for the sliding operation are set by the voice lamp control device 113. In that case, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies by the display variation pattern command that the variation pattern executes the slide operation. In that case, the slide operation correction information is set in the correction information storage area 233 m. Here, the slide motion correction information is corrected and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the slide motion, and the power-on variation image (“◯” symbol (or “x”) shown in FIG. 83 (a). The display coordinates are set so that the (variable display))) moves to a position not on the back side of the tilting operation unit 600 that slides. In the present embodiment, the variable image (see FIG. 83 (a)) is displayed on the upper left of the third symbol display device 81, but when it is configured to be displayed on the lower right, the tilting operation unit 600 is displayed from the right side. When the sliding operation is performed to the left, the display is set by gradually sliding (moving) to the left in accordance with the operation of the tilting operation unit 600. Such coordinate information is set in the slide motion correction information. Further, when the tilting operation unit 600 is slid to the left in accordance with the operation of the tilting operation unit 600 and is moved to the area where the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, the tilting operation unit 600 is displayed. The coordinates may be set so as to move to and display the sub-display device 690 built in the device. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily display a variable image (see FIG. 83A) indicating that the special symbol is being changed by the player. In the present embodiment, the object to be moved and displayed is a variable image (see FIG. 83 (a)), but it may be a third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or it may be a reserved symbol. It may be a design such as a character. The above-mentioned slide operation correction information is set in the display control device 114 in advance corresponding to the operation scenario of the slide operation set in the voice lamp control device 113, and the coordinate information is set according to the slide operation timing. Is set to be variable.

Further, in this control example, the display position of the image when various powers are turned on is corrected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image (character image) displayed by the third symbol display device 81 or the sub display device 690 during normal production is performed. Or, the display position of the variable symbol) may be corrected.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2904, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2904: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2906). If there is a display variable type command (S2906: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2907), and the process returns to the process of S2901.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2907) will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (b). FIG. 120B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete out of order, or chance eye) is supported. The stop type table is determined (S3101), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S3102).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S3102 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S3103), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3102 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2804), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S3102 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S3103, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, but before drawing is performed by the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is transmitted from the character ROM 234. The image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness of the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3101, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S3102.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the processing of S2906 (S2906: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot related command among the unprocessed commands (S2908). If it is determined that there is a jackpot-related command in the processing of S2908 (S2908: Yes), the jackpot-related command processing is executed (S2909), and the process returns to the processing of S2901.

Here, the details of the jackpot-related command processing (S2909) will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related command processing (S2909). This jackpot-related command process (S2909) is a process corresponding to various commands (display opening command, display round number command, display ending command) for executing the jackpot effect received from the voice lamp control device 113. It is a process to be executed.

In the jackpot-related command processing (S2909), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S3301). If it is determined in the process of S3301 that there is a display opening command (S3301: Yes), the opening command process (S3302) is executed to shift to the process of S3303.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S3302) will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (a). FIG. 123 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In this opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3401). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3401 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S. S3404). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3405), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3404, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401 The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S3402. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, when this opening command processing is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, the image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced due to the slow read speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data used for the above to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect of the third symbol display device 81 is completed, and thus indicates the first round. If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There was a risk that time would be generated and the player would be anxious about whether or not the operation had stopped, or had a sense of discomfort.

Further, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects (for 16 rounds) in the third symbol display device 81 are completed. If the image data required for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, there is a lot of waiting time from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. There is a risk that the player may feel uneasy or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped.

Therefore, in this control example, when the display opening command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and by the time the jackpot variation display is completed on the third symbol display device 81. , Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects are performed in the third symbol display device 81 (for 5 rounds). ) When the process is completed, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not feel anxious or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is started from there. The third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is completed by the end of the variable effect that is a big hit. As a result, when the fluctuation effect that becomes a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the opening effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is worried that the operation is not stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Returning to FIG. 122, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3301, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S3303), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S3303: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3305.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S3304) will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). FIG. 123B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S3304). This round number command process (S3304) executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S3501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3502).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3501, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3505), the round number command processing is ended, and the process returns to the jackpot-related command processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 122. In the processing of S3303, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S3303: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3305), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S3305: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3306), and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, in the process of S3305, if there is no display ending command (S3305: No), the process of S3306 is skipped and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S3306) will be described with reference to FIG. 124 (a). FIG. 124 (a) is a flowchart showing the ending command process (S3306). This ending command process (S3306) executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer 233d Is set to (S3601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3602).

Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3603). S3604). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3605), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2908, if it is determined that there is no jackpot related command (S2908: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notice command among the unprocessed commands (S2910), and the display notice is given. If there is a command (S2910: Yes), the advance notice command processing is executed (S2911), and the process returns to the processing of S2901.

Here, the details of the advance notice command processing (S2911) will be described with reference to FIG. 124 (b). FIG. 124 (b) is a flowchart showing the advance notice command processing. This notice command process executes the process corresponding to the display notice command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the advance notice command processing, first, the advance notice effect display data table indicated by the display advance notice command is determined, and the determined advance notice effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S3701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3702).

Then, based on the advance notice effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3705), the notice command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By this advance notice command processing (S2911), the display data table buffer 233d is set based on the advance notice effect display data table, so that the advance notice effect set in the voice lamp control device 113 corresponding to the effect mode is the third symbol. It will be displayed on the display device 81.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 119. In the process of S2910, if it is determined that there is no display notice command (S2910: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display entry effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2912). If there is a ball entry effect command for display (S2912: Yes), the ball entry effect command process is executed (S2913), and the process returns to the process of S2901.

Here, the details of the ball entry effect command processing (S2913) will be described with reference to FIG. 125 (a). FIG. 125A is a flowchart showing the ball entry effect command processing (S2913). This ball entry effect command process (S2913) executes a process corresponding to the display ball entry effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ball entry effect command processing, first, the ball entry effect display data table indicated by the display ball entry effect command is determined. Then, the determined ball entry effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed so as to be displayed in the display area (any of the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d) indicated by the command. Set to buffer 233d (S3801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3802).

Then, based on the ball entry effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3805), the ball entry effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By this ball entry effect command processing (S2913), the display data table buffer 233d is set based on the ball entry effect display data table and the display area indicated by the command, and is selected by the voice lamp control device 113. The ball entry effect is sequentially displayed in each display area (first area 81a to fourth area 81d) of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the ball entry effects are displayed in order in the four display areas (first area 81a to fourth area 81d) provided on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a maximum of four types of ball entry effects are displayed. Can be displayed simultaneously on the third symbol display device 81.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 119. In the process of S2912, if it is determined that there is no display entry ball effect command (S2912: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display specific time effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2914). ), If there is a specific time effect command for display (S2914: Yes), the specific time effect command process is executed (S2915), and the process returns to the process of S2901.

Here, the details of the specific time effect command processing (S2915) will be described with reference to FIG. 125 (b). FIG. 125 (b) is a flowchart showing the specific time effect command processing (S2915). This specific time effect command process (S2915) executes a process corresponding to the display specific time effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the specific time effect command processing, first, the specific time effect display data table indicated by the specific time effect command for display is determined, and the determined specific time effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S3901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3902).

Then, based on the specific time effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3905), the ball entry effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By this specific time effect command processing (S2915), the display data table buffer 233d is set based on the specific time effect display data table, so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) selected by the voice lamp control device 113 is the first. 3 It will be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2914, if it is determined that there is no display specific time effect command (S2914: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display effect mode change command among the unprocessed commands (S2916). ), If there is a display effect mode change command (S2916: Yes), the effect mode change command process is executed (S2917), and the process returns to the process of S2901.

Here, the details of the effect mode change command process (S2917) will be described with reference to FIG. 126 (a). FIG. 126 (a) is a flowchart showing the effect mode change command process (S2917). This effect mode change command process (S2917) executes a process corresponding to the display specific time effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the effect mode change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233p is set to on (S4001), the effect mode flag 233r corresponding to the effect mode type based on the received command is set to on (S4002), and this process is performed. To finish.

The back image change flag 233p set to be turned on in the process of S4001 causes the process (S491 to S4915) for changing the back image to be executed in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) described later. Further, the effect mode flag 233r set to be turned on in S4002 is referred to in the process for changing the rear image in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) (see S4911 in FIG. 133), and is set to the effect mode flag 233r. The back image is changed based on the set effect mode type. As a result, the rear image can be changed in response to the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the rear image can be changed based on the change of the effect mode, and the player can easily recognize that the effect mode has been changed.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2916, if it is determined that there is no display effect mode command (S2916: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop command among the unprocessed commands (S2918), and the display is performed. If there is a stop command (S2918: Yes), the stop command process is executed (S2919), and the process returns to the process of S2901.

Here, the details of the stop command processing (S2919) will be described with reference to FIG. 126 (b). FIG. 126 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop command process (S2919). This stop command process (S2919) executes a process corresponding to the display stop command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop command process, the special effect correction flag 233n is set to off (S4101), and this process ends. As described above, the special effect correction flag 233n set to off in the process of S4101 is the expansion / contraction effect device in the special effect correction process (S3007) executed when the variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. Correction information corresponding to the correction information storage area 233 m when there is a telescopic accessory scenario in which 540 (see FIG. 9) is movable, or when there is a tilting accessory scenario in which the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is movable. The correction information of the table 234a3 is stored and turned on.

This stop command process is a process executed based on the stop command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 when each variation effect is stopped. Therefore, when the variation effect based on the telescopic accessory scenario or the tilting accessory scenario is stopped, the special effect correction flag 233n is turned off. As a result, in the effect information correction process (see S2804) executed in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118 (b)), the correction information for the normal effect or the correction information for the demo effect is set in the correction information storage area 233 m. By doing so, the image in which the coordinates and the like displayed based on the variation effect of the telescopic accessory scenario or the tilting accessory scenario have been corrected will be corrected to the original coordinates and displayed.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 119. In the processing of S2918, if it is determined that there is no display stop command (S2918: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2920), and there is an error command. If (S2920: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2921), and the process returns to S2901 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2921) will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S4202). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4201, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S4202 is determined, and the error type is supported. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S4202 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 119. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2920 (S2920: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2922), and the process returns to the process of S2901.

Other unprocessed commands include, for example, a rear image change command. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the rear image change command is received, the rear image change command process is executed (S2922). In this back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 223p for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S4703) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command is set to ON. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are turned on. Set the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type to off, end this back image change command processing, and return to the command judgment processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 223p set by the rear image change command process is turned on, the changed rear image type is specified from the set rear image discrimination flag. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the set back image discrimination flag at that time The type of back image to be displayed is specified in, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. The video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the back image change command processing, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

In the processing of S2901 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2901: Yes). ), The processing of S2902 to S2922 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2901 to S2922 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2901 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2809) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, the commands required to display the power-on image (see FIG. 82) from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 120 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 120 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and others. For the command of, the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Further, when the power is cut off during the fluctuation of the special symbol and then restored, the special transmission is performed in S1010 of the start-up process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 described above when the power is turned on. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives an effect permission command including the fact that the symbol is changing, the display control device in the process of S1504 of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. A simple command determination process (S2809) when the display control device 114 receives a variation start command (received process in S1616 of the command determination process (FIG. 107, S1511)) of the variation image when the power is turned on, which is output to 114. In the simple display setting process (S2810) executed after the reception process, the start of the variation display (the display data table of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d) is set. At the timing when the main control device 110 outputs the instruction to start the fluctuation of the variable image at power-on corresponding to the special symbol that was fluctuating when the power is turned off, the variable image at power-on is the power supply of the resident video RAM 235. Since the image has already been transferred to the variable image area 235b at the time of input, the start of the variable display is immediately executed (display start) in the third symbol display device 81. In this case, the fluctuation images when the power is turned on shown in FIGS. 82 (b) to 82 (c) are displayed alternately.

It should be noted that the effect permission command based on the game that was executed when the power was turned off is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 101), and then executed based on the effect permission command. A stop command for stopping the variable display is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display stop command to the display control device 114 based on the reception of this stop command. The display control device 114 determines that a display stop command has been received by a simple command determination process (see 118 (b)), and uses a display mode based on the received command to change the power-on variation image (FIG. 82 (b) or FIG. (See (c)) is stopped.

If the display control device 114 completes the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 before receiving the display stop command for stopping the power-on fluctuation image, only the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. Is displayed at the coordinate position (see FIG. 83 (a)) for the normal effect of the third symbol display device 81. This is because the display stop command for stopping the variable image when the power is turned on defines the stop mode of the variable image when the power is turned on, so that the stop mode for normal production cannot be selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display control device 114 may determine and display the stop mode based on the stop mode (big hit or miss) of the fluctuating image when the power is turned on. As a result, even when the fluctuation of the fluctuating image when the power is turned on is executed, it is possible to switch to the normal production from the time when the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is completed, and the interest of the player can be improved. ..

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 120A) executed in this case, in the processing of S3001, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3002, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2803), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 128, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4301: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S4302 to S4304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S4302), S4303 to S4304 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S4303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S4304).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process (S4304) will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S4401).

In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and each sprite is required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle. Various parameters are determined.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4401, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 128. After the warning image setting process (S4304) or in the process of S4303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4303: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4305.

In S4305, the pointer update process is executed (S4305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Therefore, the respective values are updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S4501, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S4502). As a result, if it is End information (S4502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S4503), and if it is a demo display data table (S4503: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S4504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4505), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S4503: No). S4506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 128 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S4306 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4308). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S4308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S4309).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S4309: Yes), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S4310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Full data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4311). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S4314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2804), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S4315, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4309, if the confirmation display flag is off instead of on (S4309: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S4316). If the demo display flag is off (S4316: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect. Therefore, the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S4317) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4318). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4320), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S4321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S4316, if the demo display flag is on (S4316: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2810) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on ends, the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. A process of setting the display data table, which specifies that the display data table (see 82) is to be stopped and displayed, in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the details of the effect information correction process (S2805), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the effect information correction process (S2805). This effect information correction process (S2805) corrects the positions at which various power-on images (main image at power-on, variable image at power-on, title image at power-on) are displayed during normal effect or demo effect. It is a process for using.

In the effect information correction process (S2805), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601). If it is determined in the process of S4601 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601: No), the simple image at the time of turning on the power is displayed, so the effect information is not corrected. End the process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4601 that the simple image display flag 233c is off (S4601: Yes), the transfer of the resident image is completed in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 132 (a)) described later. Since the normal effect can be executed, it is next determined whether or not the special effect correction flag 233n is off (S4602).

When it is determined in the process of S4602 that the special effect correction flag 233n is on (S4602: No), the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is movable in the above-mentioned special effect correction process (see FIG. 121). This is a case where the correction information corresponding to the effect based on the telescopic accessory scenario or the tilting accessory scenario in which the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is movable is already stored in the correction information storage area 233m. This process ends as it is without setting the correction information.

On the other hand, in the process of S4602, when it is determined that the special effect correction flag 233n is off (S4602: Yes), the demo display flag is turned off in order to set the correction information according to the currently executed effect. It is determined whether or not it is (S4603).

If it is determined in the process of S4603 that the demo display flag is off (S4603: Yes), it means that the demo effect is not executed, that is, the normal effect is executed. Therefore, the correction information storage area Correction information for normal production is set from the correction information table 234a3 to 233m (S4604), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4603, when it is determined that the demo display flag is on (S4603: No), it means that the demo effect is being executed, so the demo is performed from the correction information table 234a3 to the correction information storage area 233m. The effect correction information is set (S4605), and this process ends.

In this way, in the effect information correction process (S2805), the correction information for correcting the display position of various power-on images according to the state of the pachinko machine 10 (power-on, normal effect, demo effect, etc.) The settings are being made. As a result, in a plurality of states of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform an effect using a common image, so that the capacity of the ROM 234 can be saved. In addition, since it is configured to correct the display mode such as the display position and the enlargement ratio, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to see according to each effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2806), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 132A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4701). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4701: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S4702), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 132 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S4701 (S4701: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4703), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 133.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4702), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2806) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 132 (b). FIG. 132 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4702).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S4801), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4801: Yes). ), Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4802). In the process of S4802, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S4802 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4802: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4802: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4803. Further, as a result of the processing of S4801, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4801: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4803.

In the process of S4803, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4803), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4803: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4804), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S4803 (S4803: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S4805), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2809 in FIG. 118 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2810 in FIG. 118 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 119 to 127) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 128 to 130) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) (see S4701: No in FIG. 132 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 becomes a resident video RAM 235 excluding the main image at power-on, the variable image at power-on, and the title image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. All resident target image data to be resident can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Further, in this control example, various power-on images (main image at power-on, variable image at power-on, title image at power-on) displayed at power-on are corrected in the display position in the normal production. Was configured to be available. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare images to be used at the time of turning on the power and at the time of normal production, so that the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved.

Further, in this control example, the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 is treated as one image data, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the sub display device according to the coordinates. Whether to display on 690 is controlled. As a result, it is not necessary to separately control (transfer, etc.) the images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, so that the control load can be reduced. Not limited to this, image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 may be provided respectively.

Further, since the sub display device 690 has a lower resolution than the third symbol display device 81, the amount of image data displayed on the sub display device 690 is the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It will be less than the amount. Therefore, in the display control device 114, the image (title image at power-on) to be displayed on the sub-display device 690, which has a small amount of image data, is first stored in the resident video RAM, so that the power is turned on. It is possible to shorten the time from when the image is displayed.

Here, the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 is composed of one image data as described above. Therefore, when the power-on title image (see FIG. 82 (a)), which is the power-on image, is displayed on the sub-display device 690 when the power is turned on, the area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 ( 0 data may be set for the data (area of 800 horizontal × 600 vertical) as shown in FIG. 81. Not limited to this, when the power is turned on, first, the image data to be displayed on the sub display device 690 is matched with the resolution of the sub display device 690 (see FIG. 81, image data of 400 horizontal × 300 vertical). May be used to display on the sub-display device 690. In this case, when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 690 (main image at power-on, variable image at power-on, etc.) is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 and Using the image data (see FIG. 81, width 1200 x height 600) for displaying on the sub display device 690, the display is switched between the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. As a result, the amount of image data to be displayed and set on the sub display device 690 when the power is turned on can be reduced. Therefore, the image when the power is turned on (title image when the power is turned on) is displayed on the sub display device 690 after the power is turned on. It is possible to shorten the time until.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, a normal image transfer setting process (S4703), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2806) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4703).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4305) of the display setting process (S2803) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S4901). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4902), and if it is transfer data information (S4902: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4903) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4904), and the process proceeds to S4905.

Further, in the process of S4902, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S4902: No), the processes of S4903 and S4904 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4905. In the process of S4905, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4905), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4905: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4906).

In the process of S4906, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S4906 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4906: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4906: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4907. Further, as a result of the processing of S4905, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S4905: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4907.

In the process of S4907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4907), and if the transfer start flag is on (S4907: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S4908), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4903 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S4913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4907: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 223p is on (S4909). If the rear image change flag 223p is not on but off (S4909: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change 223r flag is on (S4909: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 223p is set to off (S4910), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the back image discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4911). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4912), and the process proceeds to S4913.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S4909, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S4913, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4913). The discrimination in the processing of S4913 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S4913, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4913: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4913 (S4913: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4914). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S4914, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4915), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. The update of the stored image data discrimination flag 233j sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data to "on" as described above, and also sets the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing this normal image transfer process, the back image is changed. Of the image data used in the above, the image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2807), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2804) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2806), the drawing list shown in FIG. 87 is generated (S5001). That is, in the processing of S5001, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2804). , Corresponds the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing to the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. As various drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2806), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S5002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the processing of S5002 (S5003). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 118 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the first control example, the display image used when the power is turned on is controlled so as to be corrected and used at the time of normal production or the like. As a result, a common display image can be used both when the power is turned on and when the normal production is performed, so that the capacity of the ROM can be saved.

Further, in this control example, in the effect in which a specific accessory (expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9)) is movable, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 are used. It is controlled to correct the content of the effect displayed in. As a result, in the effect of moving a specific accessory, for example, when the third symbol display device 81 becomes difficult to see, the display contents displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are displayed on the sub display device 690. By doing so, it is possible to make the game machine easy for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents.

Further, in the effect that the vertical movement unit 400 is movable and the door member 470 is opened, the opening / closing drive motor 466 for keeping the door member 470 in the closed state is not excited when the door member 470 is dropped and moved. Control (energization stop control). As a result, even if the opening / closing drive motor 466 is not driven, the door member 470 is opened by the inertial force acting on the door member 470 when the door member 470 is dropped and moved, so that the power consumption can be reduced.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, when a specific advance notice effect is executed based on the ball entering the winning opening in the time effect period that is periodically executed, the effect executed during the time effect period is restricted. It is controlled to do. As a result, when the countdown effect, which is a specific advance notice effect, is executed, the countdown effect executed during the time effect period can be limited. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is confused by the overlapping countdown effects during the time effect period.

Further, the ball entry effect displayed based on the entry into the winning opening is sequentially displayed in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display area. As a result, even when the interval at which the game ball enters the winning opening is short, the period for displaying the ball entry effect can be extended, and the game machine makes it easy for the player to visually recognize the ball entry effect. be able to.

Note that this control example is not limited to the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment, and may be executed by any of the pachinko machines 10 of each of the above-described embodiments, or each of the above-described embodiments may be combined. It may be executed by the pachinko machine 10.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 156. In the above-described first control example, the ball entry effect executed in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the time effect period (effect mode B) executed periodically (5 minutes every hour), and the time effect period By executing a wide variety of display effects such as a specific time effect executed during (effect mode B), the player's interest is improved. In the first control example, the time effect period and the start time of the specific time effect are set when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. As a result, it is possible to start each effect (time effect, specific time effect, etc.) at the same timing for the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in which the power is turned on at the same timing, so that the plurality of pachinko machines 10 can be started. It is possible to perform a unified production with.

In addition to this, in the second control example, a technique capable of suitably controlling the operation of the tilting operation unit 600 and the like will be described. Here, as described above, the accessory such as the tilting operation unit 600 is driven by a drive motor composed of a stepping motor or the like. It is generally known that this drive motor is more likely to cause individual differences and is more likely to deteriorate over time than display devices (third symbol display device 81, sub-display device 690). That is, when image data is set for the display device, problems such as delay in display hardly occur, but when operation data is set for the drive motor, the drive speed decreases due to aged deterioration or the like. There is a possibility that problems such as (decrease in torque) and step-out may occur. That is, even if the same operation scenario is set, there is a possibility that the number of operation steps and the operation speed may vary, so that different operations may be executed in each pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, in the second control example, the operating status of the tilting operation unit 600, the sliding operation unit 700, etc. is checked every time the power is turned on, and if deterioration occurs, a correction value for correcting the operation scenario is set. Configured to set. As a result, in each pachinko machine 10, the operations of various accessories driven by the drive motor can be suitably executed.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 136, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 for detecting the slide operation position of the slide operation unit 700 in the present embodiment will be described. As described above, the base member 710 of the slide operation unit 700 has a slide origin sensor 717 for detecting whether or not the support column member 720 is in the origin position (retracted position), and whether or not the support member 720 is in the overhang position. A slide position sensor 718 for detection is provided (see FIG. 49). Since these are composed of the same type of sensors, only the slide position detection sensor 718 will be described here, and the description of the slide origin detection sensor 717 will be omitted.

FIG. 136A shows the positional relationship between the light-shielding plate 726a and the slide position detection sensor 718 in a state where the slide operation unit 700 is in the process of sliding in the direction from the origin (retracted position) to the overhanging position. It is a figure shown. As shown in FIG. 136 (a), the slide position detection sensor 718 is provided with a light-shielding detection unit 718a. The light-shielding detection unit 718a indicates both the light-emitting unit and the light-receiving unit described above, and the light-shielding plate 726a depends on whether or not the light emitted from the light-emitting unit of the light-shielding detection unit 718a is received by the light-receiving unit. Can be determined whether or not is in the overhanging position.

In the example of FIG. 136 (a), the light-shielding plate 726a is arranged in the right direction in the front view from the light-shielding detection unit 718a. That is, it shows a state in which the light-shielding detection unit 718a and the light-shielding plate 726a are misaligned. In this case, since there is nothing blocking between the light emitting unit of the light blocking detection unit 718a and the light receiving unit, the light from the light emitting unit is received by the light receiving unit. While the light receiving unit receives light, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is in the L (low) state. The output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is received by the voice lamp control device 113, and if the output is L (low), it is determined that the support column member 720 has not reached the overhanging position.

On the other hand, when the left end of the light-shielding plate 726a hangs on the right end of the light-shielding detection unit 718a, the light emitted from the light-emitting unit begins to be shielded by the light-shielding plate 726a (see FIG. 136 (b)). Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (c), when the light-shielding plate 726a is arranged so as to completely overlap the light-shielding detection unit 718, the light emitted from the light-emitting part of the light-shielding detection unit 718a is completely shielded. .. That is, the light receiving unit cannot receive light. In this case, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is set to H (high). When the voice lamp control device 113 detects that the output from the slide position detection sensor 718 is H (high), it determines that the support column member 720 is in the overhanging position. Here, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is H (high) or L (low) based on the voltage value of the output signal. That is, if the voltage output from the slide position detection sensor 718 is 5V, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is determined to be H (high), and if the voltage is 0V, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is L. To determine.

Since the slide origin sensor 717 has the same configuration, the output is set to H (high) if the support column member 720 is in the origin position (retract position), and the output is L if it deviates from the origin position (retract position). Set to (low). The voice lamp control device 113 only determines whether the output of each sensor is H or L, and the support member 720 is roughly arranged (whether it is the origin position or the overhang position, or between them. Is the position of) can be easily grasped.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138, the tilting origin sensor 618 for detecting whether or not the effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is in the origin position (inverted state) will be described. The tilt origin sensor 618 is composed of the same type of sensor as the slide origin detection sensor 717 and the slide position detection sensor 718 described above.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a case where the effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is in the origin position (inverted state). As shown in the figure, when the effect member 620 is in the origin position (inverted state), the sensor shielding portion 627 provided on the effect member 620 side is the light emitting portion of the tilted origin sensor 618 provided on the base member 610 side. Since it is arranged between the light receiving part and the light receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting part is blocked and does not reach the light receiving part. That is, the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 is set to H (high). By outputting this H (high) signal to the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to notify that the effect member is in the origin position (inverted state).

FIG. 138 (a) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the tilt origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding portion 627 when the effect member 620 tilts to the left in the front view (swing motion). 138 (b) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the tilting origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding portion 627 when the effect member 620 tilts to the right in the front view (swinging motion). is there.

As shown in FIG. 138 (a), when the effect member 620 tilts to the left in the front view (swing operation), the sensor shielding portion 627 provided on the effect member 620 also interlocks with the effect member 620. And variable to the upper left. As a result, the tilted origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding portion 627 are displaced from each other, so that the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the tilted origin sensor 618 can be received by the light receiving portion. Similar to the other sensors described above, the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 is set to L (low) while the light from the light emitting unit is received by the light receiving unit. By outputting this H (high) signal to the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to notify that the effect member 620 is deviated from the origin position (inverted state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 138 (b), when the effect member 620 tilts to the right in the front view (swing operation), the sensor shielding portion 627 provided on the effect member 620 also becomes the effect member 620. In conjunction with this, it changes in the lower right direction. As a result, the tilted origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding portion 627 are displaced from each other, so that the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the tilted origin sensor 618 can be received by the light receiving portion. Therefore, also in this case, the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 is set to L (low), and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified.

In this way, by using the tilting origin sensor 618, it is possible to easily detect whether or not the effect member 620 is in the origin position (inverted state) and notify the voice lamp control device 113.

In this control example, a single tilting origin sensor 618 is used to determine only whether or not the effect member 620 is at the origin position, but the present invention is not limited to this mode. Sensors for detecting whether or not the effect member 620 is in the maximum movable position when the tilting motion (swinging motion) is performed on the right side and the left side may be provided, respectively. With this configuration, when the tilting motion (swinging motion) reaches the maximum movable position, the swinging motion can be reliably stopped and the swinging direction can be reversed in the opposite direction (origin direction). it can. Therefore, when the swinging motion is executed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the effect member 620 from operating beyond the range of motion, so that the possibility of failure or abnormal operation can be reduced.

<About the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 142. First, FIG. 139 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example.

As shown in FIG. 139, in this control example, various sensors 230 are electrically connected to the input / output ports 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. Specifically, the various sensors 230 are provided with at least the tilt origin sensor 618, the slide origin detection sensor 717, and the slide position detection sensor 718 described above. In addition to these, various sensors such as a sensor for detecting the origin position of the vertical operation unit 400 and a sensor for detecting the origin position of the combined operation unit 500 are provided. Since the various sensors 230 can accurately grasp the operating state of each accessory, the operation of the accessory can be suitably controlled.

Further, in this control example, as other devices constituting the device 228, the slide drive motor 751 for performing the slide operation of the slide operation unit 700 and the tilt operation (swing operation) of the tilt operation unit 600 are performed. A tilting drive motor 661 for this purpose is provided. Each operating unit can be driven by these motors.

Next, the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 140 (a). As shown in FIG. 140 (a), in addition to the configuration of ROM 222 in the first control example, an operation scenario table 222c and a swing area table 222d are added to the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. Has been done.

The operation scenario table 222c is a data table that defines the operation contents when the effect using each accessory is executed. More specifically, it is a data table in which set values (operating speed, number of operating steps, operating direction, etc.) to be set for various drive motors corresponding to each accessory are specified. The details of this operation scenario table 222c will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142 (a).

FIG. 141 (a) is a block diagram showing an operation scenario table 222c. In this operation scenario table 222c, data is stored for each type of accessory that can be driven (variable). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 141 (a), for example, when an effect of driving the slide operation unit 700 is set, the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the slide drive motor 751 is used. Set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the tilting drive motor 661 when the slide operation table 222c1 that defines the set value to be set for the setting value or the effect of driving the tilting operation unit 600 is set. A tilting operation table 222c2 or the like that defines the set value to be set is provided.

These will be described more specifically with reference to FIGS. 141 (b) and 141 (c). FIG. 141 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the above-mentioned slide operation table 222c1. As shown in FIG. 141 (b), in the slide operation table 222c1, the set value set for the motor control IC (motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer 223n indicating the progress of the setting based on the operation scenario. (Operating speed, number of operating steps, and operating direction) are specified.

Here, the operating speed indicates the frequency with which the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) for setting the operation of one step to the slide drive motor 751, and the signal output per second ( It is expressed by the number of pulses) (pps, pulses per second). For example, if the operating speed is 100 pps, it means that the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) 100 times per second to the slide drive motor 751. That is, it means that the slide drive motor 751 is driven at a speed of 100 steps per second. The number of operation steps indicates the number of operations executed by the slide drive motor 751. In other words, a signal (pulse) for setting the operation of one step from the motor driver to the slide drive motor 751. ) Is output. For example, the number of operation steps of 120 means that the operation of one step is set 120 times for the slide drive motor 751. Further, the operating direction means the driving direction of the sliding drive motor 751 (rotational direction of the motor), and two types of directions, a positive direction and a negative direction, can be set. In the slide drive motor 751, the direction from the retracted position (origin position) to the overhanging position is a positive direction, and the direction from the overhanging position to the retracted position (origin position) is a negative direction. By setting these set values for the motor driver for driving the slide drive motor 751, the corresponding operation can be accurately executed.

As shown in FIG. 141 (b), the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223n is an operation for sliding the support column member 720 of the slide operation unit 700 from the retracted position (origin position) to the overhanging position (outward route). Operation) is associated. Specifically, 100 pps is specified as the operation speed, 120 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is specified as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when the timing for driving the slide operation unit 700 is reached in the effect.

Note that 120 steps means a design value of the number of steps up to the overhanging position. That is, it means that the support column member 720 reaches the detection position of the slide position detection sensor 718 (see FIG. 136 (c)) by driving the slide drive motor 751 in 120 steps in the operation as designed. Here, the operation as designed means that the slide drive motor 751 accurately executes the same operation without step-out or idling, and various gears for transmitting the driving force of the motor to the support column member 720. It means the operation when the above and the like rotate accurately.

The value "02H" of the operation pointer 223n is associated with an operation (return operation) for sliding the support column member 720 of the slide operation unit 700 from the overhanging position to the retracted position (origin position). Specifically, 100 pps is specified as the operation speed, 120 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when it is time to retract the slide operation unit 700 to the origin position (evacuation position) in the effect. The timing of this evacuation is predetermined according to the type of effect.

Further, FIG. 141B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the tilting operation table 222c2 described above. Similar to the slide operation table 222c1, the tilt operation table 222c2 also has set values (operation speed, number of operation steps, and operation direction) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer 223n. It is stipulated. The operation pointer values "01H" and "02H" are associated with set values for tilting the effect member 620 to the left in the front view (swinging operation). That is, the operation pointer value "01H" includes an operation speed of 100 pps, 10 operation steps, and a forward operation direction as set values for tilting the operation from the origin position (inverted state) to the left in the front view. It is stipulated. When this set value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 operates at an operating speed of 100 pps in 10 steps to the left in the front view.

Further, the operation pointer value "02H" has an operation speed of 100 pps, 10 operation steps, and a negative direction as set values for returning the effect member 620 tilted to the left in the front view to the origin position (inverted state). The operating directions of are specified respectively. When this set value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 operates at an operating speed of 100 pps in 10 steps to the left in the front view. By setting the set value corresponding to the operation pointer value "01H" and setting the set value corresponding to the operation pointer value "02H" after the set operation is completed, the effect member 620 is viewed right from the origin position. After performing a 10-step tilting motion (swinging motion) in the direction, a return motion to the origin position (inverted state) is performed.

Further, the motion pointer values "03H" and "04H" are associated with set values for tilting the effect member 620 to the right in the front view (swinging motion). That is, the operation pointer value "03H" includes an operation speed of 100 pps, 10 operation steps, and a forward operation direction as set values for tilting the operation from the origin position (inverted state) to the right in the front view. It is stipulated. When this set value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 operates at an operating speed of 100 pps in 10 steps to the right in the front view.

Further, the operation pointer value "02H" has an operation speed of 100 pps, 10 operation steps, and a negative direction as set values for returning the effect member 620 tilted to the left in the front view to the origin position (inverted state). The operating directions of are specified respectively. When this set value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 operates at an operating speed of 100 pps in 10 steps to the left in the front view. By setting the set value corresponding to the operation pointer value "03H" and setting the set value corresponding to the operation pointer value "04H" after the set operation is completed, the effect member 620 is viewed right from the origin position. After performing a 10-step tilting motion (swinging motion) in the direction, a return motion to the origin position (inverted state) is performed.

In this way, by defining the setting contents for the motor driver in association with the value of the operation pointer 223n, the value of the operation pointer 223n can be updated and the setting value corresponding to the updated value can be set. , The operation of the effect member 620 can be easily set.

In the operation scenario table 222c, in addition to the slide operation table 222c1 (see FIG. 141 (b)) and the tilt operation table 222c2 (see FIG. 141 (c)) described above, a driving accessory (vertical operation unit 400 and the like) A dedicated data table is specified for each type of the combined operation unit 500, etc. (not shown). By referring to the table corresponding to each accessory defined in the operation scenario table 222c and outputting the set value to the corresponding motor driver, the same operation can be executed every time in the corresponding effect.

In reality, the motors, gears, etc. may have operation variations due to individual differences, deterioration over time, etc. Therefore, even if the set values specified in the operation scenario table 222c are set at the same timing, the desired operation can be performed. You may not be able to do it. The details will be described later, but in this control example, in order to absorb the influence of the above-mentioned variation, it is measured (analyzed) how much the operation of the accessory deviates from the design value when the power is turned on, and the analysis result is obtained. It is configured to correct (correct) the setting value of the slide operation accordingly. That is, it is configured to add (or subtract) a correction value for correcting individual variation or the like to the set value specified in the operation scenario table 222c. As a result, even under the influence of individual differences and aging deterioration, the operation of the accessory in each pachinko machine 10 can be executed without discomfort.

Further, the operation scenario table 222c of this control example defines an initial operation table 222c5 in which the setting contents for the motor driver corresponding to each accessory are defined in the initial operation executed based on the power-on of the pachinko machine 10. (See FIG. 141 (a)). By executing the initial operation based on the initial operation table 222c5, it is possible to determine whether or not each accessory operates normally. Further, at the time of executing the initial operation, the content of the tilting motion (swinging motion) of the tilting motion unit 600 and the content of the sliding motion of the sliding motion unit 700 are analyzed, and a correction value for correcting the motion according to the analysis result. Is identified. The details of the initial operation table 222c5 will be described with reference to FIG. 142 (a).

FIG. 142 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the initial operation table 222c5. As shown in FIG. 142 (a), the initial operation table 222c5 is used to set the type of accessory for which the operation is set and the motor driver corresponding to the accessory in association with the value of the operation pointer 223n. Set values (operating speed, number of operating steps, and operating direction) are specified.

More specifically, the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223n is associated with the slide operation unit 700 as the type of accessory, and the operation content is defined as the operation at an operation speed of 100 pps in the forward direction. The number of operation steps is not defined, and the slide operation is repeated in the positive direction (direction of the overhang position) until the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is detected to be H (high). That is, the flow of setting the operation of one step, confirming whether the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is H (high), and setting the operation of one step again if the output remains L (low). The operation is repeated with. The number of operation steps set until the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 becomes H (high) is counted by the correction counter 223w, and the number of operation steps from the origin position to the overhang position is designed after the operation is completed. The difference from the value of 120 steps is analyzed. A correction value for correcting the set value of the slide operation is calculated according to the analyzed difference. Here, when the one-step operation is repeatedly set, there is a delay of, for example, 10 milliseconds with respect to the one-step operation so that the operation speed is the same as when the operation of a plurality of steps is set during the normal game. Set. That is, it is configured so that the operation of one step is set every 10 milliseconds (at an operating speed of 100 pps). As a result, the operation mode can be the same as that during the normal game, so that it is possible to prevent the user from misunderstanding that an abnormality has occurred from the appearance of the operation. In the following description, when the operation is set for each sensor for each step, the delay is set so as to have the same operation speed as during the normal game.

The tilting operation unit 600 is associated with the values "02H" to "05H" of the operation pointer 223n as a type of accessory for setting the initial operation. As the operation content corresponding to the value "02H" of the operation pointer 223n, an operation of 10 steps of operation steps is defined at an operation speed of 100 pps in the forward direction. Further, as the operation content corresponding to the value "03H" of the operation pointer 223n, the operation until the tilt origin sensor 618 is detected at an operation speed of 100 pps in the negative direction is specified. Further, as the operation content corresponding to the value "04H" of the operation pointer 223n, a 10-step operation is defined at an operation speed of 100 pps in the negative direction, and as an operation content corresponding to the value "05H" of the operation pointer 223n, the positive direction The operation that continues until the tilt origin sensor 618 is detected at an operating speed of 100 pps is specified.

Summarizing the initial operations set for the tilt operation unit 600, when the slide operation unit 700 operates to the overhang position and the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the initial operation is updated to "02H", first, The effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is operated 10 steps to the left in the front view. When the 10-step operation is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the initial operation is updated to "03H", and the operation toward the origin (that is, the operation toward the right in the front view) is set. .. This operation is repeatedly executed step by step until it is detected that the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 becomes H (high), similarly to the operation executed at the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223n.

Then, when it is detected that the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 becomes H (high), the value of the operation pointer 223n is updated to "04H", and the operation is performed in 10 steps to the right in the front view (that is, the origin position). The motion in the direction of passing through and further tilting motion) is set. When the operation of these 10 steps is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223n is updated to "05H", and the operation in the origin direction (that is, the operation in the front left direction) is set. This operation is also repeatedly executed step by step until it is detected that the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 becomes H (high), similarly to the operation executed at the value "03H" of the operation pointer 223n. By executing these movements, it is easy to determine whether or not the tilting movements (swinging movements) in the front-view right direction and the front-view left direction, in which the effect member 620 can be driven in the normal gaming state, can be normally executed. You can check.

In the initial operation of the tilting operation unit 600, the number of operation steps until the effect member 620 separated from the origin position returns to the origin position by executing the tilting operation (swinging operation) is the correction counter 223w. After returning to the origin position, the difference from the design value is analyzed. A correction value for correcting the set value of the slide operation is calculated according to the analyzed difference. That is, in this control example, when it is determined that one of the tilting motion and the sliding motion is different from the design motion, the set value (operating speed) for the slide motion unit 700 is corrected. It is configured to do.

The slide operation unit 700 is associated with the value "06H" of the operation pointer 223n as a type of accessory, and an operation with an operation speed of 100 pps in the forward direction is defined as an operation content. As in the operation when the value of the operation pointer 223n is "01H", the operation of one step is repeatedly set until it is detected that the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 becomes H (high).

Although not shown, the initial operation table 222c5 also defines initial operations corresponding to accessories other than the above. By executing the initial operation using the initial operation table 222c5, it is possible to easily determine whether or not there is a defect in the accessory that executes the effect operation in various effects when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the pachinko machine 10 having a problem from playing the game, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In this control example, during the execution of the initial operation based on the initial operation table 222c5, the initial operation is executed and the correction value for correcting the operation speed of the slide operation table 222c1 is calculated, but it is not always the case. It is not necessary to specify the slide operation table 222c1 in the operation scenario table 222c. Instead of calculating the correction value for correcting the operation speed, an operation scenario of the slide operation during the normal game is created based on the number of operation steps of the slide operation at the initial operation and the swing operation, and the RAM 223 is used. It may be configured to be stored. In order to explain this modification more concretely, it is assumed that the number of operation steps to the overhanging position of the slide operation is 125 steps in the initial operation, and the number of operation steps required for one cycle of the swing operation is 45 steps. It is assumed that the case is determined. In this case, first, the actual number of operation steps up to the overhang position determined by the initial operation is set as the number of operation steps of the slide operation. Then, the operation speed of the slide operation for executing the swing operation (3 × 45 steps) of exactly 3 cycles (3 times) until the slide operation of 125 steps is executed is set as the operation speed during the normal game. Set. That is, 100 pps × 125 steps / (3 × 45 steps) = 93 pps is set as the operating speed. Then, when an effect is set in which the sliding motion and the swinging motion are combined and executed during the normal game, the number of motion steps of 125 steps and the motion speed of 93 pps calculated in the initial motion are set to the support member 720. It may be set for each slide operation. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably execute the swinging operation a predetermined number of times (three times) until the strut member 720 slides to the overhanging position. Further, the capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced as compared with the case where the slide operation table 222c1 is specified in the ROM 222.

In this control example, the correction value is calculated based on the number of operation steps in the initial operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the operation time required for the sliding operation and the operation time required for the swinging operation, the deviation from the design operation time is determined, and the correction value for correcting the deviation is calculated. You may. Further, in the above modification, the setting contents of the slide operation are calculated based on the number of operation steps in the initial operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the operation time required for the slide operation and the operation time required for the swing operation, the number of operation steps of the slide operation so as to reach the overhang position of the slide operation at the timing when the swing operation ends three times. And the operating speed may be determined.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 140. The swing area table 222d is a data table that is referred to when the effect member 620 of the tilting accessory 600 is tilted (swinging motion), and defines a direction in which the tilting motion is possible. Here, in this control example, the tilting operation (swinging operation) of the effect member 620 and the sliding operation of the support member 720 are configured to be executed in conjunction with each other. More specifically, while the strut member 720 is performing a sliding motion from the origin position to the overhanging position, the effect member 620 tilts three times (swinging motion) above the strut member 720. It is controlled to perform (the swinging motion to the left and the swinging motion to the right are alternately performed three times each). That is, the position where the effect member 620 executes the swinging motion is changed according to the transition of the sliding motion.

Further, as described above, the tilting operation unit 600 including the effect member 620 is arranged in the lower part of the region formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 5), and the support member 720 is the origin. In the state of being in the position or the overhanging position, the effect member 620 and the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 212 are configured to be close to each other. Therefore, for example, the effect member 620 swings to the right in the front view near the origin position of the slide operation, or the effect member 620 swings to the left in the front view near the overhang position of the slide operation. If the operation is performed, the effect member 620 and the outer wall portion 212 may collide with each other. Therefore, in this control example, the swing area table 222d is defined with an operation direction in which the effect member 620 can execute the swing operation, thereby preventing collision (interference) between the effect member 620 and the outer wall portion 212. ing. When both the sliding operation of the support member 720 and the tilting operation (swinging operation) of the effect member 620 are normal operations (operations as designed), the effect member 620 and the outer wall portion 212 are engaged. The operation scenario is specified so that there is no risk of collision (interference). The swing area table 222d is useful, for example, in an irregular situation where the sliding operation is stopped in the middle due to a defect or the operation speed is changed in the middle.

Here, first, see FIG. 144 for an operation mode when both the tilting operation (swinging operation) of the effect member 620 and the sliding operation of the support member 720 perform a normal operation (operation as designed). I will explain. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the number of operation steps of the swinging operation of the effect member 620 and the number of operation steps of the sliding operation of the support member 720. In this figure, the number of steps "0" indicates the origin position of each accessory (effect member 620, support member 720). Further, the range in which the number of steps of the swinging motion is positive means that the effect member 620 is arranged on the left side of the front view from the origin position, and the range in which the number of steps is negative is from the origin position. Also means that the effect member 620 is arranged on the right side of the front view.

As shown in FIG. 144, until the sliding operation is performed 10 steps, the swinging operation to the left is executed one step for each step of the sliding operation. That is, the swinging motion in the direction away from the outer wall portion 212 arranged on the right side of the origin position of the sliding motion is executed. Then, when the number of steps of the slide operation becomes 10 and the number of steps of the swing operation becomes 10 steps in the positive direction (see position a in FIG. 144), the direction of the swing operation is reversed and the negative direction is obtained. Switch the direction of the swing motion to. This swinging motion in the negative direction is executed beyond the origin position of the effect member 620. When the number of steps of the sliding operation becomes 30, and the effect member 620 reaches a position 10 steps advanced in the negative direction (rightward in the front view) from the origin position (see position b in FIG. 144), the head swings again. Reverse the direction of movement and switch to the forward swinging movement.

Then, after that, the sliding operation proceeds while reversing the direction of the swinging operation every 20 steps (see the c, d, and e positions in FIG. 144). Then, the number of operation steps of the slide operation becomes 120 steps (reaches the overhanging position of the slide operation), and the effect member 620 operates based on the fact that the effect member 620 reaches the origin position from the negative direction (right side of the origin position). Is stopped. Even when returning to the origin position, the strut member is returned to the origin position of the sliding operation while maintaining the relationship shown in FIG. 144.

By executing the slide operation and the swing operation shown in FIG. 144, the same swing operation can be executed each time without causing the effect member 620 to collide with other configurations. On the other hand, since the effect member 620 and the support member 720 are driven by the drive motor, the correspondence relationship shown in FIG. 144 is broken even if the same operation scenario is set due to individual differences in the drive motor and gears and deterioration over time. there is a possibility. In addition, the sliding operation and the swinging operation may be temporarily stopped due to the influence of failure or noise. Even in such a case, if the same set values (operating speed, number of operating steps, operating direction) as in normal operation are set, the effect member 620 may collide (interfere) with the outer wall portion 212. May occur. Therefore, in this control example, by providing the swing region table 222d in which the swing direction in which the swing motion is possible is defined according to the number of steps of the slide motion, the trouble that the effect member 620 interferes with other configurations is suppressed. It is configured to be.

The details of the swing region table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 142 (b). FIG. 142B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the swing area table 222d in this control example. In this control example, every time the effect member 620 reaches the origin position of the swinging motion, the swinging area table 222d is referred to, and the direction of the swinging motion is determined.

As shown in FIG. 142 (b), in the swing area table 222d, the direction (neck) in which the swing operation can be executed is associated with the number of operation steps (progress of the slide operation) of the slide operation of the support member 720. Swingable direction) is specified. In addition, the relationship between the number of operation steps of the slide operation and the swingable direction is the slide operation in the direction from the origin position to the overhang position (outward route) or the direction from the overhang position to the origin position (return route). ) Is specified by distinguishing whether it is a sliding operation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), in the outbound slide operation (slide operation corresponding to the operation pointer value "01H"), the number of operation steps of the slide operation is in the range of "0 to 14". The swingable direction "left side" is associated with it. That is, when it is detected that the effect member 620 has reached the origin position in an operation range relatively close to the origin position of the slide operation (the number of operation steps is in the range of 0 to 14), the effect member 620 is viewed from the front. Swinging to the right is prohibited (regulated). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the outer wall portion 212 and the effect member 620 from being damaged due to the collision between the right side portion of the outer wall portion 212 at the origin position of the sliding operation and the effect member 620.

Further, "both sides" are associated with the range of the number of operation steps "15 to 104" of the slide operation as the swingable direction. That is, when it is detected that the effect member 620 has reached the origin position in the range of the number of operation steps "15 to 104", the swing operation is performed without limitation on both the right side of the front view and the left side of the front view. Can be set. This is because, within the range of the number of operation steps, the outer wall portion 212 and the effect member 620 are sufficiently separated from each other, and there is no possibility of collision (interference) regardless of the operation direction.

Further, the swingable direction "right side" is associated with the number of operation steps "105 to 120" of the slide operation. That is, when it is detected that the effect member 620 has reached the origin position in an operation range relatively close to the overhang position of the slide operation (the number of operation steps is in the range of 105 to 120), the effect member 620 is placed in front of the effect member 620. Swinging to the left side of the eye is prohibited (regulated). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the outer wall portion 212 and the effect member 620 from being damaged due to the collision between the left side portion of the outer wall portion 212 at the overhanging position of the sliding operation and the effect member 620.

On the other hand, in the outbound slide operation (slide operation corresponding to the operation pointer value "02H"), the swingable direction "right side" is associated with the range of the number of operation steps "0 to 14" of the slide operation. The number of operation steps "15 to 104" is associated with the swingable direction "both sides", and the number of operation steps "105 to 120" is associated with the swingable direction "left side". By setting the operation direction of the swinging operation with reference to these correspondences even during the sliding operation on the outward path, the effect member 620 can be operated without colliding with the outer wall portion 212.

Summarizing the swingable directions, as shown in FIG. 143, the area (0 steps to 14 steps) for 15 steps including the origin position of the slide operation (detection position of the slide origin detection sensor 717) is on the left side (front view). It is possible to set the swing motion only in the left direction). On the other hand, in the area (104 steps to 120 steps) for 15 steps including the overhang position of the slide operation (detection position of the slide position detection sensor 718), the swing operation is set only on the right side (right direction in front view). It becomes possible. In areas other than the above, the swing motion can be set without limitation in the direction. By defining the direction of the swinging motion corresponding to the number of steps of the sliding motion in this way, it is possible to prevent the effect member 620 from interfering with other configurations of the pachinko machine 10.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 140. In addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example, the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example includes a step counter 223k, an operation scenario flag 223m, an operation pointer 223n, and a swing direction flag. 223o, correction value storage area 223p, additional operation flag 223q, origin return flag 223r, initial operation flag 223s, slide standby flag 223t, swing standby flag 223u, swing counter 223v, and correction. Counter for 223w has been added.

The step counter 223k is a counter for counting the number of operation steps of each accessory driven by the drive motor. The counting reference (the position where the number of operation steps is 0) is set at the origin position of each accessory. The step counter 223k is configured to be able to separately count the number of operation steps for each type of accessory. That is, the step counter 223k is as many as the number of drive motors for driving the accessory, such as a counter for counting the number of operation steps of the effect member 620 and a counter for counting the number of operation steps of the support member 720. Separate counters are provided.

The step counter 223k is set to the type of drive motor that outputs the execution signal each time an execution signal indicating that the operation of one step is executed is received from any of the various drive motors provided in the pachinko machine 10. The corresponding counter value is updated one by one (see S1622 in FIG. 149). Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the origin return operation for returning various accessories to the origin position is executed, but when the various accessories return to the origin by the origin return operation, the step counter 223k 0 is set for the value. By this origin return operation, the position where the value of the step counter 223k becomes 0 can be surely set to the origin position of each accessory, so that the operation status (drive position) of each accessory can be accurately grasped. it can.

The operation scenario flag 223m is a flag indicating which operation scenario is set among the operation scenarios corresponding to the effect operations of each accessory, which are defined in the operation scenario table 222c. The operation scenario flag 223m is composed of, for example, 1 byte (8 bits), and each bit is associated with the type of operation scenario. For example, the 0th bit of the operation scenario flag 223m corresponds to the slide operation table 222c1, and if the 0th bit is 1 (on), it means that the slide operation table 222c1 is set as the operation scenario. If it is 0 (off), it means that the slide operation table 222c1 is not set. Similarly for the other bits, if the operation scenario corresponding to each bit is set, the corresponding bit is set to 1 (on), and if the corresponding operation scenario is not set, the corresponding bit is 0. Set to (off).

When an operation scenario is specified based on the variation pattern command in the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108), the operation scenario flag 223m is set to 1 (on) for the bit corresponding to the scenario (see FIG. 108). See S1704, S1708, and S1710 in FIG. 108). Further, every time the variation effect in which the operation scenario is set ends, the bit corresponding to the set scenario is set to 0 (off). With this operation scenario flag 223m, the type of operation scenario currently set can be easily determined.

The operation pointer 223n is a pointer used to identify the progress status of the set operation scenario. As described above, each data table constituting the operation scenario table 222c is defined by associating the value of the operation pointer 223n with the operation content (operation speed, number of operation steps, operation direction) to be set. In this control example, the operation of the setting content of 1 is set in the drive motor, and when the operation according to the setting content is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223n is updated.

Further, the operation pointer 223n can update the pointer value separately for each set operation scenario. That is, the operation pointer 223n is a general term for different pointers provided for each operation scenario. For each pointer constituting the operation pointer 223, "01H" is set as the value by newly setting the corresponding operation scenario. After that, each time the operation content corresponding to the pointer value is completed, the pointer value is updated (see S5312 in FIG. 150, S5411 in FIG. 151, S5505 in FIG. 152, S5710 and S5711 in FIG. 154). The operation content corresponding to the pointer value is set. Further, when the variation effect in which the corresponding operation scenario is set is completed, the pointer value is reset to "00H". By using this operation pointer 223n, it is possible to accurately grasp the set operation scenario.

The swing direction flag 223o is a flag indicating the direction of the swing operation. When the value of the swing direction flag 223o is on, it indicates that the swing operation in the positive direction (front view left direction) is executed, and when it is off, it indicates that the swing direction is in the negative direction (front view right direction). Indicates that the swinging motion of is being performed. This swing direction flag 223o corresponds to the operation content indicated by the value of the updated operation pointer 223n when the value of the operation pointer 223n is updated in the case where the operation scenario corresponding to the tilting operation is set. It is updated to the value (see S5507 in FIG. 152). That is, when the forward swing motion is set as the operation content, the swing direction flag 223o is set to on, and when the negative swing motion is set, the swing direction flag 223o is set. Set to off. When the origin position is reached in the swinging motion, the direction of the swinging motion is specified with reference to the swing direction flag 223o. Then, it is determined based on the swing area table 222d whether or not there is no problem in passing through the origin while keeping the same swing operation direction.

The correction value storage area 223p is a storage area for storing the correction value for correcting the variation in the operation of the accessory due to aged deterioration, individual differences, and the like. More specifically, a correction value for correcting the operation speed of the support member 720 according to the actual operation of the effect member 620 is stored. The correction value stored in the correction value storage area 223p is calculated during the execution of the initial operation executed based on the power being turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and is stored in the correction value storage area 223p. (See S5406 and S5409 in FIG. 151). The correction values are roughly classified into at least a correction value according to the actual swinging motion of the effect member 620 and a correction value according to the actual sliding motion of the strut member 720. The number of steps of the slide operation can be corrected according to the correction value of.

The correction value according to the actual swinging motion of the effecting member 620 is the design value of the number of steps when the effecting member 620 swings from the origin position to the right in the front view and to the left in the front view. (Since the swinging motion of 10 steps on the outward path and 10 steps on the return path is executed in two directions, a total of 40 steps) is compared with the number of steps actually required to set a series of motions and return to the origin. is there.

On the other hand, the correction values according to the actual swinging motion of the strut member 720 are the design value (120 steps) of the number of steps when the strut member 720 slides from the origin position to the overhanging position. It is a ratio to the number of steps required to operate from the origin position to the overhang position in the slide operation of. By correcting the setting contents of the operation scenario with these correction values, the mode of the slide operation of the support member 720 can be matched with the mode of the actual swing operation of the effect member 620. That is, when the actual number of steps required for the swinging motion is larger than the design value, it is necessary to set a larger number of steps than the design value, so that the execution period of the swinging motion becomes long. Even in this case, the correction value for delaying the operation speed of the slide operation is stored in order to match the timing when the swinging operation of 3 round trips is completed and the timing when the overhang position of the slide operation is reached. It is stored in the area 223p.

On the other hand, when the actual number of steps required for the swinging motion is smaller than the design value, the swinging motion is completed in a number of steps smaller than the design value, so that the execution period of the swinging motion is shortened by mi. Even in this case, the correction value for accelerating the operation speed of the slide operation is stored in order to match the timing when the swinging operation of 3 round trips is completed and the timing when the overhang position of the slide operation is reached. It is stored in the area 223p.

When setting the slide operation, the swing operation is performed by setting the correction value stored in the correction value storage area 223p by multiplying the operation speed specified in the slide operation table 223c1 as a new operation speed. The timing of completion can be matched with the timing of reaching the overhang position of the sliding motion. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operation quality when the effect member 620 and the support member 720 are operated at the same time.

The additional operation flag 223q is a flag for indicating whether or not it is an additional operation period that may be set after the number of operation steps specified in the operation scenario table 222c has been exhausted. Here, in this control example, when the output of the corresponding sensor does not become H (high) even though the number of operation steps specified in the operation scenario table 222c has been exhausted, additional operation is performed in the sensor direction. Is configured to set. This additional operation is repeatedly set step by step until the output of the corresponding sensor becomes H (high). The period during which this additional operation is set is called the additional operation period. By setting this additional operation period, even if the number of steps until the sensor is detected shifts due to aging deterioration, individual differences, etc., it is possible to move the sensor toward the sensor without immediately notifying the error. it can. This additional operation flag 223q is an abnormality detection process executed when the output of the corresponding sensor does not become H (high) even after the number of operation steps specified in the operation scenario table 222c has elapsed (see FIG. 155). When it is detected that the output of the corresponding sensor becomes L (low) due to the additional operation, it is set to off (see S5604 in FIG. 153).

The home-returning flag 223r is executing a home-return operation (an operation for returning an accessory deviated from the home position to the home position) that is executed when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10. It is a flag indicating whether or not. If the home return flag 223r is on, it indicates that the home return operation is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the home return operation is not being executed. The home return flag 223r is set in the home return process (see FIG. 146).
It is set to on when the home return operation is set (see S5103 in FIG. 146). On the other hand, in the origin return operation, it is set to off when it is determined that all the accessories have returned to the origin position (see S5304 in FIG. 150). By using the home return flag 223r, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the home return operation is in progress.

The initial operation flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not the initial operation, which is executed to determine whether or not each accessory operates normally after the origin return operation is completed, is being executed. .. If the initial operation flag 223s is on, it indicates that the initial operation is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the initial operation is not being executed. The initial operation flag 223s is set to on after the home return operation is completed (see S5304 in FIG. 150), and is set to off when all the operations specified in the initial operation table 222c5 are completed. .. By using the initial operation flag 223s, it can be easily determined whether or not the initial operation is being executed.

With the slide standby flag 223t, in the effect in which the effect member 620 and the support member 720 operate in conjunction with each other, the slide operation of the support member 720 to the overhanging position ends before the swing operation of the effect member 620. This is a flag for determining whether or not the slide waiting period is set in the case of. This slide standby period is a period for waiting the slide operation until the swing operation is completed, and when the operation of returning the slide operation from the overhanging position to the origin position is executed, the swing operation of the effect member 620 is performed. And the sliding operation of the support member 720 are set to start at the same time.

When the slide waiting flag 223t is on, it indicates that the slide waiting period is in progress, and when it is off, it indicates that the slide waiting period is not in progress. This slide standby flag 223t is set to on when it is determined in the slide operation process (see FIG. 156) that the slide operation is completed and the swing operation is not completed (see S5909 in FIG. 156). ). On the other hand, when both the sliding operation and the swinging operation are completed and the operation of returning from the overhanging position to the origin position is set, it is set to off (see S5706 in FIG. 154).

In the effect in which the effect member 620 and the support member 720 operate in conjunction with the swing standby flag 223u, the swing operation of the effect member 620 ends before the slide operation of the support member 720 to the overhanging position. This is a flag for determining whether or not the swing waiting period is set when the case is closed. This swing waiting period is a period for waiting the swinging motion until the sliding motion is completed, and when the motion of returning the sliding motion from the overhanging position to the origin position is executed, the swinging member 620 swings. It is set to start the operation and the sliding operation of the support member 720 at the same time.

When the swing waiting flag 223u is on, it indicates that the swing waiting period is in progress, and when it is off, it indicates that the swing waiting period is not in progress. The swing standby flag 223u is set to on when it is determined in the tilt direction setting process (see FIG. 154) that the swing motion (tilt motion) is completed and the slide motion is not completed. (See S5703 in FIG. 154). On the other hand, when both the sliding operation and the swinging operation are completed and the operation of returning from the overhanging position to the origin position is set, it is set to off (see S5910 in FIG. 156).

The swing counter 223s is a counter for counting the number of executions when the swing operation is executed. In this control example, based on the tilting operation table 222c2, the swinging operation is executed 10 steps each in the left-right direction from the origin position, and then the operation of returning to the origin position is repeated three times. However, if the exact same operation is specified for the tilting operation table 222c2 three times, the capacity of the ROM 222 may be compressed. Therefore, in this control example, only the operation content for one swinging motion is specified in the tilting motion table 222c2, and one swinging motion is completed (that is, the motion pointer defined in the tilting motion table 222c2). Every time (all the operations corresponding to the values "01H" to "04H" of 223n are completed), the swing counter 223s is used to count the number of swings. Then, when the number of counts reaches 3, the swinging motion is ended, and when the number of counts is less than 3, the value of the operation pointer 223n is returned to "01H", and "01H" to "" again. It is configured to set the operations corresponding to "04H" in order. As a result, the swinging motion can be repeated the same number of times (three times) each time while reducing the amount of data in the tilting motion table 222c2.

The correction counter 223w is a counter for counting the number of steps of the actual swinging operation of the effect member 620 and the number of steps of the actual sliding operation of the support member 720 in the initial operation. By comparing the number of steps counted by the correction counter 223w with the design value of the number of steps, it is possible to analyze (determine) how much the actual operation deviates from the design value. That is, it is possible to analyze (discriminate) the effects of individual differences and aging deterioration. A correction value for correcting the operation speed of the slide operation is calculated according to the number of steps of each accessory counted by the correction counter 223w (see S5406 and S5409 in FIG. 151).

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 to 156, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. First, FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. This start-up process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, as in the first control example.

In each of the start-up processes S1301 to S1313, the same process as each process of S1301 to S1313 executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 104) in the first control example is executed. The start-up process in the second control example differs in that the origin return process (S1321) is executed in addition to the start-up process in the first control example.

This origin return process (S1321) is executed after the processes S1301 to S1312 are executed as in the first control example, and is a process for returning the accessory deviated from the origin position to the origin position. Then, after the origin return process (S1321) is executed, the time setting process (S1313) is executed, and this process is completed.

Next, the details of the origin return processing (S1321) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the origin return process (S1321). The origin return process (S1321) is a process for moving (moving) an accessory that is not at the origin position when the power is turned on, among various accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10.

In the origin return processing (S1321), first, is there an origin sensor (for example, slide origin detection sensor 717, tilt origin sensor 618, etc.) having an output of L (0V) (that is, the light receiving portion of the sensor is not shielded from light)? Whether or not it is determined (S5101). If it is determined in the processing of S5101 that there is an origin sensor having an output of L (0V) (S5101: Yes), one of the accessories (directing member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600, strut member of the sliding operation unit 700). 720 etc.) is not at the origin position. Therefore, in this case, in order to return (move) the accessory that is deviated from the origin position to the origin position, the process proceeds to S5102.

In the process of S5102, the operation (movable) in the origin direction is set for the accessory corresponding to the sensor whose output is L (0V) (S5102). Then, the return-to-origin flag 223r is set to ON (S5103), and this process ends. In the process of S5102, for example, an operation of twice the number of steps from the origin position to the overhang position in each accessory is set so as to surely return to the origin position.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5101, when it is determined that there is no origin sensor whose output is L (0V) (S5101: No), it means that all the accessories are already in the origin position at the time of turning on the power. To do. That is, since it is not necessary to return (move) the accessory to the origin position, each process of S5104 and S5105 for setting the initial operation of the accessory is executed.

In the process of S5104, the start of the initial operation is set for various accessories (S5104), the flag 223s during the initial operation is set to on (S5105), and the present process is ended. As described above, the initial operation is performed to check whether the various accessories are operating normally. Since it is possible to check whether the various accessories operate normally each time the power is turned on, it is possible to detect abnormalities of the various accessories at an early stage.

By executing this origin return process (S1321), all the accessories can be returned (movable) to the origin position. Since the step counter 223k of the corresponding accessory can be reset to 0 when the return to the origin position is triggered, the number of operation steps of all the accessories can be accurately grasped after the return to the origin. Further, since the initial operation can be executed after returning to the origin, the same operation can be performed every time in the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine from the appearance whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the initial operation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the main process. Similar to the first control example, this main process is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113.

Of the main processes, in each of the processes S1501 to S1520, the same processes as those of S1501 to S1520 executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) in the first control example are executed. The main process in the second control example differs in that the accessory operation setting process (S1531) is executed in addition to the main process in the first control example.

This accessory operation setting process (S1531) is executed after the processes S1501 to S1515 are executed as in the first control example. Then, after the execution of the accessory operation setting process (S1531), each process from S1516 to S1520 is executed. This accessory operation setting process (S1531) is a process for setting the operation of each accessory based on the selected variation pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the details of the above-mentioned accessory operation setting process (S1531) will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the accessory operation setting process (S1531). As described above, this accessory operation setting process (S1531) is a process for setting the operation of various accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10.

In the accessory operation setting process (S1531), first, it is determined whether or not it is the operation start timing of the accessory (S5201). Here, the operation start timing of the accessory and the type of the accessory to be operated are defined for each fluctuation pattern. In the process of S5201, it is determined whether or not the operation start timing has been reached based on the progress of the fluctuation pattern.

If it is determined in the process of S5201 that it is not the operation start timing of the accessory (S5201: No), it is not necessary to set the operation of the accessory, so that the main process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5201 that it is the operation start timing of the accessory (S5201: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S5202 in order to set the operation of the accessory whose start timing has come.

In the process of S5202, the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the operation to be started (sliding operation, tilting (swinging) operation, initial operation, etc.) is set to "01H" (S5202). Then, the operation content corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223n is read from the table corresponding to the accessory to be operated this time in the operation scenario table 222c (S5203). Next, it is determined whether or not the operation content read out in the process of S5203 is the sliding operation of the support column member 720 (S5204).

If it is determined in the process of S5204 that the read operation content is a slide operation (S5204: Yes), the read operation content is stored in the correction value storage area 223p with respect to the operation speed (pps). A value obtained by multiplying the existing correction value (both the correction value corresponding to the sliding motion and the correction value corresponding to the swinging motion) is set as the operating speed (S5205), and the process proceeds to S5206. As described above, this correction value is a value calculated based on the number of operation steps of the actual swinging operation of the effect member 620 in the initial operation and the actual number of operation steps of the support member 720. By correcting the operation speed of the slide operation with this correction value, the end timing of the swing operation and the operation end timing of the slide operation can be matched.

On the other hand, in the process of S5204, if it is determined that the read operation content is not a slide operation (S5204: No), it is not necessary to correct the operation, so the process of S5205 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5206. ..

When the processing of S5204 or S5205 is completed, the operation command is set based on the read operation content (or the corrected operation content) (S5206), and this processing is terminated. The operation command set by the process of S5206 is stored in a ring buffer (not shown) for command transmission provided in the RAM 223. Then, in the command output process (S502) of the main process (see FIG. 147) executed by the MPU 221, various motors (up and down drive motor 431, opening / closing drive motor 466, slide drive motor 751) corresponding to the command, It is transmitted toward the control IC (not shown) of the tilting drive motor 661). Control ICs (not shown) for various motors drive and control various motors based on received operation commands. As a result, various accessories corresponding to various motors are moved.

Next, the command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S1511). This command determination process (S1511) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 147) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 as in the first control example, and as described above, the main control device. This is a process for determining a command received from 110 and executing the corresponding control.

In each of the command determination processes (S1511), S1601 to S1616, the same processes as those of S1601 to S1616 executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 107) in the first control example are executed. .. The command determination process (S1511) in the second control example differs in that the processes S1621 to S1623 are executed in addition to the command determination process (S1511) in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same parts as those of the command determination process (see FIG. 107) in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the command determination process (S1511) in the second control example, first, the processes S1601 to S1615 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example. Then, in the process of S1612, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S1612: No), various motors (up / down drive is also 431, opening / closing drive motor 466, slide drive motor 751, tilting drive). It is determined whether or not an execution signal (execution command) output from a control IC (not shown) of the motor 661) has been received (S1621). If it is determined in the process of S1621 that the execution command has not been received from the motor driver (control IC) corresponding to each accessory, the process of S1616 is executed and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1621, when it is determined that the execution command has been received from any of the motor drivers (control IC) (S1621: Yes), it corresponds to the motor driver (accessory) that outputs the operation command. The step counter 223k is updated (S1622), an execution command process for controlling the operation of each accessory is executed according to an execution command (execution signal) (S1623), and this process is terminated. By updating (adding) the step counter 223k corresponding to the operation by the process of S1622, the state (number of operation steps) of each operation (sliding operation, swinging operation, etc.) can be accurately determined.

Next, the details of the execution command processing (S1623) described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 156. First, FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing execution command processing (S1623. This execution command processing (S1623) includes various motors (upper and lower drive 431, opening / closing drive motor 466, slide drive motor 751, tilting). This is a process executed when an execution signal (execution command) transmitted from a control IC (not shown) of the drive motor 661) is received.

In the execution command process (S1623), first, it is determined whether or not the home-returning flag 223r is on (S5301). If it is determined in the process of S5301 that the home return flag 223r is on (S5301: Yes), the home return process (see FIG. 145) executed in the above-mentioned start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 145). In FIG. 146), it means that the home return operation is being executed. Therefore, in this case, in order to determine whether or not the origin return operation is completed, whether or not there is an origin sensor having an output of L (0V) (that is, the light receiving portion of the sensor is not shielded from light). Determine (S5302).

In the process of S5302, when it is determined that there is an origin sensor having an output of L (0V) (S5302: Yes), one of the accessories is deviated from the origin position (that is, is being restored (movable)). ) In this case, since the process of returning (moving) the accessory to the origin position is continued, this process is terminated as it is. When a plurality of accessories are returning to the origin, the operation stop is set in order from the accessory determined to have returned to the origin position in the process of S5302. In addition, if there is an accessory that does not return to the origin even after the set number of steps of the origin return operation has elapsed, there is a high possibility that the drive motor is not operating normally due to a failure or the like, so an error is notified. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S5302, when it is determined that there is no origin sensor whose output is L (0V) (S5302: No), all the accessories are in the origin position (that is, the return (movable) is completed). Since this is the case, the process of returning (moving) the accessory to the origin position is completed, and the start of the initial operation of the various accessories is set (S5303). Then, the origin return flag 223r is set to off, the initial operation flag 223s is set to on (S5304), and the present process is terminated.

In the processing of S5301, if it is determined that the home return flag 223r is not on (S5301: No), it means that all the accessories have been returned (movable) to the home position. It is determined whether or not the flag 223s is on (S5305). In the process of S5305, when it is determined that the initial operation flag 223s is ON (S5305: Yes), it means that the initial operation of various accessories is being executed, so that the setting during the initial operation is performed. The initial operation process of (S5306) is executed, and this process is terminated. Details of this initial operation process (S5306) will be described later with reference to FIG. 151.

On the other hand, in the process of S5305, when it is determined that the initial operation flag 223s is off (S5305: No), then it is determined whether or not the received execution command is a command corresponding to the tilting operation (S5307). ). In the process of S5307, if it is determined that the received execution command is a command corresponding to the tilting (swinging) operation (S5307: Yes), the tilting (swinging) operation is executed (tilting drive motor 661). In order to drive), the tilting operation process is executed (S5308), and this process is terminated. Details of this tilting operation process (S5308) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 152 to 155.

In the processing of S5307, if it is determined that the received execution command is not a command corresponding to the tilt (swing) operation (S5307: No), then whether or not the received execution command is a command corresponding to the slide operation. (S5309). In the process of S5309, when the received execution command is determined to be a command corresponding to the slide operation (S5309: Yes), the slide operation is executed (to drive the slide drive motor 751). The process of the process is executed (S5310), and the present process is terminated. Details of this slide operation process (S5310) will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

On the other hand, in the process of S5309, when it is determined that the received execution command is not a command corresponding to the slide operation (S5309: No), it is a case where an execution command for another accessory (operation) is received. In this case, in order to determine whether or not the operation of the accessory corresponding to the received execution command is completed, whether or not the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the accessory reaches the set number of steps. Determine (S5311). If it is determined in the process of S5311 that the set number of steps has not been reached (S5311: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S5311, when it is determined that the set number of steps has been reached (S5311: Yes), then 1 is added to the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the received execution command (corresponding to the operation) (S5311: Yes). S5312). Then, the operation content corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223n after addition is read from the operation scenario table 222c (S5313), an operation command is set based on the read operation content (S5314), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, details of the initial operation process (S5306) executed in the above-mentioned execution command process (see FIG. 150) will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process (S5306). This initial operation process (S5306) is a process for executing the initial operation of various accessories.

In the initial operation process (S5306), first, 1 is added to the value of the correction counter 223w (S5401). As described above, the correction counter 223w is used to count the actual number of operation steps of the support member 720 and the actual number of operation steps of the effect member 620 in the initial operation. That is, the number of operation steps of the initial operation for the slide operation executed while the value of the operation pointer 223n is "01H" is counted, and the correction corresponding to the slide operation is performed by the ratio of the number of operation steps to the design value of 120. Used to calculate the value. Further, the number of operation steps of the initial operation corresponding to the swing operation, which is executed when the value of the operation pointer 223n is between "02H" and "05H", is counted, and the number of operation steps in one cycle of the swing operation is counted. It is used to calculate the correction value corresponding to the swinging motion by the ratio with the design value of 40.

In this control example, the value of the correction counter 223w is updated in each initial operation process (that is, even after the initial operation of the swing operation is completed), but the swing operation is performed. After the initial operation is completed and the calculation of the correction value is completed, the update process (S5401) of the correction counter 223w may be skipped. As a result, the processing load in the initial operation processing (S5306) can be reduced.

When the processing of S5401 is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the initial operation is read (S5402), the initial operation table 222c5 is referred to based on the read value of the operation pointer 223n, and the operation of the corresponding accessory is completed. It is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied (S5403). In the process of S5403, when it is determined that the completion condition of the operation of the corresponding accessory is not satisfied (S5403: No), the operation for one step is set for the corresponding accessory (S5404). , End this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5403 that the completion condition of the operation of the corresponding accessory is satisfied (S5403: Yes), then whether or not the value of the operation pointer 223n read in the processing of S5402 is 01H. (S5405). When it is determined that the value of the operation pointer 223n is 01H in the process of S5405 (S5405: Yes), it means that the sliding operation of the support column member 720 on the outward path is completed in the initial operation (FIG. 142 (a)). )reference). Therefore, in this case, the ratio of the design value (120 steps) of the number of operation steps of the slide operation to the actual number of operation steps (count value of the correction counter 223w) (the value of the correction counter 223w is divided by 120). The value) is stored in the correction value storage area 223p as the correction value for the slide operation (S5406). Then, the value of the correction counter 223w is initialized (S5407), and the process proceeds to S5411.

By initializing the correction counter 223w in the process of S5406, it can be used to count the actual number of operation steps in the initial operation of the swing operation to be executed next. Therefore, the counter that counts the actual number of operation steps required for the slide operation and the counter that counts the actual number of operation steps required for the swing operation can be covered by one shared counter (correction counter 223w). , The capacity of the RAM 223 can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S5405, when it is determined that the value of the operation pointer 223n is not "01H" (S5405: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the operation pointer 223n is "05H" (S5406). ). In the process of S5406, when it is determined that the value of the operation pointer 223n is 05H (S5408: Yes), the initial operation of the swing operation (the operation corresponding to the values "02H" to "05H" of the operation pointer 223n) is performed. Since it means that all are completed, the process of calculating the correction value corresponding to the swinging motion is performed. That is, 40, which is the design value of the number of operation steps in one cycle of the swing operation, is set to the number of operation steps actually required for the swing operation in the initial operation (between the values "02H" and "05H" of the operation pointer 223n. The value divided by the counted correction counter 223w) is stored in the correction value storage area 223p as the correction value for the tilting (swinging) operation (S5409). Then, the value of the correction counter value 223w is initialized (S5410), and the process proceeds to the process of S5411.

If it is determined in the process of S5408 that the value of the operation pointer 223n is not "05H" (that is, "06H" or more) (S5408: No), the process proceeds to the process of S5411 as it is.

When the processing of S5407, S5408 or S5410 is completed, 1 is added to the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the initial operation (S5411), and the operation corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223n after the addition is set (S5412). This process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152, the details of the tilting operation process (S5308) executed in the above-mentioned execution command process (see FIG. 150) will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the tilting operation process (S5308). This tilting operation process (S5308) is a process for setting the tilting operation of the effect member 620 provided in the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9).

In the tilting motion processing (S5308), first, it is determined whether or not the additional motion flag 223q for the swinging (tilting) motion is on (S5501). As described above, this additional operation flag 223q is set in the sensor direction when the output of the corresponding sensor does not become H (high) even though the number of operation steps specified in the operation scenario table 222c has been exhausted. Indicates whether or not it is an additional operation period for which an additional operation is set.

In the process of S5501, when it is determined that the additional operation flag 223q for the swing (tilt) operation is on (S5501: Yes), it means that the additional operation period of the effect member 620 is in progress, so that the origin sensor The additional operation process (S5502) for executing the additional operation until (tilt origin sensor 618) is detected is executed, and this process is terminated. Details of this additional operation process (S5502) will be described later with reference to FIG. 153.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5501, when it is determined that the additional operation flag 223q for the swinging (tilting) operation is off (S5501: No), then the tilting for tilting (swinging) the effect member 620 is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of steps of the drive motor 661 has reached the set number of steps (S5503). That is, it is determined whether or not the tilting (swinging) operation (outward path operation or return path operation) of the effect member 620 is completed.

If it is determined in the process of S5503 that the number of operation steps of the tilting drive motor 661 has not reached the set number of steps (S5503: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5505, when it is determined that the number of operation steps of the tilting drive motor 661 has reached the set number of steps (see tilting operation table 222c2) (S5503: Yes), the operation pointer 223n of 1. Since it means that the tilting (swinging) motion (outward path motion or return path motion) of the effect member 620 corresponding to the value is completed, then the tilting (swinging) motion of the effect member 620 is the outward path motion (opposite to the origin position). It is determined from the value of the current operation pointer 223n whether or not the operation is in the direction (S5504). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation pointer 223n is either "01H" or "03H".

In the process of S5504, if it is determined that the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 is the outward path operation (movement in the direction opposite to the origin position) (S5504: Yes), then the effect member 620 is returned. (Movable operation in the direction of the origin position) is executed (S5505 to S5507).

In the process of S5505, 1 is added to the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the tilting (swinging) operation (S5505), and the operation content corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223n after the addition is added to the operation scenario table 222c (tilting operation). It is read from the table 222c2) and set (S5506). Then, the value of the swing direction flag 223o is updated (reversed) to a value corresponding to the swing direction of the return route (S5507), and this process is terminated. For example, when the processing of S5507 is executed in the state where the value of the swing direction flag 223o is 1 (forward swing operation), the value of the swing operation flag 223o is updated (reversed) to 0 and the value is 0. When the process of S5507 is executed in the state of (swinging motion in the forward direction), the value of the swinging motion flag 223o is updated (reversed) to 1. As a result, the swing direction flag 223o can be updated in accordance with the reversal of the motion direction of the swing motion, so that the motion direction can be accurately grasped.

On the other hand, in the process of S5504, the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 was the return path operation (operation toward the origin position) (the value of the operation pointer 223 corresponding to the effect member 620 is "02H" or " If it is determined to be "04H") (S5504: No), it means that the effect member 620 is moved in the direction of the origin position. Next, the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) corresponding to the effect member 620 is output. Is H (5V) (whether the effect member 620 is the origin position) or not (S5509).

If the output of the origin sensor (tilting origin sensor 618) is determined to be L (0V) in the processing of S5509 (S5508: No), the tilting drive motor 661 is not driven as set. Since there is a high possibility that an abnormality such as the movement of the 620 being hindered or the number of steps shifting due to aged deterioration has occurred, the abnormality detection process is executed (S5510), and this process is completed. To do. The details of this abnormality detection process (S5510) will be described later with reference to FIG. 155.

On the other hand, in the process of S5509, if the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) is determined to be H (5V) (S5508: Yes), the tilt direction setting process is executed (S5509), and this process is performed. To finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the details of the additional operation process (S5502) executed in the above-described tilting operation process (see FIG. 152) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing additional operation processing. In this additional operation process (S5502), in the tilt operation process (see FIG. 152) described above, the effect member 620 provided in the tilt operation unit 600 is moved to the origin position even after the operation of the set number of operation steps is completed. This is a process that is executed (S5508: No) when it is not (there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred), and the effect member 620 is moved to the origin position or an error notification is performed.

In the additional operation process (S5502), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the origin sensor (tilting origin sensor 618) is H (5V) (S5601). If it is determined in the processing of S5601 that the output of the origin sensor (tilting origin sensor 618) is not H (5V) (S5601: No), the previous additional operation processing (S5502) or the abnormal operation processing described later (FIG. This means that the effect member 620 is deviated from the origin position even after the one-step operation set in (see 155) is executed. In this case, it is determined whether or not the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the tilting (swinging) operation is 10 or more (S5605).

When it is determined in the process of S5605 that the value of the step counter 223k is smaller than 10, an additional operation for one step is set in order to move the effect member 620 to the origin position again (S5606). , End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S5605, when it is determined that the value of the step counter 223k is 10 or more (S5605: Yes), the additional operation process (S5502) is repeatedly executed so as not to return to the origin position, and the process of S5606. This is a case where the effect member 620 is not moved to the origin position even though the effect member 620 (tilting drive motor 661) is moved (additionally operated) by 10 steps or more. That is, it means that the operation of the number of operation steps that can sufficiently reach the origin position within the range of the normal operation has been executed. Therefore, in this case, an error command is set (S5607) to end this process.

When setting an error command, the operation is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and the operation of the effect member 620 is a tilting (swinging) operation outside the normal movable (setting) range, and further tilting (movable). Then, when there is a risk of contact with other accessories, an error command may be set to end the process.

Further, the number of operation steps for determining an error is not limited to 10 steps, and may be arbitrarily determined according to the type of accessory or drive motor. For example, when a drive motor that is relatively easily deteriorated (the number of operation steps is likely to shift) is adopted, the number of operation steps until it is determined to be an error may be increased (for example, 15 times). On the contrary, when a drive motor having a relatively accurate and long life is adopted, it may be configured to determine an error with a smaller number of operation steps (for example, 5 times).

If the output of the origin sensor (tilting origin sensor 618) is determined to be H (5V) in the processing of S5601 (S5601: Yes), the processing of S5606 executed in the previous additional operation processing (S5502) (S5606). Alternatively, this is a case where the effect member 620 is moved to the origin position by the one-step operation set by the abnormality detection process (processing of S5801). In this case, the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the tilting (swinging) operation is updated (S5602), and the operation content corresponding to the updated value of the operation pointer 223n is described in the operation scenario table 222c (tilting operation table 222c2). Read from and set (S5603). Then, the additional operation flag 223q for the swinging (tilting) operation is set to off (S5604), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the details of the tilt direction setting process (S5509) executed in the tilt operation process (see FIG. 152) described above will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the tilt direction setting process. This tilt direction setting process (S5502) is executed when the effect member 620 provided in the tilt operation unit 600 reaches the origin position in the swing operation in the above-described tilt operation process (see FIG. 152) (S5508: Yes). It is a process to be performed.

In the tilt direction setting process (S5509), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the swing counter 223v is 3 (or larger than 3) (S5701). The value of the swing counter 223v is updated by the process of S5714, which will be described later, and each time the swing operation of the effect member 620 is executed once (it is regarded as one round trip on the left side and one round trip on the right side). Is added to 1 (see S5715). Therefore, when the value of the swing counter 223v is 3, the swing operation of the effect member 620 is executed three times.

In the process of S5701, when it is determined that the value of the swing counter 223v is 3 (S5701: Yes), it is the case where the swing (tilt) operation of the effect member 620 is completed a specified number of times (3 times). Therefore, next, it is determined whether or not the sliding operation of the support column member 720 provided in the tilting operation unit 600 is the outward path (or the outward path) (S5702). In the process of S5702, if it is determined that the sliding operation of the support member 720 is the return path (or the return path) (S5702: No), then the swinging operation of the effect member 620 is not performed. This process ends as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sliding motion of the strut member 720 is the outward path (outward path) (S5702: Yes), after the sliding motion of the strut member 720 (outward path motion) is completed, the neck of the effect member 620 In order to execute the swing operation, the process proceeds to S5703.

In the process of S5703, it is determined whether or not the sliding operation (outward path operation) of the support member 720 has been completed (S5703). More specifically, if the slide standby flag 223t is on, it is determined that the slide operation (outward path operation) of the support member 720 is completed, and if the slide standby flag 223t is off, the slide operation of the support member 720 (outward path operation) is completed. It is determined that the outbound operation) has not been completed.

In the process of S5703, when the slide standby flag 223t is turned on and it is determined that the slide operation has been completed (S5703: Yes), the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the slide operation is set to 02H and tilted. (Swing) 03H is set to the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the operation (S5705). Then, based on the value of the operation pointer 223n set by the process of S5705, the operation content is read from the operation scenario table (slide operation table 222c1 and tilt operation table 222c2) and set (S5706). By the process of S5706, the support member 720 of the tilting operation unit 600 is moved in the return direction, and the effect member 620 is set to swing (tilt) (three reciprocates).

When the process of S5706 is completed, the slide standby flag 223t is set to off (S5707), the value of the swing counter 223v is initialized to 0 (S5708), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5703, when the slide standby flag 223t is off and it is determined that the slide operation is not completed (S5703: No), the support member 720 waits until the slide operation is completed. The swing standby flag 223u is set to ON (S5704), the value of the swing counter 223v is initialized to 0 (S5708), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S5701 that the value of the swing counter 223v is not 3 (2 or less) (S5701: No), the process shifts to the process of S5709 in order to continue the swing (tilt) operation. ..

In the process of S5709, the swing direction before reaching the origin position is specified based on the value of the swing direction flag 223o (S5709). Then, the swingable direction is specified based on the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide operation and the swing region table 222d (see FIG. 142) (S5710).

When the processing of S5710 is completed, the swinging direction (traveling direction) after passing the origin is specified from the swinging direction before reaching the origin specified in the processing of S5709, and the swinging direction (traveling direction) after passing the origin is determined. , It is determined whether or not it matches the swingable direction specified in the process of S5710 (S5711). In the process of S5711, if it is determined that the swing direction (traveling direction) after passing the origin is not the swingable direction (S5711: No), the swinging direction (traveling direction) after passing the origin is the swingable direction. The value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the swinging (tilting) operation is updated three times (S5712), and the process proceeds to S5714.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5711 when it is determined that the swinging (tilting) direction (traveling direction) after passing through the origin is the swingable direction (S5711: Yes), the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swinging motion The value is updated once (S5713), and the process proceeds to S5714.

Here, the processing of S5712 and S5713 will be specifically described. When the tilt direction setting process (S5509) is executed, it is the case where the effect member 620 is at the origin position as described above. In this case, the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swing motion is "02H" (when the swing direction is on the left side) or "04H" (when the swing direction is on the right side). .. Therefore, when the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swing motion is updated three times, when 02H (swing direction is on the left side) is set, 01H (swing direction is on the left side) is set and 04H (swing direction is on the left side). If the swing direction is set to the right, 03H (the swing direction is to the right) is set. That is, it is updated to a value that operates in the outward direction in the same direction as the previously set swing direction. As a result, if the swinging (advancing) direction after passing through the origin is not the swingable direction, the outward movement is set to operate in the same direction again.

On the other hand, when the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the swing motion is updated once, 02H (the swing direction is on the left side) is set, and 03H (the swing direction is on the right side) is set. When "04H" (swing direction is on the right side) is set, "01H" (swing direction is on the left side) is set. That is, it is updated to a value that operates in the outward direction in the direction opposite to the previously set swing direction (direction passing through the origin position). As a result, when the swinging (advancing) direction after passing the origin is the swingable direction, the outward movement is set to the direction of passing the origin position in the opposite direction), and the effect member 620 is set to the origin position. It can be swung (tilted) in the left-right direction as the center.

In the process of S5711, the determination of whether or not the swinging (advancing) direction after passing through the origin is the swingable direction is not limited to the above. For example, by the time the effect member 620 reaches the origin position, the position where the support member 720 is moved is pre-read (estimated), the swingable direction is specified, and the swingable direction is determined. Good. With this configuration, the swingable direction can be determined more accurately. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the problem that the effect member 620 comes into contact with other configurations (other accessories, outer wall portion 212, etc.).

When the processing of S5712 or S5713 is completed, the operation scenario table (tilt operation table 222c2) is referred to based on the updated value of the operation pointer 223n, and the operation content is read and set (S5714). Then, the value of the swing counter 223v is updated (S5715), and this process is terminated. The update of the value of the swing counter 223v in the process of S5715 is added by 1 when the effect member 620 reciprocates once to the left and right (when the effect member 620 reciprocates to the left and then reciprocates to the right). Not limited to this, it is natural that 1 is added each time the effect member 620 is moved to the origin position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the details of the abnormality detection setting process (S5510) executed in the above-described tilting operation process (see FIG. 152) will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the abnormality detection process. In the above-described tilting motion processing (see FIG. 152), the abnormality detection process (S5510) is performed when the return path motion of the effect member 620 is completed, that is, when the movement to the origin position is completed, the origin sensor (tilting origin sensor). This is a process executed when it is determined by 618) that the effect member 620 is deviated from the origin position.

In the abnormality detection process (S5510), first, an operation command corresponding to the one-step operation is set for the accessory (here, the effect member 620) in which the abnormality is detected (S5801). Then, the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the accessory whose operation is set by the processing of S5801 is reset to 0 (S5802), and the additional operation flag 223q for the swinging (tilting) operation is set to ON (S5803). This process ends. By the processing of S5801 to S5803, in the above-mentioned additional operation processing (FIG. 153), the additional operation for a maximum of 10 steps is executed, and the effect member 620 is moved to the origin position (see S5606 in FIG. 153). Further, in the additional operation process (FIG. 153), if the effect member 620 is not moved to the origin position even if the additional operation for 10 steps is executed, an error notification is performed (see S5607 in FIG. 153). ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the details of the slide operation process (S5310) executed in the above-described execution command process (see FIG. 150) will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the slide operation process. In the slide operation process (S5310), in the above-described execution command process (see FIG. 150), the execution command corresponding to the slide operation is received, that is, the operation for one step corresponding to the slide operation of the support member 720 is completed. This is the process that is executed when

In the slide operation process (S5310), first, it is determined whether or not the additional operation flag 223q for the slide operation is ON (S5901). When it is determined in the process of S5901 that the additional operation flag 223q for the slide operation is on (S5901: Yes), the return operation of the support member 720 is completed, that is, the movement to the origin position is completed. Regardless of this, the origin sensor (slide origin detection sensor 717) determines that the support member 720 is not at the origin position, and the additional operation of 10 steps is executed. In this case, the above-mentioned additional operation process (FIG. 153) is executed on the slide operation accessory (post member 720) (S5902) to end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S5901 when it is determined that the additional operation flag 223q for the slide operation is off (S5901: No), then the number of steps set by the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide operation (slide operation table 222c1). (See) is determined (S5903).

In the process of S5903, if it is determined that the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide operation has not reached the set number of steps (see the slide operation table 222c1) (S5903: No), the slide operation is continued. Is executed, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5903, when the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide operation determines that the set number of steps has been reached (S5903: Yes), the support column member 720 is moved to the origin position or the overhang position. Is. In this case, in order for the corresponding sensor (slide origin detection sensor 717 or slide position detection sensor 718) to determine whether or not the strut member 720 is movable at the origin position or the overhang position, the corresponding sensor It is determined whether or not the output is H (5V) (S5904).

In the process of S5904, when it is determined that the output of the corresponding sensor is L (0V), that is, the strut member 720 is not moved to the origin position or the overhang position (S5904), the above-mentioned abnormality detection process (See FIG. 155) is executed for the slide operation accessory (post member 720) (S5905), and this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S5904, when it is determined that the output of the corresponding sensor is H (5V), that is, the support column member 720 is moved to the origin position or the overhang position (S5904: Yes). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the slide operation is 01H (outward route operation) (S5906).

When it is determined in the process of S5906 that the value of the operation pointer 223n is "02H" (return operation) (S5906: No), the timing to end the slide operation of the support column member 720 provided in the slide operation unit 700. Therefore, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5906, when the value of the operation pointer 223n is determined to be 01H (outward path operation) (S5906: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S5907 in order to operate the support column member 720 in the return path.

In the process of S5907, it is determined whether or not the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 has been completed (S5907). In the process of S5907, it is determined whether or not the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 has been completed based on whether or not the swinging standby flag 223u is on. Specifically, when the swing standby flag 223u is on, it is determined that the tilting (swing) operation of the effect member 620 has been completed, and when the swing standby flag 223u is off, it is determined. It is determined that the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 is incomplete.

In the process of S5907, when it is determined that the swing standby flag 223u is off, that is, the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 is not completed (S5908: No), the sliding operation is completed. The slide standby flag 223t is set to ON (S5908) to indicate, and this process ends. The slide standby flag 223t set to be turned on by the process of S5908 is referred to when determining whether or not the slide operation is completed in the tilt direction setting process (see FIG. 154) described above (see S5703 of FIG. 154). ..

On the other hand, in the process of S5907, when it is determined that the swing standby flag 223u is on, that is, the tilt (swing) operation of the effect member 620 has been completed (S5908: Yes), the tilt operation unit 600 In order to operate the return path, the process shifts to the process of S5909.

In the process of S5909, the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the slide operation is set to 02H (return operation), and the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the tilt (swing) operation is set to "03H" (swing start operation to the right). Set (S5909). Then, the operation content corresponding to the value of the updated operation pointer 223n is read from the slide operation table 222c1 and the tilt operation table 222c2, respectively, and set (S5910). After that, the swing standby flag 223u is set to off (S5911), and this process ends.

As described above, in this control example, when the initial operation based on the power-on is executed, the actual number of operation steps between the swing operation of the effect member 620 and the slide operation of the support member 720 is analyzed, and the actual operation step number is analyzed with the design value. It is configured so that the difference can be discriminated. Then, by correcting the operation speed of the slide operation according to the difference from the design value, it is possible to match the timing at which the tilting operation of the effect member 620 and the slide operation of the support member 720 end. That is, the operation content (three swinging operations) of the effect member 620, which is predetermined, can be completed before the sliding operation is completed. Therefore, even if the sliding motion is completed, only the swinging motion is continuously executed, or even if the swinging motion is completed, the sliding motion is not completed, and the sliding motion is continued with the effect member 620 stopped. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of variations in operation such as slackening. Therefore, when the swinging motion of the effect member 620 and the sliding motion of the strut member 720 are combined to operate, the operation quality can be improved.

Further, in this control example, the swingable direction in the swing motion is defined according to the number of steps of the slide motion. Then, when the origin position of the swinging motion is reached during the swinging motion of the effect member 620, the number of steps of the current sliding motion is determined, and the swinging motion in the opposite direction is performed after passing through the origin. It is configured to determine if it is feasible. As a result, even if the correspondence between the number of operation steps of the slide operation and the number of operation steps of the swing operation deviates from the correspondence shown in FIG. 144 due to some trouble or abnormality, another configuration ( It is possible to prevent (suppress) the problem that the outer wall portion 212 and the like) and the effect member 620 interfere (collide) with each other.

In this control example, in the initial operation, the actual number of operation steps of the slide operation and the actual number of operation steps of the swing operation are analyzed and the correction value is calculated. The calculation timing is not limited to this. For example, even when it is determined that the player is not playing the game (during the demonstration), the actual number of steps of the sliding motion and the swing motion is analyzed and the correction value is calculated. May be good. As a result, even if the number of motion steps of the slide motion or the swing motion changes during the game, the correction value according to the changed motion can be calculated in the demo production, so that the swing motion and the slide motion can be calculated. It is possible to further improve the operation quality in the effect operation in which the operation is compounded. Further, for example, the motion scenario of the slide motion may be corrected during the execution of the effect in which the slide motion and the swing motion are executed in combination. More specifically, for example, when the swing motion and the slide motion are executed in combination, the number of steps required for the first cycle of the swing motion is counted (or the operation time is counted). You may calculate the number of remaining operation steps (or operation time) required to perform the swing operation for a total of 3 cycles (3 times). Then, based on the number of remaining steps for performing the swinging motion of three cycles (three times) (that is, for executing the swinging motion of the remaining two cycles) and the number of remaining motion steps of the sliding motion. , May be configured to correct the operating speed of the sliding operation. More specifically, for example, when the number of operation steps of the slide operation is 70 and the operation of one cycle of the slide operation is completed, 80 steps (two cycles) of the swing operation remain. become. In this case, a value (80 steps / 70 steps) corrected by multiplying the operation speed of the subsequent slide operation by the ratio of the number of remaining operation steps of the slide operation and the number of remaining operation steps of the swing operation. × 100 pps) may be set to a new operating speed. Further, in the initial operation, the actual number of operation steps required for the swing operation and the actual number of operation steps required for the slide operation are determined in advance, and the correction value is calculated in consideration of the determination result. You may. Specifically, in the tilt direction setting process (see FIG. 154), this process determines whether or not the swing counter 223v is 1 (whether or not one cycle of the swing operation has ended). When it is determined that one cycle has been completed, the process of determining the number of remaining operation steps of the slide operation and the swing operation may be executed. Then, the operation speed of the slide operation may be corrected according to the calculated number of remaining operation steps. As a result, the slide motion can be corrected each time the effect of the slide motion and the swing motion are executed in combination, so that the slide motion can be more reliably reached at the overhang position. The swinging motion can be performed a specified number of times (3 times). Further, in the above case, the slide operation table 222c1 may be abolished. Then, based on the number of operation steps (or operation time) of the effect member 620 at the end of one cycle of the swing operation, the operation content of the support member 720 is calculated so as to match the remaining operation of the effect member 620. It may be configured as follows.

In this control example, the operation speed of the slide operation is corrected based on the correction value, but it may be configured to correct both the operation speed of the slide operation and the operation speed of the swing operation. good. Specifically, for example, the ratio between the actual number of operation steps of the slide operation and the design value is multiplied by the operation speed as the correction value of the slide operation, and the overhang position is reached when the operation as designed is executed. The time may be matched with the time to reach the overhang position in the actual operation. Specifically, for example, when the number of operation steps is 10% more than the design value, the increase in the number of steps is absorbed (offset) by the operation speed by increasing the operation speed by 10%, and the operation time as designed. It may be configured to reach the overhanging position with. Similarly, the correction value may be calculated from the actual number of operation steps of the swing operation, and the time until the swing operation is reciprocated three times may be matched with the operation at the design value. As a result, the movement of the accessory can be completed in the same operation time each time, and the same number of swinging movements can be reliably executed.

In this control example, when correcting the operation speed of the slide operation, the correction value was calculated by the ratio between the number of design operation steps and the actual number of operation steps, but instead of calculating the correction value Therefore, a plurality of operation scenarios may be prepared according to the deviation width between the number of design operation steps and the actual number of operation steps. Then, by determining the deviation width between the number of design operation steps and the actual number of operation steps, an operation scenario corresponding to the deviation width may be selected. As a result, when the slide operation is executed, it is not necessary to recalculate the operation speed from the correction value every time, and the operation scenario corresponding to the deviation width may be read and set. Therefore, the processing of the MPU 211 of the voice lamp control device 113 The load can be reduced.

In this control example, the correction value for correcting the operation content of the slide operation is calculated, but the correction value that can be selected may be specified in advance in the ROM 222 or the like. Then, a correction value corresponding to the deviation width between the number of design operation steps and the actual number of operation steps may be selected and used as the correction value when setting the slide operation. As a result, the correction value can be selected by a relatively light process of selecting the correction value corresponding to the deviation width instead of the process of calculating the correction value, so that the processing load of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reduced. be able to.

In this control example, the correction value is calculated based on the ratio of the actual number of steps required for the sliding operation and the swinging operation to the number of design steps (Type value), but this is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the time required for the sliding operation and the swinging operation may be measured, and the correction value may be calculated by the ratio with the design operation time. For example, the design operation time of the slide operation from the origin position to the overhang position by the support member 720 is 1.2 seconds (120 steps ÷ 100 pps), whereas it takes 1 to actually reach the overhang position. If it takes .5 seconds (when the required time is 1.25 times longer), 1.25 may be stored in the correction value storage area 223p as the correction value for the slide operation.

In this control example, the swingable direction specified in the swing area table 222d is determined every time the origin position of the swing operation is reached according to the number of steps of the slide operation of the support member 720, and after reaching the origin. It was configured to determine the swing direction, but it is not limited to this configuration. For example, the position coordinates of the effect member 620 including the slide position are calculated for each step of the swinging motion, and it is determined whether or not the effect member 620 fits in the region between the origin position and the overhang position. It may be configured as. More specifically, for example, when the effect member 620 performs a swinging motion to the right in the front view, the horizontal coordinates (coordinates in the slide operation direction) of the end points of the right end of the upper surface of the effect member 620 arranged on the far right side. May be configured to be calculated for each step. Then, when the calculated horizontal coordinates match the horizontal coordinates of the right end (10 cm to the right from the origin position) of the effect member 620 when both the effect member 620 and the support member 720 are at the origin position, the right direction is obtained. It may be configured to invert the swinging direction toward the origin (leftward when viewed from the front) while paying close attention to the swinging motion. Similarly, when the effect member 620 swings to the left in the front view, the horizontal coordinates (coordinates in the slide operation direction) of the end points of the left end of the upper surface of the effect member 620 arranged on the leftmost side are set by one step. It may be configured to be calculated for each. Then, when the effect member 620 is in the origin position and the support member 720 is in the overhang position and the horizontal coordinates of the left end of the effect member 620 (10 cm to the left from the overhang position) are matched, the swing to the left is achieved. It may be configured to invert the swing direction toward the origin (rightward when viewed from the front) while gazing at the movement.

Hereinafter, the method of calculating the horizontal coordinates will be described more specifically. In this modification, the width of the effect member 620 is 20 cm, the operating radius of the swing operation is 15 cm, and the rotation angle of the effect member 620 by performing the swing operation in one step of the operation of the effect member 620 is 6 degrees ( That is, 60 degrees in 10 steps), and the horizontal distance from the origin position to the overhang position is 60 cm (that is, 0.5 cm in one step). In this case, for example, when the 5-step effect member 620 is operated to the right, the effect member 620 rotates 30 degrees (6 degrees × 5 steps). As a result, the midpoint of the upper surface of the effect member 620 can be changed by 7.5 cm (15 steps as horizontal coordinates) in the right direction of the front view (15 cm × sin 30 °). Then, the horizontal coordinates of the right end points on the upper surface of the effect member 620 are about 8.7 cm (18 steps as horizontal coordinates) to the right side (10 cm × cos 30 °) further to the right side of the front view from the center of the upper surface. That is, the right end of the effect member 620 is the right end of the effect member 620 for 33 steps as the horizontal coordinates. Therefore, considering that the width of the right half of the effect member 620 at the origin position (inverted state) is 20 steps (10 cm), when the number of operation steps of the slide operation is 13 steps or less from the origin position, it moves to the right. The swinging motion of is stopped and the swinging direction is reversed to the left.

In this way, the number of sliding motion steps and the number of swing motion steps are converted into horizontal coordinates, and the swing direction is compared with the left and right horizontal coordinate thresholds (coordinates of the limit that does not interfere with the outer wall portion 212). By varying, even if the swinging motion and the sliding motion deviate from the design motion, the swinging motion can be operated within the range that can prevent (suppress) interference. Therefore, since it is possible to realize a more dynamic swinging motion, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In this control example, a method of correcting an operation scenario of an accessory in which an effect member 620 is provided above a support member 720 and a swing operation and a slide operation are performed integrally has been described, but the present invention can be applied. The accessory is not limited to this configuration. Any accessory that operates in conjunction with each other can be applied. For example, the same members as the effect member 620 are provided on the right side and the left side of the game board 13, and these members do not slide. It may be configured to perform swinging motions in synchronization with each other.

In this control example, the swingable direction is defined, and control is performed so that the effect member 620 and other configurations such as the outer wall portion 212 do not collide (interfere), but the swing operation is changed during the operation. The conditions for doing so are not limited to this. For example, it may be determined whether or not the timing of reaching the overhanging position by the sliding operation and the timing of reaching the origin position from the right side of the front view may be different. Then, when the timing is likely to shift, the operation content (set value) of the swinging motion is corrected, and the timing of reaching the overhang position by the sliding motion and the effect member 620 reach the origin position from the right side of the front view. You may make it coincide with the timing of doing. More specifically, for example, at a predetermined position between the origin position of the slide operation and the overhang position (for example, 10 steps before the overhang position), the number of remaining steps until the swing operation is completed is determined. To do. Then, it may be configured to correct the operation speed at which the swing operation is completed with the remaining number of steps. For example, if it is determined that only 5 steps are left up to the origin position of the swinging motion when the sliding motion has 10 steps remaining, the operating speed of the swinging motion is set to half (100 pps → 50 pps). , The swinging motion may be corrected to be executed exactly 5 steps while the sliding motion is executed 10 steps. Further, when the number of remaining steps of the swinging motion is smaller than that of the sliding motion, a weight may be inserted instead of changing the operating speed. The weight may be added only once, or may be added in multiple times. On the other hand, on the contrary, when it is determined that 20 steps of the swinging motion to the origin position of the swinging motion remain while the sliding motion has 10 steps remaining, the operating speed of the swinging motion is doubled (100 pps → By setting (200 pps), it may be corrected so that the swinging motion is executed exactly 20 steps while the sliding motion is executed 10 steps. Further, instead of determining the timing for correcting the operation content of the swing operation based on the number of operation steps of the slide operation, the slide position may be determined by a sensor or the like to determine whether or not to correct the swing operation. .. In this way, by matching the timing at which the sliding operation ends with the timing at which the swinging operation ends, it is possible to improve the appearance quality when the effect member 620 and the support member 720 operate in combination. it can. In addition, as an example of another condition for changing the swing motion during the operation, the position of the slide motion (the number of remaining motion steps) and the number of swing motions are determined during the slide motion, and the remaining motion is determined. It may be determined whether or not the predetermined number of swings (3 times) can be completed by the number of steps. Then, when it is determined that the number of swings is less than the predetermined number of swings, the motion speed of the swing motion may be changed to correct the motion to achieve the predetermined number of swings. The process of determining the number of remaining motion steps and the number of swings and the process of correcting the motion speed of the swing motion are the processes of S5901 in the slide motion process (see FIG. 156) in which the additional motion flag 223q is set. It may be executed after it is determined to be off (S5901: No).

In this control example, in the additional operation processing (see FIG. 153), when the output of the corresponding sensor does not become H even if the operation of one additional step is performed in the sensor direction, an error command is set to generate an error. Although it was configured to notify, the method of notifying an error is not limited to this. For example, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, and operates the accessory that has detected the abnormality for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) in a dedicated operation mode (for detecting an abnormality). It may be configured to keep the operation and stop the operation of the accessory that has not detected another abnormality. With this configuration, it is possible to easily visually determine which accessory has an abnormality. That is, the clerk in the hall or the like can easily determine that some abnormality has occurred in the accessory that continues to operate when the error is notified.

In this control example, it is assumed that the accessory (the effect member 620 and the support member 720) operates in combination, but instead of or in addition to this, the support member 720 and other configurations are used. May be linked and controlled. For example, the strut member 720 may be configured to switch the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 in conjunction with the sliding operation. In this case, a lighting pattern may be set according to the sliding operation of the support column member 720. Further, the lighting mode may be switched each time the support column member 720 returns to the origin position. For example, the lighting color of the illumination units 29 to 33 may be switched as red → green → blue → red ... each time the origin position and the overhang position are reciprocated once by the sliding operation. With this configuration, the lighting color set during the previous slide operation can be simply stored and switched according to the start of the slide operation, so the lighting control of the illumination units 29 to 33 is simplified. can do. Further, as compared with the case where the lighting pattern is switched according to the progress status of the slide operation, it is possible to suppress the deviation between the progress status of the slide operation and the switching timing of the lighting pattern. Therefore, it is possible to improve the appearance quality during the sliding operation. In addition, since the lighting color may be switched when the position returns to the origin position, the drive motor for sliding the strut member 720 may be changed, or the mechanism such as the gear ratio may be changed. Even if the round trip time is changed, the lighting control data before the change can be used as it is. That is, since the step of changing the lighting pattern according to the changed configuration can be omitted, the work of the designer can be reduced.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 173. In the first control example described above, when displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 or the sub display device 690 during a normal game, the capacity of the character ROM 234 is increased by diverting the images at the time of turning on various powers. The technology for reduction was explained.

On the other hand, in the third control example, a control method capable of further increasing the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect, which is one of the interesting effects executed by the sub display device 690, will be described. Although the details will be described later, the timing effect is an effect that suggests the timing of pressing (operating) the frame button 229 provided on the front frame 14 by the image displayed on the sub display device 690. It is a kind of hobby effect that is executed while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed. In this timing effect, points are added each time the timing suggested by the sub-display device 690 matches the timing when the player actually operates the frame button 229, and the points are acquired by the end of the timing effect. If the points are equal to or higher than the predetermined reference value (quota), the player is given a privilege.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that a frame button 229 is provided instead of the frame button 22, and the voice lamp control device 113 has. The configurations of the provided ROM 222 and RAM 223 have been partially changed, and some processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. is there. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 157. As shown in FIG. 157, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the frame button 229 is provided on the left side of the front view with respect to the ball lending operation unit 40, and the frame button 22 is deleted. The frame button 229 is composed of four types of buttons: an upper button UB, a right button RB, a left button LB, and a lower button DB. These four types of buttons are used in timing production. That is, the timing effect is configured to suggest the pressing (operation) timing of the frame button 229 and the type of button to be pressed (operated) (see FIGS. 163 and 164). Then, when the timing suggested by the effect matches the type of the button, points are added.

Next, a display mode of the timing effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 to 165. First, FIG. 163 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the sub-display device 690 when the timing effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 163, when the timing effect is executed, a plurality of display areas (display areas 901, 902, 903, 904a, 904b, 904c, 904d, 905) are displayed on the sub-display device 690.

The display areas 904a, 904b, 904c, 904d, and 905 displayed in the lower half of the display area of the sub-display device 690 suggest to the player when to press (operate) the frame button 229 and the type of button to be operated. Is the display area where the display is performed. As shown in FIG. 163, the display area 905 is composed of a vertically long rectangular shape pressing suggestion area 911a and four horizontally long rectangular shape scroll display areas 911b to 911e. The scroll display areas 911b to 911e are displayed vertically arranged in this order.

The scroll display areas 911b to 911e are configured so that various images can be scrolled and displayed in the left direction of the front view (direction of the pressing suggestion area 911a). As various images displayed by scrolling, as shown in FIG. 163, for example, scroll bars 912a to 912e, continuous hitting bars 913a, and the like are provided. Points are added by pressing a button of the corresponding type at the timing when various scroll-displayed images are scrolled to a position where they overlap with the pressing suggestion area 911a. The scroll bar is configured so that the corresponding points (10 points or 50 points) are added by pressing the corresponding button type once at the timing when the pressing suggestion area 911a overlaps. On the other hand, the continuous hit bar is configured so that the corresponding points (50 points) are added by pressing the corresponding button 10 times while overlapping the pressing suggestion area 911a.

Above the pressing suggestion area 911a, a balloon-type display area 901 pointing to the pressing suggestion area 911a is displayed. In this display area 901, the characters "Push the buttons at the timing when the bars overlap and aim for 1000 points!" Are displayed. Depending on the display content of the display area 901, points will be added if the frame button 229 is pressed at the timing when various images scrolled in each scroll display area 911b to 911e scroll to the position of the pressing suggestion area 911a. It can be easily understood by the player.

Further, a substantially rectangular display area 902 is displayed on the upper right of the sub display device 690. The display area 902 is acquired when a type of image that can be scroll-displayed in each scroll display area 911b to 911e and a button of the corresponding type are pressed (operated) at the timing when the image overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a. The correspondence with the points that can be done is displayed. Specifically, the white scroll bar is displayed as 50 points, the hatched scroll bar is displayed as 10 points, and the scroll bar with the characters "Continuous hit !!" is displayed. It is displayed that it is 50 points. By clearly indicating the correspondence between the image and the points in the display area 902, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from having doubts about the increase or decrease of the points, so that the player can safely produce the timing. You can play the game inside.

Below the display area 902, a horizontally long rectangular display area 903 is displayed. In this display area 903, the total points acquired in the timing production this time and the quota are displayed. In the example of FIG. 163 (a), the quota is 1000 points, whereas 100 points have been obtained so far. Therefore, the characters "points: 0100/1000" are displayed in the display area 902. Is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize the current point regarding the quota. Therefore, since the game can be performed aiming at the quota, the player's motivation to participate can be improved.

In this control example, when the quota is achieved in the timing effect, the current game state is notified as a privilege. In this control example, as in the first control example, a 2R probability variation jackpot is provided as a jackpot type. In addition, as a kind of loss, a small hit is provided for the same opening operation as the 2R probability variation jackpot, and it is not possible to distinguish whether the 2R probability variation jackpot was won or a small hit from the production and the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a. It is configured as follows. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the game state after the opening operation of 2R of the specific winning opening 65a is executed. Therefore, in this control example, as a privilege of the timing effect, if the quota is achieved at the end of the timing effect, the current game state (whether it is a probabilistic state of a special symbol or a low probability state) is notified. It is configured as follows. As a result, a player who wants to know the current game state can be actively participated in the timing production. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Also, by setting the privilege when the timing production is successful to the one that does not affect the game result (notification of the current game state), whether the privilege is given purely by the skill of the player's pressing (operation) timing. You can decide whether or not. On the other hand, if a quota (for example, a jackpot) whose result has already been decided at the start of fluctuation (before the timing production is started) is set as a privilege, the timing production is started. Before, the result of the timing effect (whether or not the mode for achieving the quota can be displayed) is determined. If there is a timing effect in which the quota cannot be achieved, there is a risk that the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect will be diminished. On the other hand, in this control example, the privilege given when the quota is achieved in the timing effect is set to "notification of the game state" which does not affect the game result. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not to grant the privilege purely according to the skill of pressing the frame button 229. That is, when the privilege is given, the player can have a stronger feeling that the privilege has been acquired by himself / herself. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production.

Circular display areas 904a to 904d are vertically arranged and displayed on the left side of the display area 905. The display areas 904a to 904d are displayed so that their vertical positions are substantially the same as those of the scroll display areas 911b to 911e. Further, inside these display areas 904a to 904d, the characters "upper", "right", "left", and "lower" are displayed, respectively. With these characters, the player can easily recognize the button type corresponding to the scroll display areas 911b to 911e having substantially the same vertical position as the display areas 904a to 904d. That is, it is recognized that the scroll display area 911b whose vertical position is substantially the same as the display area 904a on which the character "upper" is displayed is a display area for suggesting the pressing (operation) timing of the upper button UB. Can be done. Similarly, the scroll display area 911c suggests the pressing (operation) timing of the right button RB, the scroll display area 911d suggests the pressing (operation) timing of the left button LB, and the scroll display area 911e suggests the lower button DB. It is possible to easily recognize that the timing of pressing (operation) of is suggested.

By executing the timing effect, the frame button 229 can be operated with the aim of achieving the quota, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 163 (b) and 164 (a), a display mode when the operation of the frame button 229 is detected in the timing effect will be described. First, FIG. 163 (a) shows a display mode in which the frame button 229 can be pressed (points can be obtained) at the timing when the scroll-displayed image in the timing effect overlaps the press suggestion region 911a. ing.

FIG. 163 (b) shows the display contents when the player presses the upper button UB at the timing when the white scroll bar 912a scrolled and displayed in the slide display area 911b overlaps with the pressing suggestion area 911a. .. As shown in FIG. 163 (b), when it is detected that the player presses the upper button UB, the display area 904a with the character "up" (corresponding to the upper button UB) lights up. As a result, the player can be made aware that the pachinko machine 10 has normally detected the operation (pressing) of the player, so that the game can be performed during the timing production with greater peace of mind.

Further, on the left side of the display areas 904a to 904d, a display area 921 is formed to indicate that the player has pressed (operated) the frame button 229 in a timely manner. Since the characters "GREAT" are displayed in the display area 921, the player can easily recognize that the operation timing of the frame button 229 is correct. Further, below the display area 921, a character 922 indicating a point given by the successful pressing is displayed. The character "+50" 922 makes it easy for the player to recognize the points earned. In addition, the display of the display area 903 is updated according to the acquired points (0100/1000 → 0150/1000). From these display contents, it is possible to make the player recognize that both the timing of pressing the frame button 229 and the button type match (successfully pressed). In addition, the points earned (granted) and the total points up to now can be easily confirmed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 164 (a), the display contents when the timing of pressing the button deviates from the suggestion display area 911a will be described. FIG. 164 (a) is a diagram showing the display contents when the press of the upper button UB is detected before the scroll bar 912a reaches the press suggestion region 911a. Also in this case, the display area 904a with the character "up" (corresponding to the upper button UB) is lit in order to notify that the pressing of the upper button UB is normally detected.

Further, on the left side of the display area 904a, a display area 921 is formed to indicate that the player has failed to press (operate) the frame button 229. Since the characters "BAD" are displayed in the display area 921, the player can easily recognize that the pressing (operation) timing of the frame button 229 is incorrect. Further, below the display area 921, a character 924 indicating that a penalty has been imposed due to the failure to press is displayed. The character "-10" 924 makes it easy to recognize that the points have been subtracted due to the failure of pressing. Therefore, since the frame button 229 can be operated more carefully, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect. In addition, the display of the display area 903 is updated according to the subtracted points (0100/1000 → 0090/1000). From these display contents, it is possible to make the player recognize that the frame button 229 has failed to be pressed. In addition, the subtracted points and the total points up to now can be easily confirmed.

Next, examples of modes having different difficulty levels will be described. Although the details will be described later, in this control example, when executing the timing effect, the difficulty level of the timing effect to be executed this time can be determined from a plurality of difficulty levels. In addition, the determined difficulty level is not fixed, and may be reviewed in the middle of the production depending on the progress of the timing production, the participation status of the player in the timing production, and the like.

FIG. 164 (b) is a diagram illustrating an mode of timing effect having a high degree of difficulty. As shown in FIG. 164 (b), in this modified example, the higher the difficulty level, the higher the appearance rate of the scroll bars (scroll bars 915a to 915e in which 10 points are given when the pressing is successful) with few points. Become. That is, the quota cannot be achieved unless the frame button 229 is pressed more and more accurately. In addition, the higher the difficulty level, the faster the scroll speed. As a result, it is difficult to match the timing of pressing the frame button 229. By providing timing effects having different difficulty levels, it is possible to deal with both a player who is good at pressing the frame button 229 at the same timing and a player who is not good at pressing the frame button 229. That is, the difficulty level can be changed according to the skill of the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 165, a display mode when notifying the result of the timing effect will be described. FIG. 165 (a) shows a display displayed on the sub-display device 690 when the quota of 1000 points is achieved (for example, 1200 points are acquired) in the timing effect executed during the probability variation state of the special symbol. It is a figure exemplifying the contents. As shown in FIG. 165 (a), when it is determined that the timing effect is completed and the quota is achieved, a result notification area 916 for notifying the result of the timing effect is formed inside the display area 905. Will be done. As a result, the characters "The quota has been achieved !! The current state has changed !!" are displayed in the notification area. By this display, it is possible to make the player recognize that the current gaming state is the probabilistic state of the special symbol. In the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, the character "current state is low probability ..." is displayed instead of the character "current state is probable change !!".

On the other hand, FIG. 165 (b) illustrates the display content displayed on the sub-display device 690 when the quota of 1000 points is not reached (for example, only 600 points can be obtained) in the timing effect. It is a figure. As shown in FIG. 165 (b), even when it is determined that the timing effect has ended and the quota has not been achieved, a result notification area 916 for notifying the result of the timing effect is provided inside the display area 905. It is formed. As a result, the characters "Sorry that the quota has not been achieved ..." are displayed in the notification area. That is, only the fact that the quota could not be achieved by the timing effect is notified, and the current game state is not notified (the privilege is not given).

In this way, by achieving the quota in the timing production, the current game state is notified in the result notification area 916, so that the player who wants to know the current game state is actively participated in the timing production. Can be done.

In this control example, the notification of the game state is set as a privilege when the score is achieved, but the privilege in the timing production is not limited to this. Any privilege that does not depend on the game result determined before the execution of the timing effect is determined. For example, by achieving the quota, the display mode of the subsequent display effect (variable pattern effect) is special. It may be configured to change to the embodiment. With this configuration, it is possible to actively participate in the timing effect in order to see the display effect in a special mode.

In this control example, when the difficulty level is changed, the type and number of scroll bars and the scroll speed are changed, but the method of changing the difficulty level is not limited to this. For example, the quota points may be increased as the difficulty level increases. Further, for example, as the difficulty level increases, the types of buttons used may increase.

In this control example, points are added by detecting 10 presses while the continuous hit bar overlaps with the press suggestion area 911a, but the number of presses is not limited to 10 times. Absent. It may be set to a number less than 10 times, or it may be set to a large number of times. Further, the number of presses may be changed according to the difficulty level, and for example, the number of presses may be increased as the difficulty level increases. This makes it possible to have a variety of methods for changing the difficulty level.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 162. FIG. 158 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 158, in this control example, the frame button 229 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. The frame button 229 is provided with four types of buttons: an upper button UB, a right button RB, a left button LB, and a lower button DB. As described above, these four types of buttons are used in timing effects (see FIGS. 163 and 164).

Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 159 (a). In addition to the configuration of ROM 222 in the first control example, the ROM 222 in the present control example is provided with a timing effect selection table 222d and a pressing period table 222e.

The timing effect selection table 222d is a data table in which the mode of the timing effect, which is a kind of the interest effect executed during the variable display of the special symbol, is defined. When executing the timing effect, the timing effect selection table 222d is referred to, and the display mode (difficulty level) of the sub display device 690 during the timing effect is set. The difficulty level means the ease of timing adjustment when the frame button 229 is pressed (operated) according to the timing and button type suggested by the sub-display device 690. The higher the difficulty level, the more severe the timing of pressing (operating) the frame button 229, or the more severe the pressing (operation) of more button types in a short period of time (see FIG. 164 (b)).

Further, the timing effect of this control example is divided into three types of periods (early stage period, middle stage period, and final stage period), and the display mode can be set at different timings for each period. .. More specifically, at the start of the timing effect, the mode of the early stage period is selected from the timing effect selection table 222d, and the early period of the timing effect is started. Then, at the end of the early stage period, the mode of the middle stage period is selected from the timing effect selection table 222d, and the middle stage period of the timing effect is started. Further, at the end of the middle stage period, the mode of the final stage period is selected from the timing effect selection table 222d, and the final stage period of the timing effect is started.

The details of the timing effect table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 160. As shown in FIG. 160, in the timing effect table 222d, the effect mode of the timing effect is defined in association with the value of the difficulty counter 223γ indicating the difficulty level of the timing effect. More specifically, as an aspect of the early stage period, the early stage effect for difficulty level 5 is associated with the value "4" of the difficulty level counter 223γ, and the difficulty level 4 is associated with the value "3" of the difficulty level counter 223γ. The early stage production is associated. Although not shown in the illustration, similarly, the early stage effect for difficulty level 3 is associated with the value "2" of the difficulty level counter 223γ, and the value "1" of the difficulty level counter 223γ is used for difficulty level 2. An early stage effect is associated, and an early stage effect for difficulty level 1 is associated with a value "0" of the difficulty counter 223γ. The larger the difficulty level, the higher the difficulty level. That is, the early stage production for difficulty level 5 is the mode with the highest difficulty level, and the early stage production for difficulty level 1 is the mode with the lowest difficulty level.

The mode of the midfield period is also defined. That is, as an aspect of the mid-stage period, the mid-stage effect for difficulty level 5 is associated with the value "4" of the difficulty counter 223γ, and the mid-stage effect for difficulty level 4 is associated with the value "3" of the difficulty counter 223γ. The value "2" of the difficulty counter 223γ is associated with the midfield effect for difficulty level 3, and the value "1" of the difficulty counter 223γ is associated with the midfield effect for difficulty 2. The midfield effect for difficulty level 1 is associated with the value "0" of the difficulty level counter 223γ.

Furthermore, the aspect of the final period is also defined. That is, as an aspect of the middle stage period, the final stage effect for difficulty level 5 is associated with the value "4" of the difficulty counter 223γ, and the final stage effect for difficulty level 4 is associated with the value "3" of the difficulty level counter 223γ. The value "2" of the difficulty counter 223γ is associated with the final stage effect for difficulty level 3, and the value "1" of the difficulty level counter 223γ is associated with the final stage effect for difficulty level 2. The final stage effect for difficulty level 1 is associated with the value "0" of the difficulty level counter 223γ.

Although details will be described later, the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is updated in a timely manner according to the game situation of the player. For example, when setting the mode of the middle stage period, if it is determined that the number of points earned by the player in the early stage period is relatively small (for example, less than 200), the value of the difficulty counter is subtracted by 1 and subtracted. The effect mode of the difficulty level corresponding to the later value is set. As a result, the mode of the middle stage period can be set to a mode in which the difficulty level is lower than that of the early stage period. Therefore, the player cannot obtain points for a long time, so that he / she can participate in the production during the timing production. It is possible to prevent (suppress) giving up. On the contrary, when it is determined that the player has acquired a relatively large number of points in the early stage, 1 is added to the value of the difficulty counter 223γ. As a result, when a player who is good at timing production plays a game, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from being delayed due to the continuation of a mode that is less difficult for the player.

As described above, since it is possible to select an effect having a different difficulty level from the timing effect selection table 222d according to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ, it is possible to diversify the mode of the timing effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. Further, by setting different difficulty levels, it is possible to set the difficulty level according to the skill of each player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the timing production can be improved.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 159 (a). The pressing period table 222e determines whether or not it is determined that when the frame button 229 is pressed, the image such as the scroll bar is pressed (successfully pressed) at the timing of 911 overlapping the pressing suggestion area 911a. It is a data table specified in association with the elapsed time since the start of. When any of the buttons (up button UB, right button RB, left button LB, down button DB) constituting the frame button 229 is pressed during the execution of the timing effect, this pressing period table 222e is referred to, and this time. It is determined whether the button press of is successful or unsuccessful. Then, if it succeeds, the effect of adding points is executed (see FIG. 163 (b)), and if it fails, the effect of subtracting points (penalty is imposed) is executed (FIG. 164 (a). )reference). The details of the pressing period table 222e will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162.

FIG. 161 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pressing period table 222e. As shown in FIG. 161, as the pressing period table 222e, a plurality of data tables according to the set period and the difficulty level are defined. For example, as a table corresponding to the early stage production for difficulty level 1 set in the early stage period, the table 222e1 for early stage difficulty level 1 is provided. When the early stage effect for difficulty level 1 is set, the table 222e1 for early stage difficulty level 1 is set as the corresponding pressing period table. Similarly, the same applies to the early stage production for difficulty level 2 to the early stage production for difficulty level 5, and as the corresponding pressing period tables, the early stage difficulty level 2 table 222e2 to the early stage difficulty level 5 table 222e5 are defined. ing.

Further, the middle stage period is the same as the early stage period. Specifically, as a pressing period table corresponding to the middle stage production for difficulty level 1 to the middle stage production for difficulty level 5, the table for middle stage difficulty level 1 2226 to the middle stage difficulty level A table 222e10 for 5 is provided.

On the other hand, the final stage has a different structure from the early stage and the middle stage. That is, a plurality of pressing period tables are associated with the effect mode for the final period of 1. Here, the plurality of pressing period tables mean tables having different widths (period lengths) of success and detection. Even if the effect for the final period of the same aspect is displayed, the difficulty level can be made different by making the period detected as successful different. That is, the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be reduced because the difficulty level can be varied without increasing the display mode of the timing effect.

A table having a wide range of success is selected when it is determined that the player has acquired few points (for example, less than 600 points) by the time the final stage is reached. If too few points are earned by the end of the game, the player may give up on achieving the quota in the timing production. Therefore, in this control example, when setting the final stage period, it is determined whether or not the points are less than 600 points, and if it is less than 600 points, a pressing period table having a wide range of detection as success is selected. It is configured. As a result, the range of success and detection becomes wider, so that the player can more easily obtain points, so that he / she can participate in the timing production without giving up until the end.

On the other hand, a table having a narrow range of detection as success is selected when it is determined that the player has acquired a large number of points (for example, 900 points or more) by the time the final stage is reached. If too many points are earned by the end of the final period, the player may feel a margin and the operation of the frame button 229 during the final period may become complicated. Therefore, in this control example, by selecting a table having a narrow range detected as success, it is possible to execute the operation of the frame button 229 while giving a feeling of tension until the end of the timing effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production.

When the production of the final period corresponding to difficulty 1 to difficulty 3 is selected, the pressing period table in which the range detected as success is a normal range and the pressing range in which success is detected are relatively wide. Period table and may be selected. For example, when the final stage production for difficulty level 1 is selected as the production mode for the final stage period, either the final stage difficulty level 1 normal range table 222e13 or the final stage difficulty level 1 wide range table 222e18 is selected as the pressing period table. Be selected.

On the other hand, when the production of the final period corresponding to the difficulty level 4 and the difficulty level 5 is selected, the range detected as success is the pressing period table having a normal width and the range detected as success. In addition to a relatively wide press period table, a press period table with a relatively narrow range of success detection may be selected. For example, when the final stage production for difficulty level 5 is selected as the production mode for the final stage period, the final stage difficulty level 5 narrow range table 222e13, the final stage difficulty level 5 normal range table 222e17, and the final stage difficulty level are used as the pressing period table. 5 Wide range table 222e22 may be selected.

It should be noted that the timing effect is configured to select the pressing period table whose range of detection as success is narrow only when the effect of the final period corresponding to the difficulty level 4 or the difficulty level 5 is selected. This is because there is a high possibility that a good player is playing the game. When a player who is good at timing production is playing a game, there is a risk that the timing production in the normal detection range may seem too easy. Therefore, in this case, in addition to displaying in a highly difficult mode, the range for detecting success is also narrowed so that even a player who is good at timing production can enjoy it. As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the timing production can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 162, the specific contents of each table constituting the pressing period table 222e will be described by taking the table 222e3 for the early difficulty level 3 as an example. The early stage effect for difficulty level 3 is set as the effect mode in accordance with the setting of the table 222e3 for the early stage difficulty level 3, and the display mode of the early stage effect for difficulty level 3 is shown in FIG. 162 (a). ) Is the display mode shown in. Therefore, in explaining the table 222e for difficulty level 3 in the early stage, FIG. 163 will also be referred to in a timely manner.

FIG. 162 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the table 222e3 for the early stage difficulty level 3. As shown in FIG. 162, in the early stage difficulty level 3 table 222e3, the type of pressing period (value of the timing effect pointer 223δ that is periodically updated) is associated with the elapsed time from the start of the timing effect. Whether it is a success period, a failure period, or a continuous hit period) is specified. Further, the types of the pressing period are defined as a pressing period for the upper button UB, a pressing period for the right button RB, a pressing period for the left button LB, and a pressing period for the lower button DB, respectively.

Specifically, the elapsed time from the start of the timing effect is in the range of 0 ms to 1499 milliseconds (1.499 seconds), and the failure period is associated with the pressing period for all button types. .. If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined to be a failure. Further, in the range of the elapsed time in the range of 1500 milliseconds to 1699 milliseconds, the success period is associated with the pressing period for the upper button UB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated with the pressing period for other button types. Therefore, in this period, when the upper button UB is operated, it is determined as success and points are added, and when another button is operated, it is determined as failure. As for the display contents of the sub display device 690 during this period, only the scroll bar (scroll bar 912a in FIG. 163) that is scroll-displayed in the scroll display area 911b overlaps the press suggestion area 911a, and the other scroll display area 911b. The scroll bar displayed in scrolls in ~ 911e displays a state in which the press suggestion area 911a has not been reached.

In addition, the elapsed time in the range of 1700 milliseconds to 2199 seconds is associated with a failure period as a pressing period for all button types. If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined to be a failure. Then, in the range of the elapsed time in the range of 2200 milliseconds to 2399 milliseconds, the success period is associated with the pressing period for the lower button DB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated with the pressing period for other button types. Therefore, in this period, when the lower button DB is pressed, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and when another button is pressed, it is determined to be a failure. As for the display contents of the sub display device 690 during this period, only the scroll bar (scroll bar 912e in FIG. 163) that is scroll-displayed in the scroll display area 911e overlaps the press suggestion area 911a, and the other scroll display area 911a. The scroll bar displayed in scrolls in ~ 911d is displayed in a state in which the press suggestion area 911a has not been reached.

The elapsed time in the range of 2400 milliseconds to 2999 seconds is associated with a failure period as a pressing period for all button types. If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined to be a failure. Then, in the range of the elapsed time of 3000 milliseconds to 3199 milliseconds, the success period is associated with the pressing period for the right button RB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated with the pressing period for other button types. Therefore, in this period, when the right button RB is pressed, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and when another button is pressed, it is determined to be a failure. As for the display contents of the sub display device 690 during this period, only the scroll bar (scroll bar 912b in FIG. 163) that is scroll-displayed in the scroll display area 911c overlaps the press suggestion area 911a, and the other scroll display area 911b. , 911d, and 911e, the scroll bar displayed by scrolling is displayed in a state where the pressing suggestion area 911a has not been reached.

The elapsed time in the range of 3200 milliseconds to 3799 seconds is associated with a failure period as a pressing period for all button types. If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined to be a failure. Then, in the range of the elapsed time in the range of 3800 milliseconds to 4999 milliseconds, the continuous hitting period is associated with the pressing period for the upper button UB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated with the pressing period for other button types. Therefore, in this period, when the upper button UB is pressed 10 times, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and when another button is operated, it is determined to be a failure. As for the display contents of the sub display device 690 during this period, only the continuous hit bar (continuous hit bar 913a in FIG. 163) scrolled and displayed in the scroll display area 911b overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a, and the other scroll display area 911c. The scroll bar displayed in scrolls in ~ 911e displays a state in which the press suggestion area 911a has not been reached.

In the range of the elapsed time from 5000 milliseconds to 5199 milliseconds, the continuous hitting period is associated with the pressing period for the upper button UB, and the success period is associated with the pressing period for the right button RB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated with the pressing period for other button types. Therefore, in this period, when the upper button UB is pressed a total of 10 times or when the right button RB is pressed, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and when other buttons are operated, it is determined to be a failure. To. In this period, the display contents of the sub display device 690 include a continuous hit bar (continuous hit bar 913a in FIG. 163) that is scroll-displayed in the scroll display area 911b and a scroll bar that is scroll-displayed in the scroll display area 911d (FIG. The scroll bar 912c) in 163 overlaps with the pressing suggestion area 911a, and the scroll bars displayed in scrolls in the other scroll display areas 911d and 911e are displayed in a state where they have not reached the pressing suggestion area 911a.

Although the illustration is omitted, the pressing period according to the button type is also specified for the elapsed time thereafter. By using the table 222e3 for difficulty level 3 in the early stage, the pressing period can be updated in synchronization with the display mode of the timing effect. Since the other tables specified in the pressing period table 222e have the same configuration, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 159 (b). In addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example, the RAM 223 in this control example includes a timing effect permission flag 223α, a latent probability change flag 223β, a difficulty level counter 223γ, a timing effect pointer 223δ, and a continuous hit count counter 223ε. A continuous hit success flag 223ζ and a score counter 223η are provided.

The timing effect permission flag 223α is a flag indicating whether or not it is possible to set a timing effect as an entertaining effect when selecting a mode of variable display. When the timing effect permission flag 223α is on, it indicates that the timing effect can be set as a mode of the variation effect, and when it is off, it indicates that the timing effect cannot be set.

Here, as described above, in this control example, it is difficult to identify from the outside (from the player's point of view) whether the 2R probability variation big hit or the small hit. That is, when the specific winning opening 65a performs the 2R opening operation, it may be a 2R probability variation jackpot and shift to a probability variation state of a special symbol, or it is merely a small hit and the game state is not changed. I can't tell if it was. In other words, if the opening operation of 2R by the specific winning opening 65a has never been executed after the jackpot A or jackpot B is completed, the current gaming state is clear to the player. Therefore, even if the timing effect is executed in this case, there is a possibility that the player does not want to obtain the privilege of notifying the game state and does not participate in the timing effect. Therefore, in this control example, if the opening operation of 2R by the specific winning opening 65a is never executed after the jackpot A or jackpot B is executed, the timing effect is set to off by setting the timing effect to off. It is configured so that it is not selected (see S1827 in FIG. 173).

Further, the timing effect permission flag 223α is set to be turned on by becoming a 2R probability variation big hit or a small hit (see S1824 in FIG. 173). Once the timing effect is executed, the timing effect permission flag 223α is reset to off (see FIG. 6412). As a result, the opportunity for the timing effect to be executed can be limited to only once for each 2R opening operation by the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, since it is possible to work on the timing production more seriously, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production.

The probability variation state flag 223β is a flag for determining whether or not the special symbol is in the high probability state. When the probability change state flag 223β is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probability change state, and when it is off, it indicates that it is not in the probability change state. This probability variation state flag 223β is set to on when a variation pattern command corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot (big hit A) or the 2R probability variation jackpot (big hit C) is received (see S1823 and S1826 in FIG. 173), and the 16R time reduction. It is set to off when a variation pattern command corresponding to the jackpot (big hit B) is received (see S1826 in FIG. 173). When the quota is achieved in the timing effect and the current gaming state is notified, the gaming state is notified with reference to the probability variation state flag 223β.

The difficulty level counter 223γ is a counter for identifying the difficulty level of the effect set in each period of the timing effect (early stage period, middle stage period, final stage period). If the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is 0, the effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 1 is selected, if the value is 1, the effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 2 is selected, and if the value is 2, the effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 2 is selected. , The production mode corresponding to the difficulty level 3 is selected. If the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is 3, the effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 4 is selected, and if the value is 4, the effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 5 is selected.

The initial value of the difficulty counter 223γ is set to 0. That is, it is reset to 0 when the power is turned on. In addition, when setting the production mode during the middle period of the timing production, if it is determined that the player has acquired a relatively large number of points (the difficulty level is too low for the player currently playing), 1 is added to the counter value (see S6203 in FIG. 170). As a result, the difficulty level can be made higher as the effect mode selected in the middle stage period than in the effect mode in the early stage period. On the other hand, in setting the production mode during the middle stage period, if it is determined that the number of points earned by the player is small (the difficulty level is too high for the player currently playing), the counter value is subtracted by 1. (See S6207 in FIG. 170). As a result, the difficulty level can be made lower than that of the production mode in the early stage period as the production mode selected in the middle stage period. In this way, by using the difficulty level counter 223γ, the difficulty level can be changed according to the skill of the player, so that the difficulty level can be adjusted to be more suitable for the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production.

The timing effect pointer 223δ is a pointer for indicating the elapsed time from the start of the timing effect, and is updated every 1 millisecond. During the execution of the timing effect, the timing effect pointer 223δ is referred to, and the type of the pressing period is determined. The timing effect pointer 223δ is periodically updated, for example, in the main process.

The continuous hit count counter 223ε is a counter for counting how many times the corresponding button is pressed during the continuous hit period of the timing effect. Whether or not the repeated hits are successful is determined according to the value of the continuous hit count counter 223ε. The continuous hit count counter 223ε is incremented by 1 each time the corresponding button operation is detected during the continuous hit period (see S6007 in FIG. 168), and is reset to 0 when the specified number of repeated hits is reached during the continuous hit period (FIG. 168). See S6011). It is also reset to 0 at the end of the continuous hitting period. The number of repeated hits counter 223ε can be used to accurately determine the number of repeated hits.

The continuous hit success flag 223ζ is a flag indicating whether or not the predetermined number of repeated hits has been reached during the continuous hit period, and if it is on, it indicates that the number of repeated hits has been reached. On the other hand, if it is off, it indicates that the number of repeated hits has not been reached or the period of repeated hits has not been reached. The continuous hit success flag 223ζ is set to on when it is determined that the specified number of repeated hits has been reached (see S6011 in FIG. 168), and is set to off when the continuous hit period ends. While the continuous hit success flag 223ζ is on, even if the button corresponding to the set continuous hit period is continuously pressed more than a specified number of times, it is controlled so as not to be determined as a failure. As a result, the player can be made to hit repeatedly without worrying about the number of repeated hits.

The score counter 223η is a counter for counting the points (scores) acquired by the player in the timing effect of 1. At the end of the timing effect, the value of the score counter 223η is compared with the quota of 1000 points, and it is determined whether or not the quota has been achieved. The score counter 223η is updated every time the pressing of the frame button 229 is detected during the timing effect (see S6010, S6014, and S6016 in FIG. 168).

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, the timed change of the display mode when the fluctuation pattern in which the timing effect is set is executed will be described. First, as a premise, the timing effect has a certain probability (for example, 10) when the timing effect permission flag 223α is turned on and a variation effect with a variation time of 30 seconds or more (a variation effect in which reach occurs) is selected. It is a production that is selected with a% probability).

As shown in FIG. 166, when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the variable effect in which the timing effect is set, the reach effect is generated in the third symbol display device 81. Then, when 5 seconds have passed from the occurrence of the reach effect (15 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation), the effect mode of the early stage period is selected, and the timing effect of the selected effect mode is started on the sub display device 690. Will be done.

When 5 seconds have passed since the timing production was started (20 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation), the early stage period ends, the production mode of the middle stage period is selected, and the middle stage period is started based on the selection contents. .. Furthermore, when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the middle stage period (25 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation), the middle stage period ends, the production mode of the final stage period is selected, and the final stage period starts based on the selection contents. .. Then, when 2 seconds have passed from the start of the final stage period, the final stage period ends and the notification of the result (whether or not the quota is achieved) of the timing effect of this time is set. This notification is performed for 1 second.

<About the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 173, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. First, FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example.

Of these main processes, the processes S1501 to S1511 and S1513 to S1520 are the same as the processes S1501 to S1511 and S1513 to S1520 executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) in the first control example, respectively. The process is executed. Further, in the main process in the third control example, when the process of S1510 is completed, the timing effect process (S1541) for performing various settings during the timing effect is executed, and the process shifts to S1511. In the process of S1511, the same process as the command determination process (S1511) in the first control example is executed, and then the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 109) is replaced with the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 109) in the first control example. S1542) is executed. When the variation display setting process 2 is completed, the processes after S1513 are executed as in the first control example.

Here, the details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1507) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 167) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 168. The frame button input monitoring / effect processing itself was also executed in the main processing (see FIG. 106) in the first control example, but since the detailed description thereof has been omitted, it will be described again.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1507), first, it is determined whether or not the timing effect is in progress (S6001), and if it is determined that the timing effect is not in progress (S6001: No), this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing is being produced (S6001: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the press of the operation button (frame button 229) is detected (S6002). Then, when it is determined that the pressing of the operation button (frame button 229) is not detected (S6002: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the press of the operation button (frame button 229) is detected in the process of S6002 (S6002: Yes), the press period table 222e corresponding to the type of the button for which the press is detected is read (S6003). After that, the pressing period type is specified based on the read pressing period table 222e and the value of the timing effect pointer 223δ (S6004).

When the number of processes of S6004 is increased, it is next determined whether or not it is a continuous hitting period (S6005), and if it is determined that it is a continuous hitting period (S6005: Yes), then whether or not the continuous hitting success flag 223ζ is on (S6006). When it is determined that the continuous hit success flag 223ζ is on (S6007: Yes), it means that the frame button has been pressed a predetermined number of times (10 times) during the continuous hit period, and the number of repeated hits needs to be counted. Since there is no such thing, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6006, when it is determined that the continuous hit success flag 223ζ is off (S6006: No), 1 is added to the continuous hit count counter 223ε (S6007), and whether or not the value after addition is 10 or more. Is determined (S6008). That is, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number of times (10 times) of repeated hits has been achieved in one continuous hit period. In the process of S6008, when it is determined that the value of the repeated hit count counter 223ε after addition is smaller than 10 (S6008: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the updated repeated hit count counter 223ε is 10 or more (S6008: Yes), it means that the predetermined number of repeated hits has been achieved, so a display success effect command is set. As a result (S6009), an effect corresponding to the success of repeated hits is set, and 50 is added to the score counter 223η as points (scores) corresponding to the success of repeated hits (S6010). After that, the continuous hit count counter 223ε is reset, the continuous hit success flag 223ζ is set to ON (S6011), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S6005, when it is determined that it is not the continuous hitting period (S6005: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the pressing success period (S6012), and it is not the pressing success period (pressing failure period). If it is determined (S6012: No), a display failure effect command is set (S6013). By this display failure command, an effect of notifying the player that the pressing timing of the frame button 229 deviates from the timing suggested by the sub-display device 690 is displayed (see FIG. 164 (a)). By notifying the failure of the pressing, the player can be given an opportunity to correct the pressing timing of the frame button 229, and the next pressing can be performed more carefully. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate. When the process of S6013 is completed, 10 is subtracted from the score counter 223η (S6014) as a penalty for the failure of pressing, and this process is terminated. In the process of S6014, if the value of the score counter is already 0, the points are not subtracted.

On the other hand, in the process of S6012, when it is determined that the pressing success period is reached (S6012: Yes), the player is notified that the pressing is successful by setting the display success effect command (S6015) (FIG. See 163 (b)). By this notification, the player can recognize the successful timing, so that the frame button 229 can be operated at the same timing next time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate. Then, points (scores) corresponding to the types of bars overlapping the pressing suggestion region 911a when the pressing is successful are added to the success score counter 223η (S6016), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the details of the timing effect processing (S1541) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 167) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 169. As described above, this timing effect processing (S1541) is a process for performing various settings during the timing effect.

In this timing effect processing (S1541), first, it is determined whether or not the timing effect is set (S6101), and if it is determined that the timing effect is not set (S6101: No), this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timing effect is set (S6101: Yes), then it is determined whether or not 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (S6102), and it is determined that 15 seconds have elapsed. (S6102: Yes) means that it is the start timing of the timing effect. Therefore, in order to determine the mode of the timing effect this time, first, the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is read out (S6103).

When the processing of S6103 is completed, the effect mode (difficulty level) corresponding to the read counter value is then selected from the timing effect selection table 222d (see FIG. 160) (S6104). For example, if the difficulty counter 223γ is 4, the early stage effect for difficulty level 5 is selected, and if the difficulty level counter 223γ is 1, the early stage effect for difficulty level 2 is selected. Then, a display early stage mode command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect mode selected in the process of S6104 is set (S6105). By receiving this display early stage mode command, the display control device 114 starts the timing effect of the corresponding difficulty level in the sub display device 690.

When the processing of S6105 is completed, the table corresponding to the value of the difficulty counter 223γ read in S6103 is read from the pressing period table 222e (S6106), and the read table is stored in the pressing period storage area (S6107). This process ends. This pressing period storage area is provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 (not shown). In the processing of S6004 of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see FIG. 168), the pressing period table 222e stored in the pressing period storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 229 is successful. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S6102, when it is determined that 15 seconds have not passed since the start of the fluctuation (S6102: No), it is determined whether or not the timing is 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (S6108). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to shift to the middle period of the timing effect. In the process of S6108, if it is determined that 20 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation (it is the timing to shift to the middle stage period) (S6108: Yes), the middle stage setting process for setting the mode of the middle stage period is executed. (S6109), this process is terminated. The details of this middle stage setting process (S6109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 170.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6108, when it is determined that 20 seconds have not elapsed from the start of fluctuation (not the transition timing to the middle stage period) (S6108: No), then 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation. Whether or not it is determined (S6110). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the transition timing from the middle stage period to the final stage period. In the process of S6110, when it is determined that 25 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation (S6110: Yes), the final stage setting process for setting the effect mode of the final stage period is executed (S6111), and this process is terminated. Details of this final stage setting process (S6111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 171.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6110, when it is determined that the timing does not elapse 25 seconds from the start of fluctuation (S6110: No), then it is determined whether or not the timing is 27 seconds elapsed from the start of fluctuation (S6112). .. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to set the notification effect (notification mode) for notifying the result of the timing effect. In the process of S6112, when it is determined that the timing is 27 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (S6112: Yes), the notification mode setting process for setting the notification effect (notification mode) for notifying the result of the timing effect is performed. Execute (S6113) and end this process. Details of this notification mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 172.

On the other hand, if it is determined that 27 seconds have not passed since the start of the fluctuation (S6112: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the continuous striking period (S6114). If it is determined that it is not the end timing of the continuous hitting period (S6114: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the continuous hitting period (S6114: Yes), the continuous hitting success flag 223ζ is set to off (S6115), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 170, the details of the middle stage setting process (S1507) executed in the timing effect process (see S1541 and FIG. 169) will be described. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing this middle stage setting process (S1507). In the middle stage setting process (S6109), first, the value of the score counter 223η is read out (S6201), and it is determined whether or not the value of the score counter 223η is larger than 600 (S6202).

If it is determined that the read value is larger than 600 (S6202: Yes), a relatively large number of points can be obtained in the early stage, and the difficulty level may be too easy for the player currently playing. .. Therefore, in this case, by adding 1 to the value of the difficulty counter 223γ (S6203), it is controlled so that the production mode having a higher difficulty level than the early stage period is set as the production mode in the middle stage period. As a result, it is possible to change the production mode (difficulty level) to match the skill of the player in the middle of the timing production, so that the player's willingness to participate in the timing production can be improved. After the processing of S6203 is completed, the processing is shifted to S6209.

In the process of S6202, when it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is 600 or less (S6202: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the read score counter 223η is smaller than 50 (S6204). When it is determined that the read value is smaller than 50 (S6204: Yes), it indicates that the points acquired by the player in the early period are extremely small. That is, there is a possibility that the difficulty level of the timing production in the early stage is too difficult for the player to keep up with the timing production or the timing production itself is abandoned. In this case, by setting the value of the difficulty counter 223γ to 0 (S6205), it is controlled so that the effect mode having the lowest difficulty level is selected as the effect mode set after the middle stage period. As a result, players who had difficulty in adjusting the timing of pressing due to the difficulty of the early stage being too high, or just looking at the production mode of the early stage gave the impression that it would be difficult, and abandoned the timing production. It is possible to improve the motivation of the player who has lost his / her participation in the timing production. When the process of S6205 is completed, the process shifts to S6209.

In the process of S6204, when it is determined that the value of the read score counter 223η is 50 or more (S6204: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 200 (S6206). In the processing of S6206, if it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 200 (S6206), the difficulty level is too high for the player, and the pace ends at a point significantly lower than the quota. It means that there is a high possibility. In this case, the player may decide that the quota cannot be achieved during the timing production and give up participation in the timing production. In addition, although he participated in the timing production until the end, the points earned are too low for the quota, and there is a risk that he will give up participating in the timing production from the next time onward. Therefore, in order to prevent these situations, the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is subtracted by 1 in the processing of S6207 (S6207). As a result, the difficulty level after the middle stage period can be made easy, so that the player who did not get much points in the early stage period can improve the motivation to participate in the timing production. When the processing of S6207 is completed, the processing shifts to S6209.

On the other hand, in the process of S6206, when it is determined that the value of the read score counter 223η is 200 or more (S6206: No), the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is read (S6208), and the process proceeds to the process of S6209.

In the process of S6209, a mode of the middle stage effect is selected from the effect selection table 222d based on the value of the difficulty counter 223γ (S6209), and a display early stage mode command for notifying the display control device 114 of the selected mode. Is set (S6210). Then, the data table corresponding to the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is read from the pressing period table 222e (S6211), the read table is stored in the pressing period storage area (S6212), and this process is terminated.

By executing this midfield setting process, it is possible to change the mode of production after the midfield period to a mode of difficulty that more closely matches the skill of the player, according to the points acquired by the player in the early stage. , It is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production.

Next, the details of the final stage setting process (S6111) executed in the timing effect process (see S1541 and FIG. 169) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 171. As described above, this final stage setting process (S6111) is a process for setting the effect mode of the final stage period of the timing effect.

In this final stage setting process (S6111), first, the value of the score counter 223η is read out (S6301), and it is determined whether or not the value is larger than 900 (S6302). That is, it is determined whether or not 900 points or more have been obtained by the end of the middle stage period. Then, when it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is larger than 900 (S6302: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is larger than 3 (S6303).

When it is determined that the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is 3 or less (S6303: No), the table whose success period is in the normal range is read from the pressing period table 222e, and the process is shifted to S6309. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is larger than 3 (S6303: Yes), the table for a narrow range corresponding to the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is read out from the pressing period table 222e (S6303: Yes). S6304), the process proceeds to S6309.

In this way, the reason why the tables having different success period lengths are set according to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is to match the difficulty level with the player. That is, if a relatively high difficulty level (difficulty level 4 or difficulty level 5) is set even after the middle stage period, it is highly possible that the skill of the player is high. Then, since the process shifts to the process of S6303 when a relatively large number of points have been acquired, there is a possibility that the current difficulty level is too easy for the player. Therefore, in order to make the difficulty level even more difficult for highly skilled players, the success range is set to be narrower than the early stage period and the middle stage period. As a result, it is possible to provide a more difficult timing effect to a player with a high skill level, so that the player's interest in the timing effect can be improved.

On the other hand, when the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is 3 or less and the process shifts to the processing of S6303, there is a possibility that many points have been obtained by fluke despite the relatively low skill. In this case, if the difficulty level is increased, there is a risk that the frame button 229 will fail to be pressed continuously at the end of the game, which may give a bad impression to the timing effect. In particular, even though the quota of 1000 points was exceeded at the start of the final stage production, it failed continuously during the final stage period, and if the quota was broken at the end of the production by accumulating penalties, the player's There is a risk that the motivation for timing production will be greatly reduced. Therefore, in this control example, when the difficulty counter 223γ, which is presumed to have low skill, is 3 or less, the range of the success period is maintained as normal even if a relatively large number of points are acquired. doing. As a result, it is possible to improve the motivation for the timing effect for the player with low skill.

In the process of S6302, when it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is 900 or less (S6302: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 600 (S6306). When it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 600 in the processing of S6305 (S6206: Yes), a wide-range table corresponding to the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is read from the pressing period table 222e (S6307). The process proceeds to S6309. If the value of the score counter 223η is less than 600, the player has acquired relatively few points by the middle period, and the difficulty level is likely to be too high for the player. Therefore, in this case, by selecting a pressing period having a wide success period, it is configured so that there is a high possibility that it will be determined as successful when the frame button 229 is pressed. That is, the difficulty level can be adjusted to the player. In addition, by widening the success period in the final stage period, it becomes easier to succeed in pressing, so that the player can be made to think that he / she is in good condition (getting the knack). Therefore, even if the quota is not reached, it is possible to make the illusion that more points can be obtained next time from the response during the final stage. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation to participate in the next timing production.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6306, when it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is 600 or more (S6305: No), the table for the normal range corresponding to the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is read from the pressing period table 222e. The process proceeds to S6309. In the process of S6309 executed after any of the processes of S6104, S6105, S6107, and S6108 is executed, the data table read from the press period table 222e is stored in the press period storage area (S6308), and this process is performed. To finish.

By this final stage setting process, the range of the success period of the final stage period can be changed to a width that more closely matches the skill of the player according to the points acquired by the player by the end of the middle stage period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172, details of the notification mode setting process (S6113) executed in the timing effect processing (see S1541 and FIG. 169) will be described. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing this notification mode setting process (S6113). As described above, this notification mode setting process is a process for setting a notification effect (notification mode) for notifying the result of the timing effect.

In the notification mode setting process (S6113), first, the value of the score counter 223η is read (S6401), and it is determined whether or not the value is 1000 or more (S6402). That is, in the timing effect, it is determined whether or not the quota of 1000 points has been achieved. In the processing of S6402, when it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 1000 (that is, the quota could not be achieved in this timing effect) (S6402: No), then the display control device 114 is contacted. A notification mode (see FIG. 165) at the time of failure is set (S6403).

When the processing of S6303 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the score counter 223η is 50 or less (S6404). When the value of the score counter 223η is 50 or less (S6404: Yes), the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is set to 0 (S6405), and the process proceeds to S6412. When the value of the score counter 223η is 50 or less, it is highly possible that the player has given up early just by visually recognizing the mode of the early stage period. Therefore, in this case, in the next timing production, the production mode having the easiest difficulty level is selected, and it is possible to make the person feel that the quota can be achieved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the next timing production.

On the other hand, when the value of the score counter 223η is larger than 50 (S6404: No), 1 is subtracted from the value of the difficulty counter 223γ (S6406), and the process proceeds to S6412. When the value of the score counter 223η is larger than 50, it means that the quota was not met after participating in the timing production as it was. Therefore, in this case, the player's willingness to participate can be improved by lowering the difficulty level selected in the next timing production by one level.

In the processing of S6402, when it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is 1000 or more (the quota of the timing effect is achieved), the probability change state flag 223β is read (S6407), and the current state is the probability change state of the special symbol. Whether or not (whether or not the probability change state flag 223β is on) is determined (S6408). Then, when it is determined that the probabilistic state is present (S6408: Yes), a notification mode for notifying the display control device 114 of the probabilistic state is set, and the process shifts to S6411. On the other hand, in the processing of S6408, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the probabilistic state (low probability state of the special symbol) (S6408: No), notification for notifying the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is given. The mode is set (S6409), and the process shifts to S6411.

In the process of S6411, 1 is added to the value of the difficulty counter 223γ, and the process shifts to S6412. When the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is 4, which is the maximum value, the value is kept at 4. In the process of S6412, by setting the timing effect permission flag 223α to off, the timing effect is not selected until the next 2R probability variation big hit or small hit (S6412), and this process ends. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 173, details of the variable display setting process 2 (S1542) executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) will be described. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 2 (S1542) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Of the variation display setting process 2 (S1542), each process of S1801 to S1810 is the same as each process of S1801 to S1810 executed in the variation display setting process (S1512, see FIG. 109) in the first control example. The process is executed.

Further, in the variation display setting process 2 (S1542) in this control example, when the process of S1805 is completed, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot C (2R probability variation jackpot). Determine (S1821). In the processing of S1821, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern corresponds to the jackpot C (S1821: Yes), it means that the transition to the probabilistic state of the special symbol is performed, so the probabilistic state flag 223β is set to ON (S1821: Yes). S1823), the process proceeds to S1824.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1821, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern does not correspond to the jackpot C (S1821: No), then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern corresponds to the small hit (S1822), and the small hit is determined. If it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to the pattern (S1822: Yes), the process shifts to S1824. In the process of S1824, by setting the timing effect permission flag 223α to ON, the mode of the timing effect can be selected as an interesting effect in the subsequent variable effect (S1824), and the process proceeds to S1806.

In the process of S1822, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern does not correspond to the small hit (S1822: No), then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern corresponds to the jackpot A or the jackpot B (S1825). If it is determined in the process of S1825 that neither the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot A nor the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot B is (S1825: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1806. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern corresponds to either the jackpot A or the jackpot B (S1825: Yes), the probability variation state flag 223β is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot type (S1826). That is, if it is a jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), the probability variation state flag 223β is set to on, and if it is a jackpot B (16R time reduction jackpot), the probability variation state flag 223β is set to off. Next, the timing effect permission flag 223α is set to off (S1827), and the processing after S1806 is executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to be able to execute a timing effect that can acquire points by operating a plurality of types of buttons in a timely manner, and when the quota is achieved, the current privilege is present. It is configured to notify the game status. As a result, the player who wants to know the current game state can be actively participated in the timing production, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Also, by setting the privilege when the timing production is successful to the one that does not affect the game result (notification of the current game state), whether the privilege is given purely by the skill of the player's pressing (operation) timing. You can decide whether or not. On the other hand, if a quota (for example, a jackpot) whose result has already been decided at the start of fluctuation (before the timing production is started) is set as a privilege, the timing production is started. Before, the result of the timing effect (whether or not the mode for achieving the quota can be displayed) is determined. If there is a timing effect in which the quota cannot be achieved, there is a risk that the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect will be diminished. On the other hand, in this control example, the privilege given when the quota is achieved in the timing effect is set to "notification of the game state" which does not affect the game result. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not to grant the privilege purely according to the skill of pressing the frame button 229. That is, when the privilege is given, the player can have a stronger feeling that the privilege has been acquired by himself / herself. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production.

Further, in this control example, the difficulty level can be changed according to the point acquisition status of the player during the execution of the timing effect. That is, it is configured to determine the skill of the player from the point acquisition status and change the production mode to a difficulty level that more closely matches the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the difficulty level from becoming too difficult, or conversely, the difficulty level from becoming too easy to diminish the willingness to participate in the timing production. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production.

Further, in this control example, when the timing effect is completed, the difficulty level of the next timing effect is changed to a difficulty level more suitable for the player according to the point acquisition status of the player. .. With this configuration, the player's willingness to participate in the timing production can be further improved.

In this control example, when three types of periods, an early stage period, a middle stage period, and a final stage period, are set, the production mode is selected according to the skill of the player and the participation status in the timing production. However, the period is not limited to three types. For example, it may be configured to set the effect mode for each of the five types of periods. By increasing the period, it is possible to more accurately determine the skill of the player and the like, and to provide a production mode that matches the skill. On the contrary, the period may be shortened. As a result, the number of processes for determining the skill of the player and the like can be reduced, so that the processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced.

In this control example, when three types of periods, an early stage period, a middle stage period, and a final stage period, are set, the production mode is selected according to the skill of the player and the participation status in the timing production. However, the difficulty level of one or a plurality of periods may be fixed, and only the difficulty level of a part of the period may be changed according to the skill of the player or the like. More specifically, for example, the difficulty level in the early stage period may be set to a production mode in which the difficulty level is relatively easy. As a result, it is possible to give the player who visually recognizes the aspect of the early stage the impression that the quota can be easily achieved by the timing production, so that the player's willingness to participate in the timing production can be improved. ..

In this control example, based on the fact that the frame button 229 is operated 10 times during the continuous striking period, it is determined that the continuous striking is successful and points are added. The criteria for determining is not limited to 10 operations. An arbitrary value can be set according to the length of the continuous striking period and the length of the continuous striking bar. In addition, the number of times it is determined that the repeated hits have been successful may be changed according to the set effect mode. For example, in the case of a production mode in which the difficulty level is low (for example, the difficulty level is 1), the number of times it is determined that the repeated hits are successful is set to a number less than 10 times (for example, 6 times), and vice versa. In the case of a production mode in which the difficulty level is relatively high (for example, the difficulty level is 4 or 5), the number of times it is determined that the repeated hits are successful is set to a number of times more than 10 times (for example, 15 times). You may. As a result, it is possible to make a difference in the difficulty level not only by the display pattern of the scroll bar and the range of the success period, but also by the number of times it is determined that the repeated hits have been successful, so there is a variety of variations for changing the difficulty level. Can be given.

In this control example, based on the fact that the frame button 229 is operated a predetermined number of times (10 times) during the continuous hitting period, it is determined that the continuous hitting is successful and points are added. It may be configured so that it can be determined as a continuous hit in the operation. For example, by continuously pressing the button of the corresponding type for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds or more) during the continuous striking period, it is determined that the continuous striking is successful in the same manner as when the repeated striking is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times). May be good. As a result, even a player who is not good at repeated hits can obtain points by simply holding down (holding down) the frame button 229 to determine that the player is hit repeatedly, so that the burden on the player can be reduced. .. In this case, the points given by repeatedly hitting a predetermined number of times (10 times) during the continuous hitting period are obtained from the points given when the frame button 229 is simply kept pressed (long pressed) during the continuous hitting period. May be configured to increase. With this configuration, advanced players with high skills are made to aggressively hit repeatedly, and players with low skills (who are not good at hitting repeatedly) are long-pressed to earn points as much as possible. Can be made. That is, since it is possible to provide various participation methods for the continuous hitting period according to the skill of the player, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production.

In this control example, a plurality of periods are provided as a period for setting the difficulty level of the timing effect, but instead of this, the difficulty level is set according to the number of times the operation of the frame button 229 fails or succeeds. It may be configured to be fluidly variable. As a result, the operation status of the player can be reflected in the difficulty level in real time.
The effect mode in the early stage is set to the effect mode of the difficulty level corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, during the early period, the difficulty counter 223
In this control example, the notification of the game state is a privilege of the timing effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lottery result of the special symbol may be notified by the timing effect. That is, it may be configured to notify the jackpot when the quota is achieved in the timing effect. In this case, if the lottery of the special symbol is missed and the timing effect is selected, the timing effect of the effect mode in which the quota cannot be achieved may be selected. More specifically, for example, when the timing effect is executed in the case where the special symbol is off, the total points that can be obtained by the scroll bar or the continuous hit bar that is scrolled from the early stage to the final stage are obtained. It may be configured to have a maximum of 900 to 990 points, and in the case of a special symbol hit, for example, a pattern that can obtain a maximum of 1000 to 1200 points may be selected. That is, as the effect mode defined for the timing effect selection table 222d, the effect mode for the jackpot corresponding to each period and each difficulty level and the effect mode for the miss may be separately defined. Then, when setting the effect mode for each period in the timing effect process (see FIG. 169) (S6104 in FIG. 169, S6209 in FIG. 170, S6104, S6105, S6107, S6108 in S in FIG. 171), it is being executed. It may be configured to determine the result of the variable effect (whether it is a big hit or a miss) and select the effect mode. With such a configuration, the difficulty level in the timing production can be matched with the skill of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the timing production can be improved. In addition, by changing the upper limit of points that can be earned between the jackpot mode and the missed mode, it is possible to prevent the quota from being achieved even though the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order ( Can be suppressed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust because the jackpot is not started even though the quota has been achieved, and the player can participate in the timing production with peace of mind.

In this control example, the timing effect is set so that the timing effect is not set at least once after the end of the jackpot A or the jackpot B, or after the jackpot C is reached. However, the execution condition of the timing effect is It is not limited to this. For example, the ease of selection of the timing effect may be changed according to the number of reserved balls. Specifically, the larger the number of reserved balls, the easier it is to select the timing effect, and the smaller the number of reserved balls, the more difficult it is to be selected. As described above, in the timing effect of this control example, it is necessary to press the plurality of buttons (up button UB, right button RB, left button LB, down button DB) constituting the frame button 229 in a timely manner. For this reason, it is difficult to participate in the timing effect with one hand, and it is easier to succeed in pressing with both hands. That is, a player who tries to achieve the quota by the timing effect may temporarily release his hand from the operation handle 51 and participate in the timing effect. Therefore, if the number of reserved balls is small and the number of reserved balls cannot be increased during the timing effect, the lottery of the special symbol may be interrupted after the end of the variable effect in which the timing effect is set. is there. That is, there is a risk that the game efficiency will deteriorate. Therefore, by making it difficult to set the timing effect in the situation where the number of reserved balls is small, the player can launch the ball in the situation where the number of reserved balls is small, so that the reserved balls can be easily stored. Therefore, the game efficiency can be improved. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is large, the number of reserved balls may increase further by continuing to hit the balls during the fluctuation, and there is a risk that the number of incoming balls exceeding the upper limit of the number of reserved balls will be detected. is there. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the number of reserved balls from overflowing by increasing the frequency of occurrence of the timing effect that makes it easy to achieve the quota by participating with both hands.

In this control example, as a timing effect, an effect of pressing a plurality of buttons (up button UB, right button RB, left button LB, down button DB) constituting the frame button 229 in a timely manner is executed. However, the number of buttons is not limited to four. For example, an effect of pressing a single frame button at the right time may be executed as a timing effect. With this configuration, it is possible to participate in the timing effect with the other hand while operating the handle 51 with one hand, so that the player can participate in the timing effect without lowering the game efficiency. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing production. Further, by reducing the types of buttons to be operated in the timing effect, the game can be made easier to understand. On the other hand, the types of buttons to be operated may be larger than those in this control example. As the number of buttons to be operated increases, the difficulty level of the timing effect can be increased, so that the player who has a high skill in the timing effect can be satisfied. The skill of the player may be determined from the point acquisition status, the total points acquired in the previous timing production, and the like, and the number of buttons to be used may be increased or decreased according to the skill. That is, when the skill is low or it is determined that the player has not participated at all last time, for example, a timing effect in which one type of button can be used is configured to execute the timing effect for other players. May set the mode of timing effect using four types of buttons. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the difficulty level is clearly lowered from the appearance, so that it is possible to improve the motivation of the player with low skill to participate.

In this control example, when the variable effect for which the timing effect is set is executed, the timing effect is configured to start 5 seconds after the reach occurs, and is configured to be executed for 14 seconds. However, the start period and duration of the timing effect are not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the timing effect may be executed by using all the fluctuation times. Even if the timing effect is executed on the sub display device 690, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, even if the timing effect is executed by spending all the fluctuation time, the special symbol It is possible to prevent (suppress) the lottery result from being overlooked. Therefore, since the timing effect can be executed for a longer period of time, the interest of the player can be further improved.

In this control example, the timing effect is executed during the execution of the variable effect, but the execution period of the timing effect is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to execute the timing effect during the jackpot (special game state). In this case, by achieving the norm in the timing effect, it may be configured to be notified that the special symbol will shift to the probabilistic state after the jackpot ends. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from becoming a mere task for winning a prize ball, and thus it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the jackpot. In this case, if the player fails to achieve the quota despite the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), for example, the low probability state of the special symbol is notified during the notification period of the timing effect. A reverse effect may be performed at the ending of the jackpot to notify the probability change state of the special symbol. As a result, even if the quota cannot be achieved by the timing effect, the game can be performed with the expectation that the reverse effect will occur during the ending period, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. ..

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 186. In the first control example, a control example in which each accessory performs a variable operation individually or in combination has been described. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, a suitable control method for the accessory that performs the variable operation and the lighting operation in combination will be described.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that the rotary lighting unit 800 is added as an accessory for performing a movable effect in a variable effect or the like. The point, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. It is a point that has been done. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, a front view of the game board 13 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 and 186. FIG. 185 is a front view of the game board 13 when the above-mentioned rotary lighting unit 800 is in the retracted position, and FIG. 186 is a front view of the game board 13 when the rotary light unit 800 is in the overhang position. .. When the rotary lighting unit 800 is outside the execution period of the effect of performing the variable operation, it is arranged at the retracted position shown in FIG. 185. On the other hand, when the effect that the rotary lighting unit 800 performs a variable operation is set, the rotary lighting unit 800 is arranged at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 186, and the operation according to the effect (rotational operation and lighting operation). Is done.

As shown in FIG. 185, the retracted position of the rotary lighting unit 800 is the lower left of the front view of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 185, when the rotary lighting unit 800 is arranged in the retracted position, the upper right portion of the rotary lighting unit 800 is only slightly visible, and most of them are hidden by other configurations and cannot be visually recognized from the front. Become. On the other hand, the overhanging position of the rotary lighting unit 800 is below the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 186. In this case, most of the rotary lighting unit 800 can be visually recognized by the player from the front.

Next, the configuration of the rotary lighting unit 800 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 178. First, FIG. 175 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rotary lighting unit 800 in this control example, and FIG. 175 (b) is a side view of the rotary lighting unit 800 from the left side.

As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the rotary lighting unit 800 is provided with a substantially circular rotating member 820 that can rotate around the rotary shaft 822 on the front side, and lighting that can be turned on and off on the back side thereof. A device 810 is provided. The rotating member 820 is provided with six through holes 821a to 821f. These through holes 821a to 821f are all formed in a circular shape having the same diameter, and are arranged at equal intervals (every 60 degrees) on the circumference centered on the rotation shaft 822. As a result, every time the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees, the same shape (appearance) is obtained (six-fold symmetry). Further, the rotating member 820 is made of a translucent material (for example, PS material). Therefore, even when a portion other than the back side of the through holes 821a to 821f is lit, the rough lighting state can be visually recognized from the front side.

The lighting device 810 is provided with an insertion port 812 for inserting the rotating shaft 822 of the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 175 (b)). Through the insertion hole 812, the rotating shaft 822 is physically connected to a drive motor for rotating the rotating member 810. That is, only the rotating member 810 is rotated by the drive motor, and the lighting device 810 does not rotate.

The front side of the lighting device 810 is composed of a light guide plate, and an LED is provided on the back side (inside of the lighting device 810) of the light guide plate. By turning on the LED inside, the player can visually recognize the light of the LED through the light guide plate. Further, the LEDs are evenly arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to illuminate all of the front side, and by lighting all the LEDs, the front side of the lighting device 810 looks evenly lit.

Further, on the front surface side of the lighting device 810, a plurality of regions capable of locally emitting circular light are provided. That is, six circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are provided. The shapes of these circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are formed by circles having substantially the same diameter as the through ports 821a to 821f. Further, they are arranged at equal intervals (every 60 degrees) in a circumferential shape centered on the insertion hole 812. Since the circumference on which the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are arranged and the circumference on which the through holes 821a to 821f are arranged are configured to have substantially the same diameter, any of the circumferences can be obtained by rotating the rotating member 820. By reaching the front side of any of the circular lighting areas, all the through holes are configured to completely overlap on the front side of all the circular lighting areas.

In order to locally emit light from the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f, for example, the light guide plate is divided from the other regions at the circumferential portion of each circular lighting region 811a to 811f, and the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are formed. A partition may be provided inside so that the light of the LED provided in the above does not leak to other areas. Then, the LEDs provided in the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f may be configured so that the lighting can be controlled separately. With this configuration, if all the LEDs are turned on, the front side of the lighting device 810 will appear to be turned on as a whole, while the LEDs provided in any of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f will be independent. By turning on the light, only the area can be made to look like a circular light.

Here, the LEDs provided in the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are composed of red LEDs and white LEDs, and the LEDs provided in the other areas are composed of only white LEDs. .. When the lighting device 810 is turned on as a whole, all the white LEDs are turned on so that the entire lighting device 810 is turned on in white. On the other hand, when lighting only a part or all of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f, it is configured to set the lighting of the red LED provided in the corresponding area.

Next, a lighting control method of the lighting device 810 for each rotation speed of the rotating member 820 will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 178. Here, first, the outline of the effect using the rotary lighting unit 800 will be described. In this control example, as an effect using the rotary lighting unit 800, each time the rotary member 820 rotates and the through holes 821a to 821f and the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f overlap each other in the front-rear direction (that is,). Every time the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees), the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are turned into a red lighting state one by one. In this effect, the number of circular lighting areas that are in the red lighting state suggests the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to have the player confirm the state of the rotary lighting unit 800 in the expectation that as many circular lighting areas as possible will be lit. During this period, the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is relatively slow (for example, a rotation speed of 60 degrees per second) so that the player can easily visually recognize the number of circular lighting regions in the lighting state. ) Is set (low speed rotation state is set).

Further, the above-mentioned low-speed rotation state continues until the rotating member 820 makes one rotation. When the rotating member 820 makes one rotation, the rotation speed is accelerated. Then, when the rotation speed becomes a predetermined speed or more (for example, one rotation or more per second), the lighting device 820 is switched to the fully lit state. Even after the rotation speed becomes a predetermined speed or more (for example, one rotation or more per second), the rotation speed is continuously accelerated. Then, when it is determined that the rotation speed has reached a relatively high speed (speed of three rotations per second) (high-speed rotation state has been reached), intermittent lighting of the front in-phase is set for the lighting device 810. (That is, all white LEDs are set to turn on and off repeatedly at a constant frequency). The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 178, but the lighting frequency and the lighting period of the intermittent lighting are such that the rotation direction of the rotating rotating member 810 has the appearance of reverse rotation due to the so-called wagon wheel effect. Set.

Then, after the appearance of reverse rotation is obtained, the number of circular lighting areas lit in the low-speed rotation state is lit again in accordance with the lighting frequency of intermittent lighting. Even in this high-speed rotation state, the number of lights in the circular lighting area may be increased. Therefore, since the player can confirm the production to the end, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

In this control example, only the rotational operation of the rotating member 820 is defined in the operation scenario as the operation of the rotating lighting unit 800. Then, the lighting device 810 is configured to determine the rotation speed from the actual rotation operation of the rotating member 820 and switch the lighting mode. More specifically, in the operation scenario corresponding to the effect of operating the rotary lighting unit 800, first, the operation of moving the rotary lighting unit 800 from the retracted position (see FIG. 185) to the overhanging position (see FIG. 186) is performed. It is stipulated. Then, as an operation when the movement to the overhang position (see FIG. 186) is completed (the sensor detects that the overhang position has been reached), the operation scenario includes the rotation operation of the rotating member 820 in the low speed rotation state. Is stipulated. Further, as an operation when a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) has elapsed after setting the low speed rotation state, an operation of accelerating the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is specified. Then, as an operation to be set after the operation of accelerating the rotation speed, an operation of decelerating the rotation speed and stopping the rotation of the rotating member 820 is defined when a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) elapses in the high-speed rotation state. As a subsequent operation, an operation of moving the rotary lighting unit 800 to the retracted position is specified. As described above, only the operation of the rotating member 820 is defined in the operation scenario, and the lighting mode of the lighting device 810 is changed according to the speed of the rotating member 820, whereby the rotating operation of the rotating member 820 and the lighting device 810 are performed. It is possible to suppress the deviation from the lighting control of. That is, when the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is changed, the lighting mode can be changed more reliably, so that the appearance quality of the rotating lighting unit 800 can be improved.

Next, a method of lighting control in a low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation) will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177. First, FIG. 176 is a diagram showing an example of lighting control in which the appearance is deteriorated in a low speed rotation state (during low speed operation), and FIG. 177 is a diagram showing an example of lighting control in the present control example during low speed rotation (during low speed operation). It is a figure which showed the lighting control example. That is, a control method for preventing the appearance as shown in FIG. 176 during low-speed rotation (during low-speed operation) and giving the appearance as shown in FIG. 177 will be described.

As described above, FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating lighting control in which the appearance quality deteriorates in a low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation). In this example, it is the figure which showed the case where the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees in the state which two circular lighting regions are lit in the low speed rotation state.

When the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f overlaps with the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f, the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f become visible through the through holes 821a to 821f. FIG. 176 (a) shows a state in which the through ports 821e and 821f overlap with the two circular lighting areas set in the lighting state, respectively.

Further, FIG. 176 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the rotating member 820 is rotated and the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are deviated from each other. In this bad example, the next lighting position is lit before the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f match, so that the through holes 821a, 821e, 821f are halfway through. The red light in the circular lighting area leaked out halfway. Therefore, the appearance quality has deteriorated. This is because the through holes 821a to 821f continuously change according to the amount of rotation of the rotating member 820, whereas the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are fixed. That is, since the lighting positions of the circular lighting regions cannot be continuously followed by the through holes 821a to 821f, the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are deviated from each other. The appearance quality deteriorates.

In FIG. 176 (c), the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees while maintaining the lighting state of each circular lighting region in the state of FIG. 176 (b), the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f, and the circular lighting regions 811a to 811a to It shows the case where the position of 811f matches again. In this case, as in FIG. 176 (a), since the arrangements of the two circular lighting regions set in the lighting state and the through holes 821e and 821f overlap, the light from the circular lighting region can be cleaned from the front. It can be visually recognized. As described above, when one or a plurality of circular lighting regions are lit at the rotation position where the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f do not match, the appearance quality deteriorates. (See Fig. 176 (b)). Therefore, in this control example, in order to improve the appearance quality, the lighting control is performed so as to be in the lighting state shown in FIG. 177.

FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating a lighting control method in a low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation) in this control example. As shown in FIG. 177, in this control example, the corresponding circular lighting area is controlled to be lit only when the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f match. (See FIGS. 177 (a) and 177 (c)), and at other intermediate positions, all the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are set to the extinguished state. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent one or a plurality of circular lighting areas from being lit in a state where the through holes 821a to 821f and the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are misaligned, resulting in a half-finished appearance. Can be (suppressed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the appearance quality in the low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation).

Whether or not the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f coincide with each other can be detected by a rotation sensor (not shown). This rotation sensor is configured so that the output becomes H each time the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees. For example, whether the through hole 821a coincides with (overlaps) the position of the circular lighting region 811a or coincides with (overlaps) the circular lighting region 811b, it coincides with the circular lighting region 811c. It matches the circular lighting area 811f, whether it is in the presence (overlapping) state, in the state of matching (overlapping) with the circular lighting area 811d, or in the state of matching (overlapping) with the circular lighting area 811e. The output is similarly set to H even in the overlapping (overlapping) state. On the other hand, when the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are misaligned, the output is set to L.

Next, a lighting control method in a high-speed rotation state (during high-speed operation) will be described with reference to FIG. 178. As described above, at the time of high-speed rotation, all the white LEDs are set to repeat turning on and off at a constant frequency (24 Hz). In addition, one lighting period is configured to be extremely short (for example, on DUTY 0.5%), and the arrangement of the rotating member 810 at the moment of lighting is somehow visible (not recognizable as rotating). It is configured to be the period of.

As shown in FIG. 178, in the high-speed rotation state, every time the rotating member 820 rotates 45 degrees, the entire lighting device 810 is momentarily lit in white (all lit). In the high-speed rotation state, the rotating member 820 rotates 3 times per second (1080 degrees per second), whereas the lighting frequency is set to 24 Hz (24 times per second) (1080 degrees ÷ 24 times). = 45 degrees). On the other hand, since the lighting device 810 is turned off except for the period in which the rotating member is lit momentarily, the rotating member 820 cannot be seen. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the rotating rotating member 820 cannot be continuously visually recognized, and the rotating member 820 is recognized as having a frame advance of 24 Hz.

When the lighting device 810 is momentarily fully lit in the arrangement shown in FIG. 178 (a), the appearance of the rotating member 820 from the player's point of view will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. 178. ) Is recognized by the player, but since the lighting period is instantaneous (on DUTY 0.5%), the player can only recognize the arrangement of the rotating member 820 and cannot recognize the rotation direction. .. After that, since the lighting device 810 is set to the extinguished state until the rotating member 820 rotates 45 degrees (see FIG. 178 (b)), the player cannot visually recognize the appearance of the rotating member 820 during this period.

In the next 24 Hz period (that is, in the arrangement shown in FIG. 178 (b)), the lighting device 810 is momentarily fully lit again. Also in this case, since the lighting period is sufficiently short as in the arrangement of FIG. 178 (a), the player can recognize only the arrangement of the rotating member 820. Then, the lights are turned off again until the next 24 Hz period (see FIG. 178 (d)), and when the next 24 Hz period is reached, all the lights are momentarily set and the arrangement of FIG. 178 (e) is recognized by the player. Will be done. After that, the arrangement of the rotating member 820 is recognized at 24 Hz by the same control.

Here, as described above, the rotating member 820 is configured to have the same shape (appearance) (symmetrical 6 times) every time it is rotated 60 degrees. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 178, the period is By recognizing only the arrangement of the rotating member 820, the rotation direction can be misidentified. That is, in reality, from the arrangement shown in FIG. 178 (a), the through holes 821a to 821f rotate 45 degrees clockwise (positive direction) to reach the arrangement shown in FIG. 178 (c). Nevertheless, the rotating member 820 can be recognized as if it has rotated 15 degrees counterclockwise. This is because the through hole 821a and the through hole 821f cannot be visually distinguished from each other, so that the through hole 821a is closest to the position where the through hole 821a is arranged (different by 15 degrees) in FIG. 178 (a). ), The through hole 821f can be recognized (misidentified) as the through hole 821a.

After that, similarly, the original rotation direction and the rotation direction recognized by the player can be reversed by continuing to recognize that the rotation is in the direction in which the apparent rotation amount is the smallest. In this way, the change in the rotation direction of the rotating member 820 can be omitted by configuring the rotating member 820 so that the rotation direction is changed only by switching the lighting control. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an excessive load applied to the drive motor due to sudden stop or sudden reversal in order to change the rotation direction, so that the drive motor is less likely to break down. it can. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 that can operate stably for a longer period of time.

In this control example, the lighting device 810 is set to fully lit every time the rotating member 820 rotates 45 degrees (that is, at 24 Hz) in the high-speed rotation state, but the frequency at which the lighting device 810 is lit is limited to this. It's not a thing. In the high-speed rotation state, the angle at which the rotating member 820 rotates from one full lighting to the next full lighting is larger than 30 degrees (that is, half of 60 degrees, which is the distance between adjacent through holes), and is 60 degrees. It can be arbitrarily determined within a range smaller than (that is, the distance between adjacent through holes). That is, the angle when comparing the arrangement of the through hole 1 before the rotation and the arrangement of the through hole adjacent to the rotation direction opposite to the rotation direction (that is, the left side) after the rotation is It suffices if the through hole of 1 is smaller than the angle actually rotated. With this configuration, it can be mistaken that the vehicle has moved (rotated) in the direction in which the movement angle is small (the movement distance is small). Therefore, every time the lighting device 810 is momentarily set to full lighting, it penetrates. It can be seen as if the hole has moved to the position of the through hole adjacent to the opposite side. Therefore, it is possible to make the driver feel that the motor is rotating in the reverse direction only by controlling the lighting without changing the rotation speed or the rotation direction, thereby preventing (suppressing) an excessive load from being applied to the drive motor. , It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 10 that can operate stably for a longer period of time.

<About the electrical configuration in the 4th control example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 174. FIG. 174 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 174, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example, the RAM 223 in the first control example includes a lighting state counter 223θ, a lighting position storage area 223ι, a lighting setting flag 223κ, and an initial identification flag 223λ. , A speed identification timer 223μ, a previous value storage area 223ν, and a speed storage area 223ξ have been added.

The lighting state counter 223θ is a counter indicating the type of lighting state of the lighting device 810, and can indicate different lighting states depending on the counter value. Specifically, "01H" means a lighting state (see FIG. 177) for performing lighting control in a low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation), and "02H" means high-speed rotation from a low-speed rotation state. It means that it is a lighting state (all lighting states) when the rotation speed is accelerated, which transitions to a state, and "03H" is a lighting state (see FIG. 178) in a high-speed rotation state (high-speed operation). Means. On the other hand, if the counter value is "00H", it means that the lighting control of the lighting device 810 is not performed. The lighting state counter 223θ is updated at the timing of switching the lighting state (see S6613 in FIG. 181, S6805 in FIG. 183, and S6909 in FIG. 184). The lighting state counter 223θ is referred to in the lighting control process (see FIG. 180) executed in the main process, and the lighting control is set according to the counter value.

The lighting position storage area 223ι is an area in which information indicating the lighting state of each of the circular lighting areas 821a to 821f is stored. The lighting position storage area 223ι is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the 0th to 5th bits correspond to the circular lighting areas 821a to 821f, respectively. Each bit constituting the lighting position storage area 223ι indicates that the corresponding circular lighting area is in the lighting state when the value is 1 (on), and indicates that the lighting position is off when the value is off. The information stored in the lighting position storage area 223ι is circular every time it is detected that the output of the rotation sensor becomes H in the low-speed rotation state or the high-speed rotation state (arrangement of through holes 821a to 821f and a circle). Each time the positions of the lighting areas 811a to 811f overlap each other), the value is updated (see S6608 and S6610 in FIG. 181 and S6911 and S6912 in FIG. 184). In addition, all the values are cleared at the timing when the effect using the rotary lighting unit 800 ends.

The lighting set flag 223κ is a flag indicating whether or not the lighting state has been updated based on the output of the rotation sensor becoming H. If the lighting setting flag 223κ is on, it indicates that the lighting state has been updated based on the output of the rotation sensor becoming H, and if it is off, the lighting state is not updated. Show that. When the H output of the rotation sensor is detected while the lighting setting flag 223κ is off, the lighting state is updated and the lighting setting flag 223κ is set to on (S6612 in FIG. 181 and FIG. 184). (See S6913). Further, after updating the lighting state, it is set to off when the L output of the rotation sensor is detected for the first time (see S6604 in FIG. 181 and S6910 in FIG. 184). By controlling the lighting state to be updated with reference to the lighting setting flag 223κ, it is possible to prevent the lighting state from being updated a plurality of times while the output of the rotation sensor is H. be able to.

The initial identification flag 223λ is a flag indicating whether or not a reference value (value of the speed identification timer 223μ) has been acquired in order to identify the rotation speed of the rotating member 820. If this initial identification flag 223λ is on, it indicates that the reference value (value of the speed identification timer 223μ) has been acquired to identify the rotation speed, and if it is off, the reference value has not been acquired. Show that. If the first identified flag 223λ is on, the rotation speed is calculated based on the already acquired reference value (see S6701 in FIG. 182). On the other hand, if the first identified flag 223λ is off, the flag is set to on after the reference value for identifying the rotation speed is acquired (see S6703 in FIG. 182). By using this initial identification flag 223λ, the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 can be accurately determined.

The speed identification timer 223μ is a timer used to calculate the rotation speed of the rotating member 820. The speed identification timer 223μ is updated periodically (every 1 millisecond), for example, in the main process. The rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is calculated by determining the time from when the output of the rotation sensor becomes H to when the output becomes H next by the difference in the values of the speed identification timer 223μ.

The previous value storage area 223ν is a storage area for storing the value of the speed identification timer 223μ at the time when the H output of the rotation sensor is detected. Next, when the rotation sensor has H output, the time required to rotate 60 degrees due to the difference between the value stored in the previous value storage area 223ν and the current value of the speed identification timer 223μ. Is calculated. The rotation speed is calculated based on the calculated time (S6706 in FIG. 182). The data stored in the previous value storage area 223ν is overwritten with the current value of the speed identification timer 223μ after the rotation speed is calculated each time the rotation speed identification process (see FIG. 182) is executed. ..

The speed storage area 223ξ is a storage area for storing information corresponding to the rotation speed of the rotating member 820. The data stored in the speed storage area 223ξ is overwritten each time the rotation speed is calculated in the rotation speed identification process (see S6706 in FIG. 182). The rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is determined based on the information according to the rotation speed stored in the speed storage area 223ξ, and the lighting control of the lighting device 810 is performed according to the rotation speed.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 179 to 184. First, FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. In each of the main processes S1501 to S1520, the same processes as those of S1501 to S1520 in the first control example are executed.

Further, in the main process in this control example, when the liquid crystal effect execution management process of S1510 is completed, the speed identification timer 223μ is updated by adding 1 (S1551), and the process shifts to S1511. As described above, the speed identification timer 223μ is a timer used to calculate the speed of the rotating member 820.

Further, in the main process in this control example, when the ball entry effect setting process of S1515 is completed, the lighting control process for controlling the lighting state of the lighting device 810 is then executed (S1552). Then, after the lighting control process (S1551) is executed, the processes S1516 to S1520 are executed, and this process is completed.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned lighting control process (S1552) will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 184. First, FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing a lighting control process (S1552). This lighting control process (S1552) is a process for controlling the lighting state of the lighting device 810 according to the speed of the rotating member 820.

In the lighting control process (S1552), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the lighting state counter value 223θ is “01H” (S6501). In the processing of S6501, when it is determined that the lighting state counter value 223θ is 01H (S6501: Yes), the low-speed processing for setting the lighting state when the rotating member 820 is set to the low-speed rotating state. (S6502) to end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S6501 when it is determined that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is not "01H" (S6501: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is "02H". (S6503). Then, when it is determined that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is “02H” (S6503: Yes), the lighting state in the acceleration state during the transition of the rotating member 820 from the low speed rotation state to the high speed rotation state is set. This process is executed during acceleration (S6504), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S6503, when it is determined that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is not “02H” (S6503: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is “03H” (S6503: No). S6505). In the process of S6505, when the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is determined to be "03H" (S6505: Yes), the high-speed processing for setting the lighting state in the high-speed rotating state of the rotating member 820 is executed. (S6506), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is not “03H” (S6505: No), the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is “00H” and it is not necessary to control the lighting device 810. , End this process.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned low-speed processing (S6502) will be described with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the low speed processing (S6502). As described above, this low-speed processing (S6502) is a processing for setting the lighting state when the rotating member 820 is set to the low-speed rotation state.

In the low-speed processing (S6502), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the rotation sensor is H (high) (S6601), and when it is determined that the output is not H (the output is L) (S6601). : No), then it is determined whether or not the lighting setting flag 223κ is on (S6602). In the process of S6602, when it is determined that the lighting set flag 223κ is off (S6602: No), the through holes 821a to 821f are arranged at positions deviated from the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f. In addition, since it means that the lighting device 810 has already been set to the extinguished state, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S6602, when it is determined that the lighting setting flag 223κ is on (S6602: Yes), the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are in the state where any of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f is lit. Since it means that the through holes 821a to 821f are arranged at the positions deviated from each other, all the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are turned off (S6603). This prevents the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f and the through holes 821a to 821f from being displaced from each other in the presence of the circular lighting area set to the lighting state (see FIG. 176 (b)). Since it can be (suppressed), the appearance quality can be improved. When the process of S6603 is completed, the lighting set flag is set to off (S6604), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S6601, when it is determined that the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the lighting setting flag 223κ is on (S6605), and the lighting setting flag is determined. When it is determined that 223κ is on (S6605: Yes), the lighting state has already been set, and it is not necessary to set the lighting state again, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lighting setting flag 223κ is not on (that is, it is off) (S6605: No), the output of the rotation sensor is in the H position (circular lighting regions 811a to 811f). , The position where the positions of the through holes 821a to 821f overlap), but this means that the lighting state has not been set. Therefore, in this case, first, the rotation speed identification process for identifying the rotation speed of the rotation member 820 is executed (S6606). The details of this rotation speed identification process (S6606) will be described later with reference to FIG. 182.

When the processing of S6606 is completed, it is determined whether or not the rotation speed is faster than one rotation per second (S6607), and if it is determined that the rotation speed is one rotation or less per second (S6607: No), the range of the low speed rotation state. Since the rotation speed is within, in order to set the lighting state illustrated in FIG. 177, first, the data of each bit of the lighting position storage area 223ι is shifted to the upper bit side (S6608), and then the shifted data of the shifted data. Among them, it is determined whether or not the number of bits having a value of 1 (on) matches the target value (expected degree) of the present production (S6609).

In the processing of S6609, when it is determined that the number of bits having a value of 1 (on) is less than the target value (S6609: No), one bit higher than the bits having a value of 0 (off) is 1. The bit set to is set to 1 (S6610), and the process shifts to S6611. By the process of S6610, the number of circular lighting regions set to the lighting state can be increased by one. On the other hand, when the number of bits having a value of 1 (on) matches the target value (expected degree), the processing of S6610 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S6611.

In the process of S6611, among the bits of the lighting position storage area 223ι, the lighting position (circular lighting area) corresponding to the on bit is set to be lit in red, and the lighting setting flag 223κ is set to on. (S6611), this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S6607, when it is determined that the rotation speed is faster than one rotation per second (S6607: Yes), the rotating member 820 is in an accelerating state during the transition from the low speed rotation state to the high speed rotation state. This means that all the white EDs provided inside the lighting device 810 are set to the lighting state (S6612). Then, "02H" is set to the value of the lighting state counter 223θ (S6613), the first identification flag 223λ is set to off (S6614), and this process is terminated.

By executing this low-speed processing, it is possible to set the lighting state described above in FIG. 177 in the low-speed rotation state, so that the appearance quality can be improved.

Next, the rotation speed identification process (S6606) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 182. As described above, this rotation speed identification process (S6606) is a process for identifying (calculating) the rotation speed of the rotating member 820. In this rotation speed identification process (S6606), first, it is determined whether or not the first identification flag 223λ is on (S6701).

If it is determined in the processing of S6701 that the initial identification flag 223λ is not on (that is, it is off) (S6701: No), the value of the speed identification timer 223μ is stored in the previous value storage area 223ν ( S6702), the initial identification flag 223λ is set to ON (S6703), and this process ends. As described above, by storing the value of the speed identification timer 223μ in the previous value storage area 223ν, the time required for the rotating member 820 to rotate 60 degrees in the next rotation speed identification process can be easily calculated. be able to.

On the other hand, in the process of S6701 when it is determined that the initial identification flag 223λ is on (S6701: Yes), the value of the speed identification timer 223μ is read (S6704), and the read value and the previous value storage area are read. The difference from the value stored in is calculated (S6705). This difference represents the time from when the output of the rotation sensor becomes H last time to when it becomes H again this time. That is, it means the time required for the rotating member 820 to rotate 60 degrees. When the processing of S6705 is completed, the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is then calculated from the calculated difference (time required to rotate 60 degrees), stored in the speed storage area (S6706), and the main processing is completed. To do. An appropriate lighting state can be set according to the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 calculated by this process.

Next, the above-mentioned acceleration processing (S6504) will be described with reference to FIG. 183. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the acceleration processing (S6504). This acceleration processing (S6504) is a process for setting a lighting state in the acceleration state during the transition from the low-speed rotation state to the high-speed rotation state.

In the acceleration processing (S6504), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6801), and when it is determined that the output is not H (that is, L) (S6801: No). ), This process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the output is H in the process of S6801 (S6802: Yes), the above-mentioned rotation is determined in order to determine whether or not the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 has reached the speed in the high-speed rotation state. The speed identification process (S6802) is executed. Since this rotation speed identification process is merely the same process as the rotation speed identification process described with reference to FIG. 182, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the processing of S6802 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the calculated rotation speed is 3 rotations per second (S6803), and it is determined that the calculated rotation speed is not 3 rotations per second (1 rotation or more and less than 3 rotations per second). (S6803: No) does not shift to the high-speed rotation state, so this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S6803, when it is determined that the rotation speed of the rotating member is 3 rotations per second (S6803: Yes), it means that the state has changed to the high-speed rotation state. Switch. That is, a command for setting the lighting mode of the lighting frequency of 24 Hz and the on DUTY of 0.5% is set for the LED driver of the lighting device 810 (S6804). After that, by setting "03H" as the value of the lighting state counter 223θ, it indicates that the state has transitioned to the high-speed rotation state (S6805), the first identified flag 223λ is set to off (S6806), and this process ends. To do. By this acceleration processing, the transition to the high-speed rotation state can be immediately identified and the lighting state can be switched.

Next, the above-mentioned high-speed processing (S6506) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 184. As described above, this high-speed processing (S6506) is a processing for setting the lighting state when the rotating member 820 is set to the high-speed rotating state. In this high-speed processing, first, it is determined whether or not the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6901), when it is determined that the output is not H (that is, L) (S6901: No), and then , It is determined whether or not the lighting setting flag 223κ is on (S6902).

If it is determined in the process of S6902 that the lighting setting flag 223κ is off (S6902: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S6902, when it is determined that the lighting setting flag 223κ is on (S6902: Yes), the lighting state of the circular lighting area in which the red LED is set to be lit is canceled (turned off) (S6903). ), Set the lighting set flag 223κ to off (S6904), and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S6901 when it is determined that the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6901), it is determined whether or not the lighting setting flag 223λ is on, and the lighting setting flag 223λ is on. In the case of (S6905), it means that the lighting state has already been set, and since it is not necessary to set the lighting state again, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lighting setting flag 223λ is not on (that is, it is off) (S6906: No), then the lighting period in the high-speed rotation state (24 Hz, on DUTY 0.5% period). It is determined whether or not (S6906), and if it is not the lighting period (S6906: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S6906, when it is determined that the lighting period (24 Hz, on DUTY 0.5% period) is in the high-speed rotation state (S6906: Yes), then the high-speed rotation state is terminated from the rotation speed of the rotating member 820. In order to determine whether or not it is, the rotation speed identification process is executed (S6907). Since the rotation speed identification process (S6907) is the same process as the rotation speed identification process (S6606) described above in FIG. 182, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the rotation speed identification process (S6907) is completed, it is then determined whether or not the calculated rotation speed is less than 3 rotations per second (S6908), and if it is less than 3 rotations per second (S698: Yes). Since it means that the high-speed rotation state is terminated based on the operation scenario and the rotating member 820 starts decelerating toward the rotation stop, the processes of S6909 to S6911 for setting the end of the lighting state are executed. That is, by setting the extinguishing of all the LEDs (S6909) and setting "00H" for the lighting state counter 223θ, it is shown that the state of performing the lighting control of the lighting device 810 is completed (S6910). Then, the lighting setting flag 223κ is set to off, and all the data in the lighting position storage area 223ι is cleared to 0 (S6911), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6908 that the rotation speed is not less than 3 rotations per second (the rotation speed in the high-speed rotation state is maintained) (S6908: No), first, the lighting position storage area The data of each bit of 223ι is shifted to the lower bit side (S6912). That is, the data is shifted in the opposite direction to the low speed rotation state. Then, referring to the data after the shift, the red LED provided at the lighting position (circular lighting area) corresponding to the bit whose value is 1 (on) is set to the ON state (S6913). Then, the lighting setting flag 223κ is set to ON (S6914), and this process is terminated.

By executing the process of S6913, in addition to the white LED controlled in the lighting state illustrated in FIG. 178, the red LEDs provided in the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are controlled to display the variation. The expected degree of jackpot can be displayed again. Further, since the red LED is lit only during the lighting period of the white LED and when the output of the rotation sensor is H, the red LED is lit every time the rotating member 820 rotates 180 degrees. Set. This is because the angle at which the rotating member 820 rotates in one cycle of lighting is 45 degrees, whereas the circular lighting regions are arranged every 60 degrees, so that the least common multiple of these is 180 degrees. Here, as described above, when the rotating member 820 is rotated 45 degrees clockwise in the high-speed rotation state, it looks like it is rotated 15 degrees counterclockwise from the player's point of view. Therefore, when the rotating member 820 is rotated 180 degrees clockwise, it looks as if it is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the player's point of view. Therefore, by executing the processes of S6912 and S6913, the lighting position of the red LED is made to follow the appearance of the player counterclockwise each time the rotation is advanced by one circular lighting region counterclockwise. You can move one around. Therefore, in the high-speed rotation state, it is possible to make the appearance as if the rotation direction is changed only by the lighting control without changing the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotating member 820. In addition, it is possible to perform a lighting effect of a red LED indicating the degree of expectation according to the appearance that the rotation has started in the opposite direction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, a rotary lighting unit 800 that performs both a rotary operation and a lighting operation is added to the configuration. The rotary lighting unit 800 is composed of a rotary member 820 that rotates and a lighting device 810 that has a fixed orientation, and the circular lighting device 810 is circular through through holes 821a to 821f provided in the rotary member 820. The player is made to visually recognize the red light emitted from the lighting areas 811a to 811f, and the degree of expectation for the jackpot is notified by the number of light emitting points. However, if one or a plurality of circular lighting areas are lit in a state where the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are misaligned, there is a risk that the appearance will be halfway. Therefore, in this control example, the corresponding circular lighting area is controlled to be lit only when the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f coincide with each other, and the lighting device is lit when the positions are displaced. It is configured to turn off the entire 810. With this configuration, the appearance quality of the rotary lighting unit 800 can be improved.

Further, in this control example, the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 can be determined according to the detection frequency of the rotation sensor, and the lighting control of the lighting device 810 can be changed according to the rotation speed. Instead of setting the rotation control of the rotating member 820 and the lighting control of the lighting device 810 independently according to the elapsed time, the lighting control of the lighting device 810 is changed by discriminating the actual rotation speed of the rotating member 820. By doing so, it is possible to execute lighting control that matches the actual operation of the rotating member 820.

In this control example, the lighting device 810 is arranged on the back side of the rotating member 820, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be arranged on the back side of the rotating member 820, and an image showing the degree of expectation of a jackpot may be displayed at each through-hole position. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect with a higher degree of freedom as compared with the case where the lighting device 810 is arranged, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this control example, the rotating member 820 is provided with six through holes 821a to 821f, but the number of through holes can be arbitrarily determined. Further, the configuration in which the lighting mode of the lighting device 810 can be visually recognized from the front side of the rotating member 820 is not limited to the through hole penetrating to the back side. For example, instead of the through hole, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or the like may be arranged so that the lighting mode on the back side can be visually recognized. Further, by making the thickness thinner than the other positions of the rotating member 820, the lighting mode on the back side may be easier to see than the other parts.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front rail portion 715 is formed from a single arc shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front rail portion 715 may be formed from a plurality of arcs, and the directions of adjacent arcs may be reversed (wave shape). In this case, since the slide moving speed of the effect member 620 is intermittently changed and the posture of the effect member 620 is unstable, it is possible to make the effect member 620 rattle.

In each of the above embodiments, when the effect member 620 forms an inverted state, the case where the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is vertically above the first shaft branch 613 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the center of gravity may be arranged diagonally above the first shaft branch 613.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the upper surface of the cushioning rib 322 of the left lower plate member 320 is horizontal in the left-right direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper surface of the cushioning rib 322 may be inclined downward as it approaches the outer side in the width direction. In this case, the speed of the sphere flowing into the upper surface of the lower left plate member 320 from the outside in the board width direction can be reduced by the acceleration in the gravity direction, and the deceleration time of the sphere can be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is formed by a long hole has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sliding hole 643 may be formed in a circular shape, and the displacement between the sliding hole 643 and the sliding shaft portion 621a may be adjusted by expanding and contracting the transmission member 640. In this case, the arrangement range of the transmission member 640 can be suppressed.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the position of the contact portion 644 can be switched between the two positions has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position of the contact portion 644 may be continuously variable (movable). In this case, the rate of change in the urging force of the torsion spring 650 can be continuously increased.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the posture of the tip swinging member 6556 changes at two positions has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the posture change of the tip swing member 6556 may be caused in a plurality of stages. In this case, it is possible to form a plurality of types of swing amounts of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540, and it is possible to increase the variation of the effect.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Of course, each of the above-described embodiments and control examples, or a part thereof may be combined and configured. Further, although it is composed of a plurality of control devices, it may be composed of one integrated control device or several integrated control devices.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<An example of the technical idea of changing the driving force transmission with the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550>
A crank member that is rotated around a first axis and has a protrusion projecting at a position eccentric to the first axis, and an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted are provided and separated from the first position and the first position. An arm member formed so as to be movable between the second position and a driving device for generating a driving force for rotating the crank member about the first axis are provided, and the insertion portion is inserted. When the protrusion abuts on the inner peripheral surface of the insertion portion facing the moving direction of the protrusion, the driving force is transmitted to the arm member, and the arm member is moved to the first position and the second position. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a transmission region formed so as to be movable between positions and a non-transmission region which is a region connected to the transmission region and in which transmission of the driving force is blocked. A1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a crank member having a protrusion protruding at a position eccentric from the rotation axis and an arm member having an insertion portion through which the protrusion of the crank member is inserted are provided. , There is a gaming machine in which the arm member operates in conjunction with the rotation of the crank member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-000306). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the crank member and the arm member are always interlocked with each other. Therefore, the arm member is driven from the start of the crank member, and the timing of starting the crank member and the timing of driving the arm member cannot be shifted. In this case, when the crank member is started, a large force is required to overcome the inertia of the crank member and the arm member, which causes a problem that the drive device becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, since the insertion portion of the arm member includes a transmission region and a non-transmission region connected to the transmission region, the crank is in a state where the protrusion is inserted into the non-transmission region. By starting the member, the timing of driving the arm member and the timing of starting the crank member can be shifted. That is, even if the crank member is started, the driving force is not transmitted to the arm member until the protrusion enters the transmission region from the non-transmission region. As a result, it is possible to suppress the driving force required when starting the crank member, and it is possible to reduce the size of the driving device.

The arm member may be stopped or moved while the protrusion moves in the non-transmission region. For example, when the arm member is moved, it may be moved by gravity or an elastic force generated by an auxiliary elastic spring.

Examples of the insertion portion include a recessed portion having a bottom and a long hole through which the insertion portion is inserted.

In the game machine A1, the crank member is formed so as to be able to rotate one or more rotations, and the insertion portion becomes the transmission region when the crank member is rotated in one rotation direction, while the crank member is formed. The gaming machine A2 is provided with a selection region that becomes the non-transmission region by being rotated in another rotation direction that is the opposite direction of the one rotation direction.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the mode of transmitting the driving force to the arm member can be changed depending on the rotation direction of the crank member. As a result, by reversing the direction of the driving force of the driving device without changing the rotational speed of the crank member, it is possible to form two speed modes of the arm member when the crank members are arranged in the same phase. It is possible to increase the variation in the speed of the arm member.

In the game machine A2, the insertion portion is separated from the protrusion and the inner peripheral surface of the insertion portion facing the moving direction of the protrusion when the crank member is rotated in one rotation direction. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the selection region is formed by providing a margin portion to be formed.

In addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the game machine A3 is formed by the insertion portion having a margin portion, so that the mode of transmitting the driving force to the arm member is changed. No member is required, and the material cost can be reduced.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, at least one of the first position or the second position is formed as the end position of the movement range of the arm member, and the first position or the end position formed as the end position. When the arm member is arranged at either one of the second positions, the arm member formed as the terminal position toward the other on the opposite side of either the first position or the second position. A game machine A4 characterized in that a bound suppression mechanism for suppressing movement is formed.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, when the arm member is arranged at either the first position or the second position formed as the end position of the movable range of the arm member, the arm member is arranged. It is possible to suppress the driving force that needs to be generated by the driving device in order to suppress the movement of the arm member toward the other on the opposite side. Therefore, the durability of the drive device can be improved.

As the bounce suppressing mechanism, the arm is used when the attractive force of the magnet is used, when the movement is suppressed by a claw-shaped member, and when the load received from the arm member by the protrusion of the crank member is directed in the axial direction of the crank member. An example is a case where an insertion portion of a member is formed.

When attracting with a magnet, the magnet is required as a separate member, but the internal composition of the magnet can generate attractive forces of various sizes, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

When the claw-shaped member suppresses the movement, a drive device for operating the claw-shaped member is required, but the claw-shaped member can mechanically stop the movement of the arm member.

When the insertion portion of the arm member is formed in such a manner that the load received from the protrusion of the crank member from the arm member is directed toward the axis of the crank member, it is not necessary to dispose of another member for suppressing the movement of the arm member. The bounce of the arm member can be mechanically suppressed.

In the game machine A4, when the arm member is arranged at at least one of the first position and the second position, the outer shape of the insertion portion in the vicinity of the connection position of the non-transmission region with the transmission region is the same. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the bounce suppressing mechanism is formed by being substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion about the rotation axis of the crank member.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the bounce suppressing mechanism is formed by continuing the rotation of the crank member after the arm member is arranged at the first position or the second position. As a result, the change from the moving state of the arm member to the stopped state can be smoothly formed.

Further, in the bound suppression mechanism, since the load applied from the insertion portion to the protrusion is directed to the rotation axis of the crank member, it is possible to suppress the load applied in the rotation direction of the crank member and suppress the load applied to the drive device. can do.

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is arranged at the first position, the outer shape of the insertion portion in the vicinity of the connection position of the non-transmission region with the transmission region is the outer shape of the crank member. It is substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion about the rotation axis, and an urging force for moving the arm member from the first position to the second position is applied to the non-transmission region of the insertion portion. At least one of the inner recessed portion protruding inside the insertion portion or the outer recessed portion protruding outside the insertion portion having a size capable of accommodating the protrusion is formed on the side surface on the first position side. A game machine A6 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is arranged at the first position, the outer shape near the connection position with the transmission area of the non-transmission area of the insertion portion. However, it is substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion centered on the rotation axis of the crank member, and an urging force for moving the arm member from the first position to the second position is applied to the arm member. In this case, by arranging the protrusion of the crank member in the non-transmission region of the insertion portion, the movement of the arm member is prevented by the protrusion, and the arm member is stopped. When the crank member is rotated and the protrusion is moved in the non-transmission region so that the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess are arranged to face each other, the arm member is moved. That is, when the protrusion is arranged to face the inner recess, the inner recess is pushed out into the protrusion and the arm member is moved to the opposite side of the crank member. Further, when the protrusion is arranged to face the outer recess, the protrusion is housed in the outer recess and the arm member is moved to the crank member side.

As a result, the protrusion of the crank member moves in the non-transmission region, so that the movement width is different from the movement movement of the arm member that occurs when the protrusion moves in the transmission region due to the rotation of the crank member. Can be caused. Therefore, it is possible to improve the durability of the drive device and to change the moving width of the arm member at the same time.

That is, in order to change the moving width of the arm member, it is necessary to reverse the direction of the driving force of the driving device according to the moving width of the arm member. In this case, the control load on the drive device becomes large, and it is difficult to perform an operation having a small movement width such as vibration.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A6, the protrusion of the crank member is moved in the non-transmission region, and the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess are arranged to face each other, so that the movement of the arm members having different movement widths is formed. To. Therefore, the movement width of the movement of the arm member can be changed without reversing the direction of the driving force of the driving device. Further, by narrowing the forming interval of the adjacent inner recessed portion or outer recessed portion, it is possible to cause the arm member to perform an operation having a small movement width such as vibration.

The mode in which the protrusion can be accommodated may be a mode in which the recessed portion includes the entire protrusion, or a mode in which a part of the protrusion is included in the recess.

<An example of the technical idea of limiting the swing width of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 with the arcuate hole 554>
A movable member that can move along a predetermined movement locus and can be arranged at a first position and a second position that are different from each other, and the movable member that moves corresponding to the movable member and abuts on the movable member to move the movable member. A stopper member that limits the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the member and changes the movement width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or the second position. A game machine B1 characterized by being provided with.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a movable member formed so as to be movable and a stopper member for limiting the moving width of the movable member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-016623). reference). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the stopper member is fixed so as not to be movable, the stopper member is prepared separately depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or the second position. There is a problem that the space for arranging the stopper member becomes wide.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the stopper member moves in response to the movable member, the stopper member when the movable member is arranged at the first position is arranged at the second position. It can also be used as a stopper member for cases. As a result, the space for arranging the stopper member can be suppressed.

Further, since the stopper member changes the moving width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or the movable member is arranged at the second position, the variation of the moving width of the movable member is increased. be able to.

Examples of the stopper member include a protrusion that protrudes from the transmission member and comes into contact with the movable member, and an inner wall portion of a recess that is recessed in the transmission member and accommodates a part of the movable member.

Examples of modes of movement include linear movement, curved movement, meandering movement, vibration, rocking, and rotational movement. Further, the movement width in each movement mode means, for example, an actual movement distance or a straight line distance between two points in the case of linear movement, curved movement, meandering movement, vibration, etc., and swings and rotational movements. In the case of, etc., it means the actual movement distance, movement angle, etc.

In the game machine B1, the movable member includes an intermediate member that is swingably supported by the first shaft and expands and contracts in the radial direction of the first shaft, and the first position and the second position , The expansion / contraction length of the intermediate member is different, the predetermined movement locus is formed in an arc shape centered on the first axis, and the stopper member is a case where the intermediate member is in a predetermined expansion / contraction state. The gaming machine B2, characterized in that the movable member is extended along the predetermined movement locus.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the movable member is oscillatingly supported around the first axis and is formed so as to be able to expand and contract in the radial direction of the first axis. It is equipped with a member. Therefore, the radius of curvature of a predetermined movement locus of the movable member centered on the first axis can be changed depending on the length of the intermediate member in the expansion / contraction direction.

Here, the stopper member is extended along a predetermined movement locus of the movable member when the intermediate member is in a predetermined expansion / contraction state (curvature in the extension direction of the stopper member and the intermediate member in a predetermined expansion / contraction state). The curvature of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member is the same as the case where In this case, when the intermediate member is in a predetermined expansion / contraction state, the movable member is moved along the stopper member, and the movable member can be moved along the extending direction of the stopper member. Therefore, the moving width (swing angle) of the movable member can be maximized.

On the other hand, when the intermediate member is in a stretched state different from the predetermined stretched state, the curvature of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member and the curvature in the extending direction of the stopper member can be made different, and the predetermined movement of the movable member can be made different. The locus and the extending direction of the stopper member can be crossed. Therefore, the moving width of the movable member can be shortened. Therefore, the moving width of the movable member can be changed by changing the expansion / contraction state of the intermediate member.

In the game machine B2, the movable member includes a protrusion projecting toward the stopper member, the stopper member includes an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted, and the protrusion is inserted into the insertion portion. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the movable member and the stopper member are interlocked with each other in the expansion / contraction direction of the intermediate member in the inserted state, and the movable member is brought into contact with the insertion portion.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the movable member and the stopper member are interlocked with each other in the expansion / contraction direction of the intermediate member by inserting the protrusion of the movable member into the insertion portion of the stopper member. , The drive device for expanding and contracting the movable member and the drive device for moving the stopper member can be used in combination. Further, the insertion portion regulates the movement of the movable member by being brought into contact with the movable member. That is, the insertion portion of the stopper member has a function as a stopper for restricting the movement of the movable member and a function for interlocking the movable member and the stopper member. As a result, the functions can be integrated.

In the game machine B3, the game machine B4 is characterized in that the arrangement of the first axis with respect to the insertion portion is reversed between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side by the expansion and contraction operation of the intermediate member.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, the intermediate member is expanded and contracted, so that the arrangement of the first axis with respect to the insertion portion is reversed between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side. As a result, the movement width of the movable member can be changed depending on whether the first axis is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the insertion portion or the first axis is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the insertion portion.

That is, when the first axis is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement locus of the protrusion follows the shape of the insertion portion when the movable member is moved by a predetermined movement locus), the protrusion The movement locus and the shape of the insertion portion are approximated, and the movement width of a predetermined movement locus of the movable member can be widened. On the other hand, when the first axis is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement locus of the protrusion when the movable member is moved in a predetermined movement locus is substantially reversed from the shape of the insertion portion), the protrusion The angle formed between the movement locus of the movable member and the inner wall surface of the insertion portion is increased, and the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member can be narrowed.

In the game machine B3 or B4, the insertion portion is formed so that the posture can be changed while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member, and the posture of the insertion portion is changed so that the movable member and the insertion portion come into contact with each other. Is changed, and the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member is changed.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3 or B4, the contact position between the movable member and the insertion part is changed by changing the posture of the insertion portion while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member. In this case, the movement width of a predetermined movement locus of the movable member can be changed while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member.

In any of the game machines B3 to B5, the insertion portion is provided with a groove portion that allows the protrusion portion to enter and exit along the movement locus, and the protrusion portion is separated from the insertion portion via the groove portion. A gaming machine B6, wherein a state can be formed, and the movable member includes a positioning assisting portion that is engaged with the stopper member in the separated state.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B3 to B5, it is possible to form a separated state in which the protrusion is separated from the insertion portion via the groove, and the movable member is in the separated state. A positioning auxiliary portion that is engaged with the stopper member is provided. Therefore, the forming range of the stopper member can be reduced as compared with the operating range of the movable member, the material cost of the stopper member can be reduced, and the positional deviation between the movable member and the stopper member in the separated state can be reduced. Can be prevented. That is, even if the protrusion is separated from the insertion portion of the stopper member, the positioning auxiliary portion suppresses the relative movement of the movable member with respect to the stopper member, so that the protrusion can be returned to the insertion portion again.

<Example of technical idea to support two points of production member 620 that is supported upside down>
A base member, a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed on the base member and moves upward from a predetermined position, and a drive device that generates a driving force that displaces the movable member are connected to the movable member. In a gaming machine including a transmission member that transmits a driving force generated from the driving device to the movable member, the transmission member is swingably supported by a shaft support portion formed on the base member. The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the length from the shaft support portion to the connecting position of the movable member and the transmission member is shorter than the length from the support portion to the connecting position of the movable member and the transmission member. ..

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that drives a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed on a base member and moves upward from a predetermined position by transmitting a driving force by a gear (for example). (Refer to JP2011-120640). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the amount of movement of the center of gravity of the movable member when the drive device is operated in the minimum unit of the resolution of the control of the drive device (for example, one step in the stepping motor) is the support portion of the movable member. Is proportional to the length from to the center of gravity of the movable member. Therefore, the farther the center of gravity of the movable member is from the support portion in the radial direction, the more difficult it is to adjust the position of the center of gravity of the movable member.

Further, when the center of gravity of the movable member is displaced to one side from the inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the support portion, a driving force that displaces the movable member in the opposite direction is generated to invert the movable member. Even if an attempt is made to maintain the state, if the center of gravity shifts to the other side due to the driving force, the direction of the driving force and the direction of gravity match, and the movable member is significantly displaced.

Therefore, there is a problem that the longer the movable member is in the radial direction of the support portion, the more difficult it becomes to rest the movable member in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the support portion.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving device to the movable member to move the movable member up is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion of the base member and connected to the movable member. The length from the connecting position of the movable member and the connecting member to the shaft support portion is formed shorter than the length from the connecting position of the movable member and the connecting member to the supporting portion. Therefore, even when the movable member is long in the radial direction of the support portion, the amount of movement of the center of gravity of the movable member when the drive device is operated in the minimum unit of the control resolution of the drive device can be suppressed. it can. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the movable member stand still in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the support portion.

In addition, as a mode in which the movable member is supported by the base member, a mode in which the movable member is pivotally supported by the base member, a mode in which the movable member is slidably supported by the base member, and the like. A combined embodiment and the like are exemplified.

In the game machine C1, the transmission member is characterized in that the arm length from the shaft support portion to the connection position with the movable member is shortened as the movable member moves upward from the predetermined position. Machine C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the more the movable member displaced around the support portion moves up from a predetermined position, the more the transmission member from the shaft support portion to the connection position with the movable member. Arm length is shortened. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved as compared with the case where the arm length of the transmission member is constant.

For example, when the rotation speed of the drive device for rotating the transmission member is constant, the arm length of the transmission member is fixed to a predetermined first length, and the arm length of the transmission member is the first. The description will be made on the assumption that the second length is fixed, which is shorter than the length of. When the rotation speed of the drive device is constant, the transmission member is fixed at the first length as compared with the case where the arm length of the transmission member is fixed at the second length. The moving speed of the center of gravity of the movable member becomes high when the members are arranged in a predetermined phase.

Here, in the vicinity of a predetermined position, the movable member is quickly operated at the speed generated when the transmission member is set to the first arm length, and in the vicinity of the inverted state, the speed generated when the transmission member is set to the second arm length. Consider the case where you want to move the movable member slowly. As a method for that, a method of changing the rotation speed of the drive device on the way can be considered, but it cannot be adopted when it is difficult to change the rotation speed of the drive device. Further, even if the rotation speed of the drive device can be changed, in order to change the rotation speed on the way, a detection sensor for detecting the timing of the change is required, which causes a problem that the cost increases. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the arm length from the shaft support portion of the transmission member to the connection position between the transmission member and the movable member is the predetermined position of the transmission member. It is formed in such a manner that it is shortened as it moves upward from. Therefore, the transmission member can be set to the first arm length near the predetermined position, and the transmission member can be set to the second arm length near the inverted state, so that the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved. ..

In addition, as a configuration in which the arm length from the shaft support portion to the connecting position between the transmission member and the movable member is fixed, a case where the protruding portion protruding from the transmission member is inserted into the movable member and connected is exemplified. To. Further, as a configuration in which the arm length can be changed, a long hole is formed in the transmission member, and a protrusion projecting from the movable member is slidably inserted into the long hole of the transmission member, or is movable. An example is an example in which an elongated hole is provided in a portion where the member is supported by the support portion, and an insertion shaft rod to be inserted into the elongated hole is formed from the base member.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the movable member includes a protrusion projecting in a direction parallel to the support portion, and the transmission member is an elongated hole extending in the radial direction of the shaft support portion. A game machine C3 comprising an insertion portion through which the protrusion portion is inserted.

In the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the insertion portion is extended in the radial direction of the shaft support portion, and the protrusion of the transmission member is inserted into the insertion portion to form the transmission member and the movable member. Is connected, so that the moving direction of the connecting position is limited to the radial direction of the shaft support. Therefore, as the transmission arm swings, the length from the shaft support to the connection position of the transmission member with the movable member can be mechanically changed.

Examples of the insertion portion include a long hole formed through and a recessed portion formed as a bottomed depression.

In the game machine C3, the shaft support portion is arranged vertically above the support portion, and the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged on a straight line connecting the support portion and the protrusion portion.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, when the movable member takes a posture in which the protrusion is arranged vertically above the support, the center of gravity of the support, the shaft support, the protrusion and the movable member is set. It is formed on the vertical line. In this case, the gravity applied to the center of gravity of the movable member is applied vertically downward to the support portion and the shaft support portion. Therefore, since the force in the rotational direction is not applied to the movable member, the posture of the movable member can be maintained even if the power of the driving device is cut off. As a result, the load on the drive device can be reduced.

In the game machines C1 to C4, a worm gear is interposed between the transmission member and the drive device, and the rotation of the drive device is decelerated by the worm gear.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machines C1 to C4, a worm gear is interposed between the transmission member and the drive device, and the rotation of the drive device is decelerated by the worm gear, so that the drive device is controlled. When operating in the minimum unit of the resolution of, the moving width of the movable member can be significantly reduced. Further, since the force transmission direction via the worm gear is limited to one direction from the drive device side to the transmission member side, it is possible to prevent the worm gear from rotating due to the load from the transmission member side, and the drive device. It is possible to reduce the load on the drive device when the vehicle is stopped.

In any of the game machines C1 to C5, an urging device is provided above the support portion in which an urging force for moving the center of gravity of the movable member is generated in both directions in the displacement direction of the movable member. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the center of gravity of the movable member is balanced in the displacement direction in an inverted state arranged vertically above the support portion, and the movable member becomes larger as the movable member is displaced from the inverted state.

According to the game machine C6, in any of the game machines C1 to C5, the urging device generates an urging force for moving the center of gravity of the movable member above the support portion, and the urging force is based on the center of gravity of the movable member. It becomes larger as the movable member is displaced from the state where it is arranged vertically above the support portion (inverted state). That is, the urging force can be minimized in the inverted state.

Therefore, by increasing the urging force when the movable member is moved up from a predetermined position, it is possible to reduce the burden on the drive device that moves the movable member up and down from the state where the movable member is arranged at the predetermined position.

Further, the urging force is generated in both directions in the displacement direction of the movable member, and is balanced in the displacement direction in the inverted state. Therefore, when the movable member is moved up from a predetermined position and the drive device is stopped and controlled, even if the movable member does not reach the inverted state or passes through the inverted state, the posture of the movable member is inverted by the urging force. Can be directed to. This makes it easy to stop the movable member in an inverted state.

In the game machine C6, the movable member can form a first state in which the center of gravity is displaced by a predetermined amount from vertically above the support portion and a second state in which the center of gravity is displaced by a predetermined amount or more. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the rate of change in the urging force when the displacements are the same is larger in the second state than in the first state.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, the movable member is larger than a predetermined amount from the inverted state than the first state on the inverted state side in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged vertically above the support portion. In the second state of displacement, the rate of change in the urging force when the displacement is the same is larger. In this case, when the movable member is started from the state in which the movable member is arranged in the second state, the burden at the time of starting the drive device can be suppressed. Further, since the acceleration of the movable member when the movable member is arranged near the inverted state can be reduced, it is possible to easily stop the movable member in the inverted state.

<Example of technical concept in which the spring constant of the torsion spring 650 changes during swinging>
A movable member formed so as to be movable between the first position and the second position, a driving device for generating a driving force for moving the movable member, and an urging force for returning the movable member to the first position. In a gaming machine including an urging device to generate, the movable member is movable with respect to a change rate of urging force that occurs when the movable member is arranged in a first urging region from the first position to a predetermined position. When the member is arranged in the second urging region formed in the region connected to the first urging region and separated from the first position, the rate of change of the urging force generated is large. A game machine D1 characterized by this.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that uses an urging force by an urging device such as an elastic spring as an auxiliary force when moving a movable member by a driving force generated by the driving device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011). -1240640). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the urging force of the urging device is proportionally increased by the displacement amount of the movable member, and it is difficult to change the purpose of the urging device by arranging the movable member. There was a problem that it was. That is, it was difficult to make the movement of the movable member supple by suppressing the urging force in one region, and to improve the urging force to make the movement of the movable member abrupt in another region.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the rate of change of the urging force urged toward the first position is such that the movable member has a second attachment as compared with the case where the movable member is arranged in the first urging region. It is larger when it is placed in the force area. That is, for example, when the movable member stopped at the second position is started toward the first position (second urging region), a sufficient urging force can be obtained by the urging device, while the movable member is the first. When arranged in the urging region, the change in urging force is suppressed and the movement of the movable member can be made flexible (gentle).

In addition, as a mode in which the change rate of the urging force of the urging device is changed by the arrangement of the movable member, the number of urging devices for generating the urging amount in the movable member increases in the middle, or the urging device is used. An example is a case where the spring constant of the elastic spring is changed by the arrangement of the movable member, which is formed from the elastic spring.

In the game machine D1, the urging device is a pair of long members that intersect the moving direction of the movable member and are arranged on a pair of surfaces that sandwich the movable member in the moving direction, and one end thereof. The movable member is formed of an elastic spring whose portions are arranged to face each other on both side surfaces of the movable member and whose other end, which is the opposite end of the one end, is restrained from moving. A main body sandwiched between a pair of long members and a main body formed on the opposite side of the main body with respect to the pair of long members, and at least one of the pair of long members in the moving direction of the main body. A contact portion formed so as to be contactable, the contact portion is connected and fixed to the movable member, and when the movable member is arranged in the first urging region, the movable member becomes the pair. Of the long members of the above, the movable member is brought into contact with one of the long members on the side where the distance from the movable member is shortened by the movement of the movable member, and an urging force is applied, and the movable member is attached to the other long member. A game machine D2 characterized in that the contact portion is brought into contact with the contact portion and an urging force is applied.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the change rate of the urging force by the urging device is changed, and the contact timing between the movable member and the pair of long members is shifted for each long member. Can be formed by Therefore, it is not necessary to change the urging force of the urging device by control or to prepare another member for improving the urging force.

That is, since the movement of the other end of the pair of long members is restricted, one long member on the side where the distance from the movable member becomes closer due to the movement of the movable member is pressed against the movable member and moves. The other elongated member on the opposite side receives no force from the movable member. Therefore, in the first urging region, when the movable member is moved, the other long member arranged on the opposite side of the movable member in the moving direction stays in place.

On the other hand, in the second urging region, the movable member is moved so that the other long member comes into contact with the contact portion. As a result, an urging force is also generated from the other long member. Therefore, the urging force applied to the movable member in the second urging region can be increased.

Examples of the elastic spring include a coil spring, a torsion spring, and a leaf spring.

In the game machines D1 or D2, the urging device is a pair of long members that intersect the moving direction of the movable member and are arranged on a pair of surfaces that sandwich the movable member in the moving direction. The movable member is formed of an elastic spring whose end portions are arranged to face each other on both side surfaces of the movable member and the other end portion which is the opposite end portion of the one end portion is restrained from moving. , The main body portion sandwiched between the pair of long members and at least one of the pair of long members formed on the opposite side of the main body portion with respect to the pair of long members and in the moving direction of the main body portion. When the movable member is connected and fixed to the movable member and the movable member is arranged in the first urging region, the movable member is provided with a contact portion formed so as to be in contact with the movable member. Of the pair of long members, the movable member is brought into contact with one of the long members on the side where the distance from the movable member becomes closer to be given an urging force, and the movable member is subjected to the second urging. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that when it is arranged in the region, the intermediate portion of the one long member is pressed against the contact portion arranged on the one long member side with respect to the main body portion.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the change in the rate of change of the urging force is formed by pressing the intermediate portion of one of the long members against the abutting portion. That is, one long member that has already been deformed by the movement of the movable member is further deformed starting from the intermediate portion pressed against the abutting portion, so that the rate of change in the urging force changes. Here, in the deformation starting from the intermediate portion, the length of the portion subject to the deformation is shorter than the deformation starting from the other end portion, so that the ratio of the change in the urging force to the moving amount of the movable member is Increase. Thereby, in the second urging region, the change in the urging force with respect to the moving amount of the movable member can be increased. Therefore, the rate of change of the urging force can be increased.

In the game machine D3, the one long member has a first bending point that is bent toward the contact portion side that is arranged to face each other, and at the first bending point, the one long member is said. A game machine D4 characterized in that it is pressed against a contact portion.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, one long member comes into contact with the abutting portion arranged to face each other at the first bending point, so that one long member comes into contact. It is stretched by contact with the part. Therefore, the tip end portion of the urging device that applies the urging force to the movable member can be separated from the other end portion of the long member that is the starting point of the urging force or the first bending point. Therefore, the moment that the movable member is loaded from the urging device in the second urging region can be increased.

In the game machine D4, the movable member includes a tip expansion region that expands in the moving direction so as to move away from the other end of the long member, and one of the movable member and the long member in the tip expansion region. A game machine D5 characterized in that the end portion of the game machine is in contact with the player.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, the movable member includes a tip expansion region, and the movable member and one end of the long member are brought into contact with each other in the tip expansion region. Therefore, when one of the long members is pressed against the contact portion and one of the long members is stretched, the contact position between the movable member and the long member is separated from the other end of the long member. It is moved in the direction, and the amount of deformation of the long member is increased. Therefore, the urging force applied from the urging device to the movable member can be increased.

In any of the game machines D2 to D5, the game machine D6 is characterized in that the arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion can be changed.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D2 to D5, it is possible to increase the variation of the change in the urging force generated by the long member. That is, for example, when the arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion is narrowed, the timing at which the rate of change in the urging force of the long member increases can be set earlier.

<An example of a technical idea in which a plurality of out ports are arranged and a buffer rib 322 is formed on the lower plate 320>
Inside the game area where the ball can flow down, the in-board accessory arranged in contact with the lower edge of the game area and the ball formed on one side in the width direction of the in-board accessory are played. The first out port, which is an opening for discharging from the area, and the second out port, which is an opening formed on the other side in the width direction of the in-board accessory, which is the opposite side of the width direction, and discharges the ball from the game area. The first out port and the second out port include a lower plate portion extending from the lower side surface of the opening to the front and having a guide surface on the upper surface, and the guide portion of the lower plate portion thereof. The surface is provided with a cushioning rib extending in a rib shape in the opening direction of the corresponding side in the first out port or the second out port, and is formed by being raised from the guide surface on the outer side in the width direction. The gaming machine E1 is provided with a stepped portion, and the aspect ratio of the cushioning rib is formed to be smaller toward the outside in the width direction.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of out ports are arranged (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-192301). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, it is preferable to reduce the size of each out port as the number of out ports increases, because it is preferable to secure an arrangement space for an attacker or the like, but if the out port is made too small, There was a problem that the discharge of the game ball might be delayed.

For example, when the height at which the ball bounces up and down on the front side of the out opening is equal to or greater than the vertical width of the out opening, the ball stays in front of the out opening. Further, for example, when the side surface of the accessory is arranged on the side surface in the width direction of the out port to form a wall, the ball flowing from the width direction to the front side of the out port collides with the side surface of the accessory and bounces in the width direction. At this time, if the amount of rebound in the width direction is equal to or greater than the width of the out opening, the ball stays in front of the out opening.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the cushioning rib is formed on the guide surface formed on the lower plate portion, it is possible to suppress the bounce of the ball or decelerate the ball. That is, when the sphere collides from the vertical direction, the cushioning rib bends and deforms, so that the cushioning rib acts as a cushion and the rebound of the sphere can be suppressed. Further, when the spheres collide from the left and right directions, the spheres are fitted into the buffer ribs and braked.

Here, the cushioning rib extending in the opening direction is vulnerable to a load from the left-right direction, and may be damaged by the collision of balls from the left-right direction.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the guide surface is provided with a step portion on the outer side in the width direction, a ball flowing down from the left-right direction toward the buffer rib falls from above the step portion to the buffer rib. .. In this case, the vertical component of the direction of collision of the sphere with the buffer rib can be increased, and damage to the buffer rib can be suppressed.

Since the step portion has a function of damming a ball moving in the left-right direction on the guide surface, it is possible to prevent the ball moving on the guide surface from bouncing back beyond the width of the out opening.

Since the cushioning rib is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game area, a large bounce suppressing effect can be obtained in the vicinity of the center in the width direction of the game area where the flowing balls are likely to concentrate. As a result, the ball can be smoothly discharged from the out port. Further, by matching the curve of the lower side of the game area with the lower surface of the cushioning rib, the arrangement position of the out port can be corrected downward.

Here, the higher the formation height of the cushioning rib, the greater the effect of suppressing the bounce of the sphere because the amount of bending of the cushioning rib increases. That is, the larger the amount of bending of the cushioning rib, the more the cushioning effect works, and it is possible to easily suppress the rebound. Therefore, it is preferable to make the aspect ratio of the cushioning rib constant in the left-right direction (the length in the vertical direction is constant) for the effect of suppressing rebound.

On the other hand, if the aspect ratio of the buffer rib is made constant (the length in the vertical direction is made constant), it is necessary to increase the formation height of the step portion, and the path of the sphere to the step portion is also upward. As a result, the game area is narrowed because it is necessary to arrange the game area in, which is not preferable in terms of space efficiency.

On the other hand, in the game machine E1, the aspect ratio (length in the vertical direction) of the buffer rib is reduced on the outer side in the width direction of the game area where the flowing balls are difficult to concentrate, and the center in the width direction of the game area where the flowing balls are easy to concentrate. In, the aspect ratio (length in the vertical direction) of the buffer rib is increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the ball ejection efficiency and secure the game area at the same time.

Note that the extension in the opening direction is not particularly limited, and means that the extension is in the shape of a linear shape, a corrugation, a chevron, or the like along the opening direction.

In the game machine E1, the guide surface is provided with an outer inclined portion that is inclined downward in the width direction of the game area.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, since the guide surface is provided with an outer inclined portion, the speed of the ball flowing into the guide surface from the outside in the width direction can be reduced by the gravitational acceleration, and the ball can be reduced. The deceleration time can be shortened.

The game machine E3 is characterized in that, in the game machine E1 or E2, a non-flow area in which a ball cannot flow down is formed obliquely above at least one of the first out port and the second out port.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1 or E2, the flow of the ball diagonally downward from the non-flow area toward the guide surface is restricted, so that the flow of the ball to the guide surface is restricted. The number of routes can be reduced. Therefore, the direction in which the flowing ball bounces can be narrowed. As a result, the outer shape of at least one of the first out port and the second out port can be narrowed.

In the game machine E3, the non-flow area is arranged in the game area, and a switchgear that can be opened and closed to the front side is arranged above at least one of the first out port and the second out port. The gaming machine E4, which is formed on the front side of the opening / closing device.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, a non-flow area is formed by the switchgear. As a result, the space created by suppressing the opening size in the direction desired toward the non-flowing region side of the first out port or the second out port can be used as the arrangement space of the switchgear.

Further, in the closed state, the opening / closing device causes the ball flowing down in front of the opening / closing device to flow down the game area, and in the open state, the ball flowing down in front of the opening / closing device moves to the rear of the game area. It has the function of flowing down. Therefore, the formation of the non-flowing region can be surely performed as compared with the case where the sphere flows down irregularly due to collision with a nail or the like.

The game machine E5 is characterized in that any one of the game machines E1 to E4 is provided with a direction adjusting rib extending in a rib shape in the opening direction on the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E4, a direction adjusting rib extending in a rib shape in the opening direction is provided on the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port. , The resistance to the ball flowing down while colliding with the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port can be suppressed.

<Feature F group> (The image when the power is turned on is also used during normal operation)
A display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, a display control means for causing the display means to display the display mode, and a storage means for storing display data corresponding to the display mode displayed by the display control means. The storage means has setting means for reading the display data from the storage means and setting the display data to be displayed on the display means by the display control means, and the storage means executes initial setting of the game. The initial display data corresponding to the initial image to be displayed is stored, and the setting means reads the initial display data from the storage means in the initial setting and sets it as display data to be displayed on the display means. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that, in an effect executed after the completion of the initial setting, the initial display data read in the initial setting is used as display data to be displayed on the display means.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine, various effect images are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. In such a game machine, generally, the image information of the image to be displayed on the display device is stored in the storage means in advance, and when the image is displayed, the corresponding image information is read from the storage means to perform image processing. After applying the image, the display device is configured to display the image (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-223598). However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, as the image information increases, the amount of image data used in the gaming machine increases, and the capacity of the storage means for storing increases and the load due to the reading process and the like increases. There was a problem. Due to such problems, improvement of image display control has been required.

According to the game machine F1, since the initial display data displayed at the time of initial setting is also used for the effect after the initial setting is completed, the display data can be shared, the amount of display data can be reduced, and the image display can be performed. It has the effect of improving control.

In the game machine F1, the display means is composed of a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means, and the display control means is the first display means or the second display means. The setting means reads the initial display data from the storage means in the initial setting and displays the display data on the first display means and the second display means. It is set, and in the effect executed after the initial setting, the initial display data read in the initial setting is set as display data to be displayed on either the first display means or the second display means. A game machine F2 characterized by being something to do.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the display data can be shared for the display means composed of the first display means and the second display means, and the display control can be performed. It has the effect of reducing the load.

In the game machine F2, the game machine F3 is characterized in that the initial display data is set with the display area of the first display means and the second display means as one display area.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F2, the first display means and the second display means can be set as one display data, so that there is an effect that the display control can be simplified.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, a discrimination means for discriminating the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a discrimination result determined by the discrimination means are shown. It has a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information, and the identification information is displayed by the initial identification information displayed in the initial image and the dynamic display after the initial setting is completed. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that it is usually composed of identification information.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F3, the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the initial identification information displayed in the initial image and the normal identification information. Since it is configured, there is an effect that the player can recognize that it is the initial setting.

In the game machine F4, the initial image is a display including a display image including the initial identification information displayed to the first display means and a game information image indicating the game content displayed to the second display means. A game machine F5 characterized in that it is composed of at least an image.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F4, the initial image is composed of an initial identification information displayed on the first display means and a display image including the game information image displayed on the second display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game content and the determination result can be notified to the player at the same time even during the initial setting.

The gaming machine F4 or F5 is characterized in that the initial identification information displayed on the first display means during the initial setting is composed of a smaller amount of data than the normal identification information. F6.

According to the game machine F6, since the initial identification information is composed of display data less than the normal identification information, the control load at the time of initial setting can be reduced and the initial identification information can be read out and displayed quickly. effective.

In any of the game machines F4 to F6, the second display means is configured with a display area smaller than that of the first display means, and when the game is not performed for a predetermined period, the second display means is used. A game machine F7, wherein a display image including the game information image displayed in the initial image is displayed.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F4 to F6, when the game is not performed for a predetermined period, the initial display data is used to display the game information image included in the second display means. Since the image is displayed, there is an effect that the control load can be reduced and the game content can be notified.

In the game machine F7, when the game is not performed for the predetermined period, the display data corresponding to the display image displayed to the first display means among the initial images is set to be hidden. A game machine F8 characterized by being.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F7, since the initial image displayed on the first display means is set to be hidden, there is an effect that different display can be performed on the first display means. is there.

In any of the game machines F2 to F8, when the setting means sets the initial display data read in the initial setting for the first display means in the effect executed after the initial setting, When the display data corresponding to the second display means is set to be hidden and the display data corresponding to the first display means is set to be hidden, the display data corresponding to the first display means is set to be hidden. A game machine F9 characterized by.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F2 to F8, the first display means and the second display means can independently display using the initial display data. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine F9, when the setting means sets the initial display data read in the initial setting for the first display means in the effect executed after the initial setting, it is said that the initial setting is in progress. A game machine F10 characterized in that it is set to be displayed at a different display position.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect of the game machine F9, it is possible to make the player look as if the display is different from the display displayed by the initial setting, and the initial display data can be used in a wide variety of ways. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Characteristic G group> (The position of ○ × changes depending on the fluctuation content between the shutter and the main liquid crystal)
The first display means capable of displaying the identification information, the second display means different from the first display means, and the identification information displayed on the first display means or the second display means are dynamically displayed. The dynamic display means to be displayed, the privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the specific identification information is displayed on the first display means or the second display means, and the dynamic. The gaming machine G1 is characterized by having a switching display means for switching and displaying the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means to either the first display means or the second display means.

Here, for example, by providing a plurality of display means for producing a game machine and performing a variable effect or a jackpot effect with each display means, a player can perform a synergistic effect using the plurality of display means. A game machine for the purpose of improving the interest of the above is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-081256). However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, improvement of convenience by using a plurality of display devices has been required. Due to such problems, improvement in convenience has been required.

According to the game machine G1, the effect (dynamic display of identification information) displayed on the first display means or the second display means is either the first display means or the second display means by the switching display means. It can be switched and displayed. As a result, the identification information can be displayed at a position that is easy for the player to see according to the state of the game, which has the effect of improving convenience.

In the game machine G1, a first driving means that can be driven to a first position that makes it difficult to visually display the identification information that is dynamically displayed on the first display means, and a dynamic display on the second display means. The switching display means has a second driving means that can be driven to a second position that makes it difficult to visually recognize the identification information, and the switching display means is a case where the first driving means is the first position. The identification information is displayed on the second display means, and when the second driving means is in the second position, the identification information is displayed on the first display means. A game machine G2 characterized by this.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, there is an effect that the first driving means and the second driving means can suppress a problem that the visibility of the identification information is hindered.

In the game machine G1 or G2, the second display means has a moving means capable of moving the front side of the first display means, and the switching display means has the second display means moved by the moving means. In this case, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the identification information is switched so as to be displayed on the second display means.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G1 or G2, there is an effect that the second display means can suppress a problem that the visibility of the identification information is hindered.

In any of the game machines G1 to G3, the display data of the display mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means is the display data displayed in one display area as the first display means. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that it is composed of synthetic display data corresponding to the second display means.

According to the game machine G4, in any of the game machines G1 to G3, the display data of the first display means and the second display means can be set as the composite display data, so that the control load can be reduced. is there.

In the game machine G4, coordinate information for setting each display area of the first display means and the second display means as one display area is set, and the composite display data is the composite display data. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that it is composed of display data displayed for each coordinate corresponding to the coordinate information.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G4, there is an effect that the display data to be displayed on the first display means and the second display means can be easily set.

<Characteristic H group> (fall control)
The first in a gaming machine having a movable member having at least movable movable portions at the first position and the second position, and a driving means for driving the movable member to the third position and the fourth position. The movable from the third position to the fourth position in a state where the regulation means for restricting the movement from the position to the second position and the regulation by the regulating means are released based on the establishment of the first condition. The member is driven by the driving means, and based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, the movable member is driven from the third position to the fourth position in a state regulated by the regulating means. The gaming machine H1 is characterized by having a drive control means driven by means.

Here, for example, by moving a movable accessory provided in the game machine, a suggestion of the degree of expectation that will be a big hit is made. In such a game machine, a game machine that improves the interest of the player by increasing the movable pattern of the movable accessory has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-079687). In this case, it is necessary to use a large number of drive devices (for example, a motor) in order to increase the movable pattern of the movable accessory, and there is a problem that the power consumption increases. Due to such problems, it has been required to reduce power consumption.

According to the game machine H1, by driving the driving means, the movable part can be moved by the driving vibration or the like, so that the power consumption is increased as compared with the case where the moving part is moved electrically or the like. It has the effect of suppressing.

The game machine H1 is characterized by having a movable means for moving the movable portion from the second position to the first position.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the movable member is driven to the fourth position by the driving means, so that even when the movable portion is moved to the second position, the movable means is used for the second position. It has the effect of being able to return to one position. In this case, the movable portion may be moved to the first position by the inertial force (acceleration) for driving the movable member from the fourth position to the third position without providing the movable means.

In the game machine H1 or H2, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player and an effect indicating whether or not the privilege is given by the privilege giving means are predetermined. The drive control means has an effect executing means that executes the effect during the effect period, and the drive control means moves the movable member to the third position when the movable condition is satisfied during the period when the effect is executed by the effect execution means. It is driven to the fourth position from the above, and when the effect indicating that the privilege is given by the privilege giving means is executed, it is easy to drive in a state where the regulation by the regulating means is released. A game machine H3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1 or H2, in the production where the privilege is easily given, the movable member is easily driven to the fourth position in the state where the regulation is released, so that the movable part is the second. There is an effect that the player can be expected to be given a privilege when moving to a position.

In any of the game machines H1 to H3, the drive control means is characterized in that the movable member is moved by the same operation in a state where the regulation by the regulation means is released and a state where the regulation is regulated. Game machine H4.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H3, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the determination of whether or not the movable member is regulated by the difference in the driving operation. Here, the operation is a difference in speed, a difference in drive pattern, a difference in drive direction, and the like.

In any of the game machines H1 to H4, the drive control means is a position between the third position and the fourth position when the movable member is driven from the third position to the fourth position. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that it is temporarily stopped at an intermediate position for a predetermined period.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H4, by temporarily stopping the movable part, the movable part can be easily moved to the second position by inertial force or the like when not excited. There is.

In any of the game machines H1 to H5, the fourth position is configured at a position lower than the third position, and the driving means reciprocates between the third position and the fourth position. A game machine H6 characterized in that it is configured to be possible.

According to the game machine H6, in any of the effects of the game machines H1 to H5, there is an effect that the movable portion can be easily moved by the descending gravity.

In any of the game machines H1 to H6, the movable means is composed of a stepping motor, and the regulating means is for energizing the stepping motor in a stopped state.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of the game machines H1 to H6, the movable means and the regulating means can be configured by the stepping motor, and there is an effect that the configuration can be simplified.

<Feature I group> (Avoid executing similar effects)
The specific period is set by the effect executing means capable of executing the effect, the specific period setting means for setting the specific period during which the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means, and the specific period setting means. When the effect of the above is executed, the effect is provided with a specific condition determining means for determining whether or not a specific condition that can be executed is satisfied depending on the execution period of the effect, and the effect executing means is based on the specific condition determining means. The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied.

Here, for example, when a certain time has passed since the power of the game machine was turned on, the process is shifted to a specific effect different from the normal general effect, and the periodic effect that is periodically executed is displayed. A game machine aimed at improving the interest of a player has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252534). In this case, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not the periodic effect is executed when the effect accompanied by the sound or image similar to the periodic effect is executed in the periodic effect that is executed periodically. There was a problem that the player was confused. Due to such problems, a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand has been required.

According to the game machine I1, since it is determined whether or not the specific effect can be executed before the execution, the player can be suppressed from being confused due to a defect in the execution timing of the effect, and the player can easily understand the game. It has the effect of being able to make it.

The game machine I1 has a time measuring means capable of measuring time information, and the specific period setting means starts the specific period based on the time of the predetermined time information by the time measuring means. A game machine I2 characterized in that it is at least set.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the start of a specific period is set based on the timekeeping of predetermined timekeeping information, so that the specific period is set at the same time for other game machines. It has the effect of being easy to configure.

In the game machine I1 or I2, the effect executing means executes a normal effect other than the specific effect during the specific period, and the specific condition determining means is based on the executed normal effect. A game machine I3 characterized in that it determines whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine I1 or I2, the establishment of a specific condition is determined based on the normal effect, so that the specific effect is determined in consideration of the relationship between the specific effect and the normal effect. It has the effect of being able to be executed.

The game machine I3 has an operation means that can be operated by the player and a detection means that detects that the operation means has been operated, and the specific effect and at least one of the normal effects include the specific effect. The specific condition includes an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means, and the specific condition is satisfied when the operation effect of the specific effect and the normal effect are not synchronized. Game machine I4 to play.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I3, it is possible to suppress a problem that a specific effect and an operation effect of a normal effect are executed at the same time, so that it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand. effective.

In any of the game machines I1 to I4, a dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information based on the establishment of a start condition, and the specific identification to which a privilege advantageous to the player is given. It has a special game state setting means for setting a special game state which is a game state in which information is easily displayed, and the specific effect includes a suggestion effect indicating whether or not the special game state is set. A game machine I5 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines I1 to I4, it is possible to recognize that the special game state is set by a specific effect, and to make the specific effect interesting. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the game machines I2 to I5, the specific period setting means sets the specific period for a predetermined period each time a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on, and the effect The execution means executes the specific effect when the specific condition is satisfied for each predetermined period based on the setting of the specific period, and the specific condition determining means executes the specific condition. The gaming machine I6 is characterized by having a delay means for delaying the specific effect and executing the specific effect by the effect executing means when it is determined that is not satisfied.

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I2 to I5, even if a specific condition is not satisfied, a specific effect is executed with a delay, which causes confusion for the player. It has the effect of being able to suppress.

<Characteristic J group> (0.125 seconds production)
An information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a storage means based on the establishment of a start condition. When the discriminating means for discriminating the stored information, the display means for displaying the discriminating result indicating the discriminating result determined by the discriminating means, and the discriminating information indicating the specific discriminating result are displayed on the display means. , Before the establishment of the start condition, based on the privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player, the effect mode output means for outputting a predetermined effect, and the information acquired by the information acquisition means. It also has a pre-determination means for discriminating the acquired information and an effect execution means for executing an effect output based on the determination result of the pre-determination means to the effect mode output means. A plurality of output areas in which the output of the effect is set are set in the output means, and the effect executing means outputs the effect first when executing a new output of the effect. The gaming machine J1 is characterized in that the output of the new effect is executed for the output region different from the above.

Here, for example, in a pachinko machine, when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port and the number of reserved memories increases, the random number information on hold is determined in advance (look-ahead), and the determination result is a predetermined result (big hit). A gaming machine is known for the purpose of increasing the player's expectation as to whether or not the variable display corresponding to the hold becomes a big hit by executing an effect suggesting that the situation is (such as). For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-16499). In such a game machine, if the efficiency of the game is improved by setting the fluctuation time to a short time, the production period such as the lottery result is shortened, which makes it difficult for the player to understand. In response to this problem, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand even when the fluctuation time is shortened.

According to the game machine J1, a plurality of output areas for outputting an effect (an effect suggesting a hold determination result) based on the determination result of the prior determination means are set, and the plurality of output areas are first output. The next effect is output in an output area different from the output area where the effect was output. As a result, even if a new determination result of the pre-determination means is acquired during the execution of the effect, the effect based on the determination result of the pre-determination means is displayed in a different output area to display the effect being executed. It is possible to execute an effect based on the discrimination result of the new pre-discrimination means without ending. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is confused.

In the game machine J1, a predetermined order is set in the plurality of output areas, and the effect executing means is next to the output area for which the effect is output first when the new effect is executed. The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the output of the new effect is executed for the output area in the order corresponding to.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J1, the effects are output in order according to the order set in the output area, so that there is a problem that the output areas of the latest effect and the new effect overlap. It has the effect of being able to suppress it.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the effect mode output means is composed of display means for displaying a predetermined display mode, which is the predetermined effect, and the display area of the display means is divided into a plurality of small areas as the output area. A game machine J3 characterized in that an area is set.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J1 or J2, the following effects are played. That is, a plurality of effects can be displayed at the same time by effectively using the display area. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect period can be set longer.

In the game machine J2 or 3, the storage means is configured to be able to store the information up to a predetermined number predetermined, and the information acquisition means is stored in the storage means when the acquisition condition is satisfied. If the information is less than the predetermined number, the information is acquired, and the effect executing means first obtains the information even when the acquisition condition is satisfied and the information is not acquired by the information acquisition means. The gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the output of the effect is executed for the output area corresponding to the next order of the output area.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J2 or J3, there is an effect that the player can be made to think that more information has been acquired.

In the game machine J3 or J4, when the information is acquired by the acquisition means, the effect content to be executed by the effect execution means is determined based on the determination result of the information by the prior determination means. When the acquisition condition is satisfied and the information is not acquired by the information acquisition means, the effect content determination for determining the effect content to be executed by the effect execution means based on the determination result other than the specific determination result. A game machine J5 characterized by having means.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J3, there is an effect that the player can be made to play the game as if the information was acquired.

In the game machine J5, the effect content determining means determines the effect period together with the effect content, and the determined effect period elapses in the output area where the output of the effect is executed by the effect execution means. The gaming machine J6 is characterized in that it has a termination means for forcibly ending the effect being executed when the effect that has not been performed is being executed.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J5, it is possible to suppress a problem that different effects are output in the same output area, and it is possible to provide the game to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the game machine J5, the effect content determining means determines the effect period together with the effect content, and the effect execution means determines the effect period in the output area for executing the output of the newly determined effect. The gaming machine J7 is characterized in that, when the effect for which has not passed has been executed, the effect being executed is overwritten and the newly determined effect is executed.

According to the game machine J7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J5, it is possible to suppress a problem that different effects are output in the same output area, and it is possible to provide the game to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Characteristic K group> (Operates a combination of accessories under one operating condition)
A first movable means that can move in the first movable range, a second movable means that can move in the second movable range, which is different from the first movable means, and a first movable means with respect to the first movable means. The operation of the first movable setting means for setting a pattern, the second movable setting means for setting a second movable pattern for the second movable means, and the first movable means which is movable according to the first movable pattern. And, when the operating condition corresponding to the operation of the second movable means that is movable by the second movable pattern is not satisfied, the first or second movable pattern is set so that the operating condition is satisfied. A determination means for determining correction data for correcting at least one of them, and a correction means for correcting at least one of the first or second movable patterns based on the correction data determined by the determination means. The game machine K1 characterized by being equipped with.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member that can be changed by a motor or the like in the configuration. Some of such game machines can perform a wide variety of effect operations by varying a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194). However, in the conventional game machine described above, when the number of variable members is increased, there is a possibility that it becomes difficult to set the operation appropriately. Further, among the above-mentioned game machines, there are those that combine and change a plurality of variable members in one effect, and there are those that can execute a wider variety of effect operations. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when a plurality of variable members are combined and varied, the variable modes may deviate from each other and the operation quality may deteriorate.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, the first movable means is moved in the first movable range, and the second movable means different from the first movable means is moved in the second movable range. A first movable pattern is set by the first movable setting means for the first movable means, and a second movable pattern is set by the second movable setting means for the second movable means. The operating condition is satisfied when the operating conditions corresponding to the operation of the first movable means movable by the first movable pattern and the operation of the second movable means movable by the second movable pattern are not satisfied. In addition, correction data for correcting at least one of the first or second movable patterns is determined by the determination means. Based on the correction data determined by the determination means, at least one of the first or second movable patterns is corrected by the correction means.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of an operation contrary to the operating conditions, so that there is an effect that the first movable means and the second movable means can be suitably moved.

The game machine K1 is provided with an effect executing means for executing a predetermined movable effect, and the first movable means and the second movable means are characterized in that they are movable at least in the predetermined movable effect. Game machine K2 to play.

According to the game machine K2, a predetermined movable effect is executed by the effect executing means. Further, the first movable means and the second movable means are moved at least in a predetermined movable effect.

As a result, the first movable means and the second movable means, which are moved in the predetermined movable effect, can be operated according to the operating conditions. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress that an operation contrary to the operating conditions is performed in the predetermined movable effect, it is possible to improve the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means in the predetermined movable effect. There is.

In the game machine K1 or K2, the second movable means is configured to be attached to the first movable means, and is movable together with the first movable means.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effect of the game machine K1 or K2, the second movable means is configured to be attached to the first movable means and is moved together with the first movable means. There is an effect that an operation having a sense of unity can be performed with the operation of the second movable means.

In any of the game machines K1 to K3, the storage means in which a plurality of different correction data determined by the determination means are stored, and the first movable means and the second movable means when the operation conditions are not satisfied. An information discriminating means for discriminating information necessary for establishing the operating condition based on each movable position with the movable means is provided, and the determining means is based on the information discriminated by the information discriminating means. , The gaming machine K4, characterized in that the correction data is determined from the storage means.

According to the game machine K4, in any of the game machines K1 to K3, a plurality of different correction data determined by the determination means are stored in the storage means. When the operating condition is not satisfied, the information necessary for establishing the operating condition is determined by the information discrimination means based on the movable positions of the first movable means and the second movable means, and the information discrimination is performed. Based on the information determined by the means, the correction data is determined from the storage means by the determination means.

As a result, when the operating conditions are not satisfied, the movable pattern can be corrected by a process having a relatively light processing load of determining the correction data from the storage means, so that the processing load can be reduced. There is.

In any of the game machines K1 to K4, the correction means corrects the movable pattern of the second movable means so that the operation is such that the operating condition is satisfied when the operating condition is not satisfied. A game machine K5 characterized in that it determines data.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines K1 to K4, the following effects are played. That is, when the operating condition is not satisfied, the correction data for correcting the movable pattern of the second movable means is determined by the determining means so that the operation satisfies the operating condition. Therefore, the second movable means is corrected. There is an effect that the operation quality can be improved without any problem.

The game machine K5 includes a period setting means for setting an on-time period for confirming the operation contents of the first movable setting means and the second movable setting means based on the power-on of the game machine, and the determination means. Determines the correction data for correcting the second movable pattern so that the operating condition is satisfied when the operating condition is not satisfied in the closing period, and the correction means is the correction means. The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that it corrects a movable pattern set after the closing period ends based on the correction data determined by the determining means.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effects of the game machine K5, the following effects are produced. That is, the closing period for confirming the operation contents of the first movable setting means and the second movable setting means is set by the period setting means based on the power-on of the game machine, and the operating conditions are satisfied in the turning period. If not, the correction data for correcting the second movable pattern is determined by the determining means so that the operating condition is satisfied. Based on the determined correction data, the movable pattern set after the closing period ends is corrected by the correction means.

As a result, after the closing period is completed, it is possible to set the movable pattern corrected so that the operating conditions are satisfied. That is, there is an effect that the first movable means and the second movable means can be moved in a state where the operating conditions are satisfied during most of the time when the game machine is operating.
<Characteristic L group> (Match the movement of one accessory to the other)
A first movable means that can move in the first movable range, a second movable means that can move in the second movable range and is different from the first movable means, and the first movable means and the second movable means. In a gaming machine provided with a movable control means for moving the first movable means based on predetermined movable data, a first movable data corresponding to a predetermined first movable pattern is set for the first movable means. 1 Movable setting means, a determination means for determining movable data of the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means which is movable in the first movable pattern based on the set first movable data, and a determination means thereof. The gaming machine L1 is provided with a second movable setting means for setting the second movable means to be movable by the movable control means with movable data determined by the determining means.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member that can be changed by a motor or the like in the configuration. Some of such game machines can perform a wide variety of effect operations by varying a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194). However, in the conventional game machine described above, when the number of variable members is increased, there is a possibility that it becomes difficult to set the operation appropriately. Further, among the above-mentioned game machines, there are those that combine and change a plurality of variable members in one effect, and there are those that can execute a wider variety of effect operations. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when a plurality of variable members are combined and varied, the variable modes may deviate from each other and the operation quality may deteriorate.

On the other hand, according to the game machine L1, the first movable data corresponding to the first movable pattern predetermined for the first movable means is set by the first movable setting means. Based on the set first movable data, the movable data of the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means that moves in the first movable pattern is determined by the determining means. The second movable setting means is set so that the second movable means can be moved by the movable control means with the movable data determined by the determining means.

As a result, the second movable means can be moved by an operation corresponding to the operation of the first movable means, so that there is an effect that the first movable means and the second movable means can be suitably moved.

The game machine L1 is provided with an effect executing means for executing a predetermined movable effect, and the first movable means and the second movable means are characterized in that they are movable at least in the predetermined movable effect. Game machine L2 to play.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L1, the following effects are played. That is, a predetermined movable effect is executed by the effect executing means. Then, the first movable means and the second movable means are moved at least in a predetermined movable effect.

As a result, the second movable means can be moved by an operation corresponding to the operation of the first movable means in a predetermined movable effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be improved in a predetermined movable effect.

In the game machine L1 or L2, the second movable means is configured to be attached to the first movable means and is movable together with the first movable means. ..

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effect of the game machine L1 or L2, the second movable means is configured to be attached to the first movable means and is moved together with the first movable means. There is an effect that an operation having a sense of unity can be performed with the operation of the second movable means.

In any of the game machines L1 to L3, the determination means is moved by the first movable pattern based on the end of the operation of the first movable means that is movable by the first movable pattern. The gaming machine L4 is characterized in that it determines the movable data of the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines L1 to L3, it is movable in the first movable pattern based on the end of the operation of the first movable means that is movable in the first movable pattern. Since the movable data of the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means is determined by the determining means, it is possible to determine the movable data in consideration of the operation of the series of first movable patterns. Therefore, since the second movable means can be operated in a manner more suitable for the operation of the first movable means, there is an effect that the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be further improved.

The game machine L4 includes a period setting means for setting an initial setting period for performing initial setting based on power-on of the game machine, and the first movable setting means is based on the setting of the initial setting period. The gaming machine L5, characterized in that the first movable data is set.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L4, the following effects are played. That is, the initial setting period for performing the initial setting based on the power-on of the game machine is set by the period setting means. Then, the first movable data is set by the first movable setting means based on the initial setting period being set.

As a result, it is possible to determine the movable data corresponding to the operation of the first movable means that has been moved by the first movable pattern in the initial setting period. Therefore, after the end of the initial setting period, the second movable means is set to the first. There is an effect that it can be moved by an operation corresponding to the movable means.

In the game machine L5, when it is determined that the first movable means is to be moved after the end of the initial setting period, and the movable determining means determines whether or not to move the first movable means. A specific movable setting means for setting specific movable data corresponding to a predetermined specific movable pattern, and the determination means is the second movable for setting an operation corresponding to the specific movable pattern. The gaming machine L6, characterized in that it determines the movable data of the means.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L5, the following effects are played. That is, when it is determined by the movable determination means whether or not to move the first movable means after the end of the initial setting period, and it is determined that the first movable means is to be moved by the movable determining means, a predetermined specification is made. The specific movable data corresponding to the movable pattern of is set by the specific movable setting means. The movable data of the second movable means for setting the operation corresponding to a specific movable pattern is determined by the determining means.

As a result, since the second movable means can be moved by the movement corresponding to the specific movable pattern, there is an effect that the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be improved.

In any of the game machines L1 to L6, the determination means has at least a timing at which the operation of the first movable means for which the first movable pattern is set ends and a timing at which the operation of the second movable means ends. The gaming machine L7 is characterized in that the movable data is determined so as to match.

According to the game machine L7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines L1 to L6, at least the timing at which the operation of the first movable means for which the first movable pattern is set ends and the operation of the second movable means end. Since the movable data is determined by the determining means so as to match the timing of the movement, the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means is determined at the operation end timing, which is one of the timings that the player pays the most attention to. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In any of the game machines L1 to L3, the movable amount of the first movable means that is movable in the first movable pattern according to the set first movable data is set to a predetermined movable amount. Based on this, the gaming machine L8 is characterized in that the operation of the first movable means is determined.

According to the game machine L8, in addition to the effects of the game machines L1 to L3, the movable amount of the first movable means that moves in the first movable pattern according to the set first movable data becomes a predetermined movable amount. Since the operation of the first movable means is determined by the operation determining means based on the above, there is an effect that the operation of the second movable means can be made to correspond to the operation of the first movable means in more detail.

In the game machine L8, the determination means is movable of the second movable means corresponding to the operation from the movable amount of the first movable means to the end of the first movable pattern. A game machine L9 characterized in that it determines data.

According to the game machine L9, in addition to the effect of the game machine L8, the second movable means corresponding to the operation from the movable amount of the first movable means to the end of the first movable pattern. Since the movable data of the above is determined by the determining means, the operation of the second movable means after the predetermined movable amount can be set as the operation corresponding to the operation of the first movable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be improved.

In the game machine L10, based on the fact that the first movable data is set by the first movable setting means, the second movable data corresponding to the second movable pattern predetermined for the second movable means. The game machine L11 is provided with a movable setting means for setting.

According to the game machine L11, in addition to the effect of the game machine L10, the second movable means predetermined with respect to the second movable means based on the fact that the first movable data is set by the first movable setting means. Since the second movable data corresponding to the pattern is set by the movable setting means, the second movable means is operated in the second movable pattern even before the movable amount of the first movable means reaches a predetermined movable amount. be able to. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the second movable means from being stopped until the amount reaches a predetermined amount, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Characteristic M group> (LED lighting control for accessories)
A movable means having a plurality of visible portions which are movable within a predetermined movable range and whose light emitting mode from the back side can be visually recognized from the front side, and a movable means provided on the back side of the movable means and the back side of the movable means. A light emitting means having a light emitting unit capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emitting mode, a movable control means capable of movablely controlling the movable means, and a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern movable by the movable control means. When the specific movable pattern is determined by the determinable movable pattern determining means and the movable pattern determining means, the movable portion is placed at a light emitting position where the visible portion faces the light emitting portion of the light emitting means. It is characterized by including a light emitting control means capable of controlling light emission at least in a specific light emitting pattern in which the light emitting unit is made to emit light when it is positioned and the movable means is turned off when it is moved by a predetermined amount from the light emitting position. Game machine M1.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include variable means operated by a motor or the like in the configuration. Some of such game machines can execute a wide variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, with the diversification of the variable means, there is a possibility that it becomes difficult to appropriately move each variable means in the variable means having a complicated configuration. Further, among the conventional game machines described above, there is one that changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting device composed of LEDs or the like according to the movement of the variable means. In such a game machine, it is possible to execute a more impactful effect operation by causing the light emitting device to emit light in accordance with the operation of the variable means. However, in this conventional game machine, the operation of the variable means and the light emitting mode of the light emitting device may deviate from each other. In such a case, there is a possibility that the appearance quality of the effect operation is deteriorated.

On the other hand, in the game machine M1, the movable means is moved within a predetermined movable range. The movable means is configured to have a plurality of visual recognition portions configured so that the light emitting mode from the back surface side can be visually recognized from the front surface. On the back side of the movable means, a light emitting means having a light emitting portion capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emitting mode is provided. The movable means is movably controlled by the movable control means, and at least a specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining means as the movable pattern to be moved by the movable control means. When the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining means, the light emitting portion is made to emit light when the movable portion is positioned at the light emitting position where the visual recognition portion opposes the light emitting portion of the light emitting means, and the movable means emits light. The light emission is controlled by at least the light emission control means in a specific light emission pattern that emits light when it is moved by a predetermined amount from the light emission position.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the light emitting unit from emitting light when the visual recognition unit and the light emitting unit are displaced from each other, so that the appearance quality of the movable means can be improved when the light emitting means emits light. Therefore, there is an effect that the light emitting means and the movable means can be suitably operated.

In the game machine M1, the movable means is composed of a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effect of the game machine M2, since the movable means is composed of a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis, the light emitting position is generated while the movable means is rotating. And the arrangement other than the light emitting position are repeated alternately. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be operated with a good appearance each time at a light emitting position where it may be arranged a plurality of times.

In the game machine M1 or M2, the movable pattern determining means can determine one movable pattern from a plurality of movable patterns including at least the specific movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern as the movable pattern. The game machine is characterized in that, when the predetermined movable pattern is determined, the light emitting control means controls the light emitting means with a predetermined light emitting pattern different from the specific light emitting pattern. M3.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine M1 or M2, the following effects are played. That is, in the movable pattern determining means, one movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining means from a plurality of movable patterns including at least a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern. When the predetermined movable pattern is determined, the light emitting means is controlled to emit light by the light emitting control means in a predetermined light emitting pattern different from the specific light emitting pattern.

As a result, it is possible to control light emission with different light emission patterns according to the movable pattern, so that the appearance of the movable means can be further changed according to the light emission pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily determine from the appearance which movable pattern is being moved.

In the game machine M3, the game machine M4 is characterized in that the predetermined movable pattern is set to have a moving speed faster than the specific movable pattern.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effect of the game machine M3, the predetermined movable pattern is set to have a movable speed faster than the specific movable pattern, so that the movable pattern of the movable means can be easily discriminated from the movable speed. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine M3 or M4, the predetermined light emitting pattern is a light emitting pattern that causes the light emitting means to emit light even when the movable means is located at a position other than the light emitting position.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effect of the game machine M3 or M4, if the light emission is controlled by a predetermined light emission pattern, the light emitting means is emitted even when the movable means is located at a position other than the light emitting position. There is an effect that the player can more easily recognize the difference in the light emitting mode of the light emitting means between the specific light emitting pattern and the predetermined light emitting pattern.

In any of the game machines M1 to M5, the movable means is composed of a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis, and the visual recognition unit is on a predetermined circumference centered on the predetermined rotation axis. The movable means is provided at a plurality of locations at equal intervals, the movable means has rotational symmetry according to the number of locations of the visual recognition portion, and the light emitting portion is the same as the number of locations of the visual recognition portion. A game machine M6 characterized in that the number of locations is provided.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines M2 to M5, the following effects are produced. That is, the movable means is composed of a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis. The visual recognition portions are provided at a plurality of locations at equal intervals on a predetermined circumference centered on a predetermined rotation axis. Further, the movable means has rotational symmetry according to the number of visible parts. The number of light emitting units is the same as the number of visible units.

As a result, when the variable means is rotating, the light emitting position is set at each constant rotation angle, so that it is possible to improve the appearance quality before and after the constant rotation angle in the specific movable pattern.

In the game machine M6, as the specific light emitting pattern, each time the rotating body reaches the light emitting position, the light emitting control means has a number of points equal to or more than the number of the light emitting portions that were emitted when the rotating body reached the light emitting position last time. The gaming machine M7 is characterized in that it controls the number of light emitting units so as to emit light.

According to the game machine M7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine M6, the following effects are played. That is, as a specific light emitting pattern, every time the rotating body reaches the light emitting position, the light emitting control means emits light so that the number of light emitting parts equal to or greater than the number of light emitting parts that were emitted when the rotating body reached the light emitting position last time. Is controlled by.

This has the effect of making it easier to recognize that the movable pattern or the light emitting pattern has been switched according to the change in appearance.

In any of the game machines M3 to M7, the movable pattern determined by the movable pattern determining means includes a high-speed movable pattern in which the movable speed is set to be faster than the predetermined movable pattern, and the light emitting control means includes the light emitting control means. The gaming machine M6 is characterized in that, when shifting from the predetermined movable pattern to the high-speed movable pattern, the light emitting unit is controlled to emit light at each predetermined cycle.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines M3 to M7, the following effects are played. That is, the movable pattern determined by the movable pattern determining means includes a high-speed movable pattern in which the movable speed is set faster than the predetermined movable pattern. When shifting from a predetermined movable pattern to a high-speed movable pattern, the light emitting means controls the light emitting unit to emit light at predetermined intervals.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily recognize that the high-speed movable pattern is formed by the cycle in which the light emitting unit emits light.

In the game machine M6, the predetermined cycle is shorter than the cycle in which the movable means in which the high-speed movable pattern is set becomes the light emitting position, and is in the period from the light emitting position to the next moving to the light emitting position. A game machine M7 characterized in that it takes longer than the time to reach a point.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effect of the game machine M7, the predetermined cycle is shorter than the cycle in which the movable means in which the high-speed movable pattern is set becomes the light emitting position, and moves from the light emitting position to the next light emitting position. Since it is configured to be longer than the time required to reach the midpoint between The angle at which the visible portion adjacent to the opposite side of the direction is arranged by rotation during a predetermined cycle is smaller. That is, the visual recognition unit adjacent to the rotation direction opposite to the rotation direction at each predetermined cycle can be mistaken for the visual recognition portion recognized before the predetermined cycle elapses, so that the rotation direction of the movable means is different from the appearance of reverse rotation. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make the appearance that the rotation direction is changed without changing the operation of the variable means, so that there is an effect that the load of the variable means can be reduced.

In the game machine M7, the game machine M8 is characterized in that the light emitting control means causes the light emitting means to emit light in a third light emitting pattern in which each of the light emitting units emits light in a predetermined order.

According to the game machine M8, in addition to the effect of the game machine M7, the following effects are played. That is, since the light emitting means emits light by the light emitting control means in the third light emitting pattern in which each light emitting unit emits light in a predetermined order, it is possible to emit light in a more interesting manner. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K6, L1 to L11, A game machine Z1 in any one of M1 to M8, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K6, L1 to L11, In any of M1 to M8, the gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K6, L1 to L11, In any one of M1 to M8, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include variable means operated by a motor or the like in the configuration. Among such game machines, there is one that can execute a wide variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable means (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, with the diversification of the variable means, there is a possibility that it becomes difficult to appropriately move each variable means in the variable means having a complicated configuration.
The technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably setting the operation of the variable means.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is movable within a predetermined movable range, and has a movable means having a plurality of visual recognition portions configured so that the light emitting mode from the back side can be visually recognized from the front side. A light emitting means provided on the back side of the movable means and having a light emitting unit capable of emitting light from the back side of the movable means in a predetermined light emitting mode, and a movable control means capable of movablely controlling the movable means. A movable pattern determining means capable of at least determining a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern to be moved by the movable control means, and when the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining means, the visual recognition unit of the light emitting means With a specific light emitting pattern, the light emitting part is made to emit light when the movable part is positioned at a light emitting position which is a position facing the light emitting part, and is turned off when the movable means is moved by a predetermined amount from the light emitting position. It includes at least a light emission control means capable of controlling light emission.
The game machine of the technical idea 2 is the game machine described in the technical idea 1, and the movable means is composed of a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the movable pattern determining means has the specific movable pattern as the movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern. It is possible to determine one movable pattern from a plurality of movable patterns including at least, and when the predetermined movable pattern is determined, the light emitting control means emits light in a predetermined light emitting pattern different from the specific light emitting pattern. The means is controlled to emit light.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the movable means is moved within a predetermined movable range. The movable means is configured to have a plurality of visual recognition portions configured so that the light emitting mode from the back surface side can be visually recognized from the front surface. On the back side of the movable means, a light emitting means having a light emitting portion capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emitting mode is provided. The movable means is movably controlled by the movable control means, and at least a specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining means as the movable pattern to be moved by the movable control means. When the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining means, the light emitting portion is made to emit light when the movable portion is positioned at the light emitting position where the visual recognition portion opposes the light emitting portion of the light emitting means, and the movable means emits light. Light emission is controlled by at least a light emission control means in a specific light emission pattern that emits light when a predetermined amount is moved from the light emission position.
As a result, it is possible to suppress the light emitting unit from emitting light when the visual recognition unit and the light emitting unit are displaced from each other, so that the appearance quality of the movable means can be improved when the light emitting means emits light. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the light emitting means and the movable means can be preferably set.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 1, the movable means is composed of a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis. While the is rotating, the light emitting position and the arrangement other than the light emitting position are alternately repeated. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be operated with a good appearance each time at a light emitting position where it may be arranged a plurality of times.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has the following effects. That is, in the movable pattern determining means, one movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining means from a plurality of movable patterns including at least a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern. When the predetermined movable pattern is determined, the light emitting means is controlled to emit light by the light emitting control means in a predetermined light emitting pattern different from the specific light emitting pattern.
As a result, it is possible to control light emission with different light emission patterns according to the movable pattern, so that the appearance of the movable means can be further changed according to the light emission pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily determine which movable pattern is used for movement.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
113 Audio lamp control device (part of production execution means)

Claims (3)

A movable means that is movable within a predetermined movable range and has a plurality of visible parts that are configured so that the light emitting mode from the back side can be seen from the front side.
A light emitting means provided on the back side of the movable means and having a light emitting unit capable of emitting light from the back side of the movable means in a predetermined light emitting mode.
A movable control means capable of movablely controlling the movable means,
A movable pattern determining means capable of at least determining a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern to be moved by the movable control means,
When the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining means, the light emitting unit is triggered by the position of the movable unit at a light emitting position where the visual recognition unit faces the light emitting unit of the light emitting means. The gaming machine is provided with a light emission control means capable of controlling light emission at least in a specific light emission pattern that causes the movable means to emit light when the movable means is moved by a predetermined amount from the light emission position. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the movable means is composed of a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis. The movable pattern determining means can determine one movable pattern from a plurality of movable patterns including at least the specific movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern as the movable pattern.
The first or second aspect of the present invention, wherein the light emitting control means controls the light emitting means with a predetermined light emitting pattern different from the specific light emitting pattern when the predetermined movable pattern is determined. Gaming machine.

Images